JP6940883B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

Conventionally, a game machine is provided with various boards including a game control board and an effect control board in order to arrange a display device capable of variablely displaying a plurality of symbols and perform processing necessary for controlling pachinko games.
Of the various boards that make up the game machine, the effect control board controls the image display on the display device that the player pays the most attention to when playing a game. The effect control board (sub-board) determines the effect content (drawing content) for the game state at that time based on the instruction from the game control board (main board), and performs the effect (see Patent Document 1).
The game control board and the effect control board each constitute a control device (control means), and these are a game control device (game control means) and an effect control device (effect control means).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2005-13477

By the way, in order to cope with the display production amount that tends to increase year by year, the development of an efficient gaming machine is required.

Therefore, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of efficiently developing diversified effects.

The invention according to claim 1
The game can be executed based on the establishment of the start condition, and the control means capable of executing the effect related to the game by the effect means is provided.
The control means
A plurality of structures in which a plurality of lottery tables used for the lottery of the production are arranged corresponding to the parameters related to the specifications of the game are stored.
A plurality of said structure is equal to the size of the array direction of the drawing table by data that is not used for drawing of the effect also to sections of which does not occur the parameter of the effect the corresponding is defined death,
The data that is not used in the lottery of the effect is a gaming machine characterized in that the random numbers used in the lottery of the effect are defined by a value equal to or less than the number of possible values.

According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of efficiently developing diversified effects.

It is a front side perspective view of a pachinko machine. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a back view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the control system of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram of a game control device. It is a block diagram of an effect control device. It is a block diagram of VDP in an effect control device. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing of a game control device. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing of a game control device. It is a flowchart which shows the checksum calculation process. It is a flowchart which shows the initial value random number update processing. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows the input process. It is a flowchart which shows the switch reading process. It is a flowchart which shows the output process. It is a flowchart which shows the payout command transmission process. It is a flowchart which shows the process of updating the remaining number of main prize balls. It is a flowchart which shows the random number update process 1. It is a flowchart which shows the random number update process 2. It is a flowchart which shows the winning opening switch / error monitoring processing. It is a flowchart which shows fraud & prize monitoring processing. It is a flowchart which shows the winning number counter update processing. It is a flowchart which shows the command setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the error check process. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure game processing. It is a flowchart which shows the start port switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows the common process of a special figure start port switch. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure hold information determination processing. It is a flowchart which shows the big prize opening switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows the symbol variation control processing. Special figure It is a flowchart which shows the usual processing. Special figure It is a flowchart which shows the normal process transition setting process 1. FIG. 1 is a flowchart showing a variation start process 1. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot flag 1 setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure information setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the 2-byte distribution processing. It is a flowchart which shows the distribution process. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation start information setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 2 variation start process 1. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot flag 2 setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the process transition setting process (special figure 1) during special figure change. It is a flowchart which shows the process transition setting process (special figure 2) during special figure change. It is a flowchart which shows the processing during special figure change. It is a flowchart which shows the process transition setting process during special figure display. It is a flowchart which shows the process during display of a special figure. It is a flowchart which shows the processing transition setting process 1 in a fanfare / interval process. It is a flowchart which shows the effect mode information check process. It is a flowchart which shows the time shortening fluctuation number update process. It is a flowchart which shows the time saving end setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the processing in a fanfare / interval. It is a flowchart which shows the processing in a fanfare / interval. It is a flowchart which shows the solenoid information setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the process transition setting process 1 while opening a big prize opening. It is a flowchart which shows the process transition setting process 2 while opening a big prize opening. It is a flowchart which shows the processing during opening of a big winning opening. It is a flowchart which shows the big prize opening residual ball processing transition setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows the process transition setting process 3 during opening of a big winning opening. It is a flowchart which shows the processing of the remaining ball of a big winning opening. It is a flowchart which shows the processing transition setting process 2 in a fanfare / interval process. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit end process transition setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot end processing. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit end setting process 1. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit end setting process 2. Special figure It is a flowchart which shows the normal process transition setting process 3. It is a flowchart which shows the normal figure game processing. It is a flowchart which shows the gate switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows the Fukuden prize switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows the usual processing. It is a flowchart which shows the normal process transition setting process 1. It is a flowchart which shows the process transition setting process during a change of a normal figure. It is a flowchart which shows the processing during a change of a normal figure. It is a flowchart which shows the process transition setting process while displaying a normal figure. It is a flowchart which shows the processing during display of a normal figure. It is a flowchart which shows the middle process transition setting process per ordinary figure. It is a flowchart which shows the process in the middle of a normal figure. It is a flowchart which shows the normal electric operation transition setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the ordinary electric | residual sphere processing. It is a flowchart which shows the end process transition setting process per ordinary figure. It is a flowchart which shows the end processing per ordinary figure. It is a flowchart which shows the normal process transition setting process 2. It is a flowchart which shows the segment LED editing process. It is a flowchart which shows the magnet fraud monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows the radio wave fraud monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows the external information editing process. It is a flowchart which shows the external information editing process. It is a flowchart which shows the main prize ball signal editing process. It is a flowchart which shows the start port signal editing process. It is a flowchart which shows the peculiar information signal editing process. It is a flowchart which shows the CPU-specific information acquisition processing. It is a figure which shows the bit transpose pattern of a hard random number. It is a figure which shows the opening and closing pattern of the upper prize opening. It is a figure which shows the opening and closing pattern of the lower prize opening. It is a flowchart which shows the power-on reset process of an effect control device. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing of an effect control device. It is a flowchart which shows the command reception interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows the received command range check process. It is a flowchart which shows the received command check process. It is a flowchart which shows the received command analysis processing. It is a flowchart which shows the one-shot system command processing. It is a flowchart which shows the one-shot system command processing. It is a flowchart which shows the scenario data setting process for waiting for a customer. It is a flowchart which shows the scenario data setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 1 hold information setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the symbol system command processing. It is a flowchart which shows the variable system command processing. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation pattern correspondence symbol determination processing. It is a flowchart which shows the variation pattern classification processing. It is a flowchart which shows the variation effect setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the variation effect setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the variation effect setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the advance notice lottery processing. It is a flowchart which shows the advance notice cancellation confirmation processing. It is a flowchart which shows the variation setting process without reach. It is a flowchart which shows the stop symbol setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the advance notice effect setting process 1. It is a flowchart which shows the cut-in character replacement determination process 1. It is a flowchart which shows the cut-in character replacement determination process 2. It is a flowchart which shows the cut-in character replacement determination process 3. It is a flowchart which shows the cut-in character replacement determination process 3. It is a flowchart which shows the scenario data setting process for PB notice. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot system command processing. It is a flowchart which shows the look-ahead symbol system command processing. It is a flowchart which shows the look-ahead fluctuation system command processing. It is a flowchart which shows the look-ahead command consistency check processing. It is a flowchart which shows the look-ahead lottery process. It is a flowchart which shows the look-ahead lottery process. It is a flowchart which shows the test mode system command processing. It is a flowchart which shows the test mode processing. It is a flowchart which shows the test mode normal state processing. It is a flowchart which shows the test mode ROM inspection group processing. It is a flowchart which shows the transmission start processing between subs. It is a flowchart which shows the inter-sub reception task processing. It is a flowchart which shows the transmission data editing process between subs. It is a flowchart which shows the ack response task processing between subs. It is a flowchart which shows the effect setting process between subs. It is a flowchart which shows the scenario setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the scenario analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows the scenario analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows the motion registration process. It is a flowchart which shows motion data initialization processing 1 and 2. It is a flowchart which shows the motion deletion processing and motion continuation processing. It is a flowchart which shows the constant weight processing and variable weight processing. It is a flowchart which shows PB wait processing and PB determination branch processing. It is a flowchart which shows the symbol stop processing. It is a flowchart which shows the symbol back calculation replacement processing. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation scenario switching process. It is a flowchart which shows the iterative process and the end process. It is a flowchart which shows the motion control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the motion command execution processing. It is a flowchart which shows the motion command execution processing. It is a flowchart which shows the bitmap addition processing. It is a flowchart which shows the moving image addition processing. It is a flowchart which shows the 1-point designation object movement processing. It is a flowchart which shows the effect type specification processing and effect parameter specification processing. It is a flowchart which shows the object deletion process and the object change process. It is a flowchart which shows the object moving image decoding process. It is a flowchart which shows the behavior index setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the effect display editing process. It is a flowchart which shows the effect display editing process. It is a flowchart which shows the effect display editing process. It is a flowchart which shows the character drawing process. It is a flowchart which shows the display left symbol conversion processing, PB color conversion processing, and reach character conversion processing. It is a flowchart which shows the military commander 1 line conversion processing. It is a flowchart which shows VDP interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows the V blank start interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows the variation effect setting process (variation example). It is a figure which shows the packet composition example of inter-sub communication. It is a figure which shows an example of the ACTION check table and the match check table. It is a figure which shows an example of the ACT matching check address table and ACT matching check table. It is a figure which shows an example of the still image ROM member list table. It is a figure which shows an example of the moving image ROM member list table. It is a figure which shows an example of the list table for motion. It is a figure which shows the specific example of the scenario table at the time of a customer waiting demonstration. It is a figure which shows the specific example of the variation pattern type table. It is a figure which shows the specific example of the first half notice distribution group address table. It is a figure which shows the specific example of the first half notice distribution group table. It is a figure which shows the specific example of the first half notice distribution group table. It is a figure which shows the specific example of the first half notice distribution table. It is a figure which shows the specific example of the latter half notice distribution group address table. It is a figure which shows the specific example of the symbol variation list table. Special figure 1 It is a figure which shows the specific example of the scenario table at the time of a normal fluctuation. It is a figure which shows the specific example of the motion table at the start of a normal fluctuation of the left symbol. It is a figure which shows the display example at the start of the left symbol change. It is a figure explaining the relationship between the present symbol, the previous symbol, and the next symbol at the time of normal fluctuation. It is a figure which shows the specific example of the motion table at the time of special figure 1 4th symbol change. It is a figure which shows the display example of the 4th symbol. It is a figure which shows the specific example (connection example) of the motion table at the time of a normal fluctuation of the left symbol. It is a figure which shows an example of a push button notice scenario and a motion table. It is a figure which shows the specific example of the ending scenario table. It is a figure explaining the common motion table (still image movie). It is a figure which shows the specific example of the motion table at the time of a scroll notice. It is a figure which shows the specific example of the motion table at the time of a scroll notice. It is a figure which shows the display example at the time of a scroll notice. It is a figure which shows the specific example of the look-ahead variation command conversion table. It is a figure which shows the specific example of the look-ahead variation command conversion table. It is a figure which shows the specific example of the look-ahead condition check table. It is a figure which shows the specific example of the look-ahead lottery group address table and the like. It is a test mode state transition diagram. It is a figure which shows the modification 1 of the first half notice distribution group address table. It is a figure which shows the modification 2 of the first half notice distribution group address table. It is a figure which shows the specific example (normal example) of the structure of the first half notice distribution table. It is a figure which shows the specific example (modification example) of the structure of the first half notice distribution table. It is a figure which shows an example of the display component and the display screen used in the production of a display device. It is a figure which shows an example of the scenario table used in the production of a display device. It is a figure which shows an example of the scenario table and the push button effect concerning the effect of an effect button. It is a figure which shows an example of the motion table of a push button notice. It is a figure explaining the operation of the symbol stop display. It is a figure which shows an example of the motion table of the symbol stop display. It is a figure explaining the operation of the symbol stop display. It is a figure explaining the setting operation of the basic character of a symbol stop display. It is a figure explaining the setting operation of the basic character of a symbol stop display. It is a figure explaining the operation of the jackpot ending period. It is a figure which shows an example of the display component and the display screen used in the production of the display device in Example 2. FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the display component and the display screen used in the production of the display device in Example 3. FIG.

Hereinafter, as Example 1 of the present invention, a mode example when applied to a pachinko machine will be described with reference to the drawings.
A. Front configuration of pachinko machine First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine of this example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 1 is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine 1 of this example.
The pachinko machine 1 has a machine frame 2 fixed to an island on which the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and a machine frame 2 rotatably supported by a hinge portion 3 with respect to the machine frame 2. It is provided with a front frame 4 that can be opened and closed. A game board 20 (shown in FIG. 2) is attached to the front frame 4.

Further, a glass frame 5 is attached to the front frame 4 so as to cover the upper front surface thereof so as to be openable and closable. The game area 22, which will be described later, of the game board 20 can be visually recognized from the front through the glass plate (a transparent plastic board may be used, the reference numerals are omitted) held by the glass frame 5. Further, the glass frame 5 is pivotally supported by the front frame 4 at the hinge portion 3 so as to be openable and closable.
Here, the front frame 4 is referred to by the name of the game frame, and the glass frame 5 is sometimes referred to by the name of the front frame, but in this embodiment, the front frame 4 and the glass frame 5 are described.
An operation panel 6 is provided on the lower side of the glass frame 5.
Normally, the pachinko machine 1 may be provided with a CR unit (card-type ball lending control unit) as a game medium lending device, but the illustration is omitted here. However, in FIG. 4, the CR unit is shown as a card unit 551, and the card unit connection board 54 that relays the transmission of signals and the like to and from the card unit 551 is also shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 20 has a game nail planted on the front surface of a plate-shaped base material (so-called veneer), and a substantially circular area on the front surface is surrounded by a guide rail 21 to form a game area. 22 is formed. The game area 22 is an area for determining out or safe (determining whether or not a prize has been won) while dropping the driven game ball from above, and when the game ball enters the winning opening and becomes effectively safe. Is configured such that a predetermined number of game balls are discharged to an upper plate 7 provided at the lower part of the glass frame 5 (that is, discharged as a prize ball).
Further, a key insertion portion 8 for a locking device (not shown) of the front frame 4 and the glass frame 5 is formed on the edge of the front frame 4 on the opening / closing side (right side in FIG. 1).

Further, the upper plate 7 provided at the lower part of the glass frame 5 temporarily holds the game ball before launch, which is discharged as a prize ball or as a rental ball. The upper plate 7 is provided with a push-button type effect button 9 operated by the player.
Further, the operation panel 6 is provided with a lower plate 10 on which the game ball of the upper plate 7 can be moved by the operation of the player, and a launch operation handle 11 for launching the game ball.
Further, what is indicated by reference numerals 12a and 12b in FIG. 1 is a speaker that outputs sound effects and the like. Of these, reference numeral 12a is an upper speaker provided on both the upper left and right sides of the glass frame 5. Reference numeral 12b is a lower speaker provided at the left end of the operation panel 6 (left side of the lower plate 10).

Further, in FIG. 1, what is indicated by reference numeral 13 is a decorative lamp whose light emitting source is an LED (light emitting diode) provided on the front surface of the glass frame 5, and what is indicated by reference numeral 14 is on both the upper left and right sides of the glass frame 5. It is a moving light provided on the front. Although not shown, the moving light 14 includes an LED as a light emitting source and a motor as a driving source. Here, the decorative lamp 13 and the moving light 14 constitute the decorative LED 301 shown in FIG.
Further, if the decoration mechanism is divided by the concept of the board and the frame of the pachinko machine 1, the decoration lamp 13 and the moving light 14 correspond to the effect mechanism on the frame side, and constitute the frame decoration device 43 shown in FIG. The moving light 14 also constitutes the frame effect device 45 shown in FIG.

B. Front configuration of the game board In FIG. 2, reference numeral 21 is a guide rail of the game board 20, and as described above, the game area 22 is formed by surrounding the substantially circular area on the front surface of the game board with the guide rail 21. ing.
As shown in FIG. 2, the game area 22 includes an out ball inflow port 23, a center case 24, a first starting winning opening 25, a second starting winning opening 26 as an ordinary electric accessory (general electric), and a variable winning device. 27, general winning openings 28 to 31, general drawing start gate 32, variable winning device 33 (hereinafter referred to as the second variable winning device 33 to distinguish it from the variable winning device 27), a large number of game nails (not shown), etc. It is provided. Further, a batch display device 35 is provided outside the game area 22 of the game board 20. It should be noted that the game nails are those in which the game balls that have jumped into the upper part of the game area 22 flow down while hitting them, and a plurality of game nails are planted in the game area excluding the attachment portion such as the center case.

The center case 24 is a member that surrounds the front periphery of the display unit 41a (shown in FIG. 2) of the display device 41 (shown in FIG. 4) attached to the back side of the game board 20. Although not shown, the center case 24 includes lamps having an LED as a light emitting source for effect or decoration, and an electric accessory (for example, an electric accessory that enhances the effect in cooperation with the effect display in the display device 41). An accessory having a movable part that is operated by a drive source such as a motor or a solenoid) is provided.
The lamps for directing or decorating are also provided in a portion of the game board 20 other than the center case 24 (may be outside the game area 22). The lamps for effect or decoration provided on the game board 20 (including the center case 24) correspond to the effect mechanism on the board side, and the board decoration device 42 (shown in FIG. 6) and the center case 24. The provided electric accessory corresponds to the effect mechanism on the board side, and constitutes the board effect device 44 (shown in FIG. 6). The electric accessory constituting the board effect device 44 may be provided at a place other than the center case 24 of the game board 20.

The display device 41 (effect means, display means) is configured to include, for example, a liquid crystal display device, and is usually referred to as a variable display device. The name of the display device 41 includes, for example, a special symbol display device, a special symbol display device, a symbol variation device, a variable symbol display device, an identification information variation device, and an identification information variation display device. There are various types, but those with the same function are in the same category.
The display device 41 has a display unit 41a (screen) capable of displaying identification information (referred to as a special figure) such as numbers and characters, and can display a plurality of columns of special figures. For example, special figures are displayed in three vertical columns on the left side, center, and right side, and special figures consisting of numbers and letters are displayed in a stopped state (stop display) in each column, or in a fluctuating state (for example, in the vertical direction). It is possible to display (that is, variable display) in a scrolling state.
In addition to the above-mentioned special figure, an image for directing or information notification such as a background image or a character image can be displayed on the display unit.
It should be noted that an image corresponding to a so-called normal drawing may be configured to be able to be displayed on the display device 41. However, when the normal drawing is displayed on the display device 41, it is a decorative general drawing. When the display device 41 is configured to display a normal figure, the display device 41 corresponds to a normal symbol variable display device.
Here, the special figure is the identification information that is variablely displayed in the variable display game related to the big hit, and the normal figure is the identification information that is variablely displayed in the variable display game related to the normal figure hit (not the big hit). be.
The normal drawing is not actually displayed on the display device 41, but is displayed on the batch display device 35. The general drawing displayed on the batch display device 35 is referred to as a general drawing as will be described later.

Further, the starting winning openings 25 and 26 are winning openings that function as starting winning openings of the special drawing as described later, and in this example, they are arranged side by side as shown in FIG. The upper first start winning opening 25 is always open. The lower second start winning opening 26 has opening / closing members 26a on both the left and right sides, and when these opening / closing members 26a open in an inverted C shape, winning is possible, and as shown in FIG. 2, these opening / closing members 26a It is not possible to win a prize if it is closed. These start winning openings 25 and 26 are arranged below the central portion of the center case 24.
The second start winning opening 26 is also referred to as an ordinary electric accessory (Public electric) and corresponds to an ordinary variable winning device.
Further, the variable winning device 27 is a device (so-called attacker) having a large winning opening 27a (corresponding to the first large winning opening as described later) opened and closed by the opening / closing member 27b. The big winning opening 27a is opened on condition that it becomes a big hit, which will be described later, and a game ball can win a prize.
Further, the second variable winning device 33 has a pair of opening / closing members 33a on both the left and right sides, and when these opening / closing members 33a are opened in an inverted C shape, a prize can be won. As shown in FIG. 2, these opening / closing members 33a If is closed, it is impossible to win a prize. The second variable winning device 33 is opened on condition that a special hit state is obtained among the big hits described later, and the game ball can win a prize. In this case, when a big hit occurs, either the variable winning device 27 or the second variable winning device 33 is released, but which one is released is determined by the result mode (special result) of the special figure variation display game. NS.
In the second variable winning device 33, the opening in which the opening / closing member 33a opens in an inverted C shape to enable winning is referred to as a second large winning opening.
Here, in the present embodiment, since the two attackers of the variable winning device 27 and the second variable winning device 33 are arranged, the variable winning device 27 is the first attacker and the second variable winning device 33 is the second attacker. In addition, each attacker's winning opening may be referred to as a first major winning opening (or lower winning opening) or a second major winning opening (or upper winning opening). As will be described later, the first large winning opening is opened and closed by the first large winning opening solenoid 133, and the second large winning opening is opened and closed by the second large winning opening solenoid 134.

In addition to the special figure, the general figure is also displayed on the batch display device 35 (details will be described later), and the general figure game will be described as follows.
When the game ball passes through the normal map start gate 32, a variable display game of the normal map (hereinafter referred to as a variable display game of the normal map) is played by the batch display device 35, and the stopped normal map is predetermined. In the case of the above mode (specific display mode), a privilege called a normal figure hit is given.
When the display device 41 is configured to display the normal figure, the display device 41 displays the normal figure (decorative normal figure) in a variable manner. However, a unique general-purpose map display device may be arranged separately from the display device 41.
When it hits a normal figure, a game is performed in which a pair of opening / closing members 26a of the second start winning opening 26 are temporarily held for a predetermined opening time in an open state in which the pair of opening / closing members 26a are opened in an inverted C shape, and the game ball is started. It will be easier to win a prize, and the number of times the special figure variable display game will be played will increase accordingly, increasing the possibility of a big hit.
Further, when a game ball is further won in the normal figure start gate 32 during the above-mentioned variable display game of the normal figure, the display of the batch display device 35 described later executes the hold display of the normal figure start memory, for example, 4 Up to the number is stored, and after the end of the variable display game of the normal map, the variable display game of the normal map is repeated based on the memory. If the probability of the normal map is set to high, it becomes easier to hit the normal map.
The hold display of the normal drawing start memory displayed by the display device of the batch display device 35 is the normal drawing start memory. In addition to the batch display device 35, a unique normal drawing start memory display for displaying the decorative normal drawing start memory may be arranged in the game area 22. Here, the time saving will be explained as follows. It is a thing.
Time reduction is an abbreviation of "time reduction", and after the big hit, the fluctuation time of special figures and ordinary figures is shortened more than usual to improve time efficiency, and the probability of hitting ordinary figures is increased. By supporting the winning of the starting opening by opening (the second starting winning opening 26) (including making the opening time of the public train longer than usual), the number of times the variable display game of the predetermined special figure is played. It is a function to efficiently change the special figure without reducing the number of balls (number of balls).

Next, the batch display device 35 displays a so-called normal figure, a special figure, a special figure, a hold display of the start memory of the normal figure (in some cases, a special figure hold display, a normal figure hold display), and a game. It displays the status, for example, a plurality of indicators using LEDs as a light emitting source (for example, an indicator consisting of one small lamp, or a display of, for example, 7 segments capable of displaying numbers as this special figure). It is composed of vessels). For example, among the LED segments in the batch display device 35, the one displaying the special figure 1 is arranged as the special figure 1 display, and the one displaying the special figure 2 is arranged as the special figure 2 display.
The start memory hold display (in some cases, simply referred to as the start memory display) is a display for notifying the number of start memories held in a state where the variable display game has not been executed, and is generally used. Is displayed by lighting a lamp or the like for each start memory. That is, if there are three start memories, it is performed by turning on the three lamps or displaying the three figures.
In addition, while what is displayed by the display device of the batch display device 35 is this special figure or this general figure (formal special figure or general figure), the display unit of the above-mentioned variable display device 41 or the like The display of the special figure or the normal figure (however, when the configuration for displaying the normal figure on the variable display device 41 is adopted) is a dummy display for the player's production. Therefore, from the player's point of view, the special figure and the general figure refer to this dummy display. In the following, when emphasizing that this dummy display is used, it will be referred to as, for example, "decorative special drawing" and "decorative general drawing".
As described above, the batch display device 35 is not intended for players, but is used for inspection of the game board 20 and the like. For example, the display of the start memory of the special figure for the player (special figure hold display) is performed by, for example, the display unit of the variable display device 41 or a plurality of lamps (light emitting unit) provided on the game board 20.

C. Configuration of the back side of the pachinko machine Next, FIG. 3 is a diagram showing the entire back side configuration of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment.
The main parts of the back mechanism in the pachinko machine 1 are a storage tank 51, a taxiway 52a, a payout unit 53, a card unit connection board 54, an external information terminal board 55, a payout control device 200, a game control device 100, and an effect control device. There are 300, a power supply device 500, and the like.
In addition, since the effect control device 300 is not directly visible in FIG. 3 and the effect control device 300 is arranged behind the cover member, the arrows are shown as shown in FIG. 3 for convenience of explanation. That is, unlike the box that houses the substrate of the effect control device 300, the cover member shown in FIG. 3 has a function of preventing the game ball from entering the back surface of the game machine, and has a structure that can be opened and closed like a door. .. The left side of the cover member shown in FIG. 3 serves as a fulcrum, opens to the left side, and the effect control device 300 housed in the box is arranged behind the fulcrum.

The storage tank 51 stores the balls before being discharged in advance, and the shortage of the number of balls in the storage tank 51 is detected by a replenishment sensor (not shown), and when the number is insufficient, it is called a chute of the island equipment. The ball is replenished from the device. The balls in the storage tank 51 are guided by the guide path 52a and discharged to the above-mentioned upper plate 7 by a payout unit (not shown) incorporating a payout motor 222 (shown in FIG. 4). The payout unit can, for example, discharge a number of game balls according to the rotation amount of the payout motor 222, and the game balls paid out toward the upper plate 7 by the payout unit are the payout ball detection switch 215 (FIG. FIG. (Shown in 4).
The external information terminal board 55 has a function as a relay terminal board (external terminal board) when various information (including a unique ID) of the pachinko machine 1 is sent to the hall management device 140.
As will be described later, the unique ID is individual identification information (main board unique ID: main board unique identification information) that can identify the gaming microcomputer 101 and individual identification information that can identify the payout microcomputer 201 (payout unique ID: It is a concept representing the payout board unique identification information), and the reason why these are output to the outside of the gaming machine is to check the unique ID externally to determine the validity of the gaming machine. The management device 140 corresponds to an external device of a gaming machine (pachinko machine 1), and has a function of externally determining the validity of the pachinko machine 1 based on a unique ID.
The external device having a function of determining the validity of the gaming machine is not limited to the management device 140, and for example, the card unit 551 (see FIG. 4) is provided with a function of determining the validity of the gaming machine. May be good. In that case, the unique ID of the pachinko machine 1 is sent from the external information terminal plate 55 described above to the card unit 551.
Further, the validity of the gaming machine may be determined only by the management device 140, by both the management device 140 and the card unit 551, or by the card unit 551 only.

Here, the above-mentioned unique ID corresponds to individual identification information that can individually (uniquely) identify that it is an arithmetic processing unit (game microcomputer 101 described later) in the game control device 100, but the payout control device 200 The arithmetic processing unit (payout microcomputer 201 described later) also stores individual identification information that can individually (uniquely) identify the arithmetic processing unit.
Therefore, in the first embodiment, the individual identification information that can identify the game microcomputer 101 will be described as being appropriately distinguished from the main board unique ID, and the individual identification information that can identify the payout microcomputer 201 will be appropriately distinguished from the payout unique ID. ..
Further, as a concept for distinguishing the individual identification information that can identify the game microcomputer 101 from the individual identification information, the individual identification information that can identify the payout microcomputer 201 is called the payout individual identification information. The same applies to other examples described later.
It should be noted that, without distinction, the term "unique ID" usually refers to the main board unique ID.
Further, in the concept of the invention, the unique ID is referred to as "individual identification information", but in a general case such as a normal field level, the individual identification information is often referred to as a unique ID. In Example 1, the individual identification information may be described as a unique ID, and may be described or illustrated as unique information or unique identification information in the specification and drawings in terms of balance with the unique ID.

The payout control device 200 performs control necessary for paying out game balls (both paying out prize balls and paying out rented balls), and is configured by accommodating a circuit board that realizes this control function in a predetermined case. There is. As shown in FIG. 4, the payout control device 200 controls the payout of prize balls by discharging a predetermined number of game balls as prize balls to the upper plate 7 based on the payout control command transmitted from the game control device 100. Further, the payout control device 200 controls the payout of balls to be discharged to the upper plate 7 as a predetermined number of game balls based on the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal from the card unit 551 (see FIG. 4).
The game control device 100 controls a solenoid or the like provided on the game board 20 and sends control information (commands) to other control devices to comprehensively manage and control the progress of the game ( A substrate on which a circuit including a microcomputer that performs these controls is formed is housed in a predetermined case (described in detail later).

The effect control device 300 controls the above-mentioned fluctuation display device, decorative lamp, effect device, and speakers 12a and 12b based on a command transmitted from the game control device 100, and this control function is provided in a predetermined case. The circuit board to be realized is housed and configured.
The card unit connection board 54 (see FIG. 3 and also shown in FIG. 4) is a board for wiring connection between the pachinko machine 1 side and the CR unit (card unit 551; the same applies hereinafter) side for renting a ball. be. If the above wiring connection is not made on the card unit connection board 54, the pachinko machine 1 is controlled so that the game ball cannot be launched.

Generally, when changing the model of a pachinko machine, the entire pachinko machine except the CR unit is replaced, or the frame side (including the payout control device) of the pachinko machine is left on the game board side (game board and game control). In some cases, only the main control device (including the main control device such as the device) is replaced. However, if the ball is rented for 4 yen, the one for renting 4 yen is used. For example, if the rented ball is for 1 yen, the game board side and the frame side are used for 1 yen. It is assumed that.

D. Configuration of Control System Next, the control system of the pachinko machine 1 of this example will be described with reference to FIGS. 4 to 7. In the figure and the following description, "SW" means a switch. Further, in the drawing, when the name of the member is long, it becomes difficult to show it, so it may be shortened (shown) as appropriate.
The pachinko machine 1 includes a game control device 100, a payout control device 200, an effect control device 300, a launch control device 400, and a power supply device 500 as main components of the control system.

(Game control device related)
First, the configuration of the game control device 100 of the pachinko machine 1 and the devices connected to the game control device 100 will be described with reference to FIG.
Of the signals shown along with the arrows in FIG. 4, the "main ID" is the main board unique ID, the "external information" is the game machine status signal, and the "prize ball signal" is the prize ball from the payout control device. The number of balls to be paid out, the "discharge command" is the discharge command command from the game control device, and the "various signals" are the payout abnormality status signal, shoot ball out switch signal, overflow switch signal, and glass frame issued from the payout control device. Represents an open switch signal, a front frame open switch signal, and the like.
In addition, the "external information" and the "prize ball signal" are collectively referred to as "external / prize ball".
The game control device 100 is a main control device (main board) that collectively controls the game, and includes a game microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as a game microcomputer) 101 and an inspection device connection terminal 102. Details of the game microcomputer 101 will be described later.
The game control device 100 corresponds to a control device.
Further, the game microcomputer 101 has a function as a game arithmetic processing unit (arithmetic processing unit), and corresponds to the first arithmetic processing unit of the present invention.
In this embodiment, the game control device 100 includes a main control means, a power failure monitoring means, a random number updating means, a start winning memory means, a second start storage means, a preliminary determination means, a priority control means, a fluctuation pattern determining means, and a fluctuation display game execution. It constitutes a control means, a determination means, a stop time setting means, a specific game state generation control means, and a main board unique identification information output means.
The inspection device connection terminal 102 is configured to include, for example, a photocoupler, and is a terminal to which a cable for transmitting various game information obtained from the game microcomputer 101 is connected to the inspection device.

The game control device 100 includes a first start port switch 120 (start port 1SW in FIGS. 4 and 5), a second start port switch 121 (start port 2SW in FIGS. 4 and 5), a gate switch 122, and a winning port switch. Detection from 123, lower count switch 124, upper count switch 125, magnetic sensor 126, radio wave sensor 127, glass frame open detection switch 211 (glass frame open detection SW) and front frame open detection switch 212 (front frame open detection SW) The signal is input.
Here, the first start port switch 120 is a sensor for detecting the winning balls that have won the first starting winning opening 25 one by one, and the second starting opening switch 121 is the second starting winning opening. It is a sensor for detecting winning balls that detects the game balls that have won 26 one by one.
The lower count switch 124 is a similar sensor that detects a game ball that has won a prize in the large winning opening of the variable winning device 27. The upper count switch 125 is a similar sensor that detects a game ball that has won a prize in the second major winning opening of the second variable winning device 33.
In this embodiment, two lower count switches 124 are provided, and the game ball that has flowed into the large winning opening of the variable winning device 27 is detected by any of the lower count switches 124. By providing a plurality of lower count switches 124 in this way, it is possible to quickly detect the game ball that has flowed into the large winning opening.
Further, the winning opening switch 123 is a similar sensor provided for the general winning opening 28 to 31, and when there are n general winning openings, one is provided for each, and n are provided as a whole. In addition, instead of providing one sensor for each of the general winning openings, one sensor may be provided for a plurality of general winning openings as a whole. The gate switch 122 is a sensor that detects game balls passing through the normal drawing start gate 32 one by one.
Each of the above sensors 120, 121, 122, 123, 124, 125 that detects these game balls is a proximity switch in this example, and outputs a detection signal of negative logic such as a high level of 11V and a low level of 7V. The circuit is configured in.

Further, the magnetic sensor 126 and the radio wave sensor 127 are sensors provided on the back surface of the game board 20 or the like to detect fraud by magnetism or radio waves. For example, the magnetic sensor 126 is arranged (that is, arranged at four places) in each of the general winning openings 28, 30, 31 in the game board 20 and the first large winning opening (large winning opening 27a) of the variable winning device 27, and the general winning is won. To detect fraud such as stacking game balls using magnets around the first major winning openings of the general winning openings 28, 30, 31 and the variable winning device 27 to facilitate winning in each winning opening. It is a sensor. The magnetic sensor 126 may be arranged at more locations than the four locations as described above.
Further, the glass frame opening detection switch 211 is a sensor that detects that the glass frame 5 on the front surface of the pachinko machine is open. The front frame opening detection switch 212 is a sensor that detects that the front frame 4 to which the glass frame 5 is attached is open.
The game control device 100 is provided with proximity I / Fs that process signals from the sensors 120, 121, 122, 123, 124, 125, 126, 127, and the details are shown in FIG. Will be described later.

Here, the electronic components such as the game control device 100 and the solenoids 132 and 133, which will be described later, driven by the game control device 100, have a DC voltage of a predetermined level such as DC32V, DC12V, DC5V generated by the power supply device 500. Supplied and made operational.
The power supply device 500 is a normal power supply having an AC-DC converter that generates a DC voltage of DC32V from a 24V AC power supply, a DC-DC converter that generates a lower level DC voltage such as DC12V, DC5V, etc. from a voltage of DC32V. Unit 501, backup power supply unit 502 that supplies power supply voltage to the internal RAM of the game microcomputer 101 in the event of a power failure, and a power failure monitoring signal that has a power failure monitoring circuit and notifies the game control device 100 of the occurrence and recovery of a power failure. It includes a control signal generation unit 503 that generates and outputs a control signal such as a reset signal, a RAM clear switch 504 that initializes a RAM or the like inside the gaming microcomputer 101, and the like.

In the first embodiment, the power supply device 500 is configured separately from the game control device 100, but the backup power supply unit 502 and the control signal generation unit 503 are integrated on a separate substrate or with the game control device 100, that is, It may be configured to be provided on the main board. Since the game board 20 and the game control device 100 are to be replaced when the model is changed, the backup power supply unit 502 and the control signal generation unit 503 are provided on a board different from the power supply device 500 or the main board in this way. As a result, it is possible to reduce the cost by excluding it from the target of replacement when changing the model.

The backup power supply unit 502 can be configured by one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power supply is supplied to the game microcomputer 101 (particularly the built-in RAM) of the game control device 100, and the data stored in the RAM is retained even during a power failure or even after the power is cut off. The control signal generation unit 503 monitors, for example, the voltage of 32V generated by the normal power supply unit 501, and when it drops to, for example, 17V or less, detects the occurrence of a power failure and changes the power failure monitoring signal (in this example, it is turned on). ), And a reset signal is output after a predetermined time. Also, when the power is turned on or when the power is restored, a reset signal is output after a predetermined time has elapsed from that point.

The initialization switch signal is output from the RAM clear switch 504, and the initialization switch signal is a signal generated when the RAM clear switch 504 is turned on, and is a signal generated when the RAM clear switch 504 is turned on. The information stored in the RAM area such as the work RAM and the similar RAM area in the payout control device 200 is initialized.
In the case of this example, the initialization switch signal is read when the power is turned on, and the power failure monitoring signal is repeatedly read in the main loop of the main program executed by the gaming microcomputer 101 and the payout microcomputer 201. The reset signal resets the entire control system.

Next, the game control device 100 includes a payout control device 200, an effect control device 300, a test firing test device 131 (connected during a test at a testing institution), a normal electric solenoid 132, and a first large winning opening solenoid (the first solenoid in FIG. 4). It is connected to the 1st prize opening SOL) 133, the 2nd prize opening solenoid (the 2nd prize opening SOL in FIG. 4) 134, and the batch display device 35.
From the game control device 100, the unique ID of the game control device 100 via the external information terminal plate 55, specifically, the individual identification information (main board unique ID) capable of identifying the game microcomputer 101 and the external information are managed as an external device. It is designed to be output to the device 140.
The external information terminal board 55 is connected to the game control device 100 with a cable, and relays when transmitting external information and the unique ID (main board unique ID) of the game control device 100 to the management device 140 as an external device. ..
The management device 140 collects information (for example, external information) from a large number of pachinko machines installed in the amusement store, and performs arithmetic processing and total display of information necessary for business.

Here, as the external information, for example, a signal for notifying the signal input to the game control device 100 to the outside, a big hit signal for notifying the big hit generated in the process of the game progress, and a starting port which is a condition for rotating the symbol. The start port signal for notifying the winning of a prize, the symbol confirmation number signal for notifying the symbol rotation triggered by the start of rotation of the symbol or the stop of rotation of the symbol, and the gaming state being in a state advantageous to the player (so-called probability change state). , Time saving state), etc., which are signals to be notified to the outside, and these are collectively referred to as a game machine state signal.
Since the privilege state signal is generated after the end of the big hit state, it is a signal output during the "big hit state + state advantageous to the player" period.
Further, the game control device 100 transmits data (for example, a payout command) to the payout control device 200 by parallel communication. On the other hand, the payout control device 200 outputs the payout abnormality status signal, the shoot ball out switch signal, and the overflow switch signal to the game control device 100. The contents of each signal will be described later.

Next, the test firing test device 131 and the like connected to the game control device 100 will be described.
In the test firing test device 131, a certification body conducts a test firing test of a gaming machine. The normal electric solenoid 132 is a solenoid that opens and closes the opening and closing member of the second starting winning opening 26, the first large winning opening solenoid 133 is a solenoid that opens and closes the opening and closing member of the variable winning device 27, and the second large winning opening solenoid 134 is a special winning device. As described above, the solenoid for opening and closing the opening / closing member 33a of 33, the batch display device 35, displays the so-called normal drawing and special drawing, and further displays the holding display of the start memory of the special drawing and the normal drawing and the display of the game state. It is something to do.
Further, the game control device 100 transmits data (for example, an effect command) to the effect control device 300 by serial communication.
Here, in the game control device 100, when the winnings to the starting ports 25 and 26 are detected by the first starting port switch 120 and the second starting port switch 121, respectively, and the detection signal is input, the number of special drawing starting prizes is set to 4. It is stored and held in a range of pieces, and a look-ahead command related to the hold information is generated by extracting a random number based on the hold of the start winning prize and transmitted to the effect control device 300 at a predetermined timing. Further, when the memory of the start winning prize is held, the special figure hold number command regarding the hold number is generated and similarly transmitted to the effect control device 300.
The invention concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
The game control device is
Starting prize storage means that stores the number of starting prizes based on the winning of the game ball to the starting winning opening as the number of holdings within a predetermined range, and
When the start prize is stored by the start prize storage means, a look-ahead command generation means that generates a look-ahead command related to the stored information by extracting a random number based on the memory, and a look-ahead command generation means.
When the start prize is stored by the start prize storage means, the hold number command generation means for generating the hold number command regarding the hold number and the hold number command generation means.
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped.

Further, in the first embodiment, since there are two starting ports (starting ports 25 and 26), there are two types of display of the special figure start memory (special figure start memory) (special figure 1 hold display and special figure 2 hold display). As a special figure variation display game, two types of variation display games (first variation display game and second variation display game) are executed. Then, a look-ahead command and a hold number command are separately generated based on the winning of the game balls to the starting ports 25 and 26, respectively. For example, the look-ahead hold information of the special figure 1, the look-ahead hold information of the special figure 2, and the hold number command of the special figures 1 and 2 are individually generated corresponding to the start ports 25 and 26.
The invention concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
There are multiple starting prize openings where game balls can win,
The starting prize storage means
The number of starting prizes based on the winning of each game ball to each of the plurality of starting winning openings is stored separately as the number of holdings 1 and the number of holdings 2.
The look-ahead command generation means
When the start winning prizes corresponding to the plurality of start winning openings are stored by the start winning storage means, a look-ahead command regarding the stored information is generated separately for each start winning opening by extracting random numbers based on the memory. ,
The hold number command generation means is
A gaming machine characterized in that when each start winning prize is stored by the start winning winning storage means, a holding number command relating to a holding number 1 and a holding number 2 is generated separately for each starting winning opening.

Further, in the first embodiment, the variation pattern command and the symbol command as a set are sequentially transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300, but when the later symbol command is missed, the following control is performed. Will be done.
That is, when the effect control device 300 receives the variation pattern command sent earlier, it is determined whether or not the time from the end of the previous symbol variation to the reception of the current variation pattern command is within the specified time (for example, 1 second). However, if it is determined that the time from the end of the previous symbol variation to the reception of the current variation pattern command is within the specified time, even if the reception of the symbol command sent later is missed, the process of starting the symbol variation is performed. If it is determined that the time from the end of the previous symbol variation to the reception of the current variation pattern command exceeds the specified time, the process of not starting the symbol variation is performed. Therefore, it is possible to perform a special figure effect that does not give stress to the player as much as possible. After that, when a stop command comes, the variable stop or stop continues, and the next set of commands is normally transmitted to the effect control device 300. When it is done (the set is established), the correct effect is executed based on the regular command information.

(Production control device related)
Next, the configuration of the effect control device 300 and the equipment connected to the effect control device 300 will be described.
The effect control device 300 includes a main control microcomputer, a video control microcomputer that exclusively controls images under the control of the main control microcomputer, and a VDP as a graphic processor that performs image processing for displaying images on the display device 41. It has a sound source LSI that controls the output of various melody and sound effects, but the detailed configuration will be described later in FIG.
The effect control device 300 analyzes the control command (8-bit data signal) from the game microcomputer 101 of the game control device 100, determines the effect content, controls the content of the output image of the display device 41, and controls the sound source LSI. The speakers 12a and 12b are instructed to output a sound effect, etc., and processing such as drive control of the decorative LED 301 described above is executed. Further, when the effect control device 300 receives an error notification instruction from the game control device 100, the effect control device 300 outputs a signal to the error notification LED 302 to turn it on.
Here, as for the command transmitted from the game microcomputer 101 of the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300, in addition to the single command (for example, the stop command), the effect is exhibited as a group without starting the effect independently. There is something to be done, for example, "fluctuation pattern command + symbol specification command" at the start of special figure fluctuation, but the details of the command type will be described later.

To explain the main commands in addition to the above, there is a probability information command. This is prepared in response to the special figure game mode flag (see steps S974, S984, etc. described later), and is a flag that reflects the probability state at that time.
Even if the effect control device 300 receives the probability information command transmitted from the game control device 100, for example, the command alone does not immediately change the screen of the display device 41, but is internal for producing the screen. Just change the parameters. After that, when a command that changes the screen (variable system, customer waiting demo command, etc.) is received, it is reflected as the probability state at that time.
In addition, since it is determined that the probability is low during the jackpot, the internal parameters may be forcibly rewritten to the low probability when the jackpot command is received without receiving the probability information command.
The information that can be obtained by the probability information command includes, for example, the following.
・ "Low probability, time saving (refers to so-called 100 rotation time saving)"
・ "High probability, time saving (during so-called probability change)"
・ "Low probability, no time saving"
Here, the "probability information" in the gaming machine (pachinko machine 1) includes not only "probability change or not" but also "time saving or not" information. There are four types of gaming machine states: "low probability / no time reduction", "low probability / time reduction", "high probability / time reduction", and "high probability / no time reduction". In this embodiment, three of the above types (excluding "high probability / no time reduction") are used, and the game control device 100 transmits at the timing when each state changes.
The command communication may be a serial communication method or a parallel communication method. In this embodiment, a serial communication method is adopted as command communication.

(Payout control device related)
Next, the configuration of the payout control device 200 and the equipment connected to the payout control device 200 will be described.
The payout control device 200 includes a payout microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as a payout microcomputer) 201 that controls payout of game balls (prize ball payout or loan ball payout), an error number display 202, an error release switch 203, and an inspection device. The connection terminal 204 is provided. Details of the payout microcomputer 201 will be described later.
The payout microcomputer 201 has a function as a payout arithmetic processing unit (arithmetic processing unit), and corresponds to the second arithmetic processing unit of the present invention.
The inspection device connection terminal 204 is configured to include, for example, a photocoupler, and is a terminal to which a cable for transmitting various information related to payout obtained from the payout microcomputer 201 is connected to the inspection device. When there is an error in the process of payout control, the error number display 202 lights a specific number according to the content of the error. The error release switch 203 outputs a signal for canceling an error when operated, such as when there is an error in the payout control process and the process is stopped.

Devices connected to the input side of the payout control device 200 include an overflow switch 213, a radio wave sensor 214, a payout ball detection switch 215, and a shoot ball out switch 216.
The overflow switch 213 is a switch that detects that the game balls of the lower plate 10 are excessive, the radio wave sensor 214 is a sensor that detects abnormal radio waves such as fraud, and the payout ball detection switch 215 is raised by the payout unit 53 (FIG. 3). A switch that detects game balls (prize balls or rental balls) that are paid out toward the plate 7 one by one, and a shoot ball out switch 216 is a switch that detects that there are no game balls in the shoot that supplies the game balls to the storage tank 51. Is.
The radio wave sensor 214 is a sensor that detects fraud such as acquiring a specified number or more of game balls by preventing the sensor from reacting with radio waves when the payout ball is passed through the payout ball detection switch 215. .. The radio wave sensor 214 may detect other illegal radio waves.

The devices connected to the output side of the payout control device 200 include a payout motor 222, a card unit connection board 54, a launch control device 400, and an external information terminal board 55.
The payout control device 200 drives the payout motor 222 of the payout unit 53 according to a signal (payout control command) from the game control device 100, and controls for paying out the prize balls. Further, the payout control device 200 drives the payout motor 222 based on the BRQ signal (rental request signal) from the card unit (CR unit) 551 connected to the card unit connection board 54, and pays out the rental ball. Control to make it.
Further, an operation panel board 552 is connected to the card unit connection board 54, and the operation panel board 552 is a ball lending LED, a balance indicator, a ball lending switch, and a return switch provided in the pachinko machine 1. (Not shown) etc. are connected. The operation panel board 552 receives signals from the ball lending LED, balance indicator, etc. from the card unit (CR unit) 551, and sends operation signals from the ball lending switch and return switch to the card unit (CR unit) 551 for lending. The controls required to pay out the ball are performed.
Although not shown, the RAM area of the payout control device 200 is also configured to supply backup power from the power supply device 500 in the event of a power failure.

The payout control device 200 sends a prize ball signal (information on the number of balls paid out as a prize ball) created based on the payout command received from the game control device 100 to the management device 140 as an external device via the external information terminal board 55. At the same time, the unique ID of the payout control device 200, specifically, the individual identification information (payout unique ID) that can identify the payout microcomputer 201 is output to the management device 140 via the external information terminal plate 55.
When the card unit 551 determines the validity of the payout unique ID, the payout unique ID is output to the card unit 551 via the external information terminal plate 55.
The external information terminal plate 55 is connected to the payout control device 200 by a cable, and relays when transmitting the prize ball signal and the unique ID (payout unique ID) of the payout control device 200 to the management device 140 as an external device. ..
Here, the payout control device 200 constitutes a slave control means and a payout board unique identification information output means.

The launch control device 400 receives the necessary power supply from the payout control device 200, and also receives a launch permission signal and a power failure detection signal. The launch control device 400 controls the launch motor 401 that launches the game ball according to the operation of the launch operation handle 11, and signals from the touch switch 402 and the launch stop switch 403 are input to the launch control device 400. The touch switch 402 detects whether or not the player is touching the launch operation handle 11, and the launch stop switch 403 temporarily stops the launch of the game ball and is operated by the player. Is.

Next, the detailed configuration of the game control device 100 will be described with reference to FIG.
The game control device 100 is a main control device that controls the game in an integrated manner, corresponds to a main board (that is, a circuit formed on the main board), and specifically comprises the circuit shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 5, the game control device 100 includes a CPU unit 150 having a game microcomputer (that is, a game microcomputer) 101, an input unit 151 having an input port and the like, and an output unit 152 having an output port and the like. It is composed of a data bus 153 or the like that connects the CPU unit 150, the input unit 151, and the output unit 152.

The CPU unit 150 includes a gaming microcomputer 101 called an amusement chip (IC), an inverter that logically inverts a signal (starting winning detection signal) from a proximity I / F163, which will be described later, and inputs the signal to the gaming microcomputer 101. It includes an inverting circuit 112, an oscillator such as a crystal oscillator, and an oscillation circuit 113 that generates an operating clock of a CPU, a timer interrupt, and a clock that serves as a reference for a random number generation circuit.
The gaming microcomputer 101 includes a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 101A, a read-only ROM (read-only memory) 101B, and a RAM (random access memory) 101C that can be read and written at any time.

The ROM 101B non-volatilely stores invariant information (programs, fixed data, determination values of various random numbers, etc.) for game control, and the RAM 101C stores the work area of the CPU 101A and various signals and random number values during game control. It is used as. As the ROM 101B or the RAM 101C, an electrically rewritable non-volatile memory such as EEPROM may be used.

The CPU 101A executes a game control program in the ROM 101B to generate control signals (commands) for the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300, and is used to generate a control signal (command) for the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300. The entire pachinko machine 1 is controlled by generating a drive signal for the large winning opening solenoid 134 and the batch display device 35.
Further, although not shown, the gaming microcomputer 101 hardware-likes a random number for determining a big hit in a special figure variation display game, a random number for a big hit symbol for determining a big hit symbol, a random number for determining a hit in a normal figure variation display game, and the like. A random number generation circuit for generating the clock, and a clock that gives the CPU 101A a timer interrupt signal with a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) and an update timing of the random number generation circuit based on the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113. It is equipped with a clock generator that generates.

Here, electronic components such as the game control device 100 and the general electric solenoid 132 driven by the game control device 100, the first special winning opening solenoid 133, and the second special winning opening solenoid 134 are generated by the power supply device 500. A predetermined level of DC voltage such as DC32V, DC12V, DC5V is supplied to enable operation.
The power supply device 500 is a normal power supply having an AC-DC converter that generates a DC voltage of DC32V from a 24V AC power supply, a DC-DC converter that generates a lower level DC voltage such as DC12V, DC5V, etc. from a voltage of DC32V. It has a unit 501, a backup power supply unit 502 that supplies a power supply voltage to the internal RAM of the game microcomputer 101 in the event of a power failure, a power failure monitoring circuit, and an initialization switch, and notifies the game control device 100 of the occurrence and recovery of the power failure. It includes a control signal generation unit 503 that generates and outputs control signals such as a power failure monitoring signal, an initialization switch signal, and a reset signal.

In this embodiment, the power supply device 500 is configured separately from the game control device 100, but the backup power supply unit 502 and the control signal generation unit 503 are integrated on a separate substrate or with the game control device 100, that is, the main unit. It may be configured to be provided on the substrate. However, since the game board 20 and the game control device 100 are to be replaced when the model is changed, the backup power supply unit 502 and the control signal generation unit 503 are mounted on a board different from the power supply device 500 or the main board in this way. By providing it, it is possible to reduce the cost by excluding it from the target of replacement when changing the model.

The backup power supply unit 502 can be configured by one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power supply is supplied to the game microcomputer 101 (particularly the built-in RAM 101C) of the game control device 100, and the data stored in the RAM is retained even during a power failure or even after the power is cut off. The control signal generation unit 503 monitors, for example, the voltage of 32V generated by the normal power supply unit 501, and when it drops to, for example, 17V or less, changes the power failure monitoring signal (for example, turns it on) assuming that a power failure has occurred. At the same time, a reset signal is output after a predetermined time. Also, when the power is turned on or when the power is restored, a reset signal is output after a predetermined time has elapsed from that point.

The initialization switch signal is a signal generated when the RAM clear switch 504 (initialization switch) is turned on, and is information stored in the RAM 101C in the gaming microcomputer 101 and the RAM in the payout control device 200. Is forcibly initialized. In the case of this example, the initialization switch signal is read when the power is turned on, and the power failure monitoring signal is repeatedly read in the main loop of the main program executed by the gaming microcomputer 101. The reset signal resets the entire control system.

Next, the input unit 151 of the game control device 100 is provided with a first input port 160, a second input port 161 and a third input port 162 as input ports. The input unit 151 includes a first start port switch 120, a second start port switch 121, a gate switch 122, a winning port switch 123, a lower count switch 124, an upper count switch 125, a magnetic sensor 126, a radio wave sensor 127, and a glass frame. The detection signals from the open detection switch 211 and the front frame open detection switch 212 are input.
The input unit 151 is provided with an interface chip (proximity I / F) 163 that converts the detection signals input from the switches 120 to 124 and 127 into 0V-5V positive logic signals. Since the input range of the proximity I / F163 is 7V-11V, the lead wire of the proximity switch (each of the above switches 120 to 124, 127) is illegally shorted, the switch is disconnected from the connector, or the lead is read. An abnormal state such as a wire being cut and floating can be detected, and when such an abnormal state is detected, an abnormality detection signal is output. Further, in order to enable the signal level conversion function as described above, the proximity I / F 163 is supplied with a voltage of 12 V in addition to the voltage such as 5 V required for normal IC operation from the power supply device 500. ing.

Here, a part of the output of the proximity I / F 163 (excluding the abnormality detection signal) (output from each of the above switches 120 to 124) is supplied to the second input port 161 and is supplied to the game microcomputer via the data bus 153. At the same time as being read by 101, it is supplied from the game control device 100 as the main board to the test firing test device 131 via the relay board 170.
Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 163, the detection signal of the radio wave sensor 127 is supplied to the third input port 162 and read into the gaming microcomputer 101 via the data bus 153.
Of the outputs of the proximity I / F 163, the detection signals of the first start port switch 120 and the second start port switch 121 are input to the gaming microcomputer 101 via the inverting circuit 112 in addition to the second input port 161. It is configured. The inverting circuit 112 is provided on the assumption that the signal input terminal of the gaming microcomputer 101 receives a signal from a microswitch or the like, and detects negative logic, that is, the low level (0V) as an effective level. Because it is designed to do. If the signal input terminal of the gaming microcomputer 101 can detect positive logic as an effective level, the inverting circuit 112 becomes unnecessary.
Further, the signal from the lower count switch 124 among the outputs of the proximity I / F 163 is supplied to the third input port 162 as the abnormality detection signal 1, and is read into the gaming microcomputer 101 via the data bus 153. There is.

The detection signal from the upper count switch 125 is input to the proximity I / F 165.
Here, the reason why the above-mentioned proximity I / F163 and proximity I / F165 are provided is that the number of input terminals of the proximity I / F163 is limited. The proximity I / F165 is smaller than the proximity I / F163 according to the number of insufficient input terminals, thereby reducing the cost. It should be noted that a proximity I / F 163 having a required number of input terminals may be used, and the proximity I / F 165 may not be provided.
The proximity I / F165 is an interface chip that converts the detection signal input from the upper count switch 125 into a positive logic signal of 0V-5V, and the input range is 7V-11V like the proximity I / F163. As a result, it is possible to detect an abnormal state in which the lead wire of the proximity switch (upper count switch 125 above) is illegally short-circuited, the switch is disconnected from the connector, or the lead wire is disconnected and floats. It is configured to output an abnormality detection signal when an abnormal state is detected. Further, in order to enable the signal level conversion function as described above, the proximity I / F165 is supplied with a voltage of 12V in addition to the voltage such as 5V required for normal IC operation from the power supply device 500. ing.
Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 165, the signal from the upper count switch 125 is supplied to the 3 input port 162 as the abnormality detection signal 2, and is read into the gaming microcomputer 101 via the data bus 153.
Further, the output of the upper count switch 125 is supplied to the second input port 161 via the proximity I / F 165, read into the game microcomputer 101 via the data bus 153, and relayed from the game control device 100 as the main board. It is supplied to the test firing test apparatus 131 via the substrate 170.

As described above, the signal from the magnetic sensor 126 is input to the third input port 162, the signal from the radio wave sensor 127 is input via the proximity I / F 163, and the signal from the upper count switch 125 is abnormal. The detection signal 2 is input via the proximity I / F 165, and the signal from the lower count switch 124 is input as the abnormality detection signal 1 via the proximity I / F 163.
In addition, when the magnetic sensor 126 is described, although the magnetic sensor switch 126 is shown as one in FIG. 5, this is only one input to the game control device 100, and is actually one. A plurality of magnetic sensors (4 in this example) are mounted and wired or connected on a relay board (existing between the sensor and the main board, not shown).
Here, the data held by the third input port 162 asserts the enable signal CE3 (changes to an effective level) by decoding the address assigned to the third input port 162 by the gaming microcomputer 101. Therefore, it can be read (as well as other ports). The enable signal of the first input port 160 is CE1, and the enable signal of the second input port 161 is CE2.

On the other hand, signals from the glass frame opening detection switch 211 and the front frame opening detection switch 212, and signals from the payout control device 200 are input to the first input port 160. Then, these signals are supplied from the first input port 160 to the gaming microcomputer 101 via the data bus 153. The signal from the payout control device 200 includes a status signal indicating a payout abnormality, a shoot ball out switch signal indicating a shortage of game balls before payout, and an overflow switch signal indicating an overflow. The overflow switch signal is a signal output when it is detected that a predetermined amount or more of game balls are stored (full) in the lower plate 10.

Further, the input unit 151 is provided with a Schmitt trigger circuit 164 for inputting signals such as a power failure monitoring signal, an initialization switch signal, and a reset signal from the power supply device 500 to the game microcomputer 101 or the like, and is provided with a Schmitt trigger circuit. The 164 has a function of removing noise from these input signals. Of the signals from the power supply device 500, the power failure monitoring signal and the initialization switch signal are once input to the first input port 160, and are taken into the gaming microcomputer 101 via the data bus 153. That is, it is treated as a signal equivalent to the signal from the various switches described above. This is because there is a limit to the number of terminals provided on the gaming microcomputer 101 that receive signals from the outside.

On the other hand, the reset signal RST whose noise has been removed by the Schmitt trigger circuit 164 is directly input to the reset terminal provided in the gaming microcomputer 101, and is also input to each port of the output unit 152 (ports 171, 175, 176, which will be described later). It is supplied to 177, 180). Further, the reset signal RST is output directly to the relay board 170 without going through the output unit 152, so that the test firing test signal held in the port (not shown) of the relay board 170 is turned off in order to output to the test firing test device. It is configured as follows.
Further, the reset signal RST may be configured to be output to the test firing test apparatus via the relay board 170. The reset signal RST is not supplied to the input ports 160 to 162 of the input unit 151. The data set in each port of the output unit 152 by the gaming microcomputer 101 just before the reset signal RST is input needs to be reset in order to prevent the system from malfunctioning, but each of the input units 151 immediately before the reset signal RST is input. This is because the data read by the game microcomputer 101 from the port is discarded by resetting the game microcomputer 101.

Next, the output unit 152 of the game control device 100 includes a first port 171 and a third port 175, a fourth port 176, a fifth port 177, and a sixth port 180 as output ports connected to the data bus 153. .. Data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the payout control device 200 by parallel communication via the first port 171. Further, data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 200 by serial communication via a buffer (Schmitt trigger buffer) 173.
The first port 171 generates a 4-bit data signal (for example, a command or data for paying out a prize ball) to be output to the payout control device 200, and a control signal (data strobe signal) indicating validity / invalidity of this data signal. do.
The buffer 173 sends a data signal from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 in order to prevent a signal from being input to the game control device 100 from the side of the effect control device 300, that is, to secure one-way communication. A unidirectional buffer that only allows output. A similar buffer may be provided for the signal output from the first port 171 to the payout control device 200.

The third port 175 is a first large winning opening solenoid 133 that opens and closes the opening / closing member 27b of the variable winning device 27, a second large winning opening solenoid 134 that opens / closes the opening / closing member 33a of the second variable winning device 33, and a second start winning prize. It is an output port for outputting each opening / closing data of a solenoid (hereinafter, appropriately referred to as a normal electric solenoid) 132 for opening / closing the opening / closing member 26a of the mouth 26.
The fourth port 176 is an output port for outputting on / off data of the segment line to which the anode terminal of the LED is connected according to the content to be displayed on the batch display device 35.
The fifth port 177 is an output port for outputting on / off data of the digit line to which the cathode terminal of the LED of the batch display device 35 is connected.
The sixth port 180 is an output port for outputting information about the pachinko machine 1 such as jackpot information to the external information terminal board 55 as an external information signal (external information shown in FIG. 4). The information output from the external information terminal board 55 is supplied to, for example, an information collection terminal or a management device 140 installed in a game store. Further, a photo relay 55a is mounted on the external information terminal plate 55, and the external information, the unique ID of the game control device 100 (the unique ID of the main board), and the unique ID of the payout control device 200 (the unique ID of the payout control device 200) are mounted on the external information terminal plate 55. The payout unique ID) is transmitted to the management device 140 as an external device. Since the photocoupler has polarity, it is necessary to pay attention to the connection, but if the photo relay 55a is used as described above, the polarity is unnecessary and there is an advantage that it is convenient.
When the card unit 551 determines the validity of the payout unique ID, the payout unique ID is output to the card unit 551 via the external information terminal plate 55.

It should be noted that the output unit 152 outputs data for notifying the special symbol information of the variable display game and a signal indicating the probability state of the jackpot to the test firing test device of the accreditation body which is connected to the data bus 153 via the relay board 170. The buffer 174 to be mounted is configured to be mountable. This buffer 174 is a component that is not mounted on the game control device 100 (main board) of the pachinko machine 1 as an actual machine (mass production product) installed in a game store. The detection signal of a switch that does not need to be processed, such as the start port SW output from the proximity I / F 163, is supplied to the test firing test apparatus via the relay board 170 without passing through the buffer 174.

On the other hand, a detection signal such as the magnetic sensor 126 and the radio wave sensor 127 that cannot be supplied to the test firing test device as it is is once taken into the game microcomputer 101 and processed into other signals or information, for example, the game machine cannot control the game. As an error signal indicating the state, it is supplied from the data bus 153 to the test firing test apparatus via the buffer 174 and the relay board 170. The relay board 170 is provided with a port that takes in the signal output from the buffer 174 and supplies it to the test firing test apparatus, a connector that relays and transmits the signal line of the switch detection signal that does not pass through the buffer, and the like. ing. A chip enable signal CE output from the gaming microcomputer 101 is also supplied to the port on the relay board 170, and the signal of the port selectively controlled by the signal CE is supplied to the test firing test apparatus.

Further, the output unit 152 is provided with a plurality of drive circuits (first driver 178a to fourth driver 178d). The first driver 178a receives each opening / closing data signal of the first special winning opening solenoid 133, the second special winning opening solenoid 134, and the general electric solenoid 132 output from the third port 175, and generates the respective solenoid drive signals. And output. The second driver 178b outputs an on / off drive signal of the segment line on the current supply side of the batch display device 35 output from the fourth port 176. The third driver 178c outputs an on / off drive signal of the digit line on the current drawing side of the batch display device 35 output from the fifth port 177. The fourth driver 178d outputs an external information signal supplied from the sixth port 180 to an external device such as a management device to the external information terminal board 55.

In the first driver 178a, DC32V is supplied from the power supply device 500 as the power supply voltage so that the first special winning opening solenoid 133, the second winning opening solenoid 134, and the general electric solenoid 132 operating at 32V can be driven. Supplied.
Further, DC12V is supplied to the second driver 178b that drives the segment line. Further, since the third driver 178c for driving the digit wire is for pulling out the digit wire corresponding to the display data with a current, the power supply voltage may be either 12V or 5V. In the batch display device 35, a second driver 178b that outputs 12V causes a current to flow into the anode terminal of the predetermined LED via the segment line, and a third driver 178c that outputs the ground potential causes the cathode terminal of the predetermined LED. When the current is drawn from the segment wire, the power supply voltage flows through the LEDs sequentially selected by the dynamic drive method, and the predetermined LED is turned on. Further, since the fourth driver 178d gives a level of 12V to the external information signal, DC12V is supplied.

Further, the output unit 152 is provided with a photocoupler 179 for transmitting information such as an identification code and a program of each gaming machine to an external inspection device 180. The photocoupler 179 is configured so that the gaming microcomputer 101 can communicate with the inspection device 180 by serial communication. Since such data transmission / reception is performed using the serial communication terminal of the gaming microcomputer 101 as in the case of a normal general-purpose microprocessor, ports such as input ports 160 to 162 are not provided.

Next, the configuration of the effect control device 300 and the device connected to the effect control device 300 will be described in detail with reference to FIG.
In this embodiment, the effect control device 300 is a slave control means, a scenario data setting means, a screen creation means, an effect control means, an effect button control means, an effect content control means, a character data storage means, a motion table storage means, and a scenario table storage. A means, a background type selection means, and a background effect means are configured.
Similar to the game microcomputer 101, the effect control device 300 includes a main control microcomputer (1st CPU) 311 composed of an amusement chip (IC) and image processing for displaying images on the display device 41 according to commands and data from the 1st CPU 311. It is provided with a VDP (Video Display Processor) 312 as a graphic processor for performing the above, and a sound source LSI 313 that controls sound output in order to reproduce various melody and sound effects from the speakers 12a and 12b.
Here, in addition to the main control microcomputer (1st CPU) 311, a video control microcomputer (2nd CPU) that exclusively performs image control under the control of the 1st CPU 311 is arranged to include two CPUs, and the VDP is a command from the 2nd CPU. Although it is conceivable that the image processing for displaying the image on the display device 41 is performed according to the data and the data, in this embodiment, only the high-performance 1st CPU 311 is provided, which is advantageous in terms of arrangement space and cost.
It should be noted that a configuration may be adopted in which two, a main control microcomputer (1st CPU) and a video control microcomputer (2nd CPU) that exclusively performs video control under the control of the 1st CPU, are arranged.

A PROM (programmable read-only memory) 321 and an RTC (real time clock) 325 storing a program executed by the CPU are connected to the main control microcomputer (1st CPU) 311 and a VDP 312 is connected to the main control microcomputer (1st CPU) 311.
The RTC325 is a clock element that ticks the time, and can be set to the actual time by setting, and the clock signal is sent to the main control microcomputer 311. The main control microcomputer 311 uses the signal from the RTC325, for example. It is possible to control the time-related effects such as event announcements and special effects at amusement stores.
On the other hand, an image ROM 322 in which character images and video data are stored is connected to the VDP 312, and an audio ROM 323 in which audio data is stored is connected to the sound source LSI 313. A plurality of moving images (movies) are stored as video data in the image ROM 322.
Here, the character data is stored in the image ROM 322, but the motion data representing the movement information of the character and the scenario data defining the connection of the motion data are stored in the PROM 321.
The image ROM 322 corresponds to the character data storage means, and the PROM (control ROM) 321 corresponds to the motion table storage means and the scenario table storage means.
The main control microcomputer 311 analyzes the control command (data signal output from the buffer 173) from the game microcomputer 101 of the game control device 100, determines the effect content, and displays the content of the output image of the display device 41. It executes processing such as instructing, instructing the sound source LSI 313 of the reproduced sound, and driving control of the decoration devices 42 and 43 and the effect devices 44 and 45 described above.
Here, in this embodiment, the display device 41, the board decoration device 42, the frame decoration device 43, the board effect device 44, the frame effect device 45, the speakers 12a, 12b, and the like constitute the effect means.

For example, when executing a variable display game, a command including data of a combination of stop symbols (result mode) and data of a reach system (or variable time) from the game control device 100 (for example, a variable pattern command described later). However, the main control microcomputer 311 receives the transmission to the effect control device 300, selects the stop mode and the fluctuation mode satisfying the fluctuation time, and displays the display device 41 via the VDP 312. It is configured to control a special figure variation display game in which a predetermined special figure is variablely displayed and finally a specific combination of symbols (result mode) is derived and displayed.
It should be noted that the mode such as the variation display of the special figure actually executed by the control of the effect control device 300 may be uniquely determined by the command from the game control device 100, but the conditions given by the above command may be determined. Within the range, the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 is configured to finally select the mode by random number extraction or the like (the effect control device 300 is also configured to select the mode with some discretion). There is.
Therefore, in this embodiment, the random number is updated at least once every control cycle of the main process using the land function, and the random number seed value is updated every time a predetermined condition is satisfied. Random numbers are generated based on the generation sequence specified by the value.

Here, the RAM 311a that provides the work area of the main control microcomputer 311 is provided inside the chip. The RAM 311a that provides the work area may be provided outside the chip.
Further, although not particularly limited, data is transmitted and received in a serial manner between the main control microcomputer 311 and the sound source LSI 313, and data is transmitted and received in a parallel manner between the main control microcomputer 311 and the VDP 312. Is configured to be transmitted and received. In general, by transmitting and receiving data in a parallel manner, commands and data can be transmitted in a shorter time than in the case of serial.
The VDP 312 includes an ultra-high-speed VRAM (video RAM) 312a used for developing and processing image data such as characters read from the image ROM 322, and a scaler for enlarging / reducing an image. 312b, a signal conversion circuit 312c for generating a video signal to be transmitted to the display device 41 by the LVDS (small amplitude signal transmission) method and the like are provided.

A vertical synchronization signal VSYNC is input from the VDP 312 to the main control microcomputer 311 in order to synchronize the image of the display device 41 with the lighting of the lamps provided on the glass frame 5 and the game board 20. Further, the VDP 312 is in a state of waiting for reception of interrupt signals INT0 to n and commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311 in order to notify the processing status such as the end of drawing to the VRAM to the main control microcomputer 311. The wait signal WAIT for notifying is input. Further, a call signal CTS and a response signal RTS are exchanged between the main control microcomputer 311 and the sound source LSI 313 in order to send and receive commands and data by a handshake method.

Further, the effect control device 300 is provided with an interface circuit (command I / F) 331 for receiving a command (data signal output from the buffer 173) transmitted from the game microcomputer 101 of the game control device 100. ing. Through this command I / F331, control commands from the game microcomputer 101, such as a decorative special figure hold number command, a special figure type / symbol information command, a variable pattern random number command, a customer waiting demo command, a variable pattern command, and The main control microcomputer 311 receives a fanfare command or the like.
The command transmitted from the game microcomputer 101 of the game control device 100 is stored in the RAM 311a which is built in the main control microcomputer 311 and provides a work area as needed.
In this case, the command is stored in an area such as the command storage area of the RAM 311a. Specifically, among the commands sent from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300, for example, when a set of variation pattern commands and symbol commands are sequentially transmitted, these commands are stored in the command storage area of the storage area of the RAM 311a. The command storage area is read out from the command storage area when the set is formed, and the main control microcomputer 311 executes the effect processing. The command storage area may be divided into a first command storage area and a second command storage area.
In the first embodiment of this time, the command is sent in the order of stop symbol command → fluctuation pattern command.
When the configuration of sending the fluctuation pattern command → the symbol stop command is adopted, for example, when the fluctuation pattern command sent earlier is received, the effect control device 300 relates to the effect of the RAM 311a of the main control microcomputer 311. The operation of setting the storage area to the default value (for example, the symbol stopped state in the outlier symbol) may be performed. In that case, the above-mentioned "storage area for effect" is an area for setting a default value, and is separated from the command storage area.

Further, in order to receive and analyze a command transmitted from the game microcomputer 101 of the game control device 100, the RAM 311a built in the main control microcomputer 311 and providing a work area has a receive command buffer (hereinafter referred to as a reception command buffer). , It may be abbreviated as a receive buffer as appropriate) and an analysis data storage area is provided.
The receive buffer stores the receive commands in order, and the ring buffer format is used.
Here, the ring buffer is an area for temporarily storing data in which a certain memory area is controlled so as to look like a ring-shaped memory area. By using such a ring buffer, It is possible to perform transmission processing and reception processing separately, and it is also effective for preventing data loss and avoiding congestion in command reception processing.
On the other hand, in the analysis data storage area, among the commands stored in the receive buffer, a predetermined number of commands are stored by copying, and the FIFO (First-in-First-out) format that performs first-in first-out processing is used. Has been done.
Here, the FIFO is one of the methods for storing and retrieving data, and is a method of retrieving the first stored data first (that is, first-in first-out).
Using FIFO has the advantage that high-speed communication processing can be performed and communication and data reading can be performed asynchronously.
The reception command buffer corresponds to the reception buffer means, and the analysis data storage area corresponds to the analysis data storage means.
Since the game microcomputer 101 of the game control device 100 operates at DC 5 V and the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 operates at DC 3.3 V, the command I / F 331 is provided with a signal level conversion function. There is.

Further, the effect control device 300 includes a panel decoration LED control circuit 332 that drives and controls the LED of the panel decoration device 42, a frame decoration LED control circuit 333 that drives and controls the LED of the frame decoration device 43, and the panel. A panel effect motor / SOL control circuit 334 that drives and controls the motor and solenoid of the effect device 44, and a frame effect motor control circuit 335 that drives and controls the motor of the frame effect device 45 (for example, the motor that operates the moving light 14). Is provided. These control circuits 332 to 335 are connected to the main control microcomputer (1st CPU) 311 via the address / data bus 340. A light emitting source other than the LED may be used as the light emitting source of the board decoration device 42 and the frame decoration device 43.

Further, in the effect control device 300, the effect button SW46 built in the effect button 9 provided in the glass frame 5, the board effect device 44, and the effect motor SW47 that detects the initial position of the motor in the frame effect device 45. 337a is an amplifier circuit consisting of a SW input circuit 336 that detects the on / off state of and inputs a detection signal to the main control microcomputer (1st CPU) 311 and an audio power amplifier that drives the upper speaker 12a provided in the glass frame 5. , An amplifier circuit 337b for driving the lower speaker 12b provided on the operation panel 6 is provided.

The normal power supply unit 501 of the power supply device 500 drives a motor or a solenoid in order to supply a desired level of DC voltage to the effect control device 300 having the above configuration and the electronic components controlled by the effect control device 300. DC32V, DC12V for driving the display device 41 composed of a liquid crystal panel, DC5V for driving the power supply voltage of the command I / F331, DC18V for driving the above-mentioned LEDs and speakers 12a and 12b, and their DC voltages. It is configured to generate a voltage of 24V NDC used as a reference or to turn on a power monitor lamp. Further, when an LSI operating at a low voltage such as 3.3V or 1.2V is used as the main control microcomputer (1st CPU) 311 to generate DC3.3V or DC1.2V based on DC5V. DC-DC converter is provided in the effect control device 300. The DC-DC converter may be provided in the normal power supply unit 501.

The reset signal RST generated by the control signal generation unit 503 of the power supply device 500 is supplied to the main control microcomputer 311 and VDP 312, the sound source LSI 313, the above-mentioned control circuits 332 to 335, and the amplifier circuits 337a and 337b, and these are in the reset state. To. Further, in this embodiment, it is configured to have a function of generating and supplying a reset signal for the VDP 312 by using a general-purpose port of the main control microcomputer 311. As a result, it is possible to improve the cooperation between the operations of the main control microcomputer 311 and the VDP 312.

Further, in this embodiment, the effect control device 300 is provided with a wireless module 360, and the wireless module 360 is composed of a CPU 360a, a ROM 360b, and a RAM 360c. A predetermined power supply is supplied to the wireless module 360 from the power supply device 500.
The wireless module 360 is connected to the main control microcomputer 311 and wirelessly communicates between its own gaming machine (pachinko machine 1) and another gaming machine 370 according to a command from the main control microcomputer 311 (communication between subs described later). And exchange information on the status of each other's gaming machines by the communication, control the transmission and exchange of images and characters, and synchronize the images and characters that are related to each other to the display device of each gaming machine. Display while synchronizing. The CPU 360a performs processing such as control of wireless communication and transmission of images and characters, the ROM 360b stores a program executed by the CPU 360a, and the RAM 360c is used as a work area.
The wireless module 360 corresponds to a communication means.

The setting switch 371 is arranged on a different gaming machine number (for example, one gaming island) for each gaming machine so that the source and destination gaming machines can be specified when exchanging data between a plurality of gaming machines. If there are 10 gaming machines, Nos. 1 to 10 (n) if there are n gaming machines)) can be operated by the staff of the gaming store in order from the left. For example, by the above-mentioned inter-sub communication, it is possible to display the same image or character on all the gaming machines arranged on the island, or to display images or characters related to each other while synchronizing or synchronizing them. It is possible by the operation of 371. Further, by using the above-mentioned gaming machine number, it is possible to perform the above-mentioned effect only between two specific gaming machines.
The gaming machine number may be defined based on, for example, the unique ID set in the wireless module, but in this case, since the value of the unique ID of the wireless module is almost random, the arrangement of the gaming machines is specified. If it is difficult to do so and you want to create a production in which group notices flow in order from the leftmost gaming machine on the island, the gaming machine or management device that will be the master for managing the location information of each gaming machine. It takes time and effort because it is necessary to provide.
Therefore, in this embodiment, since the production table can be specified and produced by the manual setting by the setting switch 371 that can simply specify the game machines on the island in order, anyone can easily operate the production and the production is described above. Can be easily controlled.
Further, the setting switch 371 may be used not for setting the location information but for setting the control content of the wireless module 360 in a plurality of stages and switching and selecting according to the business form of the amusement store.

In the case of this example, the circuit board constituting the effect control device 300 corresponds to the sub control board. As described above, the effect control device 300 (sub-control board) that controls the display device 41 controls speakers, lamps, moving parts for decoration, and the like, which will be described later. The main board indirectly controls the movable part and the like by sending a control command to the sub control board. Therefore, the hardware configuration such as the wiring pattern of the main board is basically the same even if the model is different, and by installing the game program for each model on the game machine microcomputer 101, the main board is technically used as a model. Can be shared even if the brand is different.

Next, the configuration of the VDP (Video Display Processor) 312 will be described in detail with reference to FIG.
The VDP 312 includes a CPUI / F601, a data transfer circuit 602, a CG bus I / F603, a compressed data expansion circuit 604, a drawing circuit 605, a first VRAM 606, a second VRAM 607, and a display circuit 608. Necessary circuits are connected to each other via 611.
The VDP 312 is connected to the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 via the CPUI / F601 and is connected to the image ROM 322 via the CG bus I / F603. Then, the VDP 312 basically creates image data for each frame to be displayed on the display device 41 according to an instruction from the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300, and outputs the image data to the display device 41 via the display circuit 608. do. The first VRAM 606 is mainly used as a RAM for a frame buffer, specifically, for example, a RAM for a frame buffer or a Z buffer (in the case of three dimensions, the amount in the Z-axis direction). On the other hand, the second VRAM 607 is mainly used as a RAM for drawing materials that stores data for materials.

The data of the image ROM 322 is stored in the second VRAM 607 via the CG bus I / F603. The compressed data is decompressed by the compressed data decompression circuit 604 and stored in the second VRAM 607, and is also stored in the first VRAM 606 as needed.
The drawing circuit 605 mainly processes the drawing material stored in the second VRAM 607 (for example, various effects, enlargement, reduction, etc.), and displays the position and order (for example, from the back to the front of the screen). The image data of one frame is created and stored in the first VRAM 606 by controlling the display order on the screen.

The display circuit 608 has a scaler 608a and an LVDSI / F608b.
Then, the display circuit 608 sets the image data of one frame stored in the first VRAM 606 to the signal level of the LVDS specification at the setting timing of the interlaced mode or the non-interlaced mode, and outputs the RGB data to the display device 41. It is also possible to enlarge the display area of the image data by the scaler 608a (for example, change from VGA to XGA) and display the image data. For example, in the case of VGA, the image size is 640 × 480, and in the case of XGA, the image size is 1024 × 768.
The data transfer circuit 602 has a data transfer function such as between the main control microcomputer 311 and the first VRAM 606, between the main control microcomputer 311 and the drawing circuit 605, and between the CG bus I / F 603 and the first VRAM 606.

E. Outline of the game Next, the outline of the game performed by the pachinko machine 1 of this example and the flow of the game will be described.
First, at the beginning of the game (or before the start of the game), the customer waiting state (during the demonstration) is set, and the command for instructing the display of the customer waiting screen is the buffer of the game control device 100 (for example, the same). The function is transmitted from the buffer 173 (corresponding to the buffer 173) to the effect control device 300, and the customer waiting screen (moving image or still image) is displayed on the display unit 41a of the display device.

Then, when the game ball driven into the game area 22 via the guide rail 21 wins the start winning opening 25 or 26 of the special figure (that is, when there is a start winning of the special figure), the variable display of the special figure is displayed. Is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300, and a display (so-called variable display) in which the special figure (consisting of numbers, characters, symbols, patterns, etc.) fluctuates (for example, scrolls) is displayed on the display unit 41a. ) Is performed, and a special figure variable display game (hereinafter referred to as a special figure variable display game) is played.

Then, if the stop result mode of this variable display game (combination of special figures derived by the variable display) is a special result mode (for example, doublets such as "3, 3, 3"), a privilege called a big hit is given. Granted to the player. In terms of control, for example, on condition that there is a start prize, a value such as a jackpot random number is extracted and stored, and the extracted and stored random number value and a preset determination value are compared and determined at the time of determination. Based on the comparison determination result, it is determined in advance whether or not to make a big hit, and the variable display game is started according to this determination.
Further, in the normal mode, if the stop result mode of the variable display game is a specific mode among the special result modes (for example, doublets of "7, 7, 7"), the jackpot is obtained and after the jackpot game. (After the special prize period described later), the game state shifts from the normal mode to the probability change mode. In this probability variation mode, control is performed to increase the probability that the special figure will be a big hit (hereinafter referred to as the big hit probability of the special figure). In some cases, so-called time reduction (shortening the variable display time of special figures or the like to increase the frequency of the variable display game and make it easier to hit) is also performed.

When the jackpot is reached and the jackpot state is entered, the first jackpot of the variable winning device 27 is set to the specified time after the fanfare period (the period during which the output of the sound effect that produces the jackpot is executed). Within the range not exceeding (for example, 30 seconds), for example, an opening operation (big hit round) that is temporarily opened only for a period up to 10 winnings is performed. Then, this opening operation is repeated for a predetermined number of rounds. Further, in this big hit state, a command for directing the display of the big hit screen for producing the big hit state and notifying the player of the number of big hit rounds is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300, and the display unit. In 41a, such a display during the jackpot is executed.

The special prize period is the period during which the jackpot is in state (the fanfare period, the period of the jackpot round with the jackpot open, the interval period between the jackpot round and the next jackpot round, and the ending period). Corresponds to.
Further, as the number of rounds of the jackpot, for example, a 15-round jackpot is usually the main jackpot, but a 16R jackpot may be generated as a premier, or another configuration may be used. In addition, there may be a two-round jackpot or the like as a so-called sudden probability (a sudden probability change in which the jackpot probability changes via a jackpot with a small number of balls).
Further, when the stop result mode of the variable display game by the display device 41 becomes a special mode (for example, a special item such as "3, special symbol, 3"), a privilege called a special jackpot is generated, and the second variable winning device Within the range where the opening / closing member 33a of 33 does not exceed a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), an opening operation (big hit round) is performed in which the opening / closing member 33a is temporarily opened for a period up to, for example, five prizes. Then, this opening operation is repeated for a predetermined number of rounds.

On the other hand, when a game ball further wins in the start winning opening 25 or 26 during the variable display game of the special figure or during the big hit, the display unit 41a or the like performs a hold display of the start memory of the special figure, for example, four. After the variable display game or the jackpot state is completed, the variable display game of the above-mentioned special figure is repeated or returned to the customer waiting state based on the start memory.
That is, if the variable display game ends with a big hit, it shifts to the big hit state, if the variable display game ends with a miss and there is a start memory, the variable display game is executed again, and the variable display game ends with a miss and there is no start memory. For example, the game returns to the customer waiting state, and if the jackpot ends and there is a start memory, the variable display game is executed again, and if the jackpot ends and there is no start memory, the game returns to the customer waiting state.

In this embodiment, for example, two types of special figure start memory (special figure start memory) are displayed (special figure 1 hold display and special figure 2 hold display), and there are two types of special figure variation display games. The variable display game (first variable display game and second variable display game) is executed. That is, when a special figure start prize (first start prize) occurs when the game ball enters the first start winning opening 25, the display device 41 plays the first variable display game by the variable display of the special figure 1. Then, when the game ball wins the first start winning opening 25 during any of the special figure variation display games, one first start memory (starting memory corresponding to the special figure 1 hold display) is stored in this. On the other hand, after the end of the special figure variation display game or the like, the first variation display game by the variation display of the special figure 1 is performed on the display device 41.
Further, when there is a special figure start prize (second start prize) due to the game ball entering the second start winning opening 26, the display device 41 plays the second variable display game by the variable display of the special figure 2. Then, when the game ball wins the second start winning opening 26 during any of the special figure variation display games, one second start memory (starting memory corresponding to the special figure 2 hold display) is stored in this. On the other hand, after the end of the special figure variation display game or the like, the display device 41 is configured to play the second variation display game by the variation display of the special figure 2.
When both the first start memory and the second start memory are available, either the first variable display game or the second variable display game is executed first according to a preset rule. For example, a mode in which the second variable display game corresponding to the second start winning opening 26 is preferentially played (that is, a mode in which the second start memory is preferentially digested), or two types of variable display games are in the order of winning. There may be aspects such as those performed.

On the other hand, when the game ball passes through the normal map start gate 32 during the game, a variable display game of the normal map (hereinafter referred to as a variable display game of the normal map) is played by the display unit 41a or the like. .. Then, if the result of the normal map variation display game (stopped normal map) is a predetermined mode (specific display mode), a privilege called a normal map hit is given.
At this point of view, a game is performed in which the pair of opening / closing members 26a of the second starting winning opening 26 are temporarily held for a predetermined opening time in an open state in which the pair of opening / closing members 26a are opened in an inverted C shape. This makes it easier for the game ball to start and win a prize, and the number of times the special figure variable display game is played increases accordingly, increasing the possibility of a big hit.
Further, during the variable display game of the normal figure, when a game ball is further won in the normal figure start gate 32, the batch display device 35 executes the hold display of the normal figure start memory, and for example, up to four are stored. After the end of the variable display game of the normal map, the variable display game of the normal map is repeated based on the memory.

Next, the external output of the unique ID will be roughly described. When the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or the system is reset, the unique ID stored in the gaming microcomputer 101 (for example, stored in the HW parameter ROM) (hereinafter, appropriately, as appropriate) The main unique ID) is read out, converted into a serial communication format (or a parallel communication format) by the operation of the game program, relayed by the external information terminal board 55, and relayed by the external management device 140 (or card unit 551). May be included). This makes it possible to send the unique ID stored in the game microcomputer 101 to the game store side.
Further, the unique ID is transferred to the outside (here, the inspection device connection terminal 102 in FIG. 4) in response to a request from the outside. Then, for example, by connecting the inspection device to the inspection device connection terminal 102, the unique ID stored in the game microcomputer 101 is read out by the inspection institution.
On the other hand, the payout unique ID (payout individual identification information) capable of identifying the payout microcomputer 201 of the payout control device 200 is converted into a serial communication format (or a parallel communication format) by the operation of the payout program in the payout control device 200. Then, it is relayed by the external information terminal plate 55 and transmitted to the external management device 140 (or the card unit 551 may be included). This makes it possible to send the payout unique ID stored in the payout microcomputer 201 to the game store side.
In this embodiment, the unique IDs of the main board and the payout board are separately relayed by the external information terminal board 55 and transmitted to the external management device 140, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the game control device 100 (main board) sends the main unique ID to the payout control device 200 (payout board), and the payout control device 200 collectively relays the main unique ID and the payout unique ID on the external information terminal board 55. It may be configured to be transmitted to the external management device 140. Further, for example, the payout control device 200 (payout board) sends the payout unique ID to the game control device 100 (main board), and the game control device 100 collectively relays the payout unique ID and the main unique ID on the external information terminal board 55. It may be configured to be transmitted to the external management device 140.
In this way, the degree of freedom of taking out each unique ID of the main board and the payout board to the outside is increased according to the circuit configuration of the gaming machine.

Next, the command transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 will be roughly described. When the variable display game is executed, the data of the combination (result mode) of the stop symbols from the game control device 100 and the reach A command including system (or fluctuation time) data (for example, a fluctuation pattern command described later) is transmitted to the effect control device 300, and the effect control device 300 selects a stop mode and a variation mode that satisfies the fluctuation time. , The control of the special figure variation display game in which a predetermined special figure is variablely displayed on the display device 41 and finally a specific symbol combination (result mode) is derived and displayed.
In this case, among the commands transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300, there is a command that does not start the effect alone but exerts an effect as a group. There is a "design specification command". In addition, there are commands that exert their effects independently (for example, customer waiting commands), and many commands are sequentially transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 for the effect.

When one game machine (notice execution game machine) in the same group of inter-sub communication simultaneously sends a sub-interlocking notice system command as a sub-inter-link notice command to another game machine, the sub-sub interlocking notice system command is, for example, a notice. In the case of the content instructing the execution of the mode A, in other gaming machines, the execution probability for the past notice mode A is determined based on the execution probability of the notice mode A set in each machine. Based on the above, a lottery using random numbers is performed to determine. Then, when the execution is decided, the notice mode A (for example, a tiger character) is inserted during the production of the other gaming machine, and the notice mode A (for example, a tiger character) is displayed in an overlapping manner to produce the gaming machine (notice execution gaming machine). Synchronization is done.
Further, in the case of a gaming machine that has executed an effect based on a sub-interlocking advance notice system command instructed by a gaming machine (notice execution gaming machine) in the same group of inter-sub communication, the next number of executions of the advance notice mode A is set. Update only +1 to prepare for the next inter-sub interlocking notice system command.

In this case, in other gaming machines that have received the inter-sub interlocking notice system command, whether or not to execute the inter-sub notice is determined by lottery using random numbers based on the execution probability for the past notice mode A set for each machine. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the appearance of the inter-sub notice effect as many times as possible by the instruction from the other machine, and it is possible to make the inter-sub notice effect appear at an appropriate frequency.
That is, the number of executions of the inter-sub notice effect can be appropriately limited according to the number of executions of the inter-sub notice effect executed in the past.
Therefore, it is possible to prevent the reliability of the advance notice production and the like from being impaired, and it is possible to eliminate the risk of lowering the interest of the game.

Further, in this embodiment, the concept of scenario data (scenario layer) is used in the drawing control of the screen displayed on the display device 41. The scenario is, for example, a background scenario, a left symbol scenario, a right symbol scenario, etc., and the variation effect of the symbol is divided into a plurality of layers (scenario layers) and set in advance as a table (details will be described later). It is a method to generate a picture on one screen by controlling them individually as scenarios and synthesizing all the scenarios.
Specifically, in the variation effect of the symbol on the display device 41, for example, the motion of starting the variation, the motion of slowing down and temporarily stopping (number of frames to be fed, slippage, etc.), the type of advance notice effect, etc., are lined for each variation. Since there are various combinations depending on the effect distribution, if scenario data is created for each screen for all combinations, the amount of data will be enormous.
Therefore, in the present embodiment, in the drawing control in the variable effect in the effect control device 300, the background, the left symbol, the right symbol, ... Are individually categorized for each display element, and each of them is independently divided into a plurality of motions. It is set as a table of operation scenarios for simultaneously or continuously switching information to display an effect, and is stored in advance in, for example, (PROM (control ROM) 321. Then, in response to an effect command from the game control device 100. In the effect control device 300, the scenario table is selected, combined and combined to create the drawing content (for each frame) of one screen. By doing so, the minimum operation pattern is defined ( You only need to make the operation parts), and you can save the data capacity and improve the efficiency of development.

Further, in the present embodiment, the effective time of the push button type effect button 9 (hereinafter, may be abbreviated as PB as appropriate) operated by the player is set in the data of the button effect start setting during the scenario table. Has been done.
That is, in the scenario table including the effect of the effect button 9, an update process indicating that the button is valid (updated every time one frame elapses (that is, (-1) update) is performed on the timer). (Equivalent) is provided so that the effect time of the scenario to be performed after that is variable based on the update status of the validity period timer depending on the timing when the effect button 9 is pressed.
Therefore, the value of the valid period timer is deducted each time the frame of the effect screen on the display device 41 advances, and when the effective period timer becomes "0", the operation of the effect button 9 becomes invalid and when the effect button 9 is pressed. Is not produced. On the other hand, if the effect button 9 is pressed before the validity period timer reaches "0", the effect at the time of pressing is started.
In this way, the display time of the characters that appear is variable depending on the timing at which the effect button 9 is pressed, so that the interest of the game is enhanced.
That is, if the effect button 9 is pressed early, a long notice effect (remaining time + fixed time) is seen according to the remaining time (that is, the time corresponding to the remaining frame: α frame), and the effect button 9 is pressed just before the end of the notice effect. When pressed, a notice effect for a minimum fixed time (for example, 55 frames) will be performed.
Therefore, the earlier the effect button 9 is pressed, the longer the advance notice effect can be seen, and the advantage of pressing the effect button 9 earlier occurs, which enhances the interest of the game.

Further, in the present embodiment, a determination code for determining whether or not to continue the current effect state is provided in the scenario table, and the motion information in the RAM 311a in the effect control device 300 and the motion information on the scenario table are used. If they are different, the motion information on the scenario table is set as the effect content, and if they are the same, the motion information on the scenario table is not set as the effect content.
For example, it is determined based on the determination code whether to continuously display the background of the effect screen or to perform the effect with a new background, and when it is determined to use the new background, the data of the current RAM 311a is displayed on the scenario table. Overwrite with the data corresponding to the new background. As a result, the background is switched and the production is performed with a new background. On the other hand, when it is determined that the background continues, the instruction data acquired from the scenario table is discarded and the production proceeds with the current background as it is.
By doing so, the background state in the previous production can be continued in the next production, and for example, it is possible to have a display element having a sense of unity between the productions of different special figure fluctuations. , The interest of the game is improved.
For example, it is possible to perform various effects such as leaving the notice character on the screen of the display device 41 across a plurality of different special figure variation effects.
In addition, it is not necessary to properly use the scenario table depending on whether the production content is continued or not, and the development efficiency is improved. That is, one scenario table can be used to produce a production that matches the situation of the game.

Next, when performing the effect on the display device 41, the scenario table is used as described above, but in this scenario table, the data for controlling the flow of a specific effect (which motion table is displayed at what timing). Data that specifies whether to execute etc.) is set.
Then, in the above motion table, there is motion data (that is, data for designating the image data to be displayed and its display position, etc.) of each blocked effect (mainly the effect display), and the motion is blocked. It means a directing action.
Here, in this embodiment, as motion data, if the movement (character drawing position) is the same, basically only one method is provided even if the displayed characters are different. Therefore, the animation for generating the motion data is created after the basic character is determined.

That is, in this embodiment, conditions are set for the characters defined in the motion table, a basic (representative) character is determined, and control is performed to create one animation.
For example, when creating a variation animation, it is necessary to make a character of a symbol appear, but there are innumerable combinations (states) of symbols displayed on the screen of the display device 41, and an animation that reflects all of them is created. Is impossible. Therefore, by deciding the basic (representative) character and creating one animation (one in a group where the characters move the same but the characters are different), the character replacement process is performed by the control program. , Control is performed to save data capacity by making it possible to correspond to any display mode.
Specifically, the basic character is set to the one with the lowest jackpot reliability in the group to be replaced. For example, if there are white, blue, yellow, green, red, and rainbow types in the character related to the operation of the effect button 9 displayed in the effect of the push button notice (PB notice), it is defined in the motion data of the push button notice. The button character to be used is "white", which has the lowest reliability of the jackpot. However, it is premised that it appears in common at the time of off and at the time of big hit.

In this way, the character with the lowest jackpot reliability is registered in the motion table as the basic character, and the character is changed as the production progresses (however, for example, a push button character, within the range of the same type of character. If you want to change), you can handle any display mode by performing the behavior (function to replace the image data (character data) of the object (display element)) that replaces the basic character with another one in the control program. It will be possible to use the data that can be used in common at the time of loss and big hit, the data capacity can be reduced, and the development efficiency will be improved.

Next, in this embodiment, the background screen is selected before the end of the jackpot effect, and the symbol stop screen using the selected background screen is displayed before the ending period of the jackpot is over.
Specifically, after the big hit effect, the display device 41 returns to the normal screen for changing the special figure (decorative special figure (decorative pattern), the same applies hereinafter), and there is a background screen (the background screen that harmonizes with the pattern change). For example, a background movie) is displayed. In this case, there is a high possibility that the type of background screen and the shape of the special figure will differ depending on the game state at that time (for example, probability fluctuation, time reduction, normal probability, etc.).
The effect control device 300 determines the game state based on the probability information command from the game control device 100, but the game control device 100 may change the state such as the probability when the jackpot operation is completed. Therefore, the probability information command can be sent just before the start of the special figure fluctuation after the big hit is over.
By the way, if the type of background screen is changed by receiving the probability information command, the background screen for the ending screen of the big hit will suddenly switch to the background screen for when the special figure fluctuates, which may result in a busy production. Highly probable.

Therefore, in this embodiment, a time (predetermined symbol display period) for displaying the so-called stop symbol display screen is provided during the specified time (for example, about 1 to 2 seconds) before the end of the jackpot ending operation. By setting the background screen of the above as the background screen when the special figure changes in the normal game after the big hit, it is possible to smoothly shift from the ending period of the big hit to the special figure change game in the normal game state.
In addition, since the effect control device 300 sets the state to be displayed before and after receiving the probability information command, it is necessary to predict the game state after the end of the big hit.
Therefore, for example, by judging from the contents of the design command, fanfare command, ending command received during the jackpot, as well as the internal information of the effect control device 300 (for example, information that causes the latent probability to fluctuate next time), the jackpot is determined. I try to predict the game state that will shift later.
Then, based on the above-mentioned various information, the background type in the normal game after the big hit is predicted, one type of background screen is selected from the plurality of background types, and the selected background screen is used as a probability information command. Is controlled to be displayed on the display device 41 before the reception of the above.
In this way, the background type in the normal game after the big hit is predicted from the information (ending command etc.) from the game control device 100 and the internal information of the effect control device 300 that have already been received, and the ending operation of the big hit is completed. By creating a space for displaying the symbol stop screen using the background type in advance, it is possible to prevent sudden switching of the effect screen and improve the effect.
In addition, since the prediction based on the internal information of the effect control device 300 is taken in advance, there is a high possibility that a normal display can be performed without taking measures when the probability information command is not received, which is efficient. Can be developed and controlled.

Next, in this embodiment, a plurality of objects (for example, characters) of the same category are defined in the motion table to control the effect.
That is, motion data (data that specifies the image data to be displayed and its display position, etc.) is registered for each display element (for example, background, left symbol, right symbol, ...) In the motion table. , Those data are collectively registered in the object group defined as the same category.
For example, regarding the object group defined as the left symbol category, not only the current symbol but also the previous symbol, the next symbol, and the like are defined in one motion table as the symbol character. Then, for each of these objects (characters such as the current symbol, the previous symbol, the next symbol, etc.), the character No., coordinates, size, behavior, and the like are defined on the motion table.
Therefore, for example, in the case of the left symbol category, not only the symbol (current symbol) visible in front of the display device 41 but also the next symbol, the previous symbol, etc. arranged above and below the symbol are defined in the same motion table. Will be done.

When controlling the production using such a motion table, characters of the same category are collectively registered as an object group in one motion table, so that the same operation is performed in the same manner. You can control all the character objects in the category. Therefore, it is easy to handle when creating a scenario table for managing motion, the amount of data can be reduced, and the development efficiency is improved.
For example, when controlling a symbol, when displaying the current symbol, the next symbol, the previous symbol, etc. on the screen of the display device 41, the replacement calculation of the next symbol and the previous symbol is performed with the current symbol as a reference (if the current symbol is used as a reference). , Other symbols can be calculated by replacing them relatively), but for characters in the same category (here, symbol characters), if they are defined in one motion table, the calculation parameters It can be reused and controlled efficiently.

Next, in this embodiment, control is performed to draw a character that looks like a still image display by using one image moving character.
That is, in this embodiment, with respect to the image ROM 322, the character of the normal moving image display is stored by using the moving image character, and by repeatedly displaying one still image, the character looks like a still image display (the appearance becomes a still image). The visible character) is stored using a one-image moving image character in a format in which a still image composed of only one image is repeatedly displayed, and a common motion test is used when displaying these characters on the display device 41. The bull is used to control the drawing.
That is, even if a character looks like a still image on the screen of the display device 41 viewed by the player, the internal control of the effect control device 300 is composed of only one image in a format in which the still image is repeatedly displayed. The one-image moving image character is stored in the image ROM 322, and the one-image moving image character is created by data in a format in which the same still image composed of only one image is repeatedly displayed.
In addition, in the motion table that defines the motion of the image, the motion table is made common by defining the character of the normal moving image and the one-image moving image character that looks like a still image display in the same table. There is.
Then, when displaying a normal moving image character that looks like a moving image display and a one-image moving image character that looks like a still image display on the display device 41, drawing control is performed using a common motion table, and in particular, a still image. The one-image moving image character that appears to be displayed is drawn using data in a format in which the same still image composed of only one image is repeatedly displayed.
In this case, the one-image movie character that looks like a still image is created as a movie (here, referred to as a still image movie) composed of the same image (that is, the same still image), so that it is played back as a movie. However, the appearance of the image does not change, and the display is similar to that of a still image character.

Therefore, the one-image moving image character that looks like a still image is stored in the moving image data format in the image ROM 322 inside the effect control device 300, and is handled in the moving image so that the motion table can be used in common. It is not necessary to increase the number of tables (data capacity reduction), it is possible to prevent pressure on the control ROM 321 (that is, capacity reduction, etc.), and it is possible to improve control by reducing the number of data items. In addition, ease of management can be expected and development efficiency will be improved.
Further, in the case of motion data dedicated to still images, if the still image movie is used without playing back the moving image (for example, using only the first image of the one-image moving image character), it becomes a mere still image. Since it is not necessary to prepare character data for a single still image, the amount of data can be saved.

Next, in this embodiment, the effect is controlled by having a code for processing related to sound output in the scenario table related to the effect of the PB notice.
That is, when a display prompting the player to press the PB (effect button 9) is displayed on the screen of the display device 41 while the game is in progress, when the player presses the effect button 9, a button pressing sound is output and, for example, A military commander will appear, and a notice production will be performed as if talking about the lines. This effect is controlled by a scenario table that manages images of characters and the like.
In this case, in the scenario table related to the production of the PB notice, the scenario data when the effective time ends without pressing the production button 9 and the case where the production progresses by pressing the production button 9. There is scenario data of.
The scenario data unit in which the effect progresses by pressing the effect button 9 is provided with a processing code for setting the output of the button press sound for producing a sound when the effect button 9 is pressed.

Therefore, in the production process executed by the processing code that sets the output of the button press sound, it is not necessary to confirm whether the button press sound is sounded or not (however, it is determined whether the button press sound can be sounded). Is necessary: This is because the PB waiting code data is set in the scenario table, so it can be determined that the effect button 9 has been pressed), and the video and sound control contents are in the same scenario table. Since there is, it is easy to manage the synchronization of video and sound production, and development efficiency is also improved.

In addition, this embodiment also has the following features in the control of the effect control device, and details of these will be described later.
-The feature is that motion data (motion table data) is provided for each section of the production and blocked, and in the scenario table, the motion tables that are the parts are selectively combined and used according to the content of the production to be performed.
-The feature is that the fluctuation of the 4th symbol (fluctuation state notification symbol) is performed from the beginning of the fluctuation cycle determined regardless of the previous stop symbol.
-Unlike the case of other special symbols (decorative symbols for production), the motion table of the 4th symbol does not switch during fluctuation (that is, it does not change from the one set at the start of fluctuation).
-A feature of controlling the display of a plurality of types of 4th symbols (4th symbol of special figure 1 and 4th symbol of special figure 2) with one motion table.
-When performing a fade effect, the feature is that the fade character is placed behind the 4th symbol.
-In the case of controlling decorative symbols that fluctuate with the same size, the feature is that the first frame of various blocked motion tables starts from a fixed coordinate position (in this case, the display position when the symbol is stopped).
-In the case of controlling a decorative pattern that fluctuates with the same size, the first frame of various blocked motion tables is configured to start from a fixed coordinate position, and the coordinate data of the final frame is described above. The feature is that it is set to a position different from a fixed coordinate position.
-Even if the display of the same character is continued, the character information is temporarily deleted and re-registered at the change point of the production.
-The feature is that the RAM area to be written is separate for the simple weight (constant weight, variable weight) and the button waiting weight in the scenario progress of the production.

F. Operation of the control system Next, the control contents of the game control device 100 will be described with reference to FIGS. 8 to 96.
First, the concept of the main configuration used in the explanation of the following flowchart is as follows.
As described above, the batch display device 35 displays the special drawing and the general drawing. Since the special figure in the following description of the control process means this special figure (this special figure), it will be described in detail on the premise of the above. The special figure controlled by the effect control device 300 based on the command from the game control device 100 is a special figure for effect displayed on the display device 41.
(B) Display device for special figures When the term "special figure" is used in the following flowchart, it means the "this special figure" displayed on the batch display device 35. Further, when referring to the dummy display for the effect for the player displayed on the display device 41, it is referred to as a "decorative special drawing".
The device for displaying the special figure in this way is the batch display device 35, but the names of the areas for displaying the special figure in the batch display device 35 include, for example, a special symbol display device and a special figure display device. In order to distinguish it from the ordinary figure display device, it is sometimes called a special symbol display device.
(B) Display device for general map When the term "general map" is used in the following flowchart, it means the "general map" displayed on the batch display device 35. Further, when a configuration for displaying a normal drawing on the display device 41 is adopted, when referring to the dummy display for the effect for the player displayed on the display device 41, it is referred to as, for example, "decorative general drawing".
The device for displaying the normal map in this way is the batch display device 35, but the names of the areas for displaying the main map in the batch display device 35 include, for example, a normal symbol display device and a general map display device. In order to distinguish it from the special figure display device, it is sometimes called an ordinary symbol display device.
However, in this embodiment, the display device 41 does not display such a display of a normal drawing. In addition, a display device for displaying a normal map (here, a decorative general map) may be provided. In explaining the gaming machine, if necessary, the explanation may include a device for displaying a "decorative drawing".
(C) Fuden The device corresponding to Fuden is the second start winning opening 26 as an ordinary electric accessory (Public).
However, the Fuden may be referred to as an ordinary variable winning device, and for example, in the explanation of the flowchart, it may be referred to as an ordinary electric accessory (ordinary variable winning device 26).
In addition, for example, when there is a high probability or when the time is shortened, the start winning is supported by the operation of opening the opening / closing member 26a of the second starting winning opening 26 as an ordinary electric accessory (general electric). Sometimes it's just Fuden support.
(D) Special figure memory In the following flowchart, in the case of special figure hold (sometimes simply referred to as "hold"), special figure memory, or special figure start memory, "this special figure" displayed on the batch display device 35 It points to "figure memory". Further, when referring to the dummy display for the effect for the player displayed on the display device 41, it is referred to as "decorative special figure reservation" or "decorative special figure memory".
The winning openings that function as the starting winning openings of the special figure are the starting winning openings 25 and 26.
(E) Fu-figure memory In the following flowchart, the term "fu-figure hold", "fu-figure memory", or "genuine-figure start-up memory" refers to the "genuine-figure memory" displayed on the batch display device 35. Further, when referring to the dummy display for the player's production displayed on the display device 41, it is referred to as "decorative drawing hold" or "decorative drawing memory".
However, in this embodiment, the display device 41 does not display such a start memory display of the normal drawing. It should be noted that a display may be provided for displaying the start memory of the normal map (here, the memory of the decorative normal map). In explaining the gaming machine, if necessary, the explanation may include a device for displaying "decorative general drawing memory".
(F) Variable winning device The variable winning device 27 is a device (so-called attacker) having a large winning opening 27a that is opened and closed by the opening / closing member 27b. The variable winning device 27 may be referred to as a special variable winning device in order to distinguish it from the ordinary variable winning device.
In this embodiment, in addition to the variable winning device 27, a second variable winning device 33 is provided, so that so-called two attackers are arranged.

[Main processing of game control device]
First, the main processing of the game control device 100 (game microcomputer 101) will be described with reference to FIGS. 8 and 9.
This main process starts based on the fact that the gaming microcomputer 101 is forcibly reset. That is, when the power switch (not shown) of the power supply device 500 is turned on, a reset signal is sent from the control signal generation unit 503 of the power supply device 500 at a predetermined timing (during a predetermined reset period when the power is turned on) to the game control device 100. When the reset terminal of the game microcomputer 101 is turned on and then the reset signal is released, the game microcomputer 101 is activated. Similarly, when the power is restored from a power failure, the reset signal is turned on and then released to start the gaming microcomputer 101. When the operator intends to initialize the user work RAM or the like of the game control device 100, the power switch is turned on while the RAM clear switch 504 (initialization switch) of the power supply device 500 is turned on. There is a need.

Then, when the gaming microcomputer 101 is activated, first a process of disabling interrupts (step S1) is performed, then an interrupt vector setting process (step S2) for setting the vector address of the jump destination to be executed when an interrupt occurs, and an interrupt. The stack pointer setting process (step S3) for setting the stack pointer, which is the start address of the area for saving the value of the register or the like when the above occurs, is sequentially performed.
Next, the state of the input port 1 (first input port 160) is read (step S4), and the interrupt mode setting process (step S5) for setting the interrupt processing mode is performed.
Next, in step S6, a process of setting the power supply delay timer is performed. In this process, by setting a predetermined initial value, a program of a slave control means (for example, a payout control device 200 or an effect control device 300) that performs various controls according to an instruction from a game control device 100 that serves as a main control means. A waiting time (for example, 3 seconds) is set for waiting for the device to start normally. This is a predetermined method for delaying the activation of the main control means (game control device 100) and waiting for the activation of the slave control devices (payout control device 200, effect control device 300, etc.) when the game control device 100 is turned on. It serves as a waiting means for setting the waiting time. As a result, when the power is turned on, the game control device 100 temporarily starts up first and sends a command to the slave control device before the slave control device (for example, the payout control device 200 or the effect control device 300) starts up, so that the slave control device is controlled. It is possible to prevent the device from missing a command.

Here, this delay timer includes waiting for the payout board (payout control device 200) to start. That is, it also includes stopping the progress of the process for a predetermined delay time (for example, 4 msec) in order to wait for the program of the payout board (payout control device 200) to start normally.
The initialization switch signal from the RAM clear switch 504 is input to the first input port 160, and the initialization switch is read by reading the state of the first input port 160 before the start of the standby time. The operation of (RAM clear switch 504; the same applies hereinafter) can be reliably detected. That is, if the state of the initialization switch is read after the standby time has elapsed, the initialization switch may be operated after the standby time has elapsed, or the initialization switch may be continuously operated from the power-on until the standby time elapses. I need to do it. However, by reading the state before the start of the standby time, it can be detected by performing the operation immediately after turning on the power without performing such annoying operation, and the initialization operation performed at the time of turning on the power. Can be prevented from being unacceptable.

After performing the process of setting the power delay timer (step S6), the process of timing the standby time and monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the standby time (steps S7 to S11) are performed. First, the number of times (for example, twice) to read and check the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 500 via the port and the data bus is set (step S7), and it is determined whether or not the power failure monitoring signal is on. (Step S8). Even when the power delay timer is set in step S6 and the timer is in the process of counting, the power failure monitoring in step S8 is performed.
When the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S8; YES), it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal is kept on for the number of checks set in step S7 (step S9). Then, when the power failure monitoring signal has not been turned on for the number of checks (step S9; NO), the process returns to the determination of whether the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S8). If the power failure monitoring signal continues to be on for the number of checks (step S9; YES), that is, if it is determined that a power failure has occurred, the power of the gaming machine (pachinko machine 1) is cut off. Wait for the power outage. In this way, by determining that a power failure has occurred when the power failure monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period, it is possible to prevent false detection of a power failure due to noise or the like, and appropriately deal with problems when the power is turned on. can do.

That is, since the game control device 100 serves as a power failure monitoring means for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during a predetermined standby time, a power failure that occurs during a period in which the activation of the game control device 100, which is the main control means, is delayed. It becomes possible to deal with the trouble at the time of turning on the power appropriately. Note that access to the RAM (for example, RAM101C) is not permitted until the end of the standby time, and the stored contents at the time of the previous power cutoff are retained. Therefore, a backup occurs when a power failure occurs here. There is no need to perform any processing. Therefore, even if a power failure occurs during the standby time, it is not necessary to back up the RAM, and the burden of control can be reduced.

On the other hand, when the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step S8; NO), that is, when a power failure has not occurred, the power-on delay timer is updated by -1 (step S10), and then the timer value is 0. It is determined whether or not there is (step S11). If the value of the timer is not 0 (step S11; NO), that is, if the standby time has not ended, the process returns to the process of setting the number of times the power failure monitoring signal is checked (step S7). Further, when the value of the timer is 0 (step S11; YES), that is, when the standby time has expired, access permission is granted to the read / write RWM (read / write memory) such as RAM or EEPROM (step S12). ), Off-data is output to all output ports (a signal corresponding to "0" of the binary signal: that is, set to a state where there is no output) (step S13).
Here, the RWM refers to the RAM 101C in this embodiment, but the RWM is not limited to the RAM, and a readable / writable storage element such as an EEPROM may be included as the RWM.
Since each output port is set off (reset) by the reset signal, it is not always necessary to output the off signal to each output port by software, but step S13 is provided here just in case. ..

Subsequently, a serial port (a port previously mounted on the gaming microcomputer 101, which is used for communication with the effect control device 300 and the management device 140 in this embodiment) is set (step S14).
Here, the serial port is set to be used because this serial port is used when the unique ID is output to the outside (for example, the management device 140). be. Further, since it is necessary to perform serial communication with the effect control device 300, the serial port is set to be used.
Next, it is determined from the state of the first input port 160 read earlier whether the initialization switch (RAM clear switch 504) in the power supply device 500 is turned on (step S15). This determines whether or not the initialization switch is turned on based on the state of the initialization switch signal. If the initialization switch is turned on, the process proceeds to step S25, and if it is not turned on, the process proceeds to step S16. ..
In addition, in step S25, when the initialization switch is turned on and the gaming microcomputer 101 is activated, the power failure inspection area 1 and the power failure inspection area 2 of the RWM are all in steps S16 and S17, which will be described later. It is a case where it is determined that it is not normal, or a case where it is determined that the checksum is not normal in step S19 described later. Therefore, when the process proceeds to step S25, processing such as initializing the data (excluding the access prohibited area) in the RWM of the gaming microcomputer 101 is performed.

If the initialization switch is not turned on, the process proceeds to step S16 to check whether the value of the power failure inspection area 1 of the RWM is the normal power failure inspection area check data 1, and if the check result is not normal in step S116. If it is determined, it jumps to step S25. On the other hand, if the check result in step S16 is normal, in the following step S17, it is checked whether or not the value of the power failure inspection area 2 of the RWM is the normal power failure inspection area check data 2. Then, if the check result is not normal in step S17, the process jumps to step S25, and if the check result is normal, the process proceeds to step S18.
As described above, if the values of the power failure inspection areas 1 and 2 of the RWM are all normal, it is determined that the power failure has been restored and the process proceeds to step S18. On the other hand, if the values of the power failure inspection areas 1 and 2 of the RWM are abnormal (if they are not stored normally), the process jumps to step S25 assuming that the power is normally turned on.
The power failure inspection area check data 1 and 2 are set in steps S39 and 40 described later. In these steps S39 and 40, since it is determined whether or not the power failure is restored by the plurality of check data 1 and 2 in this way, it is highly reliable to determine whether or not the power failure is restored.

Next, in step S18, the checksum of the RWM data is calculated, and in step S19, the calculated checksum is compared with the checksum when the power is cut off, and it is determined whether or not the value is normal (matches). If this checksum is not normal (that is, when the RWM data is corrupted), the process proceeds to step S25, and if the checksum is normal, the process proceeds to step S20 of FIG. Performs processing when recovered.
In step S20, the initial value at the time of power failure recovery is saved in the area to be initialized. The area to be initialized here includes the following areas.
・ Door / frame opening signal of external information area, security signal / power failure recovery inspection area 1, 2
-Game machine error status signal in the test signal area-Checksum area when the power is turned off-Error scan counter (game frame status monitoring scan counter)
・ Front frame open monitoring area ・ Game frame open monitoring area ・ Shoot ball out monitoring area ・ Overflow monitoring area ・ Payout abnormality monitoring area ・ Switch 1 and 2 abnormality monitoring area Winning monitoring area, general electric fraudulent winning monitoring area, magnetic fraud monitoring area, radio wave fraud monitoring area, large winning opening fraud monitoring information 1, 2
・ Fuden fraud monitoring information

After passing through step S20, the area in the RWM that stores the gaming state is examined to determine whether or not the gaming state is a high-probability state (step S21). Here, if the probability is not high (step S21; NO), steps S22 and S23 are skipped and the process proceeds to step S24. When the probability is high (step S21; YES), the on information is saved in the high probability notification flag area (step S22), for example, the high probability notification LED (not shown) provided in the batch display device 35 is turned on (not shown). Lit) Save the data in the segment area (step S23). As a result, the measures corresponding to the current high-probability state are performed, and for example, the high-probability notification LED provided in the batch display device 35 is turned on to display the high-probability state.
Next, a command at the time of power failure recovery corresponding to the processing number prepared for rationally executing the special figure game processing described later is transmitted to the effect control device 300 (step S24), and the process proceeds to step S29.

On the other hand, when jumping from steps S15, S16, S17, and S19 to step S25, the entire work area before the access prohibited area in the RWM used by the CPU is first cleared (step S25), and then in the RWM. The entire stack area after the access prohibited area is cleared (step S26), and the initial value at the time of power-on is saved in the area to be initialized (step S27).
The area to be initialized here is an area in which a value other than the value (0) written in step S25 is used as an initial value, and in this embodiment, an area related to the customer waiting demo area and the setting of the effect mode. Is applicable. Specific information on these areas is as follows.
<Area to be initialized>
・ Customer waiting demo area Customer waiting demo flag ・ Production mode command area Production mode command ・ Security signal control timer ・ Next mode transition information area Next mode transition information ・ Special figure game mode information command

Next, a process of transmitting a power-on command (power-on command) to the effect control device 300 is performed (step S28).
The power-on command transmitted in step S24 and the power-on command transmitted in step S28 include the following commands. As shown below, the commands to be sent when the power is turned on and when the power is restored are the same.
-Model specification command indicating the type of game machine-Decoration special figure 1 holding number command and decoration special figure 2 holding number command indicating the number of holdings of special figures 1 and 2-Probability information command indicating the state of probability Also, when the power is cut off If the special figure fluctuation display game is being executed when the power is turned off, the following commands are included.
-Recovery screen command-Customer waiting demo command if waiting for customers when the power is turned off-Power-on command if initialized when the power is turned on-Production mode information command that indicates the status of the production mode depending on the model-In a short time state Time saving number information command indicating the number of remaining games of Initialization such as setting the position to the initial position is performed, and an effect of notifying that the RWM has been cleared is started. After passing through step S28, the process proceeds to step S29.

When the process proceeds from step S24 or step S28 to step S29, in step S29, a CTC (Counter / Timer) that generates a timer interrupt signal and a random number update trigger signal (CTC) in the gaming microcomputer 101 (clock generator) is generated. Circuit) Performs the process of starting the circuit.
The CTC circuit is provided in the clock generator in the gaming microcomputer 101. The clock generator has a frequency dividing circuit that divides the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the crystal oscillator 113, and a timer interrupt signal having a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) with respect to the CPU 101A based on the divided signal. It also includes a CTC circuit that generates a signal CTC that triggers a random number update to be supplied to the random number generation circuit.

After the CTC activation process in step S29, a process for activating and setting the random number generation circuit is performed (step S30). Specifically, the CPU 101A sets a code (designated value) for activating the random number generation circuit in a predetermined register (CTC update permission register) in the random number generation circuit.
In addition, the bit transposition pattern of the hard random number (here, the jackpot random number) generated by the hardware of the random number generation circuit is also set. That is, in the process of step S30, the hard random number bit transposition pattern is set, and the bit transposition of the jackpot random number is also performed.
Here, the bit transposition pattern is, for example, as shown in FIG. 94 described later, in which the bit arrangement of the extracted random numbers (the arrangement before the upper bit transposition) is replaced in a predetermined order and different bit arrangements (lower row). It is a pattern that determines how to replace when storing as (arrangement after bit transposition). By exchanging the bits of the random number according to this bit transposition pattern, the regularity of the random number can be broken and the confidentiality of the random number can be improved. The bit transposition pattern may be a fixed single pattern, or may be selected from a plurality of patterns prepared in advance. In addition, the user may be able to set it arbitrarily.

Next, the values of the predetermined registers (soft random number registers 1 to n) in the random number generation circuit at the time of power-on are extracted, and the corresponding initial value random numbers (random numbers for determining the jackpot symbol (big hit symbol random number 1, jackpot symbol random number 1, jackpot symbol random number)) 2) Save in a predetermined area of the RWM as an initial value (start value) of a random number (hit random number) that determines the hit of the normal figure (step S31).
Here, the types of random numbers are as follows.
・ Random number of initial hit value ・ Random number of initial value of big hit symbol 1
・ Big hit symbol initial value random number 2
(These use different soft random number register values)

Then, a part of each random number of the special figure or the normal figure is generated by this random number generation circuit in hardware. However, the initial values of these random numbers are softly set by the process of step S33 described later. Since the random number generation circuit in the CPU 101A used in this embodiment is configured to change the initial value of the soft random number register each time the power is turned on, this value is used as the initial value (start value) of various initial value random numbers. ), The regularity of the random numbers generated by the software can be broken, and it is possible to make it difficult for the player to acquire an illegal random number.
The random numbers related to the special figure include a big hit random number (random number for determining whether or not to make a big hit), a big hit symbol random number 1 and 2 (random number for determining a big hit stop symbol), and a variable pattern random number (reach). There are random numbers that determine the fluctuation pattern including the presence / absence, etc.), stop symbol random numbers (random numbers for determining the out-of-order stop symbol), and the like. Further, as the random number related to the normal figure, for example, there is a random number per normal figure (a random number for determining whether or not to hit the normal figure). Of these, the random numbers (hard random numbers) targeted in steps S30 and 33 are, for example, a big hit random number, a normal figure hit random number, and a big hit symbol random number 1 and 2. When there are two types of special figures, the random numbers related to the special figure may be common to the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, or may be provided separately.

Next, the interrupt is permitted in step S32, and the initial value random number update process is performed in the next step S33. The initial value random number update process is a process of updating the initial value of the hard random number so that it becomes difficult to intentionally aim for a big hit or the like by measuring the timing of launching the game ball. This is for updating the values of various initial value random numbers to break the regularity of the random numbers.
In the initial value random number update process in step S33, in addition to the main process, there is also a method of performing the initial value random number update process in the timer interrupt process. In order to avoid executing the value random number update process, it is necessary to disable the interrupt and then update to cancel the interrupt when performing the initial value random number update process in the main process. If the initial value random number update processing is not performed in the timer interrupt processing and only in the main processing, there is no problem even if the interrupt is canceled before the initial value random number update processing, which simplifies the main processing. There is an advantage that it is converted.

Further, although not particularly limited, in this embodiment, the jackpot random number, the jackpot symbol random number, and the hit random number are configured to be generated by using the random numbers generated in the random number generation circuit. However, the jackpot random number is a so-called "high-speed counter" that is updated based on a clock whose speed is equal to or higher than the operating clock of the CPU, and the jackpot symbol random number and the hit random number have the same cycle as the timer interrupt processing, which is the processing unit of the program. It is a "low speed counter" that is updated based on the CTC output (CTC (CTC2) different from CTC (CTC0) of timer interrupt processing). Further, in the big hit symbol random number and the hit symbol random number, a so-called "initial value change method" is adopted in which the start value is changed by using each initial value random number (generated by software) every time the random number goes around. It should be noted that each of the random numbers may be a counter-type update by +1 or -1, or a random-type update in which all the values in the range appear separately without duplication until one cycle is completed. That is, the jackpot random number is a random number updated only by the hardware, and the jackpot symbol random number and the hit random number are random numbers updated by the hardware and software.
Next, the process proceeds to step S34, the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 500 is read via the port and the data bus, the number of times the power failure monitoring signal is checked (for example, twice) is set, and the power failure monitoring signal is set in the next step S35. Is turned on, and if it is turned on, the process proceeds to step S36 for the final determination of the power failure, and if it is not turned on, the process returns to step S33. During the normal operation, steps S33 to S35 are repeated.
That is, when the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step S35; NO), the process returns to the initial value random number update process (step S33). That is, when a power failure has not occurred, the initial value random number update process and the power failure monitoring signal check (loop process) are repeated. By permitting an interrupt before the initial value random number update process (step S33) (step S32), if a timer interrupt occurs during the initial value random number update process, the interrupt process is preferentially executed, and the timer interrupt is executed. It is possible to avoid the interrupt processing being overwhelmed by waiting for the initial value random number update processing.

Then, when the process proceeds to step S36, it is determined whether or not the power failure monitoring signal is continuously on for the number of checks, and if the determination result is affirmative, it is finally determined that a power failure has occurred and the process proceeds to step S37. If it is negative, it cannot be determined that a power failure has occurred, and the process returns to step S35.
When the power failure monitoring signal is turned on, the power failure monitoring signal may be used as an NMI interrupt signal to interrupt the processing being executed and forcibly execute the power failure processing after step S37. However, in the configuration of this example, since the ON state of the power failure monitoring signal is checked a plurality of times in step S36, the power failure monitoring signal is temporarily and momentarily turned on due to noise or the like even though no power failure has actually occurred. If this happens, there is an advantage that it will not be mistakenly determined that a power failure has occurred.

Then, in step S37, after prohibiting interrupts, all outputs are turned off in the next step S38 (off data is output to all output ports), and then power failure information setting processing is executed in steps S39 and S40. do. In the power failure information setting process, the power failure inspection area check data 1 described above is saved in the power failure inspection area 1 in step S39, and the power failure inspection area check data 2 is saved in the power failure inspection area 2 in step S40.
After step S40, the checksum calculated in step S42 is saved in a predetermined checksum area after the process of calculating the checksum when the power of the RWM is cut off is performed in the next step S41.
Next, in step S43, access to the RWM is prohibited, and then the device waits (the reset wait state waits for the reset signal from the control signal generation unit 503 described above).
In this way, by saving the check data in the power failure recovery inspection area and calculating the checksum when the power is turned off, it is possible to check whether the information stored in the RWM before the power is cut off is correctly backed up. It can be determined when the power is turned on again.
The power failure processing in steps S37 to S43 is performed before the power supply voltage drops below the operating voltage of the gaming microcomputer 101 due to the power failure.

[Checksum calculation process]
Next, the checksum calculation process (step S41) in the main process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, first, the start address of the RWM is set as the start value of the calculated address in step S51, and the number of repetitions is set in step S52. The number of repetitions is set according to the number of bytes of the RWM used. Next, after setting "0" as the calculated value in step S53, the calculated value + the content of the calculated address is calculated as a new calculated value in step S54. In this way, the contents of each address are added as calculated values. Next, in step S55, the calculated address is updated by "+1", in step S56, the number of repetitions is updated by "-1" to check whether the calculation is completed, and in step S57, it is determined whether or not the calculation is completed. If the determination result in step S57 is NO, the process returns to step S54 and the routine is repeated. Then, when the number of repetitions = the number of bytes of RWM, it is determined that the calculation is completed, the process exits from step S57 to YES, and the routine ends.
In this way, the checksum is calculated when the power of the RWM is cut off.

[Initial value random number update process]
Next, the initial value random number update process (step S33) in the main process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, a process of incrementing (updating (+1)) the initial hit value random number (step S61), a process of incrementing (updating (+1)) the initial value random number 1 of the jackpot symbol (step S62), and a jackpot symbol The process (step S63) of incrementing (updating (+1)) the initial value random number 2 is sequentially performed.
Here, the "big hit symbol initial value random number 1" is a random number that becomes the initial value of the random number that determines the jackpot stop symbol of the special figure 1, and is updated in the range of 0 to 99. The "big hit symbol initial value random number 2" is an initial value random number of a random number that determines the jackpot stop symbol of the special figure 2, and is updated in the range of 0 to 99. be. Further, the "hit initial value random number" is a random number that becomes the initial value of the random number that determines the hit of the normal figure fluctuation game, and is updated in the range of 0 to 250. be. In this way, the randomness of the random numbers can be increased by continuously incrementing the random numbers as long as time allows in the main process.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, the timer interrupt process of the game control device 100 (game microcomputer 101) will be described with reference to FIG.
This timer interrupt process is started by the processes of steps S29 and S32 in the main process described above, and is repeatedly executed at a predetermined timer interrupt cycle.

In this timer interrupt process, first, in step S71, register saving and interrupt prohibition are executed as necessary. In register save, for example, register save processing for transferring the value held in a predetermined register to RWM is performed. In the Z80 series microcomputer used as the gaming microcomputer in this embodiment, the processing can be replaced by saving the value held in the front register in the back register.
Next, the input process is executed in step S72. In this input process, the detection signals of the above-mentioned sensors (starting port switches 120, 121, gate switch 122, winning port switch 123, lower count switch 124, upper count switch 125, etc.) are read. Specifically, the output value of each sensor is determined for each timer interrupt cycle, and when the output value of the same level continues for the specified number of times (for example, twice) or more, the level of this output value is detected by each sensor. Read as a deterministic value for the signal. When it is read that any of the sensors is on, a flag (input flag) indicating that is set.

Next, in step S73, an output process is executed in which the output data set in each step described later is set in the corresponding output port and output. This is a process for controlling the drive of actuators such as solenoids (first prize-winning port solenoid 133, second prize-winning port solenoid 134, normal electric solenoid 132) based on the output data set in various processes. be.
Next, in step S74, the payout command transmission process is performed. This is because the game control device 100, which is the main board, and the effect control device 300, which is the sub board, transmit commands by serial communication, so that only the discharge command transmission process is performed. Here, the command set in the transmission buffer of the game microcomputer 101 is output to the effect control device 300.
Next, the random number update processes 1 and 2 are executed in steps S75 and S76, respectively. Here, the soft random numbers related to the special figure and the soft random numbers related to the normal figure are updated. Examples of soft random numbers related to the special symbol include jackpot symbol random numbers 1 and 2 (random numbers for determining jackpot stop symbols), fluctuation pattern random numbers (random numbers for determining fluctuation patterns including the presence or absence of reach action), and stop symbol random numbers (random numbers for determining the fluctuation pattern including the presence or absence of reach action). There is a random number for determining the stop symbol). Here, the random number is updated by increasing the random number by, for example, "1". Therefore, each time the timer interrupt processing routine is repeated, the random number changes, and the extracted value of this soft random number maintains atrandomness.

In this example, there are three types of fluctuation pattern random numbers, that is, fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3. Of these, the variation pattern random number 1 is a random number for selecting the reach system of the latter half variation (variation after the start of reach), and the variation pattern random number 2 is the distribution of detailed effects (for example, plus 1 frame) from the reach system. Is a random number for performing the special figure stop or the special figure stops at minus one frame), and the fluctuation pattern random number 3 is a random number for selecting the mode of the first half fluctuation (variation before the start of reach). be. Further, the fluctuation pattern random number may directly determine all of the fluctuation modes, but in this example, the effect control device 300 determines the specific mode. For example, only the fluctuation time and the reach system (rough type of reach) are determined by the fluctuation pattern random number 1, and the effect control device 300 determines a specific fluctuation mode based on the determined fluctuation time and reach system.

Next, in step S77, the winning opening switch monitoring process and the error monitoring process are executed. The winning port switch monitoring process monitors the input flags (starting port switches 120 and 121 of the special figure, winning port switch 123, lower count switch 124 and upper count switch 125) set as described above, for example, the lower count switch. When the input flag of 124 is set, processing such as preparation for requesting the payout control device 200 to pay out 15 prize balls is executed. In addition, the error monitoring process includes undetected errors of the above-mentioned sensors, excessive error of prize ball ejection, the open state of the glass frame 5, the large winning opening 27a (first large winning opening), and the second variable winning device. This is a process for monitoring the opening of 33 (the second major winning opening), illegal winning of prizes other than when the Fuden 26 is open, and the like.

Next, in step S78, a special figure game process is performed. In this special figure game processing, comprehensive control of the entire variable display game of the special figure is performed. That is, when the fluctuation start condition (start condition of the fluctuation display game) is satisfied, the process of determining the jackpot random number, the process of setting the combination of the stop symbols of the special figure (result mode), and the process of setting the fluctuation mode of the special figure. Is performed (details will be described later).
Here, when the fluctuation start condition is satisfied, when there is a start opening prize in the waiting state and the fluctuation display game is started, the fluctuation display game ends with a miss and the start memory is stored, and the fluctuation display game is executed again. When the game is played, there are three types when the jackpot ends, there is a start memory, and the variable display game is executed again.
Further, in this special figure game process, a process of setting various output data related to the variable display game of the special figure is also performed. That is, for example, the content (command data) of the command to be transmitted to the effect control device 300 or the like is set according to the game state of the variable display game of the special figure.

Next, in step S79, processing for the variable display game of the normal figure is performed. That is, a process of setting the content of a command to be transmitted to the effect control device 300 or the like is performed according to the state of the variable display game of the normal drawing.
Next, in step S80, the segment LED editing process is executed. This displays the special figure symbol determined in the special figure game process of step S78, the normal figure symbol determined in the normal figure game process of step S79, and other information on the main special figure of the batch display device 35. This is a process for displaying on a device (LED, 7-segment display).
Next, in step S81, the magnet fraud monitoring process is executed. This is to check the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 126 to determine whether or not there is an abnormality. For example, if the input flag of the magnetic sensor 126 is set, it is assumed that a magnetic error has occurred, and a predetermined process ( (Send error notification command, etc.) is executed.

Next, in step S82, the radio wave fraud monitoring process is executed. This is to check the detection signal from the radio wave sensor 127 to determine whether or not there is an abnormality. For example, if the input flag of the radio wave sensor 127 is set, it is determined that fraud using radio waves has occurred. (Sending an error notification command, etc.) is executed.
Next, in step S83, the external information editing process is executed. This is for editing the data to be output from the game control device 100 to the outside. This data becomes output data (including a unique ID in addition to a jackpot signal, a prize ball signal, etc.) to the payout control device 200 and the external information terminal board 55.
After that, in order to restart the main routine, the timer interrupt request is cleared in step S84, the register saved in step S85 is restored, interruptation is permitted in step S86, and the processing interrupted at the time of interruption is restored (return). )do.

[Input processing]
Next, the input process (step S72) in the timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG.
In the input process, first, the state of the detection signal of the switch captured in the input port 1, that is, the first input port 160 is read (step S91). Then, if there is an unused bit among the 8-bit ports, the state of that bit is cleared (step S92).
Here, the switches monitored by the input port 1 are as follows.
・ Glass frame open detection switch (bit 0)
・ Front frame open detection switch (bit 1)
-Payout error status signal (bit 4)
・ Shoot ball out switch signal (bit 5)
・ Overflow switch signal) Bit 6)
Subsequently, the read state of the input port 1 is saved (stored) in the switch control area 1 in the RWM (step S93). Next, in step S94, unused bit data is prepared.
Here, "preparation" in this embodiment means setting a value in a register, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a value may be set in RWM or other memory.
Next, the bit data to be inverted in step S95 is prepared. For example, since the radio wave sensor 127 needs to invert the detection signal, bit data such as such a sensor / switch is prepared.

Next, the address of the switch control area 2 in the RWM is prepared in step S96, the address of the input port 2, that is, the second input port 161 is prepared in step S97, and the switch reading process is further performed in step S98.
Here, the switches monitored by the input port 2 are as follows.
-Starting port 2 switch (bit 0): 2nd starting port switch 121
-Starting port 1 switch (bit 1): First starting port switch 120
-Left winning opening switch (bit 2): winning opening switch 1_123
-Right winning opening switch (bit 3): winning opening switch 2_123
-Gate switch (bit 4): Gate switch 122
・ Lower prize opening switch 1 (bit 5): Lower count switch 1_124
・ Lower prize opening switch 2 (bit 6): Lower count switch 2_124
・ Upper prize opening switch (bit 7): Upper count switch 125
Although not shown in FIG. 4, for example, a plurality of (two) winning opening switches may be arranged to correspond to the winning opening switch 123. As an example, the left winning opening switch (bit) is described above. 2): Winning opening switch 1_123, right winning opening switch (bit 3): Two switches are monitored by the input port 2 as a notation such as winning opening switch 2_123. This also applies to the lower prize opening switch 124. A plurality of magnetic sensors 126, which will be described later, may be arranged and monitored by the input port 3.
Next, unused bit data is prepared in step S99, and bit data to be inverted is prepared in step S100. After that, the address of the switch control area 3 in the RWM is prepared in step S101, the address of the input port 3, that is, the third input port 162 is prepared in step S102, and the switch reading process is further performed in step S103 to perform the input process. To finish.
Here, the switches monitored by the input port 3 are as follows.
-Radio wave sensor (bit 0): Radio wave sensor 127
・ Switch abnormality detection signal 1 (bit 1)
-Magnetic sensor (bit 2): Magnetic sensor 126
・ Switch abnormality detection signal 2 (bit 3)

[Switch reading process]
Next, the switch reading process (step S103) in the above-mentioned input process will be described with reference to FIG.
In the switch reading process, the state of the signal captured in the target input port is read (step S111). This corresponds to the first reading. Next, if there is an unused bit among the 8-bit ports, the state of that bit is cleared (step S112), the bit that needs to be inverted is inverted (step S113), and then the target switch control area in the RWM Save (store) to the port input state 1 (step S114). After that, it waits for the delay time (0.1 ms) until the second reading to elapse (step S115).

When the delay time (0.1 ms) elapses, the state of the signal captured in the target input port is read a second time (step S116). Then, if there is an unused bit among the 8-bit ports, the state of that bit is cleared (step S117), the bit that needs to be inverted is inverted (step S118), and then the port input state of the target switch control area. Save (store) in 2 (step S119). After that, the bits changed in the first and second readings, that is, the signals are detected, and a definite bit pattern is created (step S120). Specifically, among the states of the input port to be read, a fixed bit pattern is created in which bits having the same state as the first and second times are set to "1" and bits having different states are set to "0". Next, the logical product of the fixed bit pattern and the port input state 2 is taken and used as the fixed bit this time (step S121).

Next, an undetermined bit pattern is created in which the bits having the same state are 0 and the bits having different states are 1 in the first and second reads (step S122), and the logical product of the undetermined bit pattern and the confirmed state at the time of the previous interrupt. Is used as the previous holding bit (step S123). As a result, it is possible to obtain a signal state in which noise due to chattering of the switch or the like is removed. Then, the fixed bit this time and the held bit last time are combined and saved in the RWM as the fixed state this time (step S124), the exclusive OR of the fixed state of the previous time and the fixed state this time is taken, and saved in the RWM as the rising edge (step S124). Step S125), the switch reading process is terminated.

When the timer interrupt cycle is short (for example, 2 ms), the switch is read by reading the switch once for each interrupt process and comparing it with the result of the previous read to change the signal. There is a method of determining whether or not the switch has been executed, but if this is done, the correct determination may not be made if the state of the switch read by the previous interrupt is lost before the next interrupt processing. In addition, since the input pulse of the switch must be held for more than twice the timer interrupt cycle by simple calculation, the design of the electric circuit to extend the pulse and the speed of the game ball passing through the switch are slowed down. It is necessary to design the structure of the spherical flow path.
On the other hand, as in this embodiment, the amount that can be processed in the interrupt by extending the timer interrupt cycle by performing the switch read processing twice in one interrupt processing with a predetermined time difference. It is possible to avoid the above-mentioned problems by achieving both the increase and the ease of structural design.

[Output processing]
Next, the output process (step S73) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described with reference to FIG.
In the output process, first, all the output data of the port 176 (see FIG. 5) that outputs the segment data of the batch display device (LED) 35 is turned off (step S131). Subsequently, the data to be output to the third port 175 having the function of outputting the data of the first special winning opening solenoid 133, the second special winning opening solenoid 134, and the general electric solenoid 132 is synthesized and output (step S132).
Next, the value of the digit counter for sequentially scanning the digit lines of the batch display device (LED) 35 is updated (updated (+1) in the range of 0 to 3) (step S133), and the LED corresponding to the value of the digit counter is updated. Load (acquire) the output data of the digit line of (step S134). Next, the acquired data is output to the digit output port (fifth port 177) (step S135). The fifth port 177 is an output port for outputting on / off data of the digit line to which the cathode terminal of the LED of the batch display device 35 is connected.
Next, the output data of the segment line is loaded (acquired) from the segment data area in the RWM corresponding to the value of the digit counter (step S136), and the acquired segment output data is set to the segment output port (fourth port 176). Output (step S137). The fourth port 176 is an output port for outputting on / off data of the segment line to which the anode terminal of the LED is connected according to the content to be displayed on the batch display device 35.

Subsequently, the data to be output to the external information terminal board 55 is loaded, synthesized, and output to the external information output port (sixth port 180) (step S138). The sixth port 180 is an output port for outputting information about the pachinko machine 1 such as jackpot information to the external information terminal board 55 as an external information signal (external information shown in FIG. 4).
Next, the output data 1 to 3 of the test signal to be output to the test firing test apparatus are loaded and synthesized, and the combined data is output to the test terminal output port 1 provided on the relay board 170 (step S139). After that, the output data 4 to 6 of the test signal to be output to the test firing test apparatus are loaded and synthesized, and the combined data is output to the test terminal output port 2 provided on the relay board 170 (step S140).
Next, the output data 7 to 8 of the test signal to be output to the test firing test apparatus are loaded and synthesized, and the combined data is output to the test terminal output port 3 provided on the relay board 170 (step S141). Further, the output data 9 to 10 of the test signal to be output to the test firing test apparatus are loaded and synthesized, and the combined data is output to the test terminal output port 4 provided on the relay board 170 (step S142). Further, the output data 11 of the test signal to be output to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the combined data is output to the test terminal output port 5 provided on the relay board 170 (step S143), and FIG. Ends the output processing of.

[Payout command transmission process]
Next, the payout command transmission process (step S74) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG.
In the payout command transmission process, first, among a plurality of prize number counter areas provided for each prize ball number (for example, 3 prize balls, 10 prize balls, 14 prize balls), the number of prizes to be checked It is determined whether there is a count number other than "0" in the counter area (step S151).
The structure of the winning number counter area is as follows, for example.
・ 3 prize ball counter ・ 10 prize ball counter ・ 14 prize ball counter Each prize number counter area can store up to 255 prizes, and in the check of the prize number counter area, the above-mentioned counter is displayed from above. Check in order (from the 3 prize ball counter).
Returning to the flow, when there is no count number (step S151: NO), the address of the winning number counter area to be checked is updated (step S152), and whether the check of the count number of all the winning number counter areas is completed. Is determined (step S153). If it is determined in this determination that all the checks have been completed (step S153; YES), the payout command transmission process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that all the checks have not been completed (step S153; NO), the process returns to step S151 and the above process is repeated.

Further, when it is determined in step S151 that there is a count number (step S151; YES), the count number of the target winning number counter area is subtracted (-1) (step S154), and the winning number counter area The payout command (negative logic data) corresponding to the address is acquired (step S155). Then, a strobe off timer for measuring the off time of the strobe signal indicating whether the reading of data is valid or invalid (for example, the time for maintaining the low level, for example, 0.015 ms) is set (step S156), and the data is acquired in step S155. A payout command (negative logic data) and an off state (low level) strobe signal are output to port 171 (see FIG. 5) (step S157).

After that, the strobe off timer is updated by -1 (step S158), and it is determined whether the value of the strobe off timer is 0, that is, whether the off time set in step S156 has elapsed (step S159). If the value of the strobe off timer is not 0 (step S159; NO), that is, if the off time has not elapsed, the process returns to step S157. Further, when the value of the strobe off timer is 0 (step S159; YES), that is, when the off time has elapsed, the negative logic output remaining timer that measures the remaining output time of the negative logic data (for example, 0.030 ms) is set. Set (step S160).

Next, a payout command (negative logic data) is output, and an on-state (high level) strobe signal is output to port 171 (step S161). Then, the negative logic output remaining timer is updated by -1 (step S162), and it is determined whether the value of the negative logic output remaining timer is 0, that is, whether the output time of the negative logic data set in step S160 has expired (step S162). Step S163). If the value of the negative logic output remaining timer is not 0 (step S163; NO), that is, if the output time of the negative logic data has not ended, the process returns to step S161. When the value of the negative logic output remaining timer is 0 (step S163; YES), that is, when the output time of the negative logic data ends, the above-mentioned negative logic payout command data is inverted and the positive logic payout command is given. Data is generated (step S164).

Next, a strobe-on remaining timer that measures the on-remaining time (high-level time, for example, 0.015 ms) of the strobe signal is set (step S165), and the payout command (positive logic data) generated in step S164 is set. The on-state (high level) strobe signal is output to port 171 (step S166). After that, the strobe-on remaining timer is updated by -1 (step S167), and it is determined whether the value of the strobe-on remaining timer is 0, that is, whether the on time set in step S165 has expired (step S168). If the value of the strobe-on remaining timer is not 0 (step S168; NO), that is, if the on-time has not ended, the process returns to step S166. Further, when the value of the strobe-on remaining timer is 0 (step S168; YES), that is, when the on-time ends, the positive logic output remaining timer that clocks the output remaining time of the positive logic data (for example, 0.030 ms) Is set (step S169).

After that, the payout command (positive logic data) is output, and the strobe signal in the off state (low level) is output to the port 171 (step S170). Then, the positive logic output remaining timer is updated by -1 (step S171), and it is determined whether the value of the positive logic output remaining timer is 0, that is, whether the output time of the positive logic data set in step S169 has ended (step S171). Step S172). If the value of the positive logic output remaining timer is not 0 (step S172; NO), that is, if the output time has not ended, the process returns to step S170. Further, when the value of the positive logic output remaining timer is 0 (step S172; YES), that is, when the value is terminated, information regarding the number of prize balls to be paid out to be transmitted from the game control device 100 to the external device is set. The main prize ball remaining number update process (step S173) is performed, and the command transmission process is completed.

By the above processing, a payout command instructing the payout of the game ball is transmitted to the payout control device 200, and the payout control device 200 pays out the game ball based on this payout command. As described above, by outputting the payout command data of the positive logic after outputting the payout command data of the negative logic, the command receiving side reads and compares the payout command data of the negative logic and the payout command data of the positive logic. Thereby, it can be determined whether or not the correct command can be received. For example, the negative logic payout command data received earlier is logically inverted, and the positive logic payout command data received later is compared. If they are not the same, it is judged as a command reception error and the command is retransmitted. By requesting the game control device 100 to receive an accurate command.

[Main prize ball remaining number update process]
Next, the details of the main prize ball remaining number update process (step S173) in the above-mentioned payout command transmission process will be described with reference to FIG.
In this main prize ball remaining number update process, a main prize ball signal to be output to an external device is set every time the number of prize balls (planned payout number) generated by winning a prize in the winning opening reaches a predetermined number (10 in this case). do. In addition to this main prize ball signal, the prize ball signal is output to the external device every time the number of prize balls actually paid out from the payout control device 200 reaches a predetermined number (10 in this case). By collating these two signals, it is possible to monitor fraudulent payouts.
That is, in the main prize ball remaining number update process, the prize ball signal is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the external device based on the payout schedule, so that the actual payout (the number of prize balls actually paid out from the payout control device 200). This is a process performed to ensure consistency with.
The prize ball signal is output from the game control device 100, which is the main board, for every 10 scheduled payouts, and 1 pulse is output from the payout control device 200, which is the payout board, for every 10 payouts. It has become.

As shown in FIG. 17, in the main prize ball remaining number update process, first, the value of the prize ball remaining number area and the payout number (payout command (positive logic value)) are added (step S181). As the value of the prize ball remaining number area before this processing, a fraction less than a predetermined number that is a reference for the output of the main prize ball signal is stored, and in this processing, the value of the prize ball remaining number area is stored. The value of the positive logic payout command is added as the number of newly generated prize balls to be paid out. Then, the added value is saved in the remaining number of prize balls area (step S182).

After that, 10 which is a predetermined number as a reference for the output of the main prize ball signal is subtracted from the value in the prize ball remaining number region (step S183), and it is determined whether the subtraction result is 0 or more (step S184). If the subtraction result is not 0 or more (step S184; NO), the main prize ball remaining number update process ends. When the subtraction result is 0 or more (step S184; YES), the value of the main prize ball signal output number region is updated by +1 (step S185), and the subtraction result is saved in the prize ball remaining number region (step). S186), the process returns to step S183.

[Random number update process 1]
Next, the random number update process 1 (step S75) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described with reference to FIG.
The random number update process 1 is a process for updating the initial values (start values) of the jackpot symbol random number 1, the hit random number, and the jackpot symbol random number 2, which are the targets of the initial value random number update process of FIG.
In the random number update process 1, first, it is determined whether the hit random number in the normal figure is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S191).

When the hit random number of the normal figure is not waiting for the initial value setting (step S191; NO), it is determined whether the big hit symbol random number 1 is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S194). If the hit random number of the normal figure is waiting for the initial value setting (step S191; YES), the hit random number initial value random number is loaded as the next initial value (step S192), and the next hit random number of the loaded normal figure is loaded. The initial value is set in the register (start value setting register) that holds the start value of the corresponding random number counter (random number area) (step S193). After that, it is determined whether the jackpot symbol random number 1 is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S194).

When the jackpot symbol random number 1 is not waiting for the initial value setting (step S194; NO), it is determined whether the jackpot symbol random number 2 is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S197). When the jackpot symbol random number 1 is waiting for the initial value setting (step S194; YES), the jackpot symbol initial value random number 1 is loaded as the next initial value (step S195), and the next initial initial value of the loaded jackpot symbol random number 1 is loaded. The value is set in the register (start value setting register) that holds the start value of the corresponding random number counter (random number area) (step S196). After that, it is determined whether the jackpot symbol random number 2 is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S197).

If the jackpot symbol random number 2 is not waiting for the initial value setting (step S197; NO), the random number update process 1 is terminated. When the jackpot symbol random number 2 is waiting for the initial value setting (step S197; YES), the jackpot symbol initial value random number 2 is loaded as the next initial value (step S198), and the next initial initial value of the loaded jackpot symbol random number 2 is loaded. The value is set in the register (start value setting register) holding the start value of the corresponding random number counter (random number area) (step S199), and the random number update process 1 is terminated.

[Random number update process 2]
Next, the random number update process 2 (step S76) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described with reference to FIG.
The random number update process 2 is a process of updating the variation pattern random number for determining the variation pattern in the variation display game of the special figures 1 and 2.
In this embodiment, there are 1-byte random numbers (variable pattern random numbers 2 and 3) and 2-byte random numbers (variable pattern random numbers 1) as the variable pattern random numbers, and the random number update process 2 in FIG. 21 updates both of them. It is targeted, and the update target is switched and processed each time an interrupt occurs. Moreover, when the random number to be updated is 2 bytes, the update process is performed at different interrupts for the upper byte and the lower byte. That is, the update of the 2-byte variation pattern random number 1 (random number for determining the reach variation mode) by the random number update process 2 executed in one interrupt process for the main process is executed for either the upper 1 byte or the lower 1 byte. It is configured to.

In the random number update process 2, first, the random number update scan counter for sequentially designating which of the plurality of random numbers to be updated is to be the target of the current update process is updated (step S201). Here, the update is performed in the range of 0 to 3.
The types of random numbers to be updated are as follows.
・ When 0: Fluctuation pattern random number 1 (upper)
・ When 1: Fluctuation pattern random number 1 (lower)
・ When 2: Fluctuation pattern random number 2
・ When 3: Fluctuation pattern random number 3
Next, the address of the effect random number update table corresponding to the value of the random number update scan counter is calculated (step S202). Then, the upper limit determination value of the random number is acquired from the referenced table based on the calculated address (step S203). The table referred to at this time stores an upper limit value for each type of random number, that is, a value for determining whether or not the random number has made a round.
Here, the effect random number update table contains data for the types of random numbers to be updated (4 blocks), and the details are as follows.
-Upper limit judgment value-Mask value of R register-Type information of random number area to be updated (Details below)
1-byte random number 2-byte random number (upper)
2-byte random number (lower)
-Update area address

Subsequently, for example, a random value such as a refresh register (hereinafter referred to as R register) used for refreshing the DRAM provided in the Z80 series microcomputer used as the gaming microcomputer in this embodiment. Reads the value of the register in which is set (step S204). Randomness can be added to random numbers by using the value of the R register. After step S204, the mask value for masking the value of the R register is acquired and the value of the R register is masked (step S205). The mask value has a different number of bits depending on the random number to be updated, for example, when updating the lower 1 byte of the variable pattern random number 1, the lower 3 bits of the R register and the upper 1 byte of the variable pattern random number 1 are used. Is set in the lower 4 bits of the R register when updating. This is because the upper limit differs depending on the type of random number.
As a mask value, when updating the lower 1 byte of the fluctuation pattern random number 1, the lower 3 bits of the R register is updated, and when updating the upper 1 byte of the fluctuation pattern random number 1, the lower 1 byte of the R register is updated. Although 4-bit is illustrated, the numerical value is an example and is not limited to this.

Next, it is checked whether the random number area to be updated is higher than the 2-byte random number (step S206). If it is higher than the 2-byte random number (step S206; YES), the process proceeds to step S207, and the value remaining by masking the value of the R register with the mask value (hereinafter, this is referred to as a masked value) is "1". Is added to the added value (upper), and "0" is used as the added value (lower), and the process proceeds to step S208.
The reason for adding "1" to the masked value is to avoid that the masked value may become "0", and if "0" is added later, it does not change from the value before the addition.
On the other hand, if the random number area to be updated is a lower-order or 1-byte random number of a 2-byte random number (step S206; NO), it branches to step S209, "0" is set as an addition value (upper), and "1" is set as the mask value. The added value is set as the added value (lower), and the process proceeds to step S208.

In the next step S208, it is checked whether the random number area (random number counter) to be updated is a 2-byte random number. Here, if it is not a 2-byte random number, the process jumps to step S210 (step S208; NO). On the other hand, when the random number region is a 2-byte random number, the process proceeds to step S211 (step S208; YES). In step S210, “0” is set as a random number value (upper), and the value obtained by adding “1” to the mask value is set as the value (lower) of the random number region to be updated, and the process proceeds to step S212.
When the random number area is a 2-byte random number, the process proceeds to step S212 with the value of the random number area (2 bytes) updated in step S211 as the random number value.

Next, in step S212, a value obtained by adding the added value determined in steps S207 and S209 to the random number value is calculated to obtain a new random number value, and whether or not this random number value exceeds the upper limit determination value acquired in step S203 is determined. Determine (step S213).
If the newly calculated random number value exceeds the upper limit determination value, the upper limit determination value is subtracted from the calculated random number value to obtain the current random number value (step S214), and then the process proceeds to step S215. On the other hand, if the newly calculated random number value does not exceed the upper limit determination value, the calculated random number value is set as the current random number value, and step S214 is jumped to proceed to step S215.
In step S215, the lower part of the random number value is saved in the corresponding random number area. Here, it is saved in either the 1-byte random number area or the lower area of the 2-byte random number. Then, it is checked whether the updated random number is a 2-byte random number (step S216), and if it is a 2-byte random number (step S216; YES), the upper part of the random number value is on the upper side of the random number area (2-byte random number (upper) side). Save to (step S217). Here, it is saved in the upper area of the 2-byte random number. After passing through step S217, the random number update process 2 is terminated.
On the other hand, if the updated random number is not a 2-byte random number (step S216; NO), step S217 is jumped, the process is not performed, and the random number update process 2 is terminated.

In this way, the CPU 101A updates the variation pattern random number for determining the variation pattern in the variation display game of the special figures 1 and 2. As the fluctuation pattern, as will be described later, there are fluctuation patterns of "no reach", "normal reach", "special (SP) 1-A reach", "special (SP) 1-B reach", and "special (special). Fluctuation patterns (reach) in various reach states such as "SP) 2-A reach", "Special (SP) 2-B reach", "Special (SP) 3-A reach", "Special (SP) 3-B reach" Variation mode) is specified.
Therefore, the CPU 101A determines the reach variation mode for determining the reach variation mode in the reach state among various random numbers extracted based on the inflow of the game ball into the start winning opening 25 and the start region of the normal variation winning device 26. It serves as a random number updating means for updating a random number (variable pattern random number).

[Winning opening switch / error monitoring process]
Next, the winning port switch / error monitoring process (step S77) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG.
The winning port switch / error monitoring process is a process of monitoring whether or not there is a signal input (signal change) from a switch provided in each winning port, and monitoring an error.

In the winning opening switch / error monitoring process, first, the detection signal from the winning opening monitoring table 1 (for example, one lower counting switch 124) corresponding to one lower count switch 124 in the lower large winning opening (variable winning device 27). Is stored (data indicating the number of the port to which is input, the bit position in the port of the signal, etc.) is prepared (step S221). In this embodiment, two lower count switches 124 are provided, and the game ball that has flowed into the large winning opening of the variable winning device 27 is detected by one of the lower count switches 124. The winning opening monitoring table 1 corresponding to the lower count switch 124 is prepared.
Next, even though the large winning opening is not open, the large winning opening is monitored for illegal winning, and the fraud & winning monitoring process (step S222) for detecting a normal winning is executed.

After that, the winning opening monitoring table 2 corresponding to the other lower count switch 124 in the lower winning opening (variable winning device 27) is prepared (step S203), and it is monitored for illegal winning and a normal winning is performed. The fraud & winning monitoring process (step S204) to be detected is executed. Next, a winning opening monitoring table corresponding to the upper count switch 125 in the upper winning opening (second variable winning device 33) is prepared (step S205), and it is monitored for illegal winning and a normal winning is detected. The fraud & winning monitoring process (step S306) is executed.
As described above, there are three count switches, two lower count switches 124 arranged in the lower prize opening, and one upper count switch 125 arranged in the upper prize opening.
Next, a fraud monitoring table for the winning opening switch in the Fuden is prepared (step S227). As a winning opening switch in the Fuden, there is a second starting opening switch 121 that detects a winning of the second starting winning opening 26 as an ordinary electric accessory (Public).
Next, while monitoring whether or not there is an illegal winning, the fraud & winning monitoring process (step S228) for detecting a normal winning is executed.

After that, a winning monitoring table (for example, a list showing switches that do not require fraud monitoring) of the winning opening switch that does not require fraud monitoring is prepared (step S229). Examples of the winning opening switch that does not require fraud monitoring include the first starting opening switch 120 and the winning opening switch 123 provided for the general winning opening 28 to 31. For the winning slot switch that does not require fraud monitoring, fraud monitoring is not performed, but the winning detection process is performed. Therefore, a winning monitoring table is prepared for the processing in step S229, and the winning number is updated in the next step. The counter update process (step S230) is executed. The detailed procedure of this winning number counter update process will be described later.

After the winning number counter update process (step S230), an error scan counter for sequentially designating a plurality of switches for monitoring errors and which switch or signal among the signals to be monitored this time is provided. Update (update "+1" in the range of 0 to 3) and prepare (step S231). Subsequently, the gaming machine error monitoring table 1 is prepared (step S232).
The types of errors for monitoring the gaming machine are as follows, and these correspond to the shoot ball out switch from the payout control device 200, the overflow switch, the error for monitoring the abnormality of the payout control device 200, and the like.
(B) When 0: Switch error (connector disconnection, switch failure, etc.)
(B) When 1: Shoot ball out error (C) When 2: Overflow error (D) When 3: Payout error error

Next, an error check of the type defined in the gaming machine error monitoring table 1 is performed (step S233), and then it is determined whether or not the error scan counter has become "3" (step S234). If the error scan counter is not "3", the gaming machine error monitoring table 2 is prepared (step S235).
The types of error monitoring defined in the gaming machine error monitoring table 2 are as follows.
(E) When 0: Glass frame open (front frame open)
(F) When 1: Front frame open (game frame open)
(G) When 2: Switch error (connector missing)
(H) In case of 3: None Next, an error check of the type defined in the gaming machine error monitoring table 2 is performed (step S236), the winning opening switch / error monitoring process is terminated, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step S234 that the error scan counter = "3", there is no error to be monitored in the gaming machine error monitoring table 2, so the timer interrupt process does not go through steps S235 and 236. Return to.

[Illegal & winning monitoring process]
Next, the fraud & winning monitoring processing (step S222, step S226, step S228) in the above-mentioned winning opening switch / error monitoring processing will be described with reference to FIG.
The prize monitoring process is performed by each of the two lower count switches 124 of the lower prize opening (variable winning device 27), the upper count switch 125 of the upper winning opening (second variable winning device 33), and the second start in the Fuden. This is a process performed on the mouth switch 121. For the large prize openings (variable prize devices 27 and 33) and Fuden (normal variable prize device 26), it is easy to open the opening and closing member to insert the game ball and pay out the prize ball. In addition to detection, it monitors fraud.
Here, in explaining the fraud & winning monitoring process in the winning port switch / error monitoring process, the information defined in the fraud monitoring table prepared is as follows.
-Data for determining whether there is an input (monitoring switch bit)
・ Lower address of fraud monitoring information ・ Lower address of fraudulent winning number area ・ Unauthorized winning error notification command ・ Upper limit of fraudulent winning number (number of fraud occurrence judgments)
・ Address of winning opening switch table ・ Notification timer update information (permission / update)
In the fraud & prize monitoring process, first, the fraud monitoring period flag of the winning port switch to be error-monitored is checked (step S241), and it is determined whether or not the fraud monitoring period is in progress (step S242). The fraud monitoring period is a period other than during the special gaming state in which the variable winning device 27 is opened when the winning slot switch subject to error monitoring is the lower count switch 124, and the winning slot switch subject to error monitoring is the upper count switch. If it is 125, it is a period other than during the special gaming state in which the second variable winning device 33 is opened. Further, when the winning port switch to be error-monitored is the second starting port switch 121, it is a period other than the state in which the opening control of the normal variable winning device 26 is executed based on the hit in the normal drawing.

Then, in the case of the fraud monitoring period (step S242; YES), it is determined whether or not there is an input in the target winning opening switch (step S243). When there is no input to the target winning opening switch (step S243; NO), the target notification timer update information is loaded (step S252). Further, when there is an input to the target winning opening switch (step S243; YES), the target fraudulent winning number is updated by +1 (step S244), and the number of fraudulent winnings after addition is the number of fraud occurrence determinations to be monitored (for example, It is determined whether or not the number exceeds (5) (step S245).

The reason why the number of judgments is set to 5 is that, for example, when the large winning opening in the open state is converted to the closed state, the game ball is caught in the door member of the large winning opening, and the game ball has passed the valid period of the count switch. This is to prevent it from being judged as illegal when a prize is won or when there is noise in the signal, and it is not easily judged as an error even though it is not illegal.
Then, if it is determined that the number of determinations has not been exceeded (step S245; NO), the process jumps to step S250 and prepares the winning monitoring table of the target winning opening switch. When the number of determined items is exceeded (step S245; YES), the number of illegal winnings is limited to the number of illegal winnings (step S246), and the initial value is saved in the target illegal winning notification timer area (step S247). Next, the target fraud occurrence command is prepared (step S248), the fraudulent winning occurrence flag is prepared as the fraud flag (step S249), and the prepared fraud flag is compared with the value of the target fraud flag area (step S260). ).

On the other hand, when it is not the fraud monitoring period (step S242; NO), the winning monitoring table of the target winning opening switch is prepared (step S250), and the winning number counter update process (step S251) for setting the winning ball is performed. Then, the target notification timer update information is loaded (step S252), and whether or not the notification timer update permission is permitted is determined (step S253). Then, when the update of the notification timer is not permitted (step S253; NO), the fraudulent & winning monitoring process ends. When the update of the notification timer is permitted (step S253; YES), if the target notification timer is not 0, the notification timer is updated by -1 (step S254). The minimum value of the notification timer is set to 0.
The update of the notification timer is permitted when the winning slot switch to be error-monitored is one lower count switch 124, and is not permitted when the winning slot switch to be error-monitored is the other lower count switch 124. As a result, regarding the fraudulent notification of the variable winning device 27, the notification timer is updated twice as frequently, and it is prevented that the time is up in half of the specified time (for example, 60,000 ms).
That is, since error monitoring is performed for the lower prize opening (variable winning device 27) by the two lower count switches 124, if the timer is updated by both switches, the timer is updated twice as a result. Since the illegal timer times out in half of the specified time, the timer is updated only at the timing of the lower count switch 124 on which the monitoring process is performed later.
When the winning port switch to be error-monitored is the upper count switch 125 or the second starting port switch 121 in the normal train, the update of the notification timer is always permitted.

After that, it is determined whether the value of the notification timer is 0 (step S255), and if the value is not 0 (step S255; NO), that is, if the time is not up, the fraud & winning monitoring process is terminated. If the value is 0 (step S255; YES), that is, if the time is up or the time has already been up, the target fraud release command is prepared (step S256), and the fraudulent prize cancellation flag is set as the fraud flag. Prepare (step S25). Then, it is determined whether it is the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (step S258).

When the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (step S258; YES), that is, when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 in the current fraud & winning monitoring process, the target number of fraudulent winnings is cleared (step S258; YES). Step S259), the prepared fraud flag is compared with the value of the target fraud flag area (step S260). If it is not the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (step S258; NO), that is, when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 in the fraud & winning monitoring process before the previous time, the prepared fraud flag is targeted. Compare with the value of the invalid flag area (step S260).

Then, when the prepared fraud flag and the value of the target fraud flag area match (step S60; YES), the fraud & winning monitoring process ends. If the prepared invalid flag and the value of the target invalid flag area do not match (step S260; NO), the prepared invalid flag is saved in the target invalid flag area (step S261), and the command setting process is performed (step S261). Step S262), the fraud & winning monitoring process is terminated.
By the above processing, an error notification command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 when an error occurs, and an illegal winning error release command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 when the error is released, and the start and end of the error notification are set. Will be done.

[Winning counter update process]
Next, the winning number counter update process (step S230) in the winning opening switch / error monitoring process and the winning number counter updating process (step S251) in the fraud & winning monitoring process will be described with reference to FIG.
In the input number counter update process, first, the number of winning port switches to be monitored is acquired from the winning opening monitoring table acquired in the above-mentioned winning opening switch / error monitoring process (step S281).
Here, the information defined in the winning table among the winning opening monitoring tables prepared by the winning opening switch / error monitoring process is as follows.
-Data for determining the number of repetitions and whether there is an input (monitoring switch bit)
-Lower address of the winning number counter area Next, it is checked whether there is an input of a detection signal (correctly, a change in the input) from the winning port switch to be monitored (step S272). Here, if it is determined that there is no input (S272; NO), the process jumps to step S277, and if it is determined that there is an input (S272; YES), the value of the target winning number counter area is loaded in the next step S273.

In the next step S274, the loaded winning number counter is updated (+1), and in the following step S275, it is checked whether or not it overflows. Then, if it is determined that the counter overflow has not occurred (step S275; NO), the process proceeds to step S276, the updated value is saved in the winning number counter area, and then the process proceeds to step S277.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S275 that a counter overflow has occurred (S275; YES), step S276 is skipped and the process jumps to step S277. The maximum number of stored items (for example, 255 for 1-byte size and 65535 for 2-byte size) is determined by the size of the provided prize counter area, so if it exceeds that, the value will return to "0" and payment will be made. You will lose information on the large number of prize balls that should be played. In order to avoid this, in step S274, the content of the area is not updated suddenly, and the update is performed after confirming that the content is (+1) outside the area and becomes “0”.
In step S277, it is determined whether the monitoring processing of all the switches is completed, and if it is completed (step S277; YES), the input number counter update processing is terminated and if it is not completed (step S277; In NO), the process returns to step S272 and the above process is repeated. By the above processing, a prize ball is set according to the winning.

[Command setting process]
Next, the command setting process (step S262) in the above-mentioned fraud & winning monitoring process will be described with reference to FIG. Note that this command setting process is a process common to the command setting process in other processes executed during the timer interrupt process.
In this command setting process, first, the command data (MODE (upper byte)) is written to the serial transmission buffer (step S281), the serial transmission buffer status is read (step S282), and it is determined whether the command is being transmitted. (Step S283).

When the command is being transmitted (step S283; YES), the command data (ACTION (lower byte)) is written to the serial transmission buffer (step S286). If the command is not being transmitted (step S283; NO), the transmission circuit may be abnormal, so the transmission circuit is initialized (step S284), and the command data (MODE (upper byte)) is rewritten to the serial transmission buffer (step S283; NO). After step S285), the command data (ACTION (lower byte)) is written to the serial transmission buffer (step S286).

Then, the serial transmission buffer status is read (step S287), and it is determined whether the command is being transmitted (step S288). If the command is being transmitted (step S288; YES), the command setting process ends. If the command is not being transmitted (step S288; NO), the transmission circuit may be abnormal, so the transmission circuit is initialized (step S289), and the command data (ACTION (lower byte)) is rewritten to the serial transmission buffer. (Step S290), the command setting process is terminated.

As described above, by transmitting the command to the effect control device 300 by serial communication, the burden on the game control device 100 can be reduced and the analysis of the command can be made difficult. In addition, the command transmission timing can be accelerated and the number of data lines can be reduced. Further, the effect control device 300 does not need to capture commands in the strobe, and the burden can be reduced. The command may also be transmitted to the payout control device 200 by serial communication.

[Error check processing]
Next, the error check process (step S233, step S236) in the above-mentioned winning opening switch / error monitoring process will be described with reference to FIG. 24.
In the error check process, first, an error monitoring table corresponding to an error scan counter for sequentially specifying which switch or signal among a plurality of switches and signals to be monitored for an error is to be monitored this time. (Step S301).
The information defined on the prepared gaming machine error monitoring table is as follows.
(B) Data for determining the switch status (b) Error notification command (c) Error notification end command (d) Error occurrence monitoring timer comparison value (e) Error release monitoring timer comparison value (f) Switch status area address ( G) Address of error monitoring timer area (H) Address of error flag area

Next, the state of the target switch acquired this time is checked, and it is determined whether the switch to be monitored (including the signal) is on, that is, a state indicating an error (step S302).
Then, when the switch is not turned on (step S302: NO), an error release flag is prepared as an error flag (step S303), and a target error notification end command is prepared (step S304). After that, the target error release monitoring timer comparison value is acquired (step S305), and the value of the target switch control area is compared with the state of the current switch (step S309).
On the other hand, when the switch is on (step S302: YES), there is a possibility that an error has occurred, so an error occurrence flag is prepared as an error flag (step S306). For example, as one of the errors defined in the game machine error monitoring table, in the case of a shot ball out, it is detected by the shoot ball out switch 216 that there is no game ball in the chute that supplies the game ball to the storage tank 51. When it is turned on, step S302 becomes YES. If YES, the error occurrence flag is prepared in step S306.
Next, the target error notification command is prepared (step S307). After that, the target error occurrence monitoring timer comparison value is acquired (step S308), and the value of the target switch control area is compared with the state of the current switch (step S309).

If the value of the target switch control area matches the state of the current switch (step S309; YES), that is, if the state of the switch has not changed, to determine the timer whether error handling is necessary. The target error monitoring timer is updated by +1 (step S312), and it is determined whether the value of the target error monitoring timer has reached the monitoring timer comparison value (reference value for determining that the error needs to be dealt with) (step S313). ). If the value of the target switch control area and the current switch status do not match (step S309; NO), that is, if the switch status changes, it is determined that error handling is not required yet, and the target switch is targeted. The current switch state is saved in the control area (step S310), the target error monitoring timer is cleared (step S311), the target error monitoring timer is updated by +1 (step S312), and the target error monitoring timer is updated. It is determined whether or not the value of has reached the monitoring timer comparison value (step S313).

If the value of the target error monitoring timer has not reached the monitoring timer comparison value (step S313; NO), the error check process ends. When the value of the target error monitoring timer reaches the monitoring timer comparison value (step S313: YES), the error monitoring timer is updated by -1 to keep the comparison value -1 (step S314), and the preparation is made. The error flag is compared with the value of the target error flag area (step S315).
Here, when it is determined in step S313 that the target error monitoring timer has reached the monitoring timer comparison value, it is considered that the error occurrence or cancellation state has been determined. However, there may be a situation in which the error occurrence is confirmed when the error has already occurred, or the error cancellation is confirmed when the error is not occurring. Therefore, after the process of step S314, step S315 is performed. Then, by comparing the prepared error flag with the value of the target error flag area, it is checked whether the error state confirmed this time is the same as the state of the current error flag.

If the prepared error flag and the value of the target error flag area match (step S315; YES), it means that the error status has not changed, so it is determined that no action is necessary and an error occurs. End the check process. If the set error flag and the value of the target error flag area do not match (if the error flags are not the same) (step S315; NO), it means that the state has changed to a new error state. The error flag is saved in the target error flag area (step S316), and the process proceeds to step S317. That is, the value of the target error flag area is changed to that of the error state determined this time, and the process proceeds to step S317. In step S317, the command setting process is performed, and the command corresponding to the error state confirmed this time is set. As a result, a measure corresponding to the current error state is taken. For example, if the shoot ball is out, an error display for notifying it is notified or the notification is canceled. When step S317 is passed, the error check process is terminated.
In this way, when an error occurs, the corresponding error flag is set and a command for action is prepared, and when the error is resolved, the corresponding error flag is cleared and the command for resolution is set. In particular, in this error check process, not only the occurrence of an error is monitored, but also the release is also monitored, so that the process is common.
It should be noted that such an error check process is the same for errors such as opening the glass frame and opening the front frame.

[Special game processing]
Next, the special figure game process (step S78) in the timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG.
In the special figure game process, the inputs of the first start port switch 120 and the second start port switch 121 are monitored, the entire process related to the special figure variation display game is controlled, and the special figure display is set.
In the special figure game process, first, in step S321, a start port switch monitoring process for monitoring the winning of the first start port switch 120 and the second start port switch 121 is performed.
In the start port switch monitoring process, when a game ball is won in the start winning opening 25 and the normal variable winning device 26 forming the second starting winning opening, various random numbers (big hit random numbers, etc.) are extracted and special features based on the winning are obtained. Figure Fluctuation display A game result pre-judgment is performed to predetermine a game result based on a prize at a stage before the start of the game. The details of the start port switch monitoring process (step S321) will be described later.
Next, in step S322, the large winning opening switch monitoring process is performed. This is a process of monitoring the detection of the game ball by the lower count switch 124 provided in the variable winning device 27 and the upper count switch 125 provided in the second variable winning device 33.

Next, in step S323, if the special figure game processing timer is not 0, -1 is updated. The minimum value of the special figure game processing timer is set to 0. Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the special figure game processing timer is 0 (step S324). When the value of the special figure game processing timer is 0 (step S324; YES), that is, when the time is up or has already been up, the special figure is referred to for branching to the processing corresponding to the special figure game processing number. The figure game sequence branch table is set in the register (step S325), and the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure game process number is acquired using the table (step S326). Then, the return address after the branch processing is completed is saved in the stack area (step S327), and the game branch processing (step S328) is performed according to the game processing number.
In the special figure game processing timer, a timer value is set to a predetermined value in each processing (steps S329 to S335: corresponding to processing number = 0 to processing number = 6) after branching according to the processing number described later. There is, and when the time-up of this special figure game processing timer is set, it is set to be the timing to execute step S329 or later. As a result, if it is time to execute step S325 or later when step S323 is executed, the determination result of step S324 becomes affirmative, and steps S325 and subsequent steps (including steps S336 to S339) are executed. .. If it is not the timing to execute steps S325 to S335 at the time of executing step S323, the determination result of step S324 becomes negative, and only steps S336 to S339 are executed.

In the branching at the processing number in step S328, the processing number 0 goes to step S329 (special figure normal processing), the processing number 1 goes to step S330 (processing during special figure fluctuation), and the processing number 2 goes to step S331 (processing during special figure display). ), Process number 3 to step S332 (fanfare / inter-interval processing), process number 4 to step S333 (processing while the big winning opening is open), and processing number 5 to step S334 (processing of remaining balls in the large winning opening). The process number 6 proceeds to step S335 (big hit end process). In the customer waiting state (during demonstration), the processing number is 0.

The specific contents of the branch in the processing number are as follows.
In step S329 (normal processing of special figures), when the number of special figure reservations (the number of special figure start memories that are held because the special figure variation display game has not been executed) is zero and the special figure variation display game is not being executed, the customer A process for displaying the waiting state on the display device 41 is performed. In addition, in this special figure normal processing, processing for starting the next special figure fluctuation display game (special figure fluctuation start processing) is performed. In this special figure fluctuation start processing, the start memory of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is monitored, and if there is any special figure start memory, the corresponding fluctuation display (first or second fluctuation display) is started. (Setting of the variation pattern command to be transmitted to the effect control device 300, etc.) is executed, the processing number is set to 1, and then the process returns. If the number of special figure reservations is zero and the next special figure variation display game is not executed, the game returns as it is (the processing number remains 0).

Next, in step S330 (processing during special figure change), a process for displaying the special figure in a variable manner is performed until the variable time set in the special figure change start process elapses. Then, when the fluctuation time elapses, a process of transmitting a command for stopping the symbol of the special symbol (symbol stop command) to the effect control device 300 is executed, and then the process number is set to 2 and returned.
Further, in step S331 (processing during special figure display), a process for displaying the variation display result of the special figure for a certain period of time (1 second to 2 seconds) is performed. In addition, if the game result of the special figure fluctuation display game is a big hit, the fanfare command is set according to the type of big hit, the fanfare time is set according to the big winning opening opening pattern of each big hit, and the fanfare / interval processing is performed. Set the information necessary to perform the above. Then, if it is a big hit, the processing number is set to 3, and if it is a miss, the processing number is set to 0 and returned.

Next, in step S332 (fanfare / processing during interval), immediately after the big hit, the fanfare processing for outputting the fanfare sound or the like from the speaker 12a or the like is executed, and the interval period is displayed during the big hit interval period. Interval processing is executed, and the processing number is set to 4 at the timing when the opening of the large winning opening of the variable winning device 27 is started. In addition, here, the opening time of the large winning opening is set, the number of opening times is updated, and the information necessary for performing the processing during the opening of the large winning opening is set.
Next, step S333 (processing during opening of the large winning opening) is a process while opening the large winning opening 27a of the variable winning device 27 and the second variable winning device 33. In addition, here, if the jackpot round is not the final round, the interval command is set, while if it is the final round, the ending command is set, and the information necessary for processing the remaining ball of the big winning opening is set. .. When the opening of the big prize opening is completed, the processing number is set to 5.

Next, in step S334 (processing of the remaining balls in the big winning opening), in order to set the time for the remaining balls in the big winning opening to be discharged, and to perform the big hit end processing if the big hit round is the final round. Set necessary information. Specifically, for example, it is constant to reliably count the game balls that have entered the large winning opening 27a of the variable winning device 27 (the same applies to the second variable winning device 33 large winning opening) just before the end of opening the large winning opening. The process of waiting for a time is performed, and after a certain period of time has elapsed, the process number is set to 3 when a jackpot round remains, and the process number is set to 6 when no jackpot round remains.
Next, in step S335 (big hit end processing), after the big hit ends, a process for executing the special figure normal process S329 is performed, and the process number is returned to 0 and returned.

Next, when any of the above processes corresponding to the process numbers is completed, the process proceeds to step S336, and a table for controlling the display (display of the present special figure 1) on the batch display device 35 of the special figure 1 (special figure 1). 1 Fluctuation control table) is prepared, and in the next step S337, the control process (symbol variation control process) for displaying the variation of the present special figure 1 is performed.
Next, the process proceeds to step S338 to prepare a table (special figure 2 fluctuation control table) for controlling the display (display of the present special figure 2) on the batch display device 35 of the special figure 2, and in the next step S339, this table is prepared. The control process (design variation control process) for the variation display of the special figure 2 is performed, and then the return is performed.

[Starting port switch monitoring process]
Next, the start port switch monitoring process (step S321) in the above-mentioned special figure game process will be described with reference to FIG.
In the start port switch monitoring process, first, a table for setting the holding information by the start winning opening 25 (first start port) is prepared (step S351), and then the special figure start port switch common process (step S352) is performed. The details of the special figure start port switch common process in step S352 will be described later together with the special figure start port switch common process in step S356.

Next, it is checked whether or not the ordinary electric accessory (ordinary variable winning device 26) is operating, that is, whether or not the ordinary variable winning device 26 is activated and is in an open state in which a game ball can be won. (Step S353) If it is determined that the normal electric accessory is in operation (step S353; YES), the process proceeds to step S355, and subsequent processes are performed. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S353 that the normal electric accessory is not in operation (step S353; NO), it is determined whether or not a general electric fraud is occurring (step S354). In the determination of whether or not a fraudulent occurrence is occurring, it is determined that fraudulent occurrence is occurring when the number of fraudulent winnings in the normal variable winning device 26 is equal to or greater than the number of fraudulent occurrence determinations (for example, 5).
In the normal variable winning device 26, the game ball cannot be won in the closed state, and the game ball can be won only in the open state. Therefore, if a game ball wins in the closed state, it means that some abnormality or fraud has occurred, and if there is a game ball that wins in such a closed state, the number is counted as the number of fraudulent prizes. Then, when the number of fraudulent winnings counted in this way is equal to or greater than the predetermined number of fraud occurrence determinations (upper limit value), it is determined that fraud has occurred.

In step S354, if it is determined that the electric power fraud has not occurred (step S354; NO), after preparing a table for setting the information of the hold by the second starting port (ordinary variable winning device 26) (step S356), the special feature. FIG. The start port switch common process (step S366) is performed to end the start port switch monitoring process.
If it is determined in step S354 that an illegal electric power is being generated (step S354; YES), the start port switch monitoring process is terminated. That is, the second start memory is prevented from being generated any more.

[Special figure start port switch common processing]
Next, the special figure start port switch common process (steps S352 and S356) in the above-mentioned start port switch monitoring process will be described with reference to FIG. 27.
The special figure start port switch common process is a process that is commonly performed for each input when the first start port switch 120 and the second start port switch 121 are input.
In the special figure start port switch common process, first, among the first start port switch 120 and the second start port switch 121, whether or not there is an input in the start port switch to be monitored (for example, the first start port switch 120 or the like). If it is checked (step S361) and it is determined that there is no input in the start port switch to be monitored (step S361; NO), the special figure start port switch common process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S361 that the start port switch to be monitored has an input (step S361; YES), it is determined whether or not there is latch data in the target random number latch register (step S362).

If there is no latch data in the target random number latch register (step S362; NO), that is, if no random number has been extracted, the special figure start port switch common process ends. If there is latch data in the target random number latch register (step S362; YES), after saving the start port winning flag of the start port switch to be monitored (step S363), the hard random number latch register to be monitored is stored. The extracted jackpot random numbers are loaded and prepared (step S364).

Subsequently, among the first start port switch 120 and the second start port switch 121, information regarding the number of winnings to the start port switch to be monitored (for example, the first start port switch 120, etc.) is provided outside the pachinko machine 1. The number of times to output to the management device 140 (the number of times to output the start port signal) (the number of times to output more times) is loaded (step S365). Then, the loaded value (start port signal output count) is updated (+1) (step S366), and it is determined whether the output count overflows (step S367). If the number of outputs does not overflow (step S367; NO), the updated value is saved in the start port signal output count area of the RWM (step S368), and the process proceeds to step S369. On the other hand, when the number of outputs overflows (step S367; YES), step S368 is jumped and the process proceeds to step S369.
Then, in step S369, among the first start port switch 120 and the second start port switch 121, the special figure reservation of the update target corresponding to the start port switch to be monitored (for example, the first start port switch 120 or the like) ( Start memory) Performs processing to determine whether the number is less than the upper limit.

If it is determined in step S369 that the number of special figure reservations is less than the upper limit value (step S369; YES), the process of updating (+1) the number of special figure reservations to be updated (for example, the number of special figure 1 reservations) (+1). After performing step S372), the start port switch to be monitored and the decorative special figure hold number command corresponding to the special figure hold number are prepared (step S373), and the command setting process (step S374) is performed.
Subsequently, the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the special figure hold number corresponding to the start port switch to be monitored is calculated (step S375), and the big hit random number is saved in the big hit random number storage area of the RWM (step S376). Next, the jackpot symbol random number of the start port switch to be monitored is extracted and prepared (step S377), and saved in the jackpot symbol random number storage area of the RWM (step S378). Further, the fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 are extracted and saved in the fluctuation pattern random number storage area of the RWM corresponding to each random number (step S379). Then, the special figure reservation information determination process (step S380) is performed to end the special figure start port switch common process.

Here, the game control device 100 (RAM101C) extracts a predetermined random number based on the inflow of the game ball into the start winning opening 25 and the starting winning area of the normal variable winning device 26, and becomes the execution right of the variable display game. It serves as a starting prize storage means for storing a predetermined number as a starting memory up to a predetermined number. Further, the start winning prize storage means (game control device 100) stores various random value values extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the first start winning opening (starting winning opening 25) in the first starting winning storage up to a predetermined number. And various random value values extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting winning opening (normal variable winning device 26) are stored as the second starting memory up to a predetermined number.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S369 that the number of special figure reservations is not less than the upper limit value (step S369; NO), the decorative special figure reservation number command (hold overflow command) is prepared (step S370), and the command setting process (step). Perform S371) to end the special figure start port switch common process.

[Special figure reservation information judgment processing]
Next, the special figure reservation information determination process (step S380) in the above-mentioned start port switch common process will be described with reference to FIG. 28.
The special figure reservation information determination process is a look-ahead process for determining result-related information corresponding to the start memory before the start timing of the special figure variation display game based on the corresponding start memory.
In the special figure reservation information determination process, first, it is determined whether or not the condition for executing the look-ahead effect is satisfied (step S391), and if it is not satisfied (step S391; NO), the special figure reservation information determination process is terminated. do. If the condition is satisfied (step S391; YES), the following processing related to the look-ahead effect is performed.
Here, the conditions under which the look-ahead effect may be executed are as follows.
・ Special figure 1: Normal variable prize device 26 is not being supported (during regular electric support) and is not being hit. ・ Special figure 2: No condition (may be executed all the time)
When such a condition is satisfied, the look-ahead process for determining the result-related information corresponding to the start memory is performed.

In the process related to the look-ahead effect performed when the condition for executing the look-ahead effect is satisfied (step S391; YES), first, whether or not the jackpot is a big hit depending on whether or not the jackpot random number value matches the jackpot determination value. The jackpot determination process (step S392) for determining the above is performed. The jackpot determination process determines that the random number extracted at the timing of the start winning is within the range of the jackpot, and at the time of the jackpot determination, the jackpot information is saved in the jackpot flag area.
Then, when the determination result is a big hit (step S393; YES), the big hit symbol random number check table corresponding to the target start port switch is set (step S394).
Here, the information defined on the jackpot symbol random number check table includes the following.
・ Random number judgment value (represents the distribution rate)
-Stop symbol pattern corresponding to the determination value Next, the jackpot symbol random number is checked to acquire the corresponding jackpot stop symbol pattern (step S395), and the stop symbol pattern is saved in the look-ahead stop symbol pattern area (step S396). On the other hand, when the determination result is not a big hit (step S393; NO), the out-of-order stop symbol pattern is set (step S396), and the stop symbol pattern is saved in the look-ahead stop symbol pattern area (step S397).

After that, the look-ahead symbol command corresponding to the target start port switch and stop symbol pattern is prepared (step S398), and the command setting process is performed (step S399). Next, the special figure information setting process (step S400) for setting the special figure information which is a parameter for setting the fluctuation pattern is performed, and the latter half fluctuation pattern setting information table corresponding to the target start port switch is prepared (step). S401), the variation pattern setting process for setting the variation mode of the special figure variation display game is performed (step S402).

Then, a look-ahead variation pattern command corresponding to the first half variation number indicating the first half variation pattern and the second half variation number indicating the second half variation pattern in the variation mode of the special figure variation display game is prepared (step S403), and the command setting process is performed (step S403). Step S404), the special figure reservation information determination process is terminated. The special figure information setting process in step S400 and the variation pattern setting process in step S402 are the same as the processes executed at the start of the special figure variation display game in the special figure normal processing.

By the above processing, a look-ahead symbol command including the result of the special figure variation display game based on the start memory of the look-ahead target and a look-ahead variation pattern command including the information of the variation pattern in the special figure variation display game based on the start memory are prepared. And transmitted to the effect control device 300. As a result, the judgment result (look-ahead result) of the result-related information (whether or not it is a big hit and the type of fluctuation pattern) corresponding to the start memory is controlled to be produced before the start timing of the special figure variation display game based on the corresponding start memory. The device 300 can be notified, and in particular, the result-related information is given to the player before the start timing of the special figure variation display game by changing the decorative special figure start memory display displayed on the display device 41. It becomes possible to notify.

That is, the game control device 100 determines a random number stored as a start memory in the start winning prize storage means (game control device 100) before executing the variation display game based on the start memory (for example, whether or not a special result is obtained). (Judgment such as) Makes a preliminary judgment means. It should be noted that the time to determine the random number value stored in advance corresponding to the start memory is not only when the start memory occurs but also before the variable display game based on the start memory is played. good.

[Great winning opening switch monitoring process]
Next, the large winning opening switch monitoring process (step S322) in the above-mentioned special figure game process will be described with reference to FIG. 29.
In the large winning opening switch monitoring process, first, it is determined whether the large winning opening (variable winning device 27 or the second variable winning device 33) is open, that is, in the special gaming state (step S411). If the big winning opening is not open (step S411; NO), the big winning opening switch monitoring process ends.
On the other hand, when the large winning opening is open (step S411; YES), 0 is set in the winning counter for counting the number of winnings to the large winning opening added in the current large winning opening switch monitoring process. (Step S412). The winning counter is a counter provided for counting the balls entered by opening one round of the big winning opening and adding it to the number of winning opening counts in the process of step S429 described later.
Next, it is determined whether the lower prize opening (variable winning device 27) is open, that is, whether the variable winning device 27 is in a special gaming state (step S413).

When the lower prize opening is open (step S413; YES), it is determined whether the large winning opening remaining ball processing performed at the end of one round is in progress (step S414). This is to determine whether or not the large winning opening remaining ball processing is in progress so as not to monitor the winning of the lower large winning opening (variable winning device 27) during the remaining ball processing.
Then, when the processing of the remaining balls of the large winning opening is in progress (step S414; YES), the large winning opening switch monitoring process is terminated. Further, when the processing of the remaining balls of the large winning opening is not in progress (step S414; NO), it is determined whether or not there is an input to the lower winning opening switch 1 (one of the lower count switches 124) (step S415).

When there is no input in the lower prize opening switch 1 (step S415; NO), it is determined whether there is an input in the lower prize opening switch 2 (the other lower count switch 124) (step S419). If there is an input to the lower prize opening switch 1 (step S415; YES), the winning counter is updated by +1 (step S416), and the lower prize winning opening count command is prepared (step S417). Then, the command setting process (step S418) is performed, and it is determined whether or not there is an input to the lower grand prize opening switch 2 (the other lower count switch 124) (step S419).

When there is no input to the lower prize opening switch 2 (step S419; NO), it is determined whether the value of the winning counter is 0 (step S428). If there is an input to the lower prize opening switch 2 (step S419; YES), the winning counter is updated by +1 (step S420), and the lower prize winning opening count command is prepared (step S421). Then, the command setting process (step S422) is performed to determine whether the value of the winning counter is 0 (step S428).

On the other hand, when the lower prize opening is not open (step S413; NO), that is, the upper prize opening (second variable winning device 33) is open (during a special gaming state in which the second variable winning device 33 is opened). In the case of), it is determined whether or not there is an input in the upper prize opening switch (upper count switch 125) (step S423). If there is no input to the upper prize opening switch (step S423; NO), the large winning opening switch monitoring process ends. Further, when there is an input to the upper prize opening switch (step S423; YES), it is determined whether or not the large winning opening remaining ball processing is in progress (step S424).

If the remaining ball of the big winning opening is not being processed (step S424; NO), the winning counter is updated by +1 (step S425), and the upper winning opening counting command is prepared (step S426). If the remaining ball of the big winning opening is being processed (step S424; YES), the step S425 is jumped to prepare the upper winning opening counting command (step S426). After that, the command setting process (step S427) is performed to determine whether the value of the winning counter is 0 (step S428). In the case of the upper prize opening, the upper prize opening count command is transmitted even during the processing of the remaining balls of the upper prize opening in order to produce the effect by winning.

In the determination of whether the value of the winning counter is 0 (step S428), if the value of the winning counter is 0 (step S428; YES), the large winning opening switch monitoring process is terminated.
If the value of the winning counter is not 0 (step S428; NO), the value of the winning counter is added to the number of large winning opening counts (step S429). This sends a command indicating that the ball has been won to each of the upper and lower winning openings to the payout control device 200, counts it with the winning counter (step S416, step S420, step S425), and performs the subsequent processing. In this step S429, the number is added to the actual number of winning openings.
Next, it is determined whether or not the number of large winning opening counts has reached the upper limit value (the number of game balls that can be won in one round: for example, 10) (step S430).

If the number of large winning opening counts is not equal to or greater than the upper limit value (step S430; NO), the large winning opening switch monitoring process is terminated. If the number of large winning openings is equal to or greater than the upper limit (step S430; YES), the number of large winning openings is kept at the upper limit (step S431), and the special figure game processing timer area is cleared to 0 (step). S432). Then, the pointer is loaded from the jackpot middle control pointer upper limit value area (step S433), the loaded pointer is saved in the jackpot middle control pointer area (step S434), and the jackpot switch monitoring process is completed. The processes of step S433 and step S434 are for closing the large winning openings based on the fact that the number of large winning openings is equal to or greater than the upper limit value. As a result, the big prize opening will be closed and one round will end.

[Design fluctuation control process]
Next, the details of the symbol variation control process (steps S337 and S339) in the above-mentioned special figure game process will be described with reference to FIG.
The symbol variation control process is a process for controlling the variation of special symbols such as the first special symbol and the second special symbol and setting the display data of the special symbol. In the symbol fluctuation control process, first, among the first special figure and the second special figure, it is checked whether the special figure fluctuation control flag related to the special figure to be controlled (for example, the first special figure) is changing (). Step S441).
Then, when the special figure changing flag is changing (step S442; YES), the symbol display table (for change) corresponding to the special figure to be controlled (for example, the first special figure) is acquired (step). S443).
Here, the information defined on the fluctuation control table prepared in the special figure game processing is as follows.
-Lower address of the fluctuation control area-Pointer of display table 2 (for stopping) -Pointer of display table 1 (for fluctuation) Next, among the first and second special figures, the special figure to be controlled (for example, the first The blinking control timer according to (1 special figure) is updated by -1 (step S444), and it is determined whether the value of the timer is 0, that is, whether the time is up (step S445).

When the value of the blinking control timer is not 0 (step S445; NO), the display data corresponding to the value of the target variable symbol number area is acquired (step S448). When the value of the blinking control timer is 0 (step S445; YES), the initial value of the blinking control timer is saved in the blinking control timer area to be controlled (step S446), and the first special figure and the second special figure are taken. Among them, the variable symbol number related to the controlled target special figure (for example, the first special figure) is updated by +1 (step S447), and the display data corresponding to the value of the target variable symbol number area is acquired (step S4448). ). After that, the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area (step S449), and the symbol variation control process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the special figure changing flag is not changing (step S442; NO), the symbol display table (for stopping) corresponding to the special figure to be controlled (for example, the first special figure) is acquired (step S450). .. Then, the display data corresponding to the value of the target variable symbol number area is acquired (step S451), the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area (step S449), and the symbol variation control process is terminated. As a result, among the special figure 1 display and the special figure 2 display which are the LED segments in the batch display device 35, the special figure display (for example, the special figure 1 display) to be controlled corresponds to the symbol number. The special figure will be displayed.

[Special figure normal processing]
Next, the details of the special figure normal processing (step S329) in the above-mentioned special figure game processing will be described with reference to FIG. 31.
In the special figure normal processing, first, it is checked whether or not the second special figure hold number (second start storage number) is 0 (step S461).
When it is determined that the special figure 2 hold number is 0 (step S461; YES), it is determined whether the special figure 1 hold number (first start storage number) is 0 (step S466). Then, when it is determined that the number of reserved special figures 1 is 0 (step S466; YES), it is determined whether the customer waiting demo has been started (step S471), and when the customer waiting demo has not been started (step S471; NO) saves the customer waiting demo flag area in the customer waiting demo flag area (step S472).

Subsequently, the customer waiting demo command is prepared (step S473), the command setting process (step S474) is performed, the special figure normal processing transition setting process 1 (step S475) is performed, and the special figure normal processing is completed. On the other hand, if the customer waiting demo has already started in step S471 (step S471; YES), the special figure normal processing transition setting process 1 (step S475) is performed to end the special figure normal processing. The details of the special figure normal process transition setting process 1 (step S475) will be described later in FIG. 32.
On the other hand, in step S461, when the special figure 2 hold number is not 0 (step S461; NO), a decorative special figure hold number command corresponding to the special figure 2 hold number after -1 update is prepared (step S462). , Command setting process (step S463) is performed. Next, the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (step S464) is performed, the special figure change process transition setting process (step S465) of the special figure 2 is performed, and the special figure normal process is completed.
Further, in step S466, when the special figure 1 hold number is not 0 (step S466; NO), a decorative special figure hold number command corresponding to the special figure 1 hold number after -1 update is prepared (step S467). , Command setting process (step S468) is performed. Next, the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (step S469) is performed, the special figure change process transition setting process (step S470) of the special figure 1 is performed, and the special figure normal process is completed.
At the time of performing the process of preparing the decorative special figure hold number command (steps S467 and S462), the hold number based on the start of the special figure variation display game is not subtracted, and the current special figure 1 hold number or the current special figure 1 hold number or A hold number command corresponding to the special figure 1 hold number or the special figure 2 hold number, which is -1 from the special figure 2 hold number, is prepared. The process of actually updating the special figure 1 hold number or the special figure 2 hold number by -1 is the change start information setting process (FIG. 41) in the special figure 1 change start process (step S469) or the special figure 2 change start process (step S464). (See) in step S611.

In this way, by checking the special figure 2 hold number before the check of the special figure 1 hold number, the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (step S464) is executed when the special figure 2 hold number is not 0. Will be done. That is, the second special figure variation display game is executed in preference to the first special figure variation display game. That is, when the game control device 100 has a second start memory in the second start storage means (game control device 100), the variation display game based on the second start memory is displayed as a variation display based on the first start memory. It is a priority control means that is executed with priority over the game.
Further, in the first embodiment, the transmission order when the command is transmitted from the game control device 100 at the start of the fluctuation of the symbol to the effect control device 300 is the order of the number of holds, the stop symbol, and the variation pattern.

[Special figure Normal processing Transition setting processing 1]
Next, the details of the special figure normal processing transition setting process 1 (step S475) in the above-mentioned special figure normal processing will be described with reference to FIG. 32.
When this routine is started, first, "0" is set as the processing number in step S481 (for example, a table for shifting to the special figure normal processing is prepared, and the processing number "0" related to the special figure normal processing is prepared in the table. ”), And save the processing number in the special figure game processing number area in step S482.
Next, in step S483, the variable symbol discrimination flag area is cleared, in step S484, the flag during the fraudulent monitoring period is saved in the lower grand prize opening fraud monitoring period flag area, and in step S485, the flag is fraudulent in the upper grand prize opening fraud monitoring period flag area. Save the flag during the monitoring period. This is because there are large winning openings (variable winning device 27, second variable winning device 33) at the top and bottom, so the flag is saved during the fraud monitoring period in the fraud monitoring period flag area corresponding to each major winning opening. be. When step S485 is passed, the special figure normal process transition setting process 1 is terminated.
As a result, various data for shifting to the special figure normal processing, for example, the processing number "0" related to the special figure normal processing is set, and each flag (each big prize opening fraud) that defines each grand prize opening fraud monitoring period is set. The process of setting the monitoring information) is performed.

[Special Figure 1 Fluctuation Start Processing 1]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing 1 (step S469) in the above-mentioned special figure normal processing will be described with reference to FIG. 33.
The special figure 1 variation start process is a process performed at the start of the first special figure variation display game. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 33, first, the type of the special figure variation display game to be executed (here, special figure 1 variation start processing). The special figure 1 fluctuation flag showing FIG. 1) is saved in the fluctuation symbol discrimination area (step S491), and the jackpot flag 1 for determining whether or not the first special figure fluctuation display game is a big hit is deviated from the jackpot information or the jackpot. The jackpot flag 1 setting process (step S492) for setting information is performed. The details of the jackpot flag 1 setting process in step S492 will be described later.

Next, after performing the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (step S493) related to the setting of the special figure 1 stop symbol (symbol information), the special figure for setting the special figure information which is a parameter for setting the fluctuation pattern is set. The information setting process (step S494) is performed to prepare the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information for referring to various information regarding the setting of the fluctuation pattern of the first special figure fluctuation display game is set. (Step S495). After that, the variation pattern setting process (step S496) for setting the variation pattern, which is the variation mode in the first special figure variation display game, is performed, and the variation start information setting process for setting the variation start information of the first special figure variation display game is performed. (Step S497) is performed to end the special figure 1 fluctuation start process.
The details of the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process in step S493, the special figure information setting process in step S494, the variation pattern setting process in step S496, and the variation start information setting process in step S497 will be described later.

[Big hit flag 1 setting process]
Next, the details of the jackpot flag 1 setting process (step S492) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 fluctuation start process 1 will be described with reference to FIG. 34.
When the routine starts, the information is saved in the jackpot flag 1 area in step S501. This is because the off-limits information is set in advance before the jackpot determination. Next, in step S502, the jackpot random number is loaded and prepared from the special figure 1 jackpot random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) of RWM. The number of hold 1 is an area for storing information (random numbers, etc.) about the special figure start memory in which the digestion order is the earliest (here, the earliest in the special figure 1). After that, a jackpot determination process (step S503) for determining whether or not the jackpot is a jackpot is performed according to whether or not the acquired jackpot random number value matches the jackpot determination value. This is to check whether the jackpot random number corresponding to the special figure 1 extracted this time is within the jackpot range (value between the jackpot lower limit judgment value and the upper limit judgment value: matches the jackpot judgment value). If it is within the range of the jackpot, it can be judged as a jackpot (detailed routine will be described later).

The check result of step S503 is determined in step S504, and if the determination result is a jackpot (YES), the process proceeds to step S505, and the jackpot information is overwritten and saved in the jackpot flag 1 area where the loss information is saved in step S501. , The jackpot flag 1 setting process is completed.
On the other hand, when NO in step S504 (when it is out of order), the jackpot flag 1 setting process is terminated. Therefore, at this time, the process ends with the information saved in the jackpot flag 1, and the jackpot flag 1 is not set.

[Big hit judgment process]
Next, the details of the jackpot determination process (step S503) in the jackpot flag 1 setting process described above will be described with reference to FIG. 35.
When the routine starts, the process of setting the lower limit determination value for the jackpot determination is performed in step S511. After that, in step S512, it is checked whether or not the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the lower limit determination value, that is, the value of the jackpot random number read in step S502 of FIG. 34 is the lower limit value of the hit determination value of the jackpot random number. Check if it is less than.
The big hit means that the big hit random number matches the big hit determination value. The jackpot judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and when the jackpot random number is equal to or higher than the lower limit judgment value which is the lower limit value of the jackpot judgment value and is equal to or less than the upper limit judgment value which is the upper limit value of the jackpot judgment value. , It is judged to be a big hit.
If it is determined in step S512 that the value of the jackpot random number is less than the lower limit determination value, it branches to step S517, sets a deviation as the determination result, and returns.

On the other hand, if the value of the jackpot random number is not less than the lower limit determination value in step S512, the process proceeds to step S513 to determine whether or not the probability is high. This determines whether or not the jackpot probability is high due to the probability fluctuation, that is, whether or not the probability of a hit result in the special figure fluctuation display game is in the high probability state (probability fluctuation state). It is a judgment. If the probability is high, the process of setting the upper limit determination value for the jackpot determination in the high probability is performed in step S514, and then the process proceeds to step S516.
Further, if it is determined in step S513 that the probability is not high, the process branches to step S515, a process of setting an upper limit determination value for jackpot determination in the low probability is performed, and then the process proceeds to step S516.
In this way, when the upper limit judgment value in high probability and low probability is set, if the value of the target big hit random number is between the lower limit judgment value and the upper limit judgment value (zone), it is considered as a big hit. You will be able to judge.
Therefore, in step S516, it is checked whether the value of the target jackpot random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (whether it exceeds the upper limit determination value), and in step S516, it is determined that the value of the jackpot random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step S516). ; YES), since it can be determined that the hit is not a big hit, the process proceeds to step S517, a deviation is set as the determination result, and a return is made.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S516 that the value of the target jackpot random number is equal to or less than the upper limit determination value (does not exceed the upper limit determination value) (step S516; NO), the value of the target jackpot random number is determined to be the lower limit determination value and the upper limit determination value. From the time between the values (zone), it is determined that the jackpot is a big hit, and in step S518, the jackpot is set as the determination result and returned.

[Special figure 1 stop symbol setting process]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (step S493) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 fluctuation start process 1 will be described with reference to FIG.
When the routine starts, it is checked in step S521 whether the jackpot flag 1 is a jackpot (whether the jackpot information is saved), and if it is a jackpot (step S521; YES), the special figure 1 jackpot symbol random number storage area (hold). Load the jackpot symbol random number from (for number 1) (step S522). Next, the special figure 1 jackpot symbol table is set (step S523).
Here, the information defined on the special figure 1 jackpot symbol table is as follows.
・ Random number judgment value (indicates the distribution rate)
-Stop symbol number corresponding to the determination value Subsequently, the process proceeds to step S524 to acquire the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded jackpot symbol random number and save it in the special figure 1 stop symbol number area. This process selects the type of special result. The stop symbol number sets the stop symbol on the special symbol display (here, the 7-segment special symbol 1 display in the batch display device 35).

After that, the jackpot stop symbol information table is set (step S525), the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step S526). The stop symbol pattern is for setting the type of the stop symbol on the display device 41 (offset, 16R probability variation, 11R probability variation, 2R probability variation, 11R normal, etc.). Next, the probability variation determination flag corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the probability variation determination flag area (step S527). The probability fluctuation determination flag is for setting the probability state after the end of the special game state.

Further, the round number upper limit value information corresponding to the stopped symbol number is acquired and saved in the round number upper limit value information area (step S528), and the large winning opening opening information corresponding to the stopped symbol number is acquired to open the large winning opening. Save in the information area (step S529). This information is for setting the execution mode of the special gaming state. Then, a decorative special symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step S532).

On the other hand, when the jackpot flag 1 is not a jackpot in step S521 (step S521; NO), the stop symbol number at the time of disconnection is saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol number area (step S530), and the missed stop symbol pattern is saved as the stop symbol pattern. Save to the area (step S531) and prepare the decorative special symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern (step S532).
There are 11 types of decorative special drawing commands, for example, and the special drawing type in the effect control device 300 can be determined by the difference in these types.
By the above processing, the stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure variation display game is set.

After that, the decorative special figure command is saved in the decorative special figure command area (step S533), and the command setting process (step S534) is performed. This decorative special drawing command is later transmitted to the effect control device 300. Then, the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step S535), and the special figure 1 jackpot symbol random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) is cleared to 0 (step S536). FIG. 1 The stop symbol setting process is terminated.

[Special figure information setting process]
Next, the details of the special figure information setting process (step S494) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 fluctuation start process will be described with reference to FIG. 37.
In the special figure information setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure time reduction is in progress (time reduction state) (step S541).
Here, the time reduction means, for example, after the big hit, the fluctuation time of the special figure or the normal figure is shortened than usual to improve the time efficiency, and the probability of hitting the normal figure is increased to increase the normal electric accessory (Public) (second). Support for winning a prize at the start opening (that is, support for the public train) by opening the start prize opening 26) (including making the opening time of the public train longer than usual), of which the special time reduction is It is related to the special map, and it is in a state of shortening the fluctuation time of the special map and providing general electric support.
When the special figure time is not shortened (step S541; NO), the fluctuation pattern selection group information table at the normal time is set (step S542). Further, when the special figure time reduction is in progress (step S541; YES), the variation pattern selection group information table for the time reduction time is set (step S543). After passing through step S542, the process proceeds to step S544. Further, when step S543 is passed, the process proceeds to step S544.

Then, when the process proceeds to step S544, the number of reserved special figures corresponding to the variable symbol determination flag is loaded, and then the variable pattern selection group information corresponding to the number of reserved special figures is acquired and saved in the variable distribution information 1 area. (Step S545). As a result, in the fluctuation distribution information 1 area, the type of the special figure (special figure 1 or special figure 2) at which the fluctuation is started, the hold number information which is the information on the start storage number for the type of the special figure, and the hold number information. The variable distribution information 1 obtained from the game state information including the information on whether or not the time is shortened is saved. This variable distribution information 1 is later used to select a variable group.
The fluctuation group includes a plurality of fluctuation patterns, and when determining the fluctuation pattern, the fluctuation group is first selected, and then one fluctuation pattern is selected from the fluctuation groups. ing.

Next, the distribution base pointer table is set (step S546), and the distribution base pointer corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is acquired (step S547). Further, the effect mode number is added to the acquired pointer (step S548), the added value is saved in the variable distribution information 2 area (step S549), and the special figure information setting process is completed.
As a result, the variable distribution information 2 obtained from the stop symbol pattern information and the effect mode information is saved in the variable distribution information 2 area. This variable distribution information 2 is later used to select a variable group. As the effect mode, one effect mode is set from a plurality of effect modes according to the probability state, the presence / absence of the time saving state, the progress status of the special figure variation display game, and the like.

[Variation pattern setting process]
Next, the details of the variation pattern setting process (step S496) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 variation start process will be described with reference to FIG. 38.
The fluctuation patterns are the first half fluctuation pattern, which is the fluctuation mode from the start of the special figure fluctuation display game to the reach state, and the second half fluctuation pattern, which is the fluctuation mode from the reach state to the end of the special figure fluctuation display game. It consists of a pattern, and the latter half fluctuation pattern is set first, and then the first half fluctuation pattern is set.

In the variation pattern setting process, first, the variation group selection address table is set (step S551), and the address of the latter half variation group table corresponding to the variation distribution information 2 is acquired and prepared (step S552). Then, it is determined whether the effect mode number is less than 2 (either 0 or 1) (step S553).
When the effect mode number is not less than 2 (step S553; NO), it is determined whether the stop symbol pattern is a detached stop symbol pattern (step S554). This is to determine whether or not the distribution is a pattern (mode) different depending on the number of holds.
Next, when the stop symbol pattern is not a detached stop symbol pattern (step S554; NO), the variation pattern random number 1 is loaded from the target variation pattern random number 1 storage area (for the number of reservations 1) and prepared (step S557).

On the other hand, when the effect mode number is less than 2 (step S553; YES) or when the stop symbol pattern is a detached stop symbol pattern (step S554; YES), the variable distribution information 1 is obtained from the table prepared in step S552. Acquire the address of the table corresponding to (step S555). The process of step S555 is performed when the distribution is a pattern (mode) different depending on the number of holds.
Next, the acquired address is prepared as the address of the latter half variation group (step S556), and the variation pattern random number 1 is loaded and prepared from the target variation pattern random number 1 storage area (for the number of reservations 1) (step S557).
If the effect mode number is less than 2, or if the stop symbol pattern is a detached stop symbol pattern, the address is acquired by taking into account the variable distribution information 1 obtained from the hold number information, which is the information related to the start memory number. By doing so, the selection mode of the fluctuation pattern is made different depending on the number of start-up memories.

After that, 2-byte distribution processing (step S558) is performed, the address of the latter half variation selection table obtained as a result of distribution is acquired and prepared (step S559), and the target variation pattern random number 2 storage area (holding number 1) is performed. The variable pattern random number 2 is loaded from (for use) and prepared (step S560). Then, the distribution process (step S561) is performed, the latter half variable number obtained as a result of the distribution is acquired, and the latter half variable number area is saved (step S602). By this process, the latter half fluctuation pattern is set.

Next, the first half fluctuation group table is set (step S563), and the table selection pointer is calculated based on the fluctuation distribution information 1 and 2 (including the determined second half fluctuation number) (step S564). Then, the address of the first half variation selection table corresponding to the calculated pointer is acquired and prepared (step S565), and the random number is loaded and prepared from the target variation pattern random number 3 storage area (for the number of hold 1) (step S566). ). After that, the distribution process (step S567) is performed, the first half variation number obtained as a result of the distribution is acquired and saved in the first half variation number area (step S568), and the variation pattern setting process is completed. By this process, the first half fluctuation pattern is set, and the fluctuation pattern of the special figure fluctuation display game is set.

[2-byte distribution processing]
Next, the details of the 2-byte distribution process (step S558) in the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 39.
The 2-byte distribution process is a process for selecting the latter half variation selection table of the special figure variation display game from the latter half variation group table based on the variation pattern random number 1.

In this 2-byte distribution process, first, it is checked whether the first data of the latter half variation group table (selection table) prepared in the variation pattern setting process is a code without distribution (that is, "0") (step S571). ). Here, the latter half fluctuation group table stores a predetermined distribution value in association with at least one latter half fluctuation pattern group, but the latter half that defines only the latter half fluctuation pattern group in which the latter half fluctuation pattern is "no reach". In the case of a variable group table (for example, some variable group tables when the result is out of order), since there is no need for distribution, the distribution value "0", that is, the code without distribution is specified at the beginning. ing.

Then, when the first data of the latter half variable group table is a code without distribution (step S572; YES), the data is updated to the address of the data corresponding to the distribution result (step S577), and the 2-byte distribution process is completed. do. On the other hand, when the first data of the latter half variable group table is not a code without distribution (step S572; NO), one distribution value first specified in the latter half variable group table is acquired (step S573).

Subsequently, a new random number value is calculated by subtracting the distribution value acquired in step S573 from the random number value (value of the fluctuation pattern random number 1) loaded in step S557 (step S574), and the calculation is performed. It is determined whether the new random number value is smaller than "0" (step S575). If the new random number value is not smaller than "0" (step S575; NO), after updating to the address of the next distribution value (step S576), the process shifts to step S573, and the subsequent processing is performed. conduct. That is, in step S573, after acquiring the distribution value specified next in the variable group selection table, the distribution value is subtracted by using the random number value determined in step S575 as a new random number value, and further new disturbance. Calculate the numerical value (step S574). Then, it is determined whether or not the calculated new random number value is smaller than "0" (step S575).

The above process is executed in step S575 until it is determined that the new random number value is smaller than "0" (step S575; YES). As a result, any one of the latter half fluctuation selection tables is selected from at least one latter half fluctuation selection table defined in the latter half fluctuation group table. Then, in step S575, when it is determined that the new random number value is smaller than "0" (step S575; YES), the data is updated to the address of the data corresponding to the distribution result (step S577), and the 2-byte distribution process is performed. To finish.

[Distribution processing]
Next, the details of the distribution processing (steps S561 and S567) in the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern setting processing will be described with reference to FIG. 40.
In the distribution process, the second half fluctuation pattern of the special figure fluctuation display game is selected from the second half fluctuation selection table (second half fluctuation pattern group) based on the fluctuation pattern random number 2, or the first half fluctuation selection table (first half fluctuation selection table) is selected based on the fluctuation pattern random number 3. This is a process for selecting the first half fluctuation pattern of the special figure fluctuation display game from the first half fluctuation pattern group).

In this sorting process, first, it is checked whether or not the first data of the prepared second half variable selection table (selection table) and the first half variable selection table (selection table) is a code without sorting (that is, "0"). (Step S581). Here, the latter half fluctuation selection table and the first half fluctuation selection table store a predetermined distribution value in association with at least one second half fluctuation pattern or the first half fluctuation pattern, as in the latter half fluctuation group table, but distribution is necessary. In the case of a selection table without a distribution value, the distribution value "0", that is, the code without distribution is specified at the beginning.

Then, when the data at the head of the second half variable selection table or the first half variable selection table is a code without sorting (step S582; YES), the data is updated to the address of the data corresponding to the sorted result (step S587), and the data is sorted. End the process. On the other hand, when the data at the beginning of the second half fluctuation selection table or the first half fluctuation selection table is not a code without distribution (step S582; NO), the first distribution value specified in the second half fluctuation selection table or the first half fluctuation selection table is one. (Step S583).

Subsequently, after subtracting the distribution value acquired in step S583 from the random number values (values of the fluctuation pattern random number 2 and the fluctuation pattern random number 3) loaded in steps S560 and S566, a new random number value is calculated (). Step S584), it is determined whether the calculated new random number value is smaller than "0" (step S585). If the new random number value is not smaller than "0" (step S585; NO), the process is shifted to step S583 after updating to the address of the next distribution value (step S586), and thereafter. Perform processing.

That is, in step S583, after acquiring the distribution value specified next in the second half fluctuation selection table and the first half fluctuation selection table, the distribution value is subtracted by using the random number value determined in step S585 as a new random number value. , Further, a new random number value is calculated (step S584). Then, it is determined whether or not the calculated new random number value is smaller than "0" (step S585). The above process is executed in step S585 until it is determined that the new random number value is smaller than "0" (step S585; YES). As a result, any one of the latter half fluctuation number and the first half fluctuation number is selected from at least one second half fluctuation pattern and the first half fluctuation pattern defined in the second half fluctuation selection table and the first half fluctuation selection table. Then, in step S585, when it is determined that the new random number value is smaller than "0" (step S585; YES), the data is updated to the address of the data corresponding to the distribution result (step S587), and the distribution process is completed. do.

[Variation start information setting process]
Next, the details of the variation start information setting process (step S497) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 variation start process will be described with reference to FIG. 41.
In the fluctuation start information setting process, first, after clearing the random number storage area of the RWM of the target fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 (step S601), the first half variation corresponding to the first half variation number acquired in the variation pattern setting process. The process of acquiring the value of the time value table (step S602) is performed, then the process of acquiring the first half fluctuation time value corresponding to the first half variation number (step S603) is performed, and further, the process of acquiring the value in the second half variation pattern setting process is performed. The process of setting the latter half fluctuation time value table corresponding to the latter half fluctuation number (step S604) is performed.

Next, a process of acquiring the second half fluctuation time value corresponding to the second half fluctuation number (step S605) is performed, and then a process of adding the acquired first half fluctuation time value and the second half fluctuation time value (step S606) is performed. After that, the added value is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step S607).
Subsequently, after calculating and preparing the variation command (MODE) corresponding to the first half variation number (step S608), the value of the second half variation number is prepared as the variation command (ACTION) (step S609), and the command setting process (step S609). Step S610) is performed.

Next, the number of special symbols held corresponding to the variable symbol discrimination flag is updated by -1 (step S611), the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the variable symbol discrimination flag is set (step S612), and the random number storage area is shifted. Then (step S613), the free area after the shift is cleared to 0 (step S614).
After that, as a process related to the extension of the stop time for displaying the result of the special figure variation display game, first, the stop extension information area is cleared (step S615). When the stop symbol pattern is a detached stop symbol pattern (step S616; YES), the effect mode number is 2 (step S617; YES), and the remaining rotation speed (game number) in the effect mode is 1. (Step S618; YES) determines whether or not the special figure has a high probability (high probability state) (step S619).

When the special figure is not in high probability (step S619; NO), the stop extension information 1 is saved in the stop extension information area (step S620), and the stop information command corresponding to the stop extension information is prepared (step S622). The command setting process (step S623) is performed to end the variation start information setting process. As a result, the stop time is set to the special figure extension display time 1 (first extension stop time) which is longer than the normal special figure display time (normal stop time).
If the special figure is in high probability (step S519; YES), the stop extension information 2 is saved in the stop extension information area (step S621), and a stop information command corresponding to the stop extension information is prepared (step). S622), the command setting process (step S623) is performed, and the fluctuation start information setting process is completed. As a result, the stop time is set to the special figure extension display time 2 (second extension stop time) which is longer than the normal special figure display time.

On the other hand, when the stop symbol pattern is not a detached stop symbol pattern (step S616; NO), when the effect mode number is not 2 (step S617; NO), or when the remaining rotation speed (game number) in the effect mode 2 is not 1. (Step S618; NO) ends the fluctuation start information setting process. In this case, the extension of the stop time is not set, and the normal stop time is set.
In this way, the stop time of the special figure variation display game is set at the start of the special figure variation display game based on the result of the special figure variation display game, whether or not it is a specific rotation speed, and the state of the effect mode. It is supposed to be done. As a result, for example, it is possible to set a continuous effect of the fluctuation time and the stop time, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

By the above processing, the information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game is set. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a determination means for determining various random value values stored in the start storage means (game control device 100). Further, the game control device 100 serves as a variation pattern determining means capable of determining the variation pattern of the identification information to be executed in the variation display game based on the determination information of the start memory.

Then, the information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game is later transmitted to the effect control device 300, and the effect control device 300 responds to the determined variation pattern based on the reception of the information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game. Decorate special figure variable display Set detailed production contents in the game. Information on the start of these special figure variation display games includes a decorative special figure hold number command including information on the number of start memories (holds), a decorative special figure command including information on a stop symbol, and a variation of the special figure variation display game. A variation command including information about the pattern and a stop information command including information about the extension of the stop time are mentioned, and the commands are transmitted to the effect control device 300 in this order. In particular, by transmitting the decorative special figure command before the variable command, the processing in the effect control device 300 can be efficiently advanced.

[Special figure 2 fluctuation start processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing 1 (step S464) in the above-mentioned special figure normal processing will be described with reference to FIG. 42.
The special figure 2 variation start process is a process performed at the start of the second special figure variation display game, and is the same process as the process in the special figure 1 variation start process shown in FIG. 33 for the second start memory. It is done as.
When the routine starts, first, the special figure 2 fluctuation flag indicating the type of the special figure variation display game to be executed (here, special figure 2) is saved in the fluctuation symbol discrimination area (step S631), and the second special figure variation display game is started. The jackpot flag 2 setting process (step S632) for setting the missed information and the jackpot information in the jackpot flag 2 for determining whether or not is a jackpot is performed. The details of the jackpot flag 2 setting process in step S632 will be described later.

Next, after performing the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (step S633) related to the setting of the special figure 2 stop symbol (symbol information), the special figure for setting the special figure information which is a parameter for setting the fluctuation pattern is set. Special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting information which is a table in which information for referring to various information regarding the setting of the fluctuation pattern of the second special figure fluctuation display game is set by performing the information setting process (step S634, see FIG. 37). Prepare the table (step S635). After that, a variation pattern setting process (see step S636, FIG. 38) for setting the variation pattern of the second special figure variation display game is performed, and a variation start information setting process for setting the variation start information of the second special figure variation display game is performed. (See step S637 and FIG. 41) to end the special figure 2 fluctuation start process.

[Big hit flag 2 setting process]
Next, the details of the jackpot flag 2 setting process (step S632) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 fluctuation start process 1 will be described with reference to FIG. 43.
In this process, the same process as the process in the jackpot flag 1 setting process shown in FIG. 34 is performed for the second start memory. In this jackpot flag 2 setting process, first, the deviation information is saved in the jackpot flag 2 area (step S641). This is because the off-limits information is set in advance before the jackpot determination. Next, the jackpot random number is loaded and prepared from the special figure 2 jackpot random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) of RWM (step S642). The number of hold 1 is an area for storing information (random numbers, etc.) about the special figure start memory in which the digestion order is the earliest (here, the earliest in the special figure 2). After that, a jackpot determination process (step S643, see FIG. 35) is performed to determine whether or not the acquired jackpot random number value is a jackpot depending on whether or not it matches the jackpot determination value. This is to check whether the jackpot random number corresponding to the special figure 2 extracted this time is within the jackpot range (value between the jackpot lower limit judgment value and the upper limit judgment value: matches the jackpot judgment value). If it is within the range of the big hit, it can be judged as a big hit.

Then, when the determination result of the jackpot determination process (step S643) is a jackpot (step S644; YES), the jackpot information is overwritten and saved in the jackpot flag 2 area where the loss information was saved in step S641 (step S645). ), The jackpot flag 2 setting process is completed. On the other hand, when the determination result of the jackpot determination process (step S643) is not a jackpot (step S644; NO), the jackpot flag 2 setting process is terminated while saving the information about the jackpot flag 2. Therefore, at this time, the process ends with the information saved in the jackpot flag 2, and the jackpot flag 2 is not set.

[Special figure 2 stop symbol setting process]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (step S633) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 fluctuation start process will be described with reference to FIG. 44.
In this process, the same process as the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process shown in FIG. 36 is performed for the second start memory.
When the routine starts, it is checked in step S651 whether the jackpot flag 2 is a jackpot (whether the jackpot information is saved), and if it is a jackpot (step S651; YES), the special figure 2 jackpot symbol random number storage area (hold). Load the jackpot symbol random number from (for number 1) (step S652). Next, the special figure 2 jackpot symbol table is set (step S653).
Here, the information defined on the special figure 2 jackpot symbol table is as follows.
・ Random number judgment value (indicates the distribution rate)
-Stop symbol number corresponding to the determination value Subsequently, the process proceeds to step S654 to acquire the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded jackpot symbol random number and save it in the special figure 2 stop symbol number area. This process selects the type of special result. The stop symbol number sets the stop symbol on the special symbol display (here, the 7-segment special symbol 2 display in the batch display device 35).

After that, the jackpot stop symbol information table is set (step S655), the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step S656). The stop symbol pattern is for setting the type of the stop symbol on the display device 41 (offset, 16R probability variation, 11R probability variation, 2R probability variation, 11R normal, etc.). Next, the probability variation determination flag corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the probability variation determination flag area (step S657). The probability fluctuation determination flag is for setting the probability state after the end of the special game state.

Further, the round number upper limit value information corresponding to the stopped symbol number is acquired and saved in the round number upper limit value information area (step S658), and the large winning opening opening information corresponding to the stopped symbol number is acquired to open the large winning opening. Save in the information area (step S659). This information is for setting the execution mode of the special gaming state. Then, a decorative special symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step S662).

On the other hand, when the jackpot flag 2 is not a jackpot in step S651 (step S651; NO), the stop symbol number at the time of loss is saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol number area (step S660), and the miss stop symbol pattern is saved as the stop symbol pattern. Save to the area (step S661) and prepare the decorative special symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern (step S662).
There are 11 types of decorative special drawing commands, for example, and the special drawing type in the effect control device 300 can be determined by the difference in these types.
By the above processing, the stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure variation display game is set.

After that, the decorative special figure command is saved in the decorative special figure command area (step S663), and the command setting process (step S664) is performed. This decorative special drawing command is later transmitted to the effect control device 300. Then, the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step S665), and the special figure 2 jackpot symbol random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) is cleared to 0 (step S666). FIG. 2 The stop symbol setting process is terminated.

By the above-mentioned special figure 1 stop symbol setting process and special figure 2 stop symbol setting process, the game control device 100 sets the variable display game as a variable display game based on the detection of the game ball at the first start winning opening (starting winning opening 36). It serves as a variable display game execution means for executing one variable display game and executing a second variable display game as a variable display game based on detection of a game ball at the second start winning opening (normal variable winning device 37). Further, the game control device 100 serves as a variable display game execution control means that controls the execution of the variable display game based on the determination result by the determination means (game control device 100).

[Processing transition setting process during special figure change (Special figure 1)]
Next, the details of the special figure changing process transition setting process (special figure 1) (step S470) in the above-mentioned special figure normal processing will be described with reference to FIG. 45.
When the routine starts, "1" (corresponding to the processing number related to the processing during special figure change) is set as the processing number in step S671, and the processing number (here, "1") is set in the special figure game processing number area in step S672. To save. Next, in step S673, the customer waiting demo flag area is cleared, and in step S674, the signal relating to the start of fluctuation in Special Figure 1 is saved in the test signal output data area.
Next, in step S675, the changing flag is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area, and in step S676, the blinking control timer (special figure 1 display which is an LED segment in the batch display device 35) is saved in the special figure 1 blinking control timer area. The initial value (for example, 200 ms) of the blinking cycle timer of the device is saved and the routine is terminated.
In this way, the process for shifting to the process during the change of the special figure 1 is performed with respect to the special figure 1.

[Processing transition setting process during special figure change (Special figure 2)]
Next, the details of the special figure changing process transition setting process (special figure 2) (step S465) in the above-mentioned special figure normal processing will be described with reference to FIG. 46.
When the routine starts, "1" (corresponding to the processing number related to the processing during special figure change) is set as the processing number in step S681, and the processing number (here, "1") is set in the special figure game processing number area in step S682. To save. Next, in step S683, the customer waiting demo flag area is cleared, and in step S684, the signal relating to the start of fluctuation in FIG. 2 is saved in the test signal output data area.
Next, in step S685, the changing flag is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area, and in step S686, the blinking control timer (special figure 2 display which is an LED segment in the batch display device 35) is saved in the special figure 2 blinking control timer area. The initial value (for example, 200 ms) of the blinking cycle timer of the device is saved and the routine is terminated.
In this way, the process for shifting to the process during the change of the special figure 2 is performed with respect to the special figure 2.

[Processing during special figure fluctuation]
Next, the details of the special figure changing process (step S330) in the above-mentioned special figure game process will be described with reference to FIG. 47.
In the special figure changing process, first, it is determined whether or not there is stop extension information (stop extension information 1 or 2) (step S691). When there is no stop extension information (step S691; NO), the normal special figure display time (for example, 600 ms) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step S692), and the special figure display processing transition setting process (step S696). Is performed to end the processing during display of the special figure.

If there is stop extension information (step S691; YES), it is determined whether the stop extension information is 1 (step S693). When the stop extension information 1 is set (step S693; YES), the special figure extension display time 1 (for example, 3500 ms) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step S694), and the special figure display process transition setting process (step). S696) is performed to end the processing during display of the special figure.
On the other hand, when the stop extension information is not 1 (step S693; NO), that is, when the stop extension information is 2, the special figure extension display time 2 (for example, 14300 ms) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step S695). Processing during special figure display The transition setting process (step S696) is performed to end the process during special figure display. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a stop time setting means for setting a stop time for displaying the stop result mode of the variable display game.
As described above, the special figure display time is controlled as follows, for example.
・ Normal special figure display time: 600ms
・ Special figure extension display time 1: 3500ms
・ Special figure extension display time 2: 14300ms
In this way, in the processing during the change of the special figure, the stop extension information set at the start of the change of the special figure (set by the hit / fail of the game, the specific rotation speed, the effect mode state, etc. ) Is used to determine the display time after stopping.

[Process display transition setting process]
Next, the details of the special figure display process transition setting process (step S696) in the above-mentioned special figure changing process will be described with reference to FIG. 48.
When the routine starts, "2" (corresponding to the processing number related to the processing during display of the special figure) is set as the processing number in step S701, and the processing number (here, "2") is set in the special figure game processing number area in step S702. To save. Next, in step S703, the signal related to the special figure 1 fluctuation end processing is saved in the test signal output data area, and in step S704, the signal related to the special figure 2 fluctuation end processing is saved in the test signal output data area.
Next, in step S705, the control timer initial value (for example, 256 ms) is saved in the symbol fixed number signal control timer area. After that, in step S706, the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area is set as the information for controlling the special figure 1 fluctuation display game in the special figure 1 display (the special figure 1 display which is the LED segment in the batch display device 35). FIG. 1 The stop flag related to the fluctuation stop on the display is saved, and in step S707, the stop flag is saved in the fluctuation control flag area of the special figure 2 to end the routine.
In this way, the process for shifting to the process during display of the special figure is performed.

[Processing during special figure display]
Next, the details of the special figure display process (step S331) in the above-mentioned special figure game process will be described with reference to FIG. 49.
In the special figure display processing, first, the big hit flag 2 set in the big hit flag 2 setting process in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process 1 is loaded (step S711), and the RWM jackpot flag 2 area is cleared (step S711). Step S712) is performed.
Next, it is checked whether the loaded jackpot flag 2 is a jackpot (step S713), and if it is determined that the jackpot is a jackpot (step S713; YES), the process jumps to step S718 and clears the jackpot flag 1 area of the RWM. Then, in step S719, the signal relating to the start of the special figure 2 jackpot is saved in the test signal output data area, and the process shifts to step S720.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S713 that the jackpot flag 2 is not a jackpot (step S713; NO) as a result of checking the jackpot flag 2, the jackpot flag 1 set in the jackpot flag 1 setting process in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process is loaded. (Step S714), the process of clearing the RWM jackpot flag 1 region (step S715) is performed.
Subsequently, it is checked whether the loaded jackpot flag 1 is a jackpot (step S716), and if it is determined that the jackpot is a jackpot (step S716; YES), the signal relating to the start of the jackpot in Special Figure 1 is saved in the test signal output data area. (Step S717), the process shifts to step S720.
Further, if it is determined in step S716 that the hit is not a big hit (NO), the process shifts to step S736. In this case, the process will proceed after determining whether or not there is a time reduction.

Now, after saving the test signal related to the special figure 1 jackpot in step S717 or saving the test signal related to the special figure 2 jackpot in step S719, a process of setting the round number upper limit value table (step S720) is performed.
Next, the round number upper limit value corresponding to the round number upper limit value information is acquired, and the round number upper limit value is saved in the round number upper limit value area (step S721). Subsequently, the round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit value information is acquired, and the round LED pointer is saved in the round LED pointer area (step S722).
Next, the decorative special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is loaded and prepared from the decorative special figure command area of the RWM (step S723), and the command setting process (step S724) is performed. After that, prepare a probability information command at the time of low probability related to the information that sets the probability of winning result in the normal probability state (low probability state) in the normal figure fluctuation display game and the special figure fluctuation display game (step S725). The command setting process (step S726) is performed. Subsequently, a fanfare command corresponding to the symbol information (stop symbol number or stop symbol pattern) set in the special figure 1 or special figure 2 stop symbol setting process is prepared (step S727), and the command setting process (step S728) is prepared. )I do.

Next, the large winning opening opening information and the signal corresponding to the state of the probability of winning in the normal figure fluctuation display game and the special figure fluctuation display game are saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step S729). After that, the jackpot fanfare time (for example, 6000 ms or 48 ms) corresponding to the jackpot opening information is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step S730). Then, the large winning opening illegal winning number area of the large winning opening (first special variable winning device 27 or second special variable winning device 33) corresponding to the large winning opening opening information is cleared (step S731), and the large winning opening is opened. The flag outside the fraud monitoring period is saved in the fraud monitoring period flag area of the grand prize opening corresponding to the information (step S732).
Next, the special figure game mode flag is loaded (step S733), and the loaded flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag save area (step S734). As a result, information on the probability state when a special result occurs is stored. Then, the effect mode after the end of the special game state is determined based on the information stored later.

After that, the transition setting process 1 (fanfare / interval process transition setting process 1) (step S735) for setting various data for shifting to the fanfare / interval process is performed, and the special figure display process is terminated.
Specifically, the process number "3" related to the fanfare / interval process, the process of setting the information related to the switching of various states, and the like are performed, and the process during the special figure change is completed.
Here, as information for switching between various states, for example, a signal indicating that the game state for output on the external information terminal board 55 is a special game state (big hit state), a normal figure fluctuation display game, and a special figure change. Test signal indicating that the probability of winning in the display game is the normal probability state (low probability state), information related to clearing the number of winnings to the large winning opening during the large winning opening fraud monitoring period, special game state Information related to clearing the number of rounds, information to turn off the game state display LED related to display of high probability state, information to set the probability of winning result in the normal figure fluctuation display game to normal probability state (low probability state), power failure Information for turning off the game status display LED (high probability notification LED) related to the display of the high probability state that was lit at the time of restoration, information for controlling the special figure fluctuation display game (for example, a hit result in the special figure fluctuation display game) The information that sets the probability to the normal probability state (low probability state) and the probability that the hit result will be obtained in the normal figure fluctuation display game or the special figure fluctuation display game that is output to the effect control device 300 when the power failure is restored are the normal probability state (normal probability state). Information indicating that it is in a low probability state), information related to clearing the number of fluctuations in shortening the remaining time after a big hit, etc.) can be mentioned.

On the other hand, in step S716, when the jackpot flag 1 is not a jackpot (step S716; NO), the effect mode information check process (step S736) related to the effect mode setting is performed, and the special figure variation display game is set to the time saving state. The time reduction variation number update process (step S737) for managing the number of executions is performed. Then, the special figure normal processing transition setting process 1 (see step S738 and FIG. 32) for setting various data for shifting to the special figure normal processing, specifically, the process number related to the special figure normal processing " Performs the process of setting "0" and the like, and ends the process of displaying the special figure.

[Fanfare / Interval processing Transition setting processing 1]
Next, the details of the fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing 1 (step S735) in the above-mentioned special figure display processing will be described with reference to FIG.
When the routine starts, "3" (corresponding to the processing number related to fanfare / interval processing) is set as the processing number in step S741, and the processing number (here, "3") is set in the special figure game processing number area in step S742. To save. Next, in step S743, the signal relating to the start of the jackpot is saved in the external information output data area, and in step S744, the signal relating to the end of high probability & time saving is saved in the test signal output data area.

Next, the process proceeds to step S745, the number of rounds area for managing the number of rounds executed in the special game state is cleared, the number at the time of low probability is saved in the game state display number area in the following step S746, and the number at the time of low probability is saved in the following step S747. Figure Save the flag with low probability & no phone support in the game mode flag area.
Next, in step S748, the variable symbol discrimination flag area is cleared, in step S749, the high probability notification flag area is cleared in order to turn off the game state display LED related to the display of the high probability state, and in step S750, the special figure game mode flag is cleared. The special figure low probability & no time saving flag is saved in the area, and the command output to the effect control device 300 at the time of power failure recovery is saved in step S751. The probability information command (low probability) is saved in the power failure recovery transmission command area. Next, in step S752, the time saving variation number region for managing the number of times of the special figure variation display game that can be executed in the time saving state is cleared. As a result, the high probability state and the time saving state are ended, and the normal probability state and the normal operation state are set.

After that, the number of the effect mode 1 is saved in the effect mode number area (step S753), and the effect remaining rotation speed area is cleared (step S754). This is to be cleared once because the effect mode is managed by the game control device 100 (main board).
Next, the non-updated code is saved in the next mode transition information area (step S755), the command of the effect mode 1 is saved in the effect mode command area (step S756), and the fanfare / inter-interval process transition setting process 1 is terminated. .. As a result, the information of the effect mode is temporarily cleared (that is, it becomes the initial value of the default state) with the occurrence of the special game state.

[Production mode information check processing]
Next, the details of the effect mode information check process (step S736) in the above-mentioned special figure display process will be described with reference to FIG. 51.
In the effect mode information check process, first, it is determined whether the next mode transition information is a non-update code (step S761). If the next mode transition information is a non-update code (step S761; YES), the effect mode information check process ends. In this case, the effect mode is not changed according to the number of times the special figure variation display game is executed. For example, in a high probability state, the effect mode that continues until the next big hit is selected. be.

If the next mode transition information is not a non-update code (step S761; NO), the remaining number of rotations of the effect, which is the number of times the special figure variation display game can be executed until the effect mode is changed, is updated by -1 (step S762). , It is determined whether or not the remaining rotation speed of the effect is 0 (step S763). When the remaining number of rotations of the effect becomes 0 (step S763; YES), that is, when the effect mode is changed from the next special figure variation display game, the effect mode information address table is set (step S764), and the next mode shifts. Acquire the address of the table corresponding to the information (step S765).

Then, the effect mode number of the effect mode to be transferred is acquired and saved in the effect mode number area (step S766), and the effect remaining rotation speed of the effect mode to be transferred is acquired and saved in the effect remaining rotation speed area (step). S767), the next mode transition information of the effect mode to be shifted is acquired and saved in the next mode transition information area (step S768). After that, a command corresponding to the new effect mode number is prepared (step S769), the command is saved in the effect mode command area (step S770), the command setting process (step S771) is performed, and the effect mode information check process is performed. finish.

On the other hand, when the remaining production speed is not 0 (step S763; NO), that is, when the current production mode continues in the next special figure variation display game, the remaining production speed is the specified rotation speed (for example, 8 times). It is determined whether or not there is (step S772). If the remaining rotation speed of the effect is not the specified rotation speed (step S772; NO), the effect mode information check process ends.
When the remaining rotation speed of the effect is the specified rotation speed (step S772; YES), the effect mode switching preparation command is prepared (step S773), the command setting process (step S774) is performed, and the effect mode information check process is performed. finish. As a result, it is possible to perform an effect of notifying the switching before the specified number of rotations for switching the effect mode.
In this way, by managing the effect mode with the game control device 100, it is possible to control, for example, to generate a specific reach only in a specific effect mode, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Time reduction fluctuation count update processing]
Next, the details of the time reduction fluctuation number update process (step S737) in the above-mentioned special figure display process will be described with reference to FIG. 52.
In the time reduction fluctuation number update process, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure has a high probability (high probability state) (step S781). When the special figure has a high probability (step S781; YES), the time reduction variation number update process ends. Further, when the special figure is not in the high probability (step S781; NO), it is determined whether the special figure time reduction (time reduction state) is in progress (step S782).

If the special time reduction is not in progress (step S782; NO), the time reduction variation number update process is terminated. Further, when the special figure time reduction is in progress (step S782; YES), the time reduction variation number for managing the number of executions of the special figure variation display game in the time reduction state is updated by -1 (step S783), and the time reduction variation number is updated. Is determined to be 0 (step S784). If the time reduction variation number is not 0 (step S784; NO), that is, if the time reduction state continues even in the next special figure variation display game, the time reduction variation number update process is terminated.
Further, when the number of time reduction fluctuations is 0 (step S784; YES), that is, when the time reduction state ends in the special figure variation display game this time, a probability information command (time reduction end) is prepared (step S785). As the probability information command (time saving end), the same command as in the low probability time is used.
Next, the command setting process (step S786) is performed, then the time reduction end setting process is performed (step S787), and the time reduction variation number update process is completed.

[Time saving end setting process]
Next, the details of the time reduction end setting process (step S787) in the time reduction variation number update process described above will be described with reference to FIG. 53.
In the time saving end setting process, first, the signal related to the time saving end is saved in the external information output data area (step S791), and the signal related to the time saving end is saved in the test signal output data area (step S792).
Next, the low-probability number is saved in the game state display number area (step S793), and the normal-figure low-probability & non-supported flag is saved in the normal-figure game mode flag area (step S794). Further, the special figure low probability & no time saving flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step S795), the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step S796), and the time saving ends. End the setting process.
In this way, the number of time reductions is managed by the game control device 100, and necessary information (state) is set at the end of the time reduction.
The types of special results and the opening / closing pattern of the large winning opening (variable winning device) in the gaming machine (pachinko machine 1) of this embodiment will be described in detail later.

[Fanfare / Processing during interval]
Next, the details of the fanfare / interval processing (step S332) in the above-mentioned special figure game processing will be described with reference to FIGS. 54 and 55.
In the fanfare / interval processing, first, the process of updating (+1) the number of rounds in the special game state (step S801) is performed, and then the large winning opening opening information opens and closes the upper large winning opening (second variable winning device 33). It is determined whether the patterns are patterns 1 to 3 (step S802).
Here, as the opening / closing pattern of the upper winning opening (second variable winning device 33), as shown in FIG. 95 (details will be described later), the upper winning opening opening / closing pattern 1 to the upper winning opening opening / closing pattern 5 Since there are five types of opening / closing patterns up to, in step S802, it is determined whether the opening / closing patterns are 1 to 3.

When the large winning opening opening / closing information is the upper winning opening opening / closing patterns 1 to 3 (step S802; YES), the control pointers (S (start value), E (end) corresponding to the upper winning opening opening / closing patterns 1 to 3 are (Value))) is set (step S809), and the process proceeds to step S820 of FIG. By setting the start value and the end value of this control pointer, it is possible to set the opening and closing of the big winning opening in one round and the time thereof based on the big winning opening control table.
In addition, in the case of the upper prize opening opening / closing patterns 1 to 3, since the execution time of one round is short, a series of images are displayed from the start to the end of the special game state, not for each round. The round command corresponding to the number of rounds is not sent.
Further, when the large winning opening opening information is not the upper winning opening opening / closing patterns 1 to 3 (step S802; NO), a round command corresponding to the number of rounds in the special gaming state is prepared (step S803), and the command setting process is performed. (Step S804) is performed.

After that, it is determined whether the started round is the first round (1R) (step S805), and if it is the first round (step S805; YES), the large winning opening opening information is the lower large winning opening (variable winning device). 27) It is determined whether the pattern is an opening / closing pattern (step S806).
Here, as the opening / closing pattern of the lower prize opening (variable winning device 27), as shown in FIG. 96 (details will be described later), from the lower prize opening opening / closing pattern 1 to the lower winning opening opening / closing pattern 3 Since there are three types of opening / closing patterns, in step S806, it is determined which of the lower prize winning opening opening / closing patterns 1 to 3.
When the large winning opening opening / closing information is the lower winning opening opening / closing pattern (step S806; YES), the control pointers (S, E) corresponding to the first round (1R) of the lower winning opening opening / closing pattern are set (step). S810), the process proceeds to step S820 of FIG. 55.
It should be noted that, for the lower prize opening opening / closing patterns 1 to 3, the same operation is performed in the first round.
If the large winning opening opening information is not the lower winning opening opening / closing pattern (step S806; NO), it is determined whether the large winning opening opening information is the upper winning opening opening / closing pattern 4 (step S807).

When the large winning opening opening / closing information is the upper winning opening opening / closing pattern 4 (step S807; YES), the control pointers (S, E) corresponding to the first round (1R) of the upper winning opening opening / closing pattern 4 are set. (Step S808), the process proceeds to step S820 of FIG. 55. When the large winning opening opening / closing information is not the upper winning opening opening / closing pattern 4 (step S807; NO), the control pointers (S, E) corresponding to the first round (1R) of the upper winning opening opening / closing pattern 5 are set. (Step S811), and then the process proceeds to step S820 of FIG.

On the other hand, when the started round is not the first round (1R) (step S805; NO), it is determined whether the started round is 2 to 11 rounds (step S812), and the started round is 2 to 11 In the case of a round (step S812; YES), it is determined whether or not the large winning opening opening information is the upper winning opening opening / closing pattern (step S813). Then, when the large winning opening opening / closing information is not the upper winning opening opening / closing pattern (step S813; NO), the control pointers (S, E) corresponding to the 2nd to 11th rounds of the lower winning opening opening / closing pattern are set (steps). S814), and then the process proceeds to step S820 of FIG. 55.
When the large winning opening opening / closing information is the upper winning opening opening / closing pattern (step S813; YES), the control pointers (S, E) corresponding to the second and subsequent rounds of the upper winning opening opening / closing pattern are set (step). S815), and then the process proceeds to step S820 of FIG.

If the starting round is not 2 to 11 rounds (step S812; NO), it is determined whether the large winning opening opening information is the upper winning opening opening / closing pattern (step S816). Then, when the large winning opening opening / closing information is the upper winning opening opening / closing pattern (step S816; YES), the control pointers (S, E) corresponding to the second and subsequent rounds of the upper winning opening opening / closing pattern are set (step). S815), and then the process proceeds to step S820 of FIG. Further, when the large winning opening opening information is not the upper winning opening opening / closing pattern (step S816; NO), it is determined whether the large winning opening opening information is the lower winning opening opening / closing pattern 2 (step S817).

When the large winning opening opening / closing information is the lower winning opening opening / closing pattern 2 (step S817; YES), the control pointers (S, E) corresponding to the 12th round or later of the lower winning opening opening / closing pattern 2 are set (step). S818), and then the process proceeds to step S820 of FIG. 55.
If the large winning opening opening / closing information is not the lower winning opening opening / closing pattern 2 (step S817; NO), the control pointers (S, E) corresponding to the 12th round or later of the lower winning opening opening / closing pattern 3 are set (S, E). Step S819), and then the process proceeds to step S820 of FIG.

In step S820 of FIG. 55, the set start value (S) of the control pointer is saved in the jackpot medium control pointer area (step S820), and the set end value (E) of the control pointer is set to the jackpot medium control pointer upper limit value region. Save (step S821). Then, the solenoid information setting process (step S822) is performed, and it is determined whether or not the large winning opening opening information is the lower winning opening opening / closing pattern (step S823).

When the large winning opening opening information is the lower winning opening opening / closing pattern (step S823; YES), the large winning opening opening process transition setting process 1 is performed (step S824), and the fanfare / interval processing is terminated.
If the large winning opening opening information is not the lower winning opening opening / closing pattern (step S823; NO), the large winning opening opening process transition setting process 2 is performed (step S825), and the fanfare / interval processing is terminated.
By the above processing, any of the opening / closing patterns shown in FIGS. 95 and 96, which will be described later, is set.

[Solenoid information setting process]
Next, the details of the solenoid information setting process (step S822) in the above-mentioned fanfare / interval process will be described with reference to FIG. 56.
In the solenoid information setting process, first, the big winning opening control address table is set (step S831), and the address of the big winning opening control table corresponding to the jackpot medium control pointer is acquired (step S832). After that, the output data is acquired and saved in the big winning opening solenoid output data area (step S833), the opening / closing time value is acquired and saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step S834), and the solenoid information setting processing is performed. finish.
By this process, the opening and closing of the big winning opening and the time thereof are set.

[Processing while opening the big prize opening Transition setting process 1]
Next, the details of the process transition setting process 1 (step S824) during the large winning opening opening process in the above-mentioned fanfare / interval process will be described with reference to FIG. 57.
In the process transition setting process 1 during the opening of the large winning opening, first, the processing number is set to "4" related to the processing during the opening of the large winning opening (step S841), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step S841). Step S842). After that, the signal relating to the opening start of the lower winning opening is saved in the test signal output data area (step S843), and the information in the large winning opening count area for storing the number of winnings in the winning opening is cleared (step S844). .. Then, the lower special winning opening control flag is saved in the large winning opening determination flag area (step S845), and the large winning opening opening process transition setting process 1 is terminated.

[Processing while opening the big prize opening Transition setting process 2]
Next, the details of the process transition setting process 2 (step S825) during the opening of the large winning opening in the above-mentioned fanfare / interval process will be described with reference to FIG. 58.
In the process transition setting process 2 during the opening of the large winning opening, first, the processing number is set to "4" related to the processing during the opening of the large winning opening (step S851), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step S851). Step S852). After that, the signal relating to the opening start of the upper winning opening is saved in the test signal output data area (step S853), and the information in the large winning opening count area for storing the number of winnings in the winning opening is cleared (step S854). .. Then, the upper prize opening control flag is saved in the large winning opening determination flag area (step S855), and the processing transition setting process 2 during the opening of the large winning opening is completed.

[Processing while opening the big prize opening]
Next, the details of the process during opening of the large winning opening (step S333) in the above-mentioned special figure game process will be described with reference to FIG. 59.
In the process of opening the big winning opening, first, the control pointer during the big hit is updated by +1 (step S861), and it is determined whether the value of the control pointer has reached the value of the control pointer upper limit value region (step S862).
When the value of the control pointer does not reach the value in the control pointer upper limit value region (step S862; NO), the solenoid information setting process (step S869, see FIG. 56) is performed. As a result, the opening / closing mode of the large winning opening according to the updated control pointer is set. Then, the process transition setting process 3 for opening the large winning opening is performed (step S870), and the processing during opening of the large winning opening is completed.
As shown in FIG. 61, in the process transition setting process 3 during the opening of the large winning opening, the processing number is set to “4” related to the processing during opening of the large winning opening (step S901), and the processing number is set to the special figure game processing number area. Save (step S902), and end the process transition setting process 3 during the opening of the large winning opening.

Returning to FIG. 59, when the value of the control pointer reaches the value in the control pointer upper limit value region (step S862; YES), the large winning opening opening information is the upper winning opening short opening pattern (upper winning opening opening pattern 1). ~ 3) is determined (step S863). When the large winning opening opening information is the upper winning opening short opening pattern (step S863; YES), the large winning opening remaining ball processing transition setting process (step S868) is performed, and the processing during the opening of the large winning opening is completed. In this case, a series of images are displayed from the start to the end of the special game state, and the interval command and the ending command are not transmitted.

Further, when the large winning opening opening information is not the upper winning opening short opening pattern (step S863; NO), the current number of rounds in the running special gaming state and the round number upper limit value in the RWM round number upper limit value region are used. Is compared to determine whether the current round is the final round (step S864). If it is not the final round (step S864; NO), an interval command related to the interval between rounds is prepared (step S865), a command setting process (step S867) is performed, and a large winning opening remaining ball processing transition setting process (step S867) is performed. Step S868) is performed to end the processing during the opening of the large winning opening.
Further, in the case of the final round (step S864; YES), the ending command related to the display control of the ending display screen at the end of the special game state is prepared (step S866), and the command setting process (step S867) is performed. Then, the process for setting the transition to the remaining ball processing of the large winning opening (step S868) is performed, and the processing during the opening of the large winning opening is completed.

[Large winning opening remaining ball processing transition setting processing]
Next, the details of the large winning opening remaining ball processing transition setting processing (step S868) in the above-mentioned large winning opening opening processing will be described with reference to FIG. 60.
In the large winning opening remaining ball processing transition setting processing, first, the processing number is set to "5" related to the large winning opening remaining ball processing (step S891), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step). S892). After that, the large winning opening remaining ball processing time (for example, 1380 ms), which is the time required for the remaining ball processing, is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step S893). Then, in order to close the opening / closing member 27b of the variable winning device 27 or the opening / closing member 33a of the second variable winning device 33, off-data for turning off the first special winning opening solenoid 133 or the second special winning opening solenoid 134 is provided. The game is saved in the large winning opening solenoid output data area (step S894), and the large winning opening residual ball processing transition setting process is completed.

[Treatment of remaining balls in the winning opening]
Next, the details of the large winning opening remaining ball processing (step S334) in the above-mentioned special figure game processing will be described with reference to FIG. 62.
In the processing of the remaining balls in the large winning opening, first, the number of rounds this time in the running special game state is compared with the upper limit of the number of rounds in the upper limit of the number of rounds of RWM, and this round reaches the upper limit (final). Check whether it is a round) (step S891).
If the current round in the special game state is not the final round (step S911; NO), the interval time corresponding to the number of rounds this time and the information on opening the large winning opening is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step S912). ), Fanfare / inter-interval processing transition setting processing 2 (step S913) is performed to end the processing of the remaining balls in the large winning opening.
The interval time is set to the number of rounds this time and the time corresponding to the information on opening the large winning opening (for example, 68 ms if the upper winning opening opening / closing patterns 1 to 3 are used). The interval period between rounds is the period from the end of the round to the elapse of the large winning opening remaining ball processing time (for example, 1380 ms) and the elapse of the large winning opening remaining ball processing time to the elapse of the interval time. For example, if the upper prize opening opening / closing patterns 1 to 3 are used, it will be 1448 ms.

On the other hand, when the current round in the special game state is the final round (step S911; YES), the game mode flag is loaded from the special figure game mode flag save area that stores the probability state when the special result is derived. (Step S914). Then, the ending time corresponding to the loaded flag and the big winning opening opening information is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step S915), and the big hit end processing transition setting processing (step S916) is performed to perform the big winning opening remaining ball. End the process.
In this way, the ending period (ending time) is set based on the big winning opening information and the game mode flag at the time of big hit, not based on the symbol information.
The ending period (ending time) is not limited to the above, and may be set based on, for example, symbol information.

In the ending period from the end of the final round to the end of the special gaming state, the large winning opening remaining ball processing time (for example, 1380 ms) elapses from the end of the final round, and further, the ending time elapses from the elapse of the large winning opening remaining ball processing time. Is the period until the elapse of. For example, the upper prize opening opening / closing pattern selected when the special result is a 2R probability variation and is not in the time saving state when the special result is derived, that is, when the effect mode is selected other than the time saving state when the special result is derived. If 1, the ending time is 21020 ms. Therefore, the length of the ending period is set to 22400 ms in addition to the 1380 ms spent as the large winning opening remaining ball processing time before the ending time, and the ending effect is executed by the display device 41 or the like during this ending period.
In addition, the upper prize opening opening / closing pattern selected when the special result is a 2R probability variation and is in the time saving state when the special result is derived, that is, when the effect mode is selected in the time saving state when the special result is derived. If it is 2, the ending time is 20 ms. Therefore, the length of the ending period is 1400 ms, including 1380 ms, which is spent as the remaining ball processing time of the large winning opening before this ending time.

[Fanfare / Interval processing Transition setting processing 2]
Next, the details of the fanfare / inter-interval processing transition setting processing 2 (step S913) in the above-mentioned large winning opening remaining ball processing will be described with reference to FIG. 63.
In the fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing 2, first, the processing number “3” related to the fanfare / interval processing is set (step S921), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step S922). ).
Next, the signal regarding the end of opening of the lower prize opening (variable winning device 27) is saved in the test signal output data area (step S923), and the signal regarding the end of opening of the upper winning opening (second variable winning device 33) is saved. Save in the test signal output data area (step S924). Then, the large winning opening determination flag area is cleared (step S925), and the fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing 2 is terminated.

[Big hit end processing transition setting processing]
Next, the details of the jackpot end processing transition setting processing (step S916) in the above-mentioned jackpot remaining ball processing will be described with reference to FIG.
In the jackpot end processing transition setting process, first, "6" is set as the process number related to the jackpot end process (step S931), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step S932). After that, the signal regarding the end of opening of the lower prize opening (variable winning device 27) is saved in the test signal output data area (step S933), and the signal regarding the end of opening of the upper winning opening (second variable winning device 33) is tested. Save in the signal output data area (step S934).

Next, the information in the large winning opening count area for storing the number of winnings in the large winning opening is cleared (step S935), and the information in the round number area for storing the number of rounds in the special gaming state is cleared (step S936). ), Clear the information of the round number upper limit value area for storing the upper limit value of the number of rounds in the special game state (step S937).
Then, the information in the round number upper limit value information area for storing the flag for determining the upper limit value of the number of rounds is cleared (step S938), and the large winning opening opening information area for storing the opening information determination flag for the large winning opening is stored. The information is cleared (step S939), and the information in the jackpot middle control pointer area for setting the opening / closing mode of the jackpot is cleared (step S940). After that, the jackpot middle control pointer upper limit value area for storing the end value of the jackpot middle control pointer is cleared (step S941), the jackpot discrimination flag area is cleared (step S942), and the jackpot end processing transition setting process is completed. do.

[Big hit end processing]
Next, the details of the jackpot end processing (step S335) in the above-mentioned special figure game processing will be described with reference to FIG. 65.
In the jackpot end process, first, the probability fluctuation determination flag set based on the type of the special result that triggered the execution of the special game state is set when the high probability state is reached after the end of the special game state. It is determined whether the data is high probability data (step S951).
If the data is not high probability data (step S951; NO), the jackpot end setting process 1 is performed (step S95). Since this is a state in which the probability of rushing is not high, the process of shifting to the mode in which the time is shortened after the end of the big hit is set.
On the other hand, in the case of high probability data (step S951; YES), the jackpot end setting process 2 is performed (step S953). Since this is a high-probability rush state, a process for shifting to a mode in which the probability fluctuates (high-probability start) after the end of the big hit is set.
Next, the probability information command corresponding to the special figure game mode flag is prepared (step S954), and the command setting process (step S955) is performed.

Next, as a process of saving the information necessary for managing the effect mode in the game control device 100, first, the effect mode information setting table corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is set (step S956). Then, with reference to the set effect mode information setting table, the effect mode number of the effect mode set after the end of the special game state is acquired and saved in the effect mode number area (step S957). Further, the remaining effect rotation speed of the effect mode set after the end of the special game state is acquired and saved in the effect remaining rotation speed area (step S958), and the mode shifts to the next mode of the effect mode set after the end of the special game state. The information is acquired and saved in the next mode transition information area (step S959).
After that, a command corresponding to the new effect mode number is prepared (step S960), the command is saved in the effect mode command area (step S961), and the command setting process (step S962) is performed. Then, the special figure normal process transition setting process 3 is performed (step S963), and the jackpot end process is completed.

[Big hit end setting process 1]
Next, the details of the jackpot end setting process 1 (step S952) in the jackpot end process described above will be described with reference to FIG. 66.
When the routine starts, the signal regarding the start of the time saving is saved in the external information output data area in step S971. The signal relating to the start of the time reduction in this region is, for example, two jackpot signals ON. Then, in step S972, the signal relating to the start of the time reduction is saved in the test signal output data area. The signals regarding the start of time reduction in this region are as follows.
・ Special symbol 1 Turn on the variable time shortened status signal
・ Special symbol 2 Turn on the variable time shortened status signal
・ Normal symbol 1 Turns on the high-probability state signal
・ Normal symbol 1 Turn on the variable time shortened status signal
・ Ordinary electric accessory 1 Turn on the open extension status signal

Next, in step S973, the Fuzu high probability & Fuden support flag is saved in the Fuzu game mode flag area, and in step S974, the Tokuzu low probability & time saving flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area.
Next, in step S975, the probability information command (time reduction) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery, and in step S976, the initial value (for example, 70) of the time reduction fluctuation number is saved and returned.
By the above processing, after the end of the special game state, the probability state of the special figure variation display game becomes the normal probability state and the time saving state. Further, by setting the time saving fluctuation number initial value (for example, 70) in the time saving fluctuation number region, the time saving state is terminated by executing the special figure variation display game for a predetermined number of times (for example, 70 times).

[Big hit end setting process 2]
Next, the details of the jackpot end setting process 2 (step S953) in the jackpot end process described above will be described with reference to FIG. 67.
When the routine starts, the signal regarding the high probability start is saved in the external information output data area in step S981. The signal relating to the high probability start in this region is, for example, a jackpot 2 signal ON. Then, in step S982, the signal relating to the high probability start is saved in the test signal output data area. Signals for high probability initiation in this region include:
・ Special symbol 1 Turn on high-probability status signal
・ Special symbol 2 Turn on high-probability status signal
・ Special symbol 1 Turn on the variable time shortened status signal
・ Special symbol 2 Turn on the variable time shortened status signal
・ Normal symbol 1 Turns on the high-probability state signal
・ Normal symbol 1 Turn on the variable time shortened status signal
・ Ordinary electric accessory 1 Turn on the open extension status signal

Next, in step S983, the Fuzu high probability & Fuden support flag is saved in the Fuzu game mode flag area, and in step S984, the special figure high probability & time saving flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area. After that, the probability information command (high probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery in step S985, the time reduction fluctuation frequency area is cleared in step S986, and the jackpot end setting process 2 is terminated.
By the above processing, after the end of the special game state, the probability state of the special figure variation display game becomes a high probability state, and the time is shortened until the next special result mode is derived.
That is, after the end of the special game state, the game control device 100 can generate a specific game state (time saving state) in which the period in which the normal variable winning device 37 is opened is extended for a predetermined period. It serves as a state generation control means.

[Special figure normal processing transition setting processing 3]
Next, the details of the special figure normal process transition setting process 3 (step S963) in the above-mentioned jackpot end process will be described with reference to FIG. 68.
When the routine starts, "0" (corresponding to the processing number related to the special figure normal processing) is set as the processing number in step S991, and the processing number (here, "0") is set in the special figure game processing number area in step S992. Save. Next, in step S993, the signal regarding the end of the jackpot is saved in the external information output data area.
As the signal relating to the end of the big hit here, there is a big hit 1 signal OFF and a big hit 3 signal OFF.

Then, in step S994, the signal regarding the end of the jackpot is saved in the test signal output data area. The signals regarding the end of the jackpot here are as follows.
・ Turn off the signal while the condition device is operating.
・ Turn off the signal during operation of the accessory continuous operation device
・ Turn off the signal per special symbol 1 or the signal per special symbol 2
Next, in step S995, the probability fluctuation determination flag area is cleared, in step S996, the pointer area of the round LED indicating the number of jackpot rounds is cleared, and in step S997, the number during the time reduction is saved in the game state display number area. Then, in step S998, the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the lower prize opening fraud monitoring period flag area, and in step S999, the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the upper prize opening fraud monitoring period flag area. The process transition setting process 3 is terminated.

Next, the flow chart for the normal map game processing will be described, but here, "step B" will be used as the step number.
[Public map game processing]
First, the details of the normal-figure game processing (step S79) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to FIG. 69.
In the normal map game process, the input of the gate switch 122 is monitored, the entire process related to the normal map variation display game is controlled, and the normal map display is set.
First, a gate switch monitoring process (step B1) for monitoring the input from the gate switch 122 is performed. The details of the gate switch monitoring process (step B1) will be described later.
Next, a general electric winning switch monitoring process (step B2) for monitoring the input from the second start port switch 121 is performed. The details of the Fuden winning switch monitoring process (step B2) will be described later.

Next, if the normal figure game processing timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step B3). The minimum value of the normal figure game processing timer is set to 0. Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the normal figure game processing timer has become 0 (step B4).
When the value of the normal figure game processing timer is 0 (step B4; YES), that is, when it is determined that the time has been up or has already been timed up, the normal figure referred to for branching to the process corresponding to the normal figure game processing number. The process of setting the game sequence branch table in the register (step B5) is performed, and the process of acquiring the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the game processing number of the normal figure (step B6) is performed using the table.
Then, after performing the process of saving the return address after the branch process to the stack area (step B7), the game branch process (step B8) is performed according to the game process number.

In step B8, when the game processing number is "0", the fluctuation start of the normal map fluctuation display game is monitored, and the fluctuation start setting and effect setting of the normal map fluctuation display game, and the processing during the normal map fluctuation are performed. Performs normal processing (step B9) for setting information necessary for performing.
The details of the normal processing (step B9) will be described later.
Further, in step B8, when the game processing number is "1", the normal map changing process (step B10) for setting the information necessary for performing the normal map display processing is performed.
The details of the processing during fluctuation of the normal map (step B10) will be described later.
Further, in step B8, when the game processing number is "2", if the result of the normal-figure variation display game is a hit, whether or not the normal variation winning device 37 is being supported (during a time saving state) is being supported. The normal map display processing (step B11) is performed, in which the normal power opening time is set according to the situation, and the information necessary for performing the normal drawing per-game processing is set.
The details of the processing during display of the general map (step B11) will be described later.

Further, in step B8, when the game processing number is "3", the processing during the normal drawing is continued, or the information necessary for performing the processing for the remaining spheres of the normal power is set. Step B12) is performed.
The details of the processing during normal drawing (step B12) will be described later.
Further, in step B8, when the game processing number is "4", the normal electric remaining ball processing (step B13) for setting the information necessary for performing the normal drawing end processing is performed.
The details of the Fuden residual sphere treatment (step B13) will be described later.
Further, in step B8, when the game processing number is "5", the normal drawing end processing (step B14) for setting the information necessary for performing the normal drawing normal processing (step B9) is performed.
The details of the per-figure end processing (step B14) will be described later.
After that, after preparing various tables for controlling the fluctuation of the normal symbol by the general symbol display (collective display device 35) (step B15), the fluctuation of the normal symbol is controlled by the general symbol display (collective display device 35). Performs the symbol variation control process (step B16) according to the above, and ends the normal figure game process.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step B4 that the value of the normal-figure game processing timer is not 0 (step B4; NO), that is, the time is not up, the process shifts to step B15 and the subsequent processes are performed.

[Gate switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the gate switch monitoring process (step B1) in the above-mentioned normal figure game process will be described with reference to FIG. 70.
In the gate switch monitoring process, first, it is checked whether or not there is an input to the gate switch 122 (step B21). Then, when it is determined that there is an input to the gate switch 122 (step B21; YES), the number of reserved normal figures is acquired and it is determined whether or not the number of reserved normal figures is less than the upper limit value (for example, 4) (step B22). ). If it is determined that the number of reserved figures is less than the upper limit (step B22; YES), a process (step B23) of updating (+1) the number of reserved ordinary figures is performed.

After that, a process of calculating the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the updated number of reserved normal figures (step B24) is performed, and then a process of extracting the hit random number and saving it in the random number storage area of the RWM (step B25) is performed. And end the gate switch monitoring process.
Further, in step B21, it is determined that there is no input to the gate switch 122 (step B21; NO), or in step B22, it is determined that the number of reserved figures is not less than the upper limit value (step B21; NO). Step B22; NO) The gate switch monitoring process is terminated.

[Public winning switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the Fuden winning switch monitoring process (step B2) in the above-mentioned Fuzu game process will be described with reference to FIG. 71.
In the normal fluctuation winning switch monitoring process, first, whether the normal fluctuation winning device 26 is in the hit state and the normal fluctuation winning device 26 is executing the opening operation a predetermined number of times (for example, three times) (whether it is hitting the normal figure). ) Check whether or not (step B31). Then, if it is determined that the normal drawing is in progress (step B32; YES), it is determined whether or not there is an input in the second start port switch 121 (step B32), and there is an input in the second start port switch 121 (step B32). If it is determined in step B32; YES), a process (step B33) for updating (+1) the count number of the general electric counter is performed.

Next, it is determined whether or not the count number of the updated general electric counter has reached the upper limit value (for example, 9) (step B34), and it is determined that the count number has reached the upper limit value (step B34; YES). Then, the pointer (value at the end of hitting) is loaded from the upper limit value area of the control pointer during hitting the normal figure (step B35). Then, the loaded pointer is saved in the control pointer area during hitting the normal figure (step B36), the normal figure game processing timer is cleared (step B37), and the normal power winning switch monitoring process is completed.
That is, if there is a winning prize of the upper limit or more during the hitting state of the normal figure, the value of the hitting end is saved in the processing control pointer area during the hitting of the normal figure at that time, and the hitting state of the normal figure is in the middle. Try to finish.

Further, in step B31, it is determined that the normal drawing is not hit (step B31; NO), or in step B32, it is determined that there is no input to the second start port switch 121 (step B32; NO). ), Or even when it is determined in step B34 that the count number has not reached the upper limit value (step B34; NO), the general electric winning switch monitoring process is terminated.

[Usually processing]
Next, the details of the normal drawing normal processing (step B9) in the above-mentioned normal drawing game processing will be described with reference to FIG. 72.
In the normal drawing normal processing, first, it is determined whether or not the normal figure holding number is "0" (step B41), and if it is determined that the normal figure holding number is "0" (step B41; YES), the step After shifting to B62 and performing the normal process transition setting process 1 of the normal figure, the normal process of the normal figure is terminated. The normal process transition setting process 1 is to perform a process for repeating the normal process next time, and the details will be described later.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step B41 that the number of reserved normal figures is not 0 (step B42; NO), the winning random number is loaded from the random number storage area per normal figure (for the number of reserved numbers 1) of the RWM (step B42), and the normal figure is loaded. It is determined whether the probability of a hit result in the variable display game is higher than usual (that is, when the probability is high), that is, whether the time is shortened (step B43).
When it is not in the high probability of the normal figure (step B43; NO), it is determined whether the value of the hit random number matches the low probability judgment value which is the judgment value in the low probability of the normal figure (step B44). When the value of the hit random number does not match the low probability judgment value (step B44; NO), the deviation information is saved in the hit flag area (step B45), and the deviation stop symbol number is set in the normal figure stop symbol (step). B46), the random number storage area (for 1 hold number) per normal figure is cleared to 0 (step B51).
On the other hand, when the value of the hit random number matches the low probability judgment value (step B44; YES), the hit information is saved in the hit flag area (step B49), and the hit stop symbol number is set in the normal figure stop symbol. (Step B50), the random number storage area (for 1 hold number) per normal figure is cleared to 0 (step B51).

Further, in step B43, when the probability is high in the normal map (step B43; YES), the value of the hit random number is the high probability lower limit judgment value which is the lower limit value in the plurality of consecutive judgment values used in the high probability of the normal figure. If it is determined whether it is less than (step B47) and the value of the hit random number is not less than the high probability lower limit judgment value (step B47; NO), the value of the hit random number is a plurality of consecutive judgment values used when the probability is high. It is determined whether or not it is larger than the high probability upper limit determination value which is the upper limit value in (step B48).

If the value of the hit random number is not larger than the high probability upper limit judgment value (step B48; NO), that is, if it is a hit, the hit information is saved in the hit flag area (step B49), and the hit stop symbol hits the normal figure stop symbol. A number is set (step B50), and the random number storage area (for 1 hold number) per normal figure is cleared to 0 (step B51).
Further, in step B47, when the value of the hit random number is less than the high probability lower limit determination value (step B47; YES), or in step B48, when the value of the hit random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step B48; YES). ), That is, in the case of deviation, the deviation information is saved in the hit flag area (step B45), the deviation stop symbol number is set in the normal figure stop symbol (step B46), and the random number storage area per normal figure (holding number 1). (For) is cleared to 0 (step B51). That is, the determination value for determining the hit of the normal map by matching the values of the hit random numbers is one value at the time of low probability of the normal figure, and is a plurality of consecutive values at the time of high probability of the normal figure.

After clearing the random number storage area (for 1 hold number) to 0 (step B51), the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step B52). Then, a decorative pattern variation pattern command corresponding to the stop symbol is prepared (step B53), and a command setting process (step B54) is performed. As a result, it is possible to perform an effect corresponding to the normal map variation display game on the display device 41 or the like.
After that, the random number storage area per normal figure is shifted (step B55), the free area after the shift is cleared to 0 (step B56), and the number of reserved normal figures is updated by -1 (step B57). That is, as the oldest normal figure hold number 1 game is executed, the order of the normal figure hold numbers 2 to 4 held after the normal figure hold number 1 is moved up one by one. I do. By this processing, the value for the number of holdings of the normal figure 2 to the number of holdings of the normal figure 4 in the random number storage area per normal figure is moved from the number of holdings of the normal figure 1 of the random number storage area per the normal figure to the number of holdings of the normal figure 3. Will be done. Then, the value for the number of reserved numbers 4 in the random number storage area per normal figure is cleared, and the number of reserved numbers is decremented by 1.

Next, it is determined whether or not the normal power is being supported (in the time saving state) (step B58), and if the normal power is not being supported (step B58; NO), the fluctuation time when there is no normal power support (for example, 10 seconds). ) Is set (step B59). Further, when the normal electric power support is in progress (step B58; YES), the normal power map fluctuation time (for example, 1 second) at the time of the normal electric power support is set (step B60). Then, the process transition setting process (step B61) during the change of the normal figure is performed, and the normal process of the normal figure is terminated.

[Usually process transition setting process 1]
Next, the details of the normal drawing normal processing transition setting process 1 (step B62) in the above-mentioned normal drawing normal processing will be described with reference to FIG. 73.
When the routine starts, "0" (corresponding to the processing number related to the normal drawing normal processing) is set as the processing number for shifting to the normal drawing normal processing in step B71, and the normal drawing game processing number area is processed in step B72. Save the number (here "0"). Next, in step B73, the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved and returned to the normal power fraud monitoring period flag area. As a result, the next time, the process will shift to normal processing.

[Processing during fluctuation of general map Transition setting processing]
Next, the details of the process transition setting process (step B61) during the change of the normal figure in the above-mentioned normal process of the normal figure will be described with reference to FIG. 74.
When the routine starts, "1" (corresponding to the processing number related to the processing during fluctuation of the normal map) is set as the processing number in step B81, and the processing number (here, "1") is set in the normal map game processing number area in step B82. To save. Next, in step B83, the signal related to the start of the normal map fluctuation (for example, the signal during the change of the normal symbol 1 is turned ON) is saved in the test signal output data area, and in step B84, the changing flag is saved in the normal figure fluctuation control flag area. Next, in step B85, the blinking control timer initial value (for example, 200 ms), which is the initial value of the blinking cycle timer of the normal figure display (the normal figure display LED of the batch display device 35), is saved in the normal figure blinking control timer area. , Ends the process transition setting process during timer fluctuation. As a result, the next time, the process will shift to the process during the change of the normal map.

[Processing during fluctuation of general map]
Next, the details of the processing during the fluctuation of the normal map (step B10) in the above-mentioned normal map game processing will be described with reference to FIG. 75.
When the routine starts, the process transition setting process during display of the normal map is performed in step B91. This is for setting to shift to the process during display of the normal map, and the details will be described later. After this process, it returns.

[Processing during display of general map Transition setting processing]
Next, the details of the normal map display process transition setting process (step B91) in the above-mentioned normal map changing process will be described with reference to FIG. 76.
When the routine starts, "2" (corresponding to the processing number related to the processing during display of the normal map) is set as the processing number in step B101, and the processing number (here, "2") is set in the normal map game processing number area in step B102. To save. Next, in step B103, the normal map display time is set (for example, 600 ms). Next, in step B104, the normal figure display time is saved in the normal figure game processing timer area, and in step B105, the signal related to the end of the normal figure fluctuation (for example, the signal during the change of the normal symbol 1 is turned off) is saved in the test signal output data area. .. Next, in step B106, the stop flag is saved in the normal map fluctuation control flag area and returned. As a result, the process shifts to the process of displaying the normal map next time.

[Processing during display of general map]
Next, the details of the normal map display process (step B11) in the above-mentioned normal map game process will be described with reference to FIG. 77.
In the normal map display processing, first, the hit flag (hit information or miss information) set in the normal map normal process is loaded (step B111), and the process of clearing the hit flag area of the RWM (step B112) is performed. conduct.
Next, it is determined whether or not the loaded hit flag is a hit (step B113), and if it is determined that the hit flag is not a hit (step B113; NO), the process branches to step B122 and the normal process transition setting process 1 (Explanation in FIG. 73) is performed, and the processing during display of the normal map is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step B113 that the hit flag is a hit (step B113; YES), a process (step B114) for determining whether the normal power support is in progress (time saving state) is performed.
Then, when the normal power is not supported (step B114; NO), the normal power release time (for example, 100 ms) when the normal power is not supported is saved in the normal power game processing timer area (step B115). Furthermore, the hit start pointer value (control pointer value) when there is no normal power support is saved in the control pointer area during normal power (step B116), and the hit end pointer value (control pointer value) when there is no normal power support is usually saved. During drawing, the control pointer is saved in the upper limit value area (step B117). As a result, the opening mode of the normal variable winning device 26 in the normal operating state is set, and for example, it can be opened twice. After that, the process transition setting process (step B121) is performed. This is a setting for shifting to the processing during normal drawing, and the details will be described later. After this process, it returns.
The hit start pointer value (control pointer value) when there is no normal power support is set to "0", the hit end pointer value is set to "2", and the hit start pointer value (control pointer value) when there is no normal power support is ". 3 ”, the hit end pointer value is set to“ 9 ”.

On the other hand, when the normal power is being supported (step B114; YES), the normal power release time (for example, 1352 ms) at the time of the normal power support is saved in the normal power game processing timer area (step B118). Further, the hit start pointer value (control pointer value) at the time of normal power support is saved in the control pointer area during normal power (step B119), and the hit end pointer value (control pointer value) at the time of normal power support is per normal figure. It is saved in the middle control pointer upper limit value area (step B120). As a result, the opening mode of the normal variable winning device 26 in the time saving state is set, and for example, it can be opened four times. After that, the process for setting the transition to the process during normal map (step B122) is performed to end the process during display of the normal map.

[Middle processing transition setting processing per normal figure]
Next, the details of the normal map hitting process transition setting process (step B121) in the above-mentioned normal map display process will be described with reference to FIG. 78.
When the routine starts, "3" (corresponding to the processing number related to the processing during the normal drawing) is set as the processing number in step B131, and the processing number (here, "3") is set in the normal drawing game processing number area in step B132. To save. Next, in step B133, the signal related to the start of the normal symbol (for example, the signal per normal symbol 1 is turned ON) and the signal related to the start of the normal electric operation (for example, the signal related to the normal electric accessory 1 being operated are turned ON) are set in the test signal output data area. Save to. Next, in step B134, ON data is saved in the normal electric solenoid output data area, in step B135, the normal electric count number area for storing the number of winnings to the normal variable winning device 26 is cleared, and then in step B136, the general electric fraud is illegal. Clear the solenoid fraudulent winning number area that stores the number of winnings to the normal variable winning device 26 during the monitoring period, and in step B137, set the solenoid fraud monitoring period flag area to the fraud monitoring out-of-period flag (illegal monitoring of the normal variable winning device 26). (Flag that specifies outside the period) is saved and returned. As a result, the next time, the process will shift to the normal processing.

[Processing during normal drawing]
Next, the details of the normal map hitting process (step B12) in the above-mentioned normal map game process will be described with reference to FIG. 79.
In the normal-figure hitting process, first, after loading and preparing the normal-figure-performing control pointer (step B141), the value of the loaded normal-figure hitting control pointer is in the normal-figure hitting control pointer upper limit area. It is determined whether or not the value (value at the end of winning: for example, “4” or the like) has been reached (step B142).
Then, when the value of the control pointer per normal figure does not reach the value in the upper limit value region of the control pointer per normal figure (step B142; NO), the control pointer per normal figure is updated by +1 (step B143). The normal electric operation transition setting process (step B144) is performed to end the normal process per drawing.
When the value of the control pointer per normal figure reaches the value in the upper limit value area of the control pointer per normal figure (value at the end of hit) (step B142; YES), the processing control pointer per normal figure in step B143 Without performing the process of updating the area (+1), the normal electric operation transition setting process (step B144) is performed to end the process of hitting the normal figure.

[Public operation transition setting process]
Next, the details of the normal electric operation transition setting process (step B144) in the above-mentioned normal process per figure will be described with reference to FIG. 80.
The normal electric operation transition setting process is a process of driving and controlling the normal electric solenoid 132 for opening and closing the normal variable winning device 26, and the process is branched according to the value of the control pointer.
When the routine starts, branching is performed by the control pointer in step B151. Here, branching is performed according to the value of the control pointer loaded and prepared in step B141. Specifically, when the value of the control pointer is any of 0, 3, 5, and 7 in step B151, the control pointer is used in order to move to step B152 and control the blockage of the normal variable winning device 26. The wait time (for example, 2800 ms or 1000 ms) after the blockage of the corresponding normal fluctuation winning device 26 is saved in the normal-figure game processing timer area, and in step B153, the normal-power solenoid 132 is turned off in the normal-power solenoid output data area. Set off-data and end the solenoid operation transition setting process. As a result, the closing time after the opening of the normal variable winning device 26 becomes the above-mentioned weight time, and the normal variable winning device 26 is closed during that period.

On the other hand, if the value of the control pointer is any of 1, 4, 6, and 8 in step B151, the process proceeds to step B154 to control the opening of the normal variable winning device 26. The normal power release time (for example, 100 ms, 5200 ms, or 1352 ms), which is the open time of the variable winning device 26, is saved in the normal power game processing timer area, and the normal power solenoid 132 is turned on in step B155. Set on-data in the solenoid output data area and end the normal operation transition setting process. As a result, the opening time of the ordinary variable winning device 26 becomes the above-mentioned general electric opening time, and the ordinary variable winning device 26 is opened during that period.

If the value of the control pointer is any of 2 and 9 in step B151, the process proceeds to step B156, the opening control of the normal variable winning device 26 is terminated, and the normal electric remaining ball processing (step B13) is performed. To do this, set "4" as the processing number. Next, in step B157, the processing number (here, "4") is saved in the normal figure game processing number area. Next, in step B158, the normal power remaining ball processing time (for example, 600 ms) is saved in the normal power game processing timer area, and then in step B159, off data is stored in the normal power solenoid output data area in order to turn off the normal power solenoid 132. Save and end the solenoid operation transition setting process.

[Public electric residual ball processing]
Next, the details of the normal electric remaining ball processing (step B13) in the above-mentioned normal figure game processing will be described with reference to FIG. 81.
When the routine starts, in step B161, the end processing transition setting processing per normal figure is performed. This is for setting to shift to the end processing per drawing, and the details will be described later. After this process, it returns.

[End processing per normal figure Transition setting processing]
Next, the details of the per-figure end processing transition setting process (step B161) in the above-mentioned normal electric remaining ball processing will be described with reference to FIG. 82.
When the routine starts, "5" (corresponding to the processing number related to the end processing per normal figure) is set as the processing number in step B171, and the processing number (here, "5") is set in the normal figure game processing number area in step B172. To save. Next, in step B173, the normal figure ending time (for example, 100 ms) is saved in the normal figure game processing timer area, and in step B174, a signal regarding the end of operation of the normal variable winning device 26 (for example, a signal during operation of the normal electric accessory 1 is transmitted. OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area. Next, in step B175, the normal electric counting number area for counting the number of winnings to the ordinary variable winning device 26 is cleared. Then, in step B176, the control pointer area for hitting the normal figure is cleared, and in step B177, the upper limit value area for the control pointer hitting the normal figure is cleared, and the end process for hitting the normal figure transition setting process is completed. As a result, the next time, the process will shift to the end processing per drawing.

[End processing per drawing]
Next, the details of the per-figure end processing (step B14) in the above-mentioned general-figure game processing will be described with reference to FIG. 83.
When the routine starts, the normal process transition setting process 2 is performed in step B181. This is for making settings for shifting to normal processing, and details will be described later. After this process, it returns.

[Usually processing transition setting processing 2]
Next, the details of the normal figure normal process transition setting process 2 (step B181) in the above-mentioned normal figure per end process will be described with reference to FIG. 84.
When the routine starts, "0" (corresponding to the processing number related to the normal processing of the normal figure) is set as the processing number in step B191, and the processing number ("0" in this case) is set in the normal drawing game processing number area in step B192. Save. Next, in step B193, a signal relating to the end per normal symbol (for example, the signal per normal symbol is turned off) is saved in the test signal output data area. Next, in step B194, the fraud monitoring period flag (the flag that defines the fraud monitoring period of the normal variable winning device 26) is saved and returned in the fraud monitoring period flag area. As a result, next time, we will shift to normal processing.

Since the flowchart regarding the normal figure game processing has been described above, the next step will be the description of the subroutines after step S80 in the above-mentioned timer interrupt processing.
Here, "step C" will be used as the step number for explanation.
[Segment LED editing process]
First, the details of the segment LED editing process (step S80) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described with reference to FIG. 85.
The segment LED editing process performs processing related to the segment LEDs provided in the batch display device 35 (FIGS. 2, 4, 5), and the batch display device 35 displays a normal figure and a special figure as described above. In addition, the start memory of the special figure and the normal figure is displayed on hold (special figure hold display, normal figure hold display), and the game status is displayed.
These displays are configured to be performed by, for example, a plurality of indicators (for example, one lamp or a 7-segment display) using an LED as a light emitting source. More specifically, for example, the special figure 1 hold display, the special figure 2 hold display, the normal figure hold display, the first game state display unit, the second game state display unit, the error display unit, the round display unit, and the like. The segment LED editing process is composed of segment LEDs having functions, and makes settings related to driving them.

In the segment LED editing process, first, the normal figure hold number table in which the display mode on the normal figure hold display is defined is set (step C1), the display data corresponding to the normal figure hold number is acquired, and the normal figure hold is obtained. It is saved in the segment area of the display (for example, the segment area of the normal figure hold display) (step C2). Next, the special figure 1 hold number table in which the display mode on the special figure 1 hold indicator is defined is set (step C3), the display data corresponding to the special figure 1 hold number is acquired, and the special figure 1 hold display is obtained. It is saved in the segment area of the device (for example, the segment area of the special figure 1 hold indicator) (step C4).
After that, the special figure 2 hold number table in which the display mode on the special figure 2 hold indicator is defined is set (step C5), the display data corresponding to the special figure 2 hold number is acquired, and the special figure 2 hold indicator is obtained. (For example, the segment area of the special figure 2 hold indicator) is saved (C6). Further, a round display LED display table in which the display mode of the round display unit is defined is set (C7), display data corresponding to the round display LED output pointer is acquired, and a segment area of the round display unit (for example, round display) is obtained. It is saved in the segment area of the part (step C8).

Next, a game status display table in which display modes in the first game status display unit and the second game status display unit in the batch display device 35 are defined is set (step C9), and display data corresponding to the game status display number is set. Is acquired and saved in the segment area of each game status display unit (for example, the segment area of the first game status display unit or the second game status display unit) (step C10). After that, it is determined whether or not the high-probability notification flag related to the notification that the jackpot probability state is in the high-probability state at the time of power failure recovery is on (step C11). Then, when the high-probability notification flag is on (step C11; YES), that is, when the high-probability state is being notified, the segment LED editing process is terminated.
When the high probability notification flag is not on (step C11; NO), the off data of the high probability notification LED is saved in the segment area of the third game state display unit (for example, the segment area of the error display unit) ( Step C12), the segment LED editing process is completed.

[Magnet fraud monitoring process]
Next, the details of the magnet fraud monitoring process (step S81) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described with reference to FIG. 86.
The magnet fraud monitoring process checks the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 126, determines whether or not there is an abnormality, and sets the start and end of the fraud notification.
In the magnet fraud monitoring process, first, the magnetic sensor 126 is on, that is, an abnormal magnetism is detected from the state of the detection signal output from the magnetic sensor 126 and taken into the third input port 162 (input port 3). (Step C21). Since step C21 in FIG. 86 is a process for detecting magnet fraud, the notation "is the magnet sensor on?" Is used.
When the magnetic sensor 126 is on (step C21; YES), that is, when abnormal magnetism is detected, the magnet fraud monitoring timer that measures the detection period of abnormal magnetism is updated by +1 (step C22), and the timer is concerned. Determines if the time is up (step C23).

When the magnet fraud monitoring timer times out (step C23; YES), that is, when abnormal magnetism is continuously detected for a certain period of time, the magnet fraud monitoring timer is cleared (step C24), and the initial value of the magnet fraud notification timer (step C24). For example, 60,000 ms) is saved in the magnet fraud notification timer area (step C25). Then, a magnet fraud notification command is prepared (step C26), a magnet fraud generation flag is prepared as a magnet fraud flag (step C27), and it is determined whether the prepared magnet fraud flag matches the value in the magnet fraud flag region. (Step C33). That is, when the magnetic sensor 126 is continuously turned on for a certain period of time (for example, eight interrupts), it is determined that an abnormality has occurred.
That is, when the input of the magnetic sensor detection signal is interrupted eight times and continuously performed, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred. This is because the sensing of the magnetic sensor 126 is 4 ms and it is determined that an illegal occurrence occurs at 32 ms. Therefore, if there is an ON input of the magnetic sensor detection signal by interrupting eight times, it can be determined that the illegality occurs.

On the other hand, when the magnetic sensor 126 is not on (step C21; NO), that is, when abnormal magnetism is not detected, the magnet fraud monitoring timer is cleared (step C28), and the magnet fraud monitoring time is specified. If the notification timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step C29). The minimum value of the magnet fraud notification timer is set to 0. Next, it is determined whether the value of the magnet fraud notification timer is 0 (step C30). Even when the magnet fraud monitoring timer has not timed up (step C23; NO), the process proceeds to step C29.

Then, when the value of the magnet fraud notification timer is not 0 (step C30; NO), that is, when the time is not up, the magnet fraud monitoring process is terminated.
Further, when the value of the magnet fraud notification timer is 0 (step C30; YES), that is, when the time has been up or has already been up, the fraudulent notification period has expired, or the fraudulent notification has been issued from the beginning. If not, prepare a command to end the magnet fraud notification (step C31). Further, a magnet fraud release flag is prepared as a magnet fraud flag (step C32), and it is determined whether the prepared magnet fraud flag matches the value in the magnet fraud flag region (step C33).

Then, when the prepared magnet fraud flag matches the value of the magnet fraud flag region (step C33; YES), the magnet fraud monitoring process ends. If the values do not match (step C33; NO), the prepared magnet fraud flag is saved in the magnet fraud flag area (step C34), the command setting process is performed (step C35), and the magnet fraud monitoring process is terminated. ..
Here, in FIG. 86, the arrow indicates a processing route (normal route) in the case where there is no magnet fraud and it is normal. That is, in the normal case, the processing routes of step C21, step C28, step C29, step C30, step C31, step C32, step C33, and RET are taken. Normally, this normal route is repeated.

[Radio wave fraud monitoring process]
Next, the details of the radio wave fraud monitoring process (step S82) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described with reference to FIG. 87.
The radio wave fraud monitoring process determines the presence or absence of an abnormality based on the detection signal from the radio wave sensor 127, and sets the start and end of the fraudulent notification.
In the radio wave fraud monitoring process, first, the radio wave sensor 127 is turned on, that is, abnormal from the state of the detection signal output from the radio wave sensor 127 and taken into the third input port 162 (input port 3) via the proximity I / F 163. It is determined whether or not a radio wave is detected (step C41). When the radio wave sensor is on (step C41; YES), that is, when an abnormal radio wave is detected, the initial value of the radio wave fraud notification timer is saved in the radio wave fraud notification timer area (step C42).

Then, a command for radio wave fraud notification is prepared (step C43), a radio wave fraud occurrence flag is prepared as a radio wave fraud flag (step C44), and it is determined whether the prepared radio wave fraud flag matches the value in the radio wave fraud flag area. (Step C49). That is, in the case of radio wave fraud, unlike the case of magnetic fraud, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred when an abnormal radio wave is detected.

On the other hand, when the radio wave sensor is not on (step C41; NO), that is, when an abnormal radio wave is not detected, the radio wave fraud notification timer that defines the radio wave fraud notification time is not 0, and the radio wave fraud notification timer is updated by -1 (step). C45). The minimum value of the radio wave fraud notification timer is set to 0. Then, it is determined whether the value of the radio wave fraud notification timer is 0 (step C46).
If the value of the radio wave fraud notification timer is not 0 (step C46; NO), that is, if the time is not up, the radio wave fraud monitoring process is terminated. Further, when the value of the radio wave fraud notification timer is 0 (step C46; YES), that is, when the time has been up or has already been up, the fraudulent notification period has expired, or the fraudulent notification has been issued from the beginning. If not, prepare a command to end the radio wave fraud notification (step C47), prepare a radio wave fraud release flag as a radio wave fraud flag (step C48), and set the prepared radio wave fraud flag to the value of the radio wave fraud flag area. Is determined (step C49).

Then, when the prepared radio wave fraud flag matches the value of the radio wave fraud flag area (step C49; YES), the radio wave fraud monitoring process ends. If the values do not match (step C49; NO), the prepared radio wave fraud flag is saved in the radio wave fraud flag area (step C50), command setting processing is performed (step C51), and the radio wave fraud monitoring process is terminated. ..
Here, in FIG. 87, the arrow indicates a processing route (normal route) in the case where there is no radio wave fraud and is normal. That is, in the normal case, the processing routes of step C41, step C45, step C46, step C47, step C48, step C49, and RET are taken. Normally, this normal route is repeated.

[External information editing process]
Next, the details of the external information editing process (step S83) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 88 and 89.
The external information editing process is based on the monitoring results of the payout command transmission process (step S74), the winning opening switch / error monitoring process (step S77), the magnet fraud monitoring process (step S81), and the radio wave fraud monitoring process (step S82). Then, information to be output to an external device such as an information collection terminal or a game hall internal management device or a test firing test device is created and set in an output buffer.

As shown in FIG. 88, in the external information editing process, first, the main prize ball signal editing process (step C61) for setting the information regarding the number of prize balls to be paid out is performed, and the starting port signal for editing the winning signal of the starting port is performed. The editing process (step C62) is performed. Next, in step C63, the unique information signal editing process is performed. This acquires the unique information (unique ID) of the main board, and the details will be described later.
Next, if the security signal control timer is not 0 in step C64, "-1" is updated. The minimum value of the security signal control timer is set to 0. Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the security signal control timer has become 0 (step C65). The security signal control timer is for turning on and outputting a security signal for a predetermined time when the power is turned on by clearing the RAM, and the timer initial value (for example, 256 ms) is set in step S27.
If the value of the security signal control timer is 0 in step C65, that is, if the time has been up or has already been up, the process proceeds to step C66 to determine whether or not the unique information output has been requested. The unique information here is the unique information of the main board, that is, the unique ID.
If the unique information output request has not been requested in step C66, the process proceeds to step C67 to set the output request flag of the unique information signal at power-on, and in step C68, the output request flag of the unique information signal at power-on is set. .. As a result, the unique ID (unique information of the main board) is output to the outside when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on (for example, when the store is opened). After step C68, the on-data of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area in step C69, and then the process proceeds to step C72 and subsequent steps.

If the unique information output request has already been made in step C66, the steps C67 and 68 are jumped and the process proceeds to step C69.
On the other hand, if the security signal control timer has already timed up in step C65 or has timed up after updating "-1", it branches to step C70, clears the output request flag of the unique information signal at power-on, and steps. After saving the off-data of the security signal in the external information output data area in C71, the process proceeds to step C72 and subsequent steps. That is, if the security signal control timer has already timed up, the external output of the security signal related to power-on is not set.

Then, in steps C72, 73, 74, 75, 76, whether the magnet is fraudulent, the radio wave is fraudulent, the lower prize opening is fraudulent, the upper prize opening is fraudulent, or the electric wave is fraudulent. Are determined respectively. In these processes, a determination is made based on the monitoring result in the "error check process" of FIG. 24. That is, it is determined whether or not each of the above-mentioned frauds is occurring based on whether or not the error flag (error occurrence flag) is set in the "error check process" of FIG. 24.
If any one or more of the frauds have occurred, the process proceeds to step C77 to save the on-data of the security signal in the external information output data area, and further, in step C78, the on-data of the game machine error status signal is output as a test signal. Save to the data area and proceed to step C80. As a result, the fraudulent or gaming machine error status is output to the outside.
On the other hand, when NO in step C72, NO in step C73, NO in step C74, NO in step C75, and NO in step C76, that is, when all are NO in steps C72, 73, 74, 75, 76, step C76. After branching to step C79 and saving the off-data of the gaming machine error status signal in the test signal output data area, the process proceeds to step C80 and subsequent steps.

After passing through step C78 or step C79, the process proceeds to step C80, and it is determined whether or not a glass frame opening error is occurring. In this process, instead of directly monitoring the opening of the glass frame 5 (door) based on the signal of the glass frame opening detection switch 211, a determination is made based on the monitoring result in the “error check process” of FIG. 24. .. That is, it is determined whether or not the glass frame opening error is in progress based on whether or not the error flag (error occurrence flag) is set in the "error check process" of FIG. 24.
If the glass frame opening error is not in progress, the process proceeds to step C81 to determine whether or not the front frame opening error is in progress. In this process, a determination is made based on the monitoring result in the "error check process" of FIG. 24.
If the front frame opening error is in progress, the process proceeds to step C82. Further, even if the glass frame opening error is occurring in step C80, the process proceeds to step C82.
That is, if the glass frame opening error or the front frame opening error is in progress, the process proceeds to step C82, and it is determined in step C82 whether or not the unique information output has been requested. If NO (not requested), step C83 is performed. After setting the output request flag of the unique information signal when the glass frame / front frame is open and setting the output request flag of the unique information signal when the glass frame / front frame is open in step C84, the process proceeds to step C85. Therefore, at this time, when the glass frame 5 or the front frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 is opened (for example, including illegal opening), the unique ID (unique information of the main board) is output to the outside. ..
On the other hand, if the unique information output request has been made in step C82, the process jumps to step C85.

When the process proceeds from step C84 or step C82 to step C85, the on-data of the door / frame opening signal (that is, the opening signal of the glass frame 5 (door) / front frame 4 (frame)) is output as external information output data in step C85. The data is saved in the area, and the on-data of the game machine error status signal is saved in the test signal output data area in step C86, and the process proceeds to step C89. This is because an error signal is output to the outside when an event of opening the door or frame occurs.
On the other hand, if NO is set in step C81, that is, if the glass frame opening error or the front frame opening error is not in progress, the event of opening the door or frame does not occur, so it is not necessary to set such output data. Therefore, in step C87, the output requested flag of the unique information signal when the glass frame / front frame is opened is cleared, and in step C88, the off-data of the door / frame opening signal is saved in the external information output data area, and then in step C89. Proceed to.

In step C89, it is determined whether or not the jackpot operation is in progress, if it is in the jackpot operation, it is determined in step C90 whether or not the unique information output is requested, and if NO (not requested), the jackpot is in step C91. After setting the output request flag of the unique information signal in step C92 and setting the output request flag of the unique information signal in the jackpot in step C92, the process proceeds to step C93. Therefore, at this time, when the big hit of the pachinko machine 1 occurs, the unique ID (unique information of the main board) is output to the outside.
On the other hand, if the unique information output is requested at the time of the big hit in step C90, the steps C91 and 92 are jumped and the process proceeds to step C93.
In step C93, the on-data of one jackpot signal is saved in the external information output data area, and the process proceeds to step C94.

On the other hand, when the jackpot operation is not in progress (NO) in step C89, the player branches to step C95 to clear the output request flag of the unique information signal in the jackpot, and in step C96, the off-data of one jackpot signal is output as external information. Save to the data area and proceed to step C94. Therefore, when the big hit does not occur, the unique ID (unique information of the main board) is not output to the outside.
When the process proceeds from step C93 or step C96 to step C94, if the symbol confirmation count control timer is not 0 in step C94, (-1) is updated, and in the following step C97, is the symbol confirmation count control timer 0 (time up)? Check if not. The symbol confirmation number control timer is a timer for controlling the on-time of the symbol confirmation number signal.
If the symbol confirmation count control timer is not timer-up (NO), the process proceeds to step C99, and the on-data of the symbol confirmation count signal is saved in the external information output data area and returned. Then, the routine is repeated, and if it is determined in step C97 that the symbol confirmation count control timer has timed up (YES), the process proceeds to step C98, and the off-data of the symbol confirmation count signal is saved in the external information output data area for external information editing. End the process.
In this way, each time the symbol of the special figure ends the fluctuation, it is output as external information.

[Main prize ball signal editing process]
Next, the details of the main prize ball signal editing process (step C61) in the above-mentioned external information editing process will be described with reference to FIG. 90.
The main prize ball signal editing process outputs the main prize ball signal generated every time the number of prize balls (planned payout number) generated by winning a prize in the winning opening reaches a predetermined number (10 in this case) to an external device. It is a process.
In the main prize ball signal editing process, first, if the main prize ball signal output control timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step C101). The minimum value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is set to 0. Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is 0 (step C102). When the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is 0 (step C102; YES), it is determined whether the number of times of main prize ball signal output is 0 (step C103).

When the number of main prize ball signal outputs is not 0 (step C103; NO), the number of times of main prize ball signal output is updated by -1 (step C104), and the main prize ball signal output to the main prize ball signal output control timer area. The initial value of the control timer is saved (step C105). The initial value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is the sum of the on state (for example, high level) time (for example, 128 ms) and the off state (for example, low level) time (for example, 64 ms) of the main prize ball signal. It is the time (for example, 192 ms). After that, the on-data that turns on the main prize ball signal is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step C107), and the main prize ball signal editing process is completed.
When the number of times the main prize ball signal is output is 0 (step C103; YES), the off data for turning off the main prize ball signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step). C108), the main prize ball signal editing process is completed.

On the other hand, when the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is not 0 (step C102; NO), it is determined whether the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output on section (step C106). The fact that the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output on section means that the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is a predetermined time (for example, 64 ms) or more.
When the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output on section (step C106; YES), the process shifts to step C107. When the main prize ball signal output control timer is not in the output on section (step C106; NO), the off data for turning off the main prize ball signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM. (Step C108), the main prize ball signal editing process is completed.
As described above, the game control device 100 outputs the main prize ball signal of 1 pulse for every 10 scheduled payouts of the prize balls to the external device (for example, the management device 140). The payout control device 200 outputs a 1-pulse prize ball signal generated for every 10 payouts to an external device (for example, the management device 140).
That is, the game control device 100 (main board) updates the number of main prize ball number signal outputs by +1 for each scheduled payout (every time a payout command is transmitted) (subroutine in the payout command transmission process), and then updates (subroutine in the payout command transmission process). The main prize ball number signal is output as many times as the set number of outputs. Then, with respect to the main prize ball signal output for each 10 payout schedule as described above, the prize ball signal is transmitted from the payout control device 200 (payout board) when 10 pieces are actually paid out. By matching the schedule with the result, it is possible to deal with fraudulent payouts.

In addition, from the main prize ball signal, it becomes possible to determine when the winning is generated by the management device 140 or the like as an external device, which also helps the policy in the hall business.
Specifically, it can be determined whether the prize is a prize generated during a big hit or a prize generated during a normal game. For example, if you get a lot of prizes during a big hit, you can get a lot of prizes, but if you get a lot of prizes during a normal game, you can judge that the nail adjustment is too sweet, which is a help of the policy in hall sales. become.
On the other hand, if the main prize ball signal is not output to the external device and only the prize ball signal from the payout control device 200 that is output when the payout is completed, the ball runs out during the big hit and the payout is performed. If the supply is delayed and the prize is paid out after the big hit, it will not be possible to determine when the prize has occurred.
Therefore, if the supply is delayed and paid out after the big hit, it means that there was a large amount of prizes (payout) during the normal game, and there is a possibility that the sales data will be incomplete. There is sex.
On the other hand, in this embodiment, both the main prize ball signal and the prize ball signal from the payout control device 200 are used in combination, and the main prize ball signal is output immediately after winning a prize. There are no problems.

[Start port signal editing process]
Next, the details of the start port signal editing process (step C62) in the above-mentioned external information editing process will be described with reference to FIG.
The start port signal editing process is a process that is commonly performed for each of the inputs of the first start port switch 120 and the second start port switch 121.
In the start port signal editing process, first, if the start port signal output control timer is not 0, the start port signal output control timer is updated by -1 (step C111). The minimum value of the start port signal output control timer is set to 0. Then, it is determined whether the value of the start port signal output control timer is 0 (step C112). When the value of the start port signal output control timer is 0 (step C112; YES), it is determined whether the number of start port signal outputs is 0 (step C113).

When the number of start port signal outputs is not 0 (step C113; NO), the number of start port signal outputs is updated by -1 (step C114), and the initial value of the start port signal output control timer is set in the start port signal output control timer area. Is saved (step C115). The initial value of the start port signal output control timer is the sum of the on state (for example, high level) time (for example, 128 ms) and the off state (for example, low level) time (for example, 64 ms) of the start port signal (for example, 64 ms). For example, 192 ms). After that, the on-data that turns on the start port signal is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step C117), and the start port signal editing process is completed.
When the number of start port signal outputs is 0 (step C113; YES), the off data for turning off the start port signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step C118). , Ends the start port signal editing process.

On the other hand, when the value of the start port signal output control timer is not 0 (step C112; NO), it is determined whether the start port signal output control timer is in the output on section (step C116). The fact that the start port signal output control timer is in the output on section means that the value of the start port signal output control timer is a predetermined time (for example, 64 ms) or more. When the start port signal output control timer is in the output on section (step C116; YES), the process shifts to step C117. When the start port signal output control timer is not in the output on section (step C116; NO), the off data for turning off the start port signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step C116; NO). Step C118), the start port signal editing process is completed.

[Unique information signal editing process]
Next, the details of the unique information signal editing process (step C63) in the above-mentioned external information editing process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, first, in step C121, it is determined whether or not serial communication is in progress. This is for determining whether the game control device 100 is executing serial communication with the management device 140 (or the card unit 551 may be included), and if the serial communication is in progress, the game returns this time.
If serial communication is not in progress, the processes after step C122 are executed. Note that there is unidirectional communication between the game control device 100 and the management device 140, and only signal transmission from the game control device 100 to the management device 140 is permitted. Therefore, whether or not serial communication is in progress is determined by checking whether or not the serial transmission circuit in the game control device 100 is in communication.
If serial communication is not in progress, the step C122 checks whether the output request flag of the unique information signal is set, and if NO (the output request flag is not set) in step C122, the routine ends and returns. On the other hand, if YES in step C122 (the output request flag is set), the process proceeds to step C123 to clear the output request flag of the unique information signal.
Here, the output request flag of the unique information signal is set independently corresponding to the "security signal at power-on", the "door / frame opening signal", and the "big hit 1 signal". If a plurality of them are established at the same time, a priority is set and the processing is performed one by one. Therefore, it does not clear all output request flags at once.
Next, in step C124, CPU-specific information acquisition processing is performed. This is a process of acquiring unique information, and the details will be described later. After passing through step C124, it returns.

[CPU specific information acquisition process]
Next, the details of the CPU-specific information acquisition process (step C125) in the above-mentioned unique information signal editing process will be described with reference to FIG. 93.
When this routine is started, first, in step C131, the start code is written to the serial transmission buffer in the game control device 100. This is a code for causing the management device 140, which is the receiving side, to identify the start of serial communication. Next, in step C132, it is determined whether or not only the chip code (main board unique ID) is acquired, and if the acquisition is only the chip code, the process jumps to step C137, the chip code identification code is written to the serial transmission buffer, and step C138. Reads the chip code as individual identification information (unique ID), writes it to the serial transmission buffer, and returns. As a result, the unique ID is acquired and output to the management device 140.

On the other hand, if the acquisition is not only the chip code in step C132, the process proceeds to step C133 to write the maker code identification code to the serial transmission buffer, and in step C134 to read the maker code and write it to the serial transmission buffer. Next, the product code identification code is written to the serial transmission buffer in step C135, the product code is read out and written to the serial transmission buffer in step C136, and then the process proceeds to step C137. As a result, the manufacturer code and the product code are acquired and output to the management device 140. Therefore, if the acquisition is not limited to the chip code in step C132, the maker code, the product code, and the chip code are sequentially acquired and output to the management device 140.

In this way, by using the serial transfer (transmission) function provided in the game control device 100 in advance, it is not necessary to prepare the transfer (transmission) process again in the program (for example, the game program), so that the program configuration can be changed. Be efficient.
In addition, the number of wires is smaller than that of parallel transfer (transmission), so that the cost is reduced.
It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the example in which the unique ID or the like is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the management device 140 by serial communication as described above, and may be transmitted by, for example, parallel communication.
For example, among the CPU-specific information, the maker code is composed of 3 bytes, the product code is composed of 32 bytes, and the chip code is composed of 4 bytes. As described above, since the CPU-specific information is very long information, in this embodiment, the information to be transmitted is made variable in length so as to avoid the occurrence of communication congestion.
This background will be explained.
For example, if all data related to CPU-specific information is sent every time an event of opening the glass frame 5 or the front frame 4 (opening the door or frame) occurs, if the door or frame is intentionally opened and closed repeatedly, a large amount of data will be sent. Communication may occur, and communication congestion may occur.
Therefore, in this embodiment, the CPU-specific information is made to have a variable length depending on the situation, so that the occurrence of communication congestion can be avoided.
Not limited to the above, for example, a fixed length may be used in which the manufacturer code, product code, and chip code are transmitted each time. In that case, the manufacturer code identification code, the product code identification code, and the chip code identification code may not be entered.

Next, the types of special results and the opening / closing pattern of the large winning opening (variable winning device) in the gaming machine (pachinko machine 1) of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 95 and 96.
Four types of special results are set: 2R probability variation, 11R probability variation, 11R normal variation, and 16R probability variation. The 2R probability variation, 11R probability variation, and 16R probability variation have 2, 11, and 16 rounds in the special game state, respectively, and the probability state is set to the high probability state until the next special result is derived after the end of the special game state. At the same time, it is a special result that the time is shortened.
On the other hand, in the 11R normal, the number of rounds in the special game state is 11 rounds, the probability state after the end of the special game state is set to the normal probability state, and the special figure variation display of a predetermined number of times (for example, 70 times). This is a special result that shortens the time until the game is executed.

Further, the gaming machine (pachinko machine 1) of this embodiment is provided with a lower grand prize opening (variable winning device 27) and an upper grand winning opening (second variable winning device 33), and a plurality of opening / closing patterns are prepared for each. There is. Then, one opening / closing pattern is selected from these plurality of opening / closing patterns according to the type of special result. In the following opening / closing pattern, the value shown as the opening time of the large winning opening indicates the maximum opening time, and when a predetermined number of game balls flow into the large winning opening before the maximum opening time elapses in one round. Closes the big prize opening without waiting for the maximum opening time to elapse and the round ends.

FIG. 95 is a diagram showing an opening / closing pattern of the upper prize opening (second variable winning device 33).
As the opening / closing pattern of the upper prize opening (second variable winning device 33), there are five types of opening / closing patterns from the upper prize opening opening / closing pattern 1 to the upper prize opening opening / closing pattern 5.
The details are as follows.
In the upper prize opening opening / closing pattern 1 shown in FIG. 95 (a), when the special result is a 2R probability variation and the time is not shortened when the special result is derived (that is, there is no normal electric support when a big hit occurs (low probability in the normal figure). ) Is selected.
In the upper winning opening opening / closing pattern 1, 52 ms opening time is set in the first round (1R), and 52 ms opening time is set in the next round (2R) after an interval period of 1448 ms is inserted. Then, after the lapse of the ending time of 22400 ms, the special gaming state ends.

In the upper prize opening opening / closing pattern 2 shown in FIG. 95 (b), when the special result is a 2R probability variation and the time is shortened when the special result is derived (that is, there is a normal electric support when a big hit occurs (normal figure height). Probability) case) is selected.
The upper prize opening opening / closing pattern 2 has the same opening / closing mode as the upper prize opening opening / closing pattern 1, but the ending time is 1400 ms.
The upper prize opening opening / closing pattern 3 shown in FIG. 95 (c) is selected corresponding to some special results among a plurality of special results that are 16R probability variations. In the upper winning opening opening / closing pattern 3, 16 rounds in which the opening time of 52 ms is set are performed with an interval period of 1448 ms, and the special gaming state ends after the lapse of the ending time of 1400 ms.

The upper prize opening opening / closing pattern 4 shown in FIG. 95 (d) is selected corresponding to some special results among a plurality of special results that are 16R probability variations. In the upper prize opening opening / closing pattern 4, in the first round (1R), the opening of 52 ms is first performed 16 times with a closing time of 1448 ms, as in the upper prize opening opening / closing pattern 3.
Up to this point, the opening / closing mode is the same as that of the upper prize opening opening / closing pattern 3, and the effect on the display device 41 or the like is the same, making it difficult for the player to recognize which opening / closing pattern. After that, at the closing time of 6300 ms, the promotion image is displayed on the display device 41 to notify that the opening / closing pattern 4 of the upper prize opening is set, and 26168 ms is opened to end the first round. After the end of the first round, the round in which the opening time of 27,000 ms is set is repeated 15 times with an interval period of 2000 ms in between, and after the ending time of 6000 ms elapses, the special gaming state ends.
In this way, by setting the first round (1R) of the upper prize opening opening / closing pattern 3 and the upper winning opening opening / closing pattern 4 to the same opening / closing cycle (opening of 52 ms, closing of 1448 ms), any big hit occurs. This has the effect of making it difficult for the player to recognize until the end of the cycle, and enhancing the interest of the game.

The upper prize opening opening / closing pattern 5 shown in FIG. 95 (e) is selected corresponding to some special results among a plurality of special results that are 16R probability variations.
In the upper winning opening opening / closing pattern 5, in the first round (1R), the opening is first performed by 52 ms, then the opening is performed by 26948 ms with a closing time of 5948 ms, and the first round is completed. After the end of the first round, the round in which the opening time of 27,000 ms is set is repeated 15 times with an interval period of 2000 ms in between, and after the ending time of 6000 ms elapses, the special gaming state ends.

Next, FIG. 96 is a diagram showing an opening / closing pattern of the lower prize opening (variable winning device 27).
As the opening / closing pattern of the lower prize opening (variable winning device 27), there are three types of opening / closing patterns from the lower prize opening opening / closing pattern 1 to the lower prize opening opening / closing pattern 3.
The details are as follows.
The lower prize opening opening / closing pattern 1 shown in FIG. 96A is selected when the special result is 11R probability variation or 11R normal.
In this lower prize opening opening / closing pattern 1, in the first round (1R), the opening is first performed for 200 ms, then the opening is performed for 28,000 ms with a closing time of 5800 ms, and the first round is completed. After the end of the first round, the round in which the opening time of 27,000 ms is set is repeated 10 times with an interval period of 2000 ms in between, and after the ending time of 6000 ms elapses, the special gaming state ends.

The lower prize opening opening / closing pattern 2 shown in FIG. 96 (b) is selected corresponding to some special results among a plurality of special results that are 16R probability variations.
In this lower prize opening opening / closing pattern 2, the opening / closing mode is the same as that of the lower prize opening opening / closing patterns 1 and 3 until the end of the 11th round. It is difficult to recognize whether it is an opening / closing pattern. After the end of the 11 rounds, the round in which the open time of 200 ms is set is repeated 5 times with an interval period of 1500 ms in between, and after the ending time of 1400 ms elapses, the special gaming state ends.

The lower prize opening opening / closing pattern 3 shown in FIG. 96 (c) is selected corresponding to some special results among a plurality of special results that are 16R probability variations.
In this lower prize opening opening / closing pattern 3, the opening / closing mode is the same as that of the lower prize opening opening / closing patterns 1 and 2 until the end of the 11th round, and the effect on the display device 41 or the like is the same. It is difficult to recognize whether it is an opening / closing pattern. Then, after the end of the 11th round, the promotion image is displayed on the display device 41 in the interval period of 13000 ms to notify that the lower prize opening opening / closing pattern 3 is established. After that, the round in which the opening time of 27,000 ms is set is repeated 5 times with an interval period of 2000 ms in between, and after the ending time of 6000 ms elapses, the special gaming state ends.

Next, the control of the effect control device 300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 97 to 171.
Here, "step D", "step E", and "step F" will be used as step numbers for description.
The special figure controlled by the effect control device 300 is a special figure for effect displayed on the display device 41, and the special figure in the following description of the control process of the effect control device 300 is a special figure for this effect. It means (decorative pattern that is not this special figure).

Further, in general, the "character" means a character or a character, or a character or an animal having a character or a character, and may mean a character as a computer term. However, in the following description of the effect control device 300, especially in the description of image display control using VDP, a series of movies, background images, images of symbols (decorative symbols of special figures and fourth symbols), and characters A cohesive still image or moving image such as an image may be referred to as a character, and such image data (still image or moving image data) may be referred to as character data (or character data).
Further, in the following description of the effect control device 300, the object means a cohesive display control target in the case of display control, and display elements (background image, decorative pattern image of special figure, image of notice character). , A cohesive image such as a hold display image). For example, in the case of this example, the decorative symbols of the special symbol are distinguished by the difference in the variable display area (reel) such as the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol, and each of these distinctions includes the current symbol, the next symbol, and so on. There is a distinction that the display position in the scroll direction called the previous symbol is different. That is, for example, with respect to the left symbol, there are the current symbol of the left symbol, the next symbol of the left symbol, and the previous symbol of the left symbol, and if viewed in detail, each of these is one object. However, in the control process, for example, the entire left symbol including the current symbol, the next symbol, and the previous symbol may be classified as one display element.

[Power-on reset process]
First, the power-on reset process of the effect control device 300 will be described with reference to FIG. 97.
This power-on reset process starts when the power supply of the pachinko machine 1 is started.
When the power supply of the pachinko machine 1 starts, the interrupt is first disabled in step D1, then the initial setting of the CPU 311 is performed in step D2, then the initial setting of VDP 312 is performed in step D3, and then the interrupt is performed in step D4. Allow, then start the main process of step D5. When the main process is started, this main process is executed until the power is cut off (including a power failure).

[Main processing]
Next, the main process (step D5) in the above-mentioned power-on reset process will be described with reference to FIG. 98.
When the main process is started, first, the wireless module initialization process for initializing the wireless module 360 is executed in step D11, steps D12 to D19 are sequentially executed, and then the process proceeds to step D20. In this example, communication between sub-boards in different pachinko machines (in this case, between production control devices, or simply between subs in some cases) is performed by wireless communication, but the communication is limited to wireless communication. Instead, wired communication may be used.

In step D12, the base address of the register of VDP312 is set. This is because the address space differs depending on the type of CPU 311 and its setting, so that a base address is set and various specifications are made based on the difference from the base address.
In step D13, display data generation is permitted. This is a process that allows the display circuit 608 to access the VRAMs 606 and 607 and generate display data.
In step D14, the size of the image development area of VDP312 is set.
In step D15, a random number seed is set. This is a process of setting a pseudo-random number generation sequence using, for example, the srand function. Here, as an argument given to the srand function, a fixed value such as 0 (zero) may be used, or a value created based on the ID value of the CPU or the like so as to be different for each gaming machine is used. May be good.

In step D16, the storage area for motion management (including the motion management area and the address area of the motion management area) in the RAM 311a is initialized.
In step D17, the storage area for scenario management (including the scenario management area and the address area of the scenario management area) in the RAM 311a is initialized.
Here, "motion" means a block (parts) effect operation (in this example, specifically, the display effect on the display device 41 is blocked), and "scenario" is an effect. It means the flow of (which determines which motion is executed and when). Further, the “address area of the motion management area” means a storage area for storing the start address of the motion management area. Similarly, the “address area of the scenario management area” means a storage area for storing the start address of the scenario management area.

In step D18, the terminal ID is set. This is, for example, a process of setting an ID for each machine (that is, for each gaming machine) based on the setting of the setting SW371. As the terminal ID to be set, the individual ID of the wireless module 360 or the like may be used, but it is easier to identify the position information of the gaming machine on the island by manually setting it by the setting SW or the like, and the inside of the amusement park hall. It is also easy to assign to the unit number of. That is, in the ID of the wireless module, it is difficult to specify the position information from the magnitude of the numerical value unless the game machines are arranged in ascending order at the time of installation. For example, if the values of the terminal IDs are set in the order of the installed positions, it is easy to specify the installed position information from the values of the terminal IDs. However, the method of setting the terminal ID from the ID of the wireless module or the like has an advantage that it can be set automatically without bothering human hands. On the other hand, the setting of the terminal ID by the setting SW needs to set a different number for each machine by human operation, so that it may not be possible when the player is busy, such as when introducing a gaming machine. Further, when the ID of the communication module is used, there is an advantage that the cost is not increased because the setting SW is not required. Since there are advantages and disadvantages in this way, it is necessary to select the terminal ID setting method according to the effect desired to be performed by the communication between the sub-boards. In this example, the notice characters are sequentially displayed on the display device 41 of each gaming machine from the leftmost gaming machine on the island (that is, the arrangement of the gaming machines on the island (ID1, ID2, ID3, ... ID10 from the left). ), Which is necessary to specify), is given as an example of a setting method using a setting SW, which makes it easy to specify the position information of the table. In addition, this terminal ID is provided for identifying a transmission destination and a transmission source in communication between sub-boards.

In step D19, initial setting (for example, a process of saving a predetermined initial value) of an area to be initialized (for example, an effect flag area (a storage area used as various flags described later)) is performed.
Next, when the process proceeds to step D20, steps D20 to D32 are executed, and the process proceeds to step D33.
In step D20, the WDT (watchdog timer) is cleared.
In step D21, the effect button input process is executed. This is a process of editing when the effect button 9 (for example, a configuration including a push button and a select button) is pressed when it is enabled. Since the effect button does not turn on and off at high speed, the process of detecting the button input may be performed within this process, or may be performed within a short-cycle timer interrupt (not shown).

In step D22, the random number update process is executed. This is a process of updating the pseudo-random number at least once every control cycle of the main process using, for example, the land function. Since the land function generates a random number based on the specified generation sequence each time the recalculation is performed, it is only necessary to execute the function. A random number that is updated by +1 may be used as in the main board (game control device 100).
In step D23, a received command check process (described later) is executed.
After step D23, in step D23a, a test mode process (described later) is executed, and the process proceeds to step D24.

In step D24, the inter-sub transmission start processing is executed. This is a process of permitting an inter-sub transmission interrupt when there is a request for inter-sub command transmission. Depending on the production, you may not want to send the command immediately, so adjust the time (details will be described later).
In step D25, the inter-sub reception task process is executed. This is a process that mainly analyzes the received sub-sub commands (details will be described later).
In step D26, the inter-sub AC response task processing is executed. This is a process for monitoring when an ac (reply) is requested from another device (details will be described later).
In step D27, the inter-sub effect setting process is executed. This is a process of controlling the effect corresponding to the received sub-sub command (details will be described later).

In step D28, the scenario setting process is executed. This is a process of analyzing a scenario based on a command from the received game control device 100 (details will be described later).
In step D29, a process of filling the drawing area with black is executed. This is a process for completely erasing the past display of the frame buffer. For example, a process of arranging an entirely black square image in the frame buffer so that dust and the like are not displayed.
In step D30, the motion control process is executed. This is a process for executing the scenario analyzed in step D28 (details will be described later).

In step D31, the effect display editing process is executed. This is a process of setting various commands and their parameters for instructing the VDP 312 of the drawing contents (set in steps D28 to D30) on the display device 41 (details will be described later). In this effect display editing process, the commands are set in a table shape, and the commands set in this way are sequentially transmitted to the VDP 312 in step D34 (instructing screen drawing) described later.
In step D32, the drawing command preparation end setting is executed. This is a process for setting that the preparation of all commands for VDP 312 set in step D31 is completed.

When the process proceeds to step D33, it is determined whether or not it is the frame switching timing, steps D34 to D37 are sequentially executed if it is the frame switching timing, and this step D33 is repeated if it is not the frame switching timing. Here, the frame switching timing is a time corresponding to a processing cycle (for example, 1/30 second ≈ 33.333 ms) created based on the cycle (for example, 1/60 second) of the V blank interrupt (also referred to as V sink interrupt). It is the timing to arrive at the target interval. By the processing of this step D33, the subsequent processing (steps D34 to D37, and subsequent steps D20 to D32) is executed at this frame switching timing for each processing cycle. The time management that needs to be synchronized with the effect content is performed in this frame unit (that is, the processing cycle unit). When the processing cycle is 1/30 second, for example, 3 frames have 100 ms. This is the same as the main board (game control device) managing the time value in units of 4 ms of the timer interrupt cycle.

In step D34, the VDP 312 is instructed to draw a screen.
In step D35, the sound control process is executed (the description is omitted).
In step D36, a decoration control process for controlling various LEDs and the like is executed.
In step D37, a movable body control process for controlling a movable body including various motors and SOLs (solenoids) is executed. After executing this step D37, the process returns to step D20 and the same process as in the case of proceeding to step D20 is repeated.

Note that the control processing of steps D35 to D37 is performed within these steps in which operation switching is executed in units of processing cycles in order to match the effect of the screen. The process of actually outputting data (particularly signals for driving and controlling various LEDs and motors) to the port is performed in a short-cycle timer interrupt (not shown). However, when an IC specialized for controlling various devices is used, there is a case where a signal or the like is not output by a timer interrupt only by instructing by serial communication or the like.

[Command reception interrupt processing]
Next, the command reception interrupt processing will be described with reference to FIG. This command reception interrupt process is a process for receiving a command transmitted from the game control device 100 (main board) on the effect control device 300 (sub board), and the data constituting the command falls within the normal range. It also includes content to check if it is.
The communication between the main board and the sub board may be performed by parallel communication using a strobe signal (STB signal), but in the case of this example, it is performed by serial communication. That is, both boards communicate using, for example, the function of the serial communication circuit mounted on the CPUs 101A and 311.

In the serial communication in this case, since transmission / reception is automatically performed by hardware, there is an advantage that the processing time is not occupied for communication on both boards, unlike the case of parallel communication. In the case of parallel communication, the effect control device must perform the reception process with the highest priority according to the timing at which the game control device transmits, which makes it difficult to create a program. Furthermore, both boards need to be performing communication processing during communication. However, in serial communication, when the command reception is completed, an interrupt (command reception interrupt) is generated to notify the user, so all that is left is to take it out of the serial reception buffer. Moreover, in serial communication, it is not necessary to perform interrupt processing with the highest priority, and it is possible to disable interrupts when interrupting is a problem. Further, in serial communication, the processing on the transmitting side can be as simple as putting a command in the serial transmission buffer. In addition, serial communication is efficient because both boards can execute other processes while the hardware sends and receives. Also, physically, in the past (in the case of parallel communication), eight or more wires were required, but in serial communication, at least one wire can be realized. Even when serial communication is used, the communication between the game control device 100 (main board) and the effect control device 300 (sub board) is not bidirectional communication, but only unidirectional communication (main board → sub board). (Only in the direction of) is possible. This prevents fraud using communication from the sub-board to the main board.

This command reception interrupt processing is started when the above-mentioned command reception interrupt occurs in the effect control device 300 (sub-board). That is, when the CPU 311 of the sub board completes receiving the command transmitted by the CPU 101A of the main board by serial communication, a command reception interrupt is generated and this command reception interrupt processing is started. Here, this command reception interrupt has a higher priority than the above-mentioned V blank interrupt. Further, the command reception interrupt occurs irregularly as described above, but when the main board continuously transmits commands, the command reception interrupt occurs on the sub board corresponding to the transmission interval (for example, 4 msec). The intervals are the same (for example, 4 msec).
Further, the command from the main board has a configuration including MODE data (1 byte) and ACTION data (1 byte), and these are sequentially transmitted. In the following, such data that constitutes a command will be referred to as command data or command data.
When this routine is started, the reception monitoring timer is first stopped in step D41, then the command is loaded from the serial reception buffer in step D42, and the process proceeds to step D44.

When the process proceeds to step D44, it is determined whether or not the command data loaded in step D42 is in the MODE range based on the value of the data. If the command data is in the MODE range, the process proceeds to step D45. Assuming that it is in the range, the process proceeds to step D48. The MODE range is a range of values within 1 byte that can be set as MODE data, and the ACTION range is a range of values within 1 byte that can be set as ACTION data, which is predetermined. ..
Proceeding to step D45, the command data loaded in step D42 is stored as a reception MODE, then the MODE reception flag is set to "OK" in step D46, and then the value of the reception monitoring timer is reset to zero in step D47. Then, the timing operation of the reception start timer is started, and then returns. As used in step D45, when simply storing the memory, it means that the memory is readable and stored in a predetermined storage area for use in a later control process (the same applies hereinafter).

Proceeding to step D48, it is determined whether the value of the MODE reception flag is "OK", if it is "OK", it is further determined in step D49 whether the reception monitoring timer has timed out, and if it has not timed out, step D50. Proceed to. Then, when the value of the MODE reception flag is not "OK" in step D48 and when the time-out occurs in step D49, the command could not be received normally, so "NG" is set in the MODE reception flag in step D59. Return after doing. If the value of the MODE reception flag is not "OK" in step D48, it is abnormal because, for example, the command data in the ACTION range has been received, but the command data in the MODE range has not been received prior to that. If the time-out is made in step D49, the command data in the ACTION range is not received within the specified reception monitoring time measured by the reception monitoring timer from the time when the command data in the MODE range is received, which is abnormal. ..

When the process proceeds to step D50, the command data loaded in step D42 is stored as a reception ACTION, then the value of the MODE reception flag is set to "NG" in step D51, and the process proceeds to step D52.
In step D52, it is determined whether the value of the command reception counter is larger than 31, and if it is larger, it exceeds the capacity of the command buffer described later and returns, and if it is not large (when the command reception counter ≤ 31), step D53 is performed. move on. The command reception counter is configured to proceed to step D53 when the value of the command reception counter is 0 to 31, but the value of 0 to 31 is a value corresponding to the capacity of the command buffer described later, and is a system control cycle (the above-mentioned processing cycle; for example. It suffices if the number of commands exceeds the number of commands that can be transmitted from the main board in 1/30 second).

When the process proceeds to step D53, the effect operation corresponding to the reception MODE and the reception ACTION is prepared, then the reception command range check process (described later) is executed in the step D54, and then the process proceeds to the step D55.
In step D55, it is determined whether or not the range check is OK, and if it is not OK, the command (reception MODE and reception ACTION) is returned to be discarded, and if it is OK, steps D56 to D58 are sequentially executed and then returned. Here, the judgment result of the range check in step D55 is range check OK (step D55 is Yes) if the command range normal flag is set in the received command range check process described later, and the received command range check process described later. If the command range abnormality flag is set in, the range check is not OK (step D55 is No).

In step D56, the received MODE and the received ACTION are stored in the command buffer. The command buffer is a so-called ring buffer in this example, and has a specified capacity (the number of commands that can be stored and held). This command buffer is composed of, for example, a storage area in the RAM of the CPU 311.
In step D57, the value of the command reception counter is updated by one.
In step D58, since the data is stored (that is, written) in the command buffer, the value of the command write index is updated by 1 in the range of 0 to 31. The command write index is a pointer for writing to the command buffer, and the value of this command write index is in the range of 0 to 31 in this example, but this range is the capacity of the command buffer (32 in this case). As described above, the number of commands that can be transmitted from the main board during one cycle of the system control cycle (the above-mentioned processing cycle; for example, 1/30 second) must be greater than or equal to the number of commands that can be transmitted from the main board. Just do it.

[Received command range check process]
Next, the details of the received command range check process (step D54) in the above-mentioned command received interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG. 100.
When this routine is started, first, in step D61, it is determined whether the value of the received MODE stored in step D45 is in the normal range, and if it is not in the normal range, the command range abnormality flag is set in step D67 and returned, and it is normal. If it is within the range, steps D62 and D63 are sequentially executed, and then the process proceeds to step D64. As for the value of MODE, not all the values in the MODE range have the command contents defined, and some values are not defined and are not used. If these are unused values, the step The judgment of D61 determines that the range is not normal.
In this step D61 or step D92 (or both steps D61 and D92) described later, a check for missing teeth in MODE data is also performed, and even if the command is invalid in this check, it is not in the normal range. good.
Note that the check for missing teeth in the MODE data means determining whether or not the MODE data to be checked corresponds to an invalid value in a portion where the values that the MODE can take are not continuous. If there is no discontinuity in the MODE value, this toothlessness check is not necessary.

In step D62, the minimum value (ACTION_min) among the possible values as the value of ACTION corresponding to the value of the received MODE stored in step D45 is acquired. In the present application, “acquiring” data in the control process in this way means extracting data from the ROM (PROM321 in the effect control device 300 of this example).
In step D63, the maximum value (ACTION_max) among the possible values as the value of ACTION corresponding to the value of the received MODE stored in step D45 is acquired.

An ACTION check table as shown on the left side of FIG. 172 is registered in the PROM 321, and in steps D62 and D63, the corresponding value is acquired from the ACTION check table. The ACTION check table corresponds to the value of each MODE, the data of the lower limit of ACTION corresponding to the minimum value (ACTION_min), the data of the upper limit of ACTION corresponding to the maximum value (ACTION_max), and the match check table (described later). ) Is defined (for example, the start address of the match check table). In the case of FIG. 172, for example, when the value of MODE is 89h (decorative symbol 1), the lower limit of ACTION is 00h and the upper limit of ACTION is 72h. Therefore, in step D62, 00h is acquired as the minimum value (ACTION_min). In step D63, 72h is acquired as the maximum value (ACTION_max). The data of the ACTION check table and the like, that is, various information used in the control process of the effect control device 300 (for example, data of various tables) are stored in the PROM 321 in advance together with the operation program.

When the process proceeds to step D64, it is determined whether the received ACTION value stored in step D50 is smaller than the minimum value acquired in step D62. If it is smaller, it is abnormal, so the process proceeds to step D67. Proceed to step D65.
When the process proceeds to step D65, it is determined whether the received ACTION value stored in step D50 is larger than the maximum value acquired in step D63. If it is larger, it is abnormal, so the process proceeds to step D67. Proceed to step D66.
When proceeding to step D66, since it is normal, the command range normal flag is set and the process returns. If the process proceeds to step D67, it is abnormal, so the command range abnormality flag is set and the process returns.

[Receive command check process]
Next, the details of the received command check process (step D23) in the above-mentioned main process will be described with reference to FIG. 101.
When this routine is started, the value of the command reception counter is first loaded as the number of command receptions in step D71, then it is determined in step D72 whether the number of command receptions is not zero, and if it is not zero, steps D73 to D75 are sequentially performed. After execution, the process proceeds to step D76, and if it is zero, it returns. In the present application, as in step D71, “loading” data in the control process means extracting data from the RAM (RAM in the CPU 311 in the effect control device 300 of this example).

In step D73, the contents of the command reception counter area (that is, the value of the command reception counter) are subtracted by the number of command receptions.
If A: the value of the command reception counter and B: the number of commands received, "A = B" immediately after the execution of step D71. Immediately after the execution of step D73, the normal movement is "A = AB = 0", but in the embodiment of this example, the effect control device interrupts the command reception interrupt from the game control device (main board). Since the highest priority is given without prohibition, there is a possibility that the value of A increases between the processing of step D71 and the processing of step D73. Therefore, if the process of step D73 is set to "A ← 0" (that is, the process of setting the value of the command reception counter to zero), the command count will be deviated. Therefore, in step D73, the subtraction process of "AB" is performed. Is going. However, when serial communication is used for sending and receiving commands from the main board as in this embodiment, interrupts are disabled so that the value of A does not increase between the processing of step D71 and the processing of step D73. By doing so, the processing content of step D73 may be set to "A ← 0".

In step D74, the contents of the received command buffer (corresponding to the command buffer in step D56, hereinafter simply referred to as the command buffer) (that is, the command data stored in the address corresponding to the read pointer) is set to the command area (in some cases, a command). Copy to (called storage area). The command area is a storage area in the RAM of, for example, the CPU 311 that constitutes a so-called FIFO format (first-in, first-out format) buffer.
In step D75, since the data in the command buffer has been read, the value of the command read index, which is the read pointer of the command buffer, is updated by 1 in the range of 0 to 31. The range of 0 to 31 here may be the same range as the command write index updated in step D58.

Proceeding to step D76, it is determined whether or not the copy of the command for the number of command receptions has been completed (that is, whether or not steps D74 and D75 have been repeatedly executed for the number of command receptions), and if not, step D74. The process is repeated from step D74, and if completed, the process proceeds to step D77.

Proceeding to step D77, the contents of the command area (the data stored first among the unread data in the command area, that is, the data to be read next) are loaded (that is, read). For the data of this loaded command (hereinafter referred to as this command), the received command analysis process (described later) is executed in the next step D78, and then the process proceeds to step D79.
When the process proceeds to step D79, the address of the command area (the address of the data to be read next) is updated, and the process proceeds to step D80.
In step D80, it is determined whether or not the analysis of the commands for the number of command receptions has been completed (that is, whether or not steps D77 to D79 have been repeatedly executed for the number of command receptions), and if not, the process returns to step D77. The process is repeated from step D77, and if it is completed, the process returns.

[Received command analysis processing]
Next, the details of the received command analysis process (step D78) in the above-mentioned received command check process will be described with reference to FIG. 102.
When this routine is started, first, in step D91, the upper byte of the data of the current command loaded in step D77 is separately stored in MODE and the lower byte is stored in ACT, and then the process proceeds to step D92. In the case of a fluctuation system command that commands the fluctuation pattern of the special figure, the upper byte data stored as MODE commands the first half fluctuation pattern, and the lower byte data stored as ACT commands the second half fluctuation pattern. It is a thing.

In step D92, it is determined whether the MODE value and the ACT value separated in step D91 are in the normal range, and if only one of these values is not in the normal range, a return is made, and both of these values are in the normal range. If so, the process proceeds to step D94. As described above, the value of MODE is not defined and some values are not used, and if it is such an unused value, it is determined in step D92 that it is not in the normal range (described above). Same as step D61).
Further, in step D92, the determination of whether or not the ACT value separated in step D91 is within the normal range is performed in the same manner as in steps D62 to D65 described above. That is, the effective ACT value differs for each MODE, and the upper limit to the lower limit of the effective value of the ACT are defined in the above-mentioned ACTION check table (FIG. 172), and in step D92, they are separated within the range of the upper limit to the lower limit. It is checked whether the ACT value is within the range, and if it is within the range, it is judged to be in the normal range (at this point, the toothlessness check has not been performed).

When the process proceeds to step D94, the start address of the match check table corresponding to the separated MODE value is acquired from the ACTION check table described above, and then the process proceeds to step D95. In the case of FIG. 172, for example, when the value of MODE is 89h (decorative symbol 1), the start address of the match check table is tMOD89, which is acquired in step D94.
Here, the match check table is shown on the right side of FIG. 172, for example, and all ACT values (ACTION values) valid for the corresponding MODE values are registered in order from the start address. Yes, it is provided for each MODE value. The match check table shown on the right side of FIG. 172 corresponds to the case where the MODE value is 89h, and all the ACT values (11h, 12h, 21h, 22h) valid for this MODE value (89h). Etc.) are registered in order from the start address (first row) of the table, and the check end code (-1) is registered at the last address (last row) of the table.
In the case of MODE in which valid ACTION values are fixed in a continuous range, the match check table is unnecessary, so the data of the start address of the match check table in the ACTION check table is NULL. In the case of FIG. 172, for example, when the value of MODE is 80h (waiting for customers), the start address of the match check table is NULL, which is acquired in step D94. In addition, since the valid ACTION is missing for the MODE row in which the match check table is defined, after checking the upper limit / lower limit, further comparison judgment can be made using the corresponding match check table. It is performed (steps D96 to D99 described later).

When the process proceeds to step D95, it is determined whether the start address of the match check table acquired in step D94 is NULL, and if it is NULL, the process proceeds to step D100, and if it is not NULL, the process proceeds to step D96. Note that the fact that the start address of the match check table is NULL means that the valid ACT values for MODE are continuous, and only the range check in step D92 is OK. Therefore, steps D96 to D96 to be described later. Jump to step D100 without executing D99.

Proceeding to step D96, loop processing (repetitive processing) with steps D96 and D99 as loop ends is executed. That is, when the process proceeds to step D96, the operation of sequentially executing step D97 and step D98, which will be described later, is repeated until the end condition described later is satisfied by branching in step D99. In the loop processing, the data corresponding to the address of the match check table (hereinafter referred to as the match check table address) acquired in step D94 and updated in step D98 described later (data of the corresponding row in the match check table) is stepped. The end condition is that the values match the ACT values separated by D91, and the execution is repeated until this end condition is satisfied. However, if the determination result of step D97, which will be described later, is YES, the loop processing is exited (the loop processing is terminated even if the termination condition is not satisfied).

That is, when proceeding to step D96, first, in step D97, it is determined whether the data corresponding to the match check table address is the check end code, and if it is the check end code, the loop processing is exited and returned, and the check end code is used. If not, the next step D98 is executed. Then, in step D98, the match check table address is updated to the next record. When the match check table address is updated to the next record, the row in the match check table corresponding to the match check table address is switched to the next row (one row below on the right side of FIG. 172). Next, when step D98 is executed, the process proceeds to step D99, it is determined whether the data corresponding to the updated match check table address matches the ACT value separated in step D91, and if they match, the end condition is satisfied. Therefore, the loop processing is completed and the process proceeds to step D100. If there is a discrepancy, the process returns to step D96 and the loop processing is repeated.

In the loop processing of steps D96 to D99 described above, a check (including a toothlessness check) is performed to see if the MODE has a normal ACT combination. Although there are a plurality of valid ACTs for one MODE, their values are not always continuous, so it is compared and confirmed whether the command is a valid value. Then, since only valid values are defined in the match check table, it is compared and confirmed one by one to see if they match any of them. For example, assuming that the value of MODE separated in step D91 is 89h and the value of ACT is 31h, in the case of FIG. 172, since the data in the fifth row of the match check table is 31h, the loop processing is 4 When the repetition is repeated, the above end condition is satisfied and the process proceeds from step D99 to step D100. Further, assuming that the value of MODE separated in step D91 is 89h and the value of ACT is 13h or the like, in the case of FIG. 172, 13h or the like does not exist in the match check table (13h or the like is not in the match check table). Since it is toothless data that does not have a continuous part), the above end condition is not satisfied even if the above loop processing is repeated until the last line, and the data is checked when the last line is reached. Therefore, the determination result in step D97 becomes YES, and the loop processing is exited and returned. If the determination result in step D97 is YES in this way, the ACT value is abnormal. Therefore, as in the case where the determination result in step D92 is NO, it is considered that the command is abnormal and the command is abnormal. Will return without executing.

Next, steps D100 and subsequent steps will be described.
As described above, if it is not determined that the command value (MODE and ACT data separated in step D91) is abnormal in the processing up to step D99, step D100 is executed through step D95 or D99. ..
In step D100, it is determined whether the MODE data is within the single-shot command range, and if it is within this range, the single-shot command processing (described later) is executed in step D101 to return, and if it is outside this range, step D102 is performed. move on. Here, the MODE data is the MODE data separated and stored in step D91 (the same applies to step D102 and the like described later). Note that, unlike commands that make sense in combination, such as symbol commands and variable commands, commands that are established independently are called single-shot commands. Single-shot commands (sometimes called single-shot commands) include customer waiting demo commands, hold count commands, symbol stop commands, probability information commands, error / illegal commands, and model specification commands. The range that the data of this one-shot command can take is the one-shot command range.

Proceeding to step D102, it is determined whether the MODE data is within the symbol-based command range, and if it is within this range, the symbol-based command processing (described later) is executed and returned in step D103, and if it is outside this range, the step Proceed to D104. A symbol command (sometimes called a symbol command or a decorative special symbol command) is a command for commanding information about a special symbol (for example, what the stop symbol of the special symbol should be), and this symbol command. The range that can be taken by the data is the design command range.
Proceeding to step D104, it is determined whether the MODE data is within the variable command range, and if it is within this range, the variable command process (described later) is executed and returned in step D105, and if it is outside this range, the step Proceed to D106. A variable command (sometimes referred to as a variable command or a variable pattern command) is a command that commands a variable pattern of a special figure, and the range that the data of this variable command can take is the variable command range. In this step D104, the tooth loss check of MODE may not be performed or may be performed.

Proceeding to step D106, it is determined whether the MODE data is within the jackpot command range, and if it is within this range, the jackpot command process (described later) is executed and returned in step D107, and if it is outside this range, the step Proceed to D108a. The jackpot command is a command for commanding an operation (display of a fanfare screen, a round screen, etc.) related to the production during the jackpot, and the range in which the data of the jackpot command can be obtained is the jackpot command range.

Proceeding to step D108a, it is determined whether the MODE data is within the look-ahead symbol command range for the look-ahead effect, and if it is within this range, the look-ahead symbol command processing (described later) is executed in step D109a to return. If it is out of this range, the process proceeds to step D108b.
Proceeding to step D108b, it is determined whether the MODE data is within the look-ahead variable command range for the look-ahead effect, and if it is within this range, the look-ahead variable command process (described later) is executed in step D109b to return. If it is out of this range, the process proceeds to step D108c.

Here, the look-ahead effect (also referred to as a look-ahead notice or a look-ahead notice effect) is a variable display game corresponding to a start winning memory (holding of the starting winning memory, or simply holding) in which the variable display game of the special figure has not been executed. In order to notify the player in advance whether or not the game will be a big hit (or what kind of fluctuation pattern it will be) when the game is executed thereafter, the start winning memory is held and displayed in a different manner from the usual mode. It is a production such as. The look-ahead command (look-ahead variable command and look-ahead symbol command) is a command that informs in advance the fluctuation pattern and the stop symbol corresponding to the hold of the start winning memory that is the target of the look-ahead effect, and is a game at the time of the start winning. It is transmitted from the control device 100 to the effect control device 300. It should be noted that normal variable commands and symbol commands that are not look-ahead are transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 at the start of the variable display.

Proceeding to step D108c, it is determined whether the MODE data is within the test mode command range, and if it is within this range, the test mode command processing (described later) is executed and returned in step D109c, and if it is outside this range, it returns. If so, it returns without executing step D109c.
Here, the test mode command is a command (including a command for instructing the transition to the test mode) to instruct the operation in the test mode. The test mode has nothing to do with the game in the market, but whether various devices (display, sound, LED, motor, solenoid, etc. controlled by the production control device) operate normally before the game machine is shipped, etc. This is one of the modes of the effect control device that enables the player to check, and is a mode different from the normal gaming state. The details of this test mode will be described later.

In this example, the command reception order at the start of fluctuation is different from the conventional configuration. In the past, the order was variable pattern command-> stop symbol command-> hold number command, but in this example, the order is hold count command-> stop symbol command-> variable pattern command. In addition, the order of receiving the look-ahead commands (command reception order at the time of starting winning) is also the order of look-ahead symbol commands → look-ahead variable commands. Here, since the hold number command has independent contents that are not directly related to the fluctuation effect, changing the transmission order is not so important, but the order of the symbol command (stop symbol command) and the variation command (variation pattern command) has been changed. Has the following background and effects.

That is, it can be said that the content of the variation effect is determined by the variation pattern command, and the stop symbol is only one parameter in the effect content, and nothing can be done only by receiving the symbol command. For some time, fluctuation pattern commands have been treated as "screen display change commands" and symbol commands have been treated as "internal parameter change commands". However, in the conventional configuration, even if a screen display change command is received, Since the symbol parameters were not received, it was not possible to immediately prepare for the production. Furthermore, it was necessary to monitor whether the symbol command was sent within the specified time, which increased the burden on the effect control device.
However, in this example, since the order is reversed, it is possible to immediately prepare for the production if the received symbol information matches when the variation pattern command is received. Even if the symbol command is received first, only the symbol does not change first because it is not a command to change the screen display. This is because the symbol information is only stored in the RAM. Further, even if the symbol command is missed, there is an advantage that it can be changed as long as the symbol information saved in the RAM last time matches. On the other hand, in the conventional configuration, if it is missed, the symbol information will be lost and it will not be possible to change it. In other words, in the case of this example, it can be said that the possibility that the player will notice the command omission is extremely low (much lower than before). In addition, the symbol command and the variable command are paired commands, but the relationship is thinned so that they can be handled as independent commands, which has the effect of improving program development efficiency.

[Single-shot command processing]
Next, the details of the one-shot command process executed in step D100 in the above-mentioned received command analysis process will be described with reference to FIGS. 103 and 104.
When this routine is started, first in step D181, the MODE data (data of the upper byte separated in step D91 described above, steps D191, D193, D195, D195a, D197, D199, D204, D207, D207a described later). However, the same applies. It is determined whether or not the customer waiting demo is ordered, and if the customer waiting demo is ordered, the process proceeds to step D181a, and if the customer waiting demo is not ordered, the process proceeds to step D191. The customer waiting demo is a customer waiting demo effect (also referred to as a customer waiting effect), and is an effect including a customer waiting demo display performed by the display device 41. The customer waiting demonstration effect is not limited to the display on the display device 41, and may be displayed on another display device, the lamps may be lit (including blinking), or the sound may be output.
When the process proceeds to step D181a, it is determined whether the data of the current command loaded in step D77 is normal, and if it is normal, the process proceeds to step D182, and if it is abnormal, the process proceeds to step D210. If the command is abnormal in step D181a, the configuration may be such that the command returns instead of proceeding to step D210.

When the process proceeds to step D182, it is determined whether the P machine state (pachinko machine state) is in the customer waiting demonstration, the process proceeds to step D210 if the customer waiting demonstration is in progress, and steps D183 and D184 are sequentially executed if the customer waiting demonstration is not in progress. Later, the process proceeds to step D185.
In step D183, a customer waiting scenario data setting process (described later) is executed in order to perform the customer waiting effect. In the description of the control process of the effect control device 300, the scenario control data means data set in the scenario management area or the address area of the scenario management area, which will be described later, in order to control the flow of a specific effect. In this step D183, the scenario control data for performing the customer waiting effect is set.
In step D184, the customer waiting state A (customer waiting state A) is set as the P machine state. The customer waiting effect includes a customer waiting state A, a customer waiting state B, a customer waiting movie (without sound), and a customer waiting movie (with sound).

When the process proceeds to step D185, it is determined whether data is being transmitted between subs (that is, whether data is being transmitted to the effect control device of a different pachinko machine), and if it is being transmitted, the process proceeds to step D210 to transmit. If not, the process proceeds to step D210 after executing steps D186 to D190.
In step D186, an inter-sub command (broadcast transmission setting) for customer waiting demo synchronization (synchronization between subs in the customer waiting demo display) is prepared, and inter-sub transmission data is prepared in the next step D187 in order to edit the prepared inter-sub command. The editing process (described later in FIG. 137) is executed.

In step D188, an initial value is set in the ack waiting timer (timer used in step D521 described later). Whether or not the sub-board (effect control device) of the pachinko machine that received the inter-sub command returns an ack to the sub-board of the pachinko machine that sent the inter-sub command depends on the type of command (steps described later). See D480a). In this example, the inter-sub command of the customer waiting demo synchronization contains the content requesting the reply of ACK. That is, in this example, the inter-sub command of the customer waiting demo synchronization is a command that requires an ack reply.
In step D189, a timer waiting for the start of the inter-sub effect (timer used in step D532 described later) is set.
In step D190, the inter-sub transmission request flag is set. The inter-sub transmission request flag is used for the determination in step D461, which will be described later.

Proceeding to step D191, it is determined whether the MODE data commands the value of the special figure 1 hold number, and if it commands the value of the special figure 1 hold number, the special figure 1 hold information is in step D192. After executing the setting process (described later), the process proceeds to step D210, and if the value of the special figure 1 hold number is not commanded, the process proceeds to step D193.
Proceeding to step D193, it is determined whether the MODE data commands the value of the special figure 2 hold number, and if it commands the value of the special figure 2 hold number, the special figure 2 hold information is in step D194. After executing the setting process (explanation omitted), the process proceeds to step D210, and if the value of the special figure 2 hold number is not commanded, the process proceeds to step D195. The details of the special figure 1 hold information setting process will be described later, but the special figure 2 hold information setting process is the same as the special figure 1 hold information setting process (only the difference between the special figure 1 and the special figure 2). Therefore, the description thereof will be omitted.

Proceeding to step D195, it is determined whether the MODE data is the one that commands the effect mode switching (data of the effect mode switching command), and if it is the one that commands the effect mode switching, the effect mode switching setting process is performed in step D196. After executing (explanation omitted), the process proceeds to step D210, and if it does not command the effect mode switching, the process proceeds to step D195a. The effect mode switching setting process is a control process for performing an operation according to the effect mode switching command, and includes a scenario data setting process for that purpose.
Proceeding to step D195a, it is determined whether the MODE data is model-specified (model-designated command data), and if it is model-specified, the model-designated setting process (explanation omitted) is executed in step D196a. Later, the process proceeds to step D210, and if the model is not specified, the process proceeds to step D197.
Proceeding to step D197, it is determined whether the MODE data is for notifying the power failure recovery (command data at the time of power failure recovery), and if it is for notifying the power failure recovery, after executing the power failure recovery setting process in step D198. The process proceeds to step D210, and if the power failure recovery is not instructed, the process proceeds to step D199. The power failure recovery setting process in step D198 is for notifying the player of the power failure recovery by displaying a message such as "game restarted" on the display device 41 or blinking the lamps in a predetermined mode. It is a process and includes a scenario data setting process for that purpose.

Proceeding to step D199, it is determined whether the MODE data is a signal for RAM initialization (power on with the initialization switch (RAM clear switch) turned on) (RAM initialization command data), and RAM is determined. If it informs the initialization, the process proceeds to step D199a, and if it does not instruct the RAM initialization, the process proceeds to step D204. The RAM initialization command is a power-on command that notifies the effect control device 300 that the game control device 100 has cleared the RWM, and is transmitted in step S28 described above. This power-on command is sent to cause the effect control device 300 to clear the effect state and to perform an RWM clear notification (an operation of displaying, for example, that the RWM has been cleared on the display device 41).
When the process proceeds to step D199a, it is determined whether the data of the current command loaded in step D77 is normal, and if it is normal, steps D200 to D203 are sequentially executed and then the process proceeds to step D210. If it is abnormal, the process proceeds to step D210. If the command is abnormal in step D199a, the configuration may be such that the command returns instead of proceeding to step D210.
In step D200, various initial screen information is set. The setting contents of various initial screen information are to clear the special symbol type / symbol type, set 0 for the special figure 1 hold number and the special figure 2 hold number, for example, left = 7, middle = 5 for the current symbol and the stop symbol. , Right = 3 outliers are set.

In step D201, the index of the hold motion control table corresponding to the number of holds (= 0) at this point is calculated and saved. Here, the index of the hold motion control table is an index that specifies a row (record) of the hold motion control table. Further, the hold motion control table is a motion control table for holding and displaying the start memory of the special figure. Further, the process of step D201 is executed for the special figure 1 hold number and the special figure 2 hold number, respectively.
Here, the motion control table is a control table for executing each blocked effect (mainly the effect display), and is also simply referred to as a motion table. The data of this motion table can be easily produced by a graphical input operation using a mouse or the like by commercially available application software that can be executed on a PC (personal computer), and the effect control device 300 can be used for each blocked effect. It is stored in the PROM 321 in advance.
In step D202, the power-on scenario data setting process (explanation is omitted) is executed.
Further, the power-on scenario data setting process includes an initialization process for setting the operating position of the motor of the frame effect device 45 to the initial position, and a control process for executing the RWM clear notification. You may.
In step D203, the customer waiting state A (customer waiting state A) is set as the P machine state.

Proceeding to step D204, it is determined whether the MODE data is a command to stop the symbol of the special symbol (that is, a symbol stop command), and if it is to command the stop of the symbol of the special symbol, steps D205 and D206 are performed. After the sequential execution, the process proceeds to step D210, and if it is not a command to stop the symbol of the special figure, the process proceeds to step D207.
In step D205, the symbol data stop scenario data setting process (explanation is omitted) is executed.
In step D206, the normal state is set as the P machine state. Here, "normal" means that the special figure is not hit, the special figure is changing, or the customer is waiting (customer waiting state). Further, after the normal setting is made here, for example, the special figure may be changed or the customer may be waiting according to the next command from the main board.

Proceeding to step D207, it is determined whether the MODE data informs the probability information (probability change information command data), and if it informs the probability information, the probability information setting process is executed in step D208, and then step D210. If the probability information is not commanded, the process proceeds to step D207a.
Here, the probability information setting process is a setting process for screen switching at the end of the probability change (at the time of transition from the high probability state to the normal state where the probability is low) when the probability change occurs after the big hit, and a scenario for that. It may include data setting processing.
Proceeding to step D207a, it is determined whether the MODE data is for notifying an error / invalidity (for example, data of an error notification command), and if it is for notifying an error / invalidity, an error / invalid setting process (explanation) is performed in step D209. After executing (omitted), the process proceeds to step D210, and if it does not command an error / invalidity, the process proceeds to another process step (for example, another step for determining MODE data) that is not shown.
Proceeding to step D210, the command received flag is set, and then the command is returned. However, in this step D210, if the received command is abnormal (that is, when the determination results of steps D181a and D199a become negative and the process proceeds to step D210), the command received flag is not set and the return is made. It may be configured to be used. The command received flag is a flag indicating that the first command after startup has been received, and is used to determine whether or not it is the first command when a command instructing the transition to test mode is received. (See step F112 described later).
Regarding this one-shot command processing, there are steps for which illustration and description are omitted. For example, the corresponding processing when another non-variable command is received is omitted. Also, scenario control data is not set for all commands. For example, when an error command indicating frame opening is received, the screen of the display device 41 is not changed, so the scenario control data is not set.

[Customer waiting scenario data setting process]
Next, the details of the customer waiting scenario data setting process executed in step D183 in the above-mentioned single-shot command process will be described with reference to FIG. 105.
When this routine is started, steps D211 to D234 are sequentially executed first, and then returns.
In step D211 the scenario layer number 0 is prepared. Here, "preparing" means that data is primarily stored and held in a predetermined storage area for later processing (the same applies to other steps described later). In addition, the scenario layer is a conceptual scenario layer (layer) for hierarchically controlling the flow of production. The scenario layer number is a number assigned to each scenario layer, and in this example, it is from 0 to 7. Further, in this example, the scenario layer with scenario layer number 0 (hereinafter referred to as scenario layer 0) is mainly used for display control of the background image, scenario layer 1 is used for display control of the left pattern, and so on, for each scenario layer. The control target is basically assigned. However, only the scenario layer 0 is used for the customer waiting effect, and motion information such as a symbol for the customer waiting effect is also managed in the scenario layer 0.

In step D212, the address of the data table for the customer waiting scenario is prepared. The scenario data table (also simply called the scenario table) is a table in which data for controlling the flow of a specific effect (data for specifying which motion table is executed at what timing, etc.) is set. Each effect is stored in advance in the PROM 321 of the effect control device 300. The customer waiting scenario data table is a scenario table for the customer waiting effect, and has the configuration shown in FIG. 177, for example. Further, in the scenario table of this example, as shown in FIG. 177, the data (scenario data) of the operation code and the operand is set in each line (each record).
In step D213, the scenario data setting process described later is executed based on the data (address and scenario layer number data) prepared in the immediately preceding steps D211 and D212.

In step D214, scenario layer number 1 is prepared.
In step D215, the address (Null) of the scenario data table is prepared.
In step D216, the scenario data setting process described later is executed based on the data prepared in the immediately preceding steps D214 and D215.
In step D217, the scenario layer number 2 is prepared.
In step D218, the address (Null) of the scenario data table is prepared.
In step D219, the scenario data setting process described later is executed based on the data prepared in the immediately preceding steps D217 and D218.

In step D220, scenario layer number 3 is prepared.
In step D221, the address (Null) of the scenario data table is prepared.
In step D222, the scenario data setting process described later is executed based on the data prepared in the immediately preceding steps D220 and D221.
In step D223, scenario layer number 4 is prepared.
In step D224, the address (Null) of the scenario data table is prepared.
In step D225, the scenario data setting process described later is executed based on the data prepared in the immediately preceding steps D223 and D224.

In step D226, the scenario layer number 5 is prepared.
In step D227, the address (Null) of the scenario data table is prepared.
In step D228, the scenario data setting process described later is executed based on the data prepared in the immediately preceding steps D226 and D227.
In step D229, scenario layer number 6 is prepared.
In step D230, the address (Null) of the scenario data table is prepared.
In step D231, the scenario data setting process described later is executed based on the data prepared in the immediately preceding steps D229 and D230.

In step D232, scenario layer number 7 is prepared.
In step D233, the address (Null) of the scenario data table is prepared.
In step D234, the scenario data setting process described later is executed based on the data prepared in the immediately preceding steps D232 and D233.
The scenario layers 1 to 7 for which the address (Null) is prepared in steps D215, D218, D221, D224, D227, D230, and D233 are scenario layers in which the scenario data table is not set, that is, uncontrolled scenario layers.

[Scenario data setting process]
Next, the details of the scenario data setting process executed in steps D213, D216, D219, D222, D225, D228, D231, and D234 in the above-mentioned customer waiting scenario data setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 106. The scenario data setting process is common to various effects, and the step in which the scenario data setting process is executed is another routine (for example, step D318 of the reachless variation setting process described later). There are many in. All the steps described as "scenario data setting process" are shown in FIG. 106.
When this routine is started, first, in step D241, it is determined whether the address of the prepared scenario data table (for example, the one prepared in steps D212, D215, etc.) is NULL, and if it is NULL, after step D247 is executed. It returns, and if it is not NULL, it returns after executing steps D242 to D246 in sequence.

In the above-mentioned customer waiting scenario data setting process, when this routine is executed in step D213, the address of the customer waiting scenario data table that is not NULL is prepared in the immediately preceding step D212, so step D241. The determination result of is NO, and steps D242 to D246 are executed. If this routine is executed in other steps D216 or the like, NULL is prepared in the immediately preceding step D215 or the like. The determination result of D241 becomes YES, and step D247 is executed.

In step D242, the start address of the scenario management area corresponding to the prepared scenario layer number (for example, the one prepared in step D211 and the same applies hereinafter) is set. In the case of this example, the RAM 311a of the effect control device 300 is configured to be provided with storage areas for scenario management called "address area of scenario management area" and "scenario management area". Of these, the scenario management area includes an area for storing the value of the scenario timer (scenario timer area), an area for storing the value of the PB timer (push button timer) (PB timer area), and PB detection. The structure includes an area for storing the value of the flag (push button detection flag) (PB detection flag area) and an area for storing the address of the scenario data table (scenario data table area). Further, there are scenario management areas having the same structure corresponding to each scenario layer, and since there are eight scenario layers in this example, there are also eight scenario management areas (scenario management areas 0 to 7). .. In step D242, in order to specify one of the plurality of scenario management areas in this way, the start address of the scenario management area (hereinafter referred to as the corresponding scenario management area) corresponding to the prepared scenario layer number is set. doing.

The address area of the scenario management area is an area for storing the start address of the scenario management area for each scenario layer. In this example, there are eight scenario layers, so eight start addresses corresponding to these (scenario). It consists of eight areas for storing (address for layer 0 to address for scenario layer 7).
Next, in step D243, the start address of the scenario management area set in the immediately preceding step D242 is stored (that is, written) in the address area of the scenario management area corresponding to the prepared scenario layer number.

Next, in step D244, 0 is written (that is, the value is cleared) as the value of the scenario timer in the corresponding scenario management area.
Next, in step D245, 0 is written (that is, the value is cleared) as the value of the PB timer in the corresponding scenario management area. The value of the PB detection flag in the corresponding scenario management area may also be cleared, but it may be cleared when necessary (when starting PB detection), so the value of the PB detection flag is set here. No.
Next, in step D246, the address of the prepared scenario data table (for example, the one prepared in step D212) is written in the scenario data table area of the corresponding scenario management area.
On the other hand, in step D247, NULL is written in the address area of the scenario management area corresponding to the prepared scenario layer number.

According to the above scenario data setting process, the storage area for scenario management (“address area of scenario management area” and “scenario management area”) corresponding to the prepared scenario layer number is used for the effect to be executed from now on. Scenario control data is set.
For example, in the above-mentioned scenario data setting process for waiting for customers, the scenario data setting process is executed in steps D213, D216, D219, D222, D225, D228, D231, and D234, so that the scenario in the address area of the scenario management area is executed. The start address of the scenario management area 0 is set as the address for layer 0, and NULL is set from the remaining address for scenario layer 1 to the address for scenario layer 7. Further, the address of the customer waiting scenario data table prepared in step D212 is set in the scenario data table area of the scenario management area 0. As a result, the control of the customer waiting effect is executed only in the scenario layer 0.

[Special figure 1 Hold information setting process]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 hold information setting process executed in step D192 in the above-mentioned single-shot command process will be described with reference to FIG. 107.
When this routine is started, first, in step D249, it is determined whether the ACT value separated in step D91 is in the normal range (that is, whether the number of holds indicated by the ACT value is in the range of 0 to 4). If it is not in the normal range, it returns, and if it is in the normal range, the process proceeds to step D250.
Proceeding to step D250, special figure 1 hold (with special figure 1) is used as information (latest hold information) indicating whether the current hold number command is for special figure 1 or special figure 2 for the look-ahead lottery. Information indicating that there is) is registered. The lottery for the look-ahead notice is performed every time there is a start prize, but it is necessary to determine whether the start prize to be processed this time is the special figure 1 or the special figure 2, and the information for that is the latest. It is pending information. Since this routine is the case of the special figure 1, in this step D250, the special figure 1 hold is registered as the latest hold information.
After step D250, in step D251, the data of the special figure 1 hold number at that time is loaded, the loaded data is stored as the previous hold number, and then in step D252, the command (separated in step D91). The value of the number of holdings instructed by the data of MODE and ACT) is stored as the number of holdings in Special Figure 1.

Then, after passing through step D252, steps D254 to D257 are sequentially executed, and then the process proceeds to step D258.
In step D254, the index of the hold motion control table corresponding to the new hold number is calculated and saved. The index is data that specifies the number of the plurality of storage areas that form a group, and the index that specifies the motion table is called a motion index (details will be described later). In this step D254, a motion index that specifies the holding motion control table corresponding to the new number of holdings is calculated, and the motion index is saved in the storage area (holding index area) for storing the motion index.
In step D255, scenario layer number 6 is prepared.
In step D256, the addresses of the data table (X pending scenarios) for the special figure 1 pending scenario are prepared. Here, the data table for the special figure 1 hold scenario (X hold) means a scenario table that is different for each hold number for performing the effect corresponding to the new hold number, and the new hold number may be, for example, 1. For example, it is a data table for the special figure 1 hold scenario (1 hold), and if the number of new holds is 2, for example, it is a data table for the special figure 1 hold scenario (2 holds).
In step D257, the scenario data setting process described above is executed based on the data prepared in the immediately preceding steps D255 and D256.

When the process proceeds to step D258, it is determined whether the number of holds has decreased (that is, whether the number of new holds <the number of previous holds), and if the number has decreased, the process proceeds to step D262, and if not, the process proceeds to step D259.
Proceeding to step D259, a display pattern of normal lighting for holding is set in the color information area corresponding to the new number of holdings, and in the next step D260, it is determined whether the P machine state is a big hit system. As a result of the determination in step D260, if it is a big hit system, it returns, and if it is not a big hit system, an output request for a start opening winning sound is made in the next step D261, and then it returns. The jackpot system includes during fanfare, during rounds, during intervals, and during endings. Therefore, if the P machine state is any of fanfare, round, interval, and ending, the determination result in step D260 becomes affirmative, and the player returns without executing step D261.

Proceeding to step D262, the special figure 1 look-ahead information area is shifted, the color information area is shifted in the next step D263, and then a return is made.
It should be noted that the case of proceeding from step D258 to step D259 (when the number of holds has not decreased) is mainly when there is a start prize in FIG. 1 (that is, when the number of holds has increased), so this start. Steps D259 and D261 are executed in order to display the hold by winning (display of the held start memory) and output the winning sound for the effect. Further, when the same number of hold number commands is received (that is, when the hold number is neither increased nor decreased), such as after the hold number command is missed due to noise or the like, the process proceeds to step D259. In this case, Steps D259 and D261 are executed to produce a winning effect as a new winning. However, during the big hit (including during the fanfare, during the round, during the interval, and during the ending), the winning sound is not output by branching in step D260. Further, since the process proceeds to step D262 when the number of hold of the start memory of the special figure 1 decreases, the display of the number of hold for which the look-ahead display (for example, big hit notice or fluctuation pattern notice) is performed is shifted and displayed. Alternatively, steps D262 and D263 are executed in order to shift the look-ahead information (information on the look-ahead variation pattern and stop symbol and various information (flags, etc.) such as the presence / absence of the look-ahead effect) to the area corresponding to the number of holds.
In the effect control device 300, in the steps D109a and D109b (pre-reading symbol command processing, pre-reading variable command processing) described above, the pre-reading information is set as the analysis result of the pre-reading command for each hold. Then, the storage area of the look-ahead information needs to be shifted in accordance with the decrease in the number of reservations in the same manner as the random number storage area is shifted at the start of fluctuation on the main board, and this storage area is shifted. That is step D262. Further, step D263 is a process for similarly shifting the information storage area of the hold display color according to the look-ahead information (that is, the color of the hold display that is different depending on the presence / absence and content of the look-ahead effect for the look-ahead effect). Is.

[Design command processing]
Next, the details of the symbol-based command processing executed in step D103 in the above-mentioned received command analysis processing will be described with reference to FIG. 108.
When this routine is started, first, in step D171, the special figure type (special figure 1 or special figure) corresponding to the MODE data (data of the upper byte separated in step D91 described above, the same applies to step D172 described later). 2 information) is set. For example, if the MODE data is 85h, the special figure 1 is set as the special figure type, and if the MODE data is 86h, the special figure 2 is set as the special figure type. Since it can be determined from the MODE data whether it is the special figure 1 or the special figure 2 in this way, in this step D171, the special figure type is determined and set from the MODE data.

Next, in step D172, the symbol type setting table corresponding to the MODE data is set. The symbol type setting table is a table for determining the symbol type corresponding to the symbol command (the category of the symbol such as the missed symbol described later and the 16R probability variation jackpot symbol), and is the ACTION data of the symbol command (for example, 11h to 1Bh). This is a table in which the correspondence between (there are 11 types) and the symbol type is defined. Since the ratio of symbols changes between special figure 1 and special figure 2 (the probability variation ratio is the same), this symbol type setting table is provided separately for each MODE. In step D172, MODE data is obtained from a plurality of symbol type setting tables. Select and set the one corresponding to.

Next, in step D173, the symbol type corresponding to the ACT data (data of the lower byte separated in step D91 described above) is acquired based on the symbol type setting table set in step D172, and is used as the symbol type information. Save. After passing through step D173, the process proceeds to step D174.
The special symbol type and symbol type information set in steps D171 and D173 in response to the symbol command in this way are used in the processing of steps D111 and D112 described later for the variable command received following the symbol command. Even if the information of the special figure type is used for the determination of step D111, the data set in step D171 before the new execution of step D171 is stored and retained. Further, even after the symbol type information is used in step D112, the data previously set in step D173 is stored and retained until step D173 is newly executed.
When the process proceeds to step D174, it is determined whether the symbol type information saved in step D173 is undefined data, and if it is undefined, it returns. If it is not undefined, steps D175 and D176 are sequentially executed, and then step D177 is performed.
In step D175, the command received flag is set in the same manner as in step D210.
In step D176, the model code corresponding to the ACT data is set. The model specification code is included in the stop symbol command that is sent each time the variable display game is played. For example, even with the same command of the outlier symbol, the ACT data is "11h" for the model Z, "21h" for the model FA, "31h" for the model GL, and so on. The first digit (lower data) of the two-digit hexadecimal number indicates the symbol type, and the second digit (upper data) of the ACT data indicates the model difference (model designation code "1", "2". , "3", ...). Utilizing this, in step D176, each time a command of the stop symbol is received, the model code is set from the information (model designation code) of this command. The sub-board (effect control device) is configured to correspond to the internal model-specific specifications in real time according to instructions from the main board (game control device). For example, by changing the color of the symbol for each model (for example, the "5" symbol is displayed as a red number for Z and a blue number for GL), or by setting a reach effect that appears only in GL. While using a common sub-board, the production can be changed with the series models. Also, since the main board (program) needs to be changed for each series, the model specification code corresponding to that specification is included in the design commands when the power is turned on (both RAM clear and power failure recovery) and when it fluctuates. Will be sent.
Proceeding to step D177, it is determined whether the model code set in step D176 and the current model code (model code currently saved in the model code area) are the same, and if they are not the same, a return is made after executing step D178. If they are the same, the process returns without executing step D178.
In step D178, the model code set in step D176 is saved in the model code area.
In this way, according to this routine, each time a symbol-based command is received, a special symbol type and a symbol type are set, and when the model code is different from the current model code, it is updated and set in real time. Therefore, even if the model code command at power-on is not processed correctly due to noise, etc., or if only the sub-board is reset after the game machine is turned on, the correct effect for each model based on the correct model code can be obtained. Realized with high reliability.

[Variable command processing]
Next, the details of the variable command processing executed in step D105 in the above-mentioned received command analysis processing will be described with reference to FIG. 109.
When this routine is started, it is first determined in step D111 whether the special figure type is undetermined, if it is undetermined, it returns, and if it is not undetermined (that is, when the special figure type is set), step D112 The fluctuation pattern corresponding symbol determination process (described later) is executed in step D113 to proceed to step D113. The special figure type is information indicating whether the special figure type is special figure 1 or special figure 2, and is information set in step D171 described above in the symbol system command processing.

Proceeding to step D113, it is determined whether or not the variation command and the symbol type are inconsistent based on the information (valid command information or invalid command information) returned in the variation pattern corresponding symbol determination process (described later) in step D112. If it is inconsistent (when invalid command information is returned), it returns, and if it is not inconsistent (when valid command information is returned), step D113a is executed and then step D113b is performed.
The symbol type means a category of symbols, and the symbol types include, for example, a missed symbol, a 16R probability variation jackpot symbol, and the like. Further, the inconsistency in step D113 is inconsistent in performing the effect, such as when the deviation command (variation pattern command) is received but the symbol command of the 16R probability variation jackpot symbol is received. It means that it is a combination (combination of variable command and symbol type).
In step D113a, the variation pattern classification process (described later) for selecting the variation pattern type (which is a rough classification of the variation display effect of the special figure and is determined by the variation pattern type data described later) according to the received command is executed. ..
Proceeding to step D113b, it is determined whether the fluctuation pattern type data returned in the fluctuation pattern classification process of step D113a (step D367 described later) is invalid data, and if it is invalid data, it returns, and if it is not invalid data, steps D114 to It returns after executing D117 sequentially.

In step D114, a variation effect setting process (described later) is executed in order to perform an effect according to the variation command.
Further, in step D115, the special figure changing state is set as the P machine state (pachinko machine state). Here, "during special map change" means that the special figure is changing (during a customer waiting demonstration, a big hit, or not during fanfare).
In step D116, the command received flag is set in the same manner as in step D210.
In step D117, if the number of pre-reading effects (number of times of pre-reading execution) is not zero, a process of updating the number of pre-reading effects by -1 (a process of reducing the number of pre-reading effects by 1) is executed. Here, the reason for updating the number of look-ahead effects to -1 is that step D117 is executed when a valid variable command is received (the special figure will start to change, and the number of pending start prize memories is one. This is because (when it decreases).

[Symbol pattern judgment processing corresponding to fluctuation pattern]
Next, the details of the fluctuation pattern corresponding symbol determination processing executed in step D112 of the variation system command processing described above will be described with reference to FIG. 110.
When this routine is started, first, in step D121, the symbol type information saved in step D173 described above in the symbol system command processing is loaded, and the process proceeds to step D122.
The symbol type information here is information indicating the symbol type of the stop symbol of the variable display game of the special symbol (decorative symbol). In the case of this example, the symbol types can be classified into five types: "missing symbol", "2R probability variation jackpot symbol", "16R probability variation jackpot symbol", "11R probability variation jackpot symbol", and "11R normal jackpot symbol". In detail, for example, "16R probability variation jackpot symbol" is further divided into 5 types A to E, and "11R probability variation jackpot symbol" is further divided into 3 types A to C, so there are 11 types in total. There is a stop symbol pattern. However, the present invention is not limited to this mode, and for example, a type such as a large hit symbol of another number of rounds or a small hit symbol may be set, and the setting of this symbol type changes depending on the specifications of the model. Here, 2R and 16R indicate the number of rounds of the jackpot, and the probability variation jackpot symbol is a jackpot symbol that becomes a probability variation state (a state in which the probability of becoming a jackpot is higher than the normal state) after the jackpot, and the normal jackpot symbol is It is a big hit symbol that becomes a normal state (a state that is not a probability change state) after a big hit. In addition, the out-of-order symbol is a symbol in which the result of the variable display game is out of order (a symbol that does not become a big hit).

When the process proceeds to step D122, it is determined whether the MODE data (data of the upper byte separated in step D91 described above) is within the variable command range, and if it is within this range, the process proceeds to step D123, and if it is outside this range, the process proceeds to step D123. It is assumed that the command is abnormal, and the process proceeds to step D133. In this step D122, for example, the same determination as in step D104 described above is executed again. In this step D122, the tooth loss check of MODE may not be performed or may be performed. Further, the determination contents of this step D122 and the above-mentioned step D104 may be different. For example, a mode in which the tooth loss check of MODE may be performed only in one of step D104 and step D122 described above may be used.

Proceeding to step D123, it is determined whether the symbol type information loaded in step D121 is an outlier symbol, and if it is an outlier symbol, the out-of-order ACT matching check table corresponding to the MODE data is set in step D124, and the process proceeds to step D141, and the outlier. If it is not a symbol, the process proceeds to step D125. Here, the out-of-order ACT matching check table is a table including all data that can be ACT (lower byte data of the command) in the case of an out-of-order symbol.

In addition, the ACT matching check address table at the time of deviation as shown on the left side of FIG. 173 is registered in the PROM 321, and in step D124, the address of the ACT matching check table at the time of deviation corresponding from the ACT matching check address table at the time of deviation To get and set. In the ACT matching check address table at the time of loss, the address that specifies the ACT matching check table at the time of loss (in this case, the start address of the ACT matching check table at the time of loss) is defined corresponding to the value of each MODE in the variable command range. It is a table. The ACT matching check table at the time of disconnection is shown on the right side of FIG. 173, for example, and in the case of the offset symbol, all ACT values (ACTION values) valid for the corresponding MODE value are at the beginning. It is registered in order from the address, and is provided for each MODE value. The ACT matching check table shown on the right side of FIG. 173 corresponds to the case where the symbol is out of alignment and the value of MODE is CBh (10.4 seconds normal fluctuation reach), and the value (CBh) of this MODE is used. All valid ACT values (02h, 03h, 04h, 05h, etc.) are registered in order from the start address (first row) of the table, and the check end code (check end code (last row) is registered at the last address (last row) of the table. -1) is registered.
Further, such an ACT matching check address table and an ACT matching check table are used for symbol types other than the out-of-order symbols ("2R probability variation jackpot symbol", "16R probability variation jackpot symbol", "11R probability variation jackpot symbol", and "11R normal jackpot symbol". The design ”) is also provided in the same manner, and is used in steps D126, D128, D130, and D132 described later in the same manner as in step D124.

Proceeding to step D125, it is determined whether the symbol type information loaded in step D121 is a 2R probability variation jackpot symbol, and if it is a 2R probability variation jackpot symbol, a 2R probability variation jackpot ACT matching check table corresponding to MODE data is set in step D126. Proceed to step D141, and if it is not a 2R probability variation jackpot symbol, proceed to step D127. Here, the 2R probability variation jackpot ACT matching check table is a table including all data that can be ACT (lower byte data of the command) in the case of the 2R probability variation jackpot symbol.

Proceeding to step D127, it is determined whether the symbol type information loaded in step D121 is a 16R probability variation jackpot symbol, and if it is a 16R probability variation jackpot symbol, a 16R probability variation jackpot ACT matching check table corresponding to MODE data is set in step D128. The process proceeds to step D141, and if it is not a 16R probability variation jackpot symbol, the process proceeds to step D129. Here, the 16R probability variation jackpot ACT matching check table is a table including all data that can be ACT (lower byte data of the command) in the case of the 16R probability variation jackpot symbol.

Proceeding to step D129, it is determined whether the symbol type information loaded in step D121 is the 11R probability variation jackpot symbol, and if it is the 11R probability variation jackpot symbol, the 11R probability variation jackpot ACT matching check table corresponding to the MODE data is set in step D130. The process proceeds to step D141, and if it is not the 11R probability variation jackpot symbol, the process proceeds to step D131. Here, the 11R probability variation jackpot ACT matching check table is a table including all data that can be ACT (lower byte data of the command) in the case of the 11R probability variation jackpot symbol.

Proceeding to step D131, it is determined whether the symbol type information loaded in step D121 is the 11R normal jackpot symbol, and if it is the 11R normal jackpot symbol, the 11R normal jackpot ACT matching check table corresponding to the MODE data is set in step D132. Proceed to step D141, and if it is not the 11R normal jackpot symbol, it is considered that the command is abnormal and the process proceeds to step D133. Here, the 11R normal jackpot ACT matching check table is a table including all data that can be ACT (lower byte data of the command) in the case of the 11R normal jackpot symbol.
Proceeding to step D133, invalid command information is returned and returned.

Proceeding to step D141, a loop process (repeated process) with steps D141 and D144 as loop ends is executed. That is, the operation of sequentially executing step D142 and step D143 by branching in step D144 is set in the ACT matching check table (one of the immediately preceding steps D124, D126, D128, D130, and D132). Repeat until the end of.

Here, in step D142, it corresponds to the address of the ACT matching check table (hereinafter, referred to as ACT matching check table address) acquired in any one of steps D124, D126, D128, D130, and D132 and updated in step D143 described later. It is determined whether the data (data of the corresponding row in the ACT matching check table) matches the value of the ACT separated in step D91, and if they match, this iterative loop (loop processing with steps D141 and D144 as the loop ends). The process proceeds to step D146, and if they do not match, the process proceeds to step D143.
When the process proceeds to step D143, the ACT matching check table address is updated to the next record, and the process proceeds to step D144.
Proceeding to step D144, it is determined whether step D142 has been repeatedly executed up to the last data of the ACT matching check table, and if step D142 is repeated up to the last data, the process proceeds to step D145, otherwise step D145. The process returns to D141 and the process is repeated. Specifically, in step D144, it is determined whether the data corresponding to the ACT matching check table address updated in step D143 is the check end code (-1), and if it is the check end code, it is assumed that the data is repeated until the end. The process proceeds to step D145, and if it is not a check end code, the process returns to step D141 and the process is repeated.

If any of the data in the ACT matching check table and the data of the ACT separated in the above-mentioned step D91 match by the processing of the iterative loop of steps D141 to D144, the process proceeds to step D146, and if not, the process proceeds to step D146. (If there is no matching data in the ACT matching check table), the process proceeds to step D145.
Then, in step D145, invalid command information is returned and returned as abnormal. Further, in step D146, the value of the valid command information is returned as normal.

In step D113 described above, the consistency between the variable command and the symbol type is determined based on the information returned in any of steps D133, D145, and D146.
For example, when the symbol command of the misaligned symbol is received in advance and the symbol type information loaded in step D121 is the misaligned symbol, the MODE value of the variable command separated in step D91 is CBh and the ACT value is. Assuming that it is 06h, since the data in the fifth row of the ACT matching check table of FIG. 173 is 06h, when the step D142 is repeated 5 times, the determination result of the step D142 becomes YES and the step D146 is performed. Proceeds, valid command information is returned, and the determination result in step D113 is NO (matching). Further, in the same case, assuming that the value of MODE separated in step D91 is CBh and the value of ACT is, for example, 01h, 01h does not exist in the ACT matching check table of FIG. 173, so that the loop processing is performed. No matter how many times it is repeated, the determination result of step D142 is NO, and when the final line is reached, the data becomes the check end code. Therefore, the loop processing is terminated and the process proceeds to step D145, and invalid command information is returned. Then, the determination result in step D113 is YES (mismatch). Further, when the value of MODE separated in step D91 is not in the variable command range (when step D122 is NO), the value of MODE separated in step D91 is in the variable command range (step D122 is YES). Nevertheless, if the symbol type information loaded in step D121 is not any of the symbol types (when steps D123, D125, D127, D129, and D131 are all NO), invalid command information is returned in step D133. The determination result in step D113 is YES (mismatch).
In this way, according to the variation pattern corresponding symbol determination process (step D112 described above) and step D113 described above, the consistency check is performed to see if the variation pattern command matches the stop symbol. Since the fluctuations to be performed differ depending on the type of stop symbol (the above-mentioned missed symbol, 16R probability variation jackpot symbol, etc.), check in advance whether the variation pattern command matches the symbol, and if it is not consistent. This is to prevent an abnormal fluctuation display effect from being performed without executing the above-mentioned steps D113a, D114, D115, and the like. It should be noted that the fluctuation patterns are not necessarily completely separated for each symbol, and for example, there are fluctuation patterns shared by the 16R probability variation jackpot symbol and the 2R probability variation jackpot symbol.

[Variation pattern classification processing]
Next, the details of the variation pattern classification process executed in step D113a in the variation system command process described above will be described with reference to FIG. 111.
When this routine is started, first, in step D361, it is determined whether the MODE data is a variable command, and if it is a variable command, the process proceeds to step D362, and if it is not a variable command, the process proceeds to step D368.
When the process proceeds to step D362, it is determined whether the ACT data is in the effective range, and if it is in the effective range, step D363 is executed to proceed to step D364, and if it is not in the effective range, the process proceeds to step D368.

In step D363, the fluctuation pattern check data corresponding to the MODE data is acquired. The fluctuation pattern check data is set for each MODE data of the fluctuation system command, and 0 is set as the fluctuation pattern check data for the MODE data that is not used in the model.
When the process proceeds to step D364, it is determined whether the fluctuation pattern check data acquired in step D363 is 0. If it is 0, the process proceeds to step D368, and if it is not 0, steps D365 to D367 are sequentially executed and then returned.

In step D365, the variation pattern type table corresponding to the MODE data is set.
In step D366, the fluctuation pattern type data corresponding to the ACT data is acquired based on the fluctuation pattern type table set in step D365.
In step D367, the fluctuation pattern type data acquired in step D366 is returned and returned.
When the process proceeds to step D368, 0 is returned as the fluctuation pattern type data and the data is returned.

Here, the variation pattern type table is shown in FIG. 178, for example, and is provided for each MODE data. FIG. 178 shows a fluctuation pattern type table C3 set when the MODE data has a normal fluctuation in the first half of 12 seconds, and a fluctuation pattern type table CB set when the MODE data has a normal fluctuation in the first half of 10.4 seconds. , The variation pattern type table CC set when the MODE data is 12.8 pseudo-continuous 1 variation is shown as a specific example. In these fluctuation pattern type tables, the fluctuation pattern type data is arranged in a matrix (matrix) corresponding to the upper data and the lower data of the ACT, and the rows are determined corresponding to the upper data 0 to 4 of the ACT. By determining the columns corresponding to the lower data 0 to F of the ACT, the fluctuation pattern type data is determined, and the size of the table is 5 rows × 16 columns. An example of the breakdown of fluctuation pattern type data is as follows. That is, 0: invalid data, 1: fluctuation without reach, 2: normal reach, 3: female reach, 4: female dance reach, 5: military commander reach, 6: military commander development reach, 7: face completed military commander development reach. , 8: Battlefield reach, 9: Face-completed battlefield reach, 10: One-on-one combat reach, 11: Face-completed one-on-one combat reach, 12: Gunyu reach, 13: Settlement reach, and so on.

In the case of the example of FIG. 178, for example, if the MODE data is the normal fluctuation in the first half of 12 seconds and the ACT data is 01h, the fluctuation pattern type table C3 is selected and set in step D365, and the fluctuation pattern type is selected and set in step D366. “1” (no reach) in 1 row and 2 columns of table C3 (position corresponding to ACT data 01h) is acquired as fluctuation pattern type data. The same applies when MODE and ACT are other data.
In this embodiment, the number of latter half fluctuation patterns (ACT data) is in the range of 01h to 4Bh, so the table has the above size (5 rows x 16 columns), but this is just an example. , A configuration may be more finely divided, or conversely, for example, a configuration in which the portions where the fluctuation pattern type data have the same value may be collectively divided into roughly divided configurations.

Further, as for the fluctuation pattern type data, in order to prepare a table of advance notice distribution corresponding to the MODE and ACT data in steps D270c, D270f, etc., which will be described later, which classification the fluctuation pattern instructed by the MODE and ACT data is classified into. It is data indicating whether it belongs. That is, there is this fluctuation pattern type data so that the system of the fluctuation pattern can be checked from the value of the command and the corresponding notice distribution table or the like can be set. This is because the rate of occurrence of notice changes depending on the type of reach and the like.
Further, the fluctuation pattern type table is a table for determining the fluctuation pattern type data as described above. Then, in this variation pattern type table, the variation pattern type data is 0 as shown in FIG. 178 where there is no combination of MODE and ACT data. Therefore, if there is no combination of MODE and ACT data, step D367 returns 0 as in step D368. Further, when 0 is returned in this way, it is treated in the same manner as, for example, normal deviation (variation without reach). If it is treated in the same way as a normal command, even if there is an abnormality in the confirmed command, the special figure can be changed for the time being, and there is an advantage that the player can not be anxious. .. However, if 0 is returned, it is usually not deviated, and for example, as a configuration in which it is determined that the data is invalid and returned in step D113b of the variable command processing, there may be a mode in which the variable start setting is not performed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the special figure from being changed in the case of a command abnormality.

[Variable effect setting process]
Next, the details of the variation effect setting process executed in step D114 in the above-mentioned variation system command process will be described with reference to FIGS. 112 to 114.
When this routine is started, first, in step D270a, all the effect distribution result areas are cleared to 0 (the data in all the storage areas related to the advance notice are reset to zero), and the process proceeds to step D270b.
In step D270b, it is determined whether the fluctuation pattern type data returned in the variation pattern classification process (step D113a) is reachless variation, and if it is reachless variation, steps D270c, D270d, and D270e are sequentially executed, and then the process proceeds to step D271. If there is no reach variation, steps D270f, D270g, and D270h are sequentially executed, and then the process proceeds to step D271.
In step D270c, the first half advance notice distribution group address table (for example, the table shown in the upper part of FIG. 179) corresponding to the model code and special figure type set at that time and the effect mode at that time is set. In addition, when proceeding to step D270c, since there is no reach variation and the symbol type is always an outlier symbol, the symbol type does not have to be particularly referred to in step D270c. The effect mode corresponds to the game mode managed by the effect control device 300 (in this embodiment, the game mode command is also sent from the game control device), which naturally differs depending on the model, but in this example, the basic mode ( In addition to K), there are, for example, a military congress mode and a decisive battle mode.

Further, the first half advance notice distribution group address table is a table for selecting the address of the first half advance notice distribution group table, which will be described later, and the data of the addresses of the first half advance notice distribution group table is arranged in a matrix. This first half notice distribution group address table is shown in FIG. 179, for example, and the data in each row of the table corresponds to the same MODE value (data that specifies the first half fluctuation pattern). When the fluctuation pattern type is non-reach fluctuation, each column of the first half notice distribution group address table contains a specific example (model code 1 / special figure 1 / no reach fluctuation / basic mode) shown in the upper part of FIG. 179. As shown in the above, data corresponding to the same number of holds (the number of start winning memories in which the variable display game of the special figure has not been executed) is arranged. That is, in the first half advance notice distribution group address table in the case of non-reach fluctuation, the parameter that determines the row is the value of MODE, and the parameter that determines the column is the number of pending numbers. On the other hand, when the fluctuation pattern type is other than the non-reach fluctuation, each column of the first half notice distribution group address table contains a specific example (model code 1 / special figure 1 / reach fluctuation / basic mode /) shown in the lower part of FIG. 179. Data corresponding to the same fluctuation pattern type is arranged as in the case of the out-of-order symbol). That is, in the first half notice distribution group address table in the case other than the non-reach variation, the parameter that determines the row is the value of MODE, and the parameter that determines the column is the variation pattern type.
As a result, in the case of this example, the lottery content of the advance notice effect (specifically, the appearance rate of each advance notice effect mode) that appears during each change changes according to the number of reservations only in the case of the change without reach. become.

In step D270d, as the address of the row of the first half advance notice distribution group address table set in step D270c, the address of the row corresponding to the value of MODE (the value separated in step D91, the same applies hereinafter) is calculated.
In step D270e, the address of the column corresponding to the number of reservations of the special figure type at that time is calculated as the address of the column of the first half advance notice distribution group address table set in step D270c.

On the other hand, in step D270f, the first half notice distribution group address table (for example, the table shown in the lower part of FIG. 179) corresponding to the model code, special figure type and symbol type set at that time and the effect mode at that time is set. ..
In step D270g, the address of the row corresponding to the value of MODE is calculated as the address of the row of the first half advance notice distribution group address table set in step D270f.
In step D270h, as the address of the column of the first half advance notice distribution group address table set in step D270f, the column corresponding to the fluctuation pattern type at that time (data returned in the fluctuation pattern classification process of step D113a, the same applies hereinafter). Calculate the address of.

Proceeding to step D271, the corresponding row and column in the corresponding first half advance notice distribution group address table based on the setting or calculation result of the immediately preceding three steps (step D270c, D270d, D270e or step D270f, D270g, D270h). The address of the first half notice distribution group table is acquired and prepared from the position of, and then the process proceeds to step D272. For example, in the case of the upper part of FIG. 179 (example of variation without reach), if the value of MODE is "C0h" and the number of holdings is 4, the first row (topmost row) is calculated in step D270d, and four columns in step D270e. The eyes (rightmost column) are calculated, and the address C0_1K (K represents the basic mode) of the first half advance notice distribution group table is acquired and prepared in step D271. Further, in the case of the lower part of FIG. 179 (example of variation with reach), if the value of MODE is, for example, "CBh" (normal variation reach for 10.4 seconds) and the variation pattern type is female reach, "CBh" in step D270g. The row is calculated, the second column from the left is calculated in step D270f, and the address CB_2K of the first half advance notice distribution group table is acquired and prepared in step D271. Further, in the case of the lower part of FIG. 179 (example of variation with reach), if the value of MODE is, for example, "CCh" (12.8 seconds pseudo-ream 1 reach SU4) and the variation pattern type is surface completed military commander development system reach, step. The row of "CCh" is calculated in D270g, the second column from the right is calculated in step D270f, and the address CC_4K of the first half advance notice distribution group table is acquired and prepared in step D271.

When the process proceeds to step D272, it is determined whether the address acquired in step D271 is undefined data, and if it is undefined data, the process proceeds to step D274 without executing step D273, and if it is not undefined data, step D273 is executed and then the step. Proceed to D274.
In step D273, the advance notice lottery process (described later) is executed for the first half variation using the first half advance notice distribution group table of the address prepared in step D271.
In the case of undefined data, step D273 (notice lottery process for first half variation) is not executed because the notice effect is not made to appear. For example, in the case of the upper part of FIG. 179, if the value of MODE is "C0h" and the number of reservations is 4, the address C0_1K of the first half advance notice distribution group table is acquired in step D271 and the advance notice effect is performed as described above. , Even if the same MODE value is used, if the number of holds is 1 to 3, it is set as undefined data and the advance notice effect is not executed.

According to the process up to step D271, the address of the first half advance notice distribution group table is selected, and the advance notice lottery process of step D273 based on the first half advance notice distribution group table selected in this way (first half change advance notice lottery process). Is executed. Here, in the first half notice distribution group table, as shown in the specific examples shown in FIGS. 180 and 181, the address of one notice distribution table and the address of the result area of one effect distribution result corresponding to the address. Is a table in which multiple tables are arranged corresponding to the same row. The advance notice distribution (lottery for determining the presence / absence and mode of the advance notice effect) performed for one variable display game is executed in a large number of different things depending on the variation pattern, and the rows of the advance notice distribution group table are executed accordingly. The number will be huge. FIG. 180 illustrates the advance notice distribution group table CB_2K when the address CB_2K is selected in the first half advance notice distribution group address table in the lower part of FIG. 179 described above. Further, FIG. 181 illustrates the advance notice distribution group table CC_4K when the address CC_4K is selected in the first half advance notice distribution group address table in the lower part of FIG. 179 described above.

Next, from step D274 to step D278, it is a process for drawing a notice effect of the latter half change. It should be noted that the latter half variation of the special figure variation display game varies depending on the so-called reach action (for example, a special result mode (combination of special symbols) in which the display area excluding a specific area among the display areas of multiple columns of the special figure is a big hit). It is a variable display (a state in which the display is stopped and the variable display is performed only in a specific area). On the other hand, the latter half fluctuation of the special figure fluctuation display game is the fluctuation display before the start of the reach action.
In step D274, the latter half notice distribution group address table (for example, the table shown in FIG. 183) corresponding to the model code, special symbol type and symbol type set at that time and the effect mode at that time is set, and step D275 is performed. Proceed to.
Here, the second half advance notice distribution group address table is a table for selecting the address of the second half advance notice distribution group table, and as in the specific example of FIG. 183, the address data of the second half advance notice distribution group table (FIG. In 183, the table names are shown and the address data itself is not shown), which are arranged for each variation pattern type. That is, in this latter half notice distribution group address table, the data in each row of the table corresponds to each fluctuation pattern type. Since the latter half advance notice distribution group table has the same configuration as the first half advance notice distribution group table illustrated in FIG. 180 and the like, the illustration of a specific example is omitted.

Proceeding to step D275, the address of the second half notice distribution group table is acquired and prepared from the position of the row corresponding to the fluctuation pattern type at that time in the second half notice distribution group address table set in the immediately preceding step D274. After that, the process proceeds to step D276. For example, in the case of the specific example shown in FIG. 183 (model code 1 / special figure 1 / out-of-order symbol / basic mode), if the variation pattern type is "02h" in the normal system (out-of-normal system), the second line. The address of the second half notice distribution group table is acquired and prepared in step D275. Further, when the latter half notice distribution group address table shown in FIG. 183 is set, for example, if the fluctuation pattern type is “01h” and there is no reach variation, the undefined data in the first row (top row) is the latter half notice. It is acquired and prepared in step D275 as the address of the distribution group table.

When the process proceeds to step D276, it is determined whether the address acquired in step D275 is undefined data, and if the data is undefined data, the process proceeds to step D278 without executing step D277. If the data is not undefined data, step D277 is executed and then the step. Proceed to D278.
In step D277, the advance notice lottery process (described later) is executed for the latter half variation using the latter half advance notice distribution group table of the address prepared in step D275.
In the case of undefined data, step D277 (notice lottery process for second half change) is not executed because, for example, in the case of non-reach change, it is not necessary to set a notice of second half change.

In step D278, the advance notice cancellation confirmation process (described later) is executed, and then the process proceeds to step D279. It should be noted that the advance notice cancellation confirmation process is a process of canceling the advance notice effect once drawn so that the advance notice effects that should not be duplicated are not selected from each other.
Proceeding to step D279, the basic BGM number (the song number of the basic BGM) and the decoration number (the number indicating the type of the production by the decoration lamp, etc.) corresponding to the production mode are set, and then the advance notice production setting process 1 in step D280. (Described later) is executed, and then the process proceeds to step D281.

When the process proceeds to step D281, it is determined whether or not the first half variation type determined in the processes up to this point (particularly steps D273 and D278) is normal variation. In, the process proceeds to another processing step (processing of various fluctuations when the first half fluctuation type is not normal fluctuation), which is not shown by the wavy line.
The first half variation type is a variation notice type that is distributed on the effect control device side in the same MODE (for example, 12 seconds first half normal variation). Further, "normal" in "normal fluctuation" means that it is not a special fluctuation such as so-called slip or shortened fluctuation. Further, in order to avoid complication, here, only the state of advance notice distribution when the first half variation type is normal (not slippery or shortened) is described in the flowchart (FIG. 113). Then, the processing of various fluctuations when the first half fluctuation type is not normal fluctuation is executed in the steps after the flow in which the determination result in step D281 becomes NO (omitted by the wavy line in FIG. 113). After executing the subsequent processing, the process proceeds to step D290. In addition, since the first half fluctuation can be normal in both cases of big hit and miss, each advance notice scenario data setting process (steps D286 to D289 described later) may be executed in any case of big hit and miss. be. However, since it is possible that the first half of the jackpot will fluctuate, it is not always the case that the setting process is for both purposes.

Proceeding to step D282, the notice type (data in the effect distribution result area to be described later; notice data) determined in the processes up to this point (particularly steps D273, D277, D278, and the same applies hereinafter) specifies the scroll notice. If it is not a scroll notice, the process proceeds to step D283, and if it is a scroll notice, the scroll notice scenario data setting process (explanation omitted) is executed in step D286, and then the process proceeds to step D290.
When the process proceeds to step D283, it is determined whether the notice type determined in the processing up to this point specifies the scroll character notice, and if it is not the scroll character notice, the process proceeds to step D284, and if it is the scroll character notice, the process proceeds to step D284. After executing the scroll character advancement scenario data setting process (explanation omitted) in step D287, the process proceeds to step D290.

When the process proceeds to step D284, it is determined whether the notice type determined in the processes up to this point specifies the PB notice, if it is not a PB notice, the process proceeds to step D285, and if it is a PB notice, step D288 is performed. After executing the scenario data setting process for PB notice (described later), the process proceeds to step D290.
Proceeding to step D285, it is determined whether the notice type determined in the processing up to this point specifies a flashback notice, and if it is not a flashback notice, it proceeds to step D290, and if it is a flashback notice, it proceeds to step D290. After executing the flashback advance notice scenario data setting process (explanation omitted) in step D289, the process proceeds to step D290.

When the process proceeds to step D290, it is determined whether or not the special figure type is special figure 2, and if it is special figure 2, steps D291 and D292 are executed and then step D295 is performed, and when it is not special figure 2 (that is, special figure 1). In the case), the process proceeds to step D295 after executing steps D293 and D294.
In step D291, a motion index that specifies the holding motion control table corresponding to the special figure 2 is calculated, and the motion index is saved in the storage area (holding index area) for storing the motion index.
In step D292, a motion index that specifies the motion control table for the fourth symbol (variation in special figure 2) is calculated, and the motion index is saved in the storage area (fourth symbol index area) for storing the motion index.
In step D293, a motion index that specifies the holding motion control table corresponding to the special figure 1 is calculated, and the motion index is saved in the storage area (holding index area) for storing the motion index.
In step D294, a motion index that specifies the motion control table for the fourth symbol (special figure 1 variation) is calculated, and the motion index is saved in the storage area (fourth symbol index area) for storing the motion index.

Note that FIG. 176 is an example of a motion list table stored in the ROM 321 of the effect control device. The motion list table is a data list of the motion table in which data related to a large number of motion tables are arranged in each row (each record). The data of each row of the list table for motion is the data related to one motion table. Each row of the motion list table has a number of frames, a number of motion commands, a motion table name, a number of behaviors, and a behavior table name as data items (data categories). However, this category setting is an example, and other parameters may be set. The contents of each data item are as follows.
-The number of frames (number of display frames) indicates how many frames of motion data (data constituting the motion table) are defined in the motion table.
-The number of motion commands indicates the number of commands defined in the motion table.
-The motion table name indicates the name (= address) of the motion table.
-The number of behaviors indicates the number (type) of behaviors used in the motion table.
-The behavior table name indicates the name (= address) of the behavior table that defines the behavior (processing address) at the time of the motion control.
If the number of behaviors is 0, the behavior table is naturally unnecessary.
Here, the behavior is a function for setting the operation of an object (display element). In this example, it is mainly used to change the image data (character data) defined on the motion table according to the situation.

Further, on the right side of the motion list table in FIG. 176, the display contents corresponding to the values of the motion index are shown. In this case, in step D292 described above, 62 is calculated as the value of the motion index that specifies the motion control table for the fourth symbol (variation in special figure 2). Further, in step D294 described above, 61 is calculated as the value of the motion index that specifies the motion control table for the fourth symbol (variation in special figure 1).

Next, when the process proceeds to step D295, the value of the special symbol stop symbol area is saved in the current symbol area. Here, the value of the special figure stop symbol area is the data set in step D354 described later. The current symbol area is a storage area for storing the symbol number of the current symbol to be displayed (a storage area containing the symbol number of the current symbol to be displayed on the screen at that time), and the value of this storage area (current). The symbol number) is updated one after another according to the fluctuation during the fluctuation display. In addition, the fluctuation display of the special figure starts the next fluctuation display (including the symbol display waiting for customers) from the stop symbol of the previous fluctuation display, but in order to surely perform this operation, the previous fluctuation display is performed in this step D295. The display stop symbol is saved and used for the next variable display. This is especially meaningful when a new variation command is received during the variation display. That is, when a new fluctuation command is received during the fluctuation display, since the processing of this step D295 is performed, the next fluctuation should not be started from the symbol displayed at the time of reception, but should be stopped at the previous fluctuation. It is replaced with a symbol and starts to fluctuate. In this case, if step D295 is not provided, there arises a problem that the player does not know which symbol should have stopped, starting from the symbol displayed at that time (when the variable command is received). However, in this example, due to step D295, the symbol that was supposed to stop due to the previous fluctuation is replaced and the fluctuation is started, and the player knows the previous stop symbol, so such a problem. Is resolved.

Next, after passing through step D295, the process proceeds to step D296, and it is determined whether or not the MODE data (data of the first half fluctuation pattern) separated in step D91 commands the normal fluctuation in the first half of 12 seconds, and the normal fluctuation in the first half of 12 seconds. If it commands step D297, and if it does not command the normal fluctuation in the first half of 12 seconds, the process proceeds to step D299. Here, "normal" in "normal fluctuation in the first half of 12 seconds" means that it is not a special fluctuation such as shortened fluctuation.
In this example, in the case of normal fluctuation in the first half of 12 seconds, there can only be a fluctuation pattern without reach action. In this case, since no reach action is performed, the time value of the latter half fluctuation is set to 0, and the fluctuation pattern is 12 seconds in total (that is, 12 seconds normal fluctuation; "normal" here means a fluctuation that is not reach. ). That is, the latter half fluctuation time value indicated by the ACT data (second half fluctuation pattern) separated in step D91 is 0 second fluctuation.

Proceeding to step D297, it is determined whether the ACT data commands no reach action (0 second fluctuation), and if there is no reach action, the return is performed after executing the reachless fluctuation setting process (described later) in step D298. If there is no reach action, it is abnormal and returns without executing step D298.
Proceeding to step D299, it is determined whether or not the MODE data (first half fluctuation pattern) commands 10.4 seconds first half normal fluctuation (“normal” here means that it is not shortened fluctuation or the like). If it commands the normal fluctuation in the first half of 10.4 seconds, the process proceeds to step D300, and if it does not command the normal fluctuation in the first half of 10.4 seconds, the process proceeds to step D308. In this example, in the case of normal fluctuation in the first half of 10.4 seconds, there can only be a fluctuation pattern with reach action. In this case, since the time value of the latter half fluctuation changes according to the effect content of the reach action, it is defined as a fluctuation pattern having a total of (10.4 + α) seconds. There are multiple types of ACT data (second half fluctuation pattern) for the same MODE, and this number varies depending on the specifications of each gaming machine.

Proceeding to step D300, it is determined whether or not the ACT data (second half fluctuation pattern) commands the fluctuation of the normal -1 deviation, and if the normal -1 deviation is commanded, the normal -1 is lost in the step D304. It returns after executing the setting process (explanation omitted), and proceeds to step D301 if it does not command the fluctuation of the normal-1 deviation. It should be noted that the normal-1 deviation is a fluctuation pattern that deviates with the normal reach action.
Proceeding to step D301, it is determined whether or not the ACT data (second half fluctuation pattern) commands normal +1 deviation setting, and if normal +1 deviation is commanded, normal +1 deviation setting processing (normal +1 deviation setting processing) is performed in step D305. (Explanation omitted) is executed and then returned, and if it does not command the fluctuation of the normal +1 deviation, the process proceeds to step D302. It should be noted that even if the normal +1 is off, it is a fluctuation pattern that comes off with the normal reach action.

Proceeding to step D302, it is determined whether or not the ACT data (second half fluctuation pattern) commands the fluctuation of the military commander -1. After executing the setting process (explanation omitted), it returns, and if it does not command the change of the military commander -1, the process proceeds to step D303. In addition, the military commander-1 loss is a fluctuation pattern that comes off with the military commander reach action.

Proceeding to step D303, it is determined whether or not the ACT data (second half fluctuation pattern) commands the fluctuation of the military commander development -1 out of order, and if the data of the military commander development -1 commands the out of order, the military commander development in step D307. -1 returns after executing the deviation setting process (explanation omitted), and proceeds to another step omitted by the wavy line in FIG. 114 unless the commander development -1 commands the fluctuation of the deviation. In addition, the military commander development -1 outlier is a fluctuation pattern that deviates with the military commander development reach action. Further, after the flow in which the determination result of step D303 becomes NO (the part not shown by the wavy line), another reach effect in the case of normal fluctuation in the first half of 10.4 seconds (for example, a variation display effect in the case of a big hit). The same processing as in steps D303 and D307 is executed, and if the ACT data does not correspond to any of the above, it is abnormal and returns.

On the other hand, when the process proceeds to step D308 through step D299, it is determined whether or not the MODE data (first half fluctuation pattern) commands 12.8-second pseudo-ream 1 fluctuation, and 12.8-second pseudo-ream 1 fluctuation is performed. If it is commanded, the process proceeds to step D309, and if it is not commanded, the process proceeds to another step omitted by the wavy line in FIG. 114. After the flow in which the determination result in step D308 becomes NO (the part not shown by the wavy line), the same processing as in steps D303 and D307 is executed for the variation display effect when the MODE data is other than the above. If the MODE data does not correspond to any of the above, it is abnormal and returns.

Proceeding to step D309, it is determined whether or not the ACT data (second half fluctuation pattern) commands the fluctuation of the military commander-1 deviation, and if the data (second half fluctuation pattern) commands the military commander-1 deviation, the normal-1 is removed in step D310. After executing the setting process (explanation omitted), it returns and proceeds to another step omitted by the wavy line in FIG. 114 unless it commands the fluctuation of the military commander-1. After the flow in which the determination result of step D309 becomes NO (the part not shown by the wavy line), another reach effect in the case of 12.8 seconds pseudo-continuous 1 variation (for example, the variation display effect in the case of a big hit is included). ) Is executed in the same manner as in steps D309 and D310, and if the ACT data does not correspond to any of the above, it is abnormal and returns.

[Notice lottery process]
Next, the details of the advance notice lottery process executed in steps D273 and D277 in the above-mentioned variation effect setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 115. This routine is a process of sequentially executing advance notice distribution (lottery of advance notice effect) using the advance notice distribution table in which addresses are set in each row of the advance notice distribution group table prepared in steps D271 and D275 described above. be. In the following, in the case of a change with reach, a case where the advance notice lottery process is executed in step D273 based on the advance notice distribution group table prepared in step D271 will be described as an example. The same applies when the execution is performed in step D277 (however, in the case of step D277, the advance notice distribution group table is prepared in step D275). Therefore, the detailed description when the execution is performed in step D277 will be omitted.

When this routine is started, first, in step D371a, the distribution table address (address of the advance distribution table) is changed from the specified row (the row specified by the distribution group address) in the advance distribution group table prepared in step D271. Is acquired, and the process proceeds to step D371b. Here, the distribution group address is an address indicating a row in the advance notice distribution group table, and when the routine of the advance notice lottery process is started and step D371a is executed for the first time, the distribution group address is used. It is the data that specifies the first row (first row) in the advance notice distribution group table. This is because the address prepared in step D275 is, for example, the start address (address that specifies the first row) of the advance notice distribution group table, and the address prepared in step D275 is treated as the initial value of the distribution group address. This is because it is a structure that can be used. The distribution group address is updated to the address data of the next record (next row) each time step D380, which will be described later, is executed, so that the specified row in the advance distribution group table starts from the first row each time. It moves sequentially in the direction of separation.

As described above, the advance notice distribution group table prepared in step D271 is shown in FIGS. 180 and 181 for example, but it is described on the right side of the table showing the tables in these figures. There is a notice distribution type corresponding to each line. In this way, each row of the advance notice distribution group table corresponds to the advance notice distribution type. Therefore, for example, assuming that the address CB_2K of the advance notice distribution group table is prepared in step D271, when the above step D371a is executed for the first time, the first row (notice distribution) in the advance notice distribution group table of FIG. A line whose type is "// A1; Character SU advance notice distribution") is specified (at this time, the distribution group address described above is data indicating this first line). Then, each time step D380 is executed, the designated line by the distribution group address is sequentially changed to the lower line in FIG. The notice distribution type is also changed, such as the third line (the line whose notice distribution type is "A3; character SU2 color pattern distribution"). Further, in the last row of such a notice distribution group table, although not shown, "-1", which is data indicating the last row, is set as the address of the notice distribution table.

Next, the advance notice distribution table will be described. As shown in FIG. 182, for example, the advance notice distribution table is a data table for one row corresponding to one advance notice distribution type, and the distribution values are arranged side by side in the figure. The address indicating the horizontal arrangement position (number of columns) of the specific distribution value of the advance notice distribution table is hereinafter referred to as the current address of the advance notice distribution table. In addition, since there are 1000 types of random number values from 0 to 999 in this example, the distribution values in this notice distribution table are set to be 1000 when all the distribution values in the same row are added. The distribution value of is a number in the range of 0 to 999.

Here, the first half advance notice distribution table C4_1 (basic mode / SP system off) shown in the upper part of FIG. 182 is, for example, the 11th row of the table of FIGS. 180 and 181 (the advance notice distribution type is "C4; advance notice distribution"). When is specified by the distribution group address), it is selected in step D371a (that is, in step D371a, the start address of the first half advance notice distribution table C4-1 is acquired as the distribution table address). That is, in the advance notice distribution group table CB_2K shown in FIG. 180 and the advance notice distribution group table CC_4K shown in FIG. 181, the first half shown in the upper part of FIG. The advance notice distribution table C4-1 is commonly used. That is, in this embodiment, in the case of the same distribution specification for the appearance ratio of a certain notice, one table is reused (shared) even if the fluctuation patterns are different. As a result, a huge amount of distribution data can be significantly reduced. However, when the stop symbols are different, the same table is provided separately. If the symbols are different, the appearance rate of the symbols cannot be changed significantly, so changes in the specifications (appearance ratio of each announcement, etc.) must be dealt with by changing the advance notice distribution table. However, if the advance notice distribution table is provided separately when the stop symbols are different in this way, such a change can be easily dealt with.

Further, the first half advance notice distribution table C5_1 (basic mode / SP system off) shown in the middle of FIG. 182 is, for example, the 13th row of the table of FIG. 180 (the advance notice distribution type is “C5; scroll color distribution”). ) Is specified by the distribution group address, it is selected in step D371a (that is, in step D371a, the start address of the first half advance notice distribution table C5_1 is acquired as the distribution table address).
Further, the first half advance notice distribution table C5_4 (basic mode / SP system off) shown in the lower part of FIG. 182 is, for example, the 13th row of the table of FIG. 181 (the advance notice distribution type is "C5; scroll color distribution"). ) Is specified by the distribution group address, it is selected in step D371a (that is, in step D371a, the start address of the first half advance notice distribution table C5_4 is acquired as the distribution table address).

That is, the advance notice distribution group table CB_2K shown in FIG. 180 and the advance notice distribution group table CC_4K shown in FIG. 181 have the same advance notice distribution type "C5; scroll color distribution", but the advance notice distribution. Different tables shown in the middle and lower rows of FIG. 182 are used separately. This is because the distribution rate (which is the distribution of the above distribution values and corresponds to the appearance rate of the advance notice effect) differs depending on the type of reach. That is, in the case where the distribution content for the appearance rate (appearance rate) of a certain notice is different according to the fluctuation pattern (for example, when it differs depending on the type of reach), different notice vibrations are made according to the fluctuation pattern. A minute table is provided.
The distribution table address acquired in step D371a is the start address of the selected advance notice distribution table (the address indicating the first column of the horizontal arrangement position of the specific distribution value), and this is the advance notice distribution. It is the initial value of the current address in the minute table.

Next, steps D371a and subsequent steps will be described.
After passing through step D371a, the process proceeds to step D371b, and it is determined whether or not the value of the distribution table address acquired in step D371a is "-1". Since the processing has been completed for all the rows (excluding the last row) of the notice distribution group table, it returns. On the other hand, if the determination result in step D371b is not "-1", the process has not been completed, and the process proceeds to step D375 after sequentially executing steps D372 to D374.

In step D372, the address of the effect distribution result area, which is the storage area, is acquired. That is, in the prepared advance notice distribution group table, the address of the storage area in the row specified by the distribution group address (for example, the data in the right column of the table in FIG. 180) is acquired.
In step D373, the distribution number is set to 0 (initial value).
In step D374, a process of storing a value randomly selected from 0 to 999 as rdm is executed.

When the process proceeds to step D375, the distribution value of the current address at that time is compared with the value of rdm, and if the value of rdm is equal to or greater than the distribution value, the process proceeds to step D376 and the value of rdm is changed. If it is less than the distribution value, the process proceeds to step D379.
Proceeding to step D376, the value obtained by subtracting the distribution value from the rdm value is set as a new rdm value, and then in step D377, the current address of the advance distribution table is increased by 1 (advance notice). (Update that shifts the current address away from the beginning by one column in the minute table) is executed, then the update that increases the distribution number by 1 in step D378 is performed, and then the process returns to step D375 and the process is repeated.

According to the processes of steps D375 to D378, the process of subtracting the distribution value from the value of rdm and updating the current address is repeated until the value of rdm becomes less than the distribution value. Then, when the value of rdm becomes less than the distribution value (that is, when the determination result in step D375 becomes NO), the number of updates of the current address (that is, the value of the distribution number) is the advance distribution. It indicates one specific position in the table (that is, one distribution result), so that the distribution result is selected based on a random number.

When the process proceeds to step D379, the distribution number corresponding to the number of times the current address is updated (that is, the number of times the steps D376, D377, etc. are repeatedly executed) is used as the notice data, and this notice data is used as the corresponding area of the effect distribution result area (that is, the number of times the steps D376, D377, etc. are repeatedly executed). Save to the address obtained in step D372), and then proceed to step D380.
When the process proceeds to step D380, as described above, the distribution group address is updated to the address of the next record (next line), and then the process returns to step D371a and the process is repeated from step D371a. ..
The effect distribution result area is an area in the RAM 311a that saves the effect distribution result such as the advance notice data.

In step D379 in the above-mentioned advance notice lottery process, various information (advancement type, scroll) corresponding to the effect content (effect pattern) specified by the advance notice data (value of the distribution number determined by the number of updates of the current address). Colors, the number of SU notices, etc.) are stored in predetermined storage areas (for example, the effect distribution result areas (A1), (A2), ...) In the effect distribution result area.
According to the above-mentioned advance notice lottery process, the distribution results are selected in advance for all the advance notice distribution types set in the advance notice distribution group table prepared in step D271, and the effect contents corresponding to the distribution results are displayed. Various designated information will be stored in a predetermined storage area in advance.

For example, when the advance notice distribution group table CB_2K shown in FIG. 180 is prepared and the designated line by the distribution group address is the 11th line (preliminary distribution type is “C4; advance notice distribution”), FIG. 182 The position of the start address of the first half notice distribution table C4-1 (basic mode / SP system off) shown in the upper row (the position of "none" (distribution value; 50) in the leftmost first column of the table in the upper row of FIG. 182 is shown. The address) is acquired as the distribution table address in step D371a. After that, when the random number value rdm generated in step D374 is in the range of 0 to 49, the "none" in the first column is, and when the random value rdm is in the range of 50 to 149, the "roll" in the second column is 150 to. When it is within the range of 299, the "roll character" in the third column is, when it is within the range of 300 to 549, the "PB" of the fourth column is, and when it is within the range of 550 to 999, the "flash" of the fifth column. Is selected by the process of steps D375 to D379 described above, and the corresponding distribution number is saved in the predetermined effect distribution result area (C4) as the advance notice effect distribution result. In this example, the distribution number (notice data) is any of 0 to 4 ("None" is 0, "Scroll" is 1, "Scroll character" is 2, "PB" is 3, and "Flash" is 4). Become.

The advance notice distribution process (notice lottery process) described above is the same for other advance notice distribution tables. For example, when the start address of the first half advance notice distribution table C5_1 shown in the middle of FIG. 182 is acquired as the distribution table address in step D371a, when the random number value rdm generated in step D374 is in the range of 0 to 599, When the "blue" in the first column is within the range of 600 to 999, the "green" in the second column is selected. In this case, the two columns on the right end side ("gold 1" and "gold 2") are shaken. Since the minute value is 0, it is not selected (that is, the appearance rate is zero), and in this example, the distribution number (notice data) is any of 0 to 1. Further, when the start address of the first half advance notice distribution table C5_4 shown in the lower part of FIG. 182 is acquired as the distribution table address in step D371a, when the random number value rdm generated in step D374 is within the range of 0 to 349, When the "blue" in the first column is in the range of 350 to 699, the "green" in the second column is selected, and when the "blue" is in the range of 700 to 999, the "gold 1" in the third column is selected. , The rightmost column (“gold 2”) is not selected because the distribution value is 0, and in this example, the distribution number (notice data) is any of 0 to 2.

Note that FIG. 182 is a very specific example of the advance notice distribution table, and there are many advance notice distribution tables for each type of hit / miss and fluctuation. In addition, since there are a huge number of other actual distributions in the advance notice distribution table (for example, distribution of cut-in advance notice, distribution of characters (character means character) of cut-in advance notice, etc.), the explanation will be given. For convenience, only the excerpt is shown in the figure.
In addition, the lottery process (steps D372 to D379) is executed for all the advance notice distribution types that may be performed (that is, all the advance notice distribution types set in all the prepared advance notice distribution group tables). .. Therefore, for example, in the case of FIG. 182, the color of the scroll is determined by the advance notice distribution table in the middle or lower row, but whether or not to perform the advance notice effect including the scroll effect (or what kind of advance notice effect is to be performed). Is based on, for example, the lottery result by the advance notice distribution table in the upper row. In other words, even if the lottery result by the advance notice distribution table in the upper row becomes "None" in the first row and the scroll production is not executed, the lottery process by the advance notice distribution table in the middle or lower row (in the case of scroll production). The process of drawing the color of the scroll) is executed.

[Notice cancellation confirmation process]
Next, the details of the advance notice cancellation process executed in step D278 in the above-mentioned variation effect setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 116. The details of this notice cancellation process are the process of canceling the notice effect once drawn before execution in some cases so that the advance notice effects that should not be duplicated are not selected due to the appearance of the effect etc. Is. Note that FIG. 116 illustrates only a part of the processing necessary for the explanation, and omits the other processing by wavy lines.
When this routine is started, first, in step F1, it is determined whether the effect mode is the basic mode, if it is the basic mode, the process proceeds to step F2, and if it is not the basic mode, the process proceeds to step F3.

When the process proceeds to step F2, the notice data saved in the notice distribution result area (A1) (for example, the effect distribution result area (A1) in the first line of FIG. 180) has a value “0” indicating “no notice”. If the value is "no notice", the process proceeds to step F6 without executing steps F4 and F5, and if the value is not "no notice" (that is, for example, the step-up notice of SU1 to SU5). B) Proceed to step F4.
Proceeding to step F4, the notice data saved in the notice distribution result area (C4) (for example, the effect distribution result area (C4) on the 11th line of FIG. 180) is a value “4” indicating a flashback notice. (That is, for example, is the "flash" in the rightmost column drawn in the advance notice distribution table shown in the upper part of FIG. 182), and if it is the value of the flashback notice, the process proceeds to step F6 after executing step F5. , If it is not the value of the flashback notice (that is, for example, in the notice distribution table shown in the upper part of FIG. 182, any one of "None", "Scroll", "Scroll character", and "PB" is drawn. For example, the process proceeds to step F6 without executing step F5.

In step F5, the notice data in the notice distribution result area (A1) is rewritten to the value “0” without notice.
According to the above steps F2, F4, and F5, when both the step-up notice and the flashback notice of SU1 to SU5 are drawn in the above-mentioned steps D273 and D277 in the basic mode, the above-mentioned step F5 is subsequently executed and SU1 ~ The lottery for the step-up notice of SU5 is canceled, and the execution of the step-up notice of SU1 to SU5 is canceled in advance. As a result, it is possible to prevent adverse effects such as deterioration of the appearance of the effects caused by the duplicated execution of both the step-up notice and the flashback notice of SU1 to SU5.

Next, when the process proceeds to step F6, the notice data saved in the notice distribution result area (A8) (for example, the effect distribution result area (A8) on the sixth line in FIG. 180) is a value indicating the background change notice. If it is the value of the background change notice, the process proceeds to step F7, and if it is not the value of the background change notice, the process proceeds to step F14.
Proceeding to step F7, is the notice data saved in the notice distribution result area (C4) (for example, the effect distribution result area (C4) on the 11th line of FIG. 180) a value "3" indicating the PB notice? (That is, for example, is the "PB" in the third column from the left drawn in the notice distribution table shown in the upper part of FIG. 182?), And if it is the value of the PB notice, the process proceeds to step F9 after executing step F8. , If it is not the value of PB notice (that is, if any one of "None", "Scroll", "Scroll character", and "Flash" is drawn in the notice distribution table shown in the upper part of FIG. 182, for example. ) Proceed to step F6 without executing step F8.

In step F8, the notice data in the notice distribution result area (A8) is rewritten to the value “0” without notice (value not executing the background change notice).
According to the above steps F6, F7, and F8, when both the background change notice and the PB notice are drawn in the above-mentioned steps D273 and D277 in the basic mode, the above step F8 is subsequently executed to draw the background change notice. It will be canceled and the execution of the background change notice will be canceled in advance. As a result, it is possible to prevent adverse effects such as deterioration of the appearance of the effect due to the overlapping execution of both the background change notice and the PB notice.

Next, when the process proceeds to step F9, it is determined whether the pre-reading advance notice is being executed at the present time, and if the pre-reading advance notice is being executed, the process proceeds to step F10, and if the pre-reading advance notice effect is not being executed, the process proceeds to step F14.
Proceeding to step F10, it is determined whether the notice data saved in the look-ahead lottery result area (V1) (the effect distribution result area corresponding to the notice distribution type V1) is a value indicating the continuous attack symbol notice 1. If it is the value of the continuous attack symbol notice 1, the process proceeds to step F13, and if it is not the value of the continuous attack symbol notice 1, the process proceeds to step F11.
Proceeding to step F11, it is determined whether the notice data saved in the look-ahead lottery result area (W1) (the effect distribution result area corresponding to the notice distribution type W1) is a value indicating the continuous attack symbol notice 1. If it is the value of the continuous attack symbol notice 1, the process proceeds to step F13, and if it is not the value of the continuous attack symbol notice 1, the process proceeds to step F12.
Proceeding to step F12, it is determined whether the notice data saved in the look-ahead lottery result area (W2) (the effect distribution result area corresponding to the notice distribution type W2) is a value indicating the continuous attack symbol notice 2. If it is the value of the continuous attack symbol notice 2, the process proceeds to step F13, and if it is not the value of the continuous attack symbol notice 2, the process proceeds to another process in the basic mode indicated by the wavy line in the figure.

When the process proceeds to step F13, the notice data in the notice distribution result area (A8) is rewritten to the value “0” without notice (the value at which the background change notice is not executed), and then the process proceeds to step F14.
According to the above steps F9 to F13, when both the background change notice and the continuous attack symbol notice (continuous attack symbol notice 1 or continuous attack symbol notice 2) are drawn in the above-mentioned steps D273 and D277 in the basic mode, after that, The above step F13 is executed to cancel the lottery for the background change notice, and the execution of the background change notice is canceled in advance. As a result, it is possible to prevent adverse effects such as deterioration of the appearance of the effect due to the duplicated execution of both the background change notice and the continuous attack symbol notice.
When the process proceeds to step F14, the combination of other notice effects to be canceled in the basic mode is confirmed in the same manner.
Further, when the process proceeds to step F3 through the step F1, the cancellation confirmation process corresponding to each effect mode other than the basic mode is similarly performed.

[Variation setting process without reach]
Next, the details of the reachless variation setting process executed in step D298 in the variation effect setting process described above will be described with reference to FIG. 117. In this embodiment, MODE = 12 seconds first half normal fluctuation is only a case of deviation. For this reason, the symbol generation flag, which will be described later, set in this routine is only an instruction for a symbol that is out of order.
When this routine is started, first, in step D311 it is determined whether the fluctuation first half type set in the previous processing (steps D270a to D273, etc.) is the ultra-shortening variation, and if it is the ultra-shortening variation, the reach is reached in step D312. A symbol generation flag with a deviation of +1 is prepared and the process proceeds to step D314. If it is not an ultra-shortening fluctuation, a symbol generation flag with a deviation of +1 is prepared in step D313 and the process proceeds to step D314.
It should be noted that the ultra-shortening fluctuation is an example of fluctuation in such a case where the sub-board may select to perform the reach movement even if the command from the main board is a normal fluctuation in the first half of 12 seconds. ..
In addition, the loose stitch means a state in which a plurality of symbols constituting the special figure are not reach or big hits (including a combination such as "776" if it is not a reach type combination).

When the process proceeds to step D314, steps D314 to D330 are sequentially executed and then returned.
In step D314, a stop symbol setting process (described later) is executed based on the symbol generation flag prepared in step D312 or D313.

In step D315, the address (name of the scenario table) of the scenario table corresponding to the ACT, the first half type of the change, and the look-ahead information is saved in the symbol change scenario table area. The symbol variation scenario table area is a storage area of the RAM 311a of the effect control device 300 that temporarily stores the address of the symbol variation scenario table to be used, and is a left symbol area, a right symbol area, and a middle symbol. The area for each symbol is further divided for 1st (early stage), 2nd (first half), and 3rd (second half), and there are a total of 9 areas (= 3) for storing the address of one scenario table. × 3). On the other hand, in the PROM 321 of the effect control device 300, a table for selecting a scenario table for symbol variation according to a command received from the game control device and the first half variation type (hereinafter, referred to as a symbol variation list table) is read-ahead information. And it is registered for each command (for each ACT data). FIG. 184 shows an example of this symbol variation list table (at the time of variation without loss reach). In step D315, first, the look-ahead information and the symbol variation list table corresponding to the ACT are selected, and then the setting pattern corresponding to the variation first half type is selected from the plurality of setting patterns in the selected symbol variation list table. , Saves the scenario table address of the selected setting pattern in the symbol variation scenario table area.

For example, in the case of FIG. 184, there are 8 patterns with indexes 0 to 7 (normal variation, right 3 variation, right 2 variation, left 3 variation, left 2 variation, middle agitation variation, group male variation, and ultra-shortening variation).
Then, when the first half type of the fluctuation is, for example, normal fluctuation, in step D315, the uppermost setting pattern in which the index value shown on the right side of FIG. 184 is 0 is selected, for example, for the 1st (early stage) of the left symbol. MS_LZ100 is saved in the area, MS_LZ300 is saved in the 2nd (first half) area of the left symbol, and NULL is saved in the 3rd (second half) area of the left symbol, and the right symbol and the middle symbol are also at the top. The address of the scenario table will be saved.
In the present application, the period in which the symbol starts to move within the first half fluctuation time is defined as the "early stage" (1st), and the remaining period within the first half fluctuation time is defined as the "first half" (2nd). Even with the same first half fluctuation time, the pattern starts to move, but there are cases where it scrolls down as it is or hopping up once (a kind of notice), so "early stage + first half = first half fluctuation" so that the movement does not become one. It is configured as. Then, the latter half fluctuation time is set to "second half" (3rd). Further, in this embodiment, in this way, the effect contents are set for each period in which the effect at the time of special figure change is divided into a plurality of time, and the entire effect at the time of special figure change is set as a combination of the effect contents of each period. It is a combination type that composes. This has the advantage of reducing the total amount of data that must be stored in the non-volatile memory for storing control data (PROM321 in this example). That is, for example, if all the tables are prepared for each effect content whose movement is slightly different, the amount of data will be enormous, but this combination formula will improve such a problem.

In step D316, scenario layer number 0 is prepared.
In step D317, the address of the background scenario table corresponding to the current look-ahead information, the game mode, and the like is prepared.
In step D318, the scenario data setting process described above is executed based on the data prepared in the immediately preceding steps D316 and D317.
In step D319, scenario layer number 1 is prepared.
In step D320, the left symbol scenario 1st table address (the address of the scenario table stored in the 1st (early stage) area in the left symbol area described above) is loaded and prepared from the symbol variation scenario table area described above.
In step D321, the scenario data setting process described above is executed based on the data prepared in the immediately preceding steps D319 and D320.

In step D322, the scenario layer number 2 is prepared.
In step D323, the right symbol scenario 1st table address (the address of the scenario table stored in the 1st (early stage) area in the right symbol area described above) is loaded and prepared from the symbol variation scenario table area described above.
In step D324, the scenario data setting process described above is executed based on the data prepared in the immediately preceding steps D322 and D323.
In step D325, the scenario layer number 3 is prepared.
In step D326, the medium symbol scenario 1st table address (the address of the scenario table stored in the 1st (early stage) area in the medium symbol area described above) is loaded and prepared from the symbol variation scenario table area described above.
In step D327, the scenario data setting process described above is executed based on the data prepared in the immediately preceding steps D325 and D326.

In step D328, scenario layer number 7 is prepared.
In step D329, the address of the fourth symbol scenario table (scenario table for the fourth symbol) is prepared.
In step D330, the scenario data setting process described above is executed based on the data prepared in the immediately preceding steps D328 and D329.
According to the routine (variation setting process without reach) described above, the scenario layer (in this case, scenario layers 0, 1, 2, 3, 7) that needs to set the scenario control data in the case of the variation without reach is performed. As the scenario table, for example, the combination shown in FIG. 184 is selected.

[Stop symbol setting process]
Next, the details of the stop symbol setting process executed in step D314 in the above-mentioned reachless variation setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 118. In this example, the special symbols for production are arranged side by side in three places (left symbol, middle symbol, right symbol), and each of these symbols has nine types of symbols (symbol numbers 0 to 8). ) Is illustrated.
When this routine is started, first, in step D331, it is determined whether the above-mentioned special figure type is a special figure 2 variation, and if it is special figure 2, step D332 is executed and then step D334 is performed, and if it is not special figure 2 (that is, it is not special figure 2). , In the case of special figure 1), the process proceeds to step D334 after executing step D333.
In step D332, the symbol number is saved in the special figure 2 fourth symbol in the special symbol stop symbol area.
In step D333, the symbol number is saved in the special figure 1 fourth symbol in the special symbol stop symbol area.

When the process proceeds to step D334, it is determined whether or not the symbol generation flag is prepared, and if it is prepared, steps D335 to D336 are executed and then the process proceeds to step D337. If not, the process proceeds to step D345. It should be noted that the symbol generation flag of the out-of-order pattern is prepared in step D313 described above.

Step D335 is a process of setting a symbol number randomly selected from nine types of symbol numbers 0 to 8 as the left symbol LX.
Step D336 is a process of setting a symbol number randomly selected from eight types of symbol numbers 0 to 7 as the right symbol rx.
Proceeding to step D337, it is determined whether the right symbol rx set in step D336 is a value equal to or greater than the left symbol lx set in step D335, and if the right symbol rx ≧ left symbol lx, the symbol of the right symbol rx in step D338 is determined. The number is increased by one and the process proceeds to step D339. If the right symbol rx ≥ the left symbol lex (that is, if the right symbol rx <left symbol lx), step D338 is not executed and the process proceeds to step D339.
By the processing of steps D335 to D338, the left symbol lex and the right symbol rx are randomly set, and the left symbol lex and the right symbol rx are always set to different symbol numbers. The reason for selecting from the range of symbol number 7 or less in step D336 is to ensure that the number can be increased by one in step D338.

When the process proceeds to step D339, it is determined whether the left symbol lex and the right symbol rx are a combination that can be a prohibited symbol, and if it is a combination that can be a prohibited symbol, the process proceeds to step D340. move on. Here, the appearance-prohibited symbol is a symbol whose appearance is prohibited as an out-of-order pattern. For example, in the case of specifications such as "357", "375", "537", etc., in which a combination of 3, 5 and 7 symbols is used as a chance eye, prohibition control is performed so that this chance eye does not appear when the chance eye is missed and fluctuates. When necessary, this chance eye is a kinsoku symbol. Steps D339 to D343 are processes for this prohibition control. This prohibition control is not necessary for models that can simply be disjointed, and the processing in the right column (step D344) is sufficient.
Specifically, for example, assuming that the symbols of the combination of 3, 5 and 7 are prohibited symbols, in step D339, the symbol numbers of the left symbol lex and the right symbol rx are different from 3, 5 and 7. If there are two or two, the symbol can be prohibited from appearing, and the process proceeds to step D340.

Proceeding to step D340, the cx value in which the combination of "left symbol lex, middle symbol cx, right symbol rx" is prohibited from appearing is stored in a storage area called nocx. For example, if the left symbol lx is 3 and the right symbol rx is 5, then if the middle symbol cx is 7, the combination of the special symbols will be "3, 7, 5" and the appearance will be prohibited. Therefore, 7 which is the value of the symbol cx in it is set to nocx.
After step D340, step D341 executes a process of setting a symbol number randomly selected from eight types of symbol numbers 0 to 7 as a middle symbol cx, and then proceeds to step D342.

Proceeding to step D342, it is determined whether the middle symbol cx ≧ nocx, and if the middle symbol cx ≧ nocx, the value of the middle symbol cx is increased by one in step D343 to proceed to step D354, and the middle symbol cx ≧ nocx must be satisfied. If so, the process proceeds to step D354 without executing step D343.
According to the processing of steps D341 to D343, the value of the middle symbol cx is always different from that of nocx, and in the end, the combination of "left symbol lx, middle symbol cx, right symbol rx" is not necessarily a prohibited symbol. It becomes.
When the process proceeds to step D344, a process of setting a symbol number randomly selected from eight types of symbol numbers 0 to 7 as the middle symbol cx is executed, and then the process proceeds to step D354.

When the process proceeds to step D345, it is determined whether or not the reach-1 deviation is set as the symbol generation flag. If it is set, the process proceeds to step D347 after executing step D346, and if it is not set, the process proceeds to step D353. The symbol generation flag at the deviation of reach-1 is set in steps D304 and D306 described above.
In step D346, a process of storing a value randomly selected from 10 kinds of values 0 to 9 as tmplnd is executed.
When the process proceeds to step D347, it is determined whether the value of tmprnd is 0. If it is 0, steps D348 and D349 are sequentially executed and then step D352. If it is not 0, steps D350 and D351 are sequentially executed and then step D352 is performed.

In step D348, a process of storing a value randomly selected from four odd-numbered values 1, 3, 5, and 7 as the number of the left symbol LX is executed. The description in the figure of step D348 is described using a programming language, "rand" indicates a function for generating a random number, and "mod" indicates an operation for obtaining the remainder of division. “Rand () mod4” is a value randomly selected from 0, 1, 2, and 3. In step D348, since the value of this "rand () mod4" is doubled and added by 1, the value is eventually selected from 1, 3, 5, and 7.
In step D350, a process of storing a value randomly selected from five even-numbered values 0, 2, 4, 6, and 8 as the number of the left symbol LX is executed.
In step D349 or step D351, the value of the right symbol rx is made the same as the value of the left symbol LX (that is, the right symbol is the same symbol as the left symbol) in order to make it a reach symbol.

Here, according to the processes of steps D346 to D348 and step D350, the odd-numbered and even-numbered appearance ratios of the reach symbols can be changed. In this case, since step D347 proceeds to step D348 only when tmprnd = 0, the appearance ratio of odd-numbered symbols is 1/10, whereas the ratio of proceeding from step D347 to step D350 (that is, even-numbered symbols). Appearance rate) is 9/10. This is done for the following reasons. That is, since there is a re-lottery effect, the reach symbols when a big hit is inevitably tend to be an even number. Therefore, in order not to lower the jackpot reliability of odd-numbered reach, the appearance rate of odd-numbered reach is lowered. Of course, the ratio of odd-numbered and even-numbered appearance rates does not have to be 1: 9. Further, in this example, although the mode of obtaining the symbol by calculation as in steps D348 and D350 is illustrated, the symbol may be selected by the random number and the data table.

When the process proceeds to step D352, the result of subtracting 1 from the value of the left symbol LX is set as the value of the middle symbol cx so as to be out of -1, and then the process proceeds to step D354.
When the process proceeds to step D353, the process of generating a combination of symbols (including the jackpot symbol) corresponding to the other symbol generation flags is executed, and then the process proceeds to step D354.
In step D354, the values of the left symbol lx, the middle symbol cx, and the right symbol rx set in the steps up to this point are stored in the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol of the stop symbol area, respectively, and then returned.

In addition, as described above, steps D334 to D352 are the processing in the case of the outliers and the case of the reach-1 outliers. Actually, there are many other types of stop symbols, but in order to avoid complication, these other types of processing are collectively illustrated in step D353, and the details are shown here. Illustration and description will be omitted.
Further, in the case of generating a jackpot symbol, for example, a method of determining only the left symbol and copying it to the middle / right symbol can be considered. In addition, there may be a case where the number is limited to "777", or a method in which a combination of stop symbols is defined on a plurality of tables regardless of calculation and one of them is selected by a random number is also conceivable.

Further, in steps D332 and D333 described above, only the outlier symbol of the fourth symbol is set, but in the case of a hit, the hit symbol of the fourth symbol corresponding to the symbol generation flag is set in step D353. There is. In addition, the symbol generation flag also has various setting contents such as "2R probability variation jackpot symbol", "16R probability variation jackpot symbol", etc. For example, in the case of the "2R probability variation jackpot symbol" flag, left middle right Just as the symbols (left symbol, middle symbol, and right symbol as decorative symbols) are "357", "573", and so on, there are multiple combinations as shown in Fig. 190. , Which combination is made to appear is determined by a random number. The color combination of the 4th pattern corresponds to the hit classification on a one-to-one basis. For example, the combination of "upper blue and lower blue" is a non-probable jackpot, and "upper blue and lower yellow" is a probabilistic jackpot. It corresponds. Although it differs depending on the model, the meaning of the color combination of the fourth symbol is defined in advance in the specifications of the gaming machine. In this example, there can be only one pattern of "upper white, lower white" in the outlier, and the color itself of white is used only when it comes off. Since the symbol numbers are only set in steps D332, D333, etc. of FIG. 118, for example, the symbol number = 0 is set for both special figures 1 and 2 in the case of being out of alignment, and the symbol number = 0 means that both special figures 1 and 2 are ". It is defined as a combination of "upper white and lower white". In the winning symbol, for example, the fourth symbol number is from 1 to 36 (for example, lottery is drawn from 1 to 18 at the time of probable variation, and lottery is drawn from 19 to 36 at the time of non-probability variation), and even if the same number is used, the color combination is special. It is possible that FIGS. 1 and 2 are different. For example, even if "upper blue and lower blue" in Special Figure 1 are not probable changes, it is possible that they are a combination of probabilistic changes in Special Figure 2. Therefore, the table of the symbol number and the color combination is separate in the special figures 1 and 2. In this way, there are many color combinations of the 4th symbol, and the fact that the meaning (definition) of the color combination is changed in the special figures 1 and 2 of the 4th symbol is whether or not it is probable that the form of the left middle right symbol changes. This is because it is difficult to distinguish even the color combination of the fourth symbol, just as it is obscured.

[Notice effect setting process 1]
Next, the details of the advance notice effect setting process 1 executed in step D280 in the above-mentioned variation effect setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 119. As the advance notice effect setting process 1, a case where a step-up advance notice is set according to a random number lottery result (result of the advance notice lottery process described above) is illustrated, but of course, the content of the advance notice effect differs depending on the model. The step-up notice is to give a big hit notice step by step while changing the contents of the notice and the reliability of the notice. In the drawings and specifications of the present application, "SU" means a step-up of this step-up notice.
When this routine is started, steps D381 to D390 are executed in sequence, and then step D391 is performed.

In step D381, the distribution result is loaded from the SU advance notice number area (effect distribution result area (L12)) of the effect distribution result area.
In step D382, scenario layer number 4 is prepared.
In step D383, the address of the SU notice scenario table corresponding to the number of SU notices loaded in step D381 is prepared.
In step D384, the scenario data setting process described above is executed based on the data prepared in the immediately preceding steps D382 and D383.

In step D385, the distribution result is loaded from the SU1 cut-in area of the effect distribution result area.
In step D386, the military commander data corresponding to the SU1 cut-in number loaded in step D385 is acquired and saved in the SU1 cut-in area of the motion index area (storage area for storing the motion index).
In step D387, the distribution result is loaded from the SU2 cut-in area of the effect distribution result area.
In step D388, the military commander data corresponding to the SU2 cut-in number loaded in step D387 is acquired and saved in the SU2 cut-in area of the motion index area.

In step D389, the distribution result is loaded from the SU3 cut-in area of the effect distribution result area.
In step D390, the military commander data corresponding to the SU3 cut-in number loaded in step D389 is acquired and saved in the SU3 cut-in area of the motion index area.
In steps D385 to D390, the data of the motion table for performing the assigned military commander character appearance is temporarily saved. The data saved here is not always used, and then, depending on the result of the determination in the cut-in character replacement determination processes 1 to 3 (steps D395 to D397) described later, the data is replaced with, for example, female character data. Is done. Also, here, if the number of SUs is less than the result (for example, SU1 is selected), the data of the character with the lowest reliability is saved in the upper SU area, but it is used as a result. There is no control.

When the process proceeds to step D391, it is determined whether the number of SU notices loaded in step D381 is 0, if it is not 0, the process proceeds to step D392, and if it is 0, the process returns.
When the process proceeds to step D392, it is determined whether the number of SU notices loaded in step D381 is 1, if it is not 1, the process proceeds to step D393, and if it is 1, the process proceeds to step D395.
When the process proceeds to step D393, it is determined whether the number of SU notices loaded in step D381 is 2, if it is not 2, the process proceeds to step D394, and if it is 2, the process proceeds to step D396.
When the process proceeds to step D394, it is determined whether the number of SU notices loaded in step D381 is 3, and if it is not 3, it returns, and if it is 3, the process proceeds to step D397.
Proceeding to step D395, the cut-in character replacement determination process 1 (described later) is executed, and then the character returns.
Proceeding to step D396, the cut-in character replacement determination process 2 (described later) is executed, and then the character returns.
Proceeding to step D397, the cut-in character replacement determination process 3 (described later) is executed, and then the character returns.

[Cut-in character replacement judgment process 1]
Next, the details of the cut-in character replacement determination process 1 executed in step D395 in the above-mentioned advance notice effect setting process 1 will be described with reference to FIG. 120. In addition, this routine is executed when the number of SU notices is 1, but when the number of SU notices is 1, only the first character appears in the step-up notice, so in this routine all the replacements are only replacements. No.
When this routine is started, first, in step D401, the distribution result is loaded from the replacement determination area of the effect distribution result area.
Next, in step D402, it is determined whether all the replacements are replacements based on the distribution result loaded in step D401. If all replacements are performed, step D403 is executed and then returned, and if not all replacements are performed, step D403 is not executed and returned. do.
In step D403, the index of the motion control table for cut-in SU1 is replaced based on the distribution result loaded in step D401.

[Cut-in character replacement judgment process 2]
Next, the details of the cut-in character replacement determination process 2 executed in step D396 in the above-mentioned advance notice effect setting process 1 will be described with reference to FIG. 121. This routine is executed when the number of SU notices is 2, but when the number of SU notices is 2, only the second character appears in the step-up notice, so some replacements are made in this routine. There are only three patterns: replacement (replacement of only the first person), partial replacement (replacement of only the second person), and replacement of all (replacement of both the first and second person).
When this routine is started, first, in step D405, the distribution result is loaded from the replacement determination area of the effect distribution result area.
Next, in step D406, it is determined whether or not the replacement is non-replacement based on the distribution result loaded in step D405, and if there is no replacement, a return is made, and if there is no replacement, the process proceeds to step D407.

Proceeding to step D407, it is determined whether the replacement is a partial replacement based on the distribution result loaded in step D405, and if it is a partial replacement, the distribution result is loaded from the replacement target SU determination area of the effect distribution result area in step D408. Then, the process proceeds to step D409, and if there is no partial replacement, the process proceeds to step D413.
Proceeding to step D409, it is determined whether the replacement target is SU1 (first character) based on the distribution result loaded in step D408, and if it is SU1, the index of the motion control table for cut-in SU1 is used as the distribution result in step D411. It returns after the replacement based on the above, and if it is not SU1, the process proceeds to step D410.

Proceeding to step D410, it is determined whether the replacement target is SU2 (second character) based on the distribution result loaded in step D408, and if it is SU2, the index of the motion control table for cut-in SU2 is used as the distribution result in step D412. It returns after replacing based on, and returns if it is not SU2.
On the other hand, when the process proceeds to step D413, it is determined whether all the replacements are replacements based on the distribution result loaded in step D405. If all replacements are performed, steps D414 and D412 are sequentially executed and then returned. Return without executing D414 and D412.
In step D414, the index of the motion control table for cut-in SU1 is replaced based on the distribution result loaded in step D405, and in step D415, the index of the motion control table for cut-in SU2 is similarly replaced.

[Cut-in character replacement judgment process 3]
Next, the details of the cut-in character replacement determination process 3 executed in step D397 in the above-mentioned advance notice effect setting process 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 122 and 123. This routine is executed when the number of SU notices is 3, but when the number of SU notices is 3, there are up to the third character appearing in the step-up notice, so there are various types as shown in the processing contents described later. In this example, there are two types of replacement patterns: normal full replacement and special full replacement (for story and premium, which will be described later).
When this routine is started, first, in step D421, the distribution result is loaded from the replacement determination area of the effect distribution result area.
Next, in step D422, it is determined whether or not the replacement is non-replacement based on the distribution result loaded in step D421, and if there is no replacement, a return is made, and if there is no replacement, the process proceeds to step D423.

Proceeding to step D423, it is determined whether the replacement is a partial replacement based on the distribution result loaded in step D421, and if it is a partial replacement, the distribution result is loaded from the replacement target SU determination area of the effect distribution result area in step D424. Then, the process proceeds to step D425, and if there is no partial replacement, the process proceeds to step D430.
Proceeding to step D425, it is determined whether the replacement target is SU1 (first character) based on the distribution result loaded in step D424, and if it is SU1, the index of the motion control table for cut-in SU1 is used as the distribution result in step D433. It returns after the replacement based on the above, and if it is not SU1, the process proceeds to step D426.

Proceeding to step D426, it is determined whether the replacement target is SU2 (second character) based on the distribution result loaded in step D424, and if it is SU2, the index of the motion control table for cut-in SU2 is used as the distribution result in step D434. After the replacement, the process returns, and if it is not SU2, the process proceeds to step D427.
Proceeding to step D427, it is determined whether the replacement target is SU3 (third character) based on the distribution result loaded in step D424, and if it is SU3, the index of the motion control table for cut-in SU3 is used as the distribution result in step D435. It returns after the replacement based on the above, and if it is not SU3, the process proceeds to step D428.

Proceeding to step D428, it is determined whether the replacement targets are SU1 and SU2 (first and second characters) based on the distribution result loaded in step D424, and if SU1 and SU2, it is for cut-in SU1 in steps D436 and D437. The index of the motion control table for the cut-in SU2 is replaced based on the distribution result and then returned, and if it is not SU1 and SU2, the process proceeds to step D429.
Proceeding to step D429, it is determined whether the replacement targets are SU2 and SU3 (second and third characters) based on the distribution result loaded in step D424, and if SU2 and SU3, the cut-in SU2 is used in steps D438 and D439. The index of the motion control table for the cut-in SU3 is replaced based on the distribution result and then returned, and if it is not SU2 and SU3, it returns.

Proceeding to step D430, it is determined whether the replacement target is the normal all replacement based on the distribution result loaded in step D421, and if it is the normal all replacement, the cut-in SU1 and the cut-in SU2 and the cut-in are cut-in in steps D440 to D442. The index of the motion control table for SU3 is replaced based on the distribution result and then returned, and if it is not a normal total replacement, the process proceeds to step D431.
Proceeding to step D431, it is determined whether the replacement target is for a story based on the distribution result loaded in step D421, and if it is for a story, motions for cut-in SU1, cut-in SU2, and cut-in SU3 are performed in steps D443 to D445. The index of the control table is replaced based on the distribution result and then returned, and if it is not for a story, the process proceeds to step D432.

Proceeding to step D432, it is determined whether the replacement target is for premium based on the distribution result loaded in step D421, and if it is for premium, motions for cut-in SU1, cut-in SU2, and cut-in SU3 are performed in steps D446 to D448. It returns after replacing the index of the control table based on the distribution result, and returns if it is not for premium.

[PB notice scenario data setting process]
Next, the details of the PB advance notice scenario data setting process executed in step D288 in the above-mentioned variation effect setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 124.
When this routine is started, first, in step D451, the distribution result is loaded from the dialogue SU area of the effect distribution result area.
Next, in step D452, it is determined whether the dialogue SU is SU2 system (SU2 system has one appearing character) based on the distribution result loaded in step D451, and if it is SU2 system, steps D453 to D455 are sequentially executed, and then the step is performed. Proceed to D459, and if it is not a SU2 system (that is, if the appearing characters are two SU3 systems), steps D456 to D458 are sequentially executed, and then the process proceeds to step D459.

In step D453, the distribution result is loaded from the dialogue SU2 pattern area of the effect distribution result area.
In step D454, the dialogue SU2 scenario address table (list table of the dialogue SU2 scenario table) is set.
In step D455, based on the distribution result loaded in step D453, the address of the scenario table corresponding to the dialogue SU2 pattern of the distribution result is acquired from the table set in step D454 and prepared.

The scenario table of the dialogue SU2 pattern for which the address is acquired in step D455 is shown in the upper part of FIG. 192, for example. In the upper scenario table of FIG. 192, the 1st to 4th rows (index numbers 0 to 3 shown on the right side of the table) are common parts, and the 5th to 6th rows (index numbers 4 to 5) have buttons. The operation unit when the button is not pressed, and the 7th to 15th lines (index numbers 6 to 14) are the operation unit when the button is pressed. Then, the motion index No. set as the operand on the second line. A specific example of the motion table corresponding to (70) is the motion table (Mdat_0070) shown in the lower part of FIG. 192. Here, the character of the white button registered by the additional 1 code in the motion table (Mdat_0070) is a character that glows white when the button is not pressed, and the character of the black button is also a character whose button is pressed. Indicates a character that is off while it is on. Further, according to this motion table (Mdat_0070), by alternately displaying each character at regular time intervals, an animation display in which a button appears or is dented is realized. In the motion table control, unless the motion is deleted, when the table reaches the bottom, it returns to the head (see the motion control process described later).

In step D456, the distribution result is loaded from the dialogue SU3 pattern area of the effect distribution result area.
In step D457, the dialogue SU3 scenario address table (list table of the dialogue SU3 scenario table) is set.
In step D458, based on the distribution result loaded in step D456, the address of the scenario table corresponding to the dialogue SU3 pattern of the distribution result is acquired from the table set in step D457 and prepared.

Then, when the process proceeds to step D459, the scenario layer number 5 is prepared and the process proceeds to step D460.
Proceeding to step D460, the scenario data setting process described above is executed based on the data prepared in the immediately preceding step D459 and the immediately preceding step D455 or D458, and then returns.
According to this routine described above, it is possible to perform a PB notice effect such that a special character appears by operating the PB (push button 9), or the character or the character's dialogue changes after the PB is pressed. ..

[Big hit command processing]
Next, the details of the jackpot command process executed in step D107 in the above-mentioned received command analysis process will be described with reference to FIG. 125.
When this routine is started, first, in step D151, the MODE data (data of the upper byte separated in step D91 described above, the same applies to steps D154, D157, and D160 described later) is produced by fanfare (when it becomes a big hit). It is determined whether or not the production) is commanded, and if the fanfare production is commanded, steps D152 and D153 are sequentially executed and then the process proceeds to step D163. If the fanfare production is not commanded, the process proceeds to step D154. ..
In step D152, a fanfare effect setting process (explanation omitted) for performing a fanfare effect according to a command is executed.
In step D153, the fanfare is set as the P machine state.

Proceeding to step D154, it is determined whether the MODE data commands a round effect (effect during a big hit round), and if it commands a round effect, steps D155 and D156 are sequentially executed, and then the step is performed. The process proceeds to D163, and if it does not command the round effect, the process proceeds to step D157.
In step D155, a round effect setting process (explanation omitted) for performing a round effect according to a command is executed.
In step D156, the P machine state is set during the round.

Proceeding to step D157, it is determined whether the MODE data commands an interval effect (effect between rounds during a big hit), and if it commands an interval effect, steps D158 and D159 are sequentially performed. After the execution, the process proceeds to step D163, and if the interval effect is not commanded, the process proceeds to step D160.
In step D158, the interval effect setting process (explanation omitted) for performing the interval effect according to the command is executed.
In step D159, the P machine state is set during the interval.

Proceeding to step D160, it is determined whether the MODE data commands the ending effect (effect at the end of the big hit), and if it commands the ending effect, steps D161 and D162 are sequentially executed, and then step D163. If it does not command the ending effect, it returns.
In step D161, an ending effect setting process (explanation omitted) for performing an ending effect according to a command is executed.
In step D162, the ending is set as the P machine state.
Then, when the process proceeds to step D163, the command received flag is set and then returned, as in step D210 described above.
The above is an example of jackpot command processing, and processing other than the above (for example, processing for production other than fanfare, round, interval, and ending) may be possible.

[Look-ahead design command processing]
Next, the details of the look-ahead symbol-based command processing executed in step D109a in the above-mentioned received command analysis processing will be described with reference to FIG. 126. The look-ahead symbol command and the look-ahead variable command are transmitted from the game control device to the effect control device when there is a start prize, but the transmission order is the normal symbol command and the variable command that are not look-ahead. Similarly, the look-ahead symbol command comes first and the look-ahead variable command comes later (see steps S398 and S403 described above). Further, the look-ahead symbol command and the look-ahead variation command are the look-ahead symbol command and the look-ahead variation pattern command in the above-described description of the game control device. Further, these look-ahead symbol commands and look-ahead variable commands are collectively referred to as look-ahead commands (or look-ahead commands).
When this routine is started, first, in step F21, it is determined whether the latest hold information registered in the above-mentioned step D250 (special figure 1 hold information setting process) is special figure 1 hold, and if it is special figure 1 hold, step F22. Is executed and then the process proceeds to step F24. If the special figure 1 is not on hold, step F23 is executed and then the process proceeds to step F24.

In step F22, the look-ahead symbol command received this time is saved in the special figure 1 look-ahead symbol command area corresponding to the number of special figure 1 hold.
In step F23, the look-ahead symbol command received this time is saved in the special figure 2 look-ahead symbol command area corresponding to the number of special figure 2 reserved.
Proceeding to step F24, the read-ahead fluctuation command reception waiting flag is set, then the command reception flag is set in step F25, and then the command is returned. Here, since the read-ahead fluctuation command reception wait flag is set by a command that forms a pair in which the look-ahead symbol system command and the look-ahead fluctuation system command are sequentially transmitted, the look-ahead symbol system is used in a later process (step F31 described later). This is to prevent the pre-reading variable command processing from being executed if the command has not been received first. Further, the command reception flag is set in order to invalidate the test mode transition command except when it is the first command, as in step D210 described above.

[Look-ahead variable command processing]
Next, the details of the look-ahead variable command process executed in step D109b in the above-mentioned received command analysis process will be described with reference to FIG. 127.
When this routine is started, first, in step F31, it is determined whether or not the look-ahead fluctuation command reception waiting flag is set, and if it is set, the process proceeds to step F32, and if it is not set, the process returns. If the look-ahead variable command reception wait flag is not set, the return is abnormal if the look-ahead variable command is suddenly received without receiving the look-ahead symbol command in advance, so the look-ahead variable command is returned. This is to destroy.

When the process proceeds to step F32, the process proceeds to step F38 after executing steps F32 to F37.
In step F32, the read-ahead variation command reception waiting flag is cleared in preparation for receiving the next look-ahead symbol-based command.
In step F33, the command received flag is set in the same manner as in step F25 described above.
In step F34, the look-ahead variation MODE conversion table corresponding to the number of holds of the symbol (special figure type) indicated by the latest hold information is set. For example, if the latest hold information indicates the special figure 1, the look-ahead variation MODE conversion table corresponding to the number of holds in the special figure 1 is set. The look-ahead variation MODE conversion table may differ depending on the effect mode. In that case, the effect mode at that time is also taken into consideration when setting.

Here, the look-ahead variation MODE conversion table is a table for converting the MODE (first half variation command) of the look-ahead fluctuation commands in the effect control device, and in the case of the special figure 1 / basic mode, for example, FIG. 198. It is a table in which the MODE values of the converted sub-internal look-ahead fluctuation commands are arranged in a matrix, the rows are determined by the received look-ahead fluctuation command MODE values, and the columns are determined by the number of holds 1 to 4. .. In this look-ahead variation MODE conversion table, those having the same value are treated as the same kind of first half variation in the look-ahead lottery. Further, "00h" indicates that it is a variable command (MODE) that is not sent from the game control device when the number is on hold. For example, in FIG. 198, the first column of the first row (the leftmost column in the top row) is "00h", so when the number of holds is 1, "E03h" (3. The look-ahead fluctuation command (variation shortened by more than 0 seconds) is not sent from the game control device. Therefore, if the value "00h" is acquired, it is abnormal, so the pre-reading lottery is not performed (see step F38 described later).

Further, in the look-ahead variation MODE conversion table shown in FIG. 198, the white part that is not filled (diagonally lined) is the first half variation that is not affected by the number of holds, and the value of MODE after conversion is the same even if the number of holds changes. Is. This is because, for the type of first half fluctuation corresponding to the white part, the special figure actually starts to fluctuate based on the number of holds at the start winning (look-ahead) when a certain start memory occurs and the hold of the start memory. No matter what the relationship between the number of times held is (that is, the same or different), the variable command sent at the start of the fluctuation is the same as the look-ahead variable command at the time of look-ahead. be.

However, in the look-ahead fluctuation MODE conversion table shown in FIG. 198, the filled (diagonal line) portion is the first half fluctuation in which the fluctuation is shortened according to the number of holds, so the number of holds is at the time of look-ahead (at the start winning) and at the start of the change. Is different and the command may be different. Therefore, the MODE data after conversion differs depending on the number of holds so that the handling inside the effect control device does not shift even if the number of holds changes due to this command conversion. For example, even if there is a start prize when the number of holds is 1, and the MODE value "E3h" of the 12-second normal change is transmitted as a look-ahead change command, the actual change is made when the number of holds changes to 3. The value of MODE transmitted from the game control device as a variation command to command is "C1h" (8.0 second reduction variation) (because the variation is shortened). Therefore, in the look-ahead variation MODE conversion table shown in FIG. 198, there are cases where the number of holds is 1 and the value of MODE is "E3h", and the number of holds is 3 and the value of MODE is "E1h" ("E1h" of the normal variation command. The value after conversion is the same as “F1h” in the case of (corresponding to “C1h”). By the way, the fluctuation shortening is realized by the processing of, for example, steps S545 and S555 described above by the game control device, and the time of the first half fluctuation changes depending on the number of holds when the hold starts the fluctuation, and the hold is held. If there is nothing else, it will be a long first half fluctuation, and if there are new prizes and the number of holds is large, it will be a short first half fluctuation to speed up the digestion of the hold. In this embodiment, the look-ahead fluctuation MODE conversion table as shown in FIG. 198 is used to convert the internal command (command after conversion) so that it can be handled in the same way even if the fluctuation time value changes. Therefore, due to this command conversion, even if the number of holds changes, there is no deviation in the handling inside the effect control device, and there is no deviation, so that there is an effect that the correct look-ahead lottery can be performed.

In step F34, not the entire look-ahead variation MODE conversion table as shown in FIG. 198, but only a specific column portion corresponding to the number of pending numbers in this table is set.
In step F35, based on the read-ahead variation MODE conversion table described above (the specific column portion set in step D34), the MODE of the converted sub-pre-reading variation command corresponding to the value of the received look-ahead variation command MODE is set. Get the value. For example, in the case of FIG. 198, when the hold number is 1 and the received MODE value is “E3h”, the corresponding 4th row “F1h” in the first column is acquired as the converted MODE value.

In step F36, for example, the look-ahead variation ACT conversion table shown in FIG. 199 is set. This look-ahead variation ACT conversion table is a conversion table only for collecting ACT values that can be handled in the same way as the look-ahead processing in the effect control device, and is converted for each ACT value of the received look-ahead variation command. It is a table in which the ACT values of the read-ahead fluctuation command in the sub are arranged, and is a table that is simply converted according to the ACT value (that is, the type of reach) regardless of the number of holds. The reason why the conversion of ACT (variation in the latter half) does not depend on the number of holdings is that the type of reach is not related to the number of holdings. For example, even in normal reach, there are types such as normal reach -1 stop off and normal reach +1 stop off, so if the value of the latter half fluctuation (ACT) is used as it is, the number will increase and it will be difficult to check. In this embodiment, the number of command data is reduced and the burden of the check process is reduced by converting the reach of the same system into the same internal ACT. By the way, the conversion of MODE by the above-mentioned look-ahead variation MODE conversion table also has the effect of reducing the number of command data as well as the ones that can be handled in the same way.

In step F37, the ACT value of the converted sub-internal look-ahead variation command corresponding to the received look-ahead variation command ACT value is acquired based on the above-mentioned look-ahead variation ACT conversion table (set in step D36). do. For example, in the case of FIG. 199, if the received ACT value is "03h", the corresponding "02h" in the third row is acquired as the converted ACT value.
In step F38, it is determined whether the values of MODE and ACT of the converted sub-internal look-ahead fluctuation command acquired in steps F35 and F37 are both 0 (“00h”), and if both are not 0, the process proceeds to step F39. , If either one is 0, it returns. If the command is normal (valid), it is converted to a value other than 0, and if either of the converted MODE and ACT values is 0, it is abnormal as described above. Therefore, the return is made here so as not to execute the look-ahead lottery process (step F42 described later) or the like.

Proceeding to step F39, the value of the sub-internal look-ahead variation command (the value of MODE and ACT of the converted sub-internal look-ahead variation command acquired in steps F35 and F37), which is the post-conversion command, is the number of holds indicated by the latest hold information. And save in the look-ahead fluctuation command area corresponding to the special figure type, and then proceed to step F40. The look-ahead fluctuation command area is a storage area in the RAM for saving the look-ahead fluctuation command in the sub, is provided according to the number of reserved start storages, and is a special figure type (special figure 1 or special figure 2). ), Different areas are provided for each number of reservations. If there is a sub-pre-reading variation command that is a post-conversion command, the pre-conversion pre-reading variation command (received from the game control device) is not particularly required for the pre-reading effect processing. The command is configured not to be saved in this example. As mentioned above, the sub-pre-reading variation command is converted so that the number of commands of the same type can be reduced together and this change can be absorbed even if the number of holds changes between the start winning and the start of the variation. It has become a command.

Proceeding to step F40, the look-ahead command consistency check is performed to check whether the look-ahead fluctuation command (in this case, the sub-pre-reading fluctuation command which is the converted command) is consistent with the look-ahead symbol command received in advance. The process (detailed later) is executed, and then the process proceeds to step F41.
When the process proceeds to step F41, it is determined whether the command combination is normal, and if it is abnormal, it returns. If it is normal, the look-ahead lottery process (described later) is executed in step F42, and then the process proceeds to step F43. In step F41, if the value of the invalid command information is returned as a result of the processing of step F40, it is determined to be abnormal, and if the value of the valid command information is returned, it is determined to be normal.

When the process proceeds to step F43, it is determined whether the pre-reading advance notice effect (pre-reading effect) has occurred (that is, whether it is to be executed) as a result of step F42, for example, by the executing flag (set in step F102 described later). If it does not occur, it returns, and if it occurs, it is further determined whether or not the effect is to start immediately in the next step F44. If it is not the case, the process returns without executing steps F45 to F47.
Steps F45 to F47 are processes for immediately starting the generated look-ahead effect. That is, in step F45, the scenario layer number corresponding to the selected look-ahead effect is prepared, in step F46, the address of the scenario data table corresponding to the selected look-ahead effect is prepared, and in step F47, step F45 and The scenario data setting process described above is executed based on the data prepared in F46.

Here, the "directing to start immediately" is, for example, a pending change notice. The hold change notice is a notice effect in which the icon of the hold display (display notifying the number of holds, which is the number of unexecuted start-up memories) is different from the usual one. In this example, the command related to look-ahead is sent at the time of starting prize (when there is a prize at the starting port) (see the special figure reservation information judgment process of S380), so it is necessary to change the icon immediately at the time of winning. It corresponds to "directing that starts immediately". In addition, as a look-ahead notice that does not correspond to the "directing that starts immediately", there is a notice that is performed during the fluctuation, for example, a continuous reach production or a notice that is given by a character that appears during the fluctuation. ..

[Look-ahead command consistency check processing]
Next, the details of the look-ahead command consistency check process executed in step F40 in the read-ahead variable command process described above will be described with reference to FIG. 128.
When this routine is started, first, in step F51, the look-ahead fluctuation command area and the look-ahead symbol command area corresponding to the number of holds and the special figure type indicated by the latest hold information (the special figure 1 look-ahead symbol command described in steps F22 and F23). From the area or the special figure 2 look-ahead symbol command area), the values of the look-ahead fluctuation command (the converted sub-pre-reading fluctuation command) and the look-ahead symbol command are loaded, and then the process proceeds to step F52.
When the process proceeds to step F52, it is determined whether or not the value of the look-ahead symbol command loaded in step F51 is a normal value (for example, whether or not it is within the range of possible values). For example, in step F53, the model code indicated by the look-ahead symbol command is set, and the process proceeds to step F54.

Proceeding to step F54, it is determined whether the model code set in step F53 is the same as the value saved in the model code area described above (see step D178 of the symbol system command processing), and if they are different, it is abnormal. Since there is, it returns, and if they are the same, steps F55 and F56 are sequentially executed, and then the process proceeds to step F57. Here, only the model code is checked, and the model code is not updated as in the above-mentioned symbol command processing (that is, the internal information is not rewritten depending on the model code indicated by the look-ahead symbol command).
In step F55, the symbol type information indicated by the look-ahead symbol command loaded in step F51 is set.
In step F56, the look-ahead command consistency check table corresponding to the symbol type information set in step F55 and the MODE of the sub-read-ahead variation command loaded in step F51 is set. The look-ahead command matching check table is the same table as the ACT matching check table shown in FIG. 173.

Then, when the process proceeds to step F57, a loop process (repeated process) with steps F57 and F61 as loop ends is executed. That is, by branching in step F61, the operation of sequentially executing step F58 and step F60 is repeated until the end of the look-ahead command consistency check table (the one set in the immediately preceding step F56).

Here, in step F58, the data corresponding to the address of the look-ahead command consistency check table (hereinafter referred to as the consistency check table address) set in step F56 and updated in step F60 described later (corresponding in the look-ahead command consistency check table). It is determined whether the row data) matches the ACT value of the sub-inward look-ahead fluctuation command, and if it matches, the process exits this repeating loop (loop processing with steps F57 and F61 as the loop end), proceeds to step F59, and matches. If not, the process proceeds to step F60.
When the process proceeds to step F60, the consistency check table address is updated to the next record, and the process proceeds to step F61.
When the process proceeds to step F61, it is determined whether step F58 has been repeatedly executed up to the last data in the look-ahead command consistency check table, and if step F58 is repeated up to the last data, the process proceeds to step F62. The process returns to step F57 and the process is repeated.

If any of the data in the look-ahead command consistency check table and the data of the ACT of the sub-read-ahead variation command match by the process of the iterative loop of steps F57 to F61, the process proceeds to step F59, and if not ( If there is no matching data in the look-ahead command consistency check table), the process proceeds to step F62.
Then, in step F62, invalid command information is returned and returned as an abnormality. Further, in step F59, the value of the valid command information is returned and returned as normal.
In the above-mentioned step F41, the consistency between the sub-internal look-ahead variation command and the look-ahead symbol command is determined by the information returned in any of the steps F59 and F62.

[Look-ahead lottery process]
Next, the details of the look-ahead lottery process executed in step F42 in the above-mentioned look-ahead variable command process will be described with reference to FIGS. 129 and 130.
When this routine is started, first, in step F71, it is determined whether the look-ahead lottery (lottery for the look-ahead effect) can be executed, and if it can be executed, the process proceeds to step F75, and if it cannot be executed, the process proceeds to step F72. Here, in the case of this example, there are two states in which the look-ahead lottery cannot be executed. First, the pre-reading lottery cannot be executed when the pre-reading notice effect is already being executed. The second is the state before the predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 8 rotations) when the effect mode is switched (the period from the time when the effect mode switching command from the main board is received to the time when a new effect mode command is received), that is, the effect. The look-ahead lottery cannot be executed during the preparation period when the mode is switched. If any of these two states is met, the determination result in step F71 becomes "NO", and the process proceeds to step F72.

Proceeding to step F72, the latest hold information described in step D250 is the special figure 2 hold (information indicating that the special figure 2 is on hold, and is registered in the special figure 2 hold information setting process of step D194). If it is not the special figure 2 hold, it returns, and if it is the special figure 2 hold, the process proceeds to step F73.
In step F73, it is determined whether or not the look-ahead effect for performing the interrupt effect in the special figure 2 is being executed. Returns after saving, and returns without executing step F74 unless it is being executed. Whether or not the pre-reading effect is being executed is determined by determining that the pre-reading effect is being executed if the corresponding pre-reading effect executing flag is set. The look-ahead effect executing flag is set in step F102, which will be described later, and is cleared in step D729c, which will be described later.
According to the above steps F72 to F74, even if the pre-reading lottery cannot be executed, the latest hold information is on hold in Special Figure 2, and if the pre-reading effect for performing the interrupt effect is being executed, the pre-reading effect information being executed is saved.

When the process proceeds to step F75, similarly to the step F72, it is determined whether the latest hold information is reserved for special figure 2, if it is not held for special figure 2, the process proceeds to step F77, and if it is held for special figure 2, the process proceeds to step F76. ..
In step F76, it is determined whether or not the effect mode is capable of pre-reading effect according to the special figure 2, and if it is in the effect mode, the process proceeds to step F77, and if it is not in the effect mode, the process returns. Here, the effect mode in which the look-ahead effect can be produced in the special figure 2 is not the basic mode in the case of the present embodiment and is not a big hit state.
According to these steps F75 and F76, in the case of the special figure 2 hold and the basic mode or the jackpot state, the pre-reading lottery (step F77 and later) is not processed and the pre-reading effect is not executed. However, in the case of holding the special figure 2 (that is, when the main hold to be drawn for the look-ahead is the hold of the special figure 2), the condition for not performing the look-ahead lottery is not limited to this aspect. For example, in the normal mode (when the game control device has a low probability and no time reduction), the look-ahead effect in which the special figure 2 is put on hold may not be performed. In addition, there may be a mode in which the look-ahead lottery for holding the special figure 2 is performed even during the basic mode or the big hit. In addition, this hold means the hold corresponding to the look-ahead command received this time (the start prize memory of the start prize that caused the look-ahead command received this time).

In addition, in the case of special figure 1 hold, the flowchart is such that the processing proceeds unconditionally from step F75 to F77, but in the case of special figure 1, the condition for the main board (game control device) to transmit the look-ahead command is It is restricted (in contrast, special figure 2 is not restricted). That is, in the case of the special figure 1, the main board transmits the look-ahead command only in the normal mode (it cannot be transmitted during the big hit or the high probability). Therefore, in the case of the special figure 1 hold, the normal mode is in effect. This routine (look-ahead lottery process) itself including step F77 and subsequent steps is not executed, and the look-ahead effect is executed only in the normal mode.

In step F77, since the look-ahead lottery (lottery of the effect mode of the look-ahead notice effect) is to be performed from now on, all the look-ahead control areas are cleared to 0, and the process proceeds to step F78. The look-ahead control area is a look-ahead lottery result area (effect distribution result area for the look-ahead effect) for saving the lottery result (sorting result) in step D397 of the advance notice lottery process executed in step F99, which will be described later. ..
Proceeding to step F78, it is determined whether the total number of holdings (the total number of holdings of Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2) is 1, and if the total number of holdings is 1, it is determined in step F79 whether the customer is waiting for a customer. If the waiting demo is in progress, proceed to step F83. On the other hand, if the total number of reservations is not 1 in step F78, or if it is determined in step F79 that the customer waiting demonstration is not in progress, the process proceeds to step F80.

According to these steps F78 and F79, for example, if there is a start prize during the customer waiting demonstration (total number of holds is 0) and the total number of holds becomes 1, the process proceeds to step F83 and the total number of holds is 1. However, for example, when the special figure 1 or the special figure 2 is fluctuating and there is a start prize from the state where the total number of holds is 0 and the total number of holds becomes 1, the process proceeds to step F80. That is, even if the number of holds is 1, there are those when the game is not in progress and those in which the number of holds is 1 while the game is in progress. Then, in the former case, since the continuous attack symbol notice described later is not executed (it is meaningless to execute because it is a continuous notice), the process proceeds to step F83, but in the latter case, the continuous attack symbol notice described later may be executed. To step F80. If the total number of holdings is more than 1, it is of course possible to give notice of the continuous attack symbol, so the configuration is such that the number becomes NO in step F78 and the process proceeds to step F80. Further, since this routine is executed in response to the look-ahead command transmitted from the main board at the time of starting winning, the total number of holdings cannot be 0 in step F78.

Proceeding to step F80, first, in step F80, it is determined whether the special figure is fluctuating, in the next step F81, it is determined whether or not it is before the end of the medium symbol high-speed fluctuation in the non-reach fluctuation, and in the next step F82, it is in the normal reach fluctuation. It is determined whether or not it is before the stop symbol appears (that is, before the stop symbol of the middle symbol slows down and tries to stop). Then, if the determination result of step F80 is NO, if the determination result of step F81 is YES, and if the determination result of step F82 is YES, the process proceeds to step F84. On the other hand, if the determination result of step F80 is YES, the process proceeds to step F81, then if the determination result of step F81 is NO, the process proceeds to step F82, and if the determination result of step F82 is NO, the process proceeds to step F83. ..

Here, the continuous attack symbol notice is, for example, a middle stop symbol (stopped middle symbol) for the continuous attack notice effect is displayed at the end of the first fluctuation, and the character (military commander) on the screen displays this middle stop symbol. After the video of cutting from top to bottom with a sword is played, the next second fluctuation starts, and then the character stops from the bottom to the top for the continuous attack notice effect displayed at the end of the second fluctuation. This is a continuous advance notice effect as a look-ahead effect that is continuously executed over a plurality of special figure changes such as the next third change starts after the moving image is played.
It goes without saying that such a continuous attack symbol notice is shown as an example of a hot look-ahead notice effect, and the mode of the look-ahead notice effect is not limited to this.

Then, in steps F80 to F82, it is determined whether or not it is possible to make the continuous attack symbol notice appear. This is because if the symbol to be stopped has appeared, it cannot be replaced with the continuous attack symbol notice. Therefore, the timing at which the continuous attack symbol notice can appear is firstly when the special symbol is not changing, and secondly, even if the special symbol is changing, it is a non-reach fluctuation or a normal reach fluctuation and before the stop symbol appears. There are times when. In step F80, it is determined whether it is the first timing among them, and in steps F81 and F82, it is determined whether it is the second timing among them. Then, if the timing is such that the continuous attack symbol notice can be generated, the process proceeds to step F84, and if it is not the timing, the process proceeds to step F83.

Even in the case of a start prize in the middle of fluctuation, "before the high-speed fluctuation of the middle symbol (when it stops in the order of left → right → middle) with no reach fluctuation ends" or "before the middle stop symbol appears with normal reach fluctuation" (Immediately before the end of the normal reach) ”, the continuous attack symbol can be announced. In that case, the process proceeds to step F84 through the above steps F81 or F82. However, even if the appearance at that time is normal reach, those that develop into SP (special) reach are configured to proceed to step F83, and only simple normal reach corresponds to the normal reach fluctuation of step F82.

Then, in step F83, since the continuous attack symbol notice cannot be drawn by lottery, the look-ahead fluctuation condition check table (continuous attack symbol notice not possible) corresponding to the production mode and the number of holdings at that time is set.
On the other hand, in step F84, since the continuous attack symbol notice can be drawn by lottery, the look-ahead fluctuation condition check table (continuous attack symbol notice is possible) corresponding to the production mode and the number of holdings at that time is set.

Here, the look-ahead fluctuation condition check table (also referred to as a look-ahead condition check table) is shown in FIG. 200, for example. The upper part of FIG. 200 shows a specific example (basic mode / special figure 1 / number of holds 1 / continuous attack symbol cannot be announced) of the look-ahead fluctuation condition check table (continuous attack symbol cannot be announced), and the lower part of the figure shows the look-ahead. Specific examples of the fluctuation condition check table (continuous attack symbol can be announced) (basic mode / special figure 1 / hold number 2 / continuous attack symbol can be announced) are described. As shown in the figure, the look-ahead fluctuation condition check table includes the change command comparison data (data for comparison with the look-ahead change command data) set for each hold and the look-ahead lottery group set for each symbol type. The addresses (names) of the address table (described later) are set in groups for each row. Then, in the column of the specific symbol type of a certain row, the look-ahead variation command matching the comparison data set in the row and the address of the look-ahead lottery group address table matching the specific symbol type are set. There is.

The look-ahead fluctuation condition check table is grouped for each row. Further, the variable command comparison data (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as comparison data) such as F200h represents a look-ahead variable command with MODE + ACT. Further, where the lower part of the comparison data is "00h", the ACT value does not matter (the ACT value may be anything). On the other hand, for example, "F502h" pinpoints that the MODE value is "F5h" and the ACT value is "02h". By the processing after step F85 described later, if it is special figure 1, the combination of all look-ahead fluctuation commands is checked for special figure 1 hold, and if there is a corresponding row in this look-ahead change condition check table, the winning prize is held ( Acquires the look-ahead group address table of the symbol column corresponding to the look-ahead symbol command of (latest hold), and performs a preliminary lottery. Repeat the check until the bottom of the table to see if a combination is found, and if there is no matching combination, the lottery will not be performed.

Further, "-1" is set as a data end code in the column of comparison data (column corresponding to each hold) in the last row of this look-ahead fluctuation condition check table.
Further, in this look-ahead fluctuation condition check table, there are two types, one in which the continuous attack symbol cannot be announced in step F83 and the other in which the continuous attack symbol can be announced in step F84. If the continuous attack symbol can be announced, the continuous attack symbol notice may be drawn in the processing after step F85, but if the continuous attack symbol cannot be announced, regardless of the result of the processing after step F85. , The data in the table is set so that the notice of continuous attack symbols will not be drawn by lottery. As described above, step F83 is executed because it is determined that the continuous attack symbol notice should not appear.

Next, after passing through step F83 or F84, the process proceeds to step F85, and the pre-reading variation in the sub of all hold (four hold upper limit values) of the special figure type (special figure 1 or special figure 2) indicated by the latest hold information. Load the command and proceed to step F86. In this step F85, if the latest hold information is, for example, special figure 1, the command for all hold of special figure 1 is read. If you load a command for the number of holds that are not held, "0" will be retrieved, but this data will not be used.
In step F86, the number of loops is set to the initial value of "1" (corresponding to hold 1), and then the process proceeds to step F87. Since the number of loops is updated by +1 in step F94 described later, it corresponds to the number of times the process is repeated by returning to step F87 through step F95 described later. For example, when the number of holds is 2, the processes from steps F87 to F90, which will be described later, are repeated for the maximum number of holds (1st hold 1 and 2nd hold 2), and the same process is repeated up to 2 times in the end. , The number of repetitions at that time is the number of loops. The value of the number of loops corresponds to the order of holding to be checked, such as the look-ahead fluctuation command of hold 1 in the first loop and the look-ahead fluctuation command of hold 2 in the second loop.
Here, the notations such as "hold 1" and "hold 2" usually hold up to four special figure holds (starting prize memory in which the special figure variable display game has not been executed). It is a name for distinguishing and expressing a plurality of start-up prize memories, and the order of start-up prizes is not particularly limited in this routine.

In step F87, the fluctuation command comparison data set at the row and column positions corresponding to the check table address in the look-ahead fluctuation condition check table (hereinafter referred to as the look-ahead fluctuation condition check table) set in step F83 or F84. Is acquired, and the process proceeds to step F88. For example, when step F87 is executed for the first time after the look-ahead fluctuation condition check table shown in the lower part of FIG. Since the columns are set, "F200h", which is the comparison data of the first column (column of hold 1) in the first row, is acquired in step F87. The check table address specifies the position (in which row and column) in the look-ahead fluctuation condition check table. The column specified by this check table address is the column of the hold of the determination target in steps F88 and F89 described later (hereinafter referred to as the target hold), and this target hold corresponds to the number of loops (that is, if the number of loops is 1). For example, the target hold is hold 1, if the number of loops is 2, the target hold is hold 2, and so on). The row of the look-ahead fluctuation condition check table specified by this check table address is referred to as a designated row below.

Proceeding to step F88, it is determined whether the MODE value of the sub-pre-reading variation command of the target hold loaded in step F85 and the MODE value of the comparison data acquired in step F87 match, and if they match, the process proceeds to step F89. If they do not match, the process proceeds to step F91.
In step F89, it is determined whether or not the ACT value of the comparison data acquired in step F87 is 0 (that is, whether or not it is "00h"), and if it is 0, the ACT value does not matter. The process proceeds to step F93 without executing, and if it is not 0, the process proceeds to step F90 to check the value of ACT.
In step F90, it is determined whether or not the ACT value of the sub-pre-reading variation command of the target hold loaded in step F85 and the ACT value of the comparison data acquired in step F87 match, and if they match, the process proceeds to step F93. If they do not match, the process proceeds to step F91.
When the determination result of step F88 or F90 is NO (mismatch), the process proceeds to step F91 because any of the pending sub-internal look-ahead fluctuation commands does not match the data of the target row in the look-ahead fluctuation condition check table. Since it was determined that the specified line does not match, the specified line is changed to the next line and checked, or if it is the last line, there is no matching line, so the process ends (returns). Is.

Therefore, when the process proceeds to step F91, the check table address is updated to the address of the next line (the line next to the look-ahead fluctuation condition check table, the line one line below in FIG. 200), and then the check table after the update in step F92. It is determined whether the data end code "-1" is set in the row of the look-ahead fluctuation condition check table specified by the address, and if it is set, it returns, and if it is not set, it returns to step F86 and from there. Repeat the process.

On the other hand, when the process proceeds to step F93, it is determined whether the current number of holds (for example, the latest number of holds of special figure 1 set in step D252 in the case of special figure 1) matches the number of loops at that time, and if they do not match. If there is a match, the process proceeds to step F96, and if there is a match, the process proceeds to step F94.
Then, when the process proceeds to step F94, an update that increases the number of loops by 1 is executed, and then in step F95, the check table address is set to the next column (the next column of the look-ahead fluctuation condition check table, the right column by one column in FIG. 200). ), Then the process returns to step F87 and the process is repeated from there. When step F95 is executed, the target hold is changed to the next hold, for example, from hold 1 to hold 2, or from hold 2 to hold 3.

Proceeding to step F93 through step F89 or F90 is when the comparison data of the target hold column of the specified row and the value of the sub-pre-reading variation command of the target hold match (however, when the ACT value of the comparison data is 0). Is the case where the ACT value of the sub-pre-reading variation command is arbitrary), so in order to determine whether the same check processing (steps F87 to F90) needs to be repeatedly executed for the next hold, step F93. Is used to determine whether the number of loops is the current number of holds, which is the maximum value. Then, if the number of loops is the current number of holds in step F93, the check is completed for all holds (hold 1 and hold 2 in the case of hold number 2 as shown in the lower part of FIG. 200), and the check is completed. As a result, it means that there is a line (hereinafter referred to as a matching line) that matches all the pending sub-internal look-ahead variation commands, so that the process proceeds to step F96 in order to draw a lottery for the look-ahead notice effect. On the other hand, if the number of loops is not the current number of holds in step F93, the check has not been completed for all holds, so steps F94 and F95 are updated, the process returns to step F87, and processing is performed from there. repeat. Therefore, assuming that the upper limit of the hold of the start winning memory is 4, the maximum value of the number of times to return to step F87 (that is, the number of loops) is 4. However, as a modification, a mode in which the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 may be combined into a maximum of eight loops may be used.

As described above, according to the processes of steps F85 to F95 described above, each hold is supported in the look-ahead fluctuation condition check table (the look-ahead fluctuation condition check table) set in either step F83 or F84. There is a line in which the comparison data matches for each hold for all the read-ahead fluctuation commands in the subs stored in (however, when the ACT value of the comparison data is 0, the ACT value of the command does not matter). It is checked whether it exists, and if there is a matching line, the process proceeds to step F96, and a pre-reading notice lottery described later is performed. Then, when proceeding to step F96 in this way, it is a case where it is confirmed that all the fluctuations of the hold can be read ahead of the main hold, and the look-ahead fluctuation condition check is performed so that the confirmation can be obtained by such processing. The data of each row is set in the table, and different ones are registered in advance for each condition such as the effect mode, the number of holds, and whether or not the continuous attack symbol notice is possible.

Next, when the process proceeds to step F96, the data in the column corresponding to the model code and the look-ahead symbol command of the latest hold (that is, the main hold) from the matching row of the look-ahead fluctuation condition check table (address of the look-ahead lottery group address table). Is acquired, and the process proceeds to step F97. Here, the look-ahead lottery group address table is illustrated in the upper part of FIG. 201, for example, and the address of the look-ahead lottery group table (described later) is used as the ACT value (converted value) of the look-ahead variation command in the sub. It is arranged in correspondence. Then, for example, the look-ahead fluctuation condition check table is shown in the lower part of FIG. 200, the value of the read-ahead fluctuation command MODE in the sub of hold 1 is "F2", and the value of the same command MODE of hold 2 is "F5". If the column corresponding to the look-ahead symbol command of this hold is the column of "missing symbol", the second row of the table in the lower row of FIG. 200 becomes the conforming row, and in the above step F96, the column corresponds to the lower row of FIG. 200. The data "HazT12KR_1" in the shaded area is acquired in step F96 as the address of the look-ahead lottery group address table. In the lower table of FIG. 200, since the data is the same from the first row to the sixth row in the column of the same "outlier symbol", all the parts of the same data are shaded (filled). Further, the look-ahead lottery group address table specified by the address data “HazT12KR_1” in the shaded area is the table shown in the upper part of FIG. 201.

In step F97, in the look-ahead lottery group address table whose address was acquired in step F96, the address of the look-ahead lottery group table in the row corresponding to the ACT value (converted value) of the pre-reading variation command in the sub of this hold is set. Acquire and proceed to step F98. For example, when the acquired look-ahead lottery group address table is shown in the upper part of FIG. 201 and the value of the ACT (value after conversion) is "04h", a diagonal line is provided in the upper part of FIG. The address "V1_Haz_SP2_KR" of the look-ahead lottery group table in the fourth row is acquired in the above step F98.
The look-ahead lottery group table "V1_Haz_SP2_KR" is, for example, the table shown in the middle of FIG. 201. As described above, in the look-ahead lottery group table, the address of one look-ahead notice lottery table and the address of one look-ahead lottery result area corresponding to the address are in the same row as in the table shown in FIG. It is a table in which a plurality of tables are arranged corresponding to. Here, the pre-reading advance notice lottery table is a table similar to the advance notice distribution table shown in FIG. 182 (a kind of advance notice distribution table), and is shown in the lower part of FIG. 201, for example. The look-ahead notice lottery table shown in the lower part of FIG. 201 is a table "V1" and "V2" in which addresses are set in the first row and the second row of the look-ahead lottery group table shown in the middle part of FIG. 201, respectively.

Next, in step F98, it is determined whether the data of the address acquired in step F97 is undefined, and if it is not undefined, the process proceeds to step F99 to perform the advance notice lottery process. Is not performed, so the process proceeds to step F100 without executing step F99.
When the process proceeds to step F99, the advance notice lottery process is performed based on the pre-reading lottery group table of the address acquired in step F97, and then the process proceeds to step F100. As the advance notice lottery process performed in step F99, the same routine (shown in FIG. 115) as in steps D273 and D277 described above is executed. The above-mentioned step D273 and the like are performed at the start of fluctuation (when a normal fluctuation command that is not pre-reading is received), whereas this step F99 is performed at the time of starting winning (when receiving a look-ahead command accompanying the starting winning). It is said.

When the process proceeds to step F100, it is determined whether to execute the look-ahead notice (or called the look-ahead effect, the look-ahead notice effect, etc.). If "no notice" is drawn in step F99, or if the data acquired in step F97 is undefined and the process proceeds from step F98 to F100, it is determined that the look-ahead notice is not executed in step F100. In other cases, it is determined that the pre-reading notice is executed.
In step F101, the number of times of pre-reading execution (number of times of pre-reading effect) is set based on the latest hold information. For example, if the number of holds is 4, it is set to 4 times, if the number of holds is 3, it is set to 3 times, and so on. This look-ahead effect number is updated in step D117 described above, and is used in step D729b described later.
In step F102, the determined look-ahead effect executing flag (look-ahead effect executing flag) is set. The pre-reading effect executing flag may include not only information on whether or not the pre-reading effect is executed, but also information on which the type of the pre-reading effect can be determined. Further, the pre-reading effect executing flag is cleared in step D729c described later.

[Test mode command processing]
Next, the details of the test mode command processing executed in step D109c in the above-mentioned received command analysis processing will be described with reference to FIG. 131. As described above, this routine is executed when a test mode command is received. Here, the description will be made with reference to the state transition diagram of the test mode shown in FIG. 202.

The test mode is an operation mode in the effect control device, and as described above, various test operations are executed to confirm whether the device controlled by the effect control device operates normally at the time of shipment from the factory and at the time of development. It is a mode to do. Connect the test mode control device to the effect control device instead of the commercial game control device, and send the test mode command dedicated to the test mode, which is not used during normal games, from the test mode control device to the effect control device. As a result, the mode is entered and various test operations are executed. Since this test mode is for checking the operation before shipping, it is meaningless unless it is executed by the control ROM (program) of the actual machine itself, so it is a mode built in as a hidden mode. There is. Since no test mode command is incorporated in the program of the game control device of the game machine on the market, a general player does not see the operation of this mode. In addition, once the test mode is entered, it cannot be returned to the normal game mode unless the power is turned on again.

When this test mode command processing routine is started, first, in step F111, it is determined whether the value of MODE separated in step D91 is the data for instructing the test mode transition (test mode transition command data). If the data commands the transition to the test mode, the process proceeds to step F112. If the data does not command the transition to the test mode, the process proceeds to step F115.

Proceeding to step F112, it is determined whether the command received this time is the first command after the power is turned on, and if it is not the first command, it does not shift to the test mode, so it returns, and if it is the first command, it should shift to the test mode. After executing steps F113 and F114 in sequence, the process returns. In step F112, if the above-mentioned command reception flag is set, it is determined that it is not the first command, and if it is not set, it is determined that it is the first command.
In step F113, the command received flag is set, and then in step F114, the test mode transition flag indicating the transition to the test mode is set. Here, step F113 is a process for not repeating the same process when the command for instructing the test mode transition (test mode transition command) is received again. Further, the test mode transition flag is a flag for executing the process of shifting to the test mode in the test mode process (step D23a) in the main routine (see step F126 described later).
According to the above steps F111 to F114, when the test mode transition command is received as the first command after the power is turned on, the state transition indicated by the arrow T1 in FIG. 202 (that is, the transition to the test mode immediately after the power is turned on) occurs. It will be realized.

On the other hand, when the process proceeds to step F115, whether or not the test mode is being executed (that is, whether or not the mode is shifted to the test mode) is determined by the test mode executing flag described later, and is being executed (test mode executing flag). If is set), it is further determined whether the command received this time is a normal command in step F116, and if it is a normal command, the command received this time is saved in the command buffer for test mode in step F117. Then return.
Then, when the determination result of step F115 is NO (test mode is not being executed) and when the determination result of step F116 is NO (not a normal command), the process returns without executing step F117.
According to the steps F115 to F117, valid test mode commands received during the test mode are saved in the predetermined buffer.

In the determination of step F116, it is determined whether or not the combination of the MODE value and the ACT value of the test mode command received this time is normal, and if it is normal, the command is stored in the dedicated command buffer in step E117. Is saved and can be read in the later test mode processing.
According to the test mode command processing described above, the test mode transition command is not effective for the effect control device unless it is received first after the power is turned on. In addition, all other test mode commands are discarded unless the test mode transition command is enabled to shift to the test mode and the test mode is being executed. Therefore, in the market, even if the command is changed to a test mode command due to noise or the like during the game, the test mode is not executed.

[Test mode processing]
Next, the details of the test mode process executed in step D23a in the above-mentioned main process will be described with reference to FIG. 132.
When this routine is started, first, in step F121, it is determined by the test mode execution flag whether or not the test mode is being executed, and if it is being executed (the test mode execution flag is set), the step is taken. The process proceeds to F122, and if it is not being executed, the process proceeds to step F126. The test mode execution flag is a flag set in step F132, which will be described later, so that it can be determined that the test mode is being executed.

If the test mode is not being executed and the process proceeds to step F126, it is determined whether the test mode transition flag is set, and if it is set, steps F127 to F132 are sequentially executed and then returned and set in order to shift to the test mode. If not, the process returns without executing steps F127 to F132.
Here, in step F127, the initial value at the start of the test mode is saved in the area to be initialized, in step F128, the drawing setting of the screen at the start of the test mode is executed, in step F129, silence is requested to be output, and in step F130, all The decorative LED is requested to be turned off, step F131 is requested to turn off all movable bodies, and step F132 is set to the test mode executing flag.

According to the steps F127 to F131, the initialization at the time of transition to the test mode (at the start of execution of the test mode) is performed. That is, the state transition indicated by the arrow T2 in FIG. 202 (that is, the initialization immediately after the transition to the test mode) is realized.
The initialization in the test mode is the following operation.
・ Turn off the display. (Black screen)
・ Turn off all decorations.
-Turn off all speakers.
・ Return all movable bodies to their initial positions and stop them. (If it is in the initial position from the beginning, it will not move)
-Initialize the effect button and set it to the default state.

On the other hand, when the test mode is being executed and the process proceeds to step F122, whether or not the ROM inspection group processing is being executed is determined by the ROM inspection group processing flag described later, and is being executed (the ROM inspection group processing flag is set). If so, the process proceeds to step F125 after executing the test mode ROM inspection group process (described later) in step F124, and if the process is not being executed, the test mode normal state process (described later) is executed in step F123 and then to step F125. move on.
Proceeding to step F125, the test mode effect button processing (details omitted) is executed and then returned.

Here, the state in which the ROM inspection group processing is being executed (ROM inspection state in FIG. 202) is a mode in which only the operation corresponding to one command instruction such as the ROM pin state check and the checksum calculation is performed. .. During the mode, only the command of the mode is accepted until the command of the end of ROM inspection is received.
The test mode normal state is a mode including a standby state in the test mode (initialization state in FIG. 202) and a state in which the inspection operation of each category can be independently controlled (duplicate inspection state in FIG. 202). In the single control, different categories (for example, a game board decorative device and a movable body) can operate in an overlapping manner.
Further, the ROM inspection state is a mode in which the pin state of the control ROM or the ROM such as the audio ROM on the sub-board constituting the effect control device is inspected and the checksum is calculated. On the other hand, the duplicate inspection state in the normal state of the test mode is a mode for inspecting the state of devices (display devices, lamps, etc.) existing outside the effect control device in the game machine.
While the test mode is being executed, the mode is one of the above two modes, that is, the ROM inspection group processing is being executed (ROM inspection state) and the test mode is in the normal state. If the ROM inspection group processing flag is set, the ROM inspection group processing is being executed (ROM inspection state), and if it is not set, the test mode is in the normal state.

Further, the test mode effect button process in step F125 is a process that enables the operation of the effect button of the frame to be confirmed in the test mode regardless of the operation by the above command. For example, when the effect button is pressed, the LED mounted on the effect button is blinked so that it can be confirmed that the push function is normal. In this process, if a full-color LED is used, it is preferable that all the colors of R, G, and B can be confirmed. In the case of a touch sensor, if each device can be confirmed, such as by turning on the LED of the touched portion, the inspection reliability is improved and the inspection becomes easy and efficient.

[Test mode normal state processing]
Next, the details of the test mode normal state processing executed in step F123 in the above-mentioned test mode processing will be described with reference to FIG. 133.
When this routine is started, it is first determined in step F141 whether or not the test mode initialization command, which is a test mode command, has been received. In some cases, the process proceeds to step F147 without executing steps F142 to F146.
Here, in step F142, the initial value at the time of the initialization command is saved in the area to be initialized, in step F143, the drawing setting of the screen at the start of the test mode is executed, in step F144, silence is requested to be output, and in step F145, all The decorative LED is requested to be turned off, and in step F146, all the movable bodies are requested to be turned off.
The test mode initialization command is a command for collectively initializing all the display, sound, decoration, and movable body during the test mode, and the process for initializing the initial state is described in steps F142 to F142 to the above. It is F146. That is, according to the processes of steps F141 to F146, when the test mode initialization command is effectively received in the test mode normal state, the state transition indicated by the arrow T3 in FIG. 202 (that is, the initialization command in the test mode normal state) Initialization by) is realized.

When the process proceeds to step F147, it is determined whether or not the ROM inspection transition command, which is a test mode command, has been received. If there is reception, steps F148 to F154 are sequentially executed, and then the process proceeds to step F155. -Proceed to step F155 without executing F154.
Here, in step F148, the ROM inspection group processing flag is set, in step F149, the initial value at the start of ROM inspection group processing is saved in the area to be initialized, and in step F150, the drawing setting of the screen at the start of test mode is executed. Then, in step F151, silence is requested to be output, in step F152, all decorative LEDs are requested to be turned off, in step F153, all movable bodies are requested to be turned off, and in step F154, the effect button controllable flag is set.

The ROM inspection transition command is a command for transitioning to a state in which ROM inspection group processing is being executed (ROM inspection status), and the processing for transitioning to the status is steps F148 to F154.
That is, according to the processes of steps F147 to F154, when the ROM inspection transition command is effectively received in the standby state of the test mode normal state, the state transition indicated by the arrow T4 in FIG. 202 (that is, the ROM inspection state accompanied by initialization) Transition to) is realized.

Then, when the process proceeds to step F155, the processes of steps F155 to F160 are sequentially executed and then returned.
Here, each process of steps F155 to F159 (display inspection group processing, voice inspection group processing, board decoration inspection group processing, frame decoration inspection group processing, movable body inspection group processing) corresponds to a command for each category. It is a process for performing an operation, and is a process for inspection at an assembly factory of a gaming machine. The remaining step F160 process (inspection group process for board manufacturer) is a process for command operation for the manufacturer of the effect control board (sub-board) constituting the effect control device to perform its own inspection. ..
Although the details of each process of steps F155 to F159 are omitted, in each of these processes, there is a step of determining whether or not each corresponding inspection command is received as in steps F141 and F147, and the corresponding inspection is performed. The processing is practically executed according to the command.

Further, a specific example of each inspection realized by the processing of steps F155 to F158 will be described as follows.
-Display inspection: Display color bar images and grayscale images, and display fluctuations different from normal games (design fluctuations that are shorter than usual for pre-shipment inspection).
-Voice inspection: Output the voice for inspecting the speaker alone (for example, let only the left speaker output the voice "It is left"). In addition, an error notification sound is output. This is to inform the inspector that the sensor has responded properly, for example, when inspecting the magnetic sensor for failure before shipping. This is because it is not possible to know whether or not the sensor has responded without some response. At this time, the control device connected to the effect control device for inspection confirms the on / off of the sensor and sends a command accordingly.
-Decorative inspection: All the lamps (LEDs) on the game board are turned on and blinked all at once, and the lamps of a specific part are turned on and blinked. The same applies to the lamps on the frame side.
・ Movable body inspection: Move the movable body according to the specified movement. (It may be a single unit or multiple units at the same time. It depends on the specifications of the model.)

Basically, the operation content at each of the above inspections is mainly a dedicated operation different from that during the normal game so that the inspection can be performed reliably in a short time. Further, the above is an example, and there are other operations according to the inspection contents. Also in these inspections, the operation is performed based on the command from the inspection-dedicated control device or the like connected to the effect control device.
Further, according to the processes of steps F155 to F159, when the inspection command is effectively received in the standby state of the test mode normal state, the state transition indicated by the arrow T5 in FIG. 202 (that is, the transition to the duplicate inspection state, various inspections) Execution) is realized.

[Test mode ROM inspection group processing]
Next, the details of the test mode ROM inspection group processing executed in step F124 in the above-mentioned test mode processing will be described with reference to FIG. 134.
When this routine is started, first, in step F171, it is determined whether or not the command of the ROM inspection group, which is a test mode command, has been received, and if there is reception, the process proceeds to step F172, and if there is no reception, step F188 is performed. move on. The ROM inspection group command is a command transmitted from the test mode control device to the effect control device in the mode in which the ROM inspection group processing is being executed (ROM inspection state).
Proceeding to step F172, it is determined whether or not the processing of the ROM inspection group (processing of any of steps F188 to F193 described later) is being executed based on the state of a predetermined flag, and if it is not being executed, it is received. The process proceeds to step F173 in order to start the process corresponding to the command, and if the command is being executed, the received command is discarded (ignored) and the process proceeds to step F188. Here, the predetermined flag is, for example, a flag that is set during the processing of steps F181 to F186 described later for starting each processing of steps F188 to F193 described later, and is cleared in, for example, step F187 described later. be. Even if a command of another ROM inspection group is received while this predetermined flag is set (that is, while executing a command of a certain ROM inspection group), the determination result of the above step F172 becomes NO. The received command is discarded. This is because, for example, it is not possible to calculate the checksum of another ROM while calculating the checksum of one ROM, so that the commands are surely executed one by one (only one command is executed at a time). ..

When the process proceeds to step F173, the upper byte of the received ROM inspection group command is set as MODE, the lower byte is separated as ACT, and then the process proceeds to step F174.
In step F174, it is determined whether the ACT value (the value of ACT separated in step F173, the same applies hereinafter) is the data instructing the character ROM pin inspection process, and if it is the data, the character ROM pin inspection start process is performed in step F181. After executing the above, the process proceeds to step F188, and if it is not the data, the process proceeds to step F175.
In step F175, it is determined whether the ACT value is the data instructing the character ROM checksum inspection process, and if it is the data, the character ROM checksum inspection start process is executed in step F182, and then the process proceeds to step F188 to proceed to the data. If not, the process proceeds to step F176.
In step F176, it is determined whether the ACT value is the data instructing the voice ROM checksum inspection process, and if it is the data, the voice ROM checksum inspection start process is executed in step F183, and then the process proceeds to step F188 to proceed to the data. If not, the process proceeds to step F177.

In step F177, it is determined whether the ACT value is the data instructing the control ROM / RAM inspection process, and if it is the data, the control ROM / RAM inspection start process is executed in step F184, and then the process proceeds to step F188 to proceed to the data. If not, the process proceeds to step F178.
In step F178, it is determined whether the ACT value is the data instructing the all ROM simple inspection process, and if it is the data, after executing the all ROM simple inspection start process in step F185, the process proceeds to step F188, and the data must be obtained. If so, the process proceeds to step F179.
In step F179, it is determined whether the value of ACT is the data instructing the detailed inspection process of all ROMs, and if it is the data, after executing the detailed inspection process of all ROMs in step F186, the process proceeds to step F188, and the data must be the data. If so, the process proceeds to step F180.
In step F180, it is determined whether the value of ACT is the data instructing the end of ROM inspection, and if it is the data, the ROM inspection end processing is executed in step F187 and then the process proceeds to step F188. If it is not the data, another step. Proceed to step F188 without going through. The ROM inspection group processing flag described above is released (that is, cleared) from the set state, for example, during the ROM inspection end processing in step F187.

According to the above steps F173 to F187, each start process (any of steps F181 to F186) for setting to start the operation corresponding to the command of the ROM inspection group that has been effectively received, or the ROM. The setting process (step F187) for terminating the inspection group process is executed.
Here, according to the processes of steps F180 and F187, when the command (end command) for instructing the end of ROM inspection is effectively received in the ROM inspection state, the state transition indicated by the arrow T6 in FIG. 202 (that is, the ROM inspection state). (Transition to test mode normal state) is realized.
Then, when the process proceeds to step F188, steps F188 to F193 (character ROM pin inspection process, character ROM checksum inspection process, voice ROM checksum inspection process, control ROM / RAM inspection process, all ROM simple inspection process, all ROM detailed inspection process). ) Sequentially and then return. The processes of steps F188 to F193 are processes for executing the operation corresponding to the command, and the processes for which the command is not being executed return without doing anything. For example, if a command for instructing the character ROM pin inspection process is being executed, each routine of steps F189 to F193 excluding step F188 corresponding to the command returns without doing anything.

[Transmission start processing between subs]
Next, the details of the inter-sub transmission start processing executed in step D24 in the above-mentioned main processing will be described with reference to FIG. 135. Note that the inter-sub transmission is a transmission in inter-sub communication. Inter-sub communication is communication (wireless communication in this example) performed between sub-boards (in this example, an effect control device) of pachinko machines in different playgrounds.
When this routine is started, it is first determined in step D461 whether there is an inter-sub transmission request (that is, whether the inter-sub transmission request flag set in step D190 described above or step D480 described later is set). If there is an inter-sub transmission request (if the inter-sub transmission request flag is set), the process proceeds to step D462, and if there is no inter-sub transmission request (if the inter-sub transmission request flag is not set), the process returns. ..
When the process proceeds to step D462, it is determined whether the value of the inter-sub transmission start waiting timer is greater than 0, if it is greater than 0, the process proceeds to step D466, and if it is 0 or less, steps D463 to D465 are sequentially executed and then returned. ..

In step D463, the inter-sub transmission request flag is cleared (assumed that it is not set).
In step D464, the inter-sub transmission permission flag is set.
In step D465, inter-sub transmission interrupts are enabled. Note that the inter-sub transmission interrupt is permitted in step D465 when data to be transmitted by inter-sub communication is generated, and is prohibited by a routine (inter-sub transmission interrupt processing) omitted from the illustration when there is no data to be transmitted.
When the process proceeds to step D466, the inter-sub transmission start waiting timer is updated (that is, the timer value is reduced by a certain value). The inter-sub transmission start waiting timer is a timer whose initial value is set in step D479 described later and cleared (value is set to 0) in step D491 described later.

[Inter-sub reception task processing]
Next, the details of the inter-sub reception task processing executed in step D25 in the above-mentioned main processing will be described with reference to FIG. 136.
When this routine is started, first, in step D471, there is an inter-sub reception task request (that is, there is inter-sub communication reception data (inter-sub command reception data), and inter-sub reception interrupt processing (not shown) is performed. It is determined whether the inter-sub receive task request flag set in is set), and if there is an inter-sub receive task request (if the inter-sub receive task request flag is set), the process proceeds to step D472, and the inter-sub receive task If there is no request (if the inter-sub receive task request flag is not set), it returns.

Proceeding to step D472, the SB_MODE data of the received inter-sub command (value copied from the sb_mode area to the SB_MODE area of the inter-sub communication data buffer by the inter-sub reception interrupt processing (not shown)) is loaded from the SB_MODE area, and step D473 is performed. Proceed to.
When the process proceeds to step D473, it is determined whether the SB_MODE data loaded in step D472 indicates the terminal ID notification, and if it does not indicate the terminal ID notification, the process proceeds to step D474, and when the terminal ID notification is indicated. Sequentially executes steps D482 to D485, and then proceeds to step D481.

In step D482, the received terminal ID (value copied from the source ID area of the inter-sub communication data buffer to the inter-sub command source ID area by the inter-sub reception interrupt processing (not shown)) is transferred from the inter-sub command source ID area. Load.
In step D483, the terminal presence / absence information in the terminal information area corresponding to the terminal ID loaded in step D482 is set to "Yes".
In step D484, an initial value is set in the terminal validity period timer of the terminal information area corresponding to the terminal ID loaded in step D482. By providing a terminal validity period timer, a time limit is set for recognizing that the game machine with the received terminal ID is "present". That is, it is necessary to periodically confirm the existence of each other between the gaming machines that perform inter-sub communication, and the processing omitted in the figure based on this terminal validity period timer (for example, until the terminal validity period timer time-ups). If the same terminal ID notification is not received again, this confirmation is periodically performed by (a process of updating the terminal presence / absence information corresponding to the terminal ID to "none"). By doing so, there are the following advantages. That is, if for some reason communication between gaming machines that have once established communication with each other is not established, such as when a certain gaming machine turns off the power or the wireless module suddenly breaks down, the other party exists. It is useless to continue communication on the premise that there is a problem, and there is a risk that the effect of the inter-sub effect will be reduced. For example, as an inter-sub production, commands are sent from the leftmost gaming machine on the island to the adjacent gaming machine by inter-sub communication, and images of specific characters (characters) are sequentially output from the leftmost gaming machine on the island to each gaming machine. When performing a continuous effect (a type of cooperative effect) such as displaying the display device 41 in a flowing manner to the right, there is a risk that the continuous effect will be interrupted and interrupted at the gaming machine where the communication is no longer established. be. However, if the above confirmation is performed regularly and the terminal presence / absence information is updated, it is possible to prevent the gaming machine whose existence is "none" in the middle from requesting the inter-sub production, for example. Efficient inter-sub production can be reliably performed, such as by skipping the stand on which the power has been turned off and performing the above-mentioned interlocking production.
However, since the inter-sub production does not affect the result of the game, there is a problem even if there is an adverse effect as described above (for example, an adverse effect that the production is not performed as a result of requesting the production to the opponent who no longer exists). The idea of not being established is also established. In the case of specifications according to such an idea, the terminal validity period timer is unnecessary.
In step D485, the received game state data (from the game state area of the inter-sub communication data buffer to the sub-sub by inter-sub reception interrupt processing (not shown) is added to the game state of the terminal information area corresponding to the terminal ID loaded in step D482. The value copied to the command game state area) is stored.

When the process proceeds to step D474, it is determined whether the SB_MODE data loaded in step D472 indicates an ack response. If the data does not indicate an ack response, the process proceeds to step D476. After setting the ack reception flag in step D481, the process proceeds to step D481.

When the process proceeds to step D476, it is determined whether the SB_MODE data loaded in step D472 is a production command, and if it is not a production command, the process proceeds to step D481. If it is a production command, the process proceeds to step D477.
When the process proceeds to step D477, it is determined whether the inter-sub data transmission is in progress, the process proceeds to step D481 if the inter-sub data transmission is in progress, and steps D478 to D480 are sequentially executed if the inter-sub data transmission is not in progress, and then the process proceeds to step D480a. The inter-sub data transmission is data transmission (for example, command transmission) in inter-sub communication. Further, in the present application, a command transmitted / received by inter-sub communication is referred to as an inter-sub command.

Further, the processes of steps D478 to D480 are processes for performing an effect according to the received inter-sub command (particularly the effect command).
In step D478, sub-sub commands or parameters of various effects corresponding to the contents of the received sub-sub commands are set.
In step D479, a timer for waiting for the start of inter-sub transmission is set in order to transmit the inter-sub command set in step D478 to the sub-board of another gaming machine. Similarly, in step D480, the inter-sub transmission request flag is set.

Depending on the content of the effect, the inter-sub command may not be generated. In such a case, in step D478, the inter-sub command is not set, and the processes of steps D479 and D480 for transmitting the inter-sub command are not executed, and the process proceeds to step D480a.
When the process proceeds to step D480a, it is determined whether the SB_MODE data loaded in step D472 is a command that requires an ACK response, and if it is not a command that requires an ACK response, the process proceeds to step D481 if the command requires an ACK response. Sequentially executes steps D488 to D491, and then proceeds to step D481.

Steps D488 to D491 are processes for returning an ack response in response to an ack request.
In step D488, the received source ID is prepared as a destination ID command.
In step D489, the data of SB_MODE and SB_ACT of the ack response are prepared. It should be noted that SB_MODE and SB_ACT are data constituting an inter-sub command, and are data of the 8th byte and the 9th byte in the packet configuration example (described later) shown in FIG. 171.
In step D490, the inter-sub transmission data editing process (described later) is executed.
In step D491, the inter-sub transmission start waiting timer is cleared (the timer value is set to 0).

Then, when the process proceeds to step D481, the inter-sub reception task request flag is cleared, and then the process returns.
Since step D477 is provided, the operation requested by the inter-sub command (directing system command) is not performed when the inter-sub data is being transmitted. This is because the command between subs does not necessarily have to correspond unlike the command from the main board, and the fact that it is being transmitted means that it is making a request to another unit or is returning an ack, so it is further other. This is because of the idea that it is not necessary to meet the demands from the platform. In addition, if all the demands are met, there is a possibility that a contradiction may occur in the production, but this configuration has an advantage that the possibility of such a contradiction disappears. However, this idea is a basic idea, and if there is an effect that one wants to perform in any state, there may be a mode in which the requested operation is performed even during transmission.

[Transmission data editing process between subs]
Next, the details of the inter-sub transmission data editing process executed in step D490 (or step D187 of the above-mentioned single-shot command process) in the above-mentioned inter-sub reception task processing will be described with reference to FIG. 137. It is assumed that the packet transmitted / received between the subs has the configuration shown in FIG. 171 described later.

When this routine is started, steps D501 to D514 are sequentially executed, and then returns.
In step D501, the packet start code (STX) data (for example, 02H) is set in the inter-sub transmission buffer 0. Here, the inter-sub transmission buffer 0 is a part of the transmission buffer area (inter-sub transmission buffer area) for inter-sub communication, and the storage area at the address 0 of this inter-sub transmission buffer area is the inter-sub transmission. Buffer 0 (hereinafter, the same applies to other addresses 1, 2, 3, ... 11).
In step D502, the data of the number of inter-sub transmission data (SIZE) (for example, the data indicating 12 bytes) is set in the inter-sub transmission buffer 1.

In step D503, the user's terminal ID (terminal ID assigned to the effect control device 300 or the wireless module 360 of the effect control device 300) or group ID (the pachinko machine belongs to) as data of the source ID (SID). An ID that identifies a group of pachinko machines) is set in the inter-sub transmission buffer 2.
In step D504, the data (terminal ID and group ID) of the transmission destination ID (DID) is set in the inter-sub transmission buffer 3. In the data of the source ID (SID) and the destination ID (DID), the high-order bit of one byte is the group ID and the low-order bit is the terminal ID, respectively.
In step D505, the data of the inter-sub maker code (MAKER) is set in the inter-sub transmission buffer 4.
In step D506, the data of the Christian era code (YEAR) is set in the inter-sub transmission buffer 5.

In step D507, the data of the inter-sub model code (TYPE) is set in the inter-sub transmission buffer 6.
In step D508, the data of the inter-sub command MODE (SB_MODE) (for example, the one prepared in step D489 or the like described above) is set in the inter-sub transmission buffer 7.
In step D509, the data of the inter-sub command ACT (SB_ACT) (for example, the one prepared in step D489 or the like described above) is set in the inter-sub transmission buffer 8.
In step D510, the data of the own game state STS (that is, the game state of the pachinko machine) (for example, the data indicating that it is the fifth round of the big hit) is set in the inter-sub transmission buffer 9.

In step D511, the checksum of the setting data (that is, the data from STX to STS) from the inter-sub transmission buffer 0 to the inter-sub transmission buffer 9 is calculated. The checksum calculation method is not particularly limited, but for example, simple addition may be performed with a 1-byte size.
In step D512, the checksum calculation result (SUM) data calculated in step D511 is set in the inter-sub transmission buffer 10.
In step D513, the packet end code (ETX) data (for example, 03H) is set in the inter-sub transmission buffer 11.
In step D514, the address of the inter-sub transmission buffer 0 is set as the data of the inter-sub transmission pointer (parameter for specifying the address of the inter-sub transmission buffer area). This inter-sub transmission pointer is used in inter-sub transmission interrupt processing (a routine that sequentially writes data in the inter-sub transmission buffer area to the serial transmission buffer of the CPU for inter-sub transmission) (not shown).

[Inter-sub ACK response task processing]
Next, the details of the inter-sub-ack response task processing executed in step D26 in the above-mentioned main processing will be described with reference to FIG. 138.
When this routine is started, first, in step D521, it is determined whether the value of the ack waiting timer is 0, if it is 0, it returns, and if it is not 0, the ack waiting timer is updated in step D522 (the value is reduced by the specified value). After that, the process proceeds to step D523. The initial value of the ack wait timer is set in step D188 described above.

Proceeding to step D523, it is determined whether or not the ack response has been received (that is, whether or not the ack reception flag is set), and if it is received, steps D524 to D526 are sequentially executed and then returned and received. If it is not set (when the acknowledge reception flag is not set), the process returns without executing steps D524 to D526. The ack reception flag is set in step D486 described above.
In step D524, the ack reception flag is cleared.
In step D525, the back wait timer is cleared.
In step D526, since the ack response is received, various parameter settings for corresponding to the effect waiting for the ack response are executed.

[Inter-sub production setting process]
Next, the details of the inter-sub effect setting process executed in step D27 in the above-mentioned main process will be described with reference to FIG. 139.
When this routine is started, first, in step D531, it is determined whether or not there is an inter-sub production request (that is, whether or not the inter-sub production request flag is set), and if there is an inter-sub production request, step D532. If there is no inter-sub production request (the inter-sub production request flag is cleared), the process returns. The inter-sub production request flag is set in step D478 described above.

When the process proceeds to step D532, it is determined whether the value of the inter-sub effect start waiting timer is 0. If it is 0, the process proceeds to step D533. (Reduce) and then return. The inter-sub effect start waiting timer is a timer set in step D189 described above.
Proceeding to step D533, the data of the received inter-sub commands SB_MODE and SB_ACT (hereinafter, the inter-sub command includes SB_MODE and SB_ACT) is loaded, and the loaded data is the inter-sub interlocking notice in the next step D534. It is determined whether it is a system command, and if it is an inter-sub interlocking notice system command, the process proceeds to step D539, and if it is not an inter-sub interlocking notice system command, the process proceeds to step D535. It should be noted that the inter-sub interlocking notice system command is a command for coordinating the inter-sub interlocking effect by interlocking the advance notice effect with a plurality of pachinko machines performing inter-sub communication. For example, the cooperative effect includes an effect in which images of the same character are sequentially displayed on each gaming machine so as to move laterally in the island, and a synchronous effect in which the same effect is synchronized and performed all at once.

When the process proceeds to step D539, the effect operation table corresponding to the effect specified by the data of the sub-sub commands SB_MODE and SB_ACT loaded in step D533 is set, and then the process proceeds to step D537. Note that setting the effect operation table in step D539 means setting scenario data for executing the effect specified by the above data of the inter-sub command.

When the process proceeds to step D535, it is determined whether the data of the inter-sub command loaded in step D533 is the customer waiting timing adjustment command, if it is the customer waiting timing adjustment command, the process proceeds to step D540, and if it is not the customer waiting timing adjustment command, the step Proceed to D536. The customer waiting timing adjustment command is a command for performing an effect of matching the timing of the customer waiting demo display on a plurality of pachinko machines communicating between subs. In this case, the customer waiting demo is synchronized from the beginning. It is a command to be executed.

In step D536, if the data of the inter-sub command loaded in step D533 is a normal value, parameters of various effects corresponding to this data are set, and then the process proceeds to step D537.
Proceeding to step D540, it should be determined whether or not the customer waiting demo is being produced (that is, whether or not the customer waiting demo is being produced), and if the customer waiting demo is not being produced, the customer waiting timing should be adjusted. Therefore, the process proceeds to step D537, and if the customer waiting demonstration is being produced, the process proceeds to step D541 to adjust the customer waiting timing.
In step D541, the scenario table of the customer waiting demo of the pachinko machine (that is, own machine) that has received the inter-sub command is reset, and the customer waiting demo effect is set to be performed from the beginning, and then step D542. Proceed to.
When the process proceeds to step D542, the process proceeds to step D537 with the P machine state as the customer waiting A.

According to step D541, the customer waiting demonstration effect is started from the beginning of the symbol display (customer waiting A). As a result, the pachinko machine of the sender that transmitted the customer waiting timing adjustment command determined in step D535, the own machine that received this customer waiting timing adjustment command, and other pachinko machines display the customer waiting demo effect as a symbol. It starts synchronously from the beginning of (Customer Waiting A). The customer waiting demo effect started in this way is controlled by the reset scenario table for the customer waiting demo.

Then, in step D537, the inter-sub production request flag is cleared, and then a return is made.
In this example, the process of interlocking the advance notice effect and the process of matching the timing of the customer waiting demo effect are given as specific examples of the process for the inter-sub effect. However, the content of the inter-sub effect is not limited to such an aspect, and may be configured to perform the inter-sub effect of other contents instead of or in addition to the aspect of this example.
In this example, in order to avoid complication, the setting process of these other types of inter-sub effects is shown together in step D536, and the details thereof will be omitted.

[Scenario setting process]
Next, the details of the process executed in step D28 in the above-mentioned main process will be described with reference to FIG. 140.
When this routine is started, steps D551 to D566 are sequentially executed and then returned.
In step D551, the address area of the scenario management area corresponding to the scenario management area 0 (scenario layer number 0) is prepared, and in the next step D552, the scenario analysis process (described later) is executed based on the preparation of step D551. .. Here, "preparing the address area" means preparing the address of the address area itself in order to read the data set in the address area in a later process.

Similarly, in step D553, an address area of the scenario management area corresponding to the scenario management area 1 (scenario layer number 1) is prepared, and based on this preparation, the scenario analysis process is executed in the next step D554.
In step D555, an address area of the scenario management area corresponding to the scenario management area 2 (scenario layer number 2) is prepared, and based on this preparation, the scenario analysis process is executed in the next step D556.
In step D557, the address area of the scenario management area corresponding to the scenario management area 3 (scenario layer number 3) is prepared, and based on this preparation, the scenario analysis process is executed in the next step D558.
In step D559, the address area of the scenario management area corresponding to the scenario management area 4 (scenario layer number 4) is prepared, and based on this preparation, the scenario analysis process is executed in the next step D560.
In step D561, the address area of the scenario management area corresponding to the scenario management area 5 (scenario layer number 5) is prepared, and based on this preparation, the scenario analysis process is executed in the next step D562.
In step D563, an address area of the scenario management area corresponding to the scenario management area 6 (scenario layer number 6) is prepared, and based on this preparation, the scenario analysis process is executed in the next step D564.
In step D565, an address area of the scenario management area corresponding to the scenario management area 7 (scenario layer number 7) is prepared, and based on this preparation, the scenario analysis process is executed in the next step D566.

In the case of this example, there are eight scenario layers as described above, and the scenario layer numbers are 0 to 7. Of these eight scenario layers, basically, scenario layer 0 is for the background, scenario layer 1 is for the left symbol, scenario layer 2 is for the right symbol, and scenario layer 3 is for the middle symbol. The scenario layer 4 is for the notice 1, the scenario layer 5 is for the notice 2, the scenario layer 6 is for the hold, and the scenario layer 7 is for the fourth symbol.

However, the present invention is not limited to this mode. For example, in this embodiment, the flow chart has eight scenario layers, but the number of scenario layers is not limited to this. In particular, the number of layers used for background and notice increases or decreases depending on the model specifications, and this embodiment is explained by limiting it to as few as possible. Further, the control target of each scenario layer is not limited to the above embodiment, and various allocations may be possible. For example, scenario layer 0 is for the background, scenario layer 1 is for the cut-in notice, scenario layer 2 is for the left symbol, scenario layer 3 is for the right symbol, and scenario layer 4 is for the middle symbol. Yes, the scenario layer 5 may be for holding, the scenario layer 6 may be for other notices, and the scenario layer 7 may be for the fourth symbol.

Further, the address area of the scenario management area is provided for each scenario layer as described above, and if there is something to be controlled, the address area of the corresponding scenario management area X (any of X = 0 to 7) If the address of the scenario management area is stored in the address area and there is nothing to control, the address area of the corresponding scenario management area X is set to NULL (see steps D243 and D247 described above). .. For example, since the hold is not displayed during the movie waiting for customers, the address (address of the scenario management area 0) is set in the background area (address area of the scenario management area 0), but the hold area. NULL is set in (the address area of the scenario management area 6).

[Scenario analysis processing]
Next, the details of the scenario analysis process executed in step D552 and the like in the above-mentioned scenario setting process will be described with reference to FIGS. 141 and 142.
When this routine is started, the brk value (data used for repeating the processing described later) is first set to 0 in step D571, and then in step D572, the address area of the prepared scenario management area X is set. After loading the data of the set data (address of the scenario management area X or NULL), the process proceeds to step D573. Here, the "prepared address area of the scenario management area X" is, for example, the address area (scenario) prepared in step D551 immediately before the routine when this routine is executed in step D552 described above. It is the address area of the management area 0), and when this routine is executed in the above-mentioned step D554, it is the address area (the address area of the scenario management area 1) prepared in the step D553 immediately before that, and the like. The case of is also prepared in the previous step.

When the process proceeds to step D573, it is determined whether the data of the address loaded in step D572 is NULL, and if it is NULL, it returns because control is not required, and if it is not NULL, the process proceeds to step D574.
Proceeding to step D574, the value of the scenario timer in the scenario management area of the address loaded in step D572 is read, it is determined whether the value of this scenario timer is less than 0, and if it is less than 0, it returns because it is abnormal. If it is 0 or more, step D575 is executed and the process proceeds to step D576. The value of the scenario timer is first set to 0 in step D244 described above each time the scenario control data is set, but since 0 is the lower limit, if it is smaller than 0, it is determined to be abnormal. Further, in step D575, if the value of the scenario timer is not 0, the update that reduces the value of the scenario timer by 1 is executed.
When the process proceeds to step D576, it is determined whether the value of the scenario timer is greater than 0, and if it is greater than 0, it returns because the time has not yet expired, and if it is 0 or less, the process proceeds to step D577.

According to steps D574 to D576, timer management for waits is performed. That is, only the time corresponding to the value of the scenario timer set in the scenario timer area in the target scenario management area (scenario management area of the address loaded in step D572) is the target scenario table (in the target scenario management area). The operation of delaying the control progress of the scenario table of the address set in the scenario data table area is realized. Here, "the operation of delaying the control progress of the scenario table" means to weight the progress of the scenario table (wait there without proceeding to the next row of the scenario table. Continue to produce the effect at that time). .. For example, in the 20th line (// 19) of FIG. 177, since the constant weight code is set and the wait time value is (300), the time corresponding to 300 frames stays in this line, and after the lapse of the time, the next It progresses to the line, but this operation corresponds to "the operation of delaying the control progress of the scenario table". In the scenario table, between the line where the code between the wait time value and the wait time value (constant weight code etc. (including PB waiting code) is set) and the line where the constant weight code etc. are set next. The opcodes in the line at) are all executed at the same time. Then, when the value of the scenario timer becomes 0 or less due to the update of step D575, it is determined that the scenario timer has timed up. Therefore, in order to proceed with the control process of the target scenario table, step D576 is followed by step D577. It is configured to proceed to. However, the control process of the target scenario table (step D584 and subsequent steps) is executed after the timer management process for the PB effective time described later.

That is, when proceeding to step D577, the value of the target PB timer (the value of the PB timer area in the scenario management area of the address loaded in step D572) is read, and it is determined whether the value of this PB timer is larger than 0. If it is larger than 0, the time is not up and the process proceeds to step D578. If it is 0 or less, the time is up and the process proceeds to step D583.
When the process proceeds to step D578, it is determined whether the PB operation flag is set. If the PB operation flag is set, the process proceeds to step D579. If the PB operation flag is not set, the target PB timer is set in step D582. After executing the update that reduces the value of by 1, the process proceeds to step D583. Here, the PB operation flag is a flag that is set when the pressing operation of the PB (push button 9) is detected in the effect button input process executed in step D21 in the above-mentioned main process.

Proceeding to step D579, the value of the target PB timer at this time (that is, the remaining time of the PB effective time at the time when PB is pressed) is saved as the PB effect addition time, and then in step D580, the target PB The value of the timer is set to 0, and then a flag is set in the PB detection flag area of the target scenario management area in step D581 (that is, data indicating that the PB detection flag is set is set). In these steps D579 to D581, since the PB was pressed, the remaining time of the PB timer is stored as the PB effect addition time (for step D696 described later), the PB timer is reset to 0, and the PB operates. A PB detection flag indicating that this has been done is set in the scenario management area for scenario control.
Then, when the process proceeds to step D583, it is determined whether the value of the target PB timer is greater than 0, and if it is greater than 0, the PB operation is not detected and the time is not up, so a return is made, and if it is 0 or less. Since the PB operation was performed or the time was up, the process proceeds to step D584.

According to the above steps D577 to D583, timer management for the PB effective time is performed. That is, when the value of the PB timer area larger than 0 is set in the PB timer area in the target scenario management area (scenario management area of the address loaded in step D572), it corresponds to the value of this PB timer. The operation of delaying the control progress of the target scenario table (the scenario table of the address set in the scenario data table area in the target scenario management area) and setting the PB effective time is realized. Here, "the operation of delaying the control progress of the scenario table and setting the PB effective time" means that the value of the target PB timer becomes 0 (that is, the PB timer times up) or the PB is pressed. It means to weight the progress of the scenario table until it is done (wait there without proceeding to the next row of the scenario table. Continue to produce at that time). For example, in the 28th line (// 27) of FIG. 177, since the constant weight code is set and the wait time value is (30), the time corresponding to 30 frames stays in this line, and after this time elapses, the next The process proceeds to the 29th line, and the operation according to the 28th line is the "operation of delaying the control progress of the scenario table" by the scenario timer described above. On the other hand, in the next 29th line (// 28), since the PB wait code is set and the effective time value is (2970), this effective time value (2970) is set in the PB timer in step D702 described later. If there is no PB pressing operation, the valid time corresponding to a maximum of 2970 frames stays in this line, and if there is a PB pressing operation within this valid time, the process immediately proceeds to the next line. The operation of waiting for the PB pressing operation for the effective time (PB effective time) to be performed corresponds to the "operation of delaying the control progress of the scenario table and setting the PB effective time". Then, the value of the PB timer becomes 0 or less due to the update of step D582 without the operation of the PB, and the PB timer is timed up, or the PB effective time until the PB timer is timed up. If the PB is operated in the meantime, the process proceeds to step D583 via step D582 or steps D579 to D581. In this case, the determination result of step D583 becomes NO (the timer for PB is 0) and the process proceeds to step D584.
However, when the value of the PB timer set in the PB timer area is 0 from the beginning, the process proceeds from step D577 to step D583, and further proceeds from step D583 to step D584, and the control proceeds immediately (this). In this case, the PB effective time is 0 (none)). Since the PB effective time is provided in the case of a notice effect or the like, the value of the PB timer area is set to 0 in other cases, and the PB effective time is not provided.

Next, in step D584 and subsequent steps, the control process of the target scenario table is executed. This will be described below.
Proceeding to step D584, the process from step D584 to step D623, which is the end of the loop, is repeatedly executed until a non-zero value is set as the brk value. That is, in step D623, which is the end of the loop at the rear, the value of brk at that time is read, and if the value of brk is 0, the process returns to step D584 and the process is repeated from the next step D585.

That is, when the process proceeds to step D584, first steps D585 to D588 are sequentially executed, and then the process proceeds to step D589.
In step D585, the address of the scenario table is loaded from the scenario data table area in the target scenario management area. For example, in the case of the scenario layer number 0 at the time of the customer waiting demonstration, the address of the scenario table shown in FIG. 177 is loaded in this step D585.
In step D586, the opcode of a specific row (designated row) of the scenario table specified by the address loaded in step D585 is acquired. As described above, in the scenario table, for example, as shown in FIGS. 185, 192, and 177, the opcode and the operand data (scenario data) are set in each line. For example, in the case of FIG. 185, if the target is the scenario management area 0 (scenario layer number 0) and the designated line is the first line, the “motion continuation code” which is the data of the operation code of the first line of the uppermost scenario layer 0. Is acquired in step D586. Further, in the case of FIG. 177, for example, when the designated line is the first line, the "motion 1 deletion code" (specific data, for example, "51h"), which is the data of the operation code of the first line, is in step D586. To be acquired. Alternatively, in the case of FIG. 177, for example, if the designated line is the 16th line, the "motion 10 registration code" (specific data, for example, "4Ah"), which is the data of the operation code on the 16th line, is acquired in step D586. Will be done.

In step D587, the operation code acquired in the immediately preceding step D586 is separated into a high-order bit and a low-order bit and prepared. For example, when the data of the operation code is the above-mentioned "51h", the high-order bit "5" and the low-order bit "1" are separated and prepared respectively. The upper and lower bits of the opcode have meanings (however, the lower bits may have no meaning). For example, among the "51h" which is the "motion 1 deletion code", the high-order bit "5" means the motion deletion, and the low-order bit "1" is the motion of the target (in this case, the motion deletion target). Means that the layer of is motion 1.
In step D588, the operand of a specific row (designated row) of the scenario table specified by the address loaded in step D585 is acquired and prepared. For example, in the case of FIG. 185, if the target is the scenario management area 0 (scenario layer number 0) and the designated line is the first line, the “motion index No.” which is the data of the operand of the first line of the uppermost scenario layer 0. (51) ”is acquired in step D588 and prepared. Further, in the case of FIG. 177, if the designated line is the 16th line (the operation code is the “motion 10 registration code”), the “motion index No. (-1)” which is the operand data of the 16th line is set in step D588. Get and prepare.

Proceeding to step D589, the prepared operation code upper data (data separated and prepared in step D587, the same applies hereinafter) is determined, and if it is data for instructing motion registration (motion registration code), the motion registration process (motion registration code) is performed in step D601. After executing (described later), the process proceeds to step D621, and if the data does not command motion registration, the process proceeds to step D590.
Proceeding to step D590, the prepared operation code upper data is determined, and if it is data for instructing motion deletion (motion deletion code), the motion deletion process (described later) is executed in step D602, and then the process proceeds to step D621 to delete the motion. If it is not the data instructing, the process proceeds to step D591.

When the process proceeds to step D591, the prepared operation code upper data is determined, and if the data is the data for instructing the motion continuation (motion continuation code), the motion continuation process (described later) is executed in step D603, and then the process proceeds to step D621 to continue the motion. If it is not the data instructing, the process proceeds to step D592.
Proceeding to step D592, the prepared operation code upper data is determined, and if it is the data for instructing the constant weight (constant weight code), the constant weight processing (described later) is executed in step D604, and then the process proceeds to step D621 to proceed to the constant weight. If it is not the data instructing, the process proceeds to step D593.

Proceeding to step D593, the prepared operation code upper data is determined, and if it is the data for instructing the variable weight (variable weight code), the variable weight processing (described later) is executed in step D605, and then the process proceeds to step D621 to proceed to the variable weight. If it is not the data instructing, the process proceeds to step D594.
When the process proceeds to step D594, the prepared operation code upper data is determined, and if the data is a PB wait command data (PB wait code), the PB wait process (described later) is executed in step D606, and then the process proceeds to step D621 to wait for PB. If it is not the data instructing, the process proceeds to step D595.

When the process proceeds to step D595, the prepared operation code upper data is determined, and if the data is the data for instructing the PB determination branch (PB determination branch code), the PB determination branch process (described later) is executed in step D607, and then the process proceeds to step D621. If the data does not command the PB determination branch, the process proceeds to step D596.
When the process proceeds to step D596, the prepared operation code upper data is determined, and if the data is the data for instructing the symbol stop (stop symbol set code), the symbol stop process is executed in step D608, and then the process proceeds to step D621 to command the symbol stop. If it is not data, the process proceeds to step D597.

Proceeding to step D597, the prepared operation code upper data is determined, and if the data is the data for instructing the symbol back calculation replacement (symbol back calculation replacement code), the symbol back calculation replacement process (described later) is executed in step D609, and then the step is performed. Proceed to D621, and if it is not the data instructing the back calculation replacement of the symbol, the process proceeds to step D598.
When the process proceeds to step D598, the prepared operation code upper data is determined, and if the data is the data for instructing the variable scenario switching (variable scenario switching code), the variable scenario switching process is executed in step D610, and then the process proceeds to step D621 to switch the variable scenario. If it is not the data instructing, the process proceeds to step D599.

When the process proceeds to step D599, the prepared operation code upper data is determined, and if the data is a repeat command data (repetition code), the repeat process is executed in step D611 and then the process proceeds to step D621. If the data is not the repeat command data, the process proceeds to step D621. Proceed to step D600.
When the process proceeds to step D600, the prepared operation code upper data is determined, and if the data is the end code (end code), the end process is executed in step D612 and then the process proceeds to step D621. If the data is not the end command data, the process proceeds to step D621. Proceed to other steps (not shown). In the other steps (the steps shown by the wavy lines in FIG. 142), the contents of the prepared opcode upper data are determined in the same manner as in steps D589 to D612 described above, and the determination results are the other steps. The process corresponding to the type of data (code) is executed and the process proceeds to step D621. If the prepared opcode upper data does not correspond to any type of data (code), a return is made. It has become.

Next, when the process proceeds to step D621, the data set at this time is read in the address area of the scenario management area corresponding to the target scenario layer number, it is determined whether this data is NULL, and if it is NULL, brk in step D622. Set the value of to 1 and proceed to step D623. If it is not NULL, the process proceeds to step D623 without executing step D622.
Then, when the process proceeds to step D623, the brk value at that time is read as described above, and if the brk value is 0, the process returns to step D584 and the process is repeated from the next step D585, and the brk value is not 0. Exits this routine and returns.

Therefore, in any of the processes of steps D601 to D612, the brk value is set to a non-zero value, or NULL is set in the address area of the scenario management area corresponding to the target scenario layer number. Then, the loop processing with steps D584 and D623 as the loop ends is completed and the process returns. Then, until the loop processing is completed in this way, the address of the scenario data table area (address that specifies the scenario table and its row) in the scenario management area is appropriately changed, and the above loop processing is repeated in a series. The control of the production is executed.
The above subroutine group (steps D601 to D612) is an example, and changes depending on the specifications of the model.

[Motion registration process]
Next, the details of the motion registration process executed in step D601 in the above-mentioned scenario analysis process will be described with reference to FIG. 143.
When this routine is started, steps D631 and D632 are executed in sequence, and then step D633 is performed.
In step D631, the table address in the scenario data table area of the target scenario management area is updated to the next record (the address that specifies the next row of the table). This is an update process for advancing the designated line when the above-mentioned step D585 is executed next time to the next line, and by performing this update process, the specified line of the target scenario table becomes the next line. The loop processing (steps D584 to D623) described above is repeated.

In step D632, the address of the motion management area is loaded and prepared from the address area of the motion management area corresponding to the data of the lower bits of the operation code separated in step D587. In the case of this example, the RAM 311a of the effect control device 300 is configured to be provided with storage areas for motion management called "address area of motion management area" and "motion management area". Of these, the motion management area is the number of displays (for example, in the case of the left symbol, the next symbol, the current symbol, and the previous symbol), which is the number (maximum number) of objects to be displayed and controlled (not necessarily displayed on the screen). Area for storing (3 items) (area for the number of displays), area for storing the frame number indicating how many frames the processing has progressed (area for the frame number), and the number of rows in the motion table. An area for storing the command position (command position area) and an area for storing address data (corresponding to the motion index) indicating which table is used among a plurality of motion list tables (motion list). It is a structure including a table area) and a display information area for the number of displays.

In addition, there are motion management areas with the same structure corresponding to the motion layers (in this example, motions 0 to 13), and there are 14 motion layers in this example, so this motion. There are also 14 management areas (motion management areas 0 to 13). Further, corresponding to this motion management area, there are also 14 address areas of the motion management area in this example (addresses for motion 0 to addresses for motion 13). Then, in step D632, in order to specify one of the plurality of motion management areas in this way, the motion management area corresponding to the layer number of the motion specified by the data of the lower bit of the operation code (hereinafter, corresponding motion management). The start address of (referred to as an area) is read from the address area of the corresponding motion management area and prepared. In the present application, the motion layer number (0 to 13 in this example) may be abbreviated as the motion number, or may be used as the motion management area X (X is a number corresponding to the motion number). In some cases.

There are multiple display information areas in the motion management area for the number of displays (the number of objects), and each display information area has a display type, an effect type, an effect parameter, an X coordinate of the upper left point of the display, and an upper left point of the display. Y coordinate, X coordinate of the upper right point of the display, Y coordinate of the upper right point of the display, X coordinate of the lower left point of the display, Y coordinate of the lower left point of the display, image index, background color, foreground color, IPicture only video It contains an area for storing each data of the hour frame count and the behavior index.

Here, the display type is the type of the object (including information indicating whether the object is a still image or a moving image (movie), as well as information indicating the type of the movie (whether it is an I picture, etc.)). The effect type is information indicating the type of effect (processing process such as giving transparency) to be added to the image. The effect parameter is a parameter of the effect (transparency when transparency is given, etc.). The X coordinate and the Y coordinate are data for specifying the display position of the image. In this example, for the polygon display function (the function of displaying a solid as a polyhedron), the display upper left point, the display upper right point, and the display lower left point are three. There are point coordinates. The image index is a number that identifies a still image or a movie. The frame count at the time of moving image of only IPicture is data indicating which frame data is IPicture (that is, I frame). The behavior index is an index for behavior (design replacement). Note that the behavior (symbol replacement) is to replace only the character (still image or moving image) at the same size and the same display position, and is different from the cut-in character replacement described in steps D385 to D390 described above. In the above-mentioned cut-in character replacement, the size and display position of displaying the character can also be changed by the replacement.

Next, when the process proceeds to step D633, it is determined whether the address of the motion management area loaded in step D632 is NULL, if it is NULL, the process proceeds to step D635, and if it is not NULL, the motion data initialization process 1 (described later) is performed in step D634. After executing step D635, the process proceeds to step D635.
When the process proceeds to step D635, the start address of the motion management area corresponding to the data of the lower bits of the operation code separated in step D587 is set and prepared, and the process proceeds to step D636.
When the process proceeds to step D636, the start address prepared in step D635 is set in the address area of the motion management area corresponding to the data of the lower bits of the operation code, and the process proceeds to step D637.

In any of these steps D632 to D636, finally, in step D636, the start address of the motion management area corresponding to the lower bits of the opcode separated in step D587 is set to the address area of the corresponding motion management area. However, if data of an address other than NULL has already been set in the address area of the corresponding motion management area, the motion data initialization process 1 (which sets the release of the expansion area used for video development, etc.) 1 ( Since (described later) is required, this is executed in step D634.

Next, when the process proceeds to step D637, it is determined whether the operand data prepared in step D588 is 0 or more, and if it is 0 or more, steps D638 to D640 are sequentially executed and then returned, and if it is less than 0 (that is, a negative value). For example, steps D641 to D643 are sequentially executed and then returned.
In step D638, the data of the operand (data of the operand prepared in step D588, the same applies hereinafter) is prepared as a motion index.
In step D639, the data prepared in step D638 is set in the area for storing the in-use motion index corresponding to the lower operation code (hereinafter referred to as the in-use motion index area). The in-use motion index area is an area for storing the data of the motion index (in-use motion index) that specifies the row to be controlled in the motion list table for each motion number, and is provided for each motion number. There is. In this step D639, the data prepared in step D638 is set (that is, saved) in the in-use motion index area corresponding to the motion number specified by the lower bits of the opcode separated in step D587.
In step D640, motion data initialization process 2 (described later) for initializing data such as the number of displays is executed.

On the other hand, in step D641, the motion index data corresponding to the lower opcode is loaded from the corresponding motion index area and prepared. The motion index area includes the storage area (holding index area, fourth symbol index area) described in steps D291 to D294 described above, and the storage area (SU1 cut-in) described in steps D386, D388, and D390 described above. Region, SU2 cut-in region, SU3 cut-in region). In this step D641, among the motion index areas in the plurality of RAMs, the motion index specified by the lower bits of the opcode separated in step D587 and the current state of the gaming machine (whether or not it is in the probable change, etc.) Extract the motion index data from the area and prepare it.
Next, in step D642, the data prepared in step D641 is set in the in-use motion index area corresponding to the lower operation code.
Then, in step D643, the motion data initialization process 2 (described later) that initializes the data such as the number of displays is executed.

Of the steps D637 to D643 described above, the route in which the determination result in step D637 is YES (operand is 0 or more) and steps D638 to D640 are executed, and the determination result in step D637 is NO (operand is less than 0). The route for executing steps D6412 to D643 is different from that of the route as follows. That is, the former route is a route that uses the motion index value (fixed value) set in the scenario table stored in the ROM for control, and the latter route is stored in the motion index area in the RAM. A route that uses the motion index value (not a fixed value) for control. When you want to change the motion index to be used according to the state of the gaming machine (whether or not it is in the probable change, etc.), a negative value (for example, "-1") is set as the value of the operand, and the latter route is executed. It is configured to be.

[Motion data initialization process 1]
Next, the details of the motion data initialization process 1 executed in step D634 (or step D674 described later) in the above-mentioned motion registration process will be described on the left side of FIG. 144. In the description of the control process of the effect control device 300, the motion control data is data such as the number of displays and the frame number stored in the motion management area.
When this routine is started, first, step D651 to step D655 are repeatedly executed until the closing price (closing price = display number -1) is reached while increasing the variable i from the initial value 0 by an increment of 1, and then in step D656. move on. That is, in step D651, immediately after the start of the routine, the variable i is set to 0 and the process proceeds to step D652. In step D655, if the variable i is less than the closing price, the process returns to step D651, and if the variable i is the closing price, the process proceeds to step D656. Then, when returning to step D651, the value of the variable i is increased by 1 and the process proceeds to step D652. The closing price value is a value obtained by subtracting 1 from the display number data set in the motion management area (hereinafter referred to as the target motion management area) corresponding to the lower bits of the operation code separated in step D587. .. That is, in this routine, the loop processing of steps D651 to D655 is repeatedly executed for the number of display times, and then the process proceeds to step D656.

When the process proceeds to step D652, the address of the display information area corresponding to the variable i in the target motion management area is set, and then the process proceeds to step D653. In step D652, for example, if the variable i = 0, the address of the first display information area among the plurality of display information areas existing for the number of displays is set in the target motion management area.
Proceeding to step D653, the data of the display type in the display information area for which the address is set in the immediately preceding step D652 is read, and it is determined whether or not this display type is a moving image. Then, if the display type is a moving image, the expansion area (the area used for expanding the compressed video data) is set to be released in step D654, and then the process proceeds to step D655. If the display type is not a moving image, step D654 is executed. Do not proceed to step D655. When the process proceeds to step D655, as described above, if the variable i is less than the closing price, the process returns to step D651, and if the variable i is the closing price, the process proceeds to step D656.

Next, when the process proceeds to step D656, the process of initializing the parameters of the target motion management area is performed in steps D656 to D658, and then the process returns. That is, in step D656, the number of displays is set to 0, in step D657, the frame number is set to -1, and in step D658, the command position is set to 0.

[Motion data initialization process 2]
Next, the details of the motion data initialization process 2 executed in steps D640 and D643 (or step D689 described later) in the above-mentioned motion registration process will be described on the right side of FIG. 144.
When this routine is started, first, the processing of initializing the parameters of the target motion management area is performed in steps D661 to D663, and then the process proceeds to step D664. That is, in step D661, the number of displays is set to 0, in step D662, the frame number is set to -1, and in step D663, the command position is set to 0.
Then, when the process proceeds to step D664, the address corresponding to the in-use motion index (data set in step D642) in the motion list table area in the target motion management area (address for specifying the motion list table and its row). And then return.

[Motion deletion process]
Next, the details of the motion deletion process executed in step D602 in the scenario analysis process described above will be described with reference to the left side of FIG. 145.
When this routine is started, steps D671 and D672 are executed in sequence, and then step D673 is performed.
In step D671, similarly to step D631, the table address in the scenario data table area of the target scenario management area is updated to the next record (the address that specifies the next row of the table).
In step D672, similarly to step D632, the address of the motion management area is loaded and prepared from the address area of the target motion management area, and the process proceeds to step D673.

Next, when the process proceeds to step D673, it is determined whether the address of the motion management area loaded in step D672 is NULL, if it is NULL, the process proceeds to step D675, and if it is not NULL, the motion data initialization process 1 is executed in step D674. Later, the process proceeds to step D675.
When the process proceeds to step D675, NULL is set in the address area of the target motion management area, and the process proceeds to step D676.
Proceeding to step D676, the data of the in-use motion index corresponding to the data of the lower bits of the operation code (the operation code separated in step D587, the same applies hereinafter) is cleared, and then the data is returned.
The motion deletion process described above is executed when the control of the character or the like is terminated, whereby the motion information (data in the address area of the motion management area and data in the motion index area in use) is deleted.

[Motion continuation processing]
Next, the details of the motion continuation process executed in step D603 in the scenario analysis process described above will be described with reference to the right side of FIG. 145.
When this routine is started, steps D681 and D682 are executed in sequence, and then step D683 is performed.
In step D681, similarly to step D631, the table address in the scenario data table area of the target scenario management area is updated to the next record (the address that specifies the next row of the table).
In step D682, the data of the in-use motion index corresponding to the lower bits of the opcode is loaded.

Proceeding to step D683, it is determined whether the data of the in-use motion index loaded in step D682 matches the operand acquired in step D588, and if they match, it returns, and if they do not match, step D684 and subsequent steps are executed. do. Here, it is determined whether the motion currently being controlled and the motion specified in the scenario table are the same, and if they are the same, the motion currently being controlled should be continued as it is, so it returns without any processing. If they are not the same, step D684 and subsequent steps are executed in order to perform new motion registration.
Then, in step D684 and subsequent steps, the same processing as the motion registration processing (route using the value of the scenario table) described above is performed.
That is, in step D684, similarly to step D632, the address of the motion management area is loaded and prepared from the address area of the target motion management area, and the process proceeds to step D685.

Next, when the process proceeds to step D685, it is determined whether the address of the motion management area loaded in step D684 is NULL, if it is NULL, the process proceeds to step D687, and if it is not NULL, the motion data initialization process 1 is executed in step D686. Later, the process proceeds to step D687.
When the process proceeds to step D687, the start address of the target motion management area is set and prepared, and the process proceeds to step D688.
When the process proceeds to step D688, the start address prepared in step D687 is set in the address area of the target motion management area, and the process proceeds to step D689.
Proceeding to step D689, the motion data initialization process (the above-mentioned motion data initialization process 2) is executed.
In step D690, the data of the operand is set in the in-use motion index area corresponding to the lower bit of the operation code, and then the data of the operand is returned.
In the motion continuation process described above, if the motion information specified in the scenario table is the same as the content currently controlled, the process is continued as it is, and if it is different, a process of newly registering is executed. As a result, for example, if the background during normal fluctuation does not change due to reach or the like, the movie is continued over a plurality of fluctuations, but when reach occurs, new playback is performed from the head.

[Constant weight processing]
Next, the details of the constant weight processing executed in step D604 in the above-mentioned scenario analysis processing will be described from the upper side of FIG. 146.
When this routine is started, first, in step D691, the same update process as in step D631 is executed.
Next, in step D692, the data of the operand is set in the scenario timer area of the target scenario management area.
Then, in step D693, the value of brk is set to 1 and the process returns.
According to this routine, a time value or the like when waiting for a specified fixed time is set. For example, in the case of the 20th line (// 19) in the scenario table shown in FIG. 177, this routine is executed because the opcode is a constant weight code, and the wait time of the operand is (300). Therefore, in step D692 above. 300 (10 seconds = 300 × 1/30) is set as the value of the scenario timer area. Then, since the value of brk becomes 1 in step D693, the repetition of the loop processing (steps D584 to D623) in the scenario analysis processing described above ends.

[Variable weight processing]
Next, the details of the variable weight processing executed in step D605 in the above-mentioned scenario analysis processing will be described from the lower side of FIG. 146.
When this routine is started, first, in step D695, the same update process as in step D631 is executed.
Next, in step D696, a value obtained by adding the PB effect addition time (value set in step D579) to the data of the operand is set in the scenario timer area of the target scenario management area.
Then, in step D697, the value of brk is set to 1 and the process returns.

In this routine, when the effect time changes due to the player's button operation (PB operation), a time value or the like for variable time weighting is set. As a result, the earlier the button is pressed, the longer the effect to be performed after that, and the operation that the effect is performed only for a short time when the button is pressed at the last minute of the effective time is realized. For example, in the case of the 11th line (// 10) in the scenario table shown on the upper side of FIG. 192, this routine is executed because the operation code is a variable weight code, and the valid time value of the operand is (55). In D696, 55 + PB effect addition time is set as the value of the scenario timer area. Here, the PB effect addition time becomes a larger value as the player performs the PB operation earlier after the effect of prompting the player to perform the PB operation is performed (see step D579). Therefore, the faster the player operates the PB, the longer the subsequent production will be.

[PB waiting process]
Next, the details of the PB waiting process executed in step D606 in the scenario analysis process described above will be described from the upper side of FIG. 147.
When this routine is started, first, in step D701, the same update process as in step D631 is executed.
Next, in step D702, the data of the operand is set in the PB timer area of the target scenario management area.
Next, in step D703, the flag of the PB detection flag area in the target scenario management area is cleared.
Then, in step D704, the value of brk is set to 1 and the process returns.

In this routine, the setting at the time of starting the push button effect is made. For example, in the case of the scenario table shown on the upper side of FIG. 192, the motion deletion process of motion 9 is first executed in the first row (// 0), and then the motion registration process of motion 8 is executed in the second row (// 1) (FIG. After the motion index "70" corresponding to the push button ON / OFF effect motion table "MDat0070" shown in 176 is executed), the operation code on the next third line (// 2) is the PB waiting code. Therefore, since this routine is executed and the valid time value of the operand is (90), 90 is set as the value of the timer area in step D702, and the push button effect of 3 seconds (= 90 × 1/30) starts. Will be done. In step D703, in order to start the push button effect, the value of the PB detection flag indicating that the PB (push button) has been operated is initially set to off (a state in which the flag is not set).

[PB judgment branch processing]
Next, the details of the PB determination branching process executed in step D607 in the above-mentioned scenario analysis process will be described from the lower side of FIG. 147.
When this routine is started, first, in step D711, it is determined whether the flag of the PB detection flag area in the target scenario management area is set (that is, whether the PB detection flag is set), and if it is set. To step D713, and if it is not set (when the PB detection flag is off), the process proceeds to step D712.
When the process proceeds to step D712, the same update process as in step D631 is executed and the process returns.
When the process proceeds to step D713, the same update process as in step D631 is executed and the process proceeds to step D714.
When the process proceeds to step D714, it is determined whether the address update process of step D713 has been completed by the amount of the operand data prepared in step D588. repeat.

This routine is executed when the PB timer that measures the effective time without pressing the push button in the above-mentioned push button effect has timed up, or when the PB is pressed within the effective time and the timer is forcibly set to 0. It is a process to be performed. Then, when the time is up without pressing PB, the process proceeds to step D712 through step D711, and the designated row of the scenario table advances by one row and returns. If PB is pressed within the valid time, the process proceeds to step D713 through step D711, and the designated row of the scenario table jumps by the amount specified by the operand.

For example, in the case of the scenario table shown on the upper side of FIG. 192, when the control up to the third line is completed as described above, this routine is executed because the operation code of the next fourth line (// 3) is the PB judgment branch code. Since the number of jumps in the table of the operand is (3), if PB is pressed within the valid time and the process proceeds to step D713, the determination result of step D714 becomes NO until step D713 is executed three times. As a result, the next designated row in the scenario table jumps to the 7th row (// 6). Then, when jumping to the 7th line, the effect of the 7th line and thereafter (in the case of the upper side of FIG. 192, the effect that the character of the military commander appears on the display screen as motion 8 and outputs the voice of the dialogue) is started. On the other hand, even when this routine is executed as described above, if PB is not pressed within the valid time, step D712 is executed only once and returns (this routine ends). Therefore, FIG. 192 The designated line on the upper side becomes the next 5th line (// 4), the motion deletion process of motion 8 is executed by this 5th line, and then the end process described later is executed by the 6th line, and the push described above is performed. The button production simply ends (the military commander's character does not appear).

[Symbol stop processing]
Next, the details of the symbol stop processing executed in step D608 in the above-mentioned scenario analysis processing will be described with reference to FIG. 148.
When this routine is started, first, in step D721, the same update process as in step D631 is executed, and then the process proceeds to step D722.
When the process proceeds to step D722, it is determined whether the data of the lower bits of the operation code specifies the left symbol, and if it is the left symbol, it returns after executing step D727, and if it is not the left symbol, it proceeds to step D723. In step D727, the value of the special symbol stop symbol area (left) (the value set in step D354 described above) is set as the current symbol (left).
When the process proceeds to step D723, it is determined whether the data of the lower bits of the operation code specifies the right symbol, and if it is the right symbol, it returns after executing step D728, and if it is not the right symbol, it proceeds to step D724. In step D728, the value of the special symbol stop symbol area (right) (the value set in step D354 described above) is set as the current symbol (right).

When the process proceeds to step D724, it is determined whether the data of the lower bits of the operation code specifies the middle symbol, and if it is the middle symbol, step D729 is executed and then the process proceeds to step D729a. If it is not the middle symbol, the process proceeds to step D725. In step D729, the value of the special symbol stop symbol area (middle) (the value set in step D354 described above) is set as the current symbol (middle).
When the process proceeds to step D729a, it is determined whether or not the look-ahead effect is being executed, and if it is being executed, the process proceeds to step F729b, and if it is not being executed, the process returns. Whether or not the pre-reading effect is being executed is determined by determining that the pre-reading effect is being executed if the pre-reading effect executing flag is set.
Proceeding to step D729b, it is determined whether the number of look-ahead effects is zero, and if it is zero, the look-ahead effect is finished. Return without executing F729c.

The number of pre-reading effects is the number of pre-reading executions, is set in step F101 described above, and is updated by -1 at the start of special figure fluctuation in step D117 described above.
Further, the look-ahead effect executing flag is a flag set in step F102 described above. In the case of this example, the fluctuation of the special figure stops in the order of left → right → middle, so clear the pre-reading effect execution flag at such a place (that is, the place where the middle symbol is stopped on the flowchart). (Steps D729a to D729c described above) are included. That is, in the state where the pre-reading effect executing flag is set and the pre-reading effect is being executed, when the number of pre-reading effects becomes zero, the pre-reading effect executing flag is cleared at the timing when the middle symbol is stopped. If the model has a different stop order for special figure fluctuations, the process may be performed to clear the symbol at the timing when the last stopped symbol is stopped.
Although omitted, processing such as checking the time reduction and the end of the number of fluctuations with a high probability is also performed at the same location on the flowchart (the location executed when the determination result in step D724 is YES).

Proceeding to step D725, it is determined whether the data of the lower bits of the operation code specifies the special figure 1 fourth symbol (the fourth symbol of the special figure 1), and if it is the special figure 1 fourth symbol, step D730 is executed. After that, it returns, and if it is not the special figure 1 fourth symbol, it proceeds to step D726. In step D730, the value of the special symbol stop symbol region (special diagram 1 fourth symbol) is set as the current symbol (special diagram 1 fourth symbol).

Proceeding to step D726, it is determined whether the data of the lower bits of the operation code specifies the special figure 2 fourth symbol (the fourth symbol of the special figure 2), and if it is the special figure 2 fourth symbol, step D731 is performed. It returns after execution, and returns if it is not the special figure 2 fourth symbol. In step D731, the value of the special symbol stop symbol region (special diagram 2 fourth symbol) is set as the current symbol (special diagram 2 fourth symbol).
This routine is a process for stopping the variable display of a symbol such as a decorative special symbol, and steps D727, D728, D729, D730, and D731 are processes for setting the stop symbol. For example, when the sixth line in the scenario table MS_LZ100 shown in FIG. 185 is the designated line, since the operation code is the stop symbol set code (left symbol), this routine is executed and the determination result in step D722 is YES. , The above step D727 is executed, and the stop symbol of the left symbol of the special symbol is set.

[Design back calculation replacement processing]
Next, the details of the symbol back calculation replacement process executed in step D609 in the above-mentioned scenario analysis process will be described with reference to FIG. 149.
When this routine is started, first, in step D741, the same update process as in step D631 is executed.
Next, in step D742, it is determined whether the data of the lower bits of the operation code specifies the left symbol, and if it is the left symbol, steps D743 and D744 are executed and then the process proceeds to step D745. If it is not the left symbol, step D748 is performed. move on.
In step D743, the remainder (operand mod 9) obtained by dividing the data of the operand by 9 is set as the frame difference.

In step D744, the result of subtracting the frame difference (value set in step D743) from the value of the special symbol stop symbol area (left) is set as the symbol number.
Then, when the process proceeds to step D745, it is determined whether the symbol number set in step D744 is less than 0 (minus value), and if it is less than 0, step D746 is executed and then step D747 is executed to return, and if it is not less than 0. Returns after executing step D747 without executing step D746.
In step D746, a value obtained by adding 9 to the symbol number is set as a new symbol number.
In step D747, the value of the symbol number (the value set in step D744 and adjusted in step D746 in the case of a minus) is set as the current symbol (left).

Next, when the process proceeds to step D748, it is determined whether the data of the lower bits of the operation code specifies the right symbol, and if it is the right symbol, steps D749 and D750 are executed and then the process proceeds to step D751. Proceed to D754.
In step D749, the remainder (operand mod 9) obtained by dividing the data of the operand by 9 is set as the frame difference.

In step D750, the result of subtracting the frame difference (value set in step D749) from the value of the special symbol stop symbol area (right) is set as the symbol number.
Then, when the process proceeds to step D751, it is determined whether the symbol number set in step D750 is less than 0. If it is less than 0, step D752 is executed and then step D753 is executed to return. If it is not less than 0, step D752 is performed. It returns after executing step D753 without executing it.
In step D752, a value obtained by adding 9 to the symbol number is set as a new symbol number.
In step D753, the value of the symbol number (the value set in step D750 and adjusted in step D752 in the case of a minus) is set as the current symbol (right).

Next, when the process proceeds to step D754, it is determined whether the data of the lower bits of the operation code specifies the middle symbol, and if it is the middle symbol, steps D755 and D756 are executed and then the process proceeds to step D757. do.
In step D755, the remainder (operand mod 9) obtained by dividing the data of the operand by 9 is set as the frame difference.

In step D756, the result of subtracting the frame difference (value set in step D755) from the value of the special symbol stop symbol area (middle) is set as the symbol number.
Then, when the process proceeds to step D757, it is determined whether the symbol number set in step D756 is less than 0. If it is less than 0, step D758 is executed and then step D759 is executed to return. If it is not less than 0, step D758 is performed. Return after executing step D759 without executing.
In step D758, a value obtained by adding 9 to the symbol number is set as a new symbol number.
In step D759, the value of the symbol number (the value set in step D756 and corrected in step D758 in the case of a minus) is set as the current symbol (middle).

The symbol back calculation replacement process described above is a process of replacing a symbol with a symbol several frames before the scheduled stop (a symbol a few frames before the symbol feed), such as at the moment of slowdown after the end of high-speed fluctuation.
For example, when the third line in the scenario table MS_LZ100 shown in FIG. 185 is the designated line, since the opcode is the left symbol back calculation replacement code, this routine is executed and the determination result in step D742 is YES, and the above Steps D743 to D747 are executed to set the current symbol (left). In this case, the operand is data meaning the number of symbol feeds, and in the third line of MS_LZ100, the operand is the number of feed frames (2). Therefore, in step D743, the remainder of the division of 2/9 is 2 Is set as the frame difference, and the symbol number is set in step D744 above using the value of this frame difference. For example, if the value of the special symbol stop symbol area (left) is 1, -1 (= 1-2) is set as the symbol number, and if the value of the special symbol stop symbol area (left) is 7, 5 (=). 7-2) is set as the symbol number. Then, if the symbol number set in step D744 is a negative value (for example, -1), step D746 is executed and the symbol number is changed to a value that has been cycled (for example, if it is -1, 8 = -1 + 9). After that, the symbol number is registered as the current symbol (left) in step D747.

The above operation is the same in the case of the right symbol (steps D748 to D753) and the case of the middle symbol (steps D754 to D759). Further, "9" in step D743 or the like represents the number of symbols in each reel (left symbol, middle symbol, right symbol). This may not be 9 depending on the model, and may be a different value for each reel. Similarly, "9" in step D335 and the like of the above-mentioned "stop symbol setting process" also represents the number of symbols.

[Variable scenario switching process]
Next, the details of the variable scenario switching process executed in step D610 in the above-mentioned scenario analysis process will be described with reference to FIG. 150.
When this routine is started, first, in step D761, it is determined whether the data of the operand is the left symbol scenario 2nd (instructing the switching of the variation display of the left symbol to the 2nd (first half)), and the left symbol scenario. If it is 2nd, steps D762 to 765 are sequentially executed and then returned, and if it is not the left symbol scenario 2nd, the process proceeds to step D767.
In step D762, the scenario layer number 1 is prepared because it is the left symbol.

In step D763, the address of the left symbol scenario 2nd table (scenario table for the left symbol and for the 2nd (first half)) is loaded and prepared from the symbol variation scenario table area. In the symbol variation scenario table area, as described in step D315 described above, various symbol variation scenario tables (for 1st (early stage), 2nd (first half), 3rd (second half)) are provided. The addresses of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol (existing respectively) are stored, and in this step D763, the address of the scenario table for the 2nd (first half) for the left symbol is prepared.
In step D764, the scenario data setting process described above is executed based on the data prepared in the immediately preceding steps D762 and D763.
In step D765, the address of the scenario management area 1 is set in the address area of the prepared scenario management area (for example, the address area of the scenario management area prepared in step D553 or the like) and returned. As a result, the scenario management area 1 is newly set as the target scenario management area.

Next, when the process proceeds to step D767, it is determined whether the data of the operand is the right symbol scenario 2nd (instructing the switching of the variation display of the right symbol to 2nd), and if it is the right symbol scenario 2nd, steps D768 to After executing 771 sequentially, it returns, and if it is not the right symbol scenario 2nd, the process proceeds to step D772.
In step D768, the scenario layer number 2 is prepared because it is the right pattern.

In step D769, the address of the right symbol scenario 2nd table (scenario table for the right symbol and for the 2nd) is loaded and prepared from the symbol variation scenario table area.
In step D770, the scenario data setting process described above is executed based on the data prepared in the immediately preceding steps D768 and D769.
In step D771, the address of the scenario management area 2 is set in the prepared address area of the scenario management area, and the process returns. As a result, the scenario management area 2 is newly set as the target scenario management area.

Next, when the process proceeds to step D772, it is determined whether the data of the operand is the middle symbol scenario 2nd (instructing the switching of the variation display of the middle symbol to 2nd), and if it is the middle symbol scenario 2nd, steps D773 to After executing 776 sequentially, it returns, and if it is not the middle symbol scenario 2nd, the process proceeds to step D777.
In step D773, the scenario layer number 3 is prepared because it is a medium symbol.

In step D774, the address of the middle symbol scenario 2nd table (scenario table for the middle symbol and for the 2nd) is loaded and prepared from the symbol variation scenario table area.
In step D775, the scenario data setting process described above is executed based on the data prepared in the immediately preceding steps D773 and D774.
In step D776, the address of the scenario management area 3 is set in the prepared address area of the scenario management area, and the process returns. As a result, the scenario management area 3 is newly set as the target scenario management area.

Next, when the process proceeds to step D777, it is determined whether the data of the operand is the left symbol scenario 3rd (instructing the switching of the variation display of the left symbol to 3rd (second half)), and if it is the left symbol scenario 3rd. After sequentially executing steps D778 to 781, the game returns, and if it is not the left symbol scenario 3rd, the process proceeds to step D782.
In step D778, the scenario layer number 1 is prepared because it is the left symbol.

In step D779, the address of the left symbol scenario 3rd table (scenario table for the left symbol and for the 3rd (second half)) is loaded and prepared from the symbol variation scenario table area.
In step D780, the scenario data setting process described above is executed based on the data prepared in the immediately preceding steps D778 and D779.
In step D781, the address of the scenario management area 1 is set in the prepared address area of the scenario management area, and the process returns. As a result, the scenario management area 1 is newly set as the target scenario management area.

Next, when the process proceeds to step D782, it is determined whether the data of the operand is the right symbol scenario 3rd (instructing the switching of the variation display of the right symbol to 3rd), and if it is the right symbol scenario 3rd, steps D783 to After executing 786 in sequence, it returns, and if it is not the right symbol scenario 3rd, the process proceeds to step D787.
In step D783, the scenario layer number 2 is prepared because it is the right pattern.

In step D784, the address of the right symbol scenario 3rd table (scenario table for the right symbol and for 3rd) is loaded and prepared from the symbol variation scenario table area.
In step D785, the scenario data setting process described above is executed based on the data prepared in the immediately preceding steps D783 and D784.
In step D786, the address of the scenario management area 2 is set in the prepared address area of the scenario management area, and the process returns. As a result, the scenario management area 2 is newly set as the target scenario management area.

Next, when the process proceeds to step D787, it is determined whether the data of the operand is the middle symbol scenario 3rd (instructing the switching of the variation display of the middle symbol to 3rd), and if it is the middle symbol scenario 3rd, steps D788 to It returns after executing 791 in sequence, and returns if it is not the middle symbol scenario 3rd.
In step D788, the scenario layer number 3 is prepared because it is a medium symbol.

In step D789, the address of the middle symbol scenario 3rd table (the scenario table for the middle symbol and for the 3rd) is loaded and prepared from the symbol variation scenario table area.
In step D790, the scenario data setting process described above is executed based on the data prepared in the immediately preceding steps D788 and D789.
In step D791, the address of the scenario management area 3 is set in the prepared address area of the scenario management area, and the process returns. As a result, the scenario management area 3 is newly set as the target scenario management area.

According to the fluctuation scenario switching process described above, the scenario switching of the section of the symbol fluctuation described above, that is, the switching of the scenario from the 1st (early stage) to the 2nd (first half) or from the 2nd (first half) to the 3rd (second half). Is done. In other words, in the variation display effect of the decorative special map, one variation is usually divided into three sections, "early stage, first half, second half", and the scenario of each section is switched and connected by this routine. For example, when the 9th line (// 8) of the last line in the scenario table MS_LZ100 shown in FIG. 185 is the specified line, the opcode is the variable scenario switching code and the operand is the left symbol scenario 2nd, so this routine Is executed, the determination result of the above step D761 becomes YES, the above steps D762 to D765 are executed, and a new scenario table (for example, MS_LZ300 shown in FIG. 185) for the left symbol and for the 2nd (first half) is controlled. It will be set as a scenario table, and settings will be made to execute this scenario table.
It should be noted that the time value of the "early stage, first half, second half" division differs depending on the type of fluctuation. There are also fluctuations without 3rd (second half) (variations without reach, etc.).

[Repeat processing]
Next, the details of the iterative process executed in step D611 in the scenario analysis process described above will be described from the upper side of FIG. 151.
When this routine is started, first, in step D795, the table address in the scenario data table area of the target scenario management area is returned to the previous record (the address that specifies the row immediately before the scenario table).
Next, in step D796, step D795 is executed for the operand acquired in step D588 to determine whether the table address has been returned to the previous record. Return to step D795 and repeat the process.

The iterative process described above is used when returning to a predetermined stage of the scenario table and repeating the operation in the same scenario. For example, when the 52nd line (// 51) of the last line in the scenario table shown in FIG. 177 is the specified line, this routine is executed because the opcode is the repetition code and the operand is the number of returns (22). When the step D795 is executed 22 times, the determination result of the step D796 becomes YES and the routine ends. As a result, the designated row of the scenario table is the 30th row (// 29) 22 rows before. Return to. The 30th line of the scenario table shown in FIG. 177 is the line for starting the movie of the customer waiting demo production (the operation code is the motion 0 registration code and the operand is the motion index No. (13)). Following the movie, the table structure is such that the design of the customer waiting demo production is displayed. Therefore, after that, the movie display and the symbol display as the customer waiting demo effect are repeated, and the data for one loop (data from the 30th row to the last row of the scenario table shown in FIG. 177) should be prepared. It will be done.

〔End processing〕
Next, the details of the termination process executed in step D612 in the above-mentioned scenario analysis process will be described from the lower side of FIG. 151.
When this routine is started, in step D798, NULL is set in the address area of the prepared scenario management area and returned. As a result, the setting of the target scenario management area is eliminated, and the scenario ends.
For example, when the 15th line (// 14) of the last line of the scenario table shown on the upper side of FIG. 192 is the specified line, since the operation code is the end code, this routine is executed and the target scenario management area is executed in step D798. The address area of is set to NULL, and the scenario ends. In this way, this routine is executed when all the scenarios in the series are completed.

[Motion control processing]
Next, the details of the motion control process executed in step D30 in the above-mentioned main process will be described with reference to FIG. 152.
When this routine is started, the loop processing of steps D801 to D818 is repeatedly executed while increasing the number X of the target motion management area from 0, and the end condition of this loop processing (control for all motion management areas 0 to 13). Ends) and returns. That is, at the start of this routine, first, in step D801, the number of the target motion management area is set to 0 (X = 0), the process proceeds to step D802 to execute the processes after step D802, but when the process proceeds to step D817, the target motion The number of the management area is increased by 1 (that is, X = X + 1), and it is determined in step D818 whether the above end condition (X = 14) is satisfied. It is configured to return to step D802 and proceed to step D802.

Hereinafter, step D802 and subsequent steps will be described assuming that the number of the target motion management area is X (actually, in the case of this example, any one of 0 to 13).
Proceeding to step D802, the initialization flag used in this routine is cleared, the address of the motion management area X is loaded from the address area of the motion management area X in the next step D803, and then the process proceeds to step D804.
When the process proceeds to step D804, it is determined whether the data of the address loaded in step D803 is NULL, and if it is NULL, control is not required for the motion X (the layer of the motion corresponding to the motion management area X), so the process proceeds to step D817 and the NULL is executed. If not, the process proceeds to step D805.

In step D805, the data of the motion list table area in the motion management area X (that is, the data that specifies the motion list table to be controlled this time and its rows) is loaded and prepared based on the address loaded in step D804. The process proceeds to step D806.
Proceeding to step D806, the data of the number of display frames in the row of the motion list table (hereinafter referred to as the designated row) specified by the data loaded in step D805 is read, and this number of display frames (the number of frames for executing a certain motion). If it is 0 or less, the process proceeds to step D817, which is abnormal, and if it is not 0 or less, the process proceeds to step D807, which is normal. For example, assuming that the first row in the motion list table shown in FIG. 176 is a designated row, the number of frames (number of display frames) is "1", so that the determination result in step D806 is NO and step D807. Proceed to. Further, for example, assuming that the fourth row in the list table is the designated row, the number of frames (number of display frames) is "216", so that the determination result in step D806 is also NO and the process proceeds to step D807. In this way, since the execution period is different for each motion, the number of display frames corresponding to each is defined on the motion list table, and the number of display frames should be defined for at least one frame, and this display should be defined. If the defined value of the number of frames on the motion list table is 0 or less, it is abnormal.

Proceeding to step D807, the value of the frame number in the motion management area X is read, it is determined whether the value of this frame number is less than 0, and if it is less than 0, it is when a motion is newly registered (at the time of motion registration). After executing step D808 (setting of initialization flag), the process proceeds to step D809. If it is not less than 0, it is considered that the motion is not registered and step D808 is not executed and the process proceeds to step D809. Since the frame number is set to "-1" in steps D657 and D662 in the above-mentioned motion data initialization processes 1 and 2 at the time of motion registration, the initialization flag is set in step D808 at the time of motion registration. NS. It should be noted that this initialization flag is a flag that is cleared in step D802 described above and determined in step D812 described later.

Proceeding to step D809, it is determined whether the value of the frame number in the motion management area X has reached the final number of frames (that is, the value obtained by subtracting 1 from the number of display frames described above) or more, and if it is less than the final number of frames, step D812. If the number of frames is equal to or greater than the final number of frames, steps D810 and D811 are sequentially executed, and then step D812 is performed.
In step D810, the motion data initialization process 1 described above is executed, and in step D811, the initialization flag is set in the same manner as in step D808.
Here, the fact that the frame number (starting from 0) reaches the final number of frames means that the control of the target motion table is completed up to the final frame. Therefore, if the determination result in step D809 is YES (the frame number has reached the final number of frames), the motion data initialization process 1 and the initialization flag set are executed in the same manner as at the time of motion registration, and the same. The motion table is configured to be executed from the beginning again.

When the process proceeds to step D812, it is determined whether or not the initialization flag is set, and if it is set, steps D813, D814, and D815 are executed in order to execute the target motion table from the beginning, and then step D816 is performed. If the initialization flag is not set (that is, if it is cleared), step D819 is executed and then step D816 is performed.
In steps D813, D814, and D815, the values of the frame number, the number of displays, and the command position in the motion management area X are set to 0, respectively.
In step D819, an update is performed in which the value of the frame number in the motion management area X is incremented by one. The reason for proceeding to step D819 is that the initialization flag is not set (that is, the target motion table is being executed), so that the frame number needs to be sequentially increased.

The display number value (value indicating the number of objects under control) set to 0 in step D814 is added or deleted by an object in the motion command execution process described later (for example, in step D881 described later). If it is, it will be updated (+1 or -1). Further, the value of the command position (value indicating the number of rows in the motion table) set to 0 in step D815 is also updated in the motion command execution process described later (for example, in step D880 described later). When the value of the command position is 0, it means that the designated line in the motion table is the first line. The display number value is the number of objects under control, not the number of objects (designs, notice characters, etc.) that are actually displayed at the same time on the screen.

Next, when the process proceeds to step D816, a motion command execution process (described later) for executing control of the target motion table is executed, and the process proceeds to step D817.
Proceeding to step D817, the address of the address area itself of the motion management area is updated. That is, the update that increases the value of the number X in the motion management area by 1 is executed. As a result, the target motion management area and the target motion layer are switched to the next. For example, if the motion management area 1 (the motion layer is the motion 1) is the control target before the execution of this step D817, the motion management area 2 (the motion layer is the motion 2) is the control target after the execution. ..
Then, when step D817 is executed, the process proceeds to step D818, and if the above-mentioned end condition (in this example, the number X = 14 is satisfied) is satisfied, a return is made, and if not, the process returns to step D801. The process is repeated from step D802.

[Motion command execution process]
Next, the details of the motion command execution process executed in step D816 in the above-mentioned motion control process will be described with reference to FIGS. 153 and 154.
When this routine is started, first, in step D821, from the motion list table area in the motion management area X (target motion management area), the data of the address of the motion list table (also referred to as the motion list table) (that is, that is). The motion list table to be controlled this time and the data specifying the row) are loaded, and the process proceeds to step D822.

Proceeding to step D822, the value of the command position in the motion management area X is read, and the value of this command position is the number of motion commands (the number of motion commands in the specified line of the motion list table specified by the address loaded in step D821). If it is more than the number of motion commands, it returns because all commands (all rows of the target motion table) have been executed, and if it is not more than the number of motion commands, it is the target. Step D823 proceeds to execute the motion table of the above for the next one frame. For example, assuming that the fourth row in the motion list table shown in FIG. 176 is the designated row, the number of motion commands is "1830". Therefore, in step D822, the value of the command position in the motion management area X is "1830". It is determined whether it is the above, and if it is not "1830" or more, the process proceeds to step D823. Further, the value of the command position in the motion management area X is initially initialized to 0 in steps D658, D663, etc. in the above-mentioned motion data initialization processes 1 and 2, and each row (command) of the motion table is initialized in step D843 described later. Is updated by +1 each time is executed, so if this value is "1830" or more, all the rows of the target motion table have been executed, so the configuration is such that a return is made.

Proceeding to step D823, the address (motion table name) of the motion table is acquired from the specified row of the target motion list table (the specified row of the motion list table specified by the address loaded in step D821). Step D824 proceeds. For example, assuming that the fourth row in the motion list table shown in FIG. 176 is the designated row, since the motion table name is "Mdat003", this "Mdat003" is acquired as the address of the motion table (from ROM (PROM321)). Take out). In the motion list table area of the RAM (RAM311a), the address of the leftmost column (position of the number of frames) of the motion list table (pointing to the address of the table in the ROM) is stored, and is described above. In step D821, this address is loaded from the motion list table area of the RAM. Then, in step D823, the value of the "motion table name (address)" indicated by the address two records ahead of the address loaded in step D821 is read from the ROM.
In this example, the address of the motion table and the name of the motion table correspond to each other, so if the name of the motion table is acquired, the address of the motion table is acquired.

Further, as described above, the motion table is a control table for executing each blocked display effect, but details will be described here. In the present application, an example of the motion table at the time of the push button notice is shown on the lower side of FIG. 192, an example of the motion table at the start of the normal fluctuation of the left symbol is shown in FIG. Many such motion tables are registered in the ROM (PROM321 in this example). As shown in these figures, each row of the motion table is set with the code of the command at the beginning, followed by the parameters corresponding to the command. However, there may be no parameters.

For example, the command "additional 1 code" and the parameter "character No. (design" 2 ")" are set in the first line of FIG. 186, and the command "behavior code" is set in the second line of the same. The parameters "object index (0)" and "behavior index (0)" are set, and on the 7th line, the command "move 1 code" and "object index (0)", "X coordinate (0)" are set. , "Y coordinate (-493)", "image width data (296)", "image height data (490)" are set, and on the 10th line, only the command "end code" is displayed. It is set. Here, the object index is a number assigned to the object to distinguish each object, and is automatically set in the order of being registered by the additional code. For example, the symbol "2" additionally registered in the first line of FIG. 186 becomes the object index (0), and the symbol "1" additionally registered in the third row becomes the object index (1). The additionally registered symbol "9" becomes the object index (2), and the value of the object index increases based on the number of characters (number of objects) to be displayed.

Then, the smaller the value of this object index, the more it is displayed in the back of the screen as the context of the display layer. That is, when the display positions overlap, the object having a large object index value is preferentially displayed on the screen.
Further, in the example of FIG. 186, three characters appear, but the total number of all characters in other categories (such as notices) used at the same time is managed to be 128. That is, in the VDP 312 of this example, 128 characters can be displayed and controlled at the same time. Since characters can be placed outside the screen, the number is not limited to 128 inside the screen.
Further, the example of the figure is the data for the first four frames of the motion table of the normal fluctuation (first half) of the left symbol. The delimiter to the end code is the data for one frame. For example, the first to tenth lines are the data for the first frame. Further, the numerical values such as the coordinate data and the size data only describe the values that are the meaning of this embodiment, and may be data including information after the decimal point. Actually, the data is a 16-bit signed fixed decimal number (sign bit, integer part 13 bits, decimal part 2 bits 2's complement).
If the same state as the previous frame is to be continued, only the end code needs to be defined.

The types and meanings of the motion table commands in this example are as follows.
-"Additional code"; A command to add an object. Depending on the type of object to be added (bitmap, moving image, monochrome rectangle), there are 1 additional code, 2 additional codes, and 3 additional codes, respectively.
-"Insert code": A command that inserts an object as a specific object index. Depending on the type of object to be inserted (same as above), there are insertion 1 code, insertion 2 code, and insertion 3 code. By executing this insertion code, the value of the object index of the already registered object deviates.
-"Move code": A command that specifies the display position and display size of an object. Depending on the designation method (1 point designation, 3 point designation), there are 1 movement code and 2 movement codes.
-"Effect code": A command that commands an effect that applies processing such as transparency to an image. There are an effect 1 code that specifies the effect type, an effect 2 code that specifies the effect parameter (for example, the transparency value (%)), and an effect 3 code that specifies the effect color.
-"Delete code": A command that commands the deletion of an object.
-"Change code": A command that commands a change to change an object's character (design, characters, etc.) by continuing the movement in the middle of the movement and replacing it as it is.
-"Decode code": A command that commands decoding of video data.
-"Replacement code": A command that commands object replacement (for example, control of switching characters between object index 0 and object index 1).
-"Behavior code": A command that commands the replacement of the character of an object.
-"Exit code": A command that indicates the end of data for one frame.
The motion table command is not limited to the one described above, and may include a command other than the above, or may have a mode in which any of the above commands is deleted.

Next, the processes after the step D823 will be described.
After passing through step D823, the process proceeds to step D823, and the loop processing with step D824 and step D844 as the loop end is repeatedly executed until the end condition (command = end) is satisfied. That is, immediately after the motion registration or the like, the command position k of the target motion management area X is set to 0 (a value that specifies the first row of the motion table) by the above-mentioned steps D658, D663, and D815 (k). = 0), each time the loop processing of steps D824 to D844 is repeated, the value of the command position k of the motion management area X is increased by 1 in steps D843, D880, etc. described later (k = k + 1), and the end condition is described in step D842. It is determined whether (the command at the command position k is the end command) is established, and if it is established, it returns through step D844, and if it is not established, it returns to step D824 via step D844 and proceeds to step D825. It has become.

Hereinafter, steps D825 and subsequent steps will be described assuming that the value of the command position of the target motion management area X is k.
Proceeding to step D825, the line corresponding to the command position k in the target motion table (motion table of the address acquired in step D823) (for example, the first line if k = 0, the second line if k = 1), ... If k = N, the command of the Nth line) is acquired, and then the command determination of whether or not each code is applicable is sequentially executed in steps D826 to D841 for this command, and one of the command determination results is YES. Then, the corresponding process (any of steps D851 to D866) is executed, and the process proceeds to step D844.

That is, in step D826, it is determined whether the code is an additional 1 code, and if YES, the bitmap addition process (process of adding a still image as an object, details will be described later) is performed in step D851, and then the process proceeds to step D844. If NO, step D827. Proceed to.
In step D827, it is determined whether the code is the additional 2 codes, and if YES, the mobilization addition process (process of adding a moving image as an object, which will be described in detail later) is performed in step D852, and then the process proceeds to step D844. If NO, the process proceeds to step D828.
In step D828, it was determined whether the code was an additional 3 codes, and if YES, a single color rectangle addition process (a process of adding a single color rectangle image that does not use the data of the character ROM (image ROM 322) as an object, details are omitted) was performed in step D853. Later, the process proceeds to step D844, and if NO, the process proceeds to step D829.
In step D829, it is determined whether the code is insertion 1, and if YES, the bitmap insertion process (processing of inserting a still image as an object, details are omitted) is performed in step D854, and then the process proceeds to step D844. If NO, the process proceeds to step D830. move on.

In step D830, it is determined whether the code is insertion 2, and if YES, the operation insertion process (processing of inserting a moving image as an object, details are omitted) is performed in step D855, and then the process proceeds to step D844. If NO, the process proceeds to step D831.
In step D831, it is determined whether the code is insertion 3, and if YES, the single color rectangle insertion process (the process of inserting the single color rectangular image as an object, details are omitted) is performed in step D856, and then the process proceeds to step D844. If NO, the step Proceed to D832.
In step D832, it is determined whether the movement is one code, and if YES, one point designation object movement processing (processing for setting the display position and display size of the object by the one point designation method, details will be described later) is performed in step D857. The process proceeds to step D844, and if NO, the process proceeds to step D833.
In step D833, it was determined whether the movement was 2 codes, and if YES, a 3-point designation object movement process (a process of setting the display position and display size of the object by the 3-point designation method, details are omitted) was performed in step D858. Later, the process proceeds to step D844, and if NO, the process proceeds to step D834.

In step D834, it is determined whether the code is the effect 1 code. If YES, the effect type designation process (described later) is performed in step D859, and then the process proceeds to step D844. If NO, the process proceeds to step D835.
In step D835, it is determined whether the code is the effect 2 code. If YES, the effect parameter specification process (described later) is performed in step D860, and then the process proceeds to step D844. If NO, the process proceeds to step D8.
In step D836, it is determined whether the code is the effect 3 code. If YES, the effect color specification process (process for setting the effect color, details are omitted) is performed in step D861, and then the process proceeds to step D844. If NO, the process proceeds to step D837.
In step D837, it is determined whether the code is a deletion code. If YES, the object deletion process (process for deleting the object, details will be described later) is performed in step D862, and then the process proceeds to step D844. If NO, the process proceeds to step D838.

In step D838, it is determined whether the code is a change code. If YES, the object change process (process for changing the object, details will be described later) is performed in step D863, and then the process proceeds to step D844. If NO, the process proceeds to step D839.
In step D839, it is determined whether the code is a decoding code. If YES, the object moving image decoding process (details will be described later) is performed in step D864, and then the process proceeds to step D844. If NO, the process proceeds to step D840.
In step D840, it is determined whether the code is a replacement code. If YES, the object replacement process (process for replacing objects, details are omitted) is performed in step D864, and then the process proceeds to step D844. If NO, the process proceeds to step D841.
In step D841, it is determined whether the code is a behavior code. If YES, the behavior index setting process (details will be described later) is performed in step D866, and then the process proceeds to step D844. If NO, the process proceeds to step D842.

Next, in step D842, it is determined whether the code is an end code, and if YES, the process proceeds to step D843, and if NO, the process proceeds to step D843.
In step D843, an update for increasing the value of the command position k by 1 is executed, and the process proceeds to step D844.
In step D844, if the determination result of step D842 is YES, a return is made, and if NO, the process returns to step D824 to execute step D826 and subsequent steps for the updated command position k.

A specific example of the operation for one frame by the loop processing of steps D824 to D844 will be described in the case of FIG. 186 as follows.
That is, since the command position k = 0 at first and the first line in which the additional 1 code is set is the designated line, YES is set in step D826, and the bitmap addition process in step D851 is executed, and this 1 The symbol "2" in the line is registered as the object index 0.
Next, k = 1, the second line where the behavior code is set is the specified line, and since the object index 0 and behavior index 0 are set as parameters, it becomes YES in step D841 and the behavior in step D866. The index setting process is executed, and the behavior index 0 is set for the object index 0 (that is, the symbol "2").

Next, k = 2, and the third line in which the additional 1 code is set is the specified line. Therefore, it becomes YES in step D826, the bitmap addition process in step D851 is executed, and it is in this third line. The symbol "1" is registered as the object index 1.
Next, k = 3, the fourth line where the behavior code is set is the specified line, and since the object index 1 and the behavior index 0 are set as parameters, it becomes YES in step D841 and the behavior in step D866. The index setting process is executed, and the behavior index 0 is set for the object index 1 (that is, the symbol "1").

Next, k = 4, and the 5th line in which the additional 1 code is set is the specified line. Therefore, it becomes YES in step D826, the bitmap addition process in step D851 is executed, and it is in this 5th line. The symbol "9" is registered as the object index 2.
Next, k = 5, the sixth line where the behavior code is set is the specified line, and since the object index 2 and the behavior index 0 are set as parameters, it becomes YES in step D841 and the behavior in step D866. The index setting process is executed, and the behavior index 0 is set for the object index 2 (that is, the symbol "9").

Next, k = 6, the 7th line where the move 1 code is set is the specified line, and the object index 0 etc. is set as a parameter, so YES is set in step D832 and one point is specified in step D857. The object movement process is executed, and the display setting of the image of the object index 0 (that is, the symbol "2") according to the coordinate data and the display size data in the 7th line is performed.
Next, k = 7, the 8th line where the move 1 code is set is the specified line, and the object index 1 etc. is set as a parameter, so YES is set in step D832 and one point is specified in step D857. The object movement process is executed, and the display setting of the image of the object index 1 (that is, the symbol "1") according to the coordinate data and the display size data in the eighth line is performed.

Next, k = 8, the 9th line where the movement 1 code is set is the specified line, and the object index 2 etc. are set as parameters, so YES is set in step D832 and one point is specified in step D857. The object movement process is executed, and the display setting of the image of the object index 2 (that is, the symbol "9") according to the coordinate data and the display size data in the 9th line is performed.
Next, k = 9, and the 10th line in which the end code is set is the designated line. Therefore, the result is YES in step D842, and the loop processing is completed and returned in step D844.
In this way, the first frame shown in FIG. 186 is completed. It should be noted that the third and subsequent frames shown in (b), (c), and (d) in the figure are similarly executed at each frame cycle (the above-mentioned processing cycle; for example, 1/30 second).

[Bitmap addition process]
Next, the details of the bitmap addition process executed in step D851 in the above-mentioned motion command execution process will be described with reference to FIG. 155. As described above, this routine is a process of adding a still image character as a display object.
When this routine is started, first, in step D871, the address of the motion list table (that is, the data that specifies the motion list table to be controlled this time and its row) is loaded from the motion list table area in the motion management area X. Then, the process proceeds to step D872.
Proceeding to step D872, it is determined whether the value of the number of displays in the motion management area X is equal to or greater than the maximum number of display elements. If there is, the process returns after sequentially executing steps D873 to D881. Here, the maximum number of display elements is a limit value of the number of displays (the number of objects to be controlled) that can be handled by one motion in consideration of the hardware limit of VDP 312 and the capacity of VRAM 312a (area for developing moving images, etc.). For example, it is set to 18 (still image 16 + moving image 2). However, 18 is only an example, and the present invention is not limited to this.

In step D873, the address of the display information area corresponding to the number of displays is set. For example, when the object is added for the first time, the number of displays is 1, so the address of the display information area corresponding to the number of displays 1 in the motion management area X is set. To give a specific example, for example, the display information area of the motion management area 5 (motion management area for the left symbol) is 3 for the first next symbol, the second current symbol, and the third previous symbol. There are pieces. And now, for example, assuming that the motion management area X = 5 (left symbol), the target motion table is shown in FIG. 186, and the command position k = 0, the command on the first line, which is the designated line, is This routine is executed because it is an additional 1 code. In this case, among the three display information areas of the motion management area 5, the display information area for the first next symbol corresponding to the number of displays 1 is the above. Since the data of the object (character No. (symbol "2")) specified by the parameter on the first line is set, in step D873, the address of the display information area for the first next symbol is set. Set. Similarly, when k = 2 (the designated line is the third line), the character No. of the third line is set in the display information area for the second current symbol corresponding to the number of displays 2. The address of the display information area for the second current symbol is set by setting the data of (symbol "1"), and when k = 4 (the specified line is the 5th line), the number of displays corresponds to 3. In the display information area for the third previous symbol, the character No. on the fifth line. The data of (symbol "9") is set, and the address of the display information area for the third previous symbol is set.

The "display number" set (saved) in the motion management area basically represents the MAX number of displayed objects (that is, the number of all objects set as control targets), but as in this routine. Since the number of objects increases in the additional processing, the "display number" fluctuates by +1 (for example, it is updated in step D881 described later), but when such additional processing is no longer performed. The number of displays will indicate the maximum number of objects to be displayed.

Next, in step D874, each data of one display information area (hereinafter, referred to as a target display information area) specified by the address set in step D873 is cleared to 0. This is because once all the values of the target display information area are set to 0, the initial values are set in the necessary areas. Note that 0 is cleared only in one display information area corresponding to the number of displays.
Next, in step D875, an undefined value (for example, “-1”) is saved as the value of the behavior index in the target display information area. This is to set the initial value to the state without behavior. In this example, even when the behavior index value is 0 (when the behavior index 0 is specified as in the parameters on the 2nd, 4th, and 6th lines in FIG. 186), there is a behavior (replacement of symbols, etc.). be.

Next, in step D876, still image information is saved as display type data in the target display information area. That is, here, information indicating that the object to be added is a still image is set.
Next, in step D877, the address (motion table name) of the motion table is acquired from the designated row of the target motion list table (the designated row of the motion list table specified by the address loaded in step D871). This is the same process as in step D823 described above.

Next, in step D878, the still image index corresponding to the command position k is acquired. Here, the still image index is a registration number of the still image character registered in the character ROM (image ROM 322), and is a parameter for specifying a row of the still image ROM member list table as shown in FIG. 174, for example. .. And now, for example, if the motion management area X = 5 (left symbol), the target motion table is shown in FIG. 186, and the command position k = 0, it is specified by the first line which is the designated line. The object is the character No. Since it is (symbol "2"), in step D878, "1" is acquired as the value of the still image index that specifies the row corresponding to the symbol "2" in the table of FIG. 174.
Next, in step D879, the value of the still image index acquired in step D878 is saved as an image index. The image index is information indicating a specific character (an image such as a still image or a moving image) as a display target, and is information used in step E51 or the like in the effect display editing process described later.

Next, in step D880, the command position is updated to the next record. That is, the update is performed so that the value k of the command position is increased by 1. This is because when the motion command execution process is executed in the next cycle, the next row of the motion table is set as the designated row for control.
Next, in step D881, since the object is added by this routine, the value of the display number in the motion management area X is updated by 1 and then returned.

The contents of each parameter of the still image ROM member list table shown in FIG. 174 are as follows.
-Image address offset: Indicates an offset value to the address where the character is stored in the character ROM.
-Palette address offset: Indicates an offset value to the address where the palette data used by the character is stored in the character ROM. In this example, since the described characters use the same palette, all the values are 0. However, the palette may be changed according to the needs of the characters. Places using different palettes will have different offset values.
-Image width and height; represents the size of the original image of the character. For example, the unit is pixels. In this example, since only the character at the time of fluctuation and the character of the push button are usually the same size, they are actually various values for each character. Also, even in a normal pattern, for example, the size of the person drawn on the pattern may be slightly different and the size of the appearance may be different, but in order to make it easier to handle with internal control, the size of the character in the transparent part Adjust the size so that characters in the same category have the same size.

-Width on VRAM: Refers to the width when the character is expanded into VRAM. In this example, since the compression type uses only "lossless compression 32-bit image", the width is the same as the original image. If you use lossy compression or reduce the number of bits in the color palette, the size will decrease.
-Image compression type: Indicates the compression type of each character stored in the character ROM. Examples of this compression type include the following types 0 to 6. There may be other types.
0: 32 bit full color image without compression 1: 8 bit full color image without compression 2: 4 bit full color image without compression 3: lossless compression 32 bit full color image 4: lossless compression 8 bit full color image 5: lossless compression 4 bit full color image 6: irreversible compressed image / image Compressed size; Indicates the compressed capacity of image data (character data). It is used as a parameter or the like when data is transferred from the character ROM 322 to the VRAM 312a (606, 607).
The category setting of the still image ROM member list table described above is an example.
Other parameters may be set.

[Video addition process]
Next, the details of the moving image addition process executed in step D852 in the above-mentioned motion command execution process will be described with reference to FIG. 156. As described above, this routine is a process of adding a moving image character as a display object.
When this routine is started, first, in step D891, the address of the motion list table is loaded and the process proceeds to step D892 in the same manner as in step D871.
Proceeding to step D892, similarly to step D872, it is determined whether the value of the number of displays in the motion management area X is equal to or greater than the maximum number of display elements, and if it is equal to or greater than the maximum number of display elements, it returns and is less than the maximum number of display elements. If this is the case, steps D893 to D897 are sequentially executed, and then the process proceeds to step D898.

In step D893, the address of the display information area corresponding to the number of displays is set in the same manner as in step D873.
In step D894, similarly to step D874, each data of one display information area (target display information area) specified by the address set in step D893 is cleared to 0.
In step D895, as in step D875, an undefined value (for example, “-1”) is saved as the value of the behavior index in the target display information area.
In step D896, similarly to step D877, the address of the motion table is acquired from the designated row of the target motion list table (the designated row of the motion list table specified by the address loaded in step D891).

In step D897, the moving image index corresponding to the command position k is acquired. Here, the moving image index is a registration number of a moving image character registered in the character ROM (image ROM 322), and is a parameter for designating a row of the moving image ROM member list table as shown in FIG. 175, for example. Then, assuming that the parameter of the object in the designated row of the target motion table (data set in the next column of the additional 2 code) is, for example, the animation symbol "1", in step D897, the table of FIG. 175 is used. Acquires "0" as the value of the moving image index that specifies the line corresponding to the animation symbol "1".

Next, in step D898, the data of the encoding type (described later) in the specified row of the video ROM member list table corresponding to the value of the video index acquired in step D897 is read, and the video encoding to be added based on this data is read. It is determined whether the type is an I-picture moving image, and if it is an I-picture moving image, the process proceeds to step D899, and if it is not an I-picture moving image, the process proceeds to step D904. In the case of FIG. 175, if the encoding type data is "0", it is an I-picture moving image. Therefore, if this data is "0", the process proceeds to step D899, and if the data is other than "0", the process proceeds to step D904. Become. The I-picture means frame data of an image that can be decoded independently without performing inter-frame prediction, and the I-picture moving image means a moving image composed of only I-pictures.

Next, when the process proceeds to step D899, steps D899 to D901 are sequentially executed, and then the process proceeds to step D902.
In step D899, the initial value "-1" is set as the data of the number of frame counts for I-pictures (frame counts at the time of moving images of only I-pictures) in the target display information area. If "-1" is set as the initial value, the frame count number for the I picture starts from "0".
In step D900, I-picture moving image information is saved as display type data in the target display information area. That is, here, information indicating that the object to be added is an I-picture moving object is set.
In step D901, the value of the moving image index acquired in step D897 is saved as an image index.

On the other hand, when the process proceeds to step D904, steps D904 and D905 are sequentially executed, and then step D906 is performed.
In step D904, the loop playback flag is set in order to instruct the VDP 312 to loop the moving image. It is also possible to set it so that it does not loop.
In step D905, the moving image decoding area securing process for securing the storage area of the RAM 311a for decoding the moving image data is executed.
Then, when the process proceeds to step D906, as a result of the moving image decoding area securing process, it is determined whether the area is correctly allocated. If YES, steps D907 and D908 are executed to proceed to step D902, and if NO, the process returns. If the area cannot be secured correctly due to overcapacity or the like, the result is NO.
In step D907, normal moving image information is saved as display type data in the target display information area. That is, here, information indicating that the object to be added is a normal moving object (that is, not an I-picture moving object) is set.
In step D908, the index value of the area allocated by the moving image decoding area securing process is saved as an image index.

Next, when the process proceeds to step D902, steps D902 and D903 are sequentially executed and then returned.
In step D902, the command position is updated to the next record in the same manner as in step D880.
In step D903, as in step D881, the update is performed so that the value of the number of displays in the motion management area X is increased by one.

The contents of each parameter of the moving image ROM member list table shown in FIG. 175 are as follows.
-Movie address offset: Indicates the offset value to the address where the movie is stored in the character ROM.
-Width and height of the movie; Indicates the size of the original image of the movie. For example, the unit is pixels. As with the still image, adjust the transparent part so that the size of the movie in the same category is the same.
-Number of frames of the movie; Indicates how many consecutive pictures the movie is composed of. In this embodiment, 1 second = 30 frames are controlled, so a movie is created with that in mind. If the control is executed so as to be 60 frames per second, the playback will be performed at double speed. The reverse is also true.

-Α value setting: Information indicating whether or not the movie contains alpha channel information. 0 = no alpha, 1 = alpha. With alpha, you can change the transparency of the movie. If not, it will be opaque only.
-Encode type: Indicates how the movie is organized. There are the following types 0 to 2.
0 = Consists of only I-pictures 1 = Consists of I-pictures and P-pictures with reference to one sheet (Refer to one past I-picture or P-picture to create the P-picture)
2 = A configuration including two reference P pictures in addition to the above 1 (the P picture is created by referring to two past I or P and two past I or P).
However, the present invention is not limited to the above encoding types, and a configuration including, for example, a B picture may be used.
The category setting of the video ROM member list table explained above is an example.
Other parameters may be set.

[1 point designation object movement processing]
Next, the details of the one-point designation object movement process executed in step D857 in the above-mentioned motion command execution process will be described with reference to FIG. 157.
When this routine is started, steps D911 to D924 are sequentially executed, and then returns.
In step D911, the address of the motion list table is loaded in the same manner as in step D871.
In step D912, the address of the motion table is acquired from the designated row of the target motion list table (the designated row of the motion list table specified by the address loaded in step D911).

In step D913, the object index corresponding to the command position k is acquired from the target motion table specified by the address acquired in step D912. For example, if FIG. 186 is the target motion table and k = 6 (the specified line is the 7th line), this routine is executed because the command is the movement 1 code. In this case, the 7th line is executed. Since the object index is (0), 0 is acquired as the object index in step D913.
In step D914, the address of the display information area (display information area in the motion management area X) corresponding to the object index acquired in step D913 is set. For example, in FIG. 186, when k = 6 (the designated line is the 7th line), the object index 0 is the symbol "2" (next symbol) added in the 1st row, so that the first symbol corresponding to the next symbol is used. The address of the display information area is set.

In step D915, the X coordinate data corresponding to the command position k is acquired.
In step D916, the X coordinate of the upper left point of the display and the X coordinate of the lower left point of the display in the target display information area (the display information area whose address was set in step D914, hereinafter the same in this routine) are the X acquired in step D915. Save the coordinate data.
In step D917, the Y coordinate data corresponding to the command position k is acquired.
In step D918, the Y coordinate data acquired in step D917 is saved as the Y coordinate of the upper left point of the display and the Y coordinate of the upper right point of the display in the target display information area.

In step D919, the image width data and the image height data corresponding to the command position k are acquired.
In step D920, the image width data acquired in step D919 is added to the X coordinate data acquired in step D915, and in the next step D921, this addition result is saved as the X coordinate of the upper right point of the display in the target display information area. ..
In step D922, the image height data acquired in step D919 is added to the Y coordinate data acquired in step D917, and in the next step D923, this addition result is saved as the Y coordinate of the lower left point of the display in the target display information area. do.
Then, in step D924, the command position is updated to the next record in the same manner as in step D880.

According to the above steps D915 to D923, the following operations are realized. For example, in FIG. 186, when k = 6 (the designated line is the 7th line), the X coordinate data is "0", the Y coordinate data is "-493" (minus indicates the position outside the screen on the upper side of the screen), and the image. The width data is "296" and the image height data is "490". Therefore, "0" is acquired in step D915, "-493" is acquired in step D917, and "296" and "490" are acquired in step D919. Then, the addition result in step D920 is "296" (= 0 + 296), and the addition result in step D922 is "-3" (= -493 + 490). Therefore, in step D916, "0" is saved as the X coordinate of the upper left point of the display and the lower left point of the display, and in step D918, "-493" is saved as the Y coordinate of the upper left point of the display and the upper right point of the display. Then, "296" is saved as the X coordinate of the upper right point of the display, and "-3" is saved as the Y coordinate of the lower left point of the display in step D923. As a result, the display position of the target object (in this case, the next symbol "2") is set as the coordinates of three points (display upper left point, display lower left point, display upper right point). In this case, the position of the upper left corner on the screen is the origin (X coordinate = 0, Y coordinate = 0), and all the Y coordinates set as described above are negative values, so the object of this next symbol is , The display position is set outside the screen on the upper side of the screen, and the image of this next pattern is not yet visible on the screen.

As described above, according to this routine, one point is specified, but as a result, three points are specified. This is because the object (character) has a quadrangular shape, so if you have the coordinates of the upper left reference point and the height and width data of the object, you can use the upper right point and lower left point as in steps D920 and D922 above. This is because the coordinates are obtained. As described above, the display information area in the motion management area has an area for inputting each coordinate value of the three points determined in this way, and in steps D916, D918, D921, and D923, registration is performed in each area. ..
Regarding the 3-point designation object movement process executed in step D858 in the above-mentioned motion command execution process, detailed description by showing a flowchart is omitted, but this process is also substantially the same as the above-mentioned 1-point designation object move process. It is done in. However, in the case of specifying three points, since each coordinate data is on the motion table, the addition process as described in steps D920 and D922 is unnecessary, and all the coordinate data acquired from the motion table are used as they are. The processing content is only saved in each area of the display information area.

[Effect type specification processing]
Next, the details of the effect type designation process executed in step D859 in the above-mentioned motion command execution process will be described with reference to the flowchart on the left side of FIG. 158.
When this routine is started, steps D931 to D940 are sequentially executed, and then returns.
In step D931, the address of the motion list table is loaded in the same manner as in step D871.
In step D932, the address of the motion table is acquired from the designated row of the target motion list table (the designated row of the motion list table specified by the address loaded in step D931).

In step D933, the object index corresponding to the command position k is acquired from the target motion table specified by the address acquired in step D932. For example, if FIG. 196 is the target motion table and k = m + 5 (the specified line is m + 6th line), this routine is executed because the command is the effect 1 code. In this case, k = m + 5 Since the object index is (1), 1 is acquired as the object index in step D933.
In step D934, the address of the display information area (display information area in the motion management area X) corresponding to the object index acquired in step D933 is set. For example, in the case of k = m + 5 in FIG. 196, since the object index 1 is the character "smoke signal" added by k = m + 2 (m + 3rd line), the display information area corresponding to this character "smoke signal" The address is set.

In step D935, the effect type data corresponding to the command position k is acquired.
In step D936, the data acquired in step D935 is saved as the effect type in the target display information area (display information area whose address is set in step D934, the same applies in this routine).
For example, in the case of k = m + 5 in FIG. 196, since the effect type is (1), this is acquired in step D935 and set in the target display information area in step D936.
Next, in steps D937, D938, and D939, the effect parameter, foreground color, and background color data in the target display information area are cleared, respectively.
Then, in step D940, the command position is updated to the next record in the same manner as in step D880.

In this routine described above, for example, the type of blending method when displaying a plurality of objects in an overlapping manner is set. That is, for example, the effect type (1) is a kind of an effect that gives transparency (transparency), and the effect that gives transparency is the image of the rear (back side) layer that has the same display position and overlaps, and the front. It can be said that it is a process of mixing (blending) with the image of the layer of, and in this routine, the type of the blend is set.

[Effect parameter specification processing]
Next, the details of the effect parameter specification process executed in step D860 in the above-mentioned motion command execution process will be described with reference to the flowchart on the right side of FIG. 158.
When this routine is started, steps D941 to D947 are sequentially executed, and then returns.
In step D941, the address of the motion list table is loaded in the same manner as in step D871.
In step D942, the address of the motion table is acquired from the designated row of the target motion list table (the designated row of the motion list table specified by the address loaded in step D941).

In step D943, the object index corresponding to the command position k is acquired from the target motion table specified by the address acquired in step D942. For example, if FIG. 196 is the target motion table and k = m + 7 (the specified line is m + 8th line), this routine is executed because the command is the effect 2 code. In this case, k = m + 7 Since the object index is (1), 1 is acquired as the object index in step D943.
In step D944, the address of the display information area (display information area in the motion management area X) corresponding to the object index acquired in step D943 is set. For example, in the case of k = m + 7 in FIG. 196, since the object index 1 is the character "smoke signal" added by k = m + 2 (m + 3rd line), the address of the display information area corresponding to this character "smoke signal" is set. Will be done.

In step D945, the effect parameter data corresponding to the command position k is acquired.
In step D946, the data acquired in step D945 is saved as an effect parameter in the target display information area (display information area whose address is set in step D944, the same applies in this routine).
For example, in the case of k = m + 7 in FIG. 196, since the effect parameter is (7), this is acquired in step D945 and set in the target display information area in step D946.

Here, the effect parameter indicates the ratio of the transparency (darkness) of the object when blending. Assuming that the value of the effect parameter is P, in the case of this example, the data obtained by converting the percentage of transparency into the numerator of "P / 255" is defined on the table. Specifically, for example, when 100% is a normal display (no transparency), the parameter P when displaying at a density of about 10% is 25 (≈255 × 10/100). On the contrary, as in the above-mentioned specific example, when the value of the parameter P is 7, the transparency is about 2.7% (= 100 × 7/255), which means that it is considerably thin. However, when 100% display is performed, the above-mentioned effect type specification process and this routine effect parameter specification process are not executed.
Next, in step D947, the command position is updated to the next record in the same manner as in step D880.

[Object deletion process]
Next, the details of the object deletion process executed in step D862 in the above-mentioned motion command execution process will be described with reference to the flowchart on the left side of FIG. 159.
When this routine is started, first, in step D951, the address of the motion list table is loaded in the same manner as in step D871.
Next, in step D952, it is determined whether the value of the display number in the motion management area X is 0 or less, and if it is 0 or less, there is no display number (that is, there is no object to be deleted), so a return is made and 0. If not the following, the process proceeds to step D953.
When the process proceeds to step D953, steps D953 to D955 are sequentially executed, and then the process proceeds to step D956.
In step D953, the address of the motion table is acquired from the designated row of the target motion list table (the designated row of the motion list table specified by the address loaded in step D951).

In step D954, the object index corresponding to the command position k is acquired from the target motion table specified by the address acquired in step D953. For example, if FIG. 196 is the target motion table and k = o + 1 (the specified line is o + 2nd line), this routine is executed because the command is the deletion code. In this case, the object with k = o + 1 is executed. Since the index is (1), 1 is acquired as the object index in step D954.
In step D955, the address of the display information area (display information area in the motion management area X) corresponding to the object index acquired in step D954 is set. For example, in the case of k = o + 1 in FIG. 196, since the object index is 1, the address of the display information area corresponding to the object index 1 is set at this point.

Proceeding to step D956, it is determined whether the display type data in the motion management area X is normal moving image information, and if it is normal moving image information, the moving image decoding area opening process (details are omitted) is executed in step D957, and then the step is taken. The process proceeds to D958, and if it is not normal moving image information (that is, it is an I-picture moving image), the process proceeds to step D958 without executing step D957.
When the process proceeds to step D958, steps D958 to D960 are sequentially executed and then returned.
In step D958, the information in the display information area after the acquired object index is shifted (moved) forward. That is, in the motion management area X, the data in the display information area after the address set in step D955 is shifted to the previous display information area by one amount. As a result, the data in the display information area of the address set in step D955 is deleted, and the object corresponding to the deleted data is deleted.
In step D959, the command position is updated to the next record in the same manner as in step D880.
Then, in step D960, since the object is deleted by this routine, the update that reduces the value of the number of displays in the motion management area X by 1 is executed.

[Object change processing]
Next, the details of the object change process executed in step D863 in the above-mentioned motion command execution process will be described with reference to the flowchart on the right side of FIG. 159.
When this routine is started, steps D961 to D967 are sequentially executed, and then returns.
In step D961, the address of the motion list table is loaded in the same manner as in step D871.
In step D962, the address of the motion table is acquired from the designated row of the target motion list table (the designated row of the motion list table specified by the address loaded in step D961).
In step D963, the object index corresponding to the command position k is acquired from the target motion table specified by the address acquired in step D962.

In step D964, the address of the display information area (display information area in the motion management area X) corresponding to the object index acquired in step D963 is set.
In step D965, the index (the above-mentioned still image index or moving image index) of the changed character (changed character) corresponding to the command position k in the target motion table is acquired.
In step D966, the index value acquired in step D965 is saved as an image index. As a result, it is possible to change the object in which only the image (characters such as symbols and characters) changes.
Then, in step D967, the command position is updated to the next record in the same manner as in step D880.

[Object video decoding process]
Next, the details of the object moving image decoding process executed in step D864 in the above-mentioned motion command execution process will be described with reference to FIG. 160.
When this routine is started, steps D971 to D974 are executed in sequence, and then step D975 proceeds.
In step D971, the address of the motion list table is loaded in the same manner as in step D871.
In step D972, the address of the motion table is acquired from the designated row of the target motion list table (the designated row of the motion list table specified by the address loaded in step D971).

In step D973, the object index corresponding to the command position k is acquired from the target motion table specified by the address acquired in step D972. For example, if the table shown at the bottom of FIG. 194 is the target motion table and k = 3 (the specified line is the 4th line), this routine is executed because the command is the decode code. In this case, , Since the object index of k = 3 is (0), 0 is acquired as the object index in step D973.
In step D974, the address of the display information area (display information area in the motion management area X) corresponding to the object index acquired in step D973 is set. For example, when k = 3 in the table of FIG. 194, the object index 0 is the symbol "1" added at k = 0 (first row), so that the display information area corresponding to this symbol "1" The address is set.

When the process proceeds to step D975, it is determined whether the display type data in the motion management area X is the I-picture moving image information. If not, the process proceeds to step D976.
In step D977, the address of the area of the frame count number for I-picture (frame count at the time of moving image of only I-picture) in the target display information area (display information area whose address is set in step D974, hereinafter the same in this routine). To set.
In step D978, based on the address set in step D977, the data of the number of I-picture frame counts in the target display information area is updated by one.

Proceeding to step D979, it is determined whether the number of I-picture frame counts updated in step D978 is equal to or greater than the number of video frames (the number of video frames corresponding to the image index data at this point), and is greater than or equal to the number of video frames. If this is the case, the process proceeds to step D983 after executing step D980, and if the number is not equal to or greater than the number of moving image frames, step D980 is not executed and the process proceeds to step D983.
In step D980, since the moving image specified by the image index (in this case, the moving image index) is displayed up to the final frame, the number of frame counts for the I picture in the target display information area is set in order to restart the moving image from the beginning. Set the data to 0 (start value).

When the process proceeds to step D976, it is determined whether the display type data in the motion management area X is normal moving image information. If it is normal moving image information, steps D981 and D982 are executed and then step D983 is performed. Returns as abnormal.
In step D981, the data registered as the image index at this point (in this case, the moving image index data) is loaded.
In step D982, a moving image decoding process (details are omitted) for decoding (decoding) one frame of the moving image corresponding to the index loaded in step D981 is executed.
Then, when the process proceeds to step D983, the command position is updated to the next record in the same manner as in step D880.
In the case of an I-picture moving image, the pictures of each frame exist independently, so the number of frames may be managed. Later, when instructing the internal register of VDP312, the count (the number of frame counts for I-picture) becomes important.

[Behavior index setting process]
Next, the details of the behavior index setting process executed in step D866 in the above-mentioned motion command execution process will be described with reference to FIG. 161.
When this routine is started, steps D991 to D997 are executed in sequence, and then returns.
In step D991, the address of the motion list table is loaded in the same manner as in step D871.
In step D992, the address of the motion table is acquired from the designated row of the target motion list table (the designated row of the motion list table specified by the address loaded in step D991). As shown in FIG. 176 described above, a behavior table name corresponding to the address of the behavior table is also set in the designated row of the motion list table (however, it may be NULL).

In step D993, the object index corresponding to the command position k is acquired from the target motion table specified by the address acquired in step D992. For example, if FIG. 196 is the target motion table and k = 1 (the specified line is the second line), this routine is executed because the command is behavior code. In this case, the object with k = 1 Since the index is (0), 0 is acquired as the object index in step D993.
In step D994, the address of the display information area (display information area in the motion management area X) corresponding to the object index acquired in step D993 is set. For example, when k = 1 in FIG. 196, the object index 0 is the (scroll open blue) added at k = 0 (first line), so the address of the display information area corresponding to this (roll open blue). Is set.

In step D995, the data of the behavior index corresponding to the command position k is acquired.
In step D996, the data acquired in step D995 is saved as a behavior index in the target display information area (the display information area whose address is set in step D994, hereinafter the same in this routine).
For example, when k = 1 in FIG. 196, since the behavior index is (0), this is acquired in step D995 and set in the target display information area in step D996.
Then, in step D997, the command position is updated to the next record in the same manner as in step D880.

The behavior table is a table (data table registered in PROM321) consisting of rows in which the processing address of the behavior (character replacement) is set, and a specific row (designated row) in this row is specified. Is the behavior index. Therefore, once the values of the behavior table and behavior index are determined, the processing address of the behavior is determined and the content of the behavior is specified. This routine performs control processing to specify the contents of such behaviors. For example, in FIG. 196, the second line of k = 1 instructs the object of object index 0 (scroll opening blue) to execute the behavior (character replacement) specified by behavior index 0. The target information display area is set accordingly. The behavior specified by the behavior index 0 is, for example, a control such as changing the color of the notice character (see FIG. 197) of the opened scroll from blue to red for jackpot reliability notification.

[Production display editing process]
Next, the details of the effect display editing process executed in step D31 in the above-mentioned main process will be described with reference to FIGS. 162, 163, and 164. In the following, step E will be used as the step number. As described in the main process, this effect display editing process is a process of setting various commands and their parameters for instructing the VDP 312 of the drawing contents on the display device 41. In this effect display editing process, the commands are set in a table shape, and the commands set in this way are sequentially transmitted to the VDP 312 in step D34 (instructing screen drawing) of the main process.
When this routine is started, the loop processing A of steps E1 to E50 is repeatedly executed for the number of motion management areas, and then returns. The loop process A includes the loop process B of steps E6 to E48, and the loop process B further includes the loop process C of steps E39 to E43.

In the loop process A, the process is executed from step E2 for the motion management area X (that is, the motion management area 0 at first) with X = 0 at first, and the address area of the motion management area is updated (that is, when the process proceeds to step E49). , X = X + 1), and in the next step E50, it is determined whether the loop processing A has been completed for all the motion management areas (in this example, X = 14), and the determination result in step E50 is YES. If the result is (that is, if the end condition of the loop process A is satisfied), the process returns, and if NO, the loop process A is repeated from step E2.
Hereinafter, the processes after step E2 will be described.
In step E2, it is determined whether the data in the address area of the motion management area X is NULL, and if it is NULL, control is not required for the motion management area X, so the process proceeds to step E49. If it is not NULL, steps E3 to E5 are sequentially performed. After the execution, the process proceeds to step E6. When the result is determined to be NULL (YES) in step E2 and the process proceeds to step E49, the following processes including the loop process B and the loop process C are not naturally executed for the motion management area X.

In step E3, the motion list table to be controlled this time is loaded and prepared.
In step E4, all the blend information areas are cleared. The blend information area is an area in the RAM 311a that stores the parameter information of the internal register of the VDP 312 for comparison between old and new. That is, the VDP 312 has four types of internal register parameters that indicate inter-pixel calculation fixed values at the time of blending for the effect. The RAM 311a is provided with an area for storing the current setting information and the previous setting information for each of the four types of parameters, and this is the blend information area.
In step E5, parameters for inter-pixel calculation (that is, four types of parameters set in the internal registers of VDP312) are set.

Next, when the process proceeds to step E6, the loop process B is started. In the loop process B, steps E6 to E48 are repeatedly executed until the closing price (closing price = display number -1) is reached while increasing the variable i from the initial value 0 by an increment of 1, and then the process proceeds to step E49. That is, in step E6, immediately after the start of the loop, the variable i is set to 0 and the process proceeds to step E7. In step E48, if the variable i is less than the closing price, the process returns to step E6, and if the variable i is greater than or equal to the closing price, the process proceeds to step E49. Then, when returning to step E6, the value of the variable i is increased by 1 and the process proceeds to step E7. The closing price value is a value obtained by subtracting 1 from the display number data set in the motion management area X. That is, in this loop process B, steps E6 to E48 are repeatedly executed for the number of display times, and then the process proceeds to step E49.

Hereinafter, the processes after step E7 will be described.
When the process proceeds to step E7, steps E7 to E9 are sequentially executed, and then the process proceeds to step E10.
In step E7, the color parameter of the internal register of VDP312 is set to correspond to the α value.
In step E8, the α flag used for the process described later is set to have α.
In step E9, the address of the display information area (hereinafter referred to as the target display information area) corresponding to the variable i in the motion management area X is loaded.
Next, when the process proceeds to step E10, the value of the behavior index in the display information area of the address loaded in step E9 is read, it is determined whether the data of some index other than NULL is set, and the data of some behavior index is set. If yes (yes), the process corresponding to the behavior index is executed in step E11, and then the process proceeds to step E12. If NO, step E11 is not executed and the process proceeds to step E12.

The process corresponding to the behavior index executed in step E11 is to execute the behavior (replacement of image data) specified by the behavior index for the object (target object) corresponding to the target display information area. This is the process specified by the process address set in the row specified by the behavior index in the above-mentioned behavior table.
For example, when the target object is the current symbol of the left symbol, the flowchart process (display left symbol conversion process) shown on the left side of FIG. 166, which will be described later, is executed in step E11. In the present application, specific examples of the processing executed in step E11 are also shown on the right side of FIG. 166 and FIG. 167, but the details thereof will be described later.
When step E11 is executed, the image index data is changed immediately before the display, for example, the basic symbol is replaced with a predetermined symbol to be displayed, or the color of the push button (PB) image is changed from the basic color. It may be replaced with a predetermined color according to the game state (for example, a specific color indicating the jackpot reliability). Since the display pattern of the character defined on the motion table is fixed, basically, unless the motion table is changed, it is not possible to correspond to different stop symbols for each fluctuation and different notice characters due to distribution. .. Therefore, in this example, the behavior is embedded in the necessary part and the character is replaced so that a flexible response can be performed.

Proceeding to step E12, the effect type data set in the target display information area is read, and whether this is a basic blend, an addition blend, or a subtraction blend is determined in steps E12, E13, and E14, and any of them is determined. If it corresponds to the blend type of, the process proceeds to step E15, and if it does not correspond to any of the blend types, steps E15 to E18 are skipped and the process proceeds to step E21.

When the process proceeds to step E15, the value of the effect parameter set in the target display information area is loaded, applied to the color parameter, and then the process proceeds to step E16.
When the process proceeds to step E16, it is determined from the data such as the display type set in the target display information area that the drawing specification is normal video non-transparent playback, and if YES, the process proceeds to step E17, and if NO, the step Proceed to E21.
Proceeding to step E17, it is determined whether the target moving image (the one determined to be non-transparent playback of the normal moving image in step E16) is registered without α, and if YES, the α flag is set to no α in step E18. After setting, the process proceeds to step E21. If NO, the process proceeds to step E21 without executing step E18.

Next, when the process proceeds to step E21, the effect type data set in the target display information area is read, and whether this is an addition blend, a subtraction blend, a multiplication blend, a screen blend, or a difference blend is compared (dark). ) Blend or inversion blend is determined in steps E21 to 27, respectively, and if any of the blend types is applicable, the corresponding process (corresponding process in steps E31 to E37) is executed, and then the process proceeds to step E39. If none of the blend types are applicable, the process proceeds to step E28.
Here, step E31 is a process executed in the case of addition blending (a process of setting an addition type drawing effect), and step E32 is a process executed in the case of subtraction blending (a process of setting a subtraction type drawing effect). Process), step E33 is a process executed in the case of multiplication blend (processing to set a multiplication type drawing effect), and step E34 is a process executed in the case of screen blending (screen type drawing effect). Step E35 is a process to be executed in the case of a difference blend (a process to set a difference type drawing effect), and step E36 is a process to be executed in the case of a comparison (dark) blend (comparison). It is a process of setting a (dark) type drawing effect), and step E37 is a process executed in the case of inversion blending (a process of setting an inversion type drawing effect).

Next, when the process proceeds to step E28, it is determined whether the α flag is set to α, and if there is no α, the drawing effect without α is set in step E29 and the process proceeds to step E39. , With α), set the drawing effect of the type with α in step E38, and proceed to step E39.
In steps E29 and E31 to E38, various parameters for blending (4 types in this example) are set in the corresponding blend information area according to the setting of the effect type of the target information display area. There is.

Next, when the process proceeds to step E39, the loop process C is started. In the loop process C, steps E39 to E43 are repeatedly executed until the closing price (closing price = 3) is reached while increasing the variable j corresponding to the above-mentioned four types of blend information regions by an increment of 1 from the initial value 0, and then the step. Proceed to E44.
That is, in step E39, immediately after the start of the loop, the variable j is set to 0 and the process proceeds to step E40.
When the process proceeds to step E40, it is determined whether the blend information area corresponding to the variable j has been changed, and if it has been changed, steps E41 and E42 are sequentially executed to proceed to step E43. If not, step E41, The process proceeds to step E43 without executing E42. Here, the determination in step E40 is performed by determining if the previous data and the current data in the corresponding blend information area do not match, it is determined that the data has been changed, and if they match, it is determined that the data has not been changed.
Further, in step E41, the inter-pixel calculation fixed value of the resist parameter corresponding to the variable j is set in the internal register of VDP 312, and in step E42, the current blend information is set as the previous blend information.

Then, when the process proceeds to step E43, if the variable j is less than the closing price, the process returns to step E39, and if the variable j is the closing price, the loop process C is exited and the process proceeds to step E44. Then, when returning to step E39, the value of the variable j is increased by 1 and the process proceeds to step E40.
The reason why the variable j has four ranges is that, as described above, the VDP 312 has four types of internal register parameters that indicate the inter-pixel calculation fixed value at the time of blending. Further, it is specified that the areas (blend information areas) corresponding to each register are provided for the previous time and the current time, and the setting process of step E41 is performed only when the old and new data of this blend information area are compared and matched. This is because it is set in the register of VDP 312 only when the value to be set changes (to improve the efficiency of the setting process in VDP).

Next, when the process proceeds to step E44, the data of the display type (display type) set in the target display information area is read, and whether this is a still image, a normal video, an I-picture video, or a single-color quadrangle is stepped. Judgment is performed in E44 to 47, and if any display type other than the single color quadrangle is applicable, the corresponding processing (corresponding processing in steps E51 and E52, steps E53 and E54, or steps E55 to E57) is executed. Later, the process proceeds to step E58, if it is a single-color quadrangle, the process proceeds to step E59, and if none of the display types is applicable, the process proceeds to step E48.
Here, steps E51 and E52 are executed in the case of a still image, the image index data is loaded in step E51, and the attributes of the still image data are set based on the loaded image index data in step E52. Execute the process. After passing through step E52, the process proceeds to step E58, and character drawing processing (described later) is executed based on the data loaded in step E51 and the settings in step E52.

Further, steps E53 and E54 are executed in the case of a normal moving image, in step E53, the image index data is loaded, and in step E54, the attributes of the normal moving image data are set based on the loaded image index data. Execute the process. After passing through step E54, the process proceeds to step E58, and character drawing processing (described later) is executed based on the data loaded in step E53 and the settings in step E54.
Further, steps E55 to E57 are executed in the case of an I-picture moving image, in step E55, the image index data is loaded, and in step E56, the frame count for I-picture from the target display information area (when the moving image is only I-picture). The data of (frame count) is loaded, and in step E57, processing such as setting the attributes of the I-picture moving image data is executed based on the loaded data. After step E57, the process proceeds to step E58, and character drawing processing (described later) is executed based on the data loaded in steps E55 and E56 and the settings in step E57.
Further, step E59 is executed in the case of a single-color quadrangle, and a process of drawing a rectangular image (a single-color quadrangle image) in the virtual drawing space (frame buffer) of VDP 312 (that is, pasting a sprite of the rectangular image into the virtual drawing space). Processing).
After passing through step E58 or step E59, the process proceeds to step E48.

Next, when the process proceeds to step E48, it is determined whether the variable i of the loop process B has reached the closing price (display number -1). If not, the process returns to step E6 and the loop process B is repeated.
Then, when the process proceeds to step E49, the update that increases the number X of the target motion management area by 1 is executed, and then in step E50, it is determined whether X has reached the closing price of the loop process A (14 in this example), and the number X is reached. If so, the loop process A is exited and returned, and if not reached, the process returns to step E1 and the loop process A is repeated from step E2.

In the step of setting the attributes of steps E52, E54, and E57, the process of transferring the character data (still image data or moving image data) from the character ROM (image ROM 322) to the VRAM 312a (606, 607) is also performed at the same time. .. However, if the same VRAM already exists, this data transfer is not performed. Further, in the case of a single color quadrangle, since the data of the character ROM is not used, this data transfer is not necessary. Here, the attribute is basic information of the character, and includes, for example, α mode, color mode (how many colors are displayed, etc.), character size, color palette specification, and the like.

[Character drawing process]
Next, the details of the character drawing process executed in step E58 in the above-mentioned effect display editing process will be described with reference to FIG. 165.
When this routine is started, first, in step E61, the data of the X coordinate of the upper left point of the display and the X coordinate of the lower left point of the display are obtained from the target display information area (display information area corresponding to the variable i) in the motion management area X. It is read out, and it is determined whether or not they match, and if they match, the process proceeds to step E62, and if they do not match, the process proceeds to step E77.
Proceeding to step E62, the data of the Y coordinate of the upper left point of the display and the Y coordinate of the upper right point of the display are read from the target display information area in the motion management area X, and it is determined whether they match. If they match, the process proceeds to step E63. If there is a discrepancy, the process proceeds to step E77.
If the image is a quadrangle (rectangle), the determination results of steps E61 and E62 are YES, and the process proceeds to step E63. However, if the image is a triangle character (triangle image), one of the determinations is NO. And proceed to step E77.
Proceeding to step E77, the triangle character drawing process (explanation is omitted) is executed and the process returns.

Next, when the process proceeds to step E63, steps E63 to E67 are sequentially executed, and then the process proceeds to step E68.
In step E63, the data of the X coordinate of the upper left point of the display is read from the display information area of the target in the motion management area X, and this is set as the X coordinate of the upper left base point of the character.
In step E64, the data of the Y coordinate of the upper left point of the display is read from the target display information area in the motion management area X, and this is set as the Y coordinate of the upper left base point of the character.
In step E65, the data of the X coordinate of the display upper right point and the X coordinate of the display upper left point are read from the target display information area in the motion management area X, and the difference between them (= X coordinate of the display upper right point-X of the display upper left point). (Coordinates) is set as the width data of the character.

In step E66, the data of the Y coordinate of the lower left point of the display and the Y coordinate of the upper left point of the display are read from the target display information area in the motion management area X, and the difference between them (= Y coordinate of the lower left point of the display-Y of the upper left point of the display). (Coordinates) is set as the height data of the character.
In step E67, no horizontal flip (horizontal flip) and no vertical flip are set. Here, the horizontal flip means the image inversion in the horizontal direction (X coordinate direction), and the vertical flip means the image inversion in the vertical direction (Y coordinate direction).

When the process proceeds to step E68, it is determined whether the width data set in step E65 is less than 0 (that is, a negative value), and if it is less than 0, there is a horizontal flip, so steps E69 to E71 are sequentially executed, and then the process proceeds to step E72. If it is not less than 0, there is no horizontal flip, and the process proceeds to step E72 without executing steps E69 to E71.
In step E69, the X coordinate data of the upper left point of the display is read from the target display information area in the motion management area X, and the width data (minus value) set in step E65 is added to the addition result to add the upper left base point X of the character. Update as coordinates.
In step E70, the width data (minus value) set in step E65 is converted into a positive number, and this is updated and set as new width data.
In step E71, it is set to have horizontal flip (change the setting in step E67).

When the process proceeds to step E72, it is determined whether the height data set in step E66 is less than 0 (that is, a negative value), and if it is less than 0, there is a vertical flip, so steps E73 to E75 are sequentially executed, and then the process proceeds to step E76. If it is not less than 0, there is no vertical flip, and the process proceeds to step E76 without executing steps E73 to E75.
In step E73, the Y coordinate data of the upper left point of the display is read from the target display information area in the motion management area X, and the height data (minus value) set in step E66 is added to this, and the addition result is added to the upper left base point of the character. Update and set as Y coordinate.
In step E74, the height data (minus value) set in step E66 is converted into a positive number, and this is updated and set as new height data.
In step E75, it is set to have vertical flip (change the setting in step E67).
Then, when the process proceeds to step E76, the image of the predetermined character corresponding to the image index data loaded in any of the steps E51, E53, and E55 is based on the settings obtained by the processes (steps E63 to E75) up to this point. Is executed in the virtual drawing space (frame buffer) of the VDP 312 (that is, the process of pasting the sprite of a predetermined character into the virtual drawing space), and then returns.

[Display left symbol conversion process]
Next, the details of the display left symbol conversion process executed in step E11 in the above-mentioned effect display editing process will be described with reference to the flowchart on the left side of FIG. 166.
When this routine is started, steps E81 to E83 are sequentially executed, and then the process proceeds to step E84.
In step E81, the image index data (data before replacement by behavior) is loaded.
In step E82, the index (symbol number) data of the current symbol (left) to be displayed (for example, the data set in step D727 or D747 described above) is loaded. In the case of this example, since there are nine types of symbols, the index (symbol number) data of the symbols (decorative symbols of special symbols) is any numerical value from 0 to 8.

In step E83, the index data of the current symbol (left) loaded in step E82 is added to the index data of the current symbol (left) set in the image index loaded in step E81, and the addition result is updated. Set as an index. For example, if the value of the image index before replacement (conversion) loaded in step E81 is, for example, 0, and the index data of the current symbol (left) loaded in step E82 to be replaced is 6, In step E83, 6 (= 0 + 6) is set as the update index value.

Next, when the process proceeds to step E84, it is determined whether the update index data set in step E83 exceeds the symbol upper limit (8 in this example), and if it exceeds, step E85 is executed and then step E86 is performed. If the value is not exceeded, the process proceeds to step E86 without executing step E85.

In step E85, the value obtained by adding 1 to the upper limit of the symbol (9 in this example) is subtracted from the value of the update index, and the subtraction result is set as the value of the new update index. According to these steps E84 and E85, when the value of the update index exceeds the upper limit of the symbol, the value of the update index is updated to a value that has been cycled.

Proceeding to step E86, the left symbol index conversion table is set, and the process proceeds to step E87. The left symbol index conversion table is a table in which a row is specified by the update index and the value of the image index of the left symbol to be displayed in the specified row is set.
In step E87, a new image index value is acquired from the row specified by the update index in the left symbol index conversion table set in step E86, and the process proceeds to step E88.
Then, in step E88, the value acquired in step E87 is saved as a new image index value in the image index area (area in which the image index is saved), and then returned.
Although the display left symbol conversion process has been described above, the same process is also applied to the right symbol and the middle symbol (details are omitted).

[PB color conversion process]
Next, the details of the PB color conversion process executed in step E11 in the above-mentioned effect display editing process will be described with reference to the flowchart on the upper right side of FIG. 166.
When this routine is started, steps E91 to E94 are sequentially executed and then returned.
In step E91, the distribution result is loaded from the PB color area of the effect distribution result area.
In step E92, the PB index conversion table is set, and the process proceeds to step E93. The PB index conversion table is a table in which rows are specified according to the distribution result saved in the above PB color area, and the image index value of the PB (push button) image to be displayed in the specified row is set. ..

In step E93, a new image index value (PB index value) is acquired from the row specified in the distribution result in the PB index conversion table set in step E92, and the process proceeds to step E94.
Then, in step E94, the value acquired in step E93 is saved in the image index area as a new image index value, and then returned.
Since only the button character that is the default color is registered as the motion control data (especially the image index data) of the push button notice, when changing the color from the default color for notification of jackpot reliability, etc., This routine (PB color conversion process) is executed. Not limited to this notice, there is also a process of converting (replacement) the character of the appearing military commander by behavior.

[Reach character conversion process]
Next, the details of the reach character conversion process executed in step E11 in the above-mentioned effect display editing process will be described with reference to the flowchart on the lower right side of FIG. 166.
When this routine is started, steps E101 to E103 are sequentially executed, and then the process proceeds to step E104.
In step E101, the distribution result is loaded from the reach character area of the effect distribution result area.
In step E102, the reach character index conversion table is set, and the process proceeds to step E103. The reach character index conversion table is a table in which a line is specified by the distribution result saved in the reach character area and the image index value of the image of the reach character to be displayed on the specified line is set.
In step E103, a new image index value (reach character index value) is acquired from the row specified by the distribution result in the reach character index conversion table set in step E102.

Then, when the process proceeds to step E104, it is determined whether the reach character index acquired in step E103 is a value indicating "no character", and if YES, the size of the character (image) of the reach character is set to 0 in step E105. It returns later, and if NO, returns without executing step E105.
In this example, the default characters are displayed in the motion control data (especially the image index data) for the reach characters such as "reach!", "Battle machine", and "win" that are displayed at the moment when the reach occurs. If necessary, the characters are changed or the colors of each character are replaced by the behavior immediately before the display.
In the reach character conversion process described above, for example, when the reliability of the jackpot notice fluctuates at a low reliability, the character size is set to 0 in step E105, so that the reach character exists in control but is actually visible. It is controlling that there is no such thing. However, the method of not displaying is not limited to this configuration, for example, a configuration that does not display reach characters may be used.

[Warlord 1 dialogue conversion process]
Next, the details of the military commander 1 serif conversion process executed in step E11 in the above-mentioned effect display editing process will be described with reference to FIG. 167.
When this routine is started, first, in step E111, the distribution result is loaded from the dialogue SU area of the effect distribution result area.
Next, in step E112, it is determined whether the dialogue SU is SU1 system (non-SU2 system or SU3 system) based on the distribution result loaded in step E111, and if YES, steps E117 and E118 are sequentially executed, and then the process proceeds to step E115. If NO, the process proceeds to step E113.
In step E117, the distribution result is loaded from the dialogue 1 area of the effect distribution result region, and the military commander 1SU1 dialogue index conversion table is set in the next step E118. The military commander 1SU1 dialogue index conversion table is a table in which rows are specified according to the distribution result saved in the dialogue 1 area, and the image index value of the image of the dialogue to be displayed in the designated row is set.

Next, when the process proceeds to step E113, it is determined whether the dialogue SU is a SU2 system (the SU2 system has one appearing character) based on the distribution result loaded in step E111. If YES, steps E119 and E120 are sequentially executed, and then step E115. If NO, the process proceeds to step E114.
In step E119, the distribution result is loaded from the dialogue 2 region of the production distribution result region, and the military commander 1SU2 dialogue index conversion table is set in the next step E120. The military commander 1SU2 dialogue index conversion table is a table in which rows are specified according to the distribution result saved in the dialogue 2 area, and the image index value of the image of the dialogue to be displayed in the designated row is set.

Next, when the process proceeds to step E114, it is determined whether the dialogue SU is SU3 series (SU3 series has two appearing characters) based on the distribution result loaded in step E111, and if YES, steps E121 and E122 are sequentially executed, and then the step is performed. Proceed to E115, and if NO, proceed to step E115.
In step E121, the distribution result is loaded from the dialogue 3 region of the effect distribution result region, and the military commander 1SU3 dialogue index conversion table is set in the next step E122. The military commander 1SU3 dialogue index conversion table is a table in which rows are specified according to the distribution result saved in the dialogue 3 area, and the image index value of the image of the dialogue to be displayed in the designated row is set.

Next, when the process proceeds to step E115, a new row is specified in the loaded distribution result in the dialogue index conversion table set in the immediately preceding step (any of step E118, step E120, step E122, etc.). The value of the image index (value of the dialogue index) is acquired, and the process proceeds to step E116.
Then, in step E116, the value acquired in step E115 is saved in the image index area (bitmap index area) as a new image index value, and then returned.
The type of dialogue SU may be a type other than SU1, SU2, and SU3. In that case, a processing step corresponding to a portion omitted by the wavy line in FIG. 167 is provided.

[VDP interrupt processing]
Next, VDP interrupt processing will be described with reference to FIG. 168. As shown in FIG. 6, in the effect control device 300, interrupt signals INT0 to n are input to the CPU 311 from the interrupt factor VDP312, and a plurality of interrupt signals INT0 to n due to the interrupt factor generated in the CPU311 (maximum). 2 to the nth power) interrupts (hereinafter referred to as "VDP interrupts") can be accepted. In the case of this example, the VDP interrupt includes a V blank start interrupt, a V line start interrupt, a drawing command INT interrupt, a drawing error interrupt, a drawing end interrupt, a data transfer 1 completion interrupt, a data transfer 2 completion interrupt, and a data transfer 3 completion. There are interrupts, checksum end interrupts, compression / decompression event interrupts, and serial command interrupts.
This routine (VDP interrupt processing) is started when at least one of the plurality of VDP interrupts occurs. When at least one of the plurality of VDP interrupts is generated, the on-data of the interrupt flag indicating the occurrence of this interrupt is set in the register of the CPU 311.
When this routine is started, steps E131 to E144 are sequentially executed and then returned.

In step E131, the status of each interrupt factor (information on whether or not the plurality of VDP interrupts have occurred) is acquired by reading the interrupt signals INT0 to n. This status information is set in the interrupt register of VDP312.
In step E132, since the above status was read in step E131, each interrupt factor is cleared. That is, the setting for returning all the status data of each interrupt factor (data of the register for interrupt of VDP312) to the value without interrupt is executed. As shown in FIG. 6, the CPU 311 and the VDP 312 are capable of bidirectional communication, and the setting of this step E132 is performed by this communication.
In steps E133 to E143, processing for each interrupt (processing such as determining the presence / absence of an interrupt and setting a flag) is executed based on the status acquired in step E131.
In step E144, the interrupt flag is cleared. That is, the off data of the interrupt flag is set in the register of the CPU 311.

In this way, the effect control device 300 has a function of monitoring various interrupts of the VDP 312, but not all of them are used.
The conditions for generating each interrupt are as follows.
-V blank start interrupt: An interrupt occurs at the start of the V blank period.
-V-line start interrupt; An interrupt occurs at the start of the display line specified (by the user).
-Drawing command INT interrupt: Occurs when the analysis of drawing commands is interrupted.
-Drawing error interrupt: Occurs when the drawing circuit goes into an abnormal state.
-Drawing end interrupt: Occurs when drawing ends.
-Data transfer 1-3 completion interrupt; Occurs when data transfer between each memory is completed.
The data can be transferred between the image ROM 322, the CPU 311 (data in the RAM 311a or the data in the control ROM 321), the VRAM (1) 606, the VRAM (2) 607, and the like. Since the three sets of data transfer 1 to 3 are independent, they can be transferred at the same time, but the priority is set in the order of 1>2> 3, and waiting occurs when the transfer destination is the same. ..
-Checksum end interrupt: There is a function to automatically calculate the checksum of the image ROM 322 (instructed by the CPU 311), which occurs at the end of the calculation.
Regarding the checksum calculation, it is possible to specify parameters such as an address to start the calculation, an address to end the calculation, and a calculation unit (for example, 32-bit unit / 64-bit unit).
-Compression / decompression event interrupt: Occurs when the decoding of one frame of a moving image is completed or when a decoding error occurs.
-Serial command interrupt: Occurs when, for example, a sound source LSI connected to a serial interface is instructed by a serial command and its execution is completed.

[V blank start interrupt processing]
Next, the V blank start interrupt process executed in step E133 in the VDP interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG. 169. The V blank start interrupt (also referred to as a V blank interrupt or a V sync interrupt) is generated every time the VDP 312 completes one scan of the entire screen for drawing. As described above, the generation cycle of this V-blank start interrupt is, for example, 1/60 second.
When this routine is started, first, in step E151, it is determined whether or not a V blank start interrupt has occurred based on the status acquired in step E131 described above, and if it has occurred, the process proceeds to step E152 and the occurrence occurs. If not, the process returns without executing step E152 and subsequent steps.
When the process proceeds to step E152, the update for increasing the value of the V blank count by 1 is executed, and then the process proceeds to step E153. The V blank count is a counter for executing the same drawing a predetermined number of times (twice in this embodiment). The frame switching timing described in step D33 in the above-mentioned main process is, in principle, a time when the V blank count reaches a predetermined value (2 in this embodiment). That is, in this example, the value of the V blank count should be normal except when the V blank count momentarily becomes 2 (the moment after the update of step E152 until it becomes 2 and clears 0 in step E155). If 0⇔1 is repeated alternately, as a result, the frame is switched every two V blank interrupts. Since the V-blank interrupt occurs every 1/60 second, the frame is switched every 1/30 second (33.333 ms).

When the process proceeds to step E153, it is determined whether or not the compression / decompression execution result is an error. If there is an error, the process returns without executing the processes after step E154, and if there is no error, the process proceeds to step E154. Here, the execution result of compression decompression means the result of whether or not the process of decompressing the compressed movie data is successful. The determination value indicating the execution result of the compression expansion is set by the compression expansion event interrupt processing in step E142, and the determination in step E153 is executed based on this determination value. If the movie development fails due to the processing time being exceeded due to the presence of this step E153, the frame switching is not executed even if the V blank count reaches a predetermined value, and the same drawing is repeated.

Proceeding to step E154, it is determined whether or not the value of the V blank count is equal to or greater than a predetermined value (whether or not the value is greater than 1 in this example), and if it is greater than or equal to the predetermined value (if greater than 1), steps E155 to E158 are performed. Is returned in sequence, and if it is not equal to or greater than a predetermined value (if it is not greater than 1), it returns without executing step E155 and subsequent steps. In step E154, it is substantially determined whether or not the frame switching timing has been reached. In this example, if the same drawing is executed twice as described above, in principle (that is, if the execution result of compression expansion is not an error), this frame switching timing is reached. However, the number is not limited to two, and may be three or more.

Steps E155 to E158 are processes for switching frames for switching the drawing contents. In step E155, the above-mentioned V blank count is cleared to 0, in step E156, the on-data of the frame switching flag is set, in step E157, the frame buffer is switched, and in step E158, the screen of the corresponding frame buffer (frame buffer after switching) is displayed. Allow display (display data generation).
Here, the frame switching flag set in step E156 is used in step D33 in the main process described above. That is, in step D33 described above, when the on-data of this frame switching flag is set, it is determined that it is the frame switching timing. Further, in step E158, the display circuit 608 is permitted to access the VRAM (1) 606 and generate display data.

The frame buffer corresponds to the virtual drawing space described in steps E59 and E76, and is a buffer configured by VRAM (1) 606 in VDP312. In the case of this embodiment, the frame buffer includes a frame buffer number of 0 and a frame buffer number of 1. Then, in this embodiment, for example, if the frame buffer for display is No. 0, the frame buffer No. 1 is used for drawing work and is alternately used for display. In step E157, a process of switching the display frame buffer to the next one (in this example, a process of switching from No. 0 to No. 1 or from No. 1 to No. 0) is executed. Further, in step E158, display data generation of the display frame buffer switched in step E157 is permitted.
According to the V blank start interrupt process described above, frame switching is performed when the same drawing is repeated a predetermined number of times and a V blank start interrupt occurs a predetermined number of times, unless an error of compression expansion occurs. In the case of this embodiment, when the same drawing is repeated twice and the V blank start interrupt occurs twice, the frame is switched, and the frame switching timing cycle is the cycle of the V blank start interrupt (for example, 1/60 second). It doubles (for example, 1/30 second ≈ 33.33 ms).

[Variation effect setting process] (Modification example)
Next, a modified example of the variation effect setting process executed in step D114 in the variation system command process described above will be described with reference to FIG. 170. Since the flowchart shown in FIG. 170 is obtained by adding steps D270j to D270n to the flowchart shown in FIG. 112, the additional portion will be described.
In the variation effect setting process described above, if it is determined in D270b that there is no reach variation, steps D270c, D270d, and D270e are sequentially executed, and for example, the first half advance notice distribution group address table as shown in the upper part of FIG. 179 is set. , The rows and columns of this table are calculated from the MODE and the number of holds, respectively, and then the process proceeds to step D271. However, in the case of this modification, the configuration proceeds to step D270j after passing through step D270e.

Then, in step D270j, it is determined whether or not the calculated address has a definition of a table address. That is, based on the calculation results of the immediately preceding steps D270d and D270e, is the address of the first half advance notice distribution group table defined at the corresponding row and column positions in the first half advance notice distribution group address table set in step D270c? judge. Then, if there is a definition, the process proceeds to step D271, and if there is no definition, the process proceeds to step D270k.

Proceeding to step D270k, in the corresponding row (row calculated in the immediately preceding step D270e) in the first half advance notice distribution group address table, the position with the address definition is searched in ascending order of the number of reservations, and the column with the address definition is searched. If there is, store it as a search result.
For example, in step D270c, the table shown in the upper part of FIG. 179 is set, in step D270d, the second row corresponding to the MODE value “C1h” is calculated, and in step D270e, the first column corresponding to the number of hold 1 is calculated. If, the data of the corresponding row and column (first column of the second row) in the set table is undefined. Therefore, in this case, the step D270k is executed, and if there is address data in the column of the number of holds 2 next to the number of holds 1 (that is, the second column), or if there is no address data, the next column of the number of holds 3 (that is, 3). The data in the same row is read in ascending order of the number of pending numbers, such as whether there is address data in the column). In this case, since the address data "C1-1K" is in the column with the number of reservations 3, the column with the number of reservations 3 is stored as the search result.

Next, when step D270k is passed, the process proceeds to step D270m, and it is determined whether or not a column in which address data is defined is found as a search result of step D270k. If it is not found, the process proceeds to step D271 without executing step D270n.
When the step D270n is executed, in step D271, the address of the first half advance notice distribution group table is acquired based on the address of the column changed in the step D270n. Therefore, in the case of the above-mentioned specific example, the address data “C1-1K” of the column with the number of reservations 3 is acquired and prepared in step D271.

As described above, according to steps D270j to D270n of this modification, the corresponding row and column positions (positions based on the calculation results of steps D270d and D270e) in the first half advance notice distribution group address table set in step D270c are not yet available. If it is defined data, the columns are sequentially changed in the direction of increasing the number of holds in the same row, and a search is performed to find the position (column) in which the address data is defined. Then, if it is found, the search ends when it is found, step D271 is executed with the found position as the address of a new column, and in the subsequent step D273, the first half notice distribution group table of the address at the found position is used. And execute the advance notice lottery process. On the other hand, if a position that is not undefined is not found even if the position of the column is changed up to the maximum value of the number of holds, step D270n is not executed because it is abnormal, and the judgment result is YES in the subsequent step D272 as undefined. The advance notice lottery process of step D273 is not executed, and in the end, the advance notice effect in the first half fluctuation is not executed. However, as described above, if the address of the first half advance notice distribution group table is defined in any of the same lines, the advance notice lottery process by the first half advance notice distribution group table is executed, and one of the advance notice effects is drawn. If so, the notice production will be executed.

[Packet configuration example for inter-sub communication]
Next, a packet configuration example of inter-sub communication will be described with reference to FIG. 171.
The packet configuration of inter-sub communication in this example has a data configuration as shown in the table on the upper side of the figure. A description of each data is given at the bottom of the figure. That is, the 1-byte data is No. 1 to No. There are a total of 12 up to 12, and the total capacity (capacity of one packet) is 12 bytes.

No. Reference numeral 1 denotes packet start code (STX) data (for example, 02H) representing the beginning of the packet.
No. Reference numeral 2 denotes data of packet size, that is, the number of data transmitted between subs (SIZE) (in this case, data indicating 12 bytes).
No. Reference numeral 3 denotes data (terminal ID and group ID) of the source ID (SID).
No. Reference numeral 4 denotes data (terminal ID and group ID) of the destination ID (DID). In the data of the source ID (SID) and the destination ID (DID), the high-order bit of one byte is the group ID and the low-order bit is the terminal ID (and broadcast), respectively. Here, the range of the terminal ID is, for example, a range of 00 to 0E in hexadecimal, and when the data of the lower bits is 0F, it is treated as the data of the broadcast code described above.

No. Reference numeral 5 denotes data of the inter-sub maker code (MAKER).
No. Reference numeral 6 is data of the Christian era code (YEAR) (for example, the last two digits of the Christian era).
No. Reference numeral 7 denotes data of the inter-sub model code (TYPE).
No. Reference numeral 8 is data of the inter-sub command MODE (SB_MODE).
No. Reference numeral 9 denotes data of the inter-sub command ACT (SB_ACT).
No. Reference numeral 10 denotes STS data representing the game state of the own machine.
No. Reference numeral 11 denotes a checksum of data from STX to STS.
No. Reference numeral 12 denotes packet end code (ETX) data (for example, 03H) representing the end of the packet.
The packet configuration example for inter-sub communication described above is just an example, and there may be various modes. For example, each piece of data does not have to have a 1-byte structure (for example, the model code has a plurality of bytes), and the order of sending is not limited to the mode of the above-mentioned configuration example. Further, there may be data having other meanings, and conversely, the number of data may be smaller than that in the above configuration example. Further, in the transmission order, for example, the "maker code" may be brought second. In this aspect, commands from gaming machines of other manufacturers can be efficiently discarded, or conversely, commands can be efficiently processed by branching to the corresponding reception processing (command reception processing of other manufacturers) in order to collaborate with other manufacturers. Can be done. Here, the command reception process of another manufacturer is a process for receiving a command corresponding to the command form of another manufacturer when the command form is different for each manufacturer.

[Specific examples of production control data table and production display]
Next, FIGS. 172 to 172 show a specific example of the data table used in the control of the effect control device 300 described above, and a specific example of the effect display performed on the display unit 41a (screen) of the display device 41 by the same control. It will be described by 206.
First, FIG. 172 is a specific example of the ACTION check table and the match check table, which have already been described in steps D62, D94 and the like.
Next, FIG. 173 shows an ACT matching check address table and an ACT matching check table at the time of disconnection, which have already been described in step D124 of the fluctuation pattern corresponding symbol determination process.

Next, FIG. 174 is a specific example of the still image ROM member list table, which has already been described in step D878 and the like of the bitmap addition process.
Next, FIG. 175 is a specific example of the moving image ROM member list table, which has already been described in step D897 or the like of the moving image addition process.
Next, FIG. 176 is a specific example of the motion list table, which has already been described in step D294 or the like of the variation effect setting process.

Next, FIG. 177 is a specific example of the scenario table (during the customer waiting demonstration), and has already been described in the above-mentioned step D585 of the scenario analysis process, the constant weight process, the iterative process, and the like.
Next, FIG. 178 is a specific example of the variation pattern type table, which has already been described in step D365 and the like of the variation pattern classification process.
Next, FIG. 179 is a specific example of the first half advance notice distribution group address table, which has already been described in step D270c and the like of the variation effect setting process.

Next, FIGS. 180 and 181 are specific examples of the first half advance notice distribution group table, which have already been described in the step D271 and the like of the variation effect setting process and the step D371a of the advance notice lottery process.
Next, FIG. 182 is a specific example of the first half advance notice distribution table, which has already been described in step D371a and the like of the advance notice lottery process.
Next, FIG. 183 is a specific example of the latter half notice distribution group address table, which has already been described in step D274 and the like of the variation effect setting process.

Next, FIG. 184 is a specific example of the symbol variation list table, which has already been described in step D315 and the like of the reachless variation setting process.
Next, FIG. 185 is a specific example of the scenario table (special figure 1 at the time of normal fluctuation), which has already been described in step D586 and the like of the scenario analysis process.

Next, FIG. 186 is a specific example of the motion table (at the start of the normal fluctuation of the left symbol), which has already been described in step D823 and the like of the motion command execution process.
Next, FIG. 187 is an example of the display result by the motion table shown in FIG. 186.
As shown in this figure, the upper left corner of the display screen 41a is the origin (X coordinate = 0, Y coordinate = 0), and the vertical direction is the Y axis direction. Therefore, the lower left corner of the display screen 41a is the X coordinate. = 0 and Y coordinate = 767. Further, since the left-right direction of the display screen 41a is the X-axis direction, the upper right corner of the display screen 41a has the X coordinate = 1023 and the Y coordinate = 0, and the lower right corner of the display screen 41a has the X coordinate = 1023 and Y. The coordinates = 767. It should be noted that the specific numerical values of such coordinates are only an example.

FIG. 187 (a) corresponds to the first frame (a) of the motion table. The symbol "2" containing the image of the tiger character is the next symbol (object index 0), the symbol "1" is the current symbol (object index 1), and the symbol "9" is the previous symbol (object index 2). ), These objects are additionally registered by the 1st to 6th rows of the motion table, and the behavior is set. Further, the display positions and sizes of these objects are set in the 7th to 9th rows of the motion table, and the display shown in FIG. 187 (a) is performed accordingly. However, the next symbol is actually not visible because it is entirely outside the screen, and the previous symbol is only partially visible.

Further, FIG. 187 (b) corresponds to the second frame (b) of the motion table. The design and behavior settings of each object are the same as those in the first frame (a), and the display positions and sizes of these objects are set in the 11th to 13th rows of the motion table, which is shown in FIG. 187. The display shown in (b) is performed. In this case, the Y-coordinate values are all changed by -8 from the first frame (a) (for example, the current symbol of the object index 1 has the Y-coordinate value changed from 7 to -1). The design is slightly moved upward on the display screen 41a. This is a part of the movement of hopping once in the operation of scrolling (fluctuation) downward after each symbol hops (slightly rises) at the start of fluctuation. In the third and fourth frames (c) and (d) of the motion table (FIG. 186), the Y coordinate is sequentially changed by -8.

Next, the upper side of FIG. 188 shows the state of the initial position of each symbol (the state at the top except for the above-mentioned hop operation), and has the same display as that of FIG. 187 (a) described above.
Further, the lower side of FIG. 188 shows a state in which each symbol is scrolled to the bottom of the moving range.
The movement (scrolling) of the display position as the variable display of each symbol is performed within the range of the above-mentioned two states.
For example, when the current symbol reaches the bottom of the movement range, the value at the beginning of the movement range will be restored with the symbol number updated (+1). In this example, only three symbols (when considered by the current symbol, the previous symbol, and the next symbol instead of the symbol number) are repeatedly moving within their respective narrow effective ranges. Since the symbol number is incremented by 1 when returning to the top (that is, for example, the symbol "1" can be switched to the symbol "2"), it seems that the same symbol is scrolling from the upper part of the screen to the lower part of the screen.

Then, when the y-coordinate fluctuates at a speed at which 100 are added, the current symbol is fluctuated and controlled by the values of 7 → 107 → 207 → 307 → 407 → 7 → 107 → .... The symbol number displayed when it reaches 7 is incremented by 1. The same applies to the previous symbol and the next symbol of the left symbol, and the same applies to the current symbol, the previous symbol, and the next symbol of the middle symbol and the right symbol.
The merit of this method is that it is easy to determine how many symbol numbers are currently the center of control. In the example of FIG. 188, it can be relatively calculated that the symbol number "1" is the center, the previous symbol is "9" immediately before it, and the next symbol is "2" one after it. When the coordinates return to the top, the central symbol can be narrowed down to one control target, such as "2", so a simple structure can be created.
If this is a method of moving the same symbol from top to bottom instead of dividing it into "current symbol, previous symbol, and next symbol", each will exist as three independent symbols, so the reference symbol will be There are problems such as it does not exist, it is difficult to control when replacing symbols, and it is necessary to manage everything, but in this example, such problems are solved.
It should be noted that the above range division is for the case of normal fluctuation. This is not the case because the position of the design changes in various ways during reach (during reach action). However, even during reach, the idea of classifying the current symbol, previous symbol, next symbol, etc. remains.

Next, FIG. 189 is an example of a motion table when the special figure 1 fourth symbol changes. The first to eleventh lines are the first frames, and in the first to third lines, the fourth symbol "blue" is set as the object index 0, and the fourth symbol "blue" is set as the object index 1. The fourth symbol "white" is registered as the object index 2. Next, in the 4th line, the object index 2 is replaced with the behavior index 0, in the 5th line, the 4th symbol "white" is registered as the object index 3, and in the 6th line, the object index 3 is replaced with the behavior index 0. Then, the display positions of the four objects having object indexes 0 to 3 are set in the 7th to 10th lines, and the setting for one frame is completed by the end code in the 11th line.
Here, among the above four objects, the objects having the object index 0 and the object index 1 are images of the fourth symbol of the special figure 1 shown by the reference numerals TZ10 and TZ11 in FIG. 190, which will be described later, respectively. Further, the objects of the object index 2 and the object index 3 are images of the fourth symbol of the special figure 2 shown by the reference numerals TZ20 and TZ21 in FIG. 190, which will be described later, respectively.

Next, FIG. 190 is a diagram showing a display example of the fourth symbol.
In the upper part of FIG. 190, the stop mode "2, 4, 1" is first displayed on the screen 41a as a special decorative pattern (left, middle, right), and then from this stop mode. The state in which the fluctuation has started (b) (the next symbol is "3, 5, 2") is shown above and below. In either state, the images TZ10, TZ11, TZ20, and TZ21 of the fourth symbol are displayed in the lower left portion of the screen 41a. The images TZ10, TZ11, TZ20, and TZ21 of the fourth symbol are diamond-shaped images in the case of this example, and the two vertical images TZ10 and TZ11 on the left side are the fourth symbols of the special figure 1 and the right side. The two vertical images TZ20 and TZ21 are the fourth symbols of the special figure 2. In the case of this example, the color combination of the two images of the left, middle, and right symbols of the decorative symbol and the fourth symbol indicates whether or not it is a probabilistic symbol. For example, if the decorative symbol is "4, 4, 4" and the fourth symbol is "blue, blue", it is a normal jackpot, and if the decorative symbol is "4, 4, 4" and the fourth symbol is "blue, blue," In the case of "orange", it is set as a probabilistic jackpot (a jackpot that increases the jackpot probability after the jackpot special prize period). Further, at the time of disconnection, in this example, the fourth symbol is one pattern of "white, white".

Further, in the upper state (a) (stop mode) in the upper part of FIG. 190, since the special figure 1 is in the state of being stopped in the detached mode "2, 4, 1", the fourth symbol of the special figure 1 (image TZ10). , TZ11) are also stopped in the detached mode "white, white", and at this time, the fourth symbol (images TZ20, TZ21) of the special figure 2 displays the stop mode at the time of the previous change of the special figure 2. Then, in the lower state (b) in the upper part of FIG. 174 (at the start of the change in the next special figure 1), the decorative symbols (left, middle, right) start changing from the previous stop mode "2, 4, 1". However, the fourth symbol (in this case, the fourth symbols TZ10 and TZ11 of the special figure 1) starts to change from the first mode of each cycle, that is, "blue, blue" in this example, regardless of the immediately preceding stop mode. It is configured to do. This is because the motion table at the start of the fluctuation of the fourth symbol sets the objects of the object index 0 and the object index 1 to the fourth symbol "blue" at the beginning of the fluctuation as shown in FIG. 189 described above.

In this way, in this example, the left, middle, and right symbols fluctuate continuously from the number following the previous stop symbol, but the fourth symbol fluctuates with a fixed symbol pattern every time regardless of the stop symbol of the previous change. This is a feature of this example. Since the example of FIG. 189 is the case where the special figure 1 fluctuates, the fourth symbol (object indexes 2 and 3) on the special figure 2 side uses the behavior to be the previous stop symbol (the stop symbol when the previous special figure 2 fluctuates). However, the special figure 1 side (object indexes 0 and 1) does not perform such a replacement and displays a fixed symbol pattern. By doing so, the number of symbol replacements is significantly reduced (because the symbol in Special Figure 1 is not replaced), the load on the CPU can be reduced, and the data capacity can be reduced. Although the example of FIG. 189 is a motion table that controls the symbols of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 at the same time, they may be separate tables.

Further, the middle part of FIG. 190 shows an example of a variable display cycle of the fourth symbol of Special FIG. In this example, the fourth symbol of Special Figure 1 changes from "blue, blue" → "blue, yellow" → "blue, orange" → "yellow, blue" → "yellow, yellow"("yellow,yellow"). After that, it is configured to repeat the combination of various other colors (which may include red, green, peach, etc.) and then return to "blue, blue").
Here, in the above cycle example, the combination "white, white" that is out of alignment is not inserted in the cycle. This solves the problem that the player can easily understand the cycle of the fluctuation of the fourth symbol, the number of combinations of the fourth symbols, and the like, which reduces the interest. That is, when white is added among various color combinations, the cycle is visible because the white is conspicuous, and even though it is the fourth design to make it difficult to understand, the number of combinations etc. can be easily known to the player. There is also sex. However, if the configuration does not include white as in this example, such a problem can be solved.
However, the configuration is not limited to the above, and a configuration in which white is inserted may be used.

Further, the lower part of FIG. 190 shows an example of a cycle from the change of the fourth symbol of the special figure 1 to the stop. In this example, the variation of the fourth symbol is always executed in a cycle starting from the fixed pattern "blue, blue".
However, the variation of the fourth symbol is not limited to the configuration that starts from the same mode each time as described above, and may be a configuration that moves following the previous stop mode, or a configuration that starts the variation from the previous stop symbol. It may be. For example, in the lower part of FIG. 190, there is a part (fourth from the left) that stops at "yellow, blue", and the next fluctuation of this part starts from "blue, blue", but the movement continues. If so, the fluctuation start should be "yellow, yellow", and if the previous symbol is displayed first, it should be "yellow, blue", and such a configuration may be used.

Next, FIG. 191 is an example of connecting the motion table when the left symbol normally fluctuates. The concatenation of the motion tables is performed by the scenario table described above. First, in the motion table (Mdat0000) shown in the upper part of FIG. 191, a motion index 0 is set by, for example, the 20th row (// 19) of the scenario table shown in FIG. 193 described later, whereby the motion list table of FIG. 176 is set. It is set by specifying the first line (stop the left symbol) of. Then, by this motion table (Mdat0000), the symbol "1" is registered as the object index 0 (first row), and then this symbol is replaced with a predetermined symbol by the behavior specified by the behavior index 0 (second row). ), It is displayed as a stop symbol at the display position specified in the third line. In a motion table such as this motion table (Mdat0000), even if the drawn character has a different effect depending on the situation, only one way is registered for the same movement, and it is internally registered as a basic character on the table. The character with the youngest number in control (for example, the character with the youngest registered address in the character ROM (image ROM 322), and in this case, the stop symbol "1") is used. According to this configuration, since the one with the lowest number in internal control is used as a reference, it is easy to calculate the difference value such as character replacement by behavior (change processing), and it is easy to control and efficiently control. This has the effect of improving development efficiency. Further, since the motion table is registered only once for the same movement, there is an effect that the data capacity can be prevented from becoming bloated.

Next, in the motion table (Mdat0003) shown in the middle of FIG. 191, the motion index 3 is set by the first row of the scenario table (MS_LZ100) shown in FIG. It is set by specifying the eye (left normal fluctuation (first half)). Then, by this motion table (Mdat0003), the next symbol, the current symbol, and the previous symbol are registered, respectively, and the normal fluctuation (first half) of the left symbol is displayed, as in the case described in FIG. 186 described above. The middle row of FIG. 191 and FIG. 186 show the same motion table (Mdat0003).

Next, in the motion table (Mdat0004) shown in the lower part of FIG. 191, the motion index 4 is set by the fourth row of the scenario table (MS_LZ100) shown in FIG. It is set by specifying the eye (// 4 left normal fluctuation (second half)). Then, the next symbol, the current symbol, and the previous symbol are registered by this motion table (Mdat0004), and the normal fluctuation (second half) of the left symbol is displayed.
Although only the left symbol has been described above, the same applies to the right symbol, the middle symbol, and other objects.
In this way, the scenario table can be easily configured as a series of long effects by freely combining a plurality of motion tables that specify blocked display effects.

Next, the upper part of FIG. 192 is a specific example of the scenario table (at the time of push button notice), and has already been performed in step D455 of the scenario data setting process for PB notice, step D586 of the scenario analysis process, PB determination branching process, and the like. explained.
Next, the lower part of FIG. 192 is a specific example of the motion table (at the time of the push button notice), and has already been described in step D455 of the scenario data setting process for PB notice, step D823 of the motion command execution process, and the like.

Next, FIG. 193 is an example of a scenario table used at the ending of the variable display effect of the special figure.
Here, in order to prevent the next symbol change from suddenly starting at the same time as the ending movie ends, a symbol display period of a predetermined time is provided during the ending period. In this example, a constant weight code is set on the 27th line (// 26), and the wait time value is set to 30 (that is, 1 second). As a result, the left, right, and middle stop symbols that are motion-registered on the 20th line (// 19), 22nd line (// 21), and 24th line (// 23) are displayed for a predetermined time (this example). Then, it continues for 1 second), and the next symbol change does not start suddenly at the same time as the ending movie ends.

Further, in the background setting of the 18th line (// 17) of FIG. 193, since the value of the motion index is set to (-1), it becomes NO in step D637 of the motion registration process described above, and the motion index of the RAM. The value of the area is used as the motion index. This must match the background displayed after the ending, but since the probability information command has not been received at this point, it can be predicted from the information such as the symbol command, fanfare command, and ending command that have already been received. This is because it is necessary to select the background. In addition, even if a symbol command of a probabilistic symbol is sent from the game control device, there is a possibility that the effect control device side may perform an effect of pretending to be a hit with a normal symbol (non-probable variable symbol), so not only the command but also the command. This is because it is necessary to use the internal information of the effect control device. A probability information command is sent at the end of the above ending scenario, but if there is no problem with the displayed content, it can be continued as it is, and if there is a problem, it is configured to switch to the background corresponding to the command ( Because the command from the game control device has the highest priority).

Next, FIG. 194 is a configuration example of a symbol movie for sharing a motion table. This is an example in the case of temporary stop of the left symbol. There is an effect method in which the character animates when the symbol starts to temporarily stop. In FIG. 194, (a) shown in the upper left shows a state in which the symbol stops without change (still image), and (b) shown in the upper right shows a state in which the symbol stops while changing (moving image). Originally, the motion table is not the same for still images and moving images (depending on the presence or absence of data for decoding the moving images, the setting contents due to the difference in the additional code, etc.), but the pattern (a) is the same as the moving image (the image of each frame is the same). ), As shown in the motion table (Mdat0005) shown on the lower side of FIG. 194, the motion table may be used in common. By doing so, it is not necessary to increase the number of motion tables, so that it is possible to prevent pressure on the control ROM 321 (that is, reduce the capacity, etc.).
In the motion table (Mdat0005) shown on the lower side of FIG. 194, the motion index 5 is set by the 7th row of the scenario table (MS_LZ100) shown in FIG. 185, whereby the 6 rows of the motion list table of FIG. 176 are set. It is set by specifying the eye (temporary stop on the left).

Next, FIGS. 195 and 196 are examples of a motion table at the time of notice of a scroll, and FIG. 197 is an example of an actual screen display at the time of notice of a scroll.
Of these, FIG. 195 (a) is a motion table of operation a in which a closed scroll falls from above the outside of the screen, stands still at substantially the center of the screen, and waits for a predetermined time. In this motion table, an object called "scroll closed blue" (closed scroll) is registered as an object index 0 in the first line, and then the movement 1 code is executed for each frame with respect to this object index 0 to display the display position. The configuration is such that the value of the Y coordinate is changed in the direction of increasing for each frame. Further, in the scenario table (not shown) for designating this motion table, for example, a line for instructing a predetermined time weight by a constant weight code is provided in the line next to the execution of the motion table. As a result, in the actual screen display of the operation a, as shown in FIG. 197 (a), an image in which the closed scroll falls from above, reaches the center, stands still, and is maintained for a predetermined time is displayed. In this example, the player is expected to have a sense of expectation by performing a two-choice effect of opening the scroll after waiting for this predetermined time or dropping the scroll to the bottom of the screen while it is closed.

Further, FIG. 195 (b) is a motion table of the operation b (so-called most disappointing state) of falling off the screen while being closed. In this motion table, the object "scroll closed blue" (closed scroll) is registered again as the object index 0 in the first line, and then the movement 1 code is executed for each frame with respect to this object index 0 to display the display position. The Y coordinate value of is changed in the direction of increasing for each frame. As a result, in the actual screen display of the operation b, as shown in FIG. 197 (b), an image in which the closed scroll falls from the center and disappears to the lower part outside the screen is displayed.
In this example, as shown in FIGS. 195 (a) and 195 (b), the basic character registered in the first row of the motion table is the "blue" character whose scroll color is the least reliable. It is supposed to be. In some cases, the character is replaced (in this case, the color is changed) according to the behavior of the behavior index 0 in the second line, so that the production can be performed according to the reliability of the jackpot, for example. Is improving. The color distribution of this scroll is determined by the advance notice distribution (C5: scroll color distribution) in FIG. 182, and may be replaced with "green" or "gold".
As described above, in the present embodiment, even if the drawn character has a different effect depending on the situation, only one way is registered for the same movement, and the motion table of the advance notice effect is displayed on the table as a basic character. The character with the lowest jackpot reliability (in the above example, the scroll whose Gawa color is "blue") is registered. According to this configuration, by registering the character with the lowest jackpot reliability as the basic character, there is a high possibility that the character will appear in common both at the time of loss and at the time of jackpot, so it is easy to common the processing for changing. , Efficient control will be possible, and development efficiency will be improved. Further, since the motion table is registered only once for the same movement, there is an effect that the data capacity can be prevented from becoming bloated.

Further, FIG. 196 is a motion table of the operation c in which the scroll is opened and the characters emerge. This motion table has already been described in step D933 and the like of the effect type designation process and step D993 and the like of the behavior index setting process, but will be described again here.
In this motion table, in the first section (A), first in the first line (command position k = 0; the line indicated by "// 0" in the figure), the video "Scroll open blue" (open scroll) The character is registered as the object index 0, and then the behavior code for replacing the color of the character (the color of the scroll), the movement 1 code for setting the display position, and the like are executed. As a result, in the actual screen display of the section (a), as shown in (a) of (c) of FIG. 197, an animation display in which the closed scroll spreads to the left and right is executed. In addition, it is configured to wait for a predetermined time when it is fully opened. In addition, at the time of section (a), nothing is written on the scroll and it is configured to be a white background.

Next, in the second section (a), in the first line (k = m + 2; line of "// m + 2"), the character of the character "smoke signal" is additionally registered as the object index 1. In the second and subsequent lines, the behavior, display position, and effect are set for this object index 1, and the effect is set so that the value of the effect parameter gradually increases. As a result, in the actual screen display of the section (a), as shown in (a) of (c) of FIG. 197, the character "smoke signal" gradually emerges on the white background of the open scroll. Is done. In addition, it is configured to wait for a predetermined time when it is completely displayed. Further, as described above, the numerical value (P) of the effect parameter represents the transparency. (For example, it is expressed by the formula of P / 255. P = 255 is 100% visible.) Also, the character of the basic character registered in the first line is the character "Smoke signal", but in some cases. By replacing characters (in this case, changing characters) according to the behavior of behavior index 1 on the second line, for example, it is configured to be able to produce according to the reliability of the jackpot, which improves the interest of the game. There is. This character distribution is determined by the advance notice distribution (C6: scroll character pattern distribution) (C6: scroll character pattern distribution), which is not shown, and may be replaced with "conflict", "general", "great master", or "large instrument".

Next, in the third section (c), in the third line (k = o + 3; "// o + 3") and the fifth line (k = o + 5; "// o + 5"), the "rolling object open blue" The character and the character "wolf smoke" are registered again as object indexes 0 and 1, respectively, and the behavior, display position, and effect are set for these object indexes 0 and 1 in the 4th and 6th lines and thereafter. The effect is set so that the value of the effect parameter gradually decreases. As a result, in the actual screen display of the section (c), as shown in (c) of FIG. 197 (c), the open scroll and the characters gradually disappear. In this example, the operation ends when the scroll and characters disappear.

Next, FIG. 198 is a specific example of the look-ahead variation MODE conversion table (a type of look-ahead variation command conversion table), which has already been described in step F34 of the look-ahead variation command processing.
Next, FIG. 199 is a specific example of the look-ahead variation ACT conversion table (a type of look-ahead variation command conversion table), which has already been described in step F36 of the look-ahead variation command processing.
Next, FIG. 200 is a specific example of the look-ahead fluctuation condition check table, which has already been described in steps F83 and F84 of the look-ahead lottery process.

Next, the upper part of FIG. 201 is a specific example of the look-ahead lottery group address table, which has already been described in step F96 of the look-ahead lottery process.
Next, the middle part of FIG. 201 is a specific example of the look-ahead lottery group table (preliminary distribution group table for the look-ahead effect), which has already been described in step F97 of the look-ahead lottery process.
Next, the lower part of FIG. 201 is a specific example of the look-ahead notice lottery table (notice distribution table for the look-ahead effect), which has already been described in step F97 of the look-ahead lottery process.
Next, FIG. 202 is a state transition diagram of the test mode, which has already been described in the test mode command processing.

Next, FIG. 203 is a modification 1 of the first half advance notice distribution group address table in the case of non-reach variation. The first half advance notice distribution group address table shown in FIG. 203 has a column with a hold number of 0, and the data of the first half advance notice distribution group table is set even when the number of holds is 0. As described in step D270c of the variation effect setting process, the first half advance notice distribution group address table shown in the upper part of FIG. The configuration is selected, and this point is the same as in the table of FIG. 203, but the data corresponding to the number of holdings of 0 is not set in the upper part of FIG. 179. This is because it is impossible in terms of the processing configuration that the variation effect setting process (FIG. 112) is executed and the variation is performed in a state where there is no hold (a state in which the number of holds is 0). However, if there is no data with a hold number of 0, there is a problem that a notice cannot be made to appear in an irregular case such as when the hold number command is missed due to noise or the like. Therefore, in the table of FIG. 203, a column having a hold number of 0 is also set. With this configuration, it is possible to make a notice appear even in the irregular case as described above, and there is an advantage that the interest is not deteriorated. Further, in the check work during development, it can be confirmed as a fluctuation in which a notice appears without specifying the hold number command one by one, which has the effect of improving the efficiency of the check work.

In the table of FIG. 203, as the data of the column having the number of hold 0, the same data as the data of the column in which the data is set and the number of hold is the smallest among the columns of the same row having the number of hold 1 to 4 is set. doing. This is because, basically, when the number of holds is small, there is a tendency for more types of effects to be produced, and this setting is advantageous when checking. Further, in the table of FIG. 203, in the row where the MODE value (value indicating the first half fluctuation) is "C9h" (only for 2.0 seconds support), even if the number of pending numbers is 0, it becomes undefined data. There is. This is because the fluctuation command with the first half fluctuation (MODE) of "C9h" is invalid (the fluctuation itself is not performed) during the basic mode, so the address data of the first half notice distribution group table should not be defined here. ..

Next, FIG. 204 is a modification 2 of the first half advance notice distribution group address table in the case of non-reach variation. The first half notice distribution group address table shown in FIG. 204 has a column with a hold number of 0 as in the example of FIG. 203, and even when the number of holds is 0, the data of the first half notice distribution group table is set. There is. The table shown in FIG. 204 is characterized by undefined data even in places where the combination of the MODE value of the variable command and the number of holds is not possible in actual use (the place where the diagonal line is filled in the figure). The point is that regular data is set without it. That is, even in the place where the undefined data was in the table of FIG. 203 (excluding the row in which the variable command is invalid such as the row of the above-mentioned MODE of "C9h"), in the table of FIG. 204, the first half notice distribution group The regular address data of the table is set. This has the advantage that the notice can be made to appear even in the irregular case where the combination of the MODE value of the variable command and the number of holds is specified where it is impossible in actual use, and it does not reduce the interest. .. Further, in the check work during development, it can be confirmed as a fluctuation in which a notice appears without specifying the hold number command one by one, which has the effect of improving the efficiency of the check work.

In the table of FIG. 204, as shown by the line with an arrow in the figure, the columns of the number of hold numbers 1 to 4 in the same row are used as the data of the place where the combination of the value of the MODE and the number of hold numbers cannot be used in actual use. Among them, the same data as the data of the column for which the data is set and the number of pending numbers is the smallest is set. This is because, as described in the case of FIG. 203, basically, when the number of reservations is small, there is a tendency for more types of effects to be produced, and this is because setting in this way is advantageous when checking.

Next, FIG. 205 is a diagram showing a specific example (normal embodiment) of the structure of the first half notice distribution table. In FIG. 182 described above, a table for one row used for one advance notice distribution is shown, but FIG. 205 corresponds to each combination of a variable pattern type and a stop symbol for each advance notice distribution type and effect mode. The overall structure of the advance notice distribution table is shown as a matrix-like table (structure) including all the advance notice distribution tables. In this case, the upper part of FIG. 205 shows the table of the advance notice distribution type "A5" in the basic mode, and the lower part of FIG. 205 shows the table of the advance notice distribution type "C4" in the basic mode. However, in reality, similar tables exist for all of each notice distribution type and each production mode, and the number is very large.

In FIG. 205, the rows of the table shown in FIG. 182 are described as columns. For example, in the table shown in the upper part of FIG. 182 (first half notice distribution table C4-1), the first row is "none" (no notice), the second row is "roll" (with roll notice), and the third row is " The 4th column corresponds to "PB" (with push button notice), and the 5th column corresponds to "Flash" (with flashback notice). On the other hand, in the first half notice distribution table (C4: notice distribution / basic mode) shown in the lower part of FIG. 205, the first line is "none" (no notice) and the second line is "scroll" (scroll). (With notice), 3rd line corresponds to "scroll character" (with scroll character notice), 4th line corresponds to "PB" (with push button notice), 5th line corresponds to "flash" (with flashback notice) ing. Further, one column of the table shown in FIG. 205 corresponds to one row of the table shown in FIG. 182.

The structure of the advance notice distribution table shown in FIG. 205 is characterized by defining distribution data (distribution value) even for the parameter locations where the advance notice does not appear, and each advance notice distribution table (FIG. 205). The table size in the direction of the parameters (in this case, the fluctuation pattern type and the stop symbol) (in this case, the column direction) is set between each advance notice distribution type and the matrix table for each mode as shown in the upper or lower row. This is a common point. That is, the portion where the diagonal line is filled in FIG. 205 is data that is not actually used as long as the normal operation is performed. For example, in the upper and lower rows of FIG. 205, the “2R probability variation to 11R probability variation” without reach and the “11R normal” with normal reach are locations where a variation command is not sent from the game control device. Further, in the upper part of FIG. 205, the command is sent for "missing" without reach and "missing ~ 11R probability change" of normal reach, but the "notice A5: accessory SU4" does not occur, so it is not used. It has become. However, in this embodiment, instead of setting a table for such unused parts, some distribution value (“0” in the case of FIG. 205) is set for such unused parts. There is.

This has the following effects. That is, unless data is set for unused parts (that is, with the minimum necessary data structure), the size of the huge number of advance notice distribution tables (tables as shown in the upper or lower rows of FIG. 205) in the parameter direction ( (Column size in the figure) becomes disjointed, and the pointer is calculated each time for the advance notice distribution at the start of fluctuation, which requires a huge number of times, which increases the processing load of the control device. There is a problem. There is also a problem that it is not easy to change (or vice versa) to make some notice appear even in places that did not appear at the beginning during development. However, if the structure has the same size as described above, it is not necessary to calculate the pointer each time, and the processing load of the control device spent on the calculation of the pointer can be significantly reduced. You can get the advantage that you can use the processing power of the above, for example, to increase the types of notices. In addition, it is possible to change so that some notice appears even in places that did not appear at the beginning of development (or vice versa) simply by changing the already set distribution value, and development efficiency. There is also an effect of improving.

In the example of FIG. 205, "0" is set as the distribution data in all unused parts, but the present invention is not limited to this mode. Even if it is not used, if all are defined as 0, it cannot be said that there is a risk of running out of control by accessing outside the table and acquiring abnormal data. Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 206, among the unused column data, the distribution data of the row with the lowest notice reliability (in the case of the figure, the row of "Pattern 1" or "None") is set to a random number size (in the case of the figure). For example, it may be "1000") or "-1". By doing so, even if you should use that column, the place with the lowest reliability is absolutely selected, so it is less likely to cause trouble. In addition, it is effective to place the one with low reliability first because the number of searches is reduced and the processing time is not wasted.

As described above, the value defined in the non-acquired portion may be "-1" instead of the random number size (for example, 1000). When it is set to "-1", it becomes a practical maximum value, so even if the acquired random number value is abnormal, it is determined 100% there.
Further, not only one place (one row) but all rows in the column may be filled with "1000" or "-1". If "1000" or "-1" is set in all rows, it can be easily determined that the column is unused.

By executing each of the above programs, a command is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300, and each effect means (display device 41, board decoration device 42) is controlled by the effect control device 300 based on this command. , Frame decoration device 43, board effect device 44, frame effect device 45, speakers 12a, 12b, etc.). For example, the display device 41 executes a variable display game based on a decorative special figure.
Specifically, when the game ball wins the special figure start winning opening 25 or 26 during the game of the pachinko machine 1 (that is, when there is a special drawing start winning prize), a command for commanding the variation effect of the special figure. Is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300, and a special figure is displayed on the display unit 41a. ) Is performed, and if the stop result mode of the variable display game becomes a special result mode, a big hit occurs, and in the case of a miss, the game stops at the missed symbol.
Here, among the commands transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300, there is a command that does not start the effect alone but exerts an effect as a group. Command + fluctuation pattern command "etc. In the first embodiment, since the configuration is such that the stop symbol command → the variation pattern command are sent in this order, the combination is as described above in the order of “stop symbol command + variation pattern command”.
The "stop symbol command" may also be referred to as a "symbol specification command", and in the following description, the "symbol specification command" may be appropriately abbreviated as "symbol command".

When the stop symbol command and the variation pattern command are sequentially transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 based on the start prize of the special figure, the effect control device 300 determines the special figure based on the transmitted command. Perform production control.
The stop symbol command and the variation pattern command correspond to the first command and the second command, which are effective as a set, respectively.
Further, when the start port SW is turned on and the start memory is generated while the symbol is changing, the information indicating the number of reserved special figures = "1" is displayed on the screen of the display device 41, and the look-ahead command and the number of reserved special figures are displayed. A command is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300.
If the reception of a plurality of sets of commands (for example, "stop symbol command + variation pattern command") is normal, that is, the stop symbol command sent first and the variation pattern command sent later are normally received. Then, it is determined that the command to be a set has been established, and the effect control device 300 performs the effect of the symbol variation on the display device 41 based on the command to be a set.

Here, the types and contents of the commands that form a set will be described.
The commands that form a set include the following, and will be described separately for each production.
(1) Symbol fluctuation This is transmitted at the start of fluctuation, and a set is established by "stop symbol command" + "variation pattern command". The "stop symbol command" is abbreviated as a symbol command as appropriate.
(2) Production during big hit For this, a set is established by "effect screen command" + "big hit symbol command" according to the production section.
In addition, the production screen commands include the following.
(B) At the start of fanfare = Fanfare command (B) At the start of each round = Round command corresponding to the number of rounds (C) At the start of the interval = Interval command (D) At the start of the ending = Ending command In addition, "Stop symbol command" = In some cases, it is a "big hit symbol command".
Here, what is effective in a plurality of commands in a set is a combination of two commands, "stop symbol command" + "variation pattern command", as described above, but is not limited to this, for example, a command. The present invention can be applied even in a form in which three or more of the above are combined to exert an effect.
The "stop command" is a command that gives an instruction to stop a symbol such as during fluctuation, but this is a single command and does not form a set.
In the following description, the "motion data" means the data of the motion table (data for designating the image data to be displayed and its display position, etc.), and is different from the above-mentioned "motion control data".

Then, in this embodiment, the concept of scenario data (scenario layer) is used in the drawing control of the screen displayed on the display device 41. The scenario is, for example, a background scenario, a left symbol scenario, a right symbol scenario, etc., and the variation effect of the symbol is divided into a plurality of layers (scenario layers) and set in advance as a table (details will be described later). It is a method to generate a picture on one screen by controlling them individually as scenarios and synthesizing all the scenarios.
In a plurality of layers (scenario layers), for example, the background, the left symbol, the right symbol, and so on are individually categorized for each display element, and each of them independently displays a plurality of motion information simultaneously or continuously. It is set as a table of operation scenarios for switching and displaying the effect.

FIG. 207 is a diagram showing an example of a display component and a display screen used in the effect of the display device 41.
First, FIG. 207 (a) shows display components, which are divided into the following elements.
・ Background ・ Left design ・ Right design ・ Middle design ・ Notice character (Although it is a notice character, it is abbreviated as a notice character)
-Push button character (A character that appears by pressing the push button type production button 9 operated by the player, but is abbreviated as a push button character)
-Holding display-Fourth symbol Among the above display components, the background is the display element displayed at the backmost on the screen of the display device 41, and the left symbol, the right symbol, ... It is arranged so as to be a display element displayed on the front side of the screen in the order of the fourth symbol. Therefore, the fourth symbol is the display element displayed on the foremost side on the screen.

Then, a scenario table for the variation effect is created by being divided into each of the plurality of display components.
FIG. 208A shows a scenario table, which is divided into the following elements and created.
・ Background control scenario table ・ Left symbol control scenario table ・ Right symbol control scenario table ・ Middle symbol control scenario table ・ Notice character control scenario table ・ Push button character control scenario table ・ Hold display control scenario table ・4th symbol control scenario table

In addition, each display component is composed of layers, and these plurality of layers are sequentially stacked from the back side (background layer) to the front side, and the front row becomes the fourth symbol layer to form one display screen. Created.
Next, FIG. 207 (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen of the effect of the display device 41 when screen control is performed using the scenario table, and this is a diagram showing a plurality of layers from the back side (background layer). One display screen is created by sequentially stacking them toward the front side.
In FIG. 207 (b), 701 is the background, 702 is the left symbol, 703 is the right symbol, 704 is the middle symbol, 705 is the notice character, the push button character is not shown, 707 is the hold display, and 708 is the fourth symbol. , Each display component is displayed on a layer.
In such an effect control, when the effect screen is generated, it is divided into a plurality of layers (scenario layers) corresponding to the display components of the effect screen and set in advance as a table, and then they are individually controlled as a scenario. Then, by synthesizing all the scenarios in the form of layers, a picture on one screen is generated, displayed as an effect screen of the display device 41, and a variable effect of the design (special figure) is performed.

For example, in the example shown in FIG. 207 (b), the symbols "3, 5, 7" are displayed in a variable manner against a white background, and the character representing the star as a warning character crosses the middle symbol "5". As you can see, the effect that appears on the front side of each symbol is performed.
On the other hand, the hold display of the special figure is performed at the lower part of the display screen, and four hold states are displayed here. It should be noted that this hold display is an example of the special figure 1.
Although the push button character is not shown, this is a character that appears when the push button type production button 9 operated by the player is pressed during the production, and in that case, the sixth character from the back side. The push button character will be displayed on the layer of.

As described above, in the present embodiment, in the drawing control of the display device 41 controlled by the effect control device 300, the background, the left symbol, the right symbol, and the like are individually classified into categories for each display element, and each of them is independent. Then, a table of operation scenarios for simultaneously or continuously switching a plurality of motion information to display the effect is set for each display element, and the scenario table is selected and combined according to the effect command from the game control device 100. By synthesizing the images, the drawing contents (for each frame) on one screen are created.
Therefore, according to the above configuration, it is only necessary to define the minimum operation pattern (partization of operation), and it is possible to obtain the effect of saving the data capacity and improving the efficiency of development.

The invention concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
A game control device that controls the progress of the game,
In a gaming machine provided with an effect control device capable of controlling an effect means including a display means to perform an effect based on a command from the game control device.
The effect control device is
A scenario data setting means for setting scenario data for each display element in the drawing control of the screen to be displayed on the display means, and a scenario data setting means.
A screen creation means that selects and synthesizes preset scenario data for each display element in response to a command from the game control device, and creates the drawing contents of one screen.
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.
Here, the PROM (control ROM) 321 constitutes a scenario data setting means, and the VDP 312 constitutes a screen creation means.

Details such as the background of the above invention concept will be described below.
A conventional gaming machine, for example, one disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2005-13477, has a plurality of different moving image data for display elements such as a background, a pattern, and a notice character, and corresponds to a gaming state and a gaming result. A plurality of moving image data provided for each display element are selected and combined to form one variable display game.
However, in the variation effect of the symbol on the display device, for example, the motion of starting the variation, the motion of slowing down and temporarily stopping (number of feed frames, slippage, etc.), the type of advance notice effect, etc. Since there are various combinations, if scenario data (for example, different moving image data) is created for each screen for all combinations, the amount of data will be enormous.
Therefore, in the present embodiment, in the drawing control in the variation effect of the special figure in the effect control device 300, the background, the left symbol, the right symbol, and the like are individually categorized for each display element, and each is independently classified. A table of operation scenarios for simultaneously or continuously switching a plurality of motion information to display an effect is set for each display element and stored in advance in, for example, (PROM (control ROM) 321. Next, game control. In response to the effect command from the device 100, the effect control device 300 selects a scenario table, combines and synthesizes the scenario table to create the drawing content (for each frame) of one screen, thereby minimizing the drawing content (for each frame). All you have to do is define the limited operation pattern (partization of operation), which saves data capacity and improves development efficiency.
In particular, when producing various combinations, scenario management is performed independently for each display element, so it is not necessary to provide a scenario table for each combination, data capacity can be reduced, and development man-hours are reduced. can. (Because the number of tables to make is small).

In addition, most of the display components of the special figure variation effect differ in various movements and displayed characters depending on the mode, random number distribution, and the like. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 208 (a), if there is no scenario table corresponding to each display component, the variation effect cannot be controlled and divided well.
On the other hand, in this embodiment, since each scenario table corresponding to each display component is provided, the display component is displayed in various ways and in various ways depending on the mode, random number distribution, etc. Even if the characters and the like are different, it is easy to control the production and the development efficiency is improved.

Specific implementation points of the above invention concept are as follows.
In the flowchart of the effect control device 300, the following corresponds.
-Scenario data setting process: Fig. 106
-Customer waiting scenario data setting process (in the case of customer waiting demo production): Fig. 105
-PB notice scenario data setting process: FIG. 124
-Scenario setting process: Fig. 140
-Scenario analysis processing: Fig. 141, Fig. 142
-Motion registration process: Fig. 143
-Variable scenario switching process: Fig. 150
-Motion control processing: Fig. 152
-Production display editing process: FIGS. 162-164
-Drawing command preparation end processing: Step D32 of the main processing (Fig. 98)
-VDP interrupt processing: Fig. 168
-V blank start interrupt processing: Fig. 169
The scenario table is stored in the PROM (control ROM) 321. That is, when performing a special figure variation effect, a scenario table in which motion information for drawing control of a display character is selected from a plurality of characters, and the selected motion information is sequentially arranged in a table shape along the flow of the effect. A bull is created in advance and stored in a PROM (control ROM) 321. A large number of the scenario tables are defined for each effect content and display component (background, left symbol, right symbol, ... 4th symbol), and the effect control device 300 starts with the game control device 100. The production is performed by selecting the scenario table corresponding to the command of.

Next, the case of the demo display on the customer waiting screen will be described.
The scenario table shown in FIG. 208 (a) is a scenario table in a normal gaming state, and in the case of a demo display on a so-called customer waiting screen, unlike the normal gaming state, it is shown in FIG. 208 (b).
That is, the scenario table in the customer waiting demo shown in FIG. 208 (b) is different from the scenario table in the variation effect shown in FIG. 208 (a), and the scenario table for background control to the scenario for the fourth symbol control are contained in one table. The configuration is registered so that the motion information of each display component up to the table is collectively controlled. Therefore, the scenario table in the customer waiting demonstration is in the form of one integrated control scenario table specialized for the customer waiting demonstration production.
In addition to the customer waiting demo production, the jackpot production and the user's game history / game machine customization screen are less random due to random numbers, so one integrated control scenario as shown in FIG. 208 (b). It is composed of a bull.

Here, when the customer waiting demo production is compared with the variable production in the case of the normal gaming state described above, the flow of the production is defined in the customer waiting demo production, and the production content is generally less changed. Is.
Therefore, in this embodiment, not for each display component of the effect, but for each display of one integrated control scenario table, and each display from the background control scenario table to the fourth symbol control scenario table in one table. By making the configuration registered so as to collectively control the motion information of the components, there is an effect that the development efficiency can be improved and the data capacity can be reduced.
That is, in the production with little change, by registering all the display components in one scenario (small number of scenarios) table, it is easy for the developer to imagine the screen drawing contents, and the development efficiency is improved. Then, the data capacity can be expected to be reduced.

Here, in the form of one integrated control scenario table, for example, all display components are integratedly controlled by only one display component (for example, background) scenario table. By doing so, the effect control of the display device 41 can be performed with a smaller number of scenario tables than the scenario table in the case of the variable effect.
That is, in a production with little change such as a customer waiting demo production, it is easier to imagine the display contents in the production screen on the display device 41 by registering all the display components in one scenario table. (Easy to imagine for developers), so development efficiency can be improved and data capacity can be reduced.
Although one scenario table is set in the above-mentioned customer waiting demo production, it is not always one, and a small number of scenario tables can be used. For example, two scenario tables are set. But it may be. Since eight scenario tables are used in the variation effect in the normal game state, if there are at least a smaller number of scenario tables, there is a corresponding effect.

This background will be explained.
In the special figure variation effect on the display device 41, the characters and the like change in various ways according to the situation of the game game (mode, random number distribution, etc.), so the background, left symbol, right symbol, notice character, ..., etc. Since scenario tables must be set separately for each display component and combined, it is difficult for developers to imagine the display content of the production, but there is no help for it.
On the other hand, it is possible to configure the scenario table by dividing the customer waiting demonstration effect into each display component as in the case of the special figure variation effect, but it is difficult to solve the problem that it is difficult to imagine the display content of the effect.
Therefore, in this embodiment, the flow of the production is defined in the customer waiting demo production, and the table configuration for efficiently selecting the motion information of the customer waiting demo production is focused on the production content with little change. As a result of examining, by registering all display components in one scenario table instead of multiple scenario tables, it is easier to imagine the contents of the production, and as a result, the development efficiency is improved. It has achieved a reduction in data capacity.

The invention concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
The production control device is
Scenario data setting means for setting one scenario data in drawing control of the screen to be displayed on the display means, and
A screen creation means for creating the drawing contents of one screen based on one preset scenario data, and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.
Here, the PROM (control ROM) 321 constitutes a scenario data setting means, and the VDP 312 constitutes a screen creation means.

Next, a control operation in which the effect time of the scenario is variable depending on the timing when the effect button 9 is pressed will be described.
In this embodiment, scenario data is set for each display element in the drawing control of the screen displayed on the display device 41. Among them, the scenario table related to the effect of the effect button 9 includes the validity period of the effect button 9. A timer is provided to count the number of data. Then, depending on the timing at which the effect button 9 is pressed, the effect time of the subsequent scenario is controlled to be variable depending on the update status of the timer value.

FIG. 209 uses the scenario table of FIG. 192 shown above to perform a push button effect (abbreviated as PB effect. This is an effect when the effect button 9 is pressed (hereinafter, the same applies)). It is a figure explaining the operation of the case.
FIG. 209 (a) shows an operation situation using a scenario table related to the effect of the effect button 9. As shown in FIG. 209 (a), the valid period of the effect button 9 (PB) is set to 90 frames. The 90 frames here correspond to the initial value of the timer that counts the valid period of the effect button 9. One frame is, for example, about 33 msec.
Then, in the scenario table shown in FIG. 209 (a), the 1st to 4th rows (index numbers 0 to 3 shown on the right side of the table) are common parts, and the 5th to 6th rows (index numbers 4 to 5). Is the operation part when the effect button 9 is not pressed, and the 7th to 15th lines (index numbers 6 to 14) are the operation part when the effect button 9 is pressed. It is explained on the right side of the scenario table.
In the PB effect, one frame is subtracted and updated (that is, (-1) update) every time one frame elapses from 90 frames (this update process corresponds to a timer).

Next, each time the production frame advances, the timer (time corresponding to the number of frames) of the effective time (corresponding to the remaining frames when the frames are subtracted from 90 frames every frame) is deducted to "0". Then, the operation of the effect button 9 becomes invalid, and the effect when the effect button 9 is pressed is not performed.
The operation when the effect button 9 is not pressed is performed according to the 5th to 6th rows (index numbers 4 to 5) of the scenario table shown in FIG. 209 (a).
On the other hand, if the effect button 9 is pressed before the timer reaches "0", the effect starts when the timer is pressed, and the effect period is "remaining time" (that is, the time corresponding to the remaining frame) + "fixed time". ". Here, assuming that the above "remaining time" is an α frame, the "fixed time" is set as 55 frames.
In the scenario table shown in FIG. 209 (a), the above-mentioned effect period is represented by "variable weight", and "variable weight" = 55 + α (unit: frame) controls the time adjustment of PB operation by frame standby. There is.

Specifically, when the effect button 9 is pressed before the timer reaches "0", the scenario in the 7th to 15th rows (index numbers 6 to 14) of the scenario table shown in FIG. 209 (a) is displayed. The production progresses along. That is, when the player presses the production button 9, a military commander (push button character) appears, and the military commander speaks the lines.
This situation is shown in FIGS. 209 (b) and 209 (c). That is, when a display prompting the player to press the PB (effect button 9) as shown in FIG. 209 (b) is displayed on the screen of the display device 41, when the player presses the effect button 9, the display 209 (c) shows. As shown, Warlord B will appear, and a preview production will be performed to talk about the lines (not shown).
Since this case corresponds to the case where the effect button 9 is pressed before the timer reaches "0", the operation of the effect button 9 is not invalidated, and the effect is started when the effect button 9 is pressed. , The production period is "remaining time" (that is, α frame) + "fixed time" (55 frames).

The timer that counts the valid period of the effect button 9 counts down from 90 frames (initial value), so 90 frames + "fixed time" (55 frames) = 145 frames is the maximum effect period, and 145 frames-90 frames. = "Fixed time" (55 frames) is the minimum production period. Therefore, if the effect button 9 is pressed before the timer reaches "0", the advance notice effect is performed in the range of 145 frames to 55 frames.
In this way, the timer of the effective time remaining when the effect button 9 is pressed (“remaining time”: α frame) is added to the fixed effect time (55 frames) so that the effect time becomes variable. There is. Therefore, if you press the effect button 9 early, you can see a long notice effect (remaining time + fixed time) according to the remaining time (α frame), and if you press the effect button 9 at the last minute, you can see the minimum fixed time. A notice production will be performed.
As a result, the sooner the effect button 9 is pressed, the longer the advance notice effect can be seen. Therefore, it is an advantage for the player to press the effect button 9 earlier, and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

The invention concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
A game control device that controls the progress of the game,
In a gaming machine provided with an effect control device capable of controlling an effect means including a display means to perform an effect based on a command from the game control device.
The effect control device is
Scenario data is set for each display element in the drawing control of the screen to be displayed on the display means, and the scenario table related to the effect of the effect button includes a scenario data setting means provided with a timer for counting the button validity period.
The effect button control means that controls the effect time of the scenario to be performed after that based on the update status of the timer that counts the button validity period according to the timing when the effect button is pressed.
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.
Here, the PROM (control ROM) 321 constitutes a scenario data setting means, and the main control microcomputer (1st CPU) 311 constitutes an effect button control means.

Details such as the background of the above invention concept will be described below.
In a conventional gaming machine, for example, one disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-154896, when the player operates the effect button during the valid period of the operation of the effect button, a preset wait time (start of effect display) The effect is displayed over the time value from to the end).
However, the wait time here is a fixed value to the last, and does not change depending on the operation timing of the effect button. Therefore, it is difficult to produce an effect that enhances the interest of the game according to the operation timing of the effect button.
For example, if the time of the production performed when the production button is pressed is fixed, if the production button is pressed early, the production will end at an early timing, and the connection with the next stage of the preliminary production will be good. There is a drawback that it does not exist.
Specifically, if there is too much space or too narrow space between the next stage of the advance notice effect and the timing of pressing the effect button, there arises a problem that it is difficult to achieve an effective continuous effect.

Therefore, in this embodiment, the effect time of the scenario is controlled to be variable depending on the timing when the effect button 9 is pressed.
That is, the timer of the effective time remaining when the effect button 9 is pressed (“remaining time”: α frame) is added to the fixed effect time (55 frames) to make the effect time variable. Therefore, if you press the effect button 9 early, you can see a long notice effect (remaining time + fixed time) according to the remaining time (α frame), and if you press the effect button 9 at the last minute, you can see the minimum fixed time. A notice production will be performed.
According to this embodiment, since the end timing of the effect performed when the effect button 9 is pressed is constant, it becomes easy to smoothly connect with the advance notice effect of the next stage, and the effect of the effect is improved.
In particular, since the interval between the PB production and the next stage production is constant, it becomes easier to calculate the flow and timing of the scenario of the production that the player wants to show, and the effect is expected to improve the production efficiency as well as the production effect. Is obtained.
In addition, the earlier the effect button 9 is pressed, the longer the effect can be seen. Therefore, it is a merit for the player to press the effect button 9 earlier, and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

Specific implementation points of the above invention concept are as follows.
In the flowchart of the effect control device 300, the processing related to the scenario table is the same as the case where the scenario management is performed independently for each display element described above, and the following are particularly supported.
-Scenario analysis process: Step D579 of FIG. 141
Variable weight processing: Step D696 of FIG. 146.
-PB waiting process: Fig. 147
-PB determination branch processing: FIG. 147

Next, if you press the effect button 9 early, you can see a long notice effect (remaining time + fixed time) according to the remaining time (α frame), and if you press the effect button 9 at the last minute, the minimum fixed time The invention concept of the above-described configuration in which the advance notice effect is performed is expressed as follows.
The production button control means is
If the effect button is pressed at an early timing of the advance notice effect, a long advance notice effect is produced according to the remaining time of the effect, and if the effect button is pressed at a timing close to the end of the advance notice effect, at least the minimum fixed time is required. A gaming machine characterized in that it is controlled so as to produce a notice of.
Here, the main control microcomputer (1st CPU) 311 constitutes an effect button control means.

Further, the invention concept of the above-described configuration is that the timer (“remaining time”: α frame) of the effective time remaining when the effect button 9 is pressed is added to the fixed effect time (55 frames) to make the effect time variable. Is expressed as follows.
The production button control means is
A gaming machine characterized in that when the effect button is pressed for a notice effect, the value of the remaining effect effective time is added to a predetermined fixed effect time to change the advance effect time related to the effect button.
Here, the main control microcomputer (1st CPU) 311 constitutes an effect button control means.

Next, a modified example of this embodiment will be described with respect to the PB effect.
This embodiment may be a modified example as follows.
(1) In the first embodiment, the effect time of the scenario is controlled to be variable depending on the timing when the effect button 9 is pressed, but the present invention is not limited to this.
For example, a notice effect may be provided so that the effect button 9 cannot be seen until the end unless the effect button 9 is pressed quickly.
In this configuration, when the production button is pressed, the movie production starts, and when the production time ends, the movie also ends there. That is, if the player wants to see the advance notice effect until the end, it is necessary to press the effect button as soon as possible.
However, since it is almost impossible to press the button at the fastest speed after the "display prompting to press the effect button" appears, a certain amount of grace time shall be provided.
With such a configuration, it is possible to motivate the player to actively participate in the advance notice production game.

Next, the control for continuously determining the display content in the effect of the display device 41 will be described.
In this embodiment, a scenario table in which scenario data is set for each display element in the drawing control of the screen displayed on the display device 41 is provided, and the current effect state is continued in the scenario table. A determination code for determining whether or not to perform is provided, and when the motion information in the RAM 311a in the effect control device 300 and the motion information on the scenario table are different, the motion information on the scenario table is set as the effect content. In the same case, control is performed so that the motion information on the scenario table is not set as the effect content.

A specific example of the above control will be described with reference to the scenario table for the customer waiting demonstration effect shown in FIG. 177.
When performing a customer-waiting demonstration effect, the effect content on the display device 41 is realized in the order of progress of each data in the scenario table shown in FIG. 177.
In the process of the customer waiting demo production, as shown in FIG. 177, a motion continuation code (judgment code) for determining whether or not to continue the current production state (background continuation determination) is set in the eighth scenario data. By comparing this motion continuation code with the motion information in the RAM 311a, it is determined whether to continuously display the background of the effect screen or to perform the effect with a new background.

Next, a case where the background of the effect screen is continuously displayed or the effect is performed with a new background will be described separately for each case.
(A) Case of performing production with a new background In this case, for example, there is a case where a certain period of time elapses after the normal special figure fluctuation is completed and the demonstration production is started waiting for customers.
That is, when the game ball wins the start winning opening 25 or 26 of the special figure (that is, when there is a start winning of the special figure), a command for commanding the variation effect of the special figure is sent from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300. It is transmitted, and a variable display game using a special figure (decorative special figure) is executed on the display device 41. If the stop result mode of the variable display game becomes a special result mode, a big hit will occur, and in the case of a miss, the game will stop at the missed symbol.

Now, if the stop result mode is out of order, it will stop at the out-of-order symbol, and if there is no start prize after a certain period of time, it will move to the customer waiting demo production. The scenario table shown is used.
Here, first, the current motion information stored in the RAM 311a in the effect control device 300 is compared with the motion information on the scenario table shown in FIG. 177, and the determination by the motion continuation code is performed.
The determination by the motion continuation code is executed by the flowchart (motion continuation process) of FIG. 145. As the processing in the case of this continuation code, for example, in the case of the background, if the motion information of the motion control area of the background currently being displayed is the same as the value of the operand number (the instructed operation has already been executed). (If it exists), it ends without changing the background, and if it has a different value, it is set to switch to the background of the number specified by the operand.
The current motion information stored in the RAM 311a is that of the scenario table of the special figure fluctuation, but since the special figure is off and stopped at the symbol, and a certain period of time has passed since then, the current motion information is shown. It will be compared with the motion continuation code (determination code) of the scenario table shown in 177. Then, since the two are different, the setting for switching to the background (new background) of the number specified by the operand on the scenario table shown in FIG. 177 is made. The new background is No. Motion information corresponding to 12 will be set. As a result, the display device 41 has a No. A new background corresponding to the 12 motion information is displayed, and a customer waiting demonstration effect is performed.

(B) Case of performing production in a continuous background In this case, for example, a customer waiting demonstration production may continue.
If there are no customers on the platform (game machine) and the platform is vacant, the demonstration production waiting for customers will continue. In this case, the scenario table shown in FIG. 177 corresponding to the customer waiting demonstration effect is continuously used.
Similar to the case (a), the determination by the motion continuation code is executed by the flowchart (motion continuation process) of FIG. 145, but the process in the case of this continuation code is the motion control area of the background currently being displayed. If the motion information of is the same as the value of the operand number (if the instructed action has already been executed), the process ends without changing the background.
That is, the current motion information stored in the RAM 311a and the motion information on the scenario table (FIG. 177) are the same, and control is performed so that the motion information on the scenario table is not set as the effect content.
As a result, since the motion information of both is used, the operation is continued as if nothing happened, and the customer waiting demo production with the same background continues. Since the background operation is continued in this way, in the scenario table shown in FIG. 177, the scenario data of the corresponding portion is referred to as a “motion continuation code”.

In this way, whether or not to continuously display the background of the effect screen or to perform the effect with a new background is determined based on the determination code (motion continuation code), and when it is determined to use the new background, the current RAM 311a Overwrite the data with the data corresponding to the new background on the scenario table. As a result, the background is switched and the production is performed with a new background. On the other hand, when it is determined that the background continues, the instruction data acquired from the scenario table is discarded and the production proceeds with the current background as it is.
By doing so, the background state in the previous production can be continued in the next production, and for example, it is possible to have a display element having a sense of unity between the productions of different special figure fluctuations. , The interest of the game is improved.
For example, it is possible to perform various effects such as leaving the notice character on the screen of the display device 41 across a plurality of different special figure variation effects.
In addition, it is not necessary to properly use the scenario table depending on whether the production content is continued or not, and the development efficiency is improved. That is, one scenario table can be used to produce a production that matches the situation of the game.

The invention concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
A game control device that controls the progress of the game,
In a gaming machine provided with an effect control device capable of controlling an effect means including a display means to perform an effect based on a command from the game control device.
The effect control device is
Scenario data setting means is provided with scenario data for each display element in the drawing control of the screen to be displayed on the display means, and a determination code for determining whether or not to continue the current production state is provided in the scenario table.
If it is determined that the current motion information and the motion information on the scenario table are different based on the determination code, the motion information on the scenario table is set as the effect content, and if it is determined that they are the same, the motion information is set. The effect content control means that controls not to set the motion information on the scenario table as the effect content,
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.
Here, the PROM (control ROM) 321 constitutes the scenario data setting means, and the main control microcomputer (1st CPU) 311 constitutes the effect content control means.

Details such as the background of the above invention concept will be described below.
In a conventional gaming machine, for example, one disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2005-221583, when a customer waiting demo command is received, the sub-board (effect control device) side displays the demo effect for a predetermined time, and the effect time is displayed. Is configured to set new demo production display data each time.
However, in the case of the above-mentioned customer waiting demo production, if the production time continues (the customer waiting demo production continues), every time the previous production time ends, a new demo production will be performed again next time. Since the configuration is such that the display data is set, the control becomes complicated and the development efficiency is lowered.
Further, in the conventional gaming machine, the background effect is performed from the beginning for each change in the special figure, giving an impression of being busy. That is, each time the production shifts to the next production, the previous production is reset, so that the production is often busy, and there is a risk that the effect will be restless and the sense of unity will be lost. As a result, the interest in games has tended to decline. Furthermore, it was difficult to perform a variety of productions.
However, the background effect is not always continued. For example, if the previous special figure fluctuation was performing the reach effect and then shifts to the normal variation, simply continuing the background effect will result in the next background. Since is the one at the time of reach, it may be necessary to switch the background to the one with normal fluctuation.

Therefore, in this embodiment, a determination code (motion continuation code) for determining whether or not to continue the current effect state is provided in the scenario table, and the motion information in the RAM 311a in the effect control device 300 and the motion on the scenario table are provided. If the information is different, the motion information on the scenario table is set as the effect content, and if they are the same, the motion information on the scenario table is not set as the effect content.
That is, when the determination code (motion continuation code) is the continuation determination code, the requested display content (instruction data on the scenario table) and the display content of the current effect (control data in the RAM 311a). ) Is the same, the current display content is left as it is (the instruction data acquired from the scenario table is discarded), and if they are different, the instruction data on the scenario table is overwritten on the RAM 311a (because a new effect is started). (Including initial settings such as timers and table pointers), enable new effects to be started.
Specifically, there is a place in the scenario table where a code for performing a continuation judgment is set. For example, there is a background movie setting in the scenario table of symbol fluctuation.

Now, when a certain symbol change ends and the next symbol change starts, a judgment code (motion continuation code) for determining whether to continue the background movie is put in the scenario table, so that there are a plurality of symbols. You will be able to perform continuous background effects across variable effects. Therefore, the player does not feel a sense of incongruity that destroys the world view, and the interest of the game can be enhanced.
That is, it is not necessary to perform the background effect from the beginning for each change in the special figure, and it is not necessary to give a busy impression. For example, every time the production shifts to the next production, it is not necessary to reset the previous production, and the production is not rushed. In addition, the fear that the production will be restless and the sense of unity will be lost can be eliminated, and the fun of the game can be improved. It is also possible to perform a variety of productions.
It should be noted that the background setting at the start of the customer waiting demo production has the same effect as described above.
..
In addition, it is not necessary to use the scenario table properly depending on whether the production content is continued or not, and the development efficiency is improved. That is, one scenario table can be used to produce an effect that matches the situation of the game.

Specific implementation points of the above invention concept are as follows.
In the flowchart and data of the effect control device 300, the processing related to the scenario table is the same as the case where the scenario management is performed independently for each display element described above, and in particular, the following are supported.
-Scenario analysis processing: Fig. 141, Fig. 142
-Motion continuation processing: Fig. 145
・ Scenario table of customer waiting demonstration: Fig. 177
・ Scenario table of special figure fluctuation: Fig. 185

Next, the invention concept of the above configuration in which the background effect is continued at the time of the customer waiting demonstration effect is expressed as follows.
The production content control means
When the scenario table is a customer waiting demo effect, if it is determined that the current motion information and the motion information on the scenario table are the same based on the determination code, the motion on the scenario table is determined as the effect content. A gaming machine characterized by controlling so that information is not set and continuing background production.

Next, a modified example of this embodiment will be described with respect to the control by the determination code (motion continuation code).
This embodiment may be a modified example as follows.
(1) In addition to the background of the effect screen, the control may be such that the notice character or the like is left on the screen across the next symbol variation.
In this way, it becomes possible to perform an effect in which the advance notice characters and the like appear in succession across a plurality of variable effects, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.
The invention concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
The production content control means
When the scenario table includes the effect of the notice character, if it is determined that the current motion information and the motion information on the scenario table are the same based on the determination code, the effect content is on the scenario table. A gaming machine characterized in that motion information is controlled so as not to be set, and the notice character is left on the screen across the next special figure fluctuation.

Next, the control of the character defined in the motion table will be described.
In this embodiment, conditions are set for the characters defined in the motion table, the basic (representative) character is determined, and the animation is controlled to be created.
That is, when performing the effect on the display device 41, the scenario table is used as described above, but in this scenario table, the data for controlling the flow of a specific effect (which motion table is executed at what timing). Data that specifies whether to do it, etc.) is set.
Then, in the above motion table, there is motion data (that is, data for designating the image data to be displayed and its display position, etc.) of each blocked effect (mainly the effect display), and the motion is blocked. It means a directing action.
Therefore, in the motion table, motions are defined in chronological order and arranged as data so that the drawing of each display element (background, left symbol, right symbol, ...) can be controlled in frame units. .. In addition, even if the characters drawn on the motion table produce different effects depending on the situation, if the movements are the same, one basic (representative) character (basic character) is determined for multiple characters of the same type. Motion data is registered only one way at a time. In other words, only one basic character is defined as a motion and arranged as data.

In this case, the basic character is set to the one with the lowest jackpot reliability in the group to be replaced. For example, if there are white, blue, yellow, green, red, and rainbow types in the character related to the operation of the effect button 9 displayed in the effect of the push button notice (PB notice), it is defined in the motion data of the push button notice. In the example shown in the motion table of FIG. 192, "white", which has the lowest jackpot reliability, is used as the button character to be used. However, it is premised that it appears in common at the time of off and at the time of big hit.

A specific example of the above control will be described with reference to the motion table of the push button notice shown in FIG. 210.
The motion table shown in FIG. 210 defines data for displaying an animation in which the effect button 9 repeats unevenness in order to encourage the player to press the effect button 9. That is, in FIG. 210, the button character defined in the motion data of the push button notice is "white", which has the lowest jackpot reliability when the effect button 9 is not pressed (protruded) in the PB notice. When the effect button 9 is pressed (recessed) in the PB notice, it is set to use "black" (common regardless of the lighting color), which is the image of turning off the effect button 9. There is.
In each line of the motion table shown in FIG. 210, the code of the command is set at the beginning, and then the parameters corresponding to the command are set. However, there may be no parameters. In addition, each data (code) of the motion table is specified by a row, and the index number is shown on the right side of the table. For example, the data in the first line is the additional code, and the index number at that time is "0".
Since the motion table commands and parameters have been described in detail in FIG. 192, the following description will be limited to the outline necessary for the description of the operation.

Of the motion tables shown in FIG. 210, the first to twelfth lines (index numbers "0" to "11") correspond to the display of the state in which the effect button 9 is not pressed (protruded) in the PB notice. However, the 13th to 24th lines (index numbers "12" to "23") correspond to the display in which the effect button 9 is pressed (recessed) in the PB notice.
First, "push button white" is set as the basic character by the additional code in the first line (index number is "0") of the first motion table shown in FIG. 210.
As a result, when there are multiple types of push button characters displayed in the push button notice (PB notice), the "button" with the lowest jackpot reliability as the push button character defined in the motion data of the push button notice. Motion data will be registered with the "white" character (corresponding to the basic character).
This is to make it easier to use the push button character in common because there is a possibility that the push button notice will appear in common at both the big hit and the miss.

Next, set the behavior code on the second line (for details, set the command "behavior code" and the parameters "object index (0)" and "behavior index (0)"), and set the PB notice character (push button). ) Change the color. For example, the color of the PB notice character (push button) is changed from white to yellow.
This is an operation of replacing the color of the push button character with another one (for example, yellow) by this behavior processing when displaying the state in which the effect button 9 is not pressed (protruding) in the PB notice. It is something to do.
Next, the move 1 code is set on the third line. As a result, the display position and display size of the push button character (object) after the behavior processing are specified.
Next, the exit code is set on the 4th line. As a result, the data for one frame is completed.
In this way, when displaying the state in which the effect button 9 is not pressed (protruded) in the PB notice, set "white", which has the lowest jackpot reliability, as the basic character as the push button character. At the time of display, the color of the push button is changed from white to another color (a color based on the lottery result of the effect, for example, yellow) in the behavior processing to perform the effect.

On the other hand, when displaying the state in which the effect button 9 is pressed (recessed) in the PB notice, the deletion code is set in the 13th line (index number is "12") of the motion table shown in FIG. 210. , Command the deletion of the object (push button character). Next, on the 14th line, "push button black" is set as the basic character with the additional code.
This is an effect when the push button notice (PB notice) is displayed in the state where the button is pressed (recessed) in the animation display prompting the player to press the effect button 9. When the button is turned on. Character is "push button black". In this case, the character when the button is turned on is common to all operations (even when push buttons of various colors are displayed), so the subsequent behavior processing (here, the operation of replacing the color of the push button character with another one). ) Is not.
That is, the behavior code is not set after the additional code, and the move 1 code is set on the 15th line. As a result, the display position and display size of the push button character (object: "push button black" as the basic character) are specified.
Next, the exit code is set on the 16th line. As a result, the data for one frame is completed.
In this way, when displaying the state in which the effect button 9 is pressed (recessed) in the PB notice, the commonly used "black" is set as the basic character as the push button character, and the push is performed. The display is performed without replacing the button color with another color.

As described above, in the case of a notice (PB notice) that prompts the player to press the effect button 9, the motion data is registered in the motion table with the character (basic character) of "button white" having the lowest jackpot reliability. What is done is done.
Then, when displaying the state in which the effect button 9 is not pressed (protruding) in the PB notice, the action of replacing the color of the push button character with another one (for example, yellow) is performed by the behavior processing. After that, the operation of displaying the push button character on the screen is performed. After that, the result of the variable display game will be off or a big hit, but since the character of the push button will be the character of "button white" with the lowest jackpot reliability as the starting point, it will be the data that can be used in common both when it is off and when it is a big hit. Become.
For example, in the case of a big hit, if the "button white" character (basic character) is replaced with a rainbow (rainbow-colored) push button character in the behavior processing, the player will feel more excited, and then the big hit. As a result, the fun of the game is improved. Further, even if the game is off, if the "button white" character (basic character) is replaced with the red push button character in the behavior processing, the game can be made into a game with high expectations for a big hit.
In this way, the character of "button white" with the lowest jackpot reliability is registered in the motion table as the basic character, and the character is changed as the production progresses (however, for example, the character of the push button, the same type. If you want to change the character within the range), you can perform the behavior (function to replace the image data (character data) of the object (display element)) that replaces the basic character with another one in the control program. It will be possible to handle any display mode, and it will be data that can be used in common at the time of a miss or a big hit, the data capacity can be reduced, and the development efficiency will be improved.

The invention concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
A game control device that controls the progress of the game,
In a gaming machine provided with an effect control device capable of controlling an effect means including a display means to perform an effect based on a command from the game control device.
The effect control device is
Character data storage means for storing multiple image data of still images or moving images, and
A motion table storage means for storing a plurality of motion tables including the image data to be displayed on the display means and data for designating the display position thereof, and
It has a scenario table storage means for storing a plurality of scenario tables composed of data for controlling the progress of the effect including the display effect on the display means.
In the motion table, one basic character is defined and set for motion data of a plurality of characters performing the same operation.
The effect means is controlled based on the scenario table selected in response to a command from the game control device to perform the effect.
A gaming machine characterized in that motion data of characters other than the basic character is created based on the motion data of the basic character.
Here, the image ROM 322 constitutes a character data storage means, and the PROM (control ROM) 321 constitutes a motion table storage means and a scenario table storage means.

Details such as the background of the above invention concept will be described below.
A conventional gaming machine, for example, one disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-261724, has a plurality of button image data that can be displayed, and among the plurality of button image data held based on a determination result such as a jackpot reliability. It controls that one desired button image data is selected from the above and displayed on the effect screen.
However, in the above control, it is necessary to hold a large amount of data as displayable button image data, and as the amount of data increases, the processing of the image related to the button operation becomes complicated, and the development efficiency also decreases. Was there.
Explaining from the viewpoint of image control, for example, when creating a variation animation, it is necessary to make a character of a pattern appear.
However, there are innumerable combinations (states) of the symbols displayed on the screen of the display device 41, and it is impossible to create an animation that reflects all of them.

Therefore, in this embodiment, a basic (representative) character is determined, one animation is created (one in a group in which the characters have the same movement but different characters), and the character replacement process is performed by the control program. By performing (for example, behavior processing), it is possible to support any display mode, saving data capacity and improving development efficiency.
For example, the condition of the basic character used in the animation is that the registered address in the character ROM (image ROM 322) is the first (smaller number) in the same group (for example, the decorative special figure displayed at normal times). By making it the one with the lowest jackpot reliability, the behavior (replacement) calculation is made easier.

Specifically, in the case of a push button as a character, if the motion (drawing position of the character) is the same as the motion data of the push button, there is basically only one way even if the displayed characters are different. I try not to provide it. Therefore, the animation for generating the motion data of the push button is created after the basic character (for example, "button white") is determined.
That is, in this embodiment, conditions are set for the characters defined in the motion table, a basic (representative) character is determined, and control is performed to create one animation.
Then, the basic character is set to the one with the lowest jackpot reliability in the group to be replaced.
For example, if there are white, blue, yellow, green, red, and rainbow types of button characters displayed in the push button notice, the button character defined in the motion data of the push button notice has the highest jackpot reliability. You are using a low "white". However, it is premised that it appears in common at the time of off and at the time of big hit.
Even when displaying the state in which the effect button 9 is pressed (recessed) in the PB notice, if the "white" button character is used, the effect button 9 is not pressed (protruded) in the PB notice. Since it is difficult to make a difference between the display and the effect, the "black" button character is set as the basic character when the effect button 9 is pressed (recessed) in the PB notice.

On the other hand, in the case of a symbol, the character is created so as to start from the lowest number. As a representative, for example, it is not created only by "1". That is, the character is created so that it appears as a whole, such as 1 → 2 → 3 → ... → 9 → 1 →.
However, when the operation is switched (the possibility of changing to another operation, the timing with options, etc.), the operation is started from "1" again. In that case, "1" is set as the basic character (details will be described later in FIG. 214).
Also, when registering characters in the character ROM (image ROM 322), the same group is consolidated (designs (of the same size) for symbols, push buttons for push buttons), in ascending order of numbers and low jackpot reliability. Arrange in order, starting with the youngest address.
In this way, by registering the character with the lowest jackpot reliability as the basic character in the motion table, the data can be used in common at both the time of loss and the jackpot, and it is possible to facilitate the common change processing by behavior, and the data capacity. It is possible to save money and improve development efficiency.

Specific implementation points of the above invention concept are as follows.
In the flowchart of the effect control device 300, the processing related to the scenario table is the same as the case where the scenario management is performed independently for each display element described above, and the following are particularly supported.
-Motion registration process: Fig. 143
-PB waiting process: Fig. 147
-PB determination branch processing: FIG. 147
-Motion control processing: Fig. 152
-Motion execution processing: Fig. 153, Fig. 154
-Behavior index setting process: Fig. 161
-PB color conversion process: Fig. 166

Next, among the motion controls in this embodiment, an example of application to a character other than the push button character will be described.
Since the production content differs depending on the command from the game control device 100 and the content of the scenario table, even if the motion table is the same in the following application example, the production content of the variable display game will be different. ..
(1) Control to make the acquisition source of the display symbol number the same First, the control to make the acquisition source of the display symbol number the same will be described.
In the motion control of this embodiment, as described in the description of FIG. 191, even if the drawn character has a different effect depending on the situation, only one pattern is registered for the same movement as the basic character. What is registered on the table is the character with the youngest number in internal control (for example, the character with the youngest address in registration in the character ROM (image ROM 322), and in the case of FIG. 191 as the stop symbol "1"). There is.
FIG. 211 is a diagram showing an operation of controlling the display of the stop symbol by using the motion table as described above.
FIG. 211 (a) is a diagram showing a motion table of the left stop symbol display. In this motion table, the symbol "1" (basic character) is registered as the object index 0 (first line) by an additional code. Next, this symbol is replaced with a predetermined symbol by the behavior code specified by the behavior index 0 (second line), and is displayed as a stop symbol at the display position specified by the movement code on the third line.

By controlling the display of the stop symbol using the motion table shown in FIG. 211 (a), the acquisition source of the display symbol number of the stop symbol can be made the same both when the power is turned on and during the normal game.
More specifically, FIG. 211 (b) shows a stop symbol which is the result of the previous variable display game during the normal game. Here, the state of stopping at the symbol of "9, 6, 7" is displayed. In the display process in this case, the "left stop symbol area", the "middle stop symbol area", and the "right stop symbol area" are arranged in the predetermined storage area of the RAM 311a in the effect control device 300, and the "right stop symbol area" is arranged in these areas. The stop symbol is displayed by storing the symbol data of "9", "6", and "7", respectively, and reading the symbol data and drawing the symbol data on the display device 41. Further, in this case, the motion table of the left stop symbol display shown in FIG. 211A is used, and the symbol is replaced with the symbol to be stopped by the behavior code (here, the symbol data read from the storage area of the RAM 311a) and moved. Control is performed so that the stop symbol is displayed at the display position specified by the code.

On the other hand, FIG. 211 (c) shows a stop symbol of the special drawing (decorative special drawing) when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on. Here, the state of stopping at the symbol of "2, 4, 1" is displayed. In the display process in this case, the “left stop symbol area”, the “middle stop symbol area”, and the “right stop symbol area” are arranged in the RAM 311a of the effect control device 300, as in the above-described stop symbol display process during the normal game. Then, the symbol data of "2", "4", and "1" are stored in each of these areas before the drawing process, and the stopped symbol is displayed by reading the symbol data and drawing the symbol data on the display device 41. In this case as well, the motion table of the left stop symbol display shown in FIG. 211 (a) is used, and the symbol is replaced with the symbol to be stopped by the behavior code (here, the symbol data read from the storage area of the RAM 311a). , Control is performed to display as a stop symbol at the display position specified by the movement code.

In particular, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, it is displayed as an initial symbol regardless of the stop symbol of the previous variable display game, so that the symbol is a combination of fixed symbols. Therefore, the combination data of the fixed symbols may be directly specified and drawn without using the "left stop symbol area", "middle stop symbol area", and "right stop symbol area" of the RAM 311a (display processing). In this embodiment, the "left stop symbol area", "middle stop symbol area", and "right stop symbol area" of the RAM 311a in the effect control device 300 are used in the same manner as the stop symbol display process during the normal game. Then, before drawing the stop symbol, the symbol data of "2", "4", and "1" is written in the same area, and the symbols of "2", "4", and "1" in the same area are processed by the behavior processing. By replacing it, the stop symbol at the time of turning on the power is displayed on the display device 41.
In this way, since the symbols are a fixed combination when the power is turned on, the display process will be faster if the combination data of the fixed symbols is directly specified and drawn, but the "left stop symbol" of the RAM 311a is placed first with one cushion. By rewriting the "area", "middle stop symbol area", and "right stop symbol area" to the symbols "2", "4", and "1" respectively, the same RAM311a area is referred to in the replacement process by behavior. This makes it possible to control the motion, and the defined motion table can be used in common (common both when the power is turned on and during normal games), which has the effect of reducing the data capacity.

This background will be explained.
In a conventional gaming machine, for example, one disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-230583, when a power-on command is received from a game control device, the sub-board (effect control device) side is prepared in advance exclusively for power restoration. The image (stop symbol) is displayed on the display device.
However, in the above-mentioned control, it is necessary to separate the table for the symbol display control between during the normal game and when the power is turned on, and the data capacity is large.
Therefore, in this embodiment, the meaning of the symbol to be displayed on the display device 41 differs between when the power is turned on and during the normal game, and the initial symbol is used when the power is turned on and the previous stop symbol is used during the normal game. By configuring so that the symbol data can be acquired from the area, the behavior processing for replacing the basic character can be used in common. In other words, the acquisition source of the display symbol number of the stop symbol (“left stop symbol area”, “middle stop symbol area”, “right stop symbol area” of RAM311a) can be made the same both when the power is turned on and during the normal game. As a result, the amount of motion data is reduced (it is not necessary to separate it during normal games and when the power is turned on), and development efficiency is also improved.

The invention concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
A game control device that controls the progress of the game,
In a gaming machine provided with an effect control device capable of controlling an effect means including a display means to perform an effect based on a command from the game control device.
The effect control device is
Character data storage means for storing multiple image data of still images or moving images, and
A motion table storage means for storing a plurality of motion tables including the image data to be displayed on the display means and data for designating the display position thereof, and
It has a scenario table storage means for storing a plurality of scenario tables composed of data for controlling the progress of the effect including the display effect on the display means.
In the motion table, one basic character is defined and set for motion data of a plurality of characters performing the same operation.
The initial symbol displayed on the display means when the power is turned on is a fixed combination symbol by replacing the basic character, and the stop symbol displayed on the display means during the normal game is replaced with the basic character so as to display the stop symbol of the previous game. A gaming machine characterized in that the display is controlled so that the acquisition source of the display symbol number is the same both when the power is turned on and during a normal game.
Here, the image ROM 322 constitutes a character data storage means, and the PROM (control ROM) 321 constitutes a motion table storage means and a scenario table storage means.

(2) Control with one type of motion data registration Next, control with one type of motion data registration will be described.
In the motion control of this embodiment, even if the drawn character has a different effect depending on the situation, if the movement is the same, only one way is registered in the motion table, and it is internally registered as the basic character on the table. The character with the youngest number in control (for example, the character with the youngest registered address in the character ROM (image ROM 322), and in the case of FIG. 191, the stop symbol “1”) is used.
FIG. 212 is a diagram illustrating an operation of controlling the display of the stop symbol by using the motion table as described above.
FIG. 212 is a diagram showing a motion table of the left stop symbol display. In this motion table, the symbol “1” (basic character) is registered as the object index 0 (first line) by an additional code. That is, the character of the stop symbol "1" is specified.
Next, this symbol is replaced with a predetermined symbol by the behavior code specified by the behavior index 0 (second line). That is, the basic character is replaced with the character of the predetermined symbol by the behavior number (registration number of the change process) for changing the stop symbol character. Next, it is displayed as a stop symbol at the display position specified by the movement code on the third line.

By controlling the display of the stop symbol using the motion table shown in FIG. 212, the drawing character is changed by the program, so that it is not necessary to prepare motion data for each type of character.
More specifically, as shown in FIG. 212, the display data of the left symbol at the time of stop may be originally considered to have a plurality of types of patterns such as "1" to "9", but in this embodiment, the motion test is used. Only one type of character (here, the symbol character of "1") is registered as data in the bull, and the character is changed by the behavior to change to another symbol. Therefore, the data capacity of the character of the symbol can be reduced to a fraction.
This background will be explained.
In a conventional game machine, for example, one disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2005-168648, a character (for example, a symbol character) displayed on a display device is moved from a moving source (for example, ROM) to a moving destination (for example, RAM). When moving to and displaying on the screen of the display device, specify the position coordinates of the character by the counter corresponding to the number of movements of the character (the position coordinates of the number of movements required from the start of movement to the end of movement). It had to be set each time).
Therefore, it becomes necessary to prepare motion data for all of a plurality of types of characters, and the data capacity has increased.
Therefore, in this embodiment, even if the drawn characters have different effects depending on the situation, if the movements are the same, only one type of character (for example, the symbol character of "1") is used for the motion table, and the other symbols are used. Since the character is changed by the behavior of the program, it is not necessary to prepare the motion data for each type of character, the data capacity can be reduced, and the development efficiency is improved.
A program to change the character (behavior processing, etc.) is required, but since there is a high possibility that the type of stop symbol will differ depending on the model of the gaming machine, it is better to use one basic character and support it with the program. The versatility is increased, and it is easy to develop game machines.
Further, it is preferable that the change of the character that changes depending on the situation, such as the color change of the notice character, instead of the character of the stop symbol, can be changed programmatically by the subroutine information embedded in the motion table.

The invention concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
A game control device that controls the progress of the game,
In a gaming machine provided with an effect control device capable of controlling an effect means including a display means to perform an effect based on a command from the game control device.
The effect control device is
Character data storage means for storing multiple image data of still images or moving images, and
A motion table storage means for storing a plurality of motion tables including the image data to be displayed on the display means and data for designating the display position thereof, and
It has a scenario table storage means for storing a plurality of scenario tables composed of data for controlling the progress of the effect including the display effect on the display means.
In the motion table, even if the drawn characters have different effects depending on the situation, one type of character is defined and set for the same movement.
A gaming machine characterized in that it is configured to be changed to a character other than the basic character by behavior processing.
Here, the image ROM 322 constitutes a character data storage means, and the PROM (control ROM) 321 constitutes a motion table storage means and a scenario table storage means.

(3) Control to make the same symbol character size Next, control to make the same symbol character size will be described.
In the motion control of this embodiment, even if the design of the special figure (decorative special figure) is different for each game mode, if the movement (including stop) is the same, the same symbol character size is used, which is common. The use of motion tables is done.
FIG. 213 is a diagram illustrating an operation of controlling the display of a symbol by using the motion table as described above.
FIG. 213 (a) is a diagram showing a motion table of the left stop symbol display. In this motion table, the symbol “1” (basic character) is registered as the object index 0 by an additional code (first line). .. That is, the character of the stop symbol "1" is specified.
Next, this symbol is replaced with a predetermined symbol by the behavior code specified by the behavior index 0 (second line). That is, the basic character is replaced with the character of the predetermined symbol by the behavior number (registration number of the change process) for changing the stop symbol character. Next, it is displayed as a stop symbol at the display position specified by the movement code on the third line.

By controlling the display of the symbol using the motion table shown in FIG. 213 (a), even if the size of the symbol is different, the size of the transparent portion of the character can be adjusted to obtain the same symbol character size. Therefore, the motion table can be used in common, and it is possible to prevent the control from becoming complicated and the data capacity from becoming large due to the increase in the motion table.
More specifically, as shown in FIG. 213 (b), when the symbol character is a number in the normal mode, a number (here, “9, 6, 7 ”) is displayed in three columns.
On the other hand, during the special mode, as shown in FIG. 213 (c), even when the symbol character is a number, a Chinese numeral having a frame as a special figure on the screen of the display device 41 (here, "eight"). , 7, 4 ") are displayed in 3 columns.
Even in such a case, the size is adjusted by adjusting the size of the transparent portion of the character (here, the symbol character) so that the same symbol character size is used regardless of whether the normal mode or the special mode is used. As shown in FIG. 213 (b), the transparent portion of the symbol character in the normal mode is larger, and thus the transparent portion of the symbol character in the normal mode is in the special mode. By making it larger than the transparent part of the symbol character, it is adjusted to the same character size as the symbol character in the special mode.
Therefore, even if the symbol design of the special symbol is different for each game mode, such as the normal mode or the special mode as described above, if the movement (including stop) is the same, the same symbol character size is used. Since it is adjusted to, a common motion table can be used, the storage area is prevented from being compressed due to the data increase of the PROM (control ROM) 321, and the data increase and control due to the increase of the motion table are performed. It is possible to prevent complication.

This background will be explained.
Conventional gaming machines, for example, those disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-1788885, are different when stopped at a special symbol different from the normal symbol (temporary stop for re-variation) in the special symbol variation display game. The fluctuation display game is controlled based on the fluctuation pattern table. Therefore, it is not the control content of replacing the variable symbol based on the data of one pattern table.
Therefore, since the fluctuation display game is controlled based on a plurality of different fluctuation pattern tables, the increase in the pattern table causes an increase in data capacity and complicated control.
In addition to the above, there are some disclosed in, for example, JP-A-2010-113824 and JP-A-2010-113825, but in these techniques, the design changes depending on the game mode (a predetermined character corresponds to the number). The fluctuation pattern table differs depending on the corresponding character, and therefore, there is the same problem as described above.
Therefore, in this embodiment, even when the design of the special symbol is different for each game mode, such as in the normal mode or the special mode, the motion table shown in FIG. 213 (a) is used to display the symbol. By controlling the display, even if the size of the symbol is different, the size of the transparent part of the character can be adjusted to make the same symbol character size so that the motion table can be used in common and motion. It prevents the complicated control and the bloated data capacity due to the increase in the table.

The invention concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
A game control device that controls the progress of the game,
In a gaming machine provided with an effect control device capable of controlling an effect means including a display means to perform an effect based on a command from the game control device.
The effect control device is
Character data storage means for storing multiple image data of still images or moving images, and
A motion table storage means for storing a plurality of motion tables including the image data to be displayed on the display means and data for designating the display position thereof, and
It has a scenario table storage means for storing a plurality of scenario tables composed of data for controlling the progress of the effect including the display effect on the display means.
In the motion table, even if the drawn characters have different effects depending on the situation, one type of character is defined and set for the same movement.
Even if the character design changes and the size differs depending on the game situation, if the movement is the same including the stopped state, the character display can be controlled using a common motion table. A game machine characterized by having the same character size. Here, the image ROM 322 constitutes a character data storage means, and the PROM (control ROM) 321 constitutes a motion table storage means and a scenario table storage means. do.

(4) Control for setting the basic character to the character with the youngest number Next, control for setting the basic character to the character with the youngest number will be described.
This control is similar to the above-mentioned "(2) Control with one type of motion data registration", but the control here is from the viewpoint of control that it is easy to calculate the difference value of character replacement by behavior. In terms of deriving the effect, it is described separately from the above-mentioned explanation of control.
In the motion control of this embodiment, even if the drawn character has a different effect depending on the situation, if the movement is the same, only one way is registered in the motion table, and it is internally registered as the basic character on the table. The character with the youngest number in control (for example, the character with the youngest registered address in the character ROM (image ROM 322), and in the case of FIG. 191, the stop symbol “1”) is used.
FIG. 214 is a diagram illustrating an operation of controlling the display of the stop symbol by using the motion table as described above.
FIG. 214 is a diagram showing a motion table of the left stop symbol display. In this motion table, the symbol "1" (basic character) is registered as the object index 0 by the additional code (first line). That is, the character of the stop symbol "1" is specified.
In this method, the character with the youngest number (value) in internal control (the symbol character with the stop number "1") is set as the basic character as the symbol number.
Next, this symbol is replaced with a predetermined symbol by the behavior code specified by the behavior index 0 (second line). That is, the basic character is replaced with the character of the predetermined symbol by the behavior number (registration number of the change process) for changing the stop symbol character. Next, it is displayed as a stop symbol at the display position specified by the movement code on the third line.

By controlling the display of the stop symbol using the motion table shown in FIG. 214, the character with the youngest number (value) in internal control (the symbol character with the stop number "1") is set as the basic character. With this as a reference, it is easy to calculate the difference value such as character replacement by behavior (change processing), and it becomes easy to control.
More specifically, as shown in FIG. 214, the display data of the left symbol at the time of stop may be "1" to "9", although there are many kinds of patterns such as "1" to "9". Any value may be used as the reference (basic character), but by using "1", which is the youngest number (value) in internal control, as the reference, when replacing "1" with another stop symbol number. The difference can be calculated easily. For example, when replacing with "9" as another stop symbol number, the difference can be calculated simply by subtracting "1" from "9", and this is the same for other stop symbol numbers (for example, "8"). Then, "another stop symbol number"-"1" = difference, and the calculation becomes extremely simple and easy. Therefore, it is possible to obtain the effect that the display control of the stop symbol using the motion table is easy.

This background will be explained.
In a conventional game machine, for example, one disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2005-168648, a character (for example, a symbol character) displayed on a display device is moved from a moving source (for example, ROM) to a moving destination (for example, RAM). When moving to and displaying on the screen of the display device, specify the position coordinates of the character by the counter corresponding to the number of movements of the character (the position coordinates of the number of movements required from the start of movement to the end of movement). It had to be set each time). In addition, there was no definition or concept of a reference character or the like.
Therefore, the control of character change is complicated and troublesome, and the development efficiency is also lowered.
Therefore, in this embodiment, even if the drawn characters have different effects depending on the situation, if the movements are the same, only one type of basic character is used for the motion table, and the basic character is registered in the motion table. Is the character with the youngest number (value) in internal control (for example, the symbol character with the stop number "1"), which makes it easier to calculate the difference when replacing the basic character with another stop symbol number. , It becomes easier to control the display of the stop symbol using the motion table, and the development efficiency is also improved.

Not only when the stop symbol number is controlled as described above, but also when the notice character or the like is replaced by behavior processing, for example, the notice character or the like is internally ordered, so that the internal control is also performed. If the notice character of the youngest number (value) is set as the basic character and behavior processing is performed based on this, it is easy to calculate the difference value such as character replacement, and the effect of easy control is achieved. be.

The invention concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
A game control device that controls the progress of the game,
In a gaming machine provided with an effect control device capable of controlling an effect means including a display means to perform an effect based on a command from the game control device.
The effect control device is
Character data storage means for storing multiple image data of still images or moving images, and
A motion table storage means for storing a plurality of motion tables including the image data to be displayed on the display means and data for designating the display position thereof, and
It has a scenario table storage means for storing a plurality of scenario tables composed of data for controlling the progress of the effect including the display effect on the display means.
In the motion table, even if the drawn characters have different effects depending on the situation, one type of character is defined and set for the same movement.
The one type of character is a gaming machine characterized in that the character having the lowest number in internal control is set as a basic character. Here, the image ROM 322 constitutes a character data storage means and is a PROM (control). ROM) 321 constitutes a motion table storage means and a scenario table storage means.

(5) Control to set the basic character to the one with the youngest address in the character ROM registration Next, a modified example of the above-mentioned "(4) Control to set the basic character to the character with the youngest number" will be described.
That is, FIG. 214 shows "(4) Control for setting the basic character to the character with the youngest number", but the control mode is not limited to this, and as shown in FIG. 215, for example, the basic character is set to the character ROM. A modified example of controlling the setting to the one with the youngest address in registration may be adopted.
In this modification, the symbol "1" (basic character) is registered as the object index 0 by the additional code so that the motion table of the left stop symbol display is shown in FIG. 215 (a) (first line). .. That is, the character of the stop symbol "1" is specified.
This sets the symbol "1" (basic character) to the one with the youngest address in the character ROM (image ROM 322) registration.

Here, FIG. 215 (b) shows a list table of registered character members (here, symbol characters) of the character ROM (image ROM 322).
When registering characters in the character ROM (image ROM 322), the same group is consolidated (designs (of the same size) for symbols, push buttons for push buttons), in ascending order of numbers and low jackpot reliability. In order, the younger addresses are lined up first. Therefore, for the symbol character, the symbol "1" is registered at the youngest address.
In the motion table processing of the left stop symbol display shown in FIG. 215 (a), the instructions after the additional code are the same as in the case of FIG. 214, and the instruction of the behavior code, the movement code, and the end code are sequentially executed. ..

In this way, by controlling the display of the stop symbol using the motion table shown in FIG. 215 (a), the character with the youngest address in the character ROM (image ROM 322) registration (the symbol of the stop number "1"). The character) is set as the basic character, and the character replacement is controlled by the behavior (change processing) based on this.
In this case, among the symbol characters registered in the character ROM (image ROM 322), the character with the youngest address (the symbol character with the stop number "1") is used as the reference (basic character), and is replaced by behavior processing. Address calculation for the stop symbol character becomes easy.
For example, when replacing with "9" as another stop symbol number, the difference in address calculation can be calculated simply by subtracting "1" from "9", which is another stop symbol number (for example, "8"). ) Is the same, and "other stop symbol number"-"1" = difference in address calculation, which makes the calculation extremely simple and easy. Therefore, it is possible to obtain the effect that the display control of the stop symbol using the motion table is easy.
Not only when the stop symbol number is controlled as described above, but also when the notice character or the like is replaced by behavior processing, for example, the notice character or the like is ordered using the registered address of the character ROM (image ROM 322) as an index. Similarly, if the notice character of the youngest address in the character ROM (image ROM 322) registration is set as the basic character and the behavior processing is performed based on this, the difference value such as character replacement can be calculated. It has the effect of being easy and easy to control.

The invention concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
A game control device that controls the progress of the game,
In a gaming machine provided with an effect control device capable of controlling an effect means including a display means to perform an effect based on a command from the game control device.
The effect control device is
Character data storage means for storing multiple image data of still images or moving images, and
A motion table storage means for storing a plurality of motion tables including the image data to be displayed on the display means and data for designating the display position thereof, and
It has a scenario table storage means for storing a plurality of scenario tables composed of data for controlling the progress of the effect including the display effect on the display means.
In the motion table, even if the drawn characters have different effects depending on the situation, one type of character is defined and set for the same movement.
The one type of character is a gaming machine characterized in that the character having the youngest address registered in the character data storage means is set as a basic character. Here, the image ROM 322 uses the character data storage means. The PROM (control ROM) 321 constitutes a motion table storage means and a scenario table storage means.

Next, the control of predicting and selecting the background type before the end of the jackpot will be described.
In this embodiment, the background type is predicted and selected from the game situation before the end of the jackpot effect, and the symbol stop screen using the selected background type is displayed before the ending period of the jackpot ends. Is done.
Specifically, after the big hit effect, the display device 41 returns to the normal screen for fluctuating the special figure (decorative special figure, the same applies hereinafter), where the background screen (for example, the background movie) that harmonizes with the pattern fluctuation is returned. ) Is displayed. In this case, there is a high possibility that the type of background screen and the shape of the special figure will differ depending on the game state at that time (for example, probability fluctuation, time reduction, normal probability, etc.).
The effect control device 300 determines the game state based on the probability information command from the game control device 100, but the game control device 100 may change the state such as the probability when the jackpot operation is completed. Therefore, the probability information command can be sent just before the start of the special figure fluctuation after the big hit is over.
However, if the type of background screen is changed by receiving the probability information command, the background screen for the ending screen of the jackpot will suddenly switch to the background screen for when the special figure fluctuates, which may result in a busy production. Highly probable.

This background will be explained.
In a conventional gaming machine, for example, one disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2004-105528, after the jackpot is completed, the sub-board (effect control device) is a display device based on an end command, a time saving background command, etc. received from the game control device. The background screen of was switched to the game state of time-saving background. In this case, the command from the game control device is not sent to the production control device unless it is just before the start of the special figure change after the big hit ends, so the background screen for the special figure change suddenly from the big hit end screen. It was switched to, and it became a busy production, and the impression on the player was bad.
On the other hand, the effect control device determines the game state based on the command from the game control device, but the game control device may change the state such as the probability when the jackpot operation is completed. , The command can be sent inevitably just before the start of the special figure fluctuation after the big hit is over.

Therefore, in this embodiment, a time (predetermined symbol display period) for displaying the so-called stop symbol display screen is provided during the specified time (for example, about 1 to 2 seconds) before the end of the jackpot ending operation. By setting the background screen of the above as the background screen when the special figure changes in the normal game after the big hit, it is possible to smoothly shift from the ending period of the big hit to the special figure change game in the normal game state.
The control of the ending period is specifically shown in FIG. 216.
In FIG. 216, the jackpot operation is performed in a plurality of rounds, an ending period Te is provided in the final round (for example, 16 rounds), an effect suitable for the end of the jackpot is performed, and the next special figure change is started. Be prepared.
In this case, in the first half period T1 of the ending period Te, the ending movie is displayed on the screen of the display device 41, and the end effect of the big hit is performed. On the other hand, in the latter half period T2 (for example, 1 to 2 seconds) of the ending period Te, the period for displaying the screen of the stop symbol display (for example, the jackpot symbol "7, 7, 7" in the jackpot) (predetermined symbol display period). ), And the background movie is displayed behind the stop symbol display as the background of the screen at that time. The background movie at this time needs to be produced in harmony with the next game state (for example, probability fluctuation, time reduction, normal probability, etc.) after the end of the big hit.

Here, at the start of the latter half period T2, the effect control device 300 has not yet received the probability information command (command for notifying whether the probability fluctuates after the end of the big hit) from the game control device 100. The probability information command is only transmitted from the game control device 100 just before the ending period of the jackpot ends.
Therefore, in the effect control device 300, since the background movie is set according to the game state to be displayed before and after receiving the probability information command, it is necessary to predict the game state after the end of the big hit.
Therefore, for example, the symbol command received during the jackpot (it may be the one received at the start of the fluctuation of the symbol. If it is operating normally, the information should be basically the same even just before the end of the jackpot), the fanfare command, and the ending. In addition to the contents of the command and the like, the prediction is performed in consideration of the internal parameters (internal information) of the effect control device 300.
The internal parameters are as follows.
By the distribution process in the effect control process inside the effect control device 300, for example, even if the game control device 100 sends information on the probability variation symbol, it keeps hiding the fact that the probability fluctuation is entered, as if it was hit by the normal symbol. It is also possible to perform an effect (for example, a so-called latent probability change state), in which case the information corresponds to an internal parameter.
In this way, the prediction accuracy of the next game situation is improved by performing the prediction considering not only the command received from the game control device 100 but also the internal parameters of the effect control device 300.

Then, the background type is predicted and selected from the game situation based on the above-mentioned various information. Since a plurality of types of background movies are stored in the image ROM 322 in advance, this is performed by selecting one background movie that matches the game situation after the big hit from the plurality of types of background movies. Here, the background movie selection process is performed by the behavior process of the control program.
For example, even if the image drawn on the motion table (for example, a movie (video)) has a different effect depending on the situation of the game, conditions other than the playback content of the image (for example, the image size and the like) If the drawing position, etc.) is the same, only one image data is registered for the same type of game state, and when the effect is different depending on the situation of the game game, the registered image data is converted to other image data by behavior processing. By replacing it, control such as selecting the type of image is performed.

As an example, as a background movie when shifting to a normal game after the big hit ends, the image data of the background movie that matches the game state of only a short time without probability fluctuation is used as the background image after the big hit ends before the big hit ends. If you register and the game state after the big hit ends with a probability fluctuation, you can easily control it by replacing the background movie with a background movie corresponding to the probability fluctuation in the behavior processing. Become.
Then, in the ending period Te shown in FIG. 216, the background movie selected at the time when the first half period T1 ends and the second half period T2 starts is displayed on the screen of the display device 41. As a result, in the latter half period T2 of the ending period Te, the background movie is superimposed on the background of the screen of the stop symbol display (for example, "7, 7, 7"), and the next game after the big hit ends. The production is performed in harmony with the state (for example, probability fluctuation, time saving, normal probability, etc.).
Next, the probability information command is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 just before the end of the latter half period T2 in the ending period Te. In addition, the symbol variation display game of the special figure based on the next variation command is started from the timing when the latter half period T2 ends.

In this way, in the effect control device 300, in addition to the command information (ending command, etc.) already received from the game control device 100, the game situation in which the internal parameters of the effect control device 300 are also taken into consideration, is normal after a big hit. Control to predict the background type in the game, select one background movie, and display the symbol stop screen using the selected background movie as the background screen on the display device 41 before the ending period of the jackpot ends. Will be done.
Therefore, by creating a space for displaying the symbol stop screen using the background movie before the ending operation of the jackpot is completed, it is possible to prevent sudden switching of the effect screen and improve the effect.
In addition, since it is predicted by the internal parameters of the effect control device 300 in advance, there is a high possibility that normal display can be performed without taking measures when the probability information command is not received, and the development is efficient.・ Can be controlled.

The invention concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
A game control device that controls the progress of the game,
In a gaming machine provided with an effect control device capable of controlling an effect means including a display means to perform an effect based on a command from the game control device.
The effect control device is
In the display means, it is possible to variablely display and stop a plurality of types of decorative symbols for production, and execute a variable display game including the occurrence of a special game state, and before the end of the ending operation of the special game state. A predetermined symbol display period for displaying the decorative symbol stop display screen is provided.
A background type selection means for predicting and selecting a background type in a normal game after a special game state based on at least command information from a game control device that has already been received, and
A background effect means for displaying the background screen of the background type selected by the background type selection means as the background of the decorative symbol stop display during the symbol display period, and a background effect means.
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.
Here, the effect control device 300 constitutes a background type selection means and a background effect means.
Further, the invention concept of the configuration in which the background type is predicted and selected before the effect control device 300 receives the probability information command is expressed as follows.
Background production means
A gaming machine characterized in that a background type is predicted and selected before the effect control device receives a probability information command transmitted from the game control device at the end of a special gaming state.

Specific implementation points of the above invention concept are as follows.
In the flowchart and data of the effect control device 300, the processing related to the scenario table is the same as the case where the scenario management is performed independently for each display element described above, and in particular, the following are supported.
-Motion registration process: FIG. 143 (step D637, step D641, etc.)
・ Scenario table at the ending: Fig. 193

Next, a modified example of the control that predicts and selects the background type before the end of the jackpot will be described.
This embodiment may be a modified example as follows.
(1) If the predicted background type and the content of the probability information command match, the background type can be used as it is as the background screen in the normal game after the big hit, and if it is different, the probability information The background type may be modified according to the content of the command (to give priority to the instruction from the game control device 100).
In this case, the background movie of the predicted background type and the background movie changed according to the content of the probability information command have the same conditions (for example, image size, drawing position, etc.) other than the playback content of the image. Since it is set, the background type can be changed (that is, the probability information command) by replacing the image data of the registered predicted background movie with the image data of the background movie that is changed according to the content of the probability information command by behavior processing. The control may be such that the background type is modified according to the content).
In addition, in the control of this embodiment, there is no difference between the predicted background type and the background type in the normal game after the big hit is completed.
On the other hand, during inspections during the development of gaming machines, there is a possibility that there will be a difference between the two (because it is possible to send commands that ignore the flow of the game), but various commands are sent. If the development is performed to confirm the result, the possibility that the predicted background type and the background type in the normal game after the big hit is different can be extremely reduced.

The invention concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
The production control device is
Character data storage means for storing multiple image data of still images or moving images, and
A motion table storage means for storing a plurality of motion tables including the image data to be displayed on the display means and data for designating the display position thereof, and
It has a scenario table storage means for storing a plurality of scenario tables composed of data for controlling the progress of the effect including the display effect on the display means.
In the motion table, even if the drawn moving image has different effects depending on the situation, if the conditions other than the playback content of the moving image are the same, one type of moving image is registered.
A gaming machine characterized in that it is configured to be changed to other videos by behavior processing.

(2) If it is difficult to determine whether the predicted background type and the content of the probability information command match, for example, a default background screen is determined in advance for each content of the probability information command, and the default background screen is determined. May be controlled to be displayed as a background screen in a normal game after the big hit is completed. For example, if the content of the probability information command is "probability fluctuation", a gorgeous default background movie for "probability fluctuation", and if it is "low probability / time saving", a normal default background for "low probability / time saving". Set it as a movie.
And if this time is a probability fluctuation jackpot, if you adopt a background movie for "probability fluctuation", if it is a normal jackpot, if you adopt a background movie for "low probability / time saving", there is no big difference. , You will be able to perform safe productions, and you will not lose the interest of the game.

Next, control for efficiently defining the effect processing by defining a plurality of objects of the same category in the motion table will be described.
In this embodiment, a plurality of objects (for example, characters) of the same category are defined in the motion table to control the effect.
That is, motion data (data that specifies the image data to be displayed and its display position, etc.) is registered for each display element (for example, background, left symbol, right symbol, ...) In the motion table. , Those data are collectively registered in the object group defined as the same category.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 186 as an example of a motion table at which the left symbol normally starts to fluctuate, for example, regarding the object group defined as the left symbol category, not only the current symbol but also the previous symbol, the next symbol, etc. Is also defined in one motion table as a symbol character. Then, for each of these objects (characters such as the current symbol, the previous symbol, the next symbol, etc.), the character No., coordinates, size, behavior, and the like are defined on the motion table as motion data.
Although not shown in the motion table data shown in FIG. 186, the effect may be enhanced by adding "transparency" to the motion data. The “transparency” data is defined in the same manner as the lines of the effect 1 code and the effect 2 code as shown in FIG. 196, for example.
When the motion data of "transparency" is added to the motion table, the symbol is opaque at the start of the fluctuation of the symbol (decorative special figure) in the fluctuation display game on the display device 41, but the transparency gradually increases after the fluctuation starts. By the time it reaches the maximum speed, it will be almost transparent.
By using such "transparency" motion data, there is an effect of making it easier to see the notice character displayed in the background or behind the pattern. Specifically, while the symbol is fluctuating at high speed, even if the symbol is displayed opaquely, the player can only somehow follow the background and the notice character. Therefore, by increasing the transparency of the symbol as much as possible so that the behavior of the fluctuation can be understood, it is possible to make the advance notice effect performed behind the symbol easier to see and improve the interest of the game. Then, by the time the symbol fluctuation slows down, an operation of gradually returning to opacity is performed.
When adding "transparency" data, it is defined so that the transparency is set except where the motion table displays 100% opacity.
In this way, by defining the symbol character in one motion table, for example, in the case of the left symbol category, not only the symbol (current symbol) visible in front of the screen 41a of the display device 41 but also the corresponding symbol. The next symbol, the previous symbol, etc. arranged above and below the symbol are also defined in the same motion table. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 187 (a), when the current symbol visible in front of the screen 41a of the display device 41 is “1”, the next symbol “2” arranged on the current symbol “1”. Is located immediately before the screen 41a, and the previous symbol "9" arranged under the current symbol "1" is controlled so that a part of the previous symbol "9" is displayed on the screen 41a to produce a symbol variation. become.

The motion table corresponding to this effect is shown in FIG. 186 described above.
That is, FIG. 186 shows the data for the first four frames of the motion table of the normal fluctuation (first half) of the left symbol. In this motion table, the symbol "2", the symbol "1", and the symbol "9" are defined in the same motion table, and the fluctuation display of the symbol is performed, but the symbol number "1" is the center. Therefore, it can be relatively calculated that the previous symbol is "9" immediately before it and the next symbol is "2" one after it, so when the coordinates return to the top, it is the central symbol. Can have a simple structure because the control target can be narrowed down to one such as "2".
Therefore, according to the control using the motion table shown in FIG. 186, not only the current symbol "1" but also the next symbol "2" and the previous symbol "9" are defined as the same motion table. Since the motion control of the character is performed, when the replacement operation of the next symbol "2" and the previous symbol "9" is performed with the current symbol "1" as a reference, a character of the same category (here, a symbol character) is one motion. Since it is defined in the table, it is possible to reuse the parameters of the calculation, and the calculation process can be performed efficiently.

That is, when controlling the effect using such a motion table, the motions of characters in the same category are collectively registered as an object group in one motion table, so that they are similar. It is possible to collectively control characters of the same category that operate. Therefore, it is easy to handle when creating a scenario table for managing motion, the amount of data can be reduced, the control process becomes easy to think about, and the development efficiency is improved. As a result, it leads to enhancing the interest of the game.
This background will be explained.
In conventional gaming machines, for example, those disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2007-679, control is performed to determine the display position of a symbol by setting reference coordinates and vector values.
This is a control using a data structure with multiple parameters.
However, in the conventional gaming machine, since the control uses a data structure having a plurality of parameters, each symbol character is displayed even if the characters of the same category have similar operations such as the symbol character. Since the position and the like (motion) are controlled individually, the control is complicated, the data capacity is large, and the development efficiency is lowered.

Therefore, in this embodiment, multiple objects (for example, characters) of the same category are defined in the motion table (motion data such as character number, coordinates, size, behavior, etc. are defined for each of the plurality of objects) to control the effect. By doing so, it is possible to collectively control the characters of the same category that have similar operations, and it is also possible to reuse the parameters of the calculation so that the calculation processing can be performed efficiently. ing.
Objects that are defined more than once in the same category are not completely unrelated, but objects that have similar behaviors are defined in the same category.
For example, when controlling a symbol, when displaying the current symbol, the next symbol, the previous symbol, etc. on the screen of the display device 41, the replacement operation of the next symbol and the previous symbol is performed based on the current symbol, but they are the same. If the characters in the category (here, the symbol characters) are defined in one motion table, the instructions (instructions for replacement calculation) can be given in the same table, so the program in anticipation of that. It can be built and the efficiency of program development is good. Further, when performing the replacement operation, the parameters of the operation can be reused, and the control can be performed efficiently. In particular, the efficiency of arithmetic processing and the like is improved.

The invention concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
A game control device that controls the progress of the game,
In a gaming machine provided with an effect control device capable of controlling an effect means including a display means to perform an effect based on a command from the game control device.
The effect control device is
Character data storage means for storing multiple image data of still images or moving images, and
A motion table storage means for storing a plurality of motion tables including the image data to be displayed on the display means and data for designating the display position thereof, and
It has a scenario table storage means for storing a plurality of scenario tables composed of data for controlling the progress of the effect including the display effect on the display means.
Multiple objects belonging to the same category are defined and registered in the motion table, and registered.
A gaming machine characterized in that the motions of a plurality of objects belonging to the same category can be controlled by using the same motion table.
Here, the image ROM 322 constitutes a character data storage means, and the PROM (control ROM) 321 constitutes a motion table storage means and a scenario table storage means.

Specific implementation points of the above invention concept are as follows.
In the flowchart and data of the effect control device 300, the processing related to the scenario table is the same as the case where the scenario management is performed independently for each display element described above, and in particular, the following are supported.
-Motion registration process: Fig. 143
-Motion control processing: Fig. 152
-Motion command execution processing: Fig. 153, Fig. 154
-Bitmap addition processing: Fig. 155
-Motion table at the start of normal fluctuation of the left symbol: Fig. 186

Next, a modified example of this embodiment will be described with respect to the effect control in which a plurality of objects of the same category are defined in the motion table.
This embodiment may be a modified example as follows.
(1) The objects defined in the motion table as the same category are not limited to the symbol characters. For example, with respect to characters appearing in the advance notice effect and other display effects, a plurality of objects of the same category may be defined in the same motion table.
Specifically, for example, for the "button character" when prompting the pressing of the effect button 9, the "military commander character" that appears after being pressed, the "speech balloon, dialogue character" of the military commander, etc., the motion of the push button notice effect. Multiple objects of the same category may be defined in the table.
In this way, it is possible to collectively control the characters of the same category that are related operations in the push button notice effect, and the arithmetic processing can be performed efficiently.

Next, a control for drawing a character that looks like a still image display will be described using a one-image moving image character.
In this embodiment, with respect to the image ROM 322, a character of a normal moving image display is stored by using a moving image character, and by repeatedly displaying one still image, a character that looks like a still image display (looks like a still image). The character) is stored using a one-image moving image character in a format in which a still image composed of only one image is repeatedly displayed, and a common motion table is used when displaying these characters on the display device 41. The drawing is controlled using.
That is, even if a character looks like a still image on the screen of the display device 41 viewed by the player, the internal control of the effect control device 300 is composed of only one image in a format in which the still image is repeatedly displayed. The one-image moving image character is stored in the image ROM 322, and the one-image moving image character is created by using data in a format in which the same still image composed of only one image is repeatedly displayed.

An example of a motion table that defines a motion using one image / moving character is shown in the lower part of FIG. 194.
The lower part of FIG. 194 is a configuration example of a symbol movie for sharing a motion table, and in particular, a motion table when performing a temporary stop (temporary stop for re-variation) operation of the left symbol. Is.
In the motion table shown in the lower part of FIG. 194, when k = 3 (the specified line is the 4th line), the command is the decoding code instructing the decoding of the movie, and the object index 0 is acquired, but the object index 0 is k =. Since the symbol "1" is added at 0 (first line), the motion data of the left temporary stop corresponding to this symbol "1" is decoded and executed.
At this time, when the temporary stop of the left symbol is displayed as a still image of "1", a plurality of decoding codes are repeated to decode a plurality of one-image moving characters and read them from the image ROM 322. As shown in a), a tiger character imitating the pattern "1" is drawn as a decorative special figure on the screen 41a of the display device 41. Since the one-image moving image character is created by a movie (still image movie) composed of the same image (that is, the same still image) (that is, the one-image moving image character repeats the same still image composed of only one image). Even if the image is played back as a moving image, the appearance of the image itself does not change, and as shown in FIG. 194 (a), the same still image as the still image character is drawn. It looks like a display to the player. As described above, the still image movie is a movie in which even if the still image looks like a still image, the same type of character composed of only one image is continuously displayed by the internal control of the effect control device 300.
However, in the motion table shown in the lower part of FIG. 194, since the y-coordinate of the still image of the symbol "1" changes every time, the still image of the symbol "1" is shaken in the vertical direction in the process of temporary stop. Is displayed and a temporary stop operation is produced.
When the temporary stop of the left symbol is displayed as a still image of "1", there are many games in which the reliability of the jackpot is low even if the symbol is re-changed after the temporary stop, and there are many results of loss.

On the other hand, when the temporary stop of the left symbol is displayed in the animation movie of "1", the normal movie character is decoded by the instruction of the decoding code, read from the image ROM 322, and displayed as shown in FIG. 179 (b). On the screen 41a of the device 41, a tiger character imitating the symbol "1" is displayed in a moving state, and a temporary stop operation of the symbol "1" is displayed as a decorative special figure. At this time, the animation movie of the tiger character imitating the symbol "1" is displayed with an effect of shaking while moving and temporarily stopping.
In addition, when the temporary stop of the left symbol is displayed in the animation movie of "1", there are many games with high reliability of the big hit, and it becomes a big hit due to the re-fluctuation after the temporary stop, or it is a hot reach effect after the temporary stop. In many cases.

In this way, in the motion table that defines the motion of the image, the motion table is common by defining the character of the normal moving image and the one-image moving image character that looks like a still image display in the same table. I have to.
Then, when displaying a normal moving image character that looks like a moving image display and a one-image moving image character that looks like a still image display on the display device 41, drawing control is performed using a common motion table, and in particular, a still image. The one-image moving image character that appears to be displayed is drawn using data in a format in which the same still image composed of only one image is repeatedly displayed.
In this case, since the one-image moving image character that looks like a still image is created by a movie composed of the same image (same still image), the appearance image does not change even if it is played back as a moving image, and the still image. The display is similar to that of a character.

Therefore, the one-image moving image character that looks like a still image is stored in the moving image data format in the image ROM 322 inside the effect control device 300, and is handled as a moving image so that the motion table can be used in common. It is not necessary to increase the number of tables (data capacity reduction), it is possible to prevent pressure on the control ROM 321 (that is, capacity reduction, etc.), and it is possible to improve control by reducing the number of data items. In addition, ease of management can be expected and development efficiency will be improved.

This background will be explained.
In conventional gaming machines, for example, those disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-178885, when stopping at a special symbol different from the normal symbol (temporary stop for re-variation), it is based on a different variation pattern table. Controls the drawing of the design.
However, the conventional control does not replace the symbols with one fluctuation pattern, but the number of fluctuation pattern tables increases, which leads to pressure on the control ROM (that is, capacity increase, etc.). In addition, the increase in the number of data items complicates control and reduces development efficiency.
Therefore, in this embodiment, the motion table that defines the motion of the image is defined by defining the character of the normal moving image and the one-image moving image character that looks like a still image display in the same table. -The same bull is used to reduce the data capacity without increasing the number of motion tables.

More specifically, if the display device 41 displays a moving image, a movie decoding instruction is defined in the motion table.
However, in the case of still image display, decoding is not required, so that the same motion table cannot be used in common with the case of using a moving image character even if the effect has the same movement.
This is because when displaying a moving image character, data for sequentially decoding a movie is required, which is not common to displaying a still image character.
On the other hand, if two types of motion tables are prepared, the motion data becomes simple, but the control side (program of the effect control device 300) needs to select according to the situation, which complicates the control. There is a risk that it will end up.
Therefore, even if the character looks like a still image, in the internal control executed by the program of the effect control device 300, character data (data of one image moving character that looks like a still image display) in a moving image format is prepared. When producing a character whose appearance is a still image, it is assumed that a moving image character which is data in a moving image format is used, and the motion table is standardized.

In this way, the one-image video character that looks like a still image is stored in the video data format in the image ROM 322 inside the effect control device 300, and is handled as a video so that the motion table can be used in common. , It is not necessary to increase the number of motion tables (data capacity reduction), it is possible to prevent pressure on the control ROM 321 (that is, capacity reduction, etc.), and it is possible to improve control by reducing the number of data items. In addition, it will be easier to manage and development efficiency will be improved.
Further, in the case of motion data dedicated to still images, if the still image movie is used without playing back the moving image (for example, using only the first image of the one-image moving image character), it becomes a mere still image. Since it is not necessary to prepare character data for a single still image, the amount of data can be saved.

The invention concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
A game control device that controls the progress of the game,
In a gaming machine provided with an effect control device capable of controlling an effect means including a display means to perform an effect based on a command from the game control device.
The effect control device is
Character data storage means for storing multiple image data of still images or moving images, and
A motion table storage means for storing a plurality of motion tables including the image data to be displayed on the display means and data for designating the display position thereof, and
It has a scenario table storage means for storing a plurality of scenario tables composed of data for controlling the progress of the effect including the display effect on the display means.
As the character data storage means, a normal moving image display character is stored using a moving image character, and a character that looks like a still image display is a one-image moving image character in a format in which a still image composed of only one image is repeatedly displayed. Use and remember
In the motion table, a common motion table is used to store data related to both motions of a normal moving image display character and a one-image moving image character in a format in which a still image composed of only one image is repeatedly displayed. Register and
When displaying a normal moving image display character and a one-image moving image character in a format in which a still image composed of only one image is repeatedly displayed on the display means, drawing is performed using a common motion table. A game machine characterized in that one image / moving image character is configured to be drawn so as to look like a still image display by repeatedly displaying one still image of the same type.

Specific implementation points of the above invention concept are as follows.
In the flowchart of the effect control device 300, the processing related to the scenario table is the same as the case where the scenario management is performed independently for each display element described above, and the following are particularly supported.
-Motion registration process: Fig. 143
-Motion control processing: Fig. 152
-Motion command execution processing: Fig. 153, Fig. 154
-Video addition processing: Fig. 156
-Motion table when the left symbol is temporarily stopped: Fig. 194

Next, a modified example of this embodiment will be described with respect to the control of drawing a character that looks like a still image display using a one-image moving character.
This embodiment may be a modified example as follows.
(1) Even if the motion table is directed so that only still images are required, use the character data of the still image movie in the moving image format using the one-image movie character instead of the still image data, and do not instruct the movie decoding. The configuration may be different.
With such a configuration, it is possible to perform an effect that can be displayed as a still image using one image moving image character while eliminating the need for still image data, and it is not necessary to prepare character data for both the still image and the still image movie. There is an advantage that it can be done.

Next, a control in which a processing code related to sound output is provided in the scenario table related to the production of the PB notice (push button notice) will be described.
In this embodiment, as shown in the upper part of FIG. 192, an example of a scenario table related to the production of the PB notice is provided with a processing code related to sound output in the scenario table to control the production.
Specifically, when a display prompting the player to press the PB (effect button 9) is displayed on the screen of the display device 41 while the game is in progress, when the player presses the effect button 9, a button pressing sound is output. At the same time, for example, a military commander will appear, and a notice production will be performed as if talking about the lines. This effect is controlled by the scenario table shown in the upper part of FIG. 192, which manages images of characters and the like.
In the scenario table in the upper part of FIG. 192, the 1st to 4th rows (index numbers 0 to 3 shown on the right side of the table) are common parts, and the buttons are pressed in the 5th to 6th rows (index numbers 4 to 5). It is an operation part when there is no button, and the 7th to 15th lines (index numbers 6 to 14) are the operation part when the button is pressed.
In addition, the data of the PB waiting code called PB judgment (button validity period 90 frames) is set in the third row (index number 2) of the scenario table, and whether or not the effect button 9 is pressed in the period of 90 frames. If the effect button 9 is turned on in the next PB determination branch code, the scenario data jumps by +3 (progresses to the operation part when the effect button 9 is pressed), and the effect button 9 is pressed. If it is off, the scenario data advances by +1 (advance to the operation part when the effect button 9 is not pressed).
As described above, since the data of the PB waiting code for determining whether or not the effect button 9 is pressed in the period of 90 frames is set in the scenario table, the effect button 9 is purposely pressed by another program. It is not necessary to determine whether or not it has been done and set a flag. If the control of the production is advanced according to the scenario table shown in the upper part of FIG. 192, the control related to the production at the time of PB notice will be executed. ..

In this case, in the scenario table related to the production of the PB notice, the scenario data when the effective time ends without pressing the production button 9 and the case where the production progresses by pressing the production button 9. There is scenario data of.
As described above, the former corresponds to the 5th to 6th rows (index numbers are 4 to 5) of the scenario table, and is the scenario data of the operation unit when the effect button 9 is not pressed.
On the other hand, the latter corresponds to the 7th to 15th rows (index numbers are 6 to 14) of the scenario table, and is the scenario data of the operation unit when the effect button 9 is pressed.
Here, the scenario data unit in which the effect progresses by pressing the effect button 9 is provided with a processing code for setting the output of the button press sound for producing a sound when the effect button 9 is pressed. This processing code corresponds to the button sound setting on the 8th line (index number is 7), and the sound No. The data (15) (corresponding to the code for processing related to sound output) is provided.
Therefore, during the progress of the game, at the time of PB notice, the scenario table shown in the upper part of FIG. 192 is used to control the effect, so that a display prompting the user to press the PB (effect button 9) is displayed on the screen of the display device 41. At that time, when the player presses the effect button 9, the sound No. specified in the "voice setting code" is displayed. Along with the output of the button pressing sound (15), for example, a military commander appears, and a warning effect is performed such as speaking a line.
On the other hand, when a display prompting the player to press the PB (effect button 9) is displayed on the screen of the display device 41, the button pressing sound is not output unless the player presses the effect button 9.

In this way, since the production control is executed by the processing code called "audio setting code" that sets the output of the button press sound in the scenario table, it is not necessary to confirm whether the button press sound is sounded or not, and the image and sound are displayed. Since the control contents of are in the same scenario table, it is easy to manage the synchronization of the video and sound effects, and the development efficiency is also improved.

This background will be explained.
Conventional gaming machines, for example, those disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-296867, are configured to perform different effects corresponding to button operations depending on the effect pattern to be executed, and sound control based on the button operation. Is done in a separate process.
However, in the conventional gaming machine, sound control is performed by a process separate from the image. Therefore, for example, when setting a sound output request by the input monitoring process of the effect button at the time of producing a PB notice, the effect button is used. When pressed, a flag for determining "Is the button being produced now?" Is required, which may complicate the management of the effect. Therefore, the development efficiency may be lowered.
Therefore, in this embodiment, the flag for input monitoring of the effect button can be reduced by defining the code of the process related to the sound output in the scenario table instead of the input monitoring process of the effect button. It makes it easier to manage the synchronization of video and sound production, and improves development efficiency.

Specifically, by setting the PB waiting code for determining whether or not the effect button 9 is pressed in the scenario table related to the effect of the PB notice, and setting the code for the process related to the sound output. It is not necessary to determine whether the effect button 9 has been pressed by another program and set a flag, and the effect control is advanced according to the scenario table shown in the upper part of FIG. 192. It is possible to execute control related to the production of.
That is, in the effect processing executed by the processing code related to the sound output, it is not necessary to confirm whether the button pressing sound is sounded / not sounded (however, it is necessary to judge whether the situation is such that the button pressing sound can be sounded: This is because the data of the PB waiting code is set in the scenario table, so it is possible to determine that the effect button 9 has been pressed in the period of 90 frames). In this way, since the video and audio control contents are in the same scenario table, it is easy to manage the synchronization of the video and audio effects, and the development efficiency is improved.
If there is a code (code for processing related to sound output) that executes the processing of the sound output request (excluding the processing that actually outputs the sound) in the scenario table, it is confirmed that the effect button 9 has been pressed. Therefore, since it is only necessary to perform the sound output processing on the premise of that, it is not necessary to provide the flags and the like as described above, which leads to the merit that the management is easy.
Therefore, in this embodiment, the sound output can be produced without determining whether or not the effect button 9 has been pressed in another program, and the video and audio effects can be easily managed. Development efficiency can be improved.

The invention concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
A game control device that controls the progress of the game,
In a gaming machine provided with an effect control device capable of controlling an effect means including a display means to perform an effect based on a command from the game control device.
The effect control device is
Scenario data is set for each display element in the drawing control of the screen to be displayed on the display means, and a judgment code for judging whether or not the effect button is pressed and a code for processing related to sound output are set in the scenario table. The set scenario data setting means and
When it is determined that the effect button is pressed based on the determination code, the effect content control means for controlling the effect related to the sound based on the code of the process related to the sound output, and the effect content control means.
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.
Here, the PROM (control ROM) 321 constitutes the scenario data setting means, and the main control microcomputer (1st CPU) 311 constitutes the effect content control means.

Specific implementation points of the above invention concept are as follows.
In the flowchart and data of the effect control device 300, the processing related to the scenario table is the same as the case where the scenario management is performed independently for each display element described above, and in particular, the following are supported.
-Scenario analysis processing: Fig. 141, Fig. 142
-Scenario table at the time of push button notice: Fig. 192

Next, a modified example of this embodiment will be described with respect to the control in which the code for the processing related to the sound output is provided in the scenario table related to the production of the PB notice.
This embodiment may be a modified example as follows.
(1) In the production of the PB notice, which is relatively easy to appear, if a sound is produced each time the production button 9 is pressed, the player may feel annoyed.
Therefore, for example, the button pressing sound may be output only when the jackpot reliability of the character appearing after the effect button 9 is pressed is higher than the predetermined reference value.
With such a configuration, it is possible to sharpen the production of the PB notice and not to spoil the interest of the game.
The invention concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
The effect content control means is a gaming machine characterized in that it determines whether or not to output a sound based on a code of processing related to the sound output according to the content of the advance notice effect that progresses after the effect button is pressed.

(2) The scenario table is not limited to a configuration in which a determination code for determining whether or not the effect button is pressed and a code for processing related to sound output are set.
Not only the processing code related to sound output but also the processing code of a decorative member such as an LED or a movable accessory may be set.
In this way, it is possible to add the effect of decorative members such as LEDs and movable accessories at the time of PB notice, and it is possible to make a better and more versatile effect, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

Next, the configurations, effects, backgrounds, and implementation points corresponding to other invention concepts (17) to (32) and (14-01) to (14-11) that can be extracted or developed from this embodiment will be described below. ..

(Invention Concept (17))
In this embodiment, motion data (motion table data) such as a notice and a variation of a special figure (decorative pattern) is provided for each section of the production to block, and a motion table to be a part is selected according to the content of the production to be performed. Since the configuration is used in combination with each other, effects such as reduction of data amount and improvement of development efficiency can be obtained.
The invention concept (17) having the above configuration is expressed as follows.
In a gaming machine equipped with a game control device that controls the progress of a game and an effect control device that can control an effect means including a display means based on a command from the game control device to perform an effect.
The effect control device is
Character data storage means (image ROM 322) for storing a plurality of still image or moving image data, and
A motion table storage means (PROM321) that stores a plurality of motion tables including the image data to be displayed on the display means and data for designating the display position thereof, and
A scenario table storage means (PROM321) that stores a plurality of scenario tables composed of data for controlling the progress of an effect (which may include an effect by an effect means such as a decorative lamp or a speaker) including a display effect by the display means. Have,
The effect means is controlled based on the scenario table selected in response to a command from the game control device to perform the effect.
The motion table is provided for each section of the production,
The scenario table is a gaming machine characterized in that the motion table, which is a part of the display effect, is selectively used in combination.

Details such as the background of the invention concept (17) will be described below.
Conventional gaming machines, for example, those disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2000-126384, have a series of notice execution patterns (data) for each notice (for each notice character), and the notice corresponding to the determination result is obtained from the series of notice execution patterns (data). Is selected and executed. The notice is composed of a series of notice execution patterns (data), and even if the notice execution patterns are different, each has the data of the pattern itself.
However, it has not been able to cope with the display production amount that tends to increase year by year, and an efficient development method is required to cope with this.
According to the above-mentioned invention concept, it is possible to cope with the display effect amount that tends to increase year by year, and it becomes possible to efficiently develop diversified effects.

That is, there are a huge number of patterns of advance notice production. For example, in general, there are cases where the production develops and cases where the production does not develop (there is a possibility of further development), and if a motion table containing motion data for performing the entire production of each pattern is provided, A huge number of motion tables are required, the capacity of the ROM for storing the motion tables becomes huge, and the development efficiency deteriorates.
Therefore, in the present embodiment to which the above concept of the invention is applied, for example, the movements (effect contents) relating to the pre-development portion are the same, so that such a section can be used in common, "motion data before development". "(A) is now defined. Other necessary data may be, for example, "motion data of movement when development fails" (B), "motion data of movement when developing" (C), and so on. Then, if the data is connected and used such as A + B when it does not develop and A + C when it develops, it is not necessary to have the data of the A section twice, so the amount of data is reduced and the development Since it is sufficient to change one A even when the change is made inside, the development efficiency is improved.
That is, in the above concept of the invention, the motion table is provided as parts for each section of the effect, the motion table (parts) required for the effect is combined and defined on the scenario table, and the display effect is displayed based on the information of the scenario table. To control. Therefore, the portion where the motion data overlaps between different motion tables is remarkably reduced, the increase in the capacity of the ROM for storing the motion table can be avoided, and the development efficiency can be improved.

In particular, if only one set of motion data for the production section having the same movement is provided in principle (that is, only one motion table for the production section having the same movement is basically provided), the above effect will be obtained. Becomes more prominent. For example, the sections that are common when the production develops and when it does not develop will surely be the same production. When this develops and when it does not develop, if a completely independent separate table is created, it is necessary to change the data of each table when changing the specifications at the time of production. Therefore, although it should be the same production section due to a mistake, it can be said that there is a considerable possibility that the production sections will be different (because the amount of production is enormous). If such a part remains on the market, the player will notice a slight difference if he / she plays for a long time, and the result can be pre-read too much, which reduces the interest of the game. There is a risk of causing it.
However, if the same section is used as one table, the above does not occur and only one can be changed, which greatly improves the development efficiency. Moreover, it has the advantage that the amount of motion data is smaller (because it is not necessary to have multiple data in the same section).

The specific implementation points of the above invention concept (17) are as follows (in the flowchart of the effect control device 300, the advance notice effect setting process 1 and the like correspond).
That is, when the effect control device receives, for example, a variable command from the game control device, step D105 (variable command processing) is executed in the received command analysis process of FIG. 102, and step D114 of this variable command process (FIG. 109). The variable effect setting process (FIGS. 112 to 114) is executed. In this variable effect setting process, as described above, the content of the command received from the game control device and the content of the advance notice effect to be executed by the random number lottery are determined. The scenario table according to the decision is selected, and the data (address of the scenario table) for specifying the scenario table is set in the predetermined area (scenario data table area of the corresponding scenario management area) (steps D381 to 384). Further detailed settings of the variation effect are executed in steps D281 and subsequent steps in the variation effect setting process (FIGS. 112 to 114).
Then, the effect is executed based on the scenario table selected and set in this way, but the scenario table is configured to selectively combine and use the motion tables that are the parts of the display effect, and the motion table is the effect. It is provided for each section of. For example, in the case of a push button notice, a scenario table as shown in the upper part of FIG. 192 is selected, and this scenario table has a motion index No. The motion tables (70), (65), (66), and (67) are used in combination. Here, for example, the motion index No. The motion table (70) (shown in the lower part of FIG. 192) is a motion table in the section from the start of the push button notice to the determination of the presence or absence of the push button pressing operation, and does not occur even when the character of the military commander appears. Even if it is used in common.

(Invention Concept (18))
Further, in this embodiment, the motion table is divided into blocks for each effect change point at which the reliability of the advance notice (for example, the reliability of the jackpot, the reliability of the probability change, etc.) changes. That is, since the motion information of the notice character is defined as each motion table divided into blocks for each effect change point where the jackpot reliability changes, various effects with different reliability can be produced with a small amount of data and high development efficiency. The effect that can be realized with is obtained.
The invention concept (18) having the above configuration is expressed as follows.
The motion table for the advance notice effect is provided for each section of the effect set at the effect change point where the reliability of the advance notice changes.
The scenario table is a gaming machine characterized in that the motion table, which is a part of the display effect, is selectively used in combination.

The background of the invention concept (18) is the same as that of (17), and the specific implementation points of the invention concept (18) are as follows.
That is, for example, in the display example of the advance notice effect shown in FIG. 197, whether to shift from (a) to (b) or from (a) to (c) in FIG. 197 (that is, the closed scroll falls from above). Then, after reaching the center and standing still, the reliability of the notice differs depending on whether it falls to the bottom of the screen while it is closed, or the scroll is released), and this is the production change point where the reliability of the notice changes. However, as described with reference to FIGS. 195 and 196, the motion table for the advance notice effect of this scroll is divided into each effect change point and provided as a separate motion table. For this reason, the number of motion tables that change the combination according to the reliability of the notice and the capacity of the motion data are minimized, and it is possible to efficiently control the drawing of the character. It is possible to realize a high-quality production with a small amount of data and high development efficiency.

(Invention Concept (19))
Further, in this embodiment, by further embedding behavior data (behavior code, behavior index, etc.) in the motion table, it is possible to set characters having different reliability and the like by the change processing by the behavior. Therefore, for example, reliability. The effect of realizing more diverse productions with different degrees with a small amount of data and high development efficiency can be obtained. That is, in addition to providing differences in reliability and the like in the scenario table that serves as the entrance, it is possible to increase the amount of production without increasing the amount of data because different effects such as reliability can be produced even with the same motion table.
The invention concept (19) having the above configuration is expressed as follows.
The motion table for the advance notice effect is a gaming machine characterized in that behavior data for changing the image data displayed on the display means can be set.

The background of the invention concept (19) is the same as that of (17), and the specific implementation points of the invention concept (19) are as follows.
That is, for example, as shown in FIGS. 195 (a) and 195 (b), the basic character registered in the first row of the motion table is a "blue" character whose scroll color is the least reliable. .. In some cases, the character is replaced (in this case, the color is changed) according to the behavior of the behavior index 0 in the second line, so that, for example, the effect according to the jackpot reliability can be produced. It is improving the fun of the game without increasing the number. The change of the character data (image data) by the above behavior changes the image index data immediately before the display according to the distribution result of the effect by executing step E11 in the effect display editing process (FIG. 162). For example, the basic symbol is replaced with a predetermined symbol to be displayed, or the color of the push button (PB) image is changed from the basic color to a predetermined color according to the gaming state (big hit reliability, etc.) (for example, jackpot reliability). It is replaced with a specific color that represents the degree), or the displayed line of the warlord is changed.

(Invention Concept (20))
Further, in this embodiment, the effects are distributed based on the state of the gaming machine that the game control device (main board) cannot know (for example, the game state (mode, etc.) by the effect control device not managed by the main board). Since the scenario table is selected based on the distribution result, the effect of realizing a wider variety of effects can be obtained. In other words, by sorting the effects based on the game state (= mode, etc.) that the main board does not manage (unknown), and selecting the scenario table (and thus the motion table) based on the result, from the main board You will be able to produce a wider variety of effects than just using the command instructions.
The invention concept (20) having the above configuration is expressed as follows.
The effect control device is characterized in that it distributes effects based on a state of the game machine that the game control device cannot know, and selects the scenario table based on the distribution result.

The background of the invention concept (20) is the same as that of (17), and the specific implementation points of the invention concept (20) are as follows.
That is, for example, in steps D270c, D270g, and D274 in the variable effect setting process (FIG. 112), the advance notice distribution group address table corresponding to various effect information is prepared, and the effect control device 300 is used for the effect information here. There may be an effect mode to be managed (one that does not depend on a command from the game control device 100). That is, the effect control device 300 of this example can distribute the effect based on the state of the game machine that the game control device 100 does not know, and selects the scenario table based on the distribution result (step). D280 etc.) configuration. As a result, it becomes possible to perform a variety of effects rather than sorting by only command instructions from the main board.

(Invention Concept (21))
Further, in this embodiment, since the fluctuation of the fourth symbol (fluctuation state notification symbol) is configured to be performed from the beginning of the fluctuation cycle determined regardless of the previous stop symbol, effects such as improvement of development efficiency can be obtained. ..
The invention concept (21) having the above configuration is expressed as follows.
In a gaming machine equipped with a game control device that controls the progress of a game and an effect control device that can control an effect means including a display means based on a command from the game control device to perform an effect.
The effect control device is
In the display means, it is possible to execute a variable display game in which the decorative symbol for production is variablely displayed and stopped, and the variable display of the variable state notification symbol for notifying the variable state of the decorative symbol can be executed. A gaming machine characterized in that the variation display of a decorative symbol starts from the stop mode of the previous variation display, and the variation display of the variation state notification symbol starts from the beginning of a specified variation cycle.

Details such as the background of the invention concept (21) will be described below.
In a conventional gaming machine, for example, one disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-131662, after one variable display game is stopped, the variable display game based on the next start winning prize changes from the previous stop mode (stop symbol). It will be started.
However, it has not been able to cope with the display production amount that tends to increase year by year, and an efficient development method is required to cope with this.
According to the above-mentioned invention concept, it is possible to cope with the display effect amount that tends to increase year by year, and it becomes possible to efficiently develop diversified effects.

That is, in the present embodiment to which the above concept of the invention is applied, the decorative symbols (decorative symbols) such as the left, middle, and right symbols start to change from the previous stop symbol so as not to give a sense of discomfort to the production. At the same time, it is difficult for the player to understand whether it is a so-called pseudo-continuous fluctuation or a multiple fluctuation. Here, the decorative symbol and the fourth symbol (fluctuation state notification symbol) are special symbol decorative symbols in the same category, but in this embodiment, the player can clearly see the difference by performing the subsequent production. The control method is different between the decorative symbol, which may not be desired, and the fourth symbol, which makes it possible to visually recognize whether or not it is changing in any production state. Specifically, as described in FIG. 190 above, the control of the fourth symbol starts to fluctuate from the fixed display pattern specified in the data table regardless of the previous stop symbol, and so on. The configuration is such that the display pattern is changed as specified. As a result, the connection between the previous and current fluctuations becomes weaker, and it becomes possible to recognize that it is a new fluctuation. In addition, it is not necessary to derive the symbol to be displayed by calculation or the like, and the processing load can be reduced. Specifically, since the variation control of the fixed pattern can be performed according to the information of the motion table without performing the symbol replacement process, the processing load of the CPU 311 can be reduced. Therefore, it can contribute to the efficient development of diversifying productions.

A specific embodiment of the invention concept (21) is, for example, the configuration of a motion table of the fourth symbol shown in FIG. 189. In this embodiment, due to the configuration of such a motion table, the fourth symbol changes with a fixed symbol pattern each time, regardless of the stop symbol of the previous change, as in the display example shown in FIG. 190. Therefore, by making the control of the fourth symbol change regardless of the previous stop symbol, the change control can be performed without performing the symbol change processing by the behavior, so that the processing load can be reduced. Since the player usually does not look at the fourth symbol, there is no sense of discomfort even if the fixed pattern is changed. On the other hand, if the left, middle, and right symbols do not change in the continuation of the previous stop symbol, there is a great sense of discomfort.

The following configurations may be possible as modifications and developments of the above-mentioned invention concept (21).
First, it is possible not to include the out-of-order display pattern (for example, the "white-white" pattern described with reference to FIG. 190) during the fluctuation of the fourth symbol. This is because the out-of-order combination often has a clear difference from the color of the winning combination (it does not have to be the color), so it is easy to understand that the cycle has completed one cycle, and the number of combination patterns can be read. It will be easier. In addition, since there are a plurality of combination patterns in order to make it difficult to understand whether the game is probable or non-probable, it is possible to maintain the interest of the game for a long time if the number of combinations is difficult to know. Therefore, it is possible to configure the configuration so as not to include the display pattern that is out of alignment during the fluctuation of the fourth symbol.
Next, not only the fourth symbol but also the special diagram controlled by the game control device 100 may be a variation of a fixed pattern.

(Invention Concept (22))
Further, in this embodiment, the decorative symbol (left / middle / right symbol) and the fourth symbol are controlled by different scenario tables although the fluctuation is in the same period, and the decorative symbol is the center case during the fluctuation of the symbol. Control is performed so that the fourth symbol is arranged inside and outside the display area (area not hidden by the center case or the like), which is irrelevant to the movable object provided in the or the like, but the fourth symbol is not obstructed by the movable object and is not obstructed. It is a configuration that controls so that it is arranged only inside the display area. For this reason, while the design is changing, the decorative design can be freely moved (it may disappear in some cases) to enhance the interest, and the fourth design should not be invisible even for a moment. Therefore, the effect of being able to check that the game state is fluctuating can be obtained at any time.
The invention concept (22) having the above configuration is expressed as follows.
The effect control device is
It has a scenario table storage means for storing a plurality of scenario tables composed of data for controlling the progress of the effect including the display effect on the display means.
The effect means is controlled based on the scenario table selected in response to a command from the game control device to perform the effect.
In the display means, it is possible to execute a variable display game in which the decorative symbol for production is variablely displayed and stopped, and a variable display of the variable state notification symbol for notifying the variable state of the decorative symbol can be executed.
The variable display of the decorative symbol and the variable state notification symbol is executed in the same period, but is controlled by the separate scenario table.
The decorative symbol is arranged inside and outside the visible area of the display means (the area that is the display area of the display means and is not shielded by a movable object or the like in the center case), while the variable state notification symbol is the visible area of the display means. A gaming machine characterized by being placed only inside.

The background of the invention concept (22) is as follows.
In a conventional gaming machine, for example, one disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2005-185700, a special figure for scroll display is displayed in a region other than the display area (coordinates of the display position are set). However, the display position of the fourth symbol is not taken into consideration, and improvement is required. According to the above concept of the invention, such a problem can be solved.

That is, as can be seen from the motion table of FIG. 189 and the display example of FIG. 190, in this example, the fourth symbol (fluctuation state notification symbol) is always displayed in the visible area such as the left corner of the display screen 41a. It has become. On the other hand, the decorative symbols (left, middle, and right symbols) are configured to move freely (or disappear in some cases) as described in FIGS. 187 and 188. As a result, the interest is enhanced, and the fourth symbol is prevented from being invisible even for a moment, so that it is possible to check that the game state is changing at any time.

(Invention Concept (23))
Further, in the present embodiment, based on the configuration of the invention concept (22), one variation pattern is provided as a block for each section for the motion table of each symbol (decorative symbol (left, middle, right symbol)). The configuration is such that the part where the motion data overlaps between a plurality of different fluctuation patterns is controlled by using a common motion table. This reduces the amount of data and improves the development efficiency while reliably visually recognizing the fourth symbol. Sex can be secured.
The invention concept (23) having the above configuration is expressed as follows.
The effect control device is
Character data storage means for storing multiple image data of still images or moving images, and
A motion table storage means for storing a plurality of motion tables including the image data to be displayed on the display means and data for designating the display position thereof, and
It has a scenario table storage means for storing a plurality of scenario tables composed of data for controlling the progress of the effect including the display effect on the display means.
The effect means is controlled based on the scenario table selected in response to a command from the game control device to perform the effect.
The scenario table has a configuration in which the motion tables, which are the parts of the display effect, are selectively combined and used.
In the display means, it is possible to execute a variable display game in which the decorative symbol for production is variablely displayed and stopped, and a variable display of the variable state notification symbol for notifying the variable state of the decorative symbol can be executed.
The variable display of the decorative symbol and the variable state notification symbol is executed in the same period, but is controlled by the separate scenario table.
The motion table for the decorative pattern is provided for each section of the production.
The decorative symbol is arranged inside and outside the visible area of the display means (the area that is the display area of the display means and is not shielded by a movable object or the like in the center case), while the variable state notification symbol is the visible area of the display means. A gaming machine characterized by being placed only inside.

(Invention Concept (24a))
Further, in this embodiment, the decorative symbol (decorative symbol left / middle / right symbol) and the fourth symbol (fluctuation state notification symbol) have the same variation time, but the scenario table is controlled as separate independent symbols. I do. Then, the fourth symbol is configured to change to the end without changing the motion table set at the start of the change. That is, the motion table may be switched for the decorative symbol, but the motion table is not switched for the fourth symbol. For example, especially in the reach (movie-type reach) for the purpose of showing the movie to the player and enhancing the interest, the decorative pattern is changed in a small reduced state in the corner of the screen so as not to interfere with the movie. It is common. Here, the small symbol may be one in which the size of the decorative symbol that normally fluctuates in the fluctuation section is reduced (reduction by the function of VDP), or a character may be separately provided as the reduced symbol. Then, when the decorative symbol fluctuates in the corner of the screen as a reduced symbol, it is controlled by switching to a motion table dedicated to that section. However, the fourth symbol is changed to the end without changing the motion table set at the start of the change. Specifically, in the fourth symbol, the motion table in which only the pattern for one cycle is defined (for example, the motion table illustrated in FIG. 189) is repeatedly used until the end of the fluctuation, so that the size, display position, transparency, etc. Will be displayed in the same state until the end. As a result, the fourth symbol will undergo stable (visually) fluctuations to the end, so even if the decorative symbol is fluctuating in a state where it is difficult to see, the player can tell that it is fluctuating. Will be easily recognizable. Further, since the minimum amount of data is required, it can be said that it is difficult to press the ROM capacity for the display control of the fourth symbol. From this point of view, it will be possible to efficiently develop diversified productions.
The invention concept (24a) having the above configuration is expressed as follows.
In a gaming machine equipped with a game control device that controls the progress of a game and an effect control device that can control an effect means including a display means based on a command from the game control device to perform an effect.
The effect control device is
Character data storage means for storing multiple image data of still images or moving images, and
A motion table storage means for storing a plurality of motion tables including the image data to be displayed on the display means and data for designating the display position thereof, and
It has a scenario table storage means for storing a plurality of scenario tables composed of data for controlling the progress of the effect including the display effect on the display means.
The effect means is controlled based on the scenario table selected in response to a command from the game control device to perform the effect.
The scenario table has a configuration in which the motion table is selectively used.
In the display means, it is possible to execute a variable display game in which the decorative symbol for production is variablely displayed and stopped, and a variable display of the variable state notification symbol for notifying the variable state of the decorative symbol can be executed.
The variable display of the decorative symbol and the variable state notification symbol is executed in the same period, but is controlled by the separate scenario table.
The gaming machine is characterized in that the fluctuation display of the fluctuation state notification symbol is configured to be used until the end of the fluctuation display without changing the motion table set at the start of the fluctuation.

(Invention Concept (24b))
Further, in this embodiment, since the display control of a plurality of types of the fourth symbols (the fourth symbol of the special figure 1 and the fourth symbol of the special figure 2) is performed by one motion table, there are effects such as improvement of development efficiency. Is obtained.
The invention concept (24b) having the above configuration is expressed as follows.
In a gaming machine equipped with a game control device that controls the progress of a game and an effect control device that can control an effect means including a display means based on a command from the game control device to perform an effect.
The effect control device is
In the display means, it is possible to execute a variable display game in which any one of a plurality of types of decorative symbols for effect (special figure 1 and special figure 2) is variablely displayed and stopped, and the plurality of types of decorative symbols are displayed. It is possible to execute the variation display of a plurality of types of fluctuation state notification symbols (the fourth symbol of the special figure 1 and the fourth symbol of the special figure 2) for notifying the fluctuation state of each of the above-mentioned fluctuation state notification symbols. A gaming machine characterized in that the display is controlled based on one control table (motion table).

Details such as the background of the invention concept (24b) having the above configuration will be described below.
In a conventional gaming machine, for example, one disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-23733, a process table for controlling the fourth symbol of the special figure 1 and a process table for controlling the fourth symbol of the special figure 2 are provided. It is different.
For this reason, it is not possible to cope with the display production amount that tends to increase year by year, and an efficient development method is required to cope with this.
According to the above-mentioned invention concept, it is possible to cope with the display effect amount that tends to increase year by year, and it becomes possible to efficiently develop diversified effects.

That is, for example, in the gaming machine disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-23733, a process for displaying the fourth symbol corresponding to the fluctuation target (special figure 1 or special figure 2) in a variable manner at the start of the fluctuation of the fourth symbol. You are setting up a table. Since it is necessary to always display the fourth symbol of both symbols on the screen, it is necessary to always control both symbols (a symbol that fluctuates and a symbol that stops). However, since only the display control of the symbol that changes is described and there is no description regarding the display control of the other symbol, the details are unknown. Further, since the process table for controlling the fourth symbol of the special figure 1 and the process table for controlling the fourth symbol of the special figure 2 are separate, there is a problem that the program structure and the like become complicated. ..
On the other hand, in the present embodiment to which the above concept of the invention is applied, as described in FIG. 189 above, both symbols (the fourth symbol of the special figure 1 and the fourth symbol of the special figure 2) are used in one motion table. Since the display control of is performed, the program structure is also simplified. As a result, it becomes possible to efficiently develop diversified productions.

(Invention Concept (25))
Further, in the present embodiment, since the fade character is arranged behind the fourth symbol when performing the fade effect, the processing process for showing the fourth symbol becomes unnecessary, and the processing load can be reduced, and as a result, the processing load can be reduced. , Development efficiency improvement and other effects can be obtained.
The invention concept (25) having the above configuration is expressed as follows.
In a gaming machine equipped with a game control device that controls the progress of a game and an effect control device that can control an effect means including a display means based on a command from the game control device to perform an effect.
The effect control device is
In the display means, it is possible to execute a variable display game in which the decorative symbol for production is variablely displayed and stopped, and a variable display of the variable state notification symbol for notifying the variable state of the decorative symbol can be executed.
When performing a screen switching effect including a fade effect (fade-in / fade-out display effect) in the display means, an image (for fade) in which the screen switching effect is performed behind the fluctuation state notification symbol (fourth symbol). A gaming machine characterized in that it has a configuration in which characters) are arranged.

Details such as the background of the invention concept (25) having the above configuration will be described below.
In a conventional gaming machine, for example, one disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2004-73458, a fade-out process is performed when the effect of moving images is completed and the effect is switched to the effect of still images. Then, although there is a description about the process for fading in and fading out of the character to be controlled, there is no explanation about the relationship with the fourth symbol when fading in / out the entire screen, and processing for showing the fourth symbol. It is considered that processing etc. will be required.
For this reason, it is not possible to cope with the display production amount that tends to increase year by year, and an efficient development method is required to cope with this.
According to the above-mentioned invention concept, it is possible to cope with the display effect amount that tends to increase year by year, and it becomes possible to efficiently develop diversified effects.

That is, in the present embodiment to which the above concept of the invention is applied, when the fade effect is performed, the fade character is arranged on the back side of the fourth symbol, so that the state of the fourth symbol can be understood and fluctuates regardless of the effect. You can confirm that there is. Therefore, the processing process for showing the fourth symbol becomes unnecessary, the processing load can be reduced, and as a result, diversified effects can be efficiently developed.
Specifically, in the present embodiment, in the fade effect such as the fade-in and fade-out of the screen display, a motion table in which the control information of the character (image) for the fade effect is defined is provided in the control ROM 321. For example, the fade control procedure when the entire screen fades out to a different screen is as follows. First, a white rectangular character is prepared in the character ROM 322 as a character for fading. Second, the fade character is overlaid in front of the drawing screen in a highly transparent state. Thirdly, the transparency of the fading character is lowered according to the effect speed of fading out. Fourth, the final screen is pure white. Fifth, the fade character is removed (not drawn) and at the same time, a new drawing content is displayed on the screen. Here, control may be performed to increase the transparency without removing it suddenly. In addition to fading in / out to change the transparency, there are various other methods to switch the screen. This time, the character is used for fading, but the character for performing the same switching effect is also synonymous with the content of this time. Then, in any case, the fade character is controlled so as to be drawn on the back side of the screen from the fourth symbol. As a result, no matter what kind of screen switching effect is performed, it is possible to prevent the player from not being able to see that the screen is changing.

Specific implementation points of the above invention concept (25) are as follows.
For example, in the scenario table used during the customer waiting demo in FIG. 177, the fade-out (FO) motion is set for the motion 12 on the 8th line (// 7), and the fade-out (FO) type motion is set on the 17th line (// 16). The fourth symbol is set for the motion 13. That is, in this embodiment, the layer number of the motion of the fade effect is, for example, 12, the layer number of the motion of the fourth symbol is 13, and the younger the layer number of the motion, the closer to the back of the screen. A fade character is placed behind the design. Simply put, the fourth symbol has a maximum motion layer number of 13, and is displayed on the foremost side of the screen as compared with images having other layer numbers. As a result, the processing process for showing the fourth symbol becomes unnecessary, and the processing load can be reduced.

The following configurations may be possible as modifications and developments of the above-mentioned invention concept (25).
The display layer for displaying the error message and the display layer for the fade character may be the same layer (invention concept (26)). Here, the display layer means a layer (for example, a motion layer in this embodiment) that determines the context of displaying as the front side or the other side on the screen. In this way, it is possible to display the message display at the time of error without affecting the drawing of other characters. For example, when displaying an error message during the production, the message is transmitted to the player with priority over the game production, but it is also reported that the message is changing so as not to affect the fourth symbol. .. In addition, while displaying an error message, it is possible to easily proceed with the game behind the scenes and return to the game when the error is cleared.
The invention concept (26) having the above configuration is expressed as follows.
The effect control device is
In the display means, it is possible to execute a variable display game in which the decorative symbol for production is variablely displayed and stopped, and a variable display of the variable state notification symbol for notifying the variable state of the decorative symbol and an error message are displayed. Error display is possible,
When performing a screen switching effect including a fade effect (fade-in / fade-out display effect) in the display means, an image in which the screen switching effect is performed on a display layer behind the fluctuation state notification symbol (fourth symbol). Place (fade character) and
A gaming machine characterized in that the image of the error display and the image (character for fading) for performing the screen switching effect are arranged on the same display layer.

(Invention Concept (27))
Further, in this embodiment, in the case of controlling a decorative symbol that fluctuates with the same size, the first frame of various blocked motion tables starts from a fixed coordinate position (in this case, the display position when the symbol is stopped). Since it is configured to do so, it is possible to select a combination of motions without being aware of the connection, and the efficiency of development is improved.
The invention concept (27) having the above configuration is expressed as follows.
In a gaming machine equipped with a game control device that controls the progress of a game and an effect control device that can control an effect means including a display means based on a command from the game control device to perform an effect.
The effect control device is
Character data storage means (image ROM 322) for storing a plurality of still image or moving image data, and
A motion table storage means (PROM321) that stores a plurality of motion tables including the image data to be displayed on the display means and data for designating the display position thereof for each frame.
A scenario table storage means (PROM321) that stores a plurality of scenario tables composed of data for controlling the progress of an effect (which may include an effect by an effect means such as a decorative lamp or a speaker) including a display effect by the display means. Have,
The effect means is controlled based on the scenario table selected in response to a command from the game control device to perform the effect.
The motion table is provided for each section of the production,
The scenario table has a configuration in which the motion tables, which are the parts of the display effect, are selectively combined and used.
The specific motion table used in combination with each other is a gaming machine characterized in that the display position of the image data in the first frame is set to the same specific display position even if the production section is different.

Details such as the background of the invention concept (27) will be described below.
In a conventional gaming machine, for example, one disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2005-168648, the coordinate data of a symbol is set in the reach effect according to the number of movements from the effect start position to the final stop position. It is configured. That is, it is considered that the data is not divided into blocks even when the same movement is performed in the reach effect or the like, and a series of movement data is provided for each pattern. And since it is not blocked, it is necessary to prepare data on a one-to-one basis for all movements, and there is a problem that the amount of data increases.
For this reason, the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines cannot cope with the display production amount that tends to increase year by year, and an efficient development method is required to cope with this.
On the other hand, according to the above-mentioned invention concept, it is possible to cope with the display effect amount which tends to increase year by year, and it becomes possible to efficiently develop diversified effects.

That is, in the present embodiment to which the above concept of the invention is applied, since the first frame of various blocked motion tables is configured to start from a fixed coordinate position, it is necessary to select a combination of motions. It can be done without being aware of the connection, and the efficiency of development is improved. Moreover, since it can be connected to any table, the degree of freedom of selection is high.
Specifically, in the case of this embodiment, the size of the decorative symbols (decorative symbols left, middle, right) in the section where normal fluctuation or normal reach is basically performed is the same as that at the time of stop display. There is. And, basically, the design size of this decorative design is not changed unless some kind of notice effect or reach occurs. This is because it is easy to get tired from playing a game for a long time if the size changes every time the fluctuation is performed. In addition, even in a section of normal fluctuation that is not a reach effect, there are multiple patterns of fluctuation (due to slippage and various notices), so there are as many motion tables as there are corresponding to various movements. Then, as described above, the motion data is blocked and the necessary ones are connected and used. However, in the motion table when the symbol size fluctuates with the initial size as in the motion table shown in FIG. 191 described above, the motion data is used. The display coordinate data of the first frame defined in the table is the same coordinates as at the time of stop display. In this way, if the beginning of various blocked motion tables is configured to start from a fixed coordinate position, it is possible to select a combination of motion tables without being aware of the connection. Development efficiency is improved. Moreover, since it can be connected to any table, the degree of freedom of selection is high.

Specific implementation points of the above invention concept (27) are as follows.
For example, the motion table (Mdat0000) shown in the upper part of FIG. 191 is a motion table used when the left symbol is stopped, but the current symbol (stop symbol) set in the third row (// 2) of this motion table. The display position of is (0) in the X coordinate and (7) in the Y coordinate. On the other hand, the motion table (Mdat0003) shown in the middle of FIG. 191 is a motion table used for the left symbol normal fluctuation (first half), and is set in the eighth row (// 7) of this motion table. The display position of the current symbol is (0) in the X coordinate and (7) in the Y coordinate, which is the same as the display position of the stop symbol described above. The motion table (Mdat0004) shown in the lower part of FIG. 191 is a motion table used for the left symbol normal fluctuation (second half), and the current symbol set in the eighth row (// 7) of this motion table. The display position of is (0) in the X coordinate and (7) in the Y coordinate, which is also the same as the display position of the stop symbol described above. That is, the data of the display position of the current symbol of each motion table in FIG. 191 has the start coordinate data of each table at a constant initial position (same as the stop symbol).

The following configurations may be possible as modifications and developments of the above-mentioned invention concept (27).
For example, when only the current symbol is displayed when stopped, and when the current symbol, the front symbol, and the rear symbol are displayed during the change, the current symbol is the target of the above invention concept (the first frame of the motion table) as in the case of FIG. 191. The image of the target whose display position is constant) may be used. Moreover, it is not limited to the symbol variation that blocks the motion table. For example, the operation data of the notice character may be similarly blocked, and the relationship of the connected portions may be similarly configured.

(Invention Concept (28))
Further, in this embodiment, in the case of controlling a decorative pattern that fluctuates with the same size, the first frame of various blocked motion tables is configured to start from a fixed coordinate position, and further, the final frame. Since the coordinate data of is set to a position different from the fixed coordinate position, it is possible to select a combination of motions without being aware of the connection, and the transition to the next motion can be performed smoothly. As a result, the efficiency of development is improved.
The invention concept (28) having the above configuration is expressed as follows.
In a gaming machine equipped with a game control device that controls the progress of a game and an effect control device that can control an effect means including a display means based on a command from the game control device to perform an effect.
The effect control device is
Character data storage means (image ROM 322) for storing a plurality of still image or moving image data, and
A motion table storage means (PROM321) that stores a plurality of motion tables including the image data to be displayed on the display means and data for designating the display position thereof for each frame.
A scenario table storage means (PROM321) that stores a plurality of scenario tables composed of data for controlling the progress of an effect (which may include an effect by an effect means such as a decorative lamp or a speaker) including a display effect by the display means. Have,
The effect means is controlled based on the scenario table selected in response to a command from the game control device to perform the effect.
The motion table is provided for each section of the production,
The scenario table has a configuration in which the motion tables, which are the parts of the display effect, are selectively combined and used.
In the specific motion tables used in combination with each other, the display position of the image data in the first frame is set to the same specific display position even if the production section is different, and the display position of the image data in the final frame is set. Is set to a display position different from the specific same display position.

Details such as the background of the invention concept (28) will be described below.
In a conventional gaming machine, for example, one disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2005-168648, the coordinate data of a symbol is set in the reach effect according to the number of movements from the effect start position to the final stop position. It is configured. That is, it is considered that the data is not divided into blocks even when the same movement is performed in the reach effect or the like, and a series of movement data is provided for each pattern. And since it is not blocked, it is necessary to prepare data on a one-to-one basis for all movements, and there is a problem that the amount of data increases.
For this reason, the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines cannot cope with the display production amount that tends to increase year by year, and an efficient development method is required to cope with this.
On the other hand, according to the above-mentioned invention concept, it is possible to cope with the display effect amount which tends to increase year by year, and it becomes possible to efficiently develop diversified effects.

That is, in the present embodiment to which the above concept of the invention is applied, since the first frame of various blocked motion tables is configured to start from a fixed coordinate position, a combination of motions is selected. It can be done without being aware of the connection, and the efficiency of development is improved. Moreover, since it can be connected to any table, the degree of freedom of selection is high. In particular, in the concept of the present invention, since the coordinate data of the final frame is set at a position different from the fixed coordinate position (for example, a value one frame before the fixed coordinate position), the tables are concatenated. When this is done, the displays at the same coordinates do not overlap, and the transition to the next motion can be performed smoothly (that is, the movement does not become strange because the coordinate data is not covered), so the combination of motions is more free. It will be possible to do so, and development efficiency will be further improved. In other words, for example, if you end at the coordinate position according to the fluctuation speed of the image display executed at (the end of) each table, you will not be more conscious of the connection when selecting the combination of blocked motion tables. This can be done to increase the degree of freedom of choice and further improve the efficiency of development.

Specifically, in the case of this embodiment, the size of the decorative symbol (left, middle, right symbol, which is the decorative symbol) in the section where the normal fluctuation is basically performed is the same as that at the time of the stop display. And, unless some kind of notice effect or reach occurs, basically the design size of this decorative design is not changed. This is because it is easy to get tired from playing a game for a long time if the size changes every time the fluctuation is performed. In addition, even in a section of normal fluctuation that is not a reach effect, there are multiple patterns of fluctuation (due to slippage and various notices), so there are as many motion tables as there are corresponding to various movements. Then, as described above, the motion data is blocked and the necessary data are connected and used. However, in the motion table when the symbol size fluctuates with the initial size as in the motion table shown in FIG. 191 described above, the motion data is used. The display coordinate data of the first frame defined in the table has the same coordinates (initial position) as at the time of stop display, and the display coordinate data of the last frame defined in the table has coordinates different from those at the time of stop display (initial position) (initial position). Specifically, the difference between the coordinate data values according to the fluctuation speed is subtracted from the initial position). When fluctuating at a constant velocity, the value obtained by subtracting the difference between the last and the previous (two with different coordinates) coordinate values from the coordinates of the initial position matches the coordinate values of the final frame. In the case of shifting, it matches the value obtained by subtracting the difference that is the relationship based on the law. With such a configuration, as described above, the ease and degree of freedom of combining motion tables are remarkably improved, and the efficiency of development is further improved.

Specific implementation points of the above invention concept (28) are as follows.
For example, the motion table (Mdat0003) shown in the middle of FIG. 191 is a motion table used for the left symbol normal fluctuation (first half), and the current symbol set in the eighth row (// 7) of this motion table. The X coordinate is (0) and the Y coordinate is (7), which is the same as the display position of the stop symbol described above. However, the display position of the current symbol set in the row (// 1827) of the final frame of this motion table (Mdat0003) has an X coordinate of (0) and a Y coordinate of (340), and is described above. The Y coordinate, which is the moving direction, is different from the display position of the stop symbol. Specifically, the coordinates are related to the fluctuation speed. That is, during high-speed fluctuation, the Y coordinate is set to change in the order of 7 → 174 → 340 → 7 → 174 → 340 → 7 → ... for each frame, and the next symbol is set in 3 frames (100 ms). Since the fluctuation speed is updated to the number, the value (340) is set to be one frame before the Y coordinate (7) at the initial position.
In this embodiment, the movement range of each symbol is 500, so it is not even, but it is unknown because it is a difference of 1 among many dots. It may be set in a positional relationship that divides evenly, but this time it is set to an easy-to-think value of 500.

The following configurations may be possible as modifications and developments of the above-mentioned invention concept (28).
For example, when only the current symbol is displayed when stopped, and when the current symbol, the front symbol, and the rear symbol are displayed during the change, the current symbol is the target of the above invention concept (display of the first frame of the motion table) as in this embodiment. The position may be constant (initial position), and the display position of the final frame may be different from the initial position). Moreover, it is not limited to the symbol variation that blocks the motion table. For example, the operation data of the notice character may be similarly blocked, and the relationship of the connected portions may be similarly configured.

(Invention Concept (29))
Further, in this embodiment, in the case of normal fluctuation or normal reach, which is not reach, three decorative symbols (current symbol, previous symbol, next symbol) repeat within each narrow effective range as described in FIG. 188 above. A motion table with a decorative pattern is configured to move. For this reason, a clear standard (for example, the current symbol) is set, and it is possible to obtain the effect that it is easy to manage the symbol replacement and the like, and the variable display of the decorative symbol can be efficiently controlled.
The invention concept (29) having the above configuration is expressed as follows.
The effect control device is
In the display means, it is possible to execute a variable display game in which a decorative pattern for production is variablely displayed and stopped.
The division of the decorative symbol during fluctuation is divided into a plurality of fluctuation symbols (for example, the current symbol, the previous symbol, and the next symbol), and this category divides the display coordinates in the fluctuation direction into a predetermined range (effective range) that does not overlap. A gaming machine that is associated with an object and has a control function that controls each of the changing symbols to move only within the corresponding predetermined range.
The control function (a control function that realizes a variable display by controlling the movement of each of the changing symbols within the predetermined range (within a non-overlapping effective range)) is a specific type of variable display. (For example, it may be executed only at the time of normal fluctuation which is not reach or normal reach). In a special reach effect, for example, the direction of movement of the symbol may change (from vertical to horizontal) or the special symbol may move in a spiral shape in order to enhance the effect. The range may be limited in a form corresponding to the moving direction of the middle symbol.

The background of the invention concept (29) is as follows.
In a conventional gaming machine, for example, one disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2000-210428, the next (previous) symbol moves (varies) upward / downward with the movement of the symbol that can be visually recognized as the current symbol. When performing the effect, there is a description that the current symbol is changed to the upper (lower) by half the symbol, and the current symbol and the next (previous) symbol are displayed in the display area by half the symbol. However, it is unclear under what control the current symbol and the next (previous) symbol are displayed in a variable manner. If the configuration is such that control is performed for each displayed character (a method of moving the same symbol from top to bottom), multiple changing symbols will exist as independent symbols, so the priority is high. Since the character does not exist (because there is no reference symbol), there is a problem that the reference is difficult to determine and as a result, it becomes difficult to control.
According to the above concept of the invention, such a problem can be solved.

That is, as described in FIG. 188 above, in this example, the decorative symbols are categorized into a plurality of changing symbols (current symbol, previous symbol, next symbol) during fluctuations such as non-reach normal fluctuations. , This category is associated with the display coordinates in the changing direction separated by a non-overlapping effective range, and the data (motion) of the decorative symbol motion table so that each of the changing symbols moves only within the corresponding effective range. Data) is set. As a result, for example, by controlling the current symbol as a reference, it is easy to control when the symbol is replaced, and it is not necessary to manage all the fluctuating symbols.

A specific embodiment of the invention concept (29) is, for example, the motion table of FIG. 191 and a display example is FIG. 188. As shown in FIG. 188, in the Y coordinate which is the coordinate of the fluctuation direction (the direction in which the symbol seems to move due to the fluctuation display), the effective range of the next symbol is -493 or more and less than 7, and the effective range of the current symbol is It is set to 7 or more and less than 507, and the effective range of the previous symbol is set to 507 or more and less than 1007, and is separated by a non-overlapping effective range. The data of the motion table (for example, FIG. 191) is set for each changing symbol (current symbol, previous symbol, next symbol) so that the value of the Y coordinate changes within the corresponding effective range. As described above, in the example of FIG. 172, the symbol number "1" which is the current symbol is the center, the previous symbol is "9" immediately before it, and the next symbol is "2" one after it. Can be calculated relatively. When the coordinates return to the top, the central symbol can be narrowed down to one control target, such as "2", so a simple structure (program or data structure) can be created.

(Invention Concept (30))
Further, in the present embodiment, even when the display of the same character is continued, the character information is temporarily deleted and re-registered at the change point of the effect, so that the effect of improving the development efficiency can be obtained.
The invention concept (30) having the above configuration is expressed as follows.
In a gaming machine equipped with a game control device that controls the progress of a game and an effect control device that can control an effect means including a display means based on a command from the game control device to perform an effect.
The effect control device is
Character data storage means (image ROM 322) for storing a plurality of still image or moving image data, and
A motion table storage means (PROM321) that stores a plurality of motion tables including the image data to be displayed on the display means and data for designating the display position thereof for each frame.
A scenario table storage means (PROM321) that stores a plurality of scenario tables composed of data for controlling the progress of an effect (which may include an effect by an effect means such as a decorative lamp or a speaker) including a display effect by the display means. ,
Character information (information such as an image index registered in the display information area in the motion management area described above), which is information for identifying the image data specified by the data of the motion table, is registered so as to be erasable for display control. Character information storage means (RAM311a) and
The effect means is controlled based on the scenario table selected in response to a command from the game control device to perform the effect.
The scenario table has a configuration in which the motion tables are selectively used in combination.
Even if the image data to be displayed and controlled is the same, when the display effect content by the image data changes, the character information about the image data is temporarily deleted and a predetermined area of the character information storage means (described above). A gaming machine characterized in that it is configured to be re-registered in the displayed display information area).

Details such as the background of the invention concept (30) having the above configuration will be described below.
In a conventional gaming machine, for example, one disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2004-222876, cell information is set as detailed information when an image is developed in a drawing area. This publication describes setting information when an image component is drawn (expanded into VRAM), but does not describe control when the image is no longer drawn.
For this reason, it is not possible to cope with the display production amount that tends to increase year by year, and an efficient development method is required to cope with this.
According to the above-mentioned invention concept, it is possible to cope with the display effect amount that tends to increase year by year, and it becomes possible to efficiently develop diversified effects.

That is, in the present embodiment to which the above concept of the invention is applied, the character information is temporarily deleted and re-registered at the change point of the effect even when the display of the same character is continued. Specifically, in the data structure in the motion table, even in the place where the motion by the same character (same image data) is executed, when the production content changes, the display information area related to the character in the motion management area (That is, the setting for deleting the character data from the VRAM 312a (VRAM 607)) is performed, and the drawing process is performed after newly re-registering the character information.
By re-registering the character information at the change point of the effect in this way, it is possible to return to the correct display even if the data is destroyed by noise or the like. In addition, it becomes easier to block motion data, and it is possible to flexibly respond to changes during development, improving development efficiency. When the production content changes, it is better to delete it without judgment when the production content changes and set the data necessary for the scene again, rather than constantly judging the image data to be left and the image data to be deleted to create motion data. Because it is easy. In addition, even if it is a series of productions with a fixed flow, it is possible to create data in blocks, so it is possible to flexibly respond to changes during development and improve development efficiency.

Specific implementation points of the above-mentioned invention concept (30) are as follows (in the flowchart of the effect control device 300, motion command execution processing and the like correspond).
That is, in step D837 in the motion command execution process (FIG. 153), as described above, it is determined whether the command of the target motion table is a deletion code, and if it is a deletion code, the object deletion process (FIG. 159) is performed in step D862. To execute. In the object deletion process (FIG. 159), as described above, the data in the display information area of the target object is deleted by step D958 or the like. That is, in this embodiment, if the command of the motion table is a deletion code, the data in the display information area of the unnecessary characters (including the characters to be deleted once) corresponding to the object to be deleted in the motion management area. Is deleted.
Then, for example, in the motion table at the time of the special figure 1 fourth symbol change shown in FIG. 189, even if the same character (for example, the fourth symbol "blue") is used thereafter, the deletion code is included at the change point of the effect. .. That is, for example, in the 14th line (// 13) and the 15th line (// 14), deletion codes are set for the object indexes (1) and (0), respectively, by the above control processing. The character information (information of the fourth symbol "blue") corresponding to the object indexes (1) and (0) is temporarily deleted, and added in the next 16th line (// 15) and 17th line (// 16). The code is used to re-register the same character information. In the motion table used at the time of the scroll notice shown in FIG. 196, similarly, a configuration in which the deletion code is included at the change point of the effect is illustrated even when the same character is used thereafter.

The following configurations may be possible as modifications and developments of the above-mentioned invention concept (30).
For example, when it is divided into a plurality of motion tables, it is natural to delete it because there is no connection with the table that was executed last time, but even in one table, a deletion code is provided at the change point. The instruction to delete may be a method of providing a deletion code in the motion table as in this embodiment, or a method of first deleting (programmatically) when a new character is added. Incidentally, in this embodiment, when the motion table is newly switched, all the display information areas of the motion management area are initialized (see steps D807 to D815 in the motion control process of FIG. 152 described above).

(Invention Concept (31))
Further, in this embodiment, since the RAM area to be written is separated in the case of the simple weight (constant weight, variable weight) and the button waiting weight in the progress of the scenario of the production, the effect of improving the development efficiency can be obtained. ..
The invention concept (31) having the above configuration is expressed as follows.
In a gaming machine equipped with a game control device that controls the progress of a game and an effect control device that can control an effect means including a display means based on a command from the game control device to perform an effect.
The effect control device is
A scenario table storage means (PROM321) that stores a plurality of scenario tables composed of data for controlling the progress of an effect (which may include an effect by an effect means such as a decorative lamp or a speaker) including a display effect by the display means. ,
It has a work storage means (RAM311a) that provides a work area for control processing, and has.
The effect means is controlled based on the scenario table selected in response to a command from the game control device to perform the effect.
Based on the weight time value defined in the scenario table, it is possible to execute a plurality of types of weights that limit the progress of the effect.
When each wait is performed, the wait time value is written in a predetermined area of the work storage means, and the value of the predetermined area is updated to manage the passage of time.
A gaming machine characterized in that the predetermined area is made different according to the type of the weight.

Details such as the background of the invention concept (31) having the above configuration will be described below.
In a conventional gaming machine, for example, one disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2007-175437, a flag setting unit and a timer setting unit are provided in the effect data holding area of the RAM, and the corresponding flags and timers are set according to the effect control state. Set and update. This effect control timer is for measuring the effect time such as the variable display time of the decorative symbol, the execution time of the probabilistic re-lottery effect and the advantageous open re-lottery effect. It is a meaningful usage.
For this reason, it is not possible to cope with the display production amount that tends to increase year by year, and an efficient development method is required to cope with this.
According to the above-mentioned invention concept, it is possible to cope with the display effect amount that tends to increase year by year, and it becomes possible to efficiently develop diversified effects.

That is, in the present embodiment to which the above concept of the invention is applied, there are a simple waiting weight (either a fixed time or a variable time) and a weight waiting for button operation as weights for limiting the progress of the scenario of the production. Each wait time value is defined in the scenario table, and when weighting is performed, the timer value is written to the RAM 311a, and the passage of time is managed by updating the value in the RAM. Then, in the case of the simple wait and the button wait wait, the RAM area to be written is separated. As a result, the process (program) can be created easily and easily, and the development efficiency is improved.
This is because if you try to use the same RAM storage area regardless of the meaning, you will need a flag to indicate that meaning, so you can set or clear the flag. (Especially clearing at the end of the wait interval). In other words, if the same storage area is used, a flag is required to determine which meaning the timer has, and when the wait interval ends, processing such as clearing the flag is required. A flag set at the start of the wait is also required.
On the other hand, the timer update process itself may be provided, for example, in the process to be controlled so that it is automatically updated until the time is up. In comparison, it can be created relatively easily. Then, since it is possible to determine whether or not the time is up instead of the presence or absence of the flag, it is not necessary to perform some processing such as clearing at the end of the wait section, and the development efficiency is improved. That is, since it is easy to create the timer so as to be automatically updated, it is possible to determine whether or not the timer value is 0 instead of the flag, and it is not necessary to perform some processing at the end of the wait, which improves the development efficiency and the like.

The specific implementation points of the above-mentioned invention concept (31) are as follows (in the flowchart of the effect control device 300, the scenario analysis process and the like correspond).
For example, in the scenario table used at the time of the push button notice shown in FIG. 192, the PB waiting code and the effective time value (90) are set in the third row (// 2), and the 11th row (// 10). A variable weight code and an effective time value (55) are set. Further, for example, in the scenario table used at the time of the customer waiting demonstration shown in FIG. 177, a constant weight code and an effective time value (300) are set in the 20th row (// 19), for example.
Then, as described above in the description of the flowchart of the effect control device, the constant weight code is set in the scenario table by the processes of steps D592 to D594 and D604 to D606 in the scenario analysis process shown in FIGS. 141 and 142 described above. If this is done, constant weight processing (upper side in FIG. 146) is executed, if a variable weight code is set, variable weight processing (lower side in FIG. 146) is executed, and if a PB wait code is set, PB wait processing is executed. (Upper side of FIG. 147) is executed.

Here, in step D692 of the constant weight processing (upper side of FIG. 146), the effective time value (operand value) set in the scenario table is set in the timer area for the scenario, and the variable weight processing (lower side of FIG. 146) is performed. In step D696, a value obtained by adding the PB effect addition time to the effective time value (operand value) set in the scenario table is set in the scenario timer area. On the other hand, in step D702 of the PB wait process (upper side of FIG. 147), the PB timer area (area different from the scenario timer area) of the target scenario management area is set to the effective time value (operand value) set in the scenario table. ). That is, in the case of the simple weight (constant weight, variable weight in this example) and the button waiting weight (PB waiting weight in this example), the RAM area to be written is separated. By adding the PB effect addition time to the set value in step D696, an effect in which the subsequent effect time changes depending on the timing at which the button is pressed is realized.
Further, the timer management of the simple wait is performed by steps D574 to D576 in the scenario analysis process shown in FIG. 141, and the timer management of the button wait wait is performed by D577 to D582 in the same process. It is a simple processing content that does not use.

(Invention Concept (32))
Further, in this embodiment, in the process of analyzing the code representing the scenario content (scenario data) defined on the scenario table (scenario analysis process), when it is determined that the code is abnormal, the process is performed without updating the scenario table. Since the configuration is such that the above is terminated, a good response is realized when the code becomes an abnormal value due to noise or the like.
The invention concept (32) having the above configuration is expressed as follows.
In a gaming machine equipped with a game control device that controls the progress of a game and an effect control device that can control an effect means including a display means based on a command from the game control device to perform an effect.
The effect control device is
A scenario table storage means (PROM321) for storing a plurality of scenario tables composed of data for controlling the progress of an effect (which may include an effect by an effect means such as a decorative lamp or a speaker) including a display effect by the display means. Have and
The effect means is controlled based on the scenario table selected in response to a command from the game control device to perform the effect.
In the process of analyzing the data defined in the scenario table (scenario analysis process), if it is determined that the data is abnormal, the game is characterized in that the process is terminated without updating the scenario table. Machine.

Details such as the background of the invention concept (32) having the above configuration will be described below.
In a conventional game machine, for example, one disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-231953, the production is advanced based on the scenario data composed by combining a plurality of blocks in time series, and once the scenario data is set, it is set. Based on this, the drawing process is sequentially performed, and there is no disclosure of what to do if the scenario data is abnormal.
According to the above concept of the invention, it is possible to realize a good response when the scenario data is abnormal (that is, a control processing configuration that can effectively deal with the abnormality of the scenario data without increasing the number of processes so much).

That is, in the present embodiment to which the above concept of the invention is applied, if the scenario code (the code as the scenario data set in the scenario table) becomes an abnormal value due to noise or the like, the scenario is further advanced in that frame. The damage can be minimized by avoiding it. Since the table is not updated, it is read again when processing the next frame, and if it is judged to be normal, the scenario can proceed with a delay of one frame, and the subsequent scenarios can proceed without incident. If the table is advanced at the time of an abnormal code, the target operation will be completely skipped, which may cause trouble during the production. For example, if the scenario of symbol replacement is skipped and the fluctuation stops without being replaced, there is a possibility of a trouble that the symbol becomes a hit even if it is not originally a big hit. In this embodiment, such trouble occurrence is effectively prevented by a simple process.

The specific implementation point of the above-mentioned invention concept (32) is the scenario analysis process shown in FIG. 142 described above.
In this scenario analysis process, in the process after the determination result of step D600 becomes NO, as described above, when the prepared opcode upper data does not correspond to any kind of data (code) (that is, an abnormality). If it is a value), it is configured to return. Then, returning here means that the scenario analysis process is finished and the table address is not updated, so that the same code is read and executed the next time this process is performed. Therefore, if it becomes abnormal momentarily due to noise or the like, the correct processing can be performed the next time it becomes normal. In addition, if it becomes abnormal constantly, the progress of the scenario will be stopped, so that the appearance will be abnormal, but it will be easier to avoid troubles. Then, if the scenario changes, a new scenario table is set, so normal recovery can be performed there. As such, a simple processing configuration that simply returns can realize good countermeasures against scenario data abnormalities.

(Invention concept (14-00))
Further, in this embodiment, as described with reference to FIG. 179 and the like, the lottery contents of the notice production in one variable display game are different depending on the number of reserved start prize memories, thereby improving the interest and the development efficiency. I'm letting you.
The invention concept (14-00) having the above configuration is expressed as follows.
A control device capable of executing the variable display game by the display means based on the start winning prize, and executing the advance notice effect for notifying the result of the variable display game by the display means or an effect means different from the display means. Prepare,
The control device is characterized in that the lottery content of the advance notice effect appearing in one of the variable display games can be changed according to the number of holds, which is the number of start prizes for which the variable display game has not been executed. Game machine.
Here, the control device is, for example, a game control device and an effect control device. Further, the variable display game is a game in which a plurality of identification information is variablely displayed and then stopped and displayed, and a special game advantageous to the player when the stop display result of the variable display game becomes a predetermined special result. Generate a state (big hit). Further, the starting prize is a winning in the starting winning area, which is a condition for starting the variable display game. In addition, the control device increases the data of the number of holds by that amount when there is a start prize during the variable display game, and decreases the data of the number of holds by that amount as the new variable display game is executed. Further, the advance notice effect is to give notice of the result of the variable display game (including the effect content of the variable display game itself) with a predetermined reliability, and is not necessarily a definite notice. Further, the lottery content of the advance notice effect is, for example, the appearance ratio of each aspect of the advance notice effect. In addition, "the lottery content of the notice effect can be changed according to the number of reservations" means, in other words, "the number of reservations is included in the conditions for the advance notice distribution".

The concept of the invention (14-00) having the above configuration can also be expressed as follows if it is specifically described in a direction close to that of the embodiment.
A game control device that controls the progress of a game, and an effect control device that can control an effect means including a display means based on a command from the game control device to perform an effect including a variable display game in the display means. With and
The game control device is
Based on the start prize, the determination information regarding the execution of the variable display game is extracted and stored as the start memory of the variable display game, and the hold number command indicating the number of holds, which is the number of unexecuted start prizes of the variable display game, and the hold number command. , A variation command for notifying the variation pattern of the variation display game corresponding to the determination information can be transmitted to the effect control device.
The effect control device is
When the variable command is received, the effect content of the variable display game corresponding to the variable command is determined, but it is possible to draw and appear a notice effect foretelling the result of the variable display game in the effect content. can be,
A gaming machine characterized in that the lottery content of the advance notice effect to appear in one variation display game corresponding to one variation command can be changed according to the number of reservations based on the hold number command.

The background and the like of the invention concept (14-00) having the above configuration will be described below.
A conventional gaming machine, for example, one disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2004-248845, describes that the content of the continuous advance notice effect is changed based on the number of stored start prizes. Regarding the determination of the production pattern, there is no description that it is based on the number of reservations. In addition, although the content of the continuous notice effect is determined based on the number of reservations, it can be said that the notice is not related to the symbol change during the notice because the notice is given over a plurality of changes. In addition, since there is no change in the notice that appears when the normal fluctuation in which the reach does not occur continues, the interest is reduced in the long-time game.
On the other hand, according to the above-mentioned concept of the invention, it is possible to efficiently distribute the product while making it a production distribution form that enhances the interest. Even with the same variable command, the lottery content of the notice that appears during the change can be changed according to the number of holds, so for example, even if the change without reach occurs, the notice that appears will change. It is possible to maintain the interest even in the game of time. In addition, since the existing parameter, the number of holds, is used to change the lottery content of the notice, the development efficiency is good. Therefore, it is possible to improve the development efficiency of the gaming machine.
It should be noted that the number of reservations may be included in the conditions for advance notice distribution even when reaching.

(Invention Concept (14-01))
Further, in the modified example of the variation effect setting process shown in FIG. 170 described above, it seems that the positions of the corresponding rows and columns in the advance notice distribution group address table are undefined data by steps D270j to D270n as described above. Then, in the same row, the columns are sequentially changed in the direction of increasing the number of holds, the position (column) where the address data is defined is found, and the advance notice lottery process is executed using the advance notice distribution group table of the address at the found position. do. That is, if the variable command and the stop symbol command are normal and the hold number command for them is not appropriate, the data in the place where the hold number is the smallest among the data in the advance notice distribution group address table is defined. use.

The invention concept (14-01) having the above configuration is expressed as follows.
A game control device that controls the progress of a game, and an effect control device that can control an effect means including a display means based on a command from the game control device to perform an effect including a variable display game in the display means. With and
The game control device is
Based on the start prize, the determination information regarding the execution of the variable display game is extracted and stored as the start memory of the variable display game, and the hold number command indicating the number of holds, which is the number of unexecuted start prizes of the variable display game, and the hold number command. , A variation command for notifying the variation pattern of the variation display game corresponding to the determination information can be transmitted to the effect control device.
The effect control device is
When the variable command is received, the effect content of the variable display game corresponding to the variable command is determined, but it is possible to draw and appear a notice effect foretelling the result of the variable display game in the effect content. can be,
Depending on the number of holds based on the number of holds commands, the lottery content of the notice effect to appear in the change display game corresponding to the change command can be changed.
When the variable command is normal and the hold number command corresponding to the variable command is not normal, the hold number is the smallest among the data of the table for the lottery of the advance notice effect. A gaming machine characterized in that a lottery for the advance notice effect is performed using the data in the table.

The background and the like of the invention concept (14-01) having the above configuration will be described below.
A conventional gaming machine, for example, one disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2004-248845, describes that the content of the continuous advance notice effect is changed based on the number of stored start prizes, but a hold number command is taken. There is no disclosure of what to do in irregular cases such as spills.
On the other hand, according to the above concept of the invention, a notice can be made to appear even in an irregular case such as when the hold number command is missed due to noise or the like, and it is not necessary to lower the interest. In addition, especially in the check work during development, it can be confirmed as a fluctuation in which a notice appears without specifying the hold number command one by one, and the efficiency of the check work can be expected to be improved. Therefore, it is possible to improve the development efficiency of the gaming machine.

(Invention Concept (14-02))
Further, in the modified example 1 of the advance notice distribution group address shown in FIG. 203, as described above, there is a column with a hold number of 0, and even when the hold number is 0, the regular data of the notice distribution group table is set. Has been done.
The invention concept (14-02) having the above configuration is expressed as follows.
A game control device that controls the progress of a game, and an effect control device that can control an effect means including a display means based on a command from the game control device to perform an effect including a variable display game in the display means. With and
The game control device is
Based on the start prize, the determination information regarding the execution of the variable display game is extracted and stored as the start memory of the variable display game, and the hold number command indicating the number of holds, which is the number of unexecuted start prizes of the variable display game, and the hold number command. , A variation command for notifying the variation pattern of the variation display game corresponding to the determination information can be transmitted to the effect control device.
The effect control device is
When the variable command is received, the effect content of the variable display game corresponding to the variable command is determined, but it is possible to draw and appear a notice effect foretelling the result of the variable display game in the effect content. can be,
Depending on the number of holds based on the number of holds commands, the lottery content of the notice effect to appear in the change display game corresponding to the change command can be changed.
The gaming machine is characterized in that the table for the lottery of the advance notice effect is configured to be assigned a table for regular distribution even when the number of reservations based on the number of reservations command is zero.

The background and the like of the invention concept (14-02) having the above configuration will be described below.
In a conventional gaming machine, for example, one disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2004-248845, it is described that the content of the continuous advance notice effect is changed based on the number of stored start prizes, but the hold number command is missed. There is no disclosure of what to do in irregular cases such as when it happens.
On the other hand, according to the above concept of the invention, even if the number of reservations is zero, the advance notice effect can be regularly drawn. Originally, it does not fluctuate when there is no hold, but even in irregular cases such as when the hold number command is missed due to noise etc., a notice can be made to appear, and it is not necessary to lower the interest. In addition, especially in the check work during development, it can be confirmed as a fluctuation in which a notice appears without specifying the hold number command one by one, and the efficiency of the check work can be expected to be improved. Therefore, it is possible to improve the development efficiency of the gaming machine.

(Invention Concept (14-03))
Further, in the modified example 2 of the advance notice distribution group address shown in FIG. 204, as described above, the combination of the MODE value of the variable command and the number of pending numbers is not undefined data even in the place where it is impossible in actual use. Regular data is set, and as data in a place that is impossible in actual use, it is the same as the data in the column with the smallest number of holds, among the columns with the number of holds 1 to 4 in the same row. I'm setting things.
The invention concept (14-03) having the above configuration is expressed as follows.
A game control device that controls the progress of a game, and an effect control device that can control an effect means including a display means based on a command from the game control device to perform an effect including a variable display game in the display means. With and
The game control device is
Based on the start prize, the determination information regarding the execution of the variable display game is extracted and stored as the start memory of the variable display game, and the hold number command indicating the number of holds, which is the number of unexecuted start prizes of the variable display game, and the hold number command. , A variation command for notifying the variation pattern of the variation display game corresponding to the determination information can be transmitted to the effect control device.
The effect control device is
When the variable command is received, the effect content of the variable display game corresponding to the variable command is determined, but it is possible to draw and appear a notice effect foretelling the result of the variable display game in the effect content. can be,
Depending on the number of holds based on the number of holds commands, the lottery content of the notice effect to appear in the change display game corresponding to the change command can be changed.
As a table for the lottery of the advance notice effect, even if the combination of the variable command and the reserved number based on the pending number command is impossible in actual use, the same variable command is used in actual use. A gaming machine characterized in that the same table is assigned as in the case of the smallest possible number of holds.

The background and the like of the invention concept (14-03) having the above configuration will be described below.
A conventional gaming machine, for example, one disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2004-248845, describes that the content of the continuous advance notice effect is changed based on the number of stored start prizes, but a hold number command is taken. There is no disclosure of what to do in irregular cases such as spills.
On the other hand, according to the above concept of the invention, a notice can be made to appear even in an irregular case such as when the hold number command is missed due to noise or the like, and it is not necessary to lower the interest. In addition, especially in the check work during development, it can be confirmed as a fluctuation in which a notice appears without specifying the hold number command one by one, and the efficiency of the check work can be expected to be improved. In addition, since there is a tendency for more types of production to be produced when there are few holds, it is also advantageous when checking. Therefore, it is possible to improve the development efficiency of the gaming machine.

(Invention Concept (14-04))
Further, in this embodiment, as described with reference to FIG. 179 and the like, the lottery content of the advance notice effect in the case of non-reach fluctuation is different depending on the number of hold of the start winning memory, and in the case of non-reach change, the lottery of the advance notice effect based on the hold number is different. The content is not changed (the appearance rate of the notice does not change depending on the number of reservations).
The invention concept (14-04) having the above configuration is expressed as follows.
A control device capable of executing the variable display game by the display means based on the start winning prize, and executing the advance notice effect for notifying the result of the variable display game by the display means or an effect means different from the display means. Prepare,
The control device is
When the variation pattern is such that the reach action is not performed, the lottery content of the advance notice effect appearing in the variation display game can be changed according to the number of holds, which is the number of unexecuted start prizes in the variation display game. ,
A gaming machine characterized in that when the reach action is performed in a variable pattern, the lottery content of the advance notice effect appearing in the variable display game is not changed according to the number of reservations.

The background and the like of the invention concept (14-04) having the above configuration will be described below.
A conventional gaming machine, for example, one disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2004-248845, describes that the content of the continuous advance notice effect is changed based on the number of stored start prizes. Regarding the determination of the production pattern, there is no description that it is based on the number of reservations. In addition, although the content of the continuous notice effect is determined based on the number of reservations, it can be said that the notice is not related to the symbol change during the notice because the notice is given over a plurality of changes. In addition, since there is no change in the notice that appears when the normal fluctuation in which the reach does not occur continues, the interest is reduced in the long-time game.
On the other hand, according to the above-mentioned concept of the invention, it is possible to efficiently distribute the product while making it a production distribution form that enhances the interest. Even with the same variable command, the lottery content of the notice that appears during the change can be changed according to the number of holds, so even if the change without reach occurs, the notice that appears will change for a long time. It is possible to maintain the interest in the game of. In other words, when it does not reach the reach, the number of holds is included in the conditions for the variable notice distribution, and even if the same command is used, the type of notice and the appearance ratio can be changed depending on the number of holds, so the appearance probability. Even if a high reach-less fluctuation is continuously selected, the content of the production will change depending on the number of holdings at that time, so it is not necessary to reduce the interest during normal games, which tend to be monotonous. In addition, since the existing parameter, the number of holds, is used to change the lottery content of the notice, the development efficiency is good. Therefore, it is possible to improve the development efficiency of the gaming machine.
Moreover, when reach occurs, the type of notice (heat) that appears during the first half of the fluctuation is directly linked to the type of reach, so for example, by setting the type of fluctuation as the main condition for the notice distribution, an effective notice appears. Can be. In other words, even when reach occurs, if control is performed to increase the appearance rate of the notice in the first half fluctuation according to the number of holds, the effect of the reach effect may be hindered, but hold when there is a reach fluctuation. Since the content of the advance notice lottery is not changed according to the number, such a risk is eliminated. In addition, if the notice is not reached, the reliability will be impaired if an excessive notice is given, but since the lottery contents of the notice are different depending on the number of reservations, it is possible to prevent such a loss of reliability. When there is no reach, you will get bored if there is no change by chance, but since notices are likely to appear according to the number of holds, adjust the number of holds so that such a decline in interest can be prevented. As a condition, it will be possible to achieve both the reliability of the notice and the interest.

(Invention Concept (14-05))
Further, in this embodiment, as described in step D278 of the variation effect setting process (FIG. 112), in the advance notice effect distribution at the start of the variation of the effect control device, the advance notice distribution is once executed, and then the cancellation is confirmed. By performing the processing, it is configured so that the non-overlapping notice effects are not selected.
The invention concept (14-05) having the above configuration is expressed as follows.
A control device capable of executing the variable display game by the display means based on the start winning prize, and executing the advance notice effect for notifying the result of the variable display game by the display means or an effect means different from the display means. Prepare,
When the variable display game is started, the control device once executes the advance notice effect distribution for drawing the presence / absence and mode of the advance notice effect to appear in the variable display game, and then uses the advance notice effect distribution. A gaming machine characterized in that when a plurality of non-duplicate advance notice effects are selected, a cancellation confirmation process for changing the lottery result is performed so that the non-overlapable advance notice effects are not selected.

Details such as the background of the invention concept (14-05) having the above configuration will be described below.
Conventional gaming machines, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2000-84176, describe the content of selecting a plurality of notice displays as a combination, but regarding the point of preventing the selection of non-duplicate notices from each other. Is not disclosed.
On the other hand, according to the above concept of the invention, it is possible to efficiently prevent the non-overlapping notices from being selected. That is, there is a notice that it will be a problem if it appears duplicately in every model. However, if the lottery is performed while checking the conditions one by one, there are a huge number of advance notice combinations, which complicates the process and reduces efficiency. Therefore, in the concept of the present invention, since the cancellation confirmation process is performed after the lottery, it becomes simple and the efficiency is improved. Changes during development can be easily handled. Therefore, it is possible to improve the development efficiency of the gaming machine.

(Invention Concept (14-06))
Further, in this embodiment, steps S562, S568, etc. in the fluctuation pattern setting process (FIG. 38) of the main board (game control device) and steps D271 in the variation effect setting process (FIG. 112) of the sub board (effect control device), As described in D275 and the like, the main board is sorted in the order of the latter half variable type → the first half variable type, and the sub board is sorted in the order of the first half variable type → the second half variable type.
The invention concept (14-06) having the above configuration is expressed as follows.
A game control device that controls the progress of a game, and an effect control device that can control an effect means including a display means based on a command from the game control device to perform an effect including a variable display game in the display means. With and
The game control device is
In response to the start prize, after executing the second half variable type distribution that determines the latter half variable type of the variable display game based on the start prize by lottery, the first half variable type of the variable display game based on the start prize is selected. It is possible to execute the first half variable type distribution determined by lottery, and send a variation command informing the variation pattern including the result of the latter half variable type distribution and the first half variable type distribution to the effect control device.
The effect control device is
When the variation command is received, the effect distribution for determining the effect content of the variation display game corresponding to the variation command is executed by lottery, and the variation display game is executed based on the result of the effect distribution. The game machine is characterized in that the effect distribution is configured to perform distribution related to the first half fluctuating effect and then execute distribution related to the second half fluctuating effect.
Here, the first half variation means from the start of the variation display in the variation display game to before the reach action, and the second half variation means after the reach action of the variation display.

The background and the like of the invention concept (14-06) having the above configuration will be described below.
A conventional gaming machine, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2004-195020, describes the content of determining the fluctuation pattern and the advance notice effect in one step, but particularly discloses the determination order of the first half fluctuation and the second half fluctuation. There is no.
On the other hand, according to the above concept of the invention, the following effects can be realized because the above-described configuration is used.
That is, since the type of reach (variation in the latter half) is determined first in the main substrate, it is easy to stabilize the reliability of the reach itself. In addition, since the reach type has already been determined, it is easy to stabilize the reliability of the suggestion effect by first determining the effect of suggesting the degree of expectation (variation in the first half) up to the reach on the sub-board. By focusing on the points that are important points for the player during the game, it is easy to create a more interesting production balance. Therefore, it is possible to improve the development efficiency of the gaming machine.

(Invention Concept (14-07))
Further, in this embodiment, as described by the example of the advance notice distribution table shown in step D371a and FIG. 182 in the advance notice lottery process (FIG. 115) of the effect control device, there is a certain advance notice in the structure of the advance notice distribution table of the sub-board. In the case of the same distribution specification for the appearance ratio of, one table is reused even if the fluctuation patterns are different. If the stop symbols are different, the same table is provided separately.
The invention concept (14-07) having the above configuration is expressed as follows.
A game control device that controls the progress of a game, and an effect control device that can control an effect means including a display means based on a command from the game control device to perform an effect including a variable display game in the display means. With and
The game control device is
When there is a start prize, it is possible to extract determination information regarding the execution of the variation display game and transmit a variation command informing the variation pattern of the variation display game corresponding to the determination information to the effect control device.
The effect control device is
When the variable command is received, the effect content of the variable display game corresponding to the variable command is determined, but it is possible to draw and appear a notice effect foretelling the result of the variable display game in the effect content. can be,
The advance notice distribution table for the lottery of the advance notice effect is 1 when the distribution contents for the appearance ratio of the advance notice effect are the same even if the variation patterns based on the variation command are different. A gaming machine characterized by sharing two tables.
When the stop symbols of the variable display game are different, it is preferable to provide separate tables even if the distribution specifications are the same.

The background and the like of the invention concept (14-07) having the above configuration will be described below.
A conventional gaming machine, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2004-195020, describes the content of determining the fluctuation pattern and the advance notice effect in one step. Is not specifically disclosed.
On the other hand, according to the above-mentioned invention concept, when the distribution contents are the same, even if the fluctuation patterns are different, one table is reused, so that the memory usage efficiency is good and the development is performed. The work of setting table data at times is also efficient. That is, even if the types of reach are different, there is a high possibility that even if the ratio is changed, the ratio will be the same between the reach that was initially set to the same appearance ratio, so it does not matter much when changing. By reusing it, the huge amount of distribution data can be reduced considerably. Therefore, it is possible to improve the development efficiency of the gaming machine. If the symbols are different, such as per 15R or 2R, the appearance rate of the symbols cannot be changed significantly, so the advance notice distribution table must deal with it. Therefore, even if the ratio is the same, it is possible to easily deal with the change by providing them separately.

(Invention Concept (14-08))
Further, in the structural example of the advance notice distribution table of the sub-board shown in FIGS. 205 and 206, information is used as a parameter of, for example, the column direction (may be the row direction) of the table as a structure including a plurality of advance notice distribution tables. When (for example, mixed information of fluctuation pattern type and stop symbol) can be composed of the same type, distribution data is defined even for the parameter part where the corresponding notice does not appear, and the structure of the above notice distribution table. It is a configuration in which the column size (may be the row size) is common between the two.
The invention concept (14-08) having the above configuration is expressed as follows.
A control device capable of executing the variable display game by the display means based on the start winning prize, and executing the advance notice effect for notifying the result of the variable display game by the display means or an effect means different from the display means. Prepare,
The control device is
The advance notice distribution table used for the lottery of the advance notice effect is stored as a structure formed by arranging a plurality of advance notice distribution tables corresponding to the parameters related to the specifications of the variable display game, and this structure is classified according to the specifications of the advance notice effect. Multiple memorized items corresponding to the information
In these plurality of structures, the distribution data is defined even for the part of the parameter where the corresponding advance notice effect does not appear, so that the table size in the arrangement direction of the advance notice distribution table is unified. A gaming machine characterized by having a configuration.
Here, the parameter is information (for example, fluctuation pattern type and stop symbol) that specifies the position (row number or column number) of the table as a structure composed of a plurality of advance notice distribution tables. Mixed information). When this parameter is determined, one advance notice distribution table is determined. That is, the parameter referred to here is information that identifies any of a plurality of advance notice distribution tables in the above structure.
Further, the arrangement direction of the advance notice distribution tables in the above structure is the direction in which a plurality of advance notice distribution tables are arranged, that is, the direction in which the above parameters change (left-right direction in FIG. 205). Sometimes called "parameter direction".
Further, the above-mentioned structure is provided for each predetermined classification information (for example, advance notice distribution type and effect mode). For example, the table (structure) shown in the upper part of FIG. 205 is formed by arranging all the advance notice distribution tables when the advance notice distribution type is "A5" and the effect mode is the basic mode. The table (structure) shown in the lower row is an array of all the advance notice distribution tables when the advance notice distribution type is "C4" and the effect mode is the basic mode. Although only two structures are shown in FIG. 205, in the case of this embodiment, such a table (structure) is provided for each information (classification information) of the combination of the advance notice distribution type and the effect mode. There are many.
In addition, "no reach", "normal reach", "female reach", etc. shown in FIG. 205 are variable pattern types, and the descriptions such as "off", "2R probability variation", "16R probability variation", etc. are stopped symbols. These information correspond to the above parameters. In the example shown in FIG. 205, a plurality of advance notice distribution tables (in FIG. 205, one advance notice distribution table for one column in the vertical direction) are arranged side by side in the left-right direction to form one. A structure is formed, and the size (in this case, the column size) in the arrangement direction (in this case, the left-right direction) of the notice distribution table of this structure is common among a plurality of different structures. As described above in the description of FIG. 205, in this case, a plurality of distribution data of "0" are defined even in the places where the advance notice effect does not appear in the normal state (the places filled with diagonal lines). The column sizes of different structures are the same.

The background and the like of the invention concept (14-08) having the above configuration will be described below.
In a conventional gaming machine, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-268732, a notice distribution table for a mission effect is described in FIGS. 7 to 9 (selection figures), but there is a reach type in which a notice effect does not appear. The idea of unifying table sizes cannot be read. Furthermore, there is no description that considers the type of hit symbol.
On the other hand, in the above-mentioned invention concept, it is possible to devise the structure of the advance notice distribution table so that the distribution can be performed efficiently while making the effect distribution form that enhances the interest. In other words, since the advance notice distribution at the start of fluctuation must be performed a huge number of times, it can be speeded up by using common data rather than calculating the pointer each time with the minimum necessary data structure. That amount will be used to increase the types of notices. It is possible to flexibly respond to the improvement of performance output, such as changing it so that it appears in places that did not appear at the beginning during development (and vice versa). Therefore, it is possible to improve the development efficiency of the gaming machine.

Explaining the above effect in detail, since the advance notice distribution at the start of fluctuation must be performed many times, it is necessary that there is no data in the place of the fluctuation pattern in which the notice does not appear (no distribution is performed). If the table structure with the minimum amount of data is used and the pointer is calculated each time, the amount of calculation increases and the processing time is squeezed. In the configuration of the above-mentioned invention concept, even if some data capacity is wasted, the pointer can be used in common between different notices, so that it is not necessary to calculate the pointer each time and the processing time can be shortened. That amount can be used to increase the types of notices, which will lead to an improvement in interest. In addition, it is possible to flexibly respond to the improvement of the performance output of the gaming machine, such as changing it so that it appears even in the fluctuation pattern that did not appear at the beginning during development (and vice versa), and it is also possible to improve the development efficiency of the gaming machine. .. In addition, since the data is only defined as 0 in the unused part, it is sufficient to change it to the distribution value, and the table size does not change, so it is necessary to create a pointer calculation process for the changed part. No. To prevent it from appearing, the opposite is true, and the data in the corresponding column may be set to 0, for example.

(Invention Concept (14-09))
Further, in the structural example of the advance notice distribution table of the sub-board shown in FIG. 206, the information (for example, mixed information of the variation pattern type and the stop symbol) as the parameter of the table, for example, in the column direction (may be in the row direction) is the same type. If it can be composed of things, define distribution data (data in which the result with the lowest notice reliability is always selected, for example, "1000" or "-1") for the parameter part where the corresponding notice does not appear. However, the column size (which may be the row size) is common among the structures of the advance notice distribution table.
The invention concept (14-09) having the above configuration is expressed as follows.
A control device capable of executing the variable display game by the display means based on the start winning prize, and executing the advance notice effect for notifying the result of the variable display game by the display means or an effect means different from the display means. Prepare,
The control device is
The advance notice distribution table used for the lottery of the advance notice effect is stored as a structure formed by arranging a plurality of advance notice distribution tables corresponding to the parameters related to the specifications of the variable display game, and this structure is classified according to the specifications of the advance notice effect. Multiple memorized items corresponding to the information
In these plurality of structures, the distribution data is defined even for the part of the parameter where the corresponding advance notice effect does not appear, so that the table size in the arrangement direction of the advance notice distribution table is unified. As a composition,
Further, the gaming machine is characterized in that the distribution data defined in the part of the parameter that does not appear is the data in which the result with the lowest notice reliability is selected.
Here, the "notice reliability" is the reliability (big hit reliability) of whether or not the result of the variable display game is, for example, a big hit.

The background and the like of the invention concept (14-09) having the above configuration will be described below.
In a conventional gaming machine, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-268732, a notice distribution table for a mission effect is described in FIGS. 7 to 9 (selection figures), but there is a reach type in which a notice effect does not appear. The idea of unifying table sizes cannot be read. Furthermore, there is no description that considers the type of hit symbol.
On the other hand, in the above-mentioned invention concept, in addition to being able to exert the same action and effect as the invention concept (14-08), there are the following actions and effects.
That is, since the data is set so that the result with the lowest notice reliability is selected in the distribution part of the notice that does not appear (is not used), even if the unused data is adopted, even if it should be adopted. If the result with the lowest reliability can be obtained, the production of winning confirmation will not be selected, so there will be no trouble in the market. In addition, if all 0s are defined, there is a possibility that data outside the table will be selected (there is a possibility of taking an abnormal value outside the range), but in the case of the concept of the present invention, normal data is surely acquired. Therefore, abnormal operation can be avoided. In other words, the data is not accessed during normal operation, but even if the pointer value changes due to noise etc. and is used, it penetrates out of the table and is accessed (it does not apply because the distribution value is 0, and it is steadily next. (Proceeds to the data of), and there is no worry of runaway due to acquiring abnormal data (less). In addition, since the production of the big hit confirmation is not selected because the reliability is low, the notice of the big hit confirmation does not appear even though it is a fluctuation of the outlier, and it does not cause trouble.

(Invention Concept (14-10))
Further, in this embodiment, as described in the advance notice lottery process (FIG. 115), the algorithm of the advance notice lottery distribution processing on the sub-board is a sequential search (linear search) by subtracting the random number value and the distribution value. For example, as shown in FIG. 205, the size in the parameter direction (for example, the column size) is common among the structures of the advance notice distribution table, but the distribution data value indicating the ratio is further displayed on the advance notice distribution table. Only may be defined, and the distribution data value may be a value based on a percentage (0 is not selected) instead of a threshold value in the random range. That is, in a game machine in which the size in the parameter direction (for example, the column size) is common among the structures of the advance notice distribution table, only the distribution data value indicating the ratio is defined on the advance notice distribution table, and the distribution is described. The data value may be a value based on a percentage (0 is not selected) instead of a threshold value in the random number range, and the distribution processing algorithm may be a binary search by comparing the random value and the distribution value. As in the example, a configuration in which a sequential search (linear search) is performed by subtraction is preferable.
The invention concept (14-10) having the above configuration is expressed as follows.
A control device capable of executing the variable display game by the display means based on the start winning prize, and executing the advance notice effect for notifying the result of the variable display game by the display means or an effect means different from the display means. Prepare,
The control device is
The advance notice distribution table used for the lottery of the advance notice effect is stored as a structure formed by arranging a plurality of advance notice distribution tables corresponding to the parameters related to the specifications of the variable display game, and this structure is classified according to the specifications of the advance notice effect. Multiple memorized items corresponding to the information
In these plurality of structures, the distribution data is defined even for the part of the parameter where the corresponding advance notice effect does not appear, so that the table size in the arrangement direction of the advance notice distribution table is unified. As a composition,
Further, the distribution data defined in the advance notice distribution table is a value based on the percentage indicating the appearance ratio, and the algorithm of the distribution processing by the advance notice distribution table is a sequential search by subtraction. Machine.

The background and the like of the invention concept (14-10) having the above configuration will be described below.
In a conventional gaming machine, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-268732, a notice distribution table for a mission effect is described in FIGS. 7 to 9 (selection figures), but there is a reach type in which a notice effect does not appear. The idea of unifying table sizes cannot be read. Furthermore, there is no description that considers the type of distribution processing algorithm.
On the other hand, according to the above-mentioned invention concept, in addition to being able to exert the same action and effect as the invention concept (14-08), there are the following actions and effects.
That is, by defining a value based on the percentage, the part of the result that is not selected can be clarified, and it becomes easy to prevent mistakes during development. There are many types of notices, but since there are not a huge number of options within one notice group, the data structure can be simplified by using a linear search instead of a binary search. Therefore, it is possible to improve the development efficiency of the gaming machine.

(Invention Concept (14-11))
Further, in this embodiment, as described in steps F34 to F37 of the look-ahead fluctuation system command processing (FIG. 127) of the sub-board, the fluctuation pattern command (variation command) sent from the main board is transmitted to the fluctuation pattern inside the sub-board. The information is converted into information for each type, and at the time of distribution of the advance notice effect, distribution is performed based on the information of the command in the sub after conversion (variation pattern type information) instead of the variation pattern command (step F97, etc.).
The invention concept (14-11) having the above configuration is expressed as follows.
A game control device that controls the progress of a game, and an effect control device that can control an effect means including a display means based on a command from the game control device to perform an effect including a variable display game in the display means. With and
The game control device is
When there is a start prize, it is possible to extract determination information regarding the execution of the variation display game and transmit a variation command informing the variation pattern of the variation display game corresponding to the determination information to the effect control device.
The effect control device is
When the variable command is received, the effect content of the variable display game is determined based on the variable command, but it is possible to draw and appear a notice effect that announces the result of the variable display game in the effect content. With
It has a function of converting the variation command (which may be a look-ahead variation command) received from the game control device into information for each variation pattern type of the variation display game, and the distribution process for the lottery of the advance notice effect is performed. , A gaming machine characterized in that it is performed based on the information of the variation pattern type unit (information of the command after conversion, that is, variation pattern type information) instead of the variation command (command before conversion).
The value of the variable command sent from the game control device (main board) is different for each variable time. The concept of the present invention is not used as it is for the sent fluctuation command when performing advance notice distribution or the like inside the effect control device, but is converted into, for example, a reach type group unit value, and after conversion. Execute the process based on the information in.
Further, the concept of the present invention can be applied to a variation command (variation command that is not look-ahead) when the symbol actually changes, and as described in the look-ahead variation command processing (FIG. 127), the look-ahead It can also be applied to commands (for example, look-ahead variable commands sent at the time of starting prize).

The background and the like of the invention concept (14-11) having the above configuration will be described below.
In a conventional gaming machine, for example, one disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2007-130191, the main board transmits a grouped symbol command, and the sub-board expands and determines the symbol. , The fluctuation pattern command is used as it is. That is, the symbol command transmitted from the main control unit is a grouped grouping effect symbol designation command, and the symbol command used by the display control unit is an effect symbol designation command that directly specifies the symbol. There is a sub-control unit that performs command conversion between the control units, but the variable command is one-to-one and there is no conversion. In other words, the content described for command conversion is only the content of "grouping command-> detailed command" for the symbol command.
On the other hand, in the above concept of the invention, the fluctuation pattern command sent from the main board is converted into the information of the fluctuation pattern type unit inside the sub board, and the configuration is "detailed command-> grouping command". Such an action effect can be realized.

That is, in the above concept of the invention, instead of defining the distribution table on a one-to-one basis with the command, the amount of data can be reduced by corresponding to the type information, and the notification occurrence ratio for the same type of reach can be surely made the same. , It is possible to avoid the fact that the notice ratio is set differently and the information is lost. That is, the amount of data can be reduced by associating the distribution table with the type information instead of defining the distribution table on a one-to-one basis with the command from the game control device. In addition, since the reach is divided according to the type of reach, the rate of occurrence of notices and the type of reach for the same type can be surely the same, and the rate of occurrence of notices does not differ even though the reach is of the same type due to a mistake or the like. Therefore, it is possible to improve the development efficiency of the gaming machine.

In addition, even if it is the same type of reach, it is interesting that the result may be distorted first due to a mistake in the ratio setting (that is, the result of the variable display game can be predicted when a specific notice appears). There is a risk of lowering it, but if the method of the concept of the present invention is used, the distribution will surely be the same among the same types, so there is no need to worry about it. Of course, in hit / miss, probabilistic hit / normal hit, etc., the distribution ratio is different even if the reach is the same. Here, the same type is described as, for example, "normal reach-1 stop", "normal reach + 1 stop", and "gun male reach jackpot 2-6 (total rotation fluctuation advances by 6 frames (designs) on the second lap" and jackpot symbols. (Stop at) ”,“ Gunyu reach jackpot 3-7 ”, etc., which basically refers to patterns with different numbers of feed frames (designs) during reach.
In addition, the "variation pattern type unit" in the above concept of the invention does not have to be completely divided by the reach type. For example, if you want to change the appearance rate and content of the notice between the pattern that hits on the second lap and the pattern that hits on the third lap among the group male reach jackpots, you may treat it as a different type of reach. You can divide the fluctuation pattern type according to what you want to distribute differently. How to divide depends on the developer.

Next, in the above embodiment, there are the following incidental effects.
(1) Regarding the external output of the unique ID, the following operations are performed and have the following effects.
When the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or the system is reset, the unique ID stored in the game microcomputer 101 (for example, stored in the HW parameter ROM) (appropriately referred to as the main unique ID) is read out to operate the game program. It is converted into a serial communication format (or a parallel communication format may be used), relayed by an external information terminal plate 55, and transmitted to an external management device 140 (or a card unit 551 may be included). This makes it possible to send the unique ID stored in the game microcomputer 101 to the game store side.
Further, the unique ID is transferred to the outside (here, the inspection device connection terminal 102 in FIG. 4) in response to a request from the outside. Then, for example, by connecting the inspection device to the inspection device connection terminal 102, the unique ID stored in the game microcomputer 101 is read out by the inspection institution.
On the other hand, the payout unique ID (payout individual identification information) capable of identifying the payout microcomputer 201 of the payout control device 200 is converted into a serial communication format (or a parallel communication format) by the operation of the payout program in the payout control device 200. Then, it is relayed by the external information terminal plate 55 and transmitted to the external management device 140 (or the card unit 551 may be included). This makes it possible to send the payout unique ID stored in the payout microcomputer 201 to the game store side.

In this way, since the unique ID (individual identification information) can be identified as the gaming microcomputer 101 (arithmetic processing unit) and at the same time can be identified for each gaming machine, it is unique as in this embodiment. If the ID is output to the outside (for example, the management device 140) to judge the validity, the game store can manage the individual gaming machines, and the fraudster can control the individual arithmetic processing units. It has the effect of improving security because it has to be tampered with.
Further, as in this embodiment, the game program created for each model and written to the arithmetic processing unit is provided with a function to output this unique ID, so that the output form and output of the unique ID can be changed by changing the game program. Timing improvements and changes can be made inexpensively and quickly.
Further, if the payout control device 200 has a configuration in which the payout unique ID (payout individual identification information) that can identify the payout microcomputer 201 is output to the outside (for example, the management device 140) to determine the validity, the payout control device There is an effect that the security for 200 is improved.

The invention concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
A main board unique identification information output means that outputs main board unique identification information that can individually identify the game control device, and a main board unique identification information output means.
A payout board-specific identification information output means that outputs payout board-specific identification information that can individually identify the payout control device, and a payout board-specific identification information output means.
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.
Here, the game control device 100 constitutes a main board unique identification information output means, and the payout control device 200 constitutes a payout board unique identification information output means.

Next, Example 2 of the present invention will be described.
The second embodiment is a control example in which there are a plurality of special figures (special figure 1 and special figure 2), and one of the special figures 2 is preferentially changed.
FIG. 217 is a diagram showing an example of a scenario configuration and a display screen when the special figure 2 is preferentially changed.
Also in the second embodiment, a scenario table for the variation effect is created by being divided into each of the plurality of display components.
FIG. 217 (a) shows a scenario table, which is divided into the following elements and created.
When the display component is the background, the "background control scenario table" is the official name, but since it is long, it will be abbreviated as "background scenario" for convenience of explanation, and also on the drawing. Abbreviated.
・ Background scenario ・ Left symbol scenario ・ Right symbol scenario ・ Middle symbol scenario ・ Notice character scenario ・ Push button character scenario ・ Special figure 1 hold display scenario ・ Special figure 2 retention display scenario ・ 4th symbol scenario

Further, as in the first embodiment, each of the display components is composed of layers, and these plurality of layers are sequentially stacked from the back side (background layer) to the front side, and the front row is the fourth symbol layer. One display screen is created.
In the second embodiment, a special figure 1 hold display scenario and a special figure 2 hold display scenario are provided corresponding to a plurality of special figures (special figure 1 and special figure 2). The special figure 1 hold and the special figure 2 hold display are treated differently, and the area to be displayed on the display device 41 is determined. Further, the control for preferentially changing the special figure 2 is performed.
Next, FIG. 217 (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen of the effect of the display device 41 when screen control is performed using the scenario table, and this is a diagram showing a plurality of layers from the back side (background layer). One display screen is created by sequentially stacking them toward the front side.
In FIG. 217 (b), 801 is the background, 802 is the left symbol, 803 is the right symbol, 804 is the middle symbol, 805 is the notice character, the push button character is not shown, 807 is the special figure 1 hold display, and 808 is the special figure. 2 Hold display, 809 indicates a fourth symbol, and each display component is displayed on a layer (push button characters are not shown).
In such an effect control, as in the first embodiment, in the second embodiment, when the effect screen is generated, the effect screen is divided into a plurality of layers (scenario layers) corresponding to the display components of the effect screen and set in advance as a table. At this time, corresponding to the plurality of special figures (special figure 1 and special figure 2), the special figure 1 hold display scenario and the special figure 2 retention display scenario are separately set in advance. Next, in the special figure hold display, the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are individually controlled based on the scenarios, and all the scenarios are combined in the layer format to generate a one-screen picture, and the display device 41 Is displayed as an effect screen of, and a variation effect of a symbol (special figure) is performed, but in the second embodiment, control is performed so that the special figure 2 is preferentially changed.

For example, in the example shown in FIG. 217 (b), the symbols "3, 5, 7" are displayed in a variable manner against a white background, and the character representing the star as a warning character crosses the middle symbol "5". As you can see, the effect that appears on the front side of each symbol is performed.
On the other hand, a plurality of special figures on hold are displayed at the lower part of the display screen, and here, the special figure 1 hold display 807 and the special figure 2 hold display 808 are both displayed as four hold states. In the second embodiment, since the special figure 2 changes with priority, the hold is consumed first from the special figure 2 hold display 808.

As described above, in the second embodiment, the special figure 1 hold and the special figure 2 hold display are treated differently, the area to be displayed on the display device 41 is determined, and each special figure is set as a separate scenario (special figure). Since it is controlled by 1 hold display scenario and special figure 2 hold display scenario), it is easy to handle, and the effect of saving data capacity and improving the efficiency of development can be obtained.
That is, when there are a plurality of special figures and one of the special figures is preferentially changed, each special figure is set as a separate scenario, and a hold display divided into four for special figure 1 and special figure 2 is displayed. Since it is performed by the device 41, the priority fluctuation is controlled according to the scenario, and the handling becomes easy. In other words, the scenario management is divided into the special figure 1 hold and the special figure 2 hold according to the function, and the development efficiency is improved as a management method according to the specifications of the special figure fluctuation.

The invention concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
The production control device is
When displaying a plurality of special figure reservations on the display means and controlling to preferentially change one of the special figures, a scenario data setting means for setting scenario data for each hold display of a plurality of special figures, and a scenario data setting means.
Of the preset scenario data, the screen creation means for creating the drawing contents of the special figure hold by giving priority to the scenario data of the special figure whose priority fluctuates, and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.
Here, the PROM (control ROM) 321 constitutes a scenario data setting means, and the VDP 312 constitutes a screen creation means.

Next, Example 3 of the present invention will be described.
The third embodiment is a control example in the case where there are a plurality of special figures (special figure 1 and special figure 2), but none of the special figures is preferentially changed.
FIG. 218 is a diagram showing an example of a scenario configuration and a display screen when none of the plurality of special figures (special figure 1 and special figure 2) is preferentially changed.
In the third embodiment, unlike the second embodiment, even if there are a plurality of special figures (special figures 1 and 2), each reserved drawing is controlled as the same display component (special figure 1 and special figure 2). Is done.
FIG. 218 (a) shows a scenario table, in which one special figure hold display scenario is arranged corresponding to a plurality of special figures (special figure 1 and special figure 2), and other scenarios are implemented. This is the same as in Example 2, and detailed description is omitted.

Further, as in the second embodiment, each of the display components is composed of layers, and these plurality of layers are sequentially stacked from the back side (background layer) to the front side, and the front row is the fourth symbol layer. One display screen is created.
In the third embodiment, even if there are a plurality of special figures (special figure 1 and special figure 2), only one special figure hold display scenario is provided. The special figure 1 hold and the special figure 2 hold display are treated in the same manner, and the area displayed on the display device 41 is common. In addition, all the special figures are configured to perform control that does not change in priority (control to hold and display the starting ports 25 and 26 in the order of winning).
Next, FIG. 218 (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen of the effect of the display device 41 when screen control is performed using the scenario table, and this is a diagram showing a plurality of layers from the back side (background layer). One display screen is created by sequentially stacking them toward the front side.
In FIG. 218 (b), 817 shows a special figure hold display, and the others are the same as in the second embodiment, and each display component is displayed on a layer (the push button character is not shown). There is).

In such an effect control, as in the second embodiment, in the third embodiment, when the effect screen is generated, the effect screen is divided into a plurality of layers (scenario layers) corresponding to the display components of the effect screen and set in advance as a table. At this time, even if there are a plurality of special figures (special figure 1 and special figure 2), one special figure hold display scenario is set in advance. Next, regarding the special figure reservation display, the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are controlled based on one and the same special figure reservation display scenario, and all the scenarios are combined in the layer format to generate a one-screen picture. Then, it is displayed as an effect screen of the display device 41, and a variation effect of the design (special figure) is performed. Further, in the third embodiment, the control does not change the priority of any of the special figures, and the order of displaying the special figures on hold is determined in the order of winning the starting ports 25 and 26.
Therefore, as shown in FIG. 218 (b), in the special figure hold display 817, the special figure 1 hold and the special figure 2 hold are displayed in the order determined in the order of winning the starting ports 25 and 26. .. Here, among the special figure hold display 817, the ◯ mark indicates the special figure 1 and the □ mark indicates the special figure 2.

In this way, even if there are a plurality of special figures (special figures 1 and 2), only one special figure hold display scenario is provided for the special figure hold display, and the start ports 25 and 26 are provided. Since the special figure 1 hold and the special figure 2 hold are displayed in the order of winning the prize, the display form of the special figure hold is different.
Example 3 has the following effects.
When the special figure hold display is performed in the order determined in the order of winning the starting ports 25 and 26 where there is no priority change even when there are a plurality of special figures (special figure 1 and special figure 2), that is, the special figure 1 and the special figure are displayed. In the case of displaying the hold of 8 pieces (maximum number of holds) in which the hold of FIG. 2 is put together, the drawing control of the hold display in which both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are mixed is performed, so that the same scenario layer is used. It has the effect of being easy to handle and control.
That is, it is not necessary to manage the scenario separately for each function, that is, the special figure 1 hold and the special figure 2 hold, and the special figure hold display may be simply performed in the order of starting winning, so that the development efficiency is improved.

The invention concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
The production control device is
When displaying a plurality of special figure reservations on the display means and performing control in which none of the special figures has priority fluctuation, a scenario data setting means for setting the same scenario data for the hold display of a plurality of special figures, and a scenario data setting means.
Based on preset scenario data, screen creation means to create drawing contents of special figure hold in order of starting prize, and screen creation means
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.
Here, the PROM (control ROM) 321 constitutes a scenario data setting means, and the VDP 312 constitutes a screen creation means.

Next, another modification of the present invention will be described.
The present invention may be a modified example as follows.
(1) In the first embodiment, one scenario table is set for the customer waiting demonstration effect, but the present invention is not limited to this.
Setting one scenario table is a form of one integrated control scenario table when the flow of the production is defined like a customer waiting demo production and the production content has little change. This is because the development efficiency is improved and the data capacity can be reduced.
The flow of the production is defined, and other examples of the production content with little change include, for example, a production during a big hit, a RAM clear notification display, a power failure recovery notification display, and the like. For these effects, one integrated control scenario table may be set. By doing so, it has the same effect as the customer waiting demonstration production.
In addition, for example, the user's game history and game machine customization screens have less randomness due to random numbers, so if one integrated control scenario table is set for such customization screens, development efficiency will be improved. Can be increased and the data capacity can be reduced.

(2) When setting the scenario table, it is not necessary to clearly divide whether to make one or multiple. For example, the special figure variation effect and the customer waiting demo effect are not clearly divided into the former, such as multiple scenario tables and the latter, one scenario table, but for example, the special figure variation effect. Among them, it may be configured to define one scenario table and perform the production.
An example of such is the so-called full rotation reach. This is to produce the effect that the special symbol display slowly rotates in ascending order or reverse order while three identical symbols are displayed, and which symbol stops at, while raising the expectation of the player to hit the jackpot. It gives a feeling of excitement. In such a full rotation reach, the flow of the production is regulated, and the production content has little change. Therefore, it may be configured as one integrated control scenario table, which improves the development efficiency and data. The capacity can also be reduced.

(3) The method of dividing the scenario layers is not limited to eight as in the examples shown in FIGS. 207 (a) and 218 (a).
For example, the number of scenario layers may be less than eight or more than eight.
In short, the number of scenario layers may be other than eight as long as the effect of performing independent scenario management for each display element can be obtained when performing various combinations of effects.
(4) The above embodiment of the present invention is an example in which the operation of video, audio, decoration, and accessory is controlled by one effect control board, but the present invention is not limited to this, and is controlled by, for example, a plurality of effect control boards. It may be configured, or a plurality of CPUs may be mounted on the same board for shared control.
By doing so, the processing speed is increased by the amount that the processing load of each CPU is reduced. Moreover, the program size of each CPU can be reduced.

Next, the scope of application of the present invention will be described.
(1) The gaming machine is not limited to the example as in the embodiment as long as it plays a game using a pachinko ball, and can be applied to an enclosed ball type gaming machine.
(2) Further, it is sufficient that the gaming machine is provided with a display device capable of displaying a decorative special drawing, and therefore, it can be widely applied to a general gaming machine provided with a video device such as a liquid crystal display.
(3) The display device may be capable of changing the display contents, and the image may be configured so that the screen contents can be changed by character display, video display, or the like.
(4) The display device is not limited to a display device using a liquid crystal display, and is a member capable of changing and producing display contents such as an organic EL, a cathode ray tube, a dot LED, a 7-segment LED, and a device using a bendable material such as electronic paper. Anything is fine as long as it is.
(5) Further, the present invention is not limited to a gaming machine using a pachinko ball, but is also applied to a so-called pachislot machine (rotating slot machine gaming machine) in which a game is played using coins (or medals). can do.

It should be considered that the embodiments disclosed this time are exemplary in all respects and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is shown not by the above description but by the scope of claims, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the scope of claims.

1 Pachinko machine (game machine)
4 Front frame 5 Glass frame 9 Direction button 20 Game board 25 1st start winning opening 26 2nd starting winning opening 2 (ordinary electric accessory: Fuden) (ordinary variable winning device)
27 Variable winning device (special variable winning device)
32 Normal figure start gate 33 Second variable winning device 35 Collective display device 41 Display device (special figure display device, ordinary symbol variable display device, effect means, display means)
54 Card unit connection board 55 External information terminal board 100 Game control device (main control means, power failure monitoring means, random number updating means, start winning storage means, second start storage means, pre-determination means, priority control means, variation pattern determination means , Variable display game execution control means, determination means, stop time setting means, specific game state generation control means, main board unique identification information output means)
101 Game microcomputer (game arithmetic processing unit)
101A CPU
101B ROM
101C RAM
120 1st start port switch 121 2nd start port switch 122 Gate switch 123 Winning port switch 124 Lower count switch 125 Upper count switch 126 Magnetic sensor 127 Radio sensor 140 Management device 200 Payout control device (subordinate control means, payout board unique identification information) Output means)
201 Microcomputer for payout 211 Glass frame open detection switch 212 Front frame open detection switch 213 Overflow switch 214 Radio wave sensor 215 Payout ball detection switch 216 Shoot ball out switch 300 Production control device (subordinate control means, scenario data setting means, screen creation means, Effect control means, effect button control means, effect content control means, character data storage means, motion table storage means, scenario table storage means, background type selection means, background effect means)
311 Main control microcomputer (1st CPU)
311a RAM (work storage means, character information storage means)
312 VDP
321 PROM (motion table storage means, scenario table storage means)
322 Image ROM (Character data storage means)
500 power supply 551 card unit

Claims (1)

The game can be executed based on the establishment of the start condition, and the control means capable of executing the effect related to the game by the effect means is provided.
The control means
A plurality of structures in which a plurality of lottery tables used for the lottery of the production are arranged corresponding to the parameters related to the specifications of the game are stored.
A plurality of said structure is equal to the size of the array direction of the drawing table by data that is not used for drawing of the effect also to sections of which does not occur the parameter of the effect the corresponding is defined death,
A gaming machine characterized in that data that is not used in the lottery of the effect is defined by a value equal to or less than the number of possible values of the random numbers used in the lottery of the effect.

Images